7SD52 en PDF

Preface i
Table of Contents v
SIPROTEC
Introduction 1
Hardware and Connections 2
Differential Protection
7SD52
Getting Started 3
V4.1
SIPROTEC®4 Devices 4
Manual
Configuration 5
Functions 6
Control During Operation 7
Installation and Commissioning 8
Maintenance and Fault Tracing 9
Technical Data 10
Appendix A
Index
C53000–G1176–C132–2
Liability Statement Copyright
We have checked the text of this manual against the Copyright © Siemens AG 2000; 2002. All rights reserved.
hardware and software described. Exclusions and devi- Dissemination or reproduction of this document, or evaluation and com-
ations cannot be ruled out; we accept no liability for lack munication of its contents, is not authorized except where expressly per-
of total agreement. mitted. Violations are liable for damages. All rights reserved, particularly
The information in this manual is checked periodically, for the purposes of patent application or trademark registration.
and necessary corrections will be included in future edi-
tions. We appreciate any suggested improvements. Registered trademarks
SIPROTEC®, SIMATIC®, SIMATIC NET ®, SINAUT ®, and SICAM®,
We reserve the right to make technical improvements and DIGSI® 4 are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. Other desig-
without notice. Release 4.10.02 nations in this manual may be trademarks that if used by third parties for
their own purposes may violate the rights of the owner.
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Buch-Nr. C53000–G1176–C132–2

Preface
Aim of This Manual This manual describes the functions, operation, installation, and commissioning of the
device. In particularly, you will find:
• General information regarding operation of SIPROTEC® 4 devices → Chapter 4,
• Information regarding configuration of the device → Chapter 5,
• Description of the device functions and setting facilities → Chapter 6,
• Instruction of operation while in service → Chapter 7,
• Instruction for mounting and commissioning → Chapter 8,
• List of the technical data → Chapter 10.
As well as a compilation of the most significant data for experienced users in the Ap-
pendix.
Target Audience Protection engineers, commissioning engineers, persons who are involved in setting,
testing and service of protection, automation, and control devices, as well as operation
personnel in electrical plants and power stations.
Applicability of this This manual is valid for SIPROTEC® 7SD52 differential protection; firmware version
Manual 4.1.
Indication of Conformity
This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities
on the approximation of the laws of the member states relating to electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC Council Directive 89/336/EEC) and concerning electrical equip-
ment for use within specified voltage limits (Low-voltage Directive 73/23/EEC).
This conformity has been proved by tests conducted by Siemens AG in accordance
with Article 10 of the Council Directive in agreement with the generic standards
EN 50081 and EN 50082 (for EMC directive) and the standards EN 60255-6 (for low-
voltage directive).
This product is designed and manufactured for application in industrial environment.
The product conforms with the international standards of IEC 60255 and the German
standards DIN 57435 part 303 (corresponding to VDE 0435 part 303).
ANSI This product has been designed according to ANSI C37.90.* standards.
7SD52 Manual i
C53000–G1176–C132–2
Preface
Additional support Should further information be desired or should particular problems arise which are
not covered sufficiently for the purchaser's purpose, the matter should be referred to
the local Siemens representative.
Training Courses Individual course offerings may be found in our Training Catalogue, or questions may
be directed to our training center. Please contact your Siemens representative.
Instructions and The warnings and notes contained in this manual serve for your own safety and for an
Warnings appropriate lifetime of the device. Please observe them!
The following terms are used:
DANGER
indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage will result
if proper precautions are not taken.
Warning
indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage can result
if proper precautions are not taken.
Caution
indicates that minor personal injury or property damage can result if proper precau-
tions are not taken. This particularly applies to damage on or in the device itself and
consequential damage thereof.
Note
indicates information about the device or respective part of the instruction manual
which is essential to highlight.
Warning!
Hazardous voltages are present in this electrical equipment during operation. Non–
observance of the safety rules can result in severe personal injury or property dam-
age.
Only qualified personnel shall work on and around this equipment after becoming thor-
oughly familiar with all warnings and safety notices of this manual as well as with the
applicable safety regulations.
The successful and safe operation of this device is dependent on proper handling, in-
stallation, operation, and maintenance by qualified personnel under observance of all
warnings and hints contained in this manual.
In particular the general erection and safety regulations (e.g. IEC, DIN, VDE, EN or
other national and international standards) regarding the correct use of hoisting gear
must be observed. Non–observance can result in death, personal injury or substantial
property damage.
QUALIFIED PERSONNEL
For the purpose of this instruction manual and product labels, a qualified person is one
who is familiar with the installation, construction and operation of the equipment and
the hazards involved. In addition, he has the following qualifications:
• Is trained and authorized to energize, de-energize, clear, ground and tag circuits
and equipment in accordance with established safety practices.
ii 7SD52 Manual
C53000–G1176–C132–2
Preface
• Is trained in the proper care and use of protective equipment in accordance with es-
tablished safety practices.
• Is trained in rendering first aid.
Typographic and The following text formats are used when literal information from the device or to the
Symbol Conven- device appear in the text flow:
tions
Parameter names, i.e. designators of configuration or function parameters which
may appear word-for-word in the display of the device or on the screen of a personal
computer (with operation software DIGSI® 4), are marked in bold letters of a mono-
space type style.
Parameter options, i.e. possible settings of text parameters, which may appear
word-for-word in the display of the device or on the screen of a personal computer
(with operation software DIGSI® 4), are written in italic style, additionally.
“Annunciations”, i.e. designators for information, which may be output by the relay
or required from other devices or from the switch gear, are marked in a monospace
type style in quotation marks.
Deviations may be permitted in drawings when the type of designator can be obviously
derived from the illustration.
The following symbols are used in drawings:
Earth fault device-internal logical input signal
Earth fault device-internal logical output signal
UL1–L2 internal input signal of an analogue quantity

FNo 567
>Release external binary input signal with function number Fno
FNo 5432
Dev. Trip external binary output signal with function number Fno
Parameter address
Parameter name
1234 FUNCTION example of a parameter switch designated FUNCTION with the

On
address 1234 and the possible settings On and Off
Off
Parameter options
Besides these, graphical symbols are used according to IEC 60617–12 and
IEC 60617–13 or similar. Some of the most frequently used are listed below:
Input signal of an analogue quantity
≥1 OR gate
7SD52 Manual iii

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Preface
& AND gate
signal inversion
Exclusive–OR gate (antivalence): output is active, if only one

=1
of the inputs is active
Coincidence gate (equivalence): output is active, if both input are

=
active or inactive at the same time
≥1 Dynamic inputs (edge–triggered)

above with positive, below with negative edge
Formation of one analogue output signal from

a number of analogue input signals (example: 3)
2610 Iph>>
Iph> Limit stage with setting address and parameter designator (name)
2611 T Iph>>
T 0
Timer (pickup delay T, example adjustable)
with setting address and parameter designator (name)
0 T
Timer (dropout delay T, example non-adjustable)
T Dynamic triggered pulse timer T (monoflop)
S Q Static memory (RS–flipflop) with setting input (S),

R Q resetting input (R), output (Q) and inverted output (Q)
Furthermore, the graphic symbols according IEC 60617–12 and IEC 60617–13 or
similar are used in most cases.
iv 7SD52 Manual
C53000–G1176–C132–2
Table of Contents
Preface................................................................................................................................................... i
Table of Contents ................................................................................................................................ v
1 Introduction....................................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1 Overall Operation ................................................................................................................ 1-2
1.2 Applications ......................................................................................................................... 1-5
1.3 Features .............................................................................................................................. 1-8
1.4 Scope of Functions.............................................................................................................. 1-9
2 Hardware and Connections ............................................................................................................. 2-1
2.1 Version of 7SD52 for Panel Flush Mounting/Cubicle Mounting .......................................... 2-2
2.1.1 Housing ............................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.1.2 Screw Terminal Connections............................................................................................... 2-6
2.1.3 Connections to Plug-In Terminals ..................................................................................... 2-10
2.1.4 Connections to Optical Communication Interfaces............................................................ 2-14
2.1.5 Connections to Electrical Communication Interfaces ........................................................ 2-16
2.2 Version of 7SD52 for Panel Surface Mounting.................................................................. 2-17

2.2.1 Housing ............................................................................................................................. 2-17
2.2.2 Screw Terminal Connections............................................................................................. 2-20
2.2.3 Connections to Optical Communication Interfaces............................................................ 2-20
2.2.4 Connections to Electrical Communication Interfaces ........................................................ 2-23
3 Getting Started.................................................................................................................................. 3-1
3.1 Unpacking and Re-packing ................................................................................................. 3-2
3.2 Inspections upon Receipt .................................................................................................... 3-3

3.2.1 Inspection of Features and Ratings..................................................................................... 3-3
3.2.2 Electrical Check................................................................................................................... 3-3
7SD52 Manual v
C53000–G1176–C132–2
Table of Contents
3.3 User Interface ...................................................................................................................... 3-4

3.3.1 Operation Using the Operator Control Panel....................................................................... 3-4
3.3.2 Operation Using DIGSI® 4................................................................................................... 3-7
3.4 Storage .............................................................................................................................. 3-12
4 SIPROTEC® 4 Devices....................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1 General ................................................................................................................................ 4-2

4.1.1 Protection and Control ......................................................................................................... 4-2
4.1.2 Communication.................................................................................................................... 4-3
4.1.3 Settings................................................................................................................................ 4-4
4.1.4 Operations ........................................................................................................................... 4-4
4.1.5 Oscillographic Fault Records............................................................................................... 4-4
4.2 Operator Control Facilities ................................................................................................... 4-5

4.2.1 Operator Control Panel On Device ...................................................................................... 4-5
4.2.2 DIGSI® 4 Tool...................................................................................................................... 4-7
4.3 Information Retrieval............................................................................................................ 4-8

4.3.1 Annunciations ...................................................................................................................... 4-9
4.3.2 Measurements ................................................................................................................... 4-11
4.3.3 Oscillographic Fault Records............................................................................................. 4-12
4.4 Control ............................................................................................................................... 4-14
4.5 Manual Overwrite / Tagging............................................................................................... 4-16
4.6 General about the Setting Procedures .............................................................................. 4-17
4.7 Configuration of the Scope of Device Functions................................................................ 4-20
4.8 Configuration of Inputs and Outputs (Configuration Matrix) .............................................. 4-21
4.9 Programmable Logic CFC ................................................................................................. 4-24
4.10 Power System Data ........................................................................................................... 4-26
4.11 Setting Groups................................................................................................................... 4-27
4.12 General Device Settings .................................................................................................... 4-29
4.13 Time Synchronization ........................................................................................................ 4-30
4.14 Serial Interfaces................................................................................................................. 4-31
4.15 Passwords ......................................................................................................................... 4-33
5 Configuration .................................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1 Configuration of the Scope of Functions.............................................................................. 5-2

5.1.1 Setting Overview.................................................................................................................. 5-5
vi 7SD52 Manual
C53000–G1176–C132–2
Table of Contents
5.2 Configuration of Information, Measured Values, and Commands....................................... 5-7

5.2.1 Preparation .......................................................................................................................... 5-7
5.2.2 Structure and Operation of the Configuration Matrix ......................................................... 5-11
5.2.3 Establishing Information Properties................................................................................... 5-15
5.2.4 Performing Configuration................................................................................................... 5-22
5.2.5 Transferring Metered Values ............................................................................................. 5-28
5.2.6 Settings for Contact Chatter Blocking................................................................................ 5-29
5.3 Creating User Defined Functions with CFC....................................................................... 5-31
5.4 Serial Interfaces ................................................................................................................ 5-40
5.5 Date and Time Stamping................................................................................................... 5-44
6 Functions........................................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1 General................................................................................................................................ 6-2

6.1.1 Power System Data 1.......................................................................................................... 6-7
6.1.1.1 Setting Overview ............................................................................................................... 6-12
6.1.2 Setting Groups .................................................................................................................. 6-13
6.1.2.1 Setting Overview .............................................................................................................. 6-15
6.1.2.2 Information Overview ........................................................................................................ 6-15
6.1.3 General Protection Data (Power System Data 2).............................................................. 6-15
6.1.3.1 Setting Overview ............................................................................................................... 6-20
6.1.3.2 Information Overview ........................................................................................................ 6-21
6.2 Differential Protection ........................................................................................................ 6-23

6.2.1 Function Description.......................................................................................................... 6-23
6.2.2 Setting the Function Parameters ....................................................................................... 6-33
6.2.3 Setting Overview ............................................................................................................... 6-35
6.2.4 Information Overview......................................................................................................... 6-36
6.3 Breaker Intertrip and Remote Tripping .............................................................................. 6-38

6.3.3 Setting Overview .............................................................................................................. 6-40
6.3.4 Information Overview ........................................................................................................ 6-41
6.4 Protection Data Interfaces and Differential Protection Topology....................................... 6-42

6.4.4 Information Overview......................................................................................................... 6-52
7SD52 Manual vii

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Table of Contents
6.5 Direct Local Trip................................................................................................................. 6-54

6.5.1 Function Description .......................................................................................................... 6-54
6.6 Direct Remote Trip and Transmission of Binary Information

(optional)............................................................................................................................ 6-56
6.7 Instantaneous High-Current Switch-onto-Fault Protection ................................................ 6-60

6.7.3 Setting Overview................................................................................................................ 6-63
6.8 Time Overcurrent Protection.............................................................................................. 6-64

6.8.3 Setting Overview................................................................................................................ 6-76
6.9 Automatic Reclosure.......................................................................................................... 6-79

6.9.3 Setting Overview.............................................................................................................. 6-102
6.9.4 Information Overview....................................................................................................... 6-104
6.10 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection.................................................................................... 6-108

6.10.1 Method of Operation ........................................................................................................ 6-108
6.10.2 Setting the Function Parameters ..................................................................................... 6-119
6.11 Thermal Overload Protection........................................................................................... 6-125

6.11.1 Function Description ........................................................................................................ 6-125
6.11.4 Information Overview ...................................................................................................... 6-128
viii 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Table of Contents
6.12 Monitoring functions ........................................................................................................ 6-129

6.12.1 Function Description........................................................................................................ 6-129
6.12.1.1 Hardware Monitoring ....................................................................................................... 6-129
6.12.1.2 Software Monitoring......................................................................................................... 6-131
6.12.1.3 Monitoring of External Transformer Circuits .................................................................... 6-131
6.12.1.4 Trip Circuit Supervision ................................................................................................... 6-133
6.12.1.5 Fault Reactions ............................................................................................................... 6-136
6.12.1.6 Group Alarms .................................................................................................................. 6-137
6.12.3 Setting Overview ............................................................................................................. 6-139
6.13 Function Control .............................................................................................................. 6-142

6.13.1 Switch-in Recognition ...................................................................................................... 6-142
6.13.2 Processing of the Circuit Breaker Position ...................................................................... 6-143
6.13.3 Fault Detection Logic of the Entire Device ...................................................................... 6-146
6.13.4 Tripping Logic of the Entire Device.................................................................................. 6-147
6.13.5 Circuit Breaker Test......................................................................................................... 6-152
6.13.6 Setting the function parameters....................................................................................... 6-153
6.14 Commissioning Tools ...................................................................................................... 6-155

6.14.1 Function Description........................................................................................................ 6-155
6.14.2 Setting Parameters.......................................................................................................... 6-155
6.14.3 Setting Overview ............................................................................................................ 6-156
6.15 Ancillary Functions .......................................................................................................... 6-157

6.15.1 Processing of Messages ................................................................................................. 6-157
6.15.2 Measurement during Operation....................................................................................... 6-158
6.15.3 Fault Recording ............................................................................................................... 6-161
6.16 Processing of Commands ............................................................................................... 6-168

6.16.1 Types of Commands ....................................................................................................... 6-168
6.16.2 Steps in the Command Sequence................................................................................... 6-169
6.16.3 Interlocking ...................................................................................................................... 6-170
6.16.3.1 Interlocked/Non-Interlocked Switching ............................................................................ 6-170
6.16.4 Recording and Acknowledgement of Commands ........................................................... 6-173
6.16.5 Information Overview ...................................................................................................... 6-174
7SD52 Manual ix
C53000–G1176–C132–2
Table of Contents
7 Control During Operation................................................................................................................. 7-1
7.1 Read-out of Information ....................................................................................................... 7-2

7.1.1 Messages ............................................................................................................................ 7-2
7.1.1.1 Output of Messages............................................................................................................. 7-2
7.1.1.2 Event Log (Operating Messages) ........................................................................................ 7-5
7.1.1.3 Trip Log (Fault Messages)................................................................................................... 7-7
7.1.1.4 Saving and Erasing the Messages ...................................................................................... 7-9
7.1.1.5 General Interrogation......................................................................................................... 7-10
7.1.1.6 Spontaneous Messages .................................................................................................... 7-11
7.1.2 Switching Statistics ............................................................................................................ 7-11
7.1.2.1 Viewing the Switching Statistics ........................................................................................ 7-12
7.1.2.2 Resetting and Setting the Switching Statistics................................................................... 7-13
7.1.3 Measured Values............................................................................................................... 7-14
7.1.3.1 Measured Values............................................................................................................... 7-14
7.1.3.2 Illustrating Measured Values ............................................................................................. 7-19
7.1.3.3 Setting and Retrieval of User Defined Set-points .............................................................. 7-22
7.1.3.4 Retrieval and Resetting of User Defined Pulse Metered Values (PMV) ............................ 7-24
7.1.4 Fault Records .................................................................................................................... 7-25
7.1.4.1 Viewing Fault Records....................................................................................................... 7-25
7.1.4.2 Saving the Fault Records .................................................................................................. 7-27
7.2 Control of Device Functions............................................................................................... 7-28

7.2.1 Read and Set Date and Time ............................................................................................ 7-28
7.2.2 Changeover of Setting Groups .......................................................................................... 7-32
7.2.3 Test Messages to the System (SCADA) Interface during Test Operation......................... 7-35
7.2.4 Changeover of Operating Mode ........................................................................................ 7-37
7.3 Circuit Breaker Test Function ............................................................................................ 7-40
7.4 Control of Switchgear ........................................................................................................ 7-44

7.4.1 Display Equipment Position and Control ........................................................................... 7-45
7.4.2 Manual Overwriting............................................................................................................ 7-48
7.4.3 Set Status .......................................................................................................................... 7-49
7.4.4 Interlocking ........................................................................................................................ 7-51
7.4.5 Tagging.............................................................................................................................. 7-52
7.4.6 Switching Authority ............................................................................................................ 7-53
7.4.7 Switching Mode ................................................................................................................. 7-54
7.4.8 Control Messages.............................................................................................................. 7-55
7.4.9 Other Commands .............................................................................................................. 7-55
x 7SD52 Manual
C53000–G1176–C132–2
Table of Contents
8 Installation and Commissioning ..................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1 Mounting and Connections.................................................................................................. 8-2

8.1.1 Installation ........................................................................................................................... 8-2
8.1.2 Termination variants ............................................................................................................ 8-6
8.1.3 Hardware Modifications ..................................................................................................... 8-10
8.1.3.1 General.............................................................................................................................. 8-10
8.1.3.2 Disassembling the Device ................................................................................................. 8-11
8.1.3.3 Jumper Settings on Printed Circuit Boards........................................................................ 8-14
8.1.3.4 Interface Modules .............................................................................................................. 8-20
8.1.3.5 To Reassemble the Device ............................................................................................... 8-23
8.2 Checking the Connections................................................................................................. 8-24

8.2.1 Data Connections .............................................................................................................. 8-24
8.2.2 Checking the Differential Protection Communication ........................................................ 8-26
8.2.3 Checking Power Plant Connections .................................................................................. 8-27
8.3 Commissioning .................................................................................................................. 8-29

8.3.1 Testing Mode and Transmission Blocking......................................................................... 8-30
8.3.2 Checking Time Synchronization ........................................................................................ 8-30
8.3.3 Checking the System (SCADA) Interface.......................................................................... 8-30
8.3.4 Checking the Binary Inputs and Outputs ........................................................................... 8-32
8.3.5 Checking the Communication Topology............................................................................ 8-35
8.3.6 Checking for Breaker Failure Protection............................................................................ 8-41
8.3.7 Checking the Instrument Transformer Connections of One Line End ............................... 8-43
8.3.8 Checking the Instrument Transformer Connections of Two Line Ends ............................. 8-45
8.3.9 Checking the Instrument Transformer Connections for More than Two Ends................... 8-52
8.3.10 Remote Tripping, Remote Signalling etc. .......................................................................... 8-52
8.3.11 Testing User Defined Functions ........................................................................................ 8-53
8.3.12 Trip and Close Test with the Circuit Breaker ..................................................................... 8-53
8.3.13 Stability Check and Triggering Oscillographic Recordings................................................ 8-54
8.4 Final Preparation of the Device ......................................................................................... 8-55
9 Maintenance and Fault Tracing ....................................................................................................... 9-1
9.1 General................................................................................................................................ 9-2
9.2 Routine Checks ................................................................................................................... 9-3
9.3 Maintenance ........................................................................................................................ 9-5

9.3.1 Replacing the Buffer Battery................................................................................................ 9-5
9.3.2 Replacing Interface Modules ............................................................................................... 9-7
9.4 Fault Tracing ....................................................................................................................... 9-8
9.5 Corrective Action/Repairs ................................................................................................. 9-10

9.5.1 Software Procedures ......................................................................................................... 9-10
9.5.2 Hardware Procedures........................................................................................................ 9-10
7SD52 Manual xi
C53000–G1176–C132–2
Table of Contents
9.6 Return ................................................................................................................................ 9-14
10 Technical Data................................................................................................................................. 10-1
10.1 General Device Data ......................................................................................................... 10-2

10.1.1 Analog Inputs and Outputs ................................................................................................ 10-2
10.1.2 Power Supply..................................................................................................................... 10-2
10.1.3 Binary Inputs and Outputs ................................................................................................. 10-3
10.1.4 Communications Interfaces ............................................................................................... 10-4
10.1.5 Electrical Tests .................................................................................................................. 10-7
10.1.6 Mechanical Stress Tests.................................................................................................... 10-8
10.1.7 Climatic Stress Tests ......................................................................................................... 10-9
10.1.8 Service Conditions........................................................................................................... 10-10
10.1.9 Construction..................................................................................................................... 10-10
10.2 Differential Protection ...................................................................................................... 10-11
10.3 Intertripping, External Direct Local and Remote Tripping ................................................ 10-13
10.4 Transmission of Binary Information (optional) ................................................................. 10-14
10.5 Protection Data Interface and Differential Protection Topology....................................... 10-15
10.6 Time Overcurrent Protection (optional)............................................................................ 10-16
10.7 Instantaneous High-Current Switch-onto-Fault Protection .............................................. 10-21
10.8 Automatic Reclosure Function (optional)......................................................................... 10-21
10.9 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection (optional).................................................................... 10-22
10.10 Thermal Overload Protection........................................................................................... 10-23
10.11 Monitoring Functions ....................................................................................................... 10-25
10.12 Supplementary Functions ................................................................................................ 10-26
10.13 Dimensions ...................................................................................................................... 10-28
A Appendix........................................................................................................................................... A-1
A.1 Ordering Information and Accessories ...............................................................................A-2

A.1.1 Accessories .........................................................................................................................A-4
A.2 General Diagrams................................................................................................................A-6

A.2.1 Panel Flush Mounting or Cubicle Mounting .........................................................................A-6
A.2.2 Panel Surface Mounting ....................................................................................................A-11
A.3 Connection Examples........................................................................................................A-20
A.4 Preset Configurations ........................................................................................................A-24
A.5 Protocol Dependent Functions ..........................................................................................A-28
xii 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Table of Contents
A.6 List of Settings ...................................................................................................................A-29
A.7 List of Information ..............................................................................................................A-41
A.8 Measured Values ..............................................................................................................A-63
Index ............................................................................................................................................Index-i
7SD52 Manual xiii

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Table of Contents
xiv 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Introduction 1
The SIPROTEC® 4 devices 7SD52 are introduced in this chapter. An overview of the
devices is presented in their application, features, and scope of functions.
1.1 Overall Operation 1-2

1.2 Applications 1-5
1.3 Features 1-8
1.4 Scope of Functions 1-9
7SD52 Manual 1-1

C53000–G1176–C132–2
1 Introduction
1.1 Overall Operation
The numerical differential protection SIPROTEC® 7SD52 is equipped with a powerful

32 Bit microprocessor. This provides fully numerical processing of all functions in the
device, from the acquisition of the measured values up to the output of commands to
the circuit breakers as well as the exchange of measured data with the other ends of
the protected area. Figure 1-1 shows the basic structure of the device.
MI IA AD µC OA
IL1 ∩ ERROR
RUN
IL2
IL3 Output Relays

user-
programmable
I4
UL1 LEDs
on the front
panel, user-
UL2 programmable
UL3
Display on
# the Front Panel
U4
µC
Front Serial Oper- to
ating Interface PC
7 8 9 Time radio
Operator 4 5 6 Synchronization clock
control panel
1 2 3
ESC ENTER . 0 +/- Serial PC/
Service Interface modem
Serial System to
Binary inputs, programmable Interface SCADA
Protection Data remote

Interface 1 end
PS
Protection Data remote
Uaux Power supply Interface 1 end
Figure 1-1 Hardware structure of the numerical device 7SD52
1-2 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
1.1 Overall Operation
Analog Inputs The measuring inputs “MI” transform the currents and voltages derived from the instru-
ment transformers and match them to the internal signal levels for processing in the
device. The device has 4 current and 4 voltage inputs. Three current inputs are pro-
vided for measurement of the phase currents, a further measuring input (I4) may be
used for the residual current (current transformer starpoint or a separate earth current
transformer). A voltage measuring input is provided for each phase-earth voltage. In
principle, the differential protection does not require measured voltages. However,
voltages that allow to measure voltages and powers and voltages that enable the user
to measure the line voltage also for automatic reclosure can be switched to the device.
A further voltage input (U4) may optionally be used to measure the displacement volt-
age (e–n–voltage). The analog signals are then routed to the input amplifier group
“IA”.
The input amplifier group “IA” ensures that there is high impedance termination for the
measured signals and contains filters which are optimized in terms of band-width and
speed with regard to the signal processing.
The analog/digital converter group “AD” has a multiplexer, analog/digital converters
and memory modules for the data transfer to the microcomputer system “µC”.
Microcomputer Apart from processing the measured values, the microcomputer system also executes
System the actual protection and control functions. In particular, the following are included:
− Filtering and conditioning of the measured signals,
− Continuous supervision of the measured signals,
− Supervision of pickup conditions of each protection function,
− Formation of the local differential protection values (phasor analysis and charge
computation) and creation of the transmission protocol,
− Decoding of the received transmission protocol, synchronism of differential protec-
tion values and summing up of the differential currents and charges,
− Monitoring of the communication with the other devices part of the differential pro-
tection system,
− Interrogation of threshold values and time sequences,
− Processing of signals for the logic functions,
− Reaching trip and close command decisions,
− Storage of fault messages, fault annunciations as well as fault recording data for
system fault analysis,
− Operating system and related function management such as e.g. data storage, real
time clock, communication, interfaces etc.,
The information is provided via output amplifier “OA”.
Binary Inputs and The microcomputer system obtains external information through binary inputs such as
Outputs remote resetting or blocking commands for protective elements. The “µC” issues in-
formation to external equipment via the output contacts. These outputs include, in par-
ticular, trip commands to circuit breakers and signals for remote annunciation of im-
portant events and conditions.
7SD52 Manual 1-3

C53000–G1176–C132–2
1 Introduction
Front Elements Light-emitting diodes (LEDs) and a display screen (LCD) on the front panel provide
information such as targets, measured values, messages related to events or faults,
status, and functional status of the 7SD52.
Integrated control and numeric keys in conjunction with the LCD facilitate local inter-
action with the 7SD52. All information of the device can be accessed using the inte-
grated control and numeric keys. The information includes protective and control set-
tings, operating and fault messages, and measured values (see also Chapter 7). The
settings can be modified as are discussed in Chapter 6.
If the device incorporates switchgear control functions, the control of circuit breakers
and other equipment is possible from the 7SD52 front panel.
Serial Interfaces A serial operating interface on the front panel is provided for local communications
with the 7SD52 through a personal computer. Convenient operation of all functions of
the device is possible using the SIPROTEC® 4 operating program DIGSI® 4.
A separate serial service interface is provided for remote communications via a mo-
dem, or local communications via a substation master computer that is permanently
connected to the 7SD52. DIGSI® 4 is required.
All 7SD52 data can be transferred to a central master or main control system through
the serial system (SCADA) interface. Various protocols and physical arrangements
are available for this interface to suit the particular application.
Another interface is provided for the time synchronization of the internal clock via ex-
ternal synchronization sources.
Via additional interface modules further communication protocols may be created.
The operating and service interface allow the communication from one PC with the
devices at all ends of the protected object during commissioning, checking and also
during operation of the device, using a standard browser. There is a range of PC-tools
supporting this function (e.g. “IBS-tool”) which have been optimized with regard to the
differential protection system.
Protection Data The protection data interfaces are a particular case. Depending on the version there
Interface are one or two protection data interfaces. Via these interfaces the measured value
data of each end of the protected object is transmitted to the other ends; during this
procedure measured values from the other ends may also be added. Further informa-
tion such as closing the local circuit breaker, pickup of the inrush restraint as well as
other external trip commands couples via binary inputs or binary information can be
transmitted to other ends via the protection data interfaces.
Power Supply The 7SD52 can be supplied with any of the common power supply voltages. Transient
dips of the supply voltage which may occur during short-circuit in the power supply
system, are bridged by a capacitor (see Technical Data, Subsection 10.1.2).
1-4 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
1.2 Applications
1.2 Applications
The numerical differential protection SIPROTEC® 7SD52 functions as a selective

short-circuit protection for overhead lines and cables with single- and multi-ended in-
feeds in radial, ring or any type of meshed systems of any transmission level. Dealing
with the system star-point is irrelevant, as measuring data are compared separately
for each phase.
High sensitivity and the inrush current restraint allow for the application of the 7SD52
even when there is a power transformer within the protected range (ordering option)
whose star point(s) might also be isolated, earthed or provided with a Petersen coil
(option).
A major advantage of the differential protection function is the instantaneous tripping
in the event of a short circuit at any point in the entire protected zone. The current
transformers limit the protected zone at the ends towards the line. This rigid limit is the
reason why the differential protection scheme shows such an ideal selectivity.
The differential protection system requires a 7SD522 or 7SD523 device as well as a
set of current transformers at either end of the protected zone. Voltage transformers
are not required, they can, however, be connected for the purpose of detecting and
indicating measured values (voltages, power, power factor).
The devices located at the ends of the protected zone exchange measuring informa-
tion via protection data interfaces using dedicated communication links (usually fibre
optic cables) or a communication network. Two type 7SD522 devices can be used for
an object with two ends to be protected: cables, overhead line or both, with or without
unit-connected power transformer (option). Employing type 7SD523, objects having 3
(three-end lines, teed lines) or more ends can be protected, also using unit-connected
transformers (option) or not. Up to 6 ends can be protected, that means that smaller
busbar arrangements can also be protected. For each end a 7SD523 is used.
A fault-free data transfer being the prerequisite for the proper operation of the protec-
tive system, it is continuously monitored internally.
Protective Recognition of short circuits in the protection zone — even of weak-current or high-
Functions resistive shorting — is the basic function of the device. Also complex multiphase faults
are precisely detected, as the measured values are evaluated phase segregated. The
protection system is stabilized against inrush currents of power transformers. When
switching onto a fault on the entire line, an undelayed trip signal can be emitted.
With more than two devices (= ends of the protected object) the communication can
be built up as a ring. This enables a redundant operation in case one communication
line fails. The devices will automatically find the remaining healthy communication
lines. But even with two ends, communication lines can be doubled to create redun-
dancies (with 7SD523). In the event of a communication failure, if there is no possible
reserve, the devices can automatically be switched to emergency operation using an
integrated time overcurrent protection (ordering option) until communication is re-
stored again. This time overcurrent protection has three definite-time overcurrent stag-
es and one inverse-time (IDMT) stage; a series of characteristics according to various
standards is available for the inverse-time stage. Alternatively, the time overcurrent
protection can be used as a backup time overcurrent protection, i.e. it operates inde-
pendent of and parallel to the differential protection at either end.
7SD52 Manual 1-5

C53000–G1176–C132–2
1 Introduction
The communication link can be used for transmitting further information. Apart from
measured values, binary commands or other information can be transmitted (option).
Depending on the version ordered, the short-circuit protection may also trip single-
pole. It may work in co-operation with an integrated automatic reclosure (available as
an option) with which single-pole, three-pole or single- and three-pole rapid automatic
reclosure as well as multi-shot automatic reclosure are possible on overhead lines. It
is possible to connect an external auto-reclosure device as well as double protection
with one or two automatic reclosure functions.
Apart from the short-circuit protection functions mentioned, a thermal overload protec-
tion has been integrated which protects in particular cables and power transformers
from undue heating through overload. An optional circuit breaker failure protection
provides rapid backup fault clearance instruction to the adjacent circuit breakers in
case the local breaker fails to respond.
Messages and A series of operating messages provides information about conditions in the power
Measured Values; system and the 7SD52 itself. Measurement quantities and values that are calculated
Storage of Data for can be displayed locally and communicated via the serial interfaces.
Fault Recordings
Messages of the 7SD52 can be indicated by a number of programmable LEDs on the
front panel, externally processed through programmable output contacts, and commu-
nicated via the serial interfaces (see “Communication” below). With the help of the
CFC graphic tool (Continous Function Chart), user-defined annunciations and logical
combinations of internal or external signals can also be generated.
During a system fault important events and status changes are saved in fault event
records. The instantaneous quantities of the fault values are also recorded in the de-
vices themselves, synchronized in the devices and are then available for fault analy-
sis.
Communication Serial interfaces are available for communications with PCs, RTUs and SCADA sys-
tems.
A 9-pin D-subminiature female connector on the front panel is used for local commu-
nications with a personal computer. DIGSI® 4 software is required to communicate via
this port. Using the DIGSI® 4 software, settings and configuration can be made to the
relay, Real-time operating quantities can be viewed, Waveform capture and Event Log
records can be displayed, and controls can be issued.
A DIGSI® 4 service interface port, a system (SCADA) port and a time-sync port (IRIG-
B or DCF77) are optionally available on the rear of the device.
A service interface can be supplied as RS-232, RS-485, or multimode fibre optics type
ST. DIGSI® 4 software is required to communicate via this port.
A system interface can be supplied as RS-232, RS-485, or multimode fibre optics type
ST for communications between the 7SD52 and a PCs, RTUs or SCADA systems
Standard Protocols, IEC 60870-5-103 are available via the system port. Integration of
the devices into the automation systems SINAUT® LSA and SICAM® also take place
with this profile.
Alternatively, the device can be interrogated remotely or locally by means of a stand-
ard browser.
1-6 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
1.2 Applications
A further port provides the communication between the devices at the ends of the pro-
tected object. This protection data interface has been mentioned above with the “Pro-
tective Functions”.
7SD52 Manual 1-7

C53000–G1176–C132–2
1 Introduction
1.3 Features
• Powerful 32-bit microprocessor system.

• Complete digital processing of measured values and control, from the sampling of
the analog input values, the processing and organization of the communication be-
tween devices up to the closing and tripping commands to the circuit breakers.
• Complete galvanic and reliable separation between the internal processing circuits
of the 7SD52 and the external measurement, control, and DC supply circuits be-
cause of the design of the analog input transducers, binary inputs and outputs, and
the DC/DC or AC/DC converters.
• Differential protection system for up to 6 ends.
• Digital transmission of protection data.
• Permanent supervision of the protection data transmission concerning disturbance,
failure, and transfer time deviation in the transmission network, with automatic
transfer time correction.
• Protection data synchronization via GPS receiver possible, resulting in automatic
correction of transmission time differences.
• Independent of the method of system starpoint earthing.
• Suited for transformers in the protected area (order option).
• Detection of high-resistant, current-weak faults due to high sensitivity.
• Additional functions can be ordered according to requirements.
• Continuous calculation and display of measured quantities on the front of the de-
vice. Indication of measured quantities of the remote line end(s).
• Integrated help tools for operation and commissioning can be visualized by means
of a standard browser.
• Simple device operation using the integrated operator panel or by means of a con-
nected personal computer running DIGSI® 4.
• Storage of operational data, fault data, and oscillographic fault records with SER in-
formation to be used for analysis and troubleshooting.
• Communication with central control and data storage equipment via serial interfac-
es through the choice of data cable, modem, or optical fibres, as an option.
• Continuous monitoring of the measurement quantities, as well as self-diagnostics
covering the hardware and software.
1-8 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
1.4 Scope of Functions
The numerical differential protection relay SIPROTEC® 7SD52 has the following func-
tions:
Differential Protec- • protection for all types of short-circuits in systems with any starpoint conditioning;
tion
• reliable distinction between load and short-circuit conditions, also on high-resistant,
current-weak faults;
• high sensitivity during of a weak load condition, extreme stability against load jumps
and power swings;
• due to phase segregated measurement the pickup sensitivity is independent of the
type of fault;
• insensitive measurement against in-rush and charge currents — also for transform-
ers in the protected area — and against higher-frequency switching transients;
• high stability also for different current transformer saturation;
• adaptive stabilization that is automatically derived from the measured values and
the configured current transformer data;
• low dependence on frequency due to frequency tracking;
• communication between devices via dedicated communication connections (in
general optical fibre) or a communication system;
• communication possible via ISDN-networks or two-wire telephone connections (up
to approx 8 km or 4.8 miles);
• fast phase segregated tripping also on weak or zero infeed ends;
• steady monitoring of the communication ways and the signal propagation delay with
automatic re-adjustment;
• automatic changeover of communication ways in case of transmission failure or
transmission disturbance is provided (for ring topology with 7SD523);
• phase segregated tripping (in conjunction with single-pole or single- and three-pole
auto-reclosure) is possible (order option).
External Direct and • tripping of the local end by an external device via binary input;
Remote Tripping
• tripping of the remote ends by internal protection functions or an external device via
binary input.
Transmission of • transmission of measured values from all ends of the protected object;
Information
• transmission of up to 4 fast commands to all remote ends;
(optional)
• transmission of up to 24 additional binary signals to all remote ends.
Time Delayed Over- • selectable as emergency function for communication failure or as back-up function
current Protection or as both;
(optional)
• up to a maximum of three definite time stages (DT) and one inverse time stage
(IDMT), each for phase currents and residual current;
7SD52 Manual 1-9

C53000–G1176–C132–2
1 Introduction
• for IDMT protection a selection from various characteristics based on several stand-
ards is possible;
• blocking options e.g. for reverse interlocking with any stage;
• non-delayed tripping with any stage when switching on to a fault is possible.
Instantaneous • fast tripping for all faults on total line length;

High-Current
• selectable for manual closure or following each closure of the circuit breaker;
Switch-onto-Fault
Protection • with integrated line energization detection.
Automatic • for reclosure after single-pole, three-pole or single and three-pole tripping;
Reclosure
• single or multiple shot reclosure (up to 8 reclosure attempts);
(optional)
• with separate action times for every reclosure attempt, optionally without action
times;
• with separate dead times after single-pole and three-pole tripping, separate for the
first four reclosure attempts;
• with the option of an adaptive dead time: in this case only one device controls the
automatic reclosure cycles while at the other end(s) the automatic reclosure solely
depends on the one controlling device; the following criteria may apply: voltage re-
turn recognition and/or close command transmission (“Remote close”);
• automatic reclosure controlled optionally by protection start with separate dead
times after single, two and three-pole starting.
Circuit Breaker • with independent current detectors for monitoring of current flow through each indi-
Failure Protection vidual circuit breaker pole;
(optional)
• with independent delay timers for single-pole trip and three-pole trip;
• initiation by each of the internal trip functions;
• initiation by external trip functions possible via binary inputs;
• single-stage or two-stage delay;
• short reset and overshoot times;
• end fault protection and pole discrepancy supervision possible.
Thermal Overload • provides thermal replica of the current heat losses of the protected object;
Protection
• true r.m.s. measurement of all three conductor currents;
• adjustable thermal and current-dependent warning stages.
User Defined Logic • freely programmable linkage between internal and external signals for the imple-
Functions mentation of user defined logic functions;
• all common logic functions;
• time delays and measured value set point interrogation.
1-10 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Commissioning; • indication of the local and remote measured values, amplitudes and phase relation;
Operation
• indication of the calculated differential and restraint currents;
• indication of the characteristic values of the communication link, as transfer delay
times and availability.
Monitoring • monitoring of the internal measuring circuits, the auxiliary voltage supply, as well as
Functions the hard- and software, resulting in increased reliability;
• monitoring of the current and voltage transformer secondary circuits by means of
summation and symmetry checks;
• monitoring of communication with statistics showing the availability of transmission
telegrams;
• check of the consistency of protection settings at all line ends: no processor system
start-up with inconsistent settings which could lead to a malfunction of the differen-
tial protection system;
• trip circuit supervision is possible;
• check of local and remote measured values and comparison of both;
• broken wire supervision for the secondary CT circuits with fast phase segregated
blocking of the differential protection system in order to avoid malfunction.
Further Functions • battery buffered real time clock, which may be sychronized via a synchronization
signal (e.g. DCF77, IRIG B or GPS via satellite receiver), binary input or system in-
terface;
• automatic time synchronization between the devices at the ends of the protected
object via the protection data transmission;
• fault event memory for the last 8 network faults (faults in the power system), with
real time stamps (ms-resolution);
• fault recording memory and data transfer for analog and user configurable binary
signal traces with a maximum time range of 15 s, synchronized between the devic-
es of the differential protection system;
• switching statistics: counter with the trip and close commands issued by the device,
as well as record of the fault current and accumulation of the interrupted fault cur-
rents;
• commissioning aids such as connection and direction checks as well as interface
check and circuit breaker test functions;
• the “IBS-tool” (installed on a PC or a laptop) widely supports the testing and com-
missioning procedure: the communication topology of the differential protection and
communication system, phasor diagrams of all currents and (if applicable) voltages
at all ends of the differential protection system are displayed as a graph.
7SD52 Manual 1-11

C53000–G1176–C132–2
1 Introduction
1-12 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Hardware and Connections 2
This chapter describes the construction and connection of the 7SD52. The different
housing versions and available termination techniques are described.
The recommended and permitted data for the wiring is stated and suitable accessories
and tools are given.
2.1 Version of 7SD52 for Panel Flush Mounting/Cubicle Mounting 2-2

2.2 Version of 7SD52 for Panel Surface Mounting 2-17
7SD52 Manual 2-1

C53000–G1176–C132–2
2 Hardware and Connections
2.1 Version of 7SD52 for Panel Flush Mounting/Cubicle Mounting
The numerical differential protection SIPROTEC® 7SD52 for panel and cubicle flush
mounting is enclosed in a 7XP20 housing. Two housing sizes are available:
1/ and 1/ (of 19 inch). It can be used for rack mounting either.
2 1
Each device version offers different ways of connection.
2.1.1 Housing
The housing consists of a rectangular tube with a rear plate specific to the device ver-
sion and a front cover. Guide rail mats are mounted at the top and bottom on the inside
of the tube, to guide the modules during insertion. A visible number designates the
mounting position of the modules. The connection between the modules and to the
front cover is by means of flat ribbon cables and the corresponding plug connectors.
The rear plate screwed to the tube contains the required connectors for the external
connections to the device.
The front cover can be detached after removal of the covering caps located on the 4
corners of the front cover and the 4 screws that are then revealed. Housing size 1/1
has 2 additional screw covers located at the centre of the top and bottom of the front
cover frame; accordingly 6 screws must be removed in this case. The front cover has
a membrane keypad containing the control and indication elements required for the
user interface with the device. All terminations to the control and indication elements
are combined by a converter module within the front cover, and routed to the proces-
sor module (CPU) via a plug connector.
The name plate containing the principal data of the device, such as auxiliary supply
voltage, the rated test voltage and the ordering code (MLFB) is located on the external
top of the housing and on the inside of the front cover.
The mechanical dimension drawings can be found in Section 10.13.
2-2 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Front View
11) 11)
(Housing Size 1/2) SIEMENS SIPROTEC
10) RUN ERROR 7SD52
MAIN MENU 01/04
Annunciation 1
1)
Measurement 2
9) 2)
MENU
3)
8) ENTER
4)
LED ESC
Annunciation F1 7 8 9
Measuring
7) F2 4 5 6
5)
F3 1 2 3
F4 0 +/-
6)
11) 11)
1/
Figure 2-1 Front view of a 7SD52, housing size 2, for panel flush mounting or cubicle
installation
Referring to the operating and display elements in Figure 2-1:

1. Display (LCD)
The LCD shows process and device information as text in various lists. Commonly
displayed information includes measured values, counter values, binary informa-
tion regarding the condition of circuit breakers, status of the device, protection in-
formation, general reports, and alarms.
2. Navigation keys
These keys serve for navigation through operating menus.
3. MENU key
This key activates the main menu.
4. ESC and ENTER keys
These keys serve to escape from specific menus or execute changes (such as set-
ting changes).
5. Numerical keys
These keys serve for entry of numerical values, such as limit value settings.
6. Function keys
Four function keys allow the quick and simple execution of frequently used ac-
tions. Typical applications include, for example, jumping to a particular position in
the menu tree such as the fault data in the trip log or the measured values. The
function keys are programmable, and may be used to execute control functions
such as closing or tripping circuit breakers. Next to the keypad, a labelling strip is
provided on which the user-specified key functions may be written.
7. 9-pin female D-subminiature connector
This serial interface is for the connection of a local PC running DIGSI® 4.
7SD52 Manual 2-3

C53000–G1176–C132–2
8. LED key
This key has the dual purpose of resetting latched LEDs and the latched contacts
of output relays, as well as testing of the LEDs.
9. Light emitting diodes (LEDs)
The function of these indicators can be programmed. There is a vast selection of
signals from which to choose. Some examples are device status, process or con-
trol information, and binary input or output status. Next to the LEDs on the front
cover, a labelling strip is provided on which the user-specified LED functions may
be written.
10. Operating condition indicators
The two LEDs “RUN” (green) and “ERROR” (red) indicate the operating condition
of the device.
11. Covering caps for the screws that secure the front cover.
Front View The operating and display elements are the same as explained in Figure 2-1.
(Housing Size 1/1)
SIEMENS SIPROTEC
RUN ERROR 7SD52
MAIN MENU 01/04
Annunciation 1
Measurement 2
MENU
LED ESC ENTER
Measuring F2 4 5 6
F3 1 2 3
F4 0 +/-
Figure 2-2 Front view of a 7SD52, housing size 1/1, for panel flush mounting or cubicle installation
2-4 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Rear View Figure 2-3 is a simplified view of the rear panel of the version of the device with screw-
(Housing Size 1/2) type terminals and optical fibre ports for the service interface at location “B”.
2 2
1 1
UART
4 4 E
3 3
6 6
5 5
8 8
7 7
R 10 K 10
9 9
12 12
11 11
UART
14 14 D
13 13
16 16
15 15
18 18
17 17
RS232
RS485
2
2
1 1 C
P-Master
P-Slave
4
3
4 6
3
Q J 5
Ch2
8
6 7
5
10
9 B A
8 12
7
11
Ch1
Figure 2-3 Rear view of a 7SD52, housing size 1/2 (terminal arrangement example
only)
Rear View Figure 2-4 is a simplified view of the rear panel of the version of the device with screw-
(Housing Size 1/1) type terminals.
7SD52 Manual 2-5

C53000–G1176–C132–2
2 2 2 2
1 1 1 1
UART
4 4 4 4 E
3 3 3 3
6 6 6 6
5 5 5 5
8 8 8 8
7 7 7 7
R 10
P 10
K 10
H 10
9 9 9 9
12 12 12 12
11 11 11 11
UART
14 14 14 14 D
13 13 13 13
16 16 16 16
15 15 15 15
18 18 18 18
17 17 17 17
RS232
RS485
2 2 2
2
1 1 1 1 C
P-Master
P-Slave
4 4 4
3 3 3
4 6 6 6
3
Q N 5
J 5
G 5
Ch2
8 8 8
6 7 7 7
5
10 10 10
9 9 9 B A
8 12 12 12
7
11 11 11
Ch1
Figure 2-4Rear view of a 7SD52, housing size 1/1 (terminal arrangement example only)
2.1.2 Screw Terminal Connections
The following must be distinguished in the case of connection via screw terminals:
terminal plugs for voltage connections and
terminal plugs for current connections.
The terminal screws have a slot head for tightening or loosening with a flat screw driv-
er, sized 6 × 1 mm.
Terminal Blocks for The voltage connection terminal modules are available in 2 variants (Figure 2-5).
Voltage
Connections
2-6 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
2
1
4
3
6
5
8 2
7 1
10 4
9 3
12 6
11 5
14 8
13 7
16 10
15 9
18 12
17 11
18 terminal 12 terminal
Figure 2-5 Connection plug module with screw terminals for voltage connections — rear
view
Figure 2-6 shows an example of the allocation of an individual screw terminals to their
terminal numbers.
2 connection terminal 1
connection terminal 2 1
Figure 2-6 Allocation of screw terminal to terminal number — example
Terminal Block for There is one version of a terminal block for current connections to a 7SD52. The ter-
Current minal block is illustrated in Figure 2-7.
Connections
The correlation between the terminals and their terminal numbers is the same for the
current terminals as shown in Figure 2-6.
2
1
4
3
6
5
8
7
8 terminal
Figure 2-7 Terminal block of screw terminals for current connections — rear view
7SD52 Manual 2-7

C53000–G1176–C132–2
The available poles are arranged into pole pairs, each containing two poles. In this
manner, the two neighbouring terminals form one pair. Accordingly the current termi-
nal module with 8 poles contains 4 pairs.
In combination with the plug connection on the module side, these terminal pairs have
an integrated short-circuiting function which short-circuits the two neighbouring cur-
rent passages when the module is withdrawn. If the current transformer secondary cir-
cuits should become open circuited, large voltages can arise, which may endanger op-
erating personnel and the insulation of the CTs. When the module is inserted, the cur-
rent paths have a low impedance termination via the measuring inputs on the module.
During insertion of the module, the short-circuit of the current path is automatically re-
moved. The interruption only occurs once a reliable contact to the plug connector on
the module is established. This does not reduce the care that must be taken when
working on the current transformer secondary circuits!
The short-circuiting contacts of the current terminals are located on the housing side,
inside the terminal module connector, while the operating pins are located on the mod-
ule side of the plug connector.
Connections to Ring-type and fork-type lugs may be used. To ensure that the insulation paths are
Voltage Terminals maintained, insulated lugs must be used. Alternatively, the crimping area must be in-
sulated with other methods, e.g. by covering with a shrink sleeve.
The following must be observed:
Connections with cable lugs: inner diameter of lugs, 4 mm;
maximum outer diameter of lugs, 10 mm;
conductor with cross-section of 1 mm2 to 2.6 mm2 (AWG 16 to 14).
Use copper wires only!
Cable lugs of series PIDG from Messrs. Tyco Electronics AMP are recommended, e.g.
Ring cable lug: PIDG PN 320565–0
Fork lug: PIDG PN 321233–0.
Direct cable connections: solid or stranded conductor with connector sleeve;
conductor with cross-section of 0.5 mm2 to 2.6 mm2 (AWG 20 to 14).
When using one single conductor, the conductor end must be inserted such that it will
be drawn into the contact cavity while tightening the screw.
Wire strip length: solid conductor 9 to 10 mm (0.35 to 0.39 in).
Maximum tightening torque: 1.8 Nm (16 in-lb).
Connections to Ring-type and fork-type lugs may be used. To ensure that the insulation paths are
Current Terminals maintained, insulated lugs must be used. Alternatively, the crimping area must be in-
sulated with other methods, e.g. by covering with a shrink sleeve.
The following must be observed:
Connections with cable lugs: inner diameter of lugs, 5 mm;
maximum outer diameter of lugs, 12 mm;
2-8 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Cable lugs of series PIDG from Messrs. Tyco Electronics AMP are recommended, e.g.
Ring cable lug: PIDG PN 130171–0
Fork lug: PIDG PN 326865–0
Direct cable connections: solid or stranded conductor with connector sleeve;
When using one single conductor, the conductor end must be inserted such that it will
be drawn into the contact cavity while tightening the screw.
Wire strip length: solid conductor 10 to 11 mm (0.39 to 0.43 in).
Short-Circuit Links Short-circuit links are available for convenience in making terminal connections.
The short-circuit links can connect two neighbouring terminals located on the same
side of the terminal module. By connecting further links, neighbouring terminals can
be included in the short-circuit. On each terminal it is possible to connect two shot-
circuiting links, or one short-circuit link and one lug, or one individual conductor.
The links meet the safety requirements for protection against electric shock.
There are two types of links, one for voltage connections and one for current connec-
tions. The links are illustrated in Figure 2-8. Ordering information for the links is pro-
vided in Section A.1 in the Appendix.
Short-circuit links for Short-circuit links for

voltage connections current connections
Figure 2-8 Short-circuit links for voltage connections and current connections
Covering Caps Terminal covering caps are available for the screw terminal modules, to increase the
protection of personnel against hazardous voltages (degree of protection against ac-
cess to dangerous parts) on the terminal modules. The degree of protection is in-
creased from the standard “back of the hand protection” (IP1x) to “finger protection”
(IP2x).
The terminal covering caps provide an enclosure which securely covers all voltage
carrying components. They are simply snapped onto the terminal module. It must be
noted that all screws on the terminal module must be screws in before snapping the
cover on. The terminal covering cap can simply be removed with a screw driver 6x1.
There are two types of covering caps, as shown in Figure 2-9. Ordering information is
provided in Section A.1 in the Appendix.
7SD52 Manual 2-9

C53000–G1176–C132–2
>PCGF<
:AMP
>PCGF<
:AMP
C73334-A1-C31-1
C73334-A1-C32-1
SIEMENS
SIEMENS
Covering cap for Covering cap for
18 terminal voltage 12 terminal voltage
connection terminal block or 8 Terminal Current
connection terminal block
Figure 2-9 Covering caps for terminal blocks with screw terminals
2.1.3 Connections to Plug-In Terminals
Plug-in terminals are only available for voltage connections. Current connections are
made with screw terminals on all 7SD52.
Terminal Blocks for There are two versions of plug-in terminal blocks. They are shown in Figure 2-10.
Voltage
Connections
2-10 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
c b a
1
6
c b a
7 1
8 2
9 3
10 4
11 5
12 6
13 7
14 8
15 9
16 10
17 11
18 12
a b c a b c
18 terminal 12 terminal
Figure 2-10 Terminal blocks of plug-in terminals for voltage connections — rear view
The system of numbers and letters used to designate the plug-in terminals is illustrat-
ed in Figure 2-11.
c b a
Plug-in terminal 1
1
2
Plug-in terminal 2
12
a b c
Figure 2-11 Correlation between plug-in terminals and connection numbers/letters
Each plug-in terminal forms a complete set of connections that consists of three pins
arranged as follows:
Pin a: Signal connection
Pin b: Common connection
Pin c: Shielding connection
The signal pins are the only terminal pins that are directly connected to the internal
printed circuit boards of the 7SD52. Depending on the version of the terminal block,
18 or 12 signal connections are provided. Refer to Figure 2-12.
There are two isolated groups of common pins. Within a group the pins are inter-con-
nected as shown in Figure 2-12. The common pins “b” are not connected to the boards
inside the 7SD52. Each common group can, for example, be used for signal multipli-
cation or as a common point for a signal (independent of the signals on the pin “a” ter-
minals). Depending on the version of the terminal block, 18 or 12 common connec-
tions are available.
Grouping of common connections within a terminal block is as follows:
7SD52 Manual 2-11

C53000–G1176–C132–2
12 terminal block: Group 1 Terminals 1 through 6

Group 2 Terminals 7 through 12
18 terminal block: Group 1 Terminals 1 through 9
Group 2 Terminals 10 through 18
All shielding pins are connected together as shown in Figure 2-12. The shielding pins
are also connected to the housing. Depending on the version of the terminal block, 18
or 12 shielding connections are provided.
12 terminal Signal connection 18 terminal

Common connection
Shielding connection
c b a 1 c b a 1
2 a b c 2 a b c
c b a 3 c b a 3
4 a b c Common connections, group 1 4 a b c
c b a 5 looped together c b a 5
6 a b c 6 a b c
c b a 7 c b a 7
8 a b c 8 a b c
c b a 9 c b a 9
10 a b c 10 a b c
c b a 11 c b a 11
12 a b c Common connections, group 2 12 a b c
looped together c b a 13
14 a b c
c b a 15
16 a b c
Shielding connections c b a 17
looped together 18 a b c
Figure 2-12 Schematic diagram of the plug-in terminal blocks
Connections to Connections to plug-in terminals are made with pin connectors.

Plug-In Terminals
There are two versions of pin connectors:
Version 1: 2-pin connector
Version 2: 3-pin connector
2-12 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
a
b a c b
Figure 2-13 2-pin connector and 3-pin connector
Ordering information for the pin connectors is provided in Section A.1 of the Appendix.
The design of the pin connectors is such that only correct connections can be made.
For example, the design of the 2-pin connector allows connection only to pins “a” and
“b”. An erroneous connection to pins “b” and “c” is excluded.
The pin connectors snap in to the plug-in terminals. The connectors can be removed
without tools.
Control wires are connected to contacts of the pin connectors. Wires with 0.5 mm2 to
2.5 mm2 diameter (AWG 20 to 14) can be accommodated.
Use only flexible copper control wire!
The following crimp connectors can be used:
Tin-plated version:
Diameter 0.5 mm2 to 1.0 mm2:
e.g. Bandware 4000 pieces type: 0–827039–1 from Messrs. Tyco Electronics AMP
Individual piece type: 0–827396–1 from Messrs. Tyco Electronics AMP
Connection of a conductor to a contact is performed using the following tools:
e.g. Hand crimping tool type: 0–734372–1 from Messrs. Tyco Electronics AMP
Stencil type: 1–734387–1 from Messrs. Tyco Electronics AMP
The use of individual pieces is recommended.
Gold-plated version (recommended):
Connection of a conductor to a contact is performed using the following tools:
e.g. Hand crimping tool type: 0–539635–1 from Messrs. Tyco Electronics AMP
Stencil type: 1–539668–2 from Messrs. Tyco Electronics AMP
The use of individual pieces is recommended.
After the wires are crimped, the contacts are pressed into the terminals of the connec-
tor until they snap into place.
Stress relief for individual pin connector must be provided with cable ties. Stress relief
must also be provided for the entire set of cables, e.g., cable ties.
7SD52 Manual 2-13

C53000–G1176–C132–2
The following separation tool is needed to remove the contacts from the pin connec-
tors:
Type: 725840–1 from Messrs. Tyco Electronics AMP.
The separation tool contains a small tube that is subject to wear. The tube can be or-
dered separately:
Type: 725841–1 from Messrs. Tyco Electronics AMP.
2.1.4 Connections to Optical Communication Interfaces
Optical Interfaces The three available versions of optical communication interfaces are shown in Figure
ST–Connectors 2-14. The ports are supplied with caps to protect the optical components against dust
or other contaminants. The caps can be removed by turning them 90° to the left.
P-Master Ch2
AMO
UART
Ch1 P-Slave
Ch1 P-Salve
2 channel 1 channel 1 channel

Figure 2-14 Optical communication interfaces with protective caps
Connections to Optical connector type: ST–connector

Optical
Communication Fibre type: Multimode graded-index (“G”) optical fibre
Interfaces with G50/125 µm,
ST–Connectors G62.5/125 µm,
G100/140 µm
Wavelength: λ = 820 nm (approximately)
Allowable bending radius: For indoor cable rmin = 5 cm (2 in)
For outdoor cable rmin = 20 cm (8 in)
Laser class 1 (acc. EN 60825–1) is achieved with fibre type G50/125 µm and
G62.5/125 µm.
2-14 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Optical Interfaces The optical communication interfaces with FC-connectors and screw connections also
FC-Connectors provide caps to protect the optical components against dust or other contaminants.
Figure 2-15 Optical communication interfaces with caps
Connections to Optical connector type: FC–connector

Optical
Communication Fibre type: Monomode
Interfaces with 9/125 µm,
FC-Connectors Wavelength: λ = 1300 nm (approximately)
Allowable bending radius:For indoor cable rmin = 5 cm (2 in)
7SD52 Manual 2-15

C53000–G1176–C132–2
2.1.5 Connections to Electrical Communication Interfaces
Electrical 9-pin D-subminiature female socket connectors are provided for all electrical commu-
Communication nication interfaces of the 7SD52. The connector is illustrated in Figure 2-16. The pin
Interfaces assignments are described in Sub-section 8.2.1.
RS232 RS485
5 1 6
RS232-LWL
9 6
9
6 9 5
1 5
P-Slave
Time synchronization
AME
Service interface (rear side)
(front side)
Serial interface
(rear side)
Figure 2-16 9 pin D-subminiature connector
Connections to Standard 9-pin D-subminiature plug connectors per MIL–C–24308 and DIN 41652
Serial can be used.
Communication
The necessary communication cables are dependent on the type of interface:
Interfaces
• RS232/EIA232: Five-wire, twisted and shielded, e.g. interface cable 7XV5100–4.
• RS485/EIA485: Three-wire, twisted and shielded.
• Profibus: Two-wire or four-wire, twisted and shielded:
Wire type A, DIN 19245, part 2 and EN 50170 vol. 2, twisted and shielded,
Wire Resistance: 135 Ω to 165 Ω (f > 100 kHz)
Capacitance: < 30 nF/km (48 nF/mile)
Circuit resistance: < 110 Ω/km (177 Ω/mile)
Conductor diameter: > 0.64 mm
Conductor cross-sectional area: > 0.34 mm2
e.g., SINEC L2 Industrial twisted pair installation wire (see catalog 1K 10 “SIMATIC
NET, Industrial Communications Networks”).
• Time synchronization: At least two-wire, shielded.
2-16 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
2.2 Version of 7SD52 for Panel Surface Mounting
The numerical differential protection SIPROTEC® 7SD52 for surface mounting is en-
closed in a 7XP20 housing. Two housing sizes are available: 1/2 and 1/1 (of 19 inch).
The device is fitted into a surface mounting housing.
2.2.1 Housing
The housing consists of a rectangular tube with a rear plate which is specific to the
device version, and a front cover. Guide rail mats which aid the insertion of the mod-
ules are mounted on the inside of the rectangular tube. Connections between the
modules and from the modules to the front cover are established with flat ribbon ca-
bles and corresponding plug connectors.
The rectangular tube fitted into a surface mounting housing and secured with 4
screws, which are located behind covering caps at the four corners of the front cover.
Housing size 1/1 has 2 additional screw covers located at the centre of the top and bot-
tom of the front cover frame. The surface mounting housing contains the wiring from
the back plate specific to the device version to the screw terminal.
The front cover can be detached after removal of the covering caps located on the 4
corners of the front cover and the 4 screws that are then revealed. Housing size 1/1
has 2 additional screw covers located at the centre of the top and bottom of the front
cover frame; accordingly 6 screws must be removed in this case. The front cover has
a membrane keypad containing the control and indication elements required for the
user interface with the device. All terminations to the control and indication elements
are combined by a converter module within the front cover, and routed to the proces-
sor module (CPU) via a plug connector.
The name plate containing the principal data of the device, such as auxiliary supply
voltage, the rated test voltage and the ordering code (MLFB) is located on the external
top of the housing and on the inside of the front cover.
The mechanical dimension drawings are located in Section 10.13.
7SD52 Manual 2-17

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Front View 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 11 72 73 74 75
(Housing Size 1/2) 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100
11) 11)
SIEMENS SIPROTEC
10) RUN ERROR 7SD52
MAIN MENU 01/04
Annunciation 1
1)
Measurement 2
9)
2)
MENU
3)
4)
8) LED ESC ENTER
7)
Measuring F2 4 5 6
5)
F3 1 2 3
6) F4 0 +/-
11) 11)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 L+ L- 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
Figure 2-17 Front view of a 7SD52, housing size 1/2, for panel surface mounting, example
without optical connections
Referring to the operating and display elements in Figure 2-17:

1. Display (LCD)
The LCD shows process and device information as text in various lists. Commonly
displayed information includes measured values, counter values, binary informa-
tion regarding the condition of circuit breakers, status of the device, protection in-
formation, general reports, and alarms.
2. Navigation keys
These keys serve for navigation through operating menus.
3. MENU key
This key activates the main menu.
4. ESC and ENTER keys
These keys serve to escape from specific menus or execute changes (such as set-
ting changes).
5. Numerical keys
These keys serve for entry of numerical values, such as limit value settings.
6. Function keys
Four function keys allow the quick and simple execution of frequently used ac-
tions. Typical applications include, for example, jumping to a particular position in
the menu tree such as the fault data in the trip log or the measured values. The
2-18 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
function keys are programmable, and may be used to execute control functions
such as closing or tripping circuit breakers. Next to the keypad, a labelling strip is
provided on which the user-specified key functions may be written.
7. 9-pin female D-subminiature connector
This serial interface is for the connection of a local PC running DIGSI® 4.
8. LED key
This key has the dual purpose of resetting latched LEDs and the latched contacts
of output relays, as well as testing of the LEDs.
9. Light emitting diodes (LEDs)
The function of these indicators can be programmed. There is a vast selection of
signals from which to choose. Some examples are device status, processing or
control information, and binary input or output status. Next to the LEDs on the front
panel, a labelling strip is provided on which the user-specified LED functions may
be written.
10. Operating condition indicators
The two LEDs “RUN” (green) and “ERROR” (red) indicate the operating condition
of the device.
11. Covering caps for the screws that secure the front panel.
Front View The operating and display elements are the same as explained in Figure 2-17.
(Housing Size 1/1)
101102103104105106 107 108109110111 112113 114 115116 117118119 120121122123124125126127 128129130 131 132133134 135136137138 139 140141 142143144 145146147148149 150
151152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176177 178 179180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187188 189 190191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200
SIEMENS SIPROTEC
RUN ERROR 7SD52
MAIN MENU 01/04
Annunciation 1
Measurement 2
MENU
LED ESC ENTER
Measuring F2 4 5 6
F3 1 2 3
F4 0 +/-
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 L+ L- 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50
52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 85 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100
Figure 2-18 Front view of a 7SD52, housing size 1/1, for panel surface mounting, example without optical connections
7SD52 Manual 2-19

C53000–G1176–C132–2
2.2.2 Screw Terminal Connections
Terminal Blocks All connections to the device are by means of two-tier screw terminals located at the
top and bottom of the surface mounting housing. For the housing size 1/2 there are 100
such terminals and for the housing size 1/1 there are 200 such terminals.
The plug connection module in the device for the current terminals automatically short-
circuits the current transformer circuits when the modules are withdrawn. This does
not reduce necessary care that must be taken when working on the current transform-
er secondary circuits.
Connections to Direct cable connections: solid or stranded conductor with connector sleeve
Terminals conductor with cross-section of 0.5 mm2 to 5 mm2 (AWG 20 to 10).
Note: For the connection of the time synchronization: At least two-wire, shielded.
Wire strip length: solid conductor 7 mm to 8 mm (0.27 in to 0.31 in).
2.2.3 Connections to Optical Communication Interfaces
Optical communication interfaces are generally located in inclined housings. The in-
clined housings may be located at the top side (channels “D” and “E”) and/or at the
bottom side of the device (channel “B” and “C”), see Figure 2-19.
A table indicating the available channel designations “B” to “E” is printed onto the in-
clined housing.
Standardly the device is equipped with the housing of the top side (channel “D”). De-
pending on the version there may be a second inclined housing mounted to the bottom
side of the device (channel “B” and/or channel “C”). If it that is not the case, a cover
plate is mounted instead.
A printed table on the inclined housings indicates the actually fitted channels (e.g.
channel B and C in Figure 2-20).
There are two versions of optical communications interfaces:
• ST–connectors and
• FC–connectors.
2-20 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Housing for optical communication interfaces,

channel D and E
Housing for optical communication interfaces,

channel B and C
Figure 2-19 Side view of 7SD52, panel surface mounting with optical communication inter-
faces (max. complement)
Optical Interfaces Fibre-optic connections with ST–connectors are supplied with caps to protect the op-
(ST–Connector) tical components against dust or other contaminants. They can be removed by turning
them 90 ° to the left.
Kanal C Kanal B
Kanal E Kanal D
Figure 2-20 Inclined housing with fibre optic connections (example: channel B and C fitted)
7SD52 Manual 2-21

C53000–G1176–C132–2
The ports are provided with 1 to 4 channels. A maximum of 2 fibre-optic channel is

located in each inclined housing.
Fibre optic connections that are not needed are replaced by plastic studs (see Figure
2-20).
Connections to Optical connector type: ST–connector

Optical
Communication Fibre type: Multimode graded-index (“G”) optical fibre
Interfaces with G50/125 µm,
ST–Connectors G62.5/125 µm,
G100/140 µm
Allowable bending radius: For indoor cable rmin = 5 cm (2 in)
Laser class 1 (acc. EN 60825–1) is achieved with fibre type G50/125 µm and
G62.5/125 µm.
Optical Interfaces Optical communication interfaces with FC-connectors are provided with 1 channel or
(FC–Connector) 1 to 2 channels. The ports are supplied with caps to protect the optical components
against dust or other contaminants. They can be removed from the interfaces.
The fibre-optic channels are located in an inclined housing. The inclined housing is at
the top side (channels “D” and “E”), see Figure 2-19).
Fibre-optic connections that are not needed are replaced by plastic studs.
Kanal C Kanal B
Kanal E Kanal D
Figure 2-21 Inclined housing with fibre-optic connections (channel D and E fitted)
Electrical Optical connector type: FC–connector

Communication
Interfaces Fibre type: Monomode
9/125 µm,
2-22 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Allowable bending radius:For indoor cable rmin = 5 cm (2 in)

2.2.4 Connections to Electrical Communication Interfaces
Electrical 9-pin D-subminiature female socket connectors are provided for electrical communi-
Communication cation interfaces. The connectors are located in the inclined housing at the bottom
Interfaces side of the device (see Figure 2-22). The pin assignments are described in Sub-sec-
tion 8.2.1.
Connectors that are not needed are replaced by plastic studs.
The connections for the time synchronization interface are by means of the two-tier
screw terminals (see also Subsection A.2.2 in the Appendix).
Kanal C Kanal B Kanal C Kanal B

Kanal E Kanal D Kanal E Kanal D
plastic studs
Figure 2-22 9-pin D-subminiature connectors
Connections to Standard 9-pin D-subminiature plug connectors per MIL–C–24308 or DIN 41652 can
Serial be used.
Communication
The necessary communication cables are dependent on the type of interface:
Interfaces
• RS232/EIA232: Five-wire, twisted and shielded, e.g. interface cable 7XV5100–4.
• RS485/EIA485: Three-wire, twisted and shielded.
7SD52 Manual 2-23

C53000–G1176–C132–2
2-24 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Getting Started 3
This chapter describes the initial inspections that should be carried out upon recept of
the SIPROTEC® 4 device 7SD52.
Unpacking and re-packing is explained.
Visual and electrical checks that are appropriate for initial inspection are discussed.
The electrical tests include navigating through the operating menus of the device us-
ing the operator control panel on the front of the device, and the operator control win-
dows in DIGSI® 4. For personnel inexperienced with the 7SD52, these checks also
provide a quick and simple method for understanding the operation of the control pan-
el and DIGSI® 4. The electrical tests can be done without measuring quantities being
applied.
Observations relevant to long-term storage of the device are noted.
3.1 Unpacking and Re-packing 3-2

3.2 Inspections upon Receipt 3-3
3.3 User Interface 3-4
3.4 Storage 3-12
7SD52 Manual 3-1

C53000–G1176–C132–2
3 Getting Started
3.1 Unpacking and Re-packing
The 7SD52 is packaged at the factory to meet the requirements of IEC 60255–21.
Unpacking and re-packing must be done with usual care, without using force, and with
appropriate tools. Visually check the device immediately upon arrival for correct me-
chanical condition.
Please observe also the brief reference booklet and all notes and hints that are en-
closed in the packaging.
The transport packaging can be reused in the same manner for further transport. Stor-
age packaging alone, for the individual devices, is not sufficient for transport. If alter-
native packaging is used, shock requirements according to IEC 60255–21–1 Class 2
and IEC 60255–21–2 Class 1 must be met.
The device should be in the final operating area for a minimum of two hours before the
power source is first applied. This time allows the device to attain temperature equilib-
rium, and dampness and condensation to be avoided.
3-2 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
3.2 Inspections upon Receipt
3.2 Inspections upon Receipt
3.2.1 Inspection of Features and Ratings
Ordering Number Verify that the 7SD52 has the expected features by checking the complete ordering
number with the ordering number codes given in Sub-section A.1 of the Appendix.
Also check that the required and expected accessories are included with the device.
The ordering number of the device is on the nameplate sticker attached to the top of
the housing. The nameplate also indicates the current, voltage, and power supply rat-
ings of the device. A verification that these ratings are the expected values is especial-
ly important. The jumpers for the control voltage of the binary inputs are set at the fac-
tory for a DC control voltage equal to the DC voltage rating of the power supply. The
jumpers can be changed if a different control voltage is to be used.
3.2.2 Electrical Check
Operating conditions that meet VDE 0100/5.73 and VDE 0105 Part 1/7.83, or national
and international standards, are to be observed.
Before applying power supply voltage or any measuring quantities for the first time, be
sure the device has been in the operating area for at least two hours. This time period
allows the device to attain temperature equilibrium, and prevents dampness and con-
densation from occurring.
Warning!
The following inspection steps are done in the presence of dangerous voltages. Only
appropriately qualified personnel familiar with and adhering to safety requirements
and precautionary measures shall perform these steps.
Power-Up For a first electrical inspection of the device it is sufficient to ensure safe grounding of
the housing and to apply the power supply voltage:
o Connect the ground of the device solidly to the ground of the location. The ground of
a 7SD52 designed for flush mounting is on the rear panel; the ground of a device de-
signed for surface mounting is on the terminal with the grounding symbol.
o Prepare the connections to the power supply. Verify that the power supply voltage has
the correct magnitude. Check polarity connections to the device inputs. Follow the ap-
propriate connection diagram in the Appendix, Section A.2.
o Close the protective switches to apply the power supply.
o The green “RUN” LED on the front panel must light after no more than 0.5 second, and
the red “ERROR” LED must go out after no more than 10 seconds.
o After no more than 15 seconds, the start-up messages must vanish from the display
(in which the complete ordering number, the version of firmware implemented, and the
factory number are shown), and the default display must appear. Depending on the
assignment of the LEDs, some indicators may light up during and after power-up.
7SD52 Manual 3-3

C53000–G1176–C132–2
3 Getting Started
3.3 User Interface
3.3.1 Operation Using the Operator Control Panel
Operator Control The device has a hierarchically structured operating tree, within which movements
Panel and actions are made using the , , , keys and the MENU, ENTER , CTRL , and ESC
keys on the front panel.
The brief discussions below illustrate the navigation techniques using the integrated
operations in the operator control panel. Some typical operations are covered. For
easier understanding, the accompanying figures show the entire contents of the
menus, while only a limited number of lines can be seen in the display at any time.
Reading Ordering To view the complete ordering number of the device, the version of firmware imple-
Number/Version mented, and the serial number:
G When the device is ready for operation, first press the MENU key. The MAIN MENU ap-
pears.
G Using the key, select the menu item Settings, and move to the device settings
using the key. The SETTINGS menu appears, as shown in Figure 3-1.
G Using the key, select the menu item Setup/Extras and switch to the selection
SETUP/EXTRAS using the key. See Figure 3-2.
MAIN MENU 04/05

---------------------
Annunciation –> 1
Measurement –> 2
Control –> 3
>Settings –> 4 SETTINGS 10/11
Test/Diagnose –> 5 ---------------------
Device Config. –> 01
Masking (I/O) –> 02
P.System Data1 –> 03
Group A –> 04
Group B –> 05
Group C –> 06
Group D –> 07
Change Group –> 08
Osc.Fault Rec. –> 09
>Setup/Extras –> 10
Device –> 11
Figure 3-1 Main menu and sub-menu SETTINGS — example
G Using the key, select the menu MLFB/Version and view the selection MLFB/
VERSION using the key.
The device-specific data appear in two or three lines. Press the key as necessary
to view all of the data:
3-4 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
3.3 User Interface
SETUP/EXTRAS 05/06
---------------------
Date/Time –> 1
Clock Setup –> 2
Serial Ports –> 3
Device-ID –> 4
>MLFB/Version –> 5 MLFB/VERSION 01/03
Contrast –> 6 MLFB: 7SD52...
3HA1
BF–Nr.: 9811049704
MLFB/VERSION 02/03
Firmware: 4.00.18
Bootsystem: 1.00.04
Figure 3-2 Display of device-specific data — example
Viewing Measured To view the measured values:

Values
G If the main menu is not shown, press the MENU key. The MAIN MENU appears.
G Using the key, select the menu item Measurement, and move to the measure-
ment values using the key. The MEASUREMENT sub-menu appears.
G Using the key, select the menu item Operation. sec (operating measured
values, secondary), and switch to the OPERATION. SEC sub-menu using the
key.
G Using the and keys, all operating measured values can be viewed.
Since no measured AC voltages or currents are present at this time, all operating
measured values show near zero. Deviations of the last digit are insignificant.
To return to the main menu, press the MENU key once, or repeatedly press the ESC key
or the key.
Viewing Operation- Reading the operational messages is described to serve as an additional example.
al Messages
G If the main menu is not shown, press the MENU key. The MAIN MENU appears.
G Using the key, select the menu item Annunciation, and switch to the annun-
ciations using the key. The ANNUNCIATION sub-menu appears.
G Using the key, select the menu item Event Log, and move to the EVENT LOG
sub-menu using the key.
The last number in the upper right corner of the display indicates the number of oper-
ational messages stored in memory. The number before the slash indicates the mes-
sage presently being displayed. Upon entering the menu, the latest (newest) message
is shown. The date and time of the event are shown in the display line above the mes-
sage.
G Use the key to read other operational messages.
G Press the LED key; all LEDs should illuminate. Press the key. The newest mes-
sage in the event log should be “Reset LED”, and the number of messages in
memory should increase by one (maximum of 200).
7SD52 Manual 3-5

C53000–G1176–C132–2
3 Getting Started
To return to the main menu, press the MENU key once, or repeatedly press the ESC key
or the key.
Setting the Display If the image in the integrated LCD does not have satisfactory contrast, adjustments
Contrast can be made. A stronger contrast serves, among other purposes, to improve the read-
ability of the image from an angle. With increasing numbers, the contrast is increased
and the picture gets darker. If the contrast is too weak or too strong, there is a risk that
the display will be unreadable and that no operation will be possible using the integrat-
ed operator control panel. Therefore, the preset contrast value should only be
changed in small steps (1 or 2 levels).
G When the device is ready for operation, first press the MENU key. The MAIN MENU ap-
pears.
G Using the key, select the menu item Settings, and switch to the settings using
the key. The SETTINGS sub-menu appears.
G Using the key, select the menu item Setup/Extras and switch to the selection
SETUP/EXTRAS using the key. See Figure 3-3.
G Using the key, select the sub-menu item Contrast.
G If a change of the contrast of the integrated LCD is desired, press the ENTER key. The
existing setting appears in a frame with a blinking cursor.
G Overwrite the present setting with the desired setting using the numerical keys. The
setting range is 11 to 22.
G Confirm the change with the ENTER key, or cancel the change with the ESC key.
Exit the sub-menu using the ESC key, or return to the main menu using the MENU key.
SETUP/EXTRAS 6/06
--------------------
Date/Time –> 1
Clock Setup –> 2
Serial Ports –> 3
Device–ID –> 4
MLFB/Version –> 5
>Contrast –> 6 ENTER SETUP/EX 06/06
18
--------------------
MLFB/Ve n –> 5
Contrast –> 6
Figure 3-3 Operating sub-menu for adjusting the display contrast
3-6 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
3.3 User Interface
3.3.2 Operation Using DIGSI® 4
DIGSI® 4 User DIGSI® 4 has the typical PC application Windows operating environment to guide the
Interface user. The software has a modern, intuitive, user-interface. Further details are found in
Section 4, as well as in the DIGSI® 4 handbook “Device Configuration”.
Some applications of DIGSI® 4 which are described below concern viewing the meas-
urement values, reading messages, and setting the time clock. The handling of the op-
erator control windows of DIGSI® 4 can be learned quickly by following the simple ex-
amples as described below. To perform the steps in the examples, first connect the
SIPROTEC® 4 device to the PC and match the DIGSI® 4 interface data with the equip-
ment. To accomplish this:
G Establish a physical connection between a serial interface of the PC and the oper-
ating serial interface of the device on the front panel.
G Open the DIGSI® 4 application in the PC.
G Generate a new project by clicking on File → New in the DIGSI® 4–Manager menu
bar.
Figure 3-4 Dialogue box to open a new project in DIGSI® 4
G Enter a name for the new project in the Name entry field (e.g. test 1) and close the
box with OK.
G Select Folder by clicking on the item in the newly opened window. Then click in
the menu bar the item Device and select the option DIGSI > Device (Plug &
Play), as shown in Figure 3-5. The Plug & Play dialogue box opens, as shown in
Figure 3-6.
7SD52 Manual 3-7

C53000–G1176–C132–2
3 Getting Started
Figure 3-5 Window with selection of Plug and Play
G Enter the designation of the PC serial interface (COM 1,2, 3, or 4) and select in the
dialogue box under Frame the transfer format, to be used in making the connection.
G Click on OK. DIGSI® 4 automatically determines the type of device present and
reads the settings needed for communication (transfer format, transfer speed)
through the interface.
Figure 3-6 Plug & Play dialogue box for communication between device and PC
A direct connection is then established (on-line), the data are exchanged between the
PC and the device, and the initial screen for DIGSI® 4 opens, as shown on Figure 3-7.
G By double clicking Online in the navigation window (left window), the structure
opens (directory tree).
G By clicking on one of the menu items offered there, the associated contents become
visible in the right window.
3-8 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
3.3 User Interface
Figure 3-7 DIGSI® 4 — online initial screen — example
Viewing Measured As an example the procedure for viewing the measured values is described.
Values
G Double click on Measurement in the navigation window (left).
G Double click on the subdirectory Secondary Values in the navigation window.
G Click on Operational values, secondary.
G The present date and time are shown in the data window (right), as illustrated in Fig-
ure 3-8.
G Double click on this entry in the data window.
Figure 3-8 DIGSI® 4 — Viewing the secondary operating measured values — example
A table of the secondary operating measured values appears, as shown in Figure 3-9.
Since no measured AC currents or voltages are present at this time, all operating
measured values are close to zero. Deviations of the last digit are insignificant. The
measured values are automatically updated.
In the same manner, other measured and counter values can be read out.
7SD52 Manual 3-9

C53000–G1176–C132–2
3 Getting Started
0601 IL1 0.00 A

0602 IL2 0.00 A
0603 IL3 0.00 A
0610 3I0 (zero sequence) 0.00 A
0619 3I1 (positive sequence) 0.00 A
0620 3I2 (negative sequence) 0.00 A
Figure 3-9 DIGSI® 4 — Table of secondary operating measured values – example
Viewing Operation- The read-out of operating messages is described to serve as an additional example.
al Messages
G Double click on Annunciation in the navigation window.
G Click on Event Log in the function selection.
The present date and time are shown in the data window.
G Double click on this entry in the data window.
A table of the accumulated event messages is displayed. See Figure 3-10as an ex-
ample. The number designation for an event is provided with a description of the mes-
sage. The corresponding cause, value (ON or OFF), and date and time of the event
are given. The events are listed chronologically; the newest message is shown first.
Figure 3-10 DIGSI® 4 — Operational messages window — example
G Press the LED key on the device; all LEDs should light while the key is pressed.
G The message “Reset LED” appears as the newest message as soon as the window
is updated. The window can be updated by clicking on View in the menu bar, and
then on Refresh. Pressing the F5 function key on the keyboard also updates the
window.
The operating messages can be saved in DIGSI® 4, and also deleted from the de-
vice’s memory as described in Sub-section 7.1.1.
3-10 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
3.3 User Interface
Setting Date and To enter the date and time:

Time
G Click on Device in the menu bar. See Figure 3-11.
G Select Set Clock.
Figure 3-11 DIGSI® 4 — Selection of the option Set Clock
The dialog field Set clock & date in device opens. The field shows the present
date and the approximate present time according to the device. The day of the week
is automatically derived from the date and cannot be edited.
• Edit the input fields Date and Time. The format depends on your regional settings
of the PC. See Figure 3-12.
Date: mm/dd/yyyy or dd.mm.yyyyy
Time: hh.mm.ss
Click OK to download the entered values to the device. The former values are
changed and the dialog field is closed.
Figure 3-12 DIGSI® 4 — Dialog Field: Set clock & date in device
7SD52 Manual 3-11

C53000–G1176–C132–2
3 Getting Started
3.4 Storage
If the device is to be stored, note:

SIPROTEC® 4 devices and associated assemblies should be stored in dry and clean
rooms, with a maximum temperature range of –25° C to +55° C (–12° F to 131° F).
See Sub-section 10.1.7 under Technical Data. To avoid premature aging of the elec-
trolyte capacitors in the power supply, a temperature range of +10° C to +35° C (50° F
to 95° F), is recommended for storage.
The relative humidity must not lead to condensation or ice buildup.
After extended storage, the power supply of the device should be energized, approx-
imately every two years, for one or two days to regenerate the electrolytic capacitors
in the power supply. This procedure should also be done prior to the device being put
in service. Under extreme climatic conditions (tropics), pre-warming is achieved at the
same time, and condensation is prevented.
After long storage, power should not be applied until the device has been in the oper-
ating area for a minimum of two hours. This time period allows the device to attain tem-
perature equilibrium, and prevents dampness and condensation from occurring.
In order to save the energy of the buffer battery inside the device the battery is
switched off automatically without auxiliary supply voltage after a time period of 12 to
24 hours.
3-12 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
SIPROTEC® 4 Devices 4
This chapter provides an overview of the family of SIPROTEC® 4 devices and the in-
tegration of the devices into power plants and substation control systems. Principle
procedures are introduced for setting the devices, controlling primary equipment with
the devices, and performing general operations with the devices.
Please note the SIPROTEC® 4 family of devices is described in general in this chap-
ter, and the examples shown may differ in detail from a specific device. Also, depend-
ing on the type and version of a specific device, some of the functions discussed may
not be available.
Details about the extent of the functions of the devices, the individual settings, and the
representation structure of the system data are found in the following chapters and the
DIGSI® 4 instruction book.
4.1 General 4-2

4.2 Operator Control Facilities 4-5
4.3 Information Retrieval 4-8
4.4 Control 4-14
4.5 Manual Overwrite / Tagging 4-16
4.6 General about the Setting Procedures 4-17
4.7 Configuration of the Scope of Device Functions 4-20
4.8 Configuration of Inputs and Outputs (Configuration Matrix) 4-21
4.9 Programmable Logic CFC 4-24
4.10 Power System Data 4-26
4.11 Setting Groups 4-27
4.12 General Device Settings 4-29
4.13 Time Synchronization 4-30
4.14 Serial Interfaces 4-31
4.15 Passwords 4-33
7SD52 Manual 4-1

C53000–G1176–C132–2
4 SIPROTEC® 4 Devices
4.1 General
The SIPROTEC® 4 family is an innovative product series of numerical protective and

control devices with open communication interfaces for remote control and remote
setting, ergonomically designed operator panels, and highly flexible functionality.
4.1.1 Protection and Control
The devices utilize numerical measuring techniques. Complete numerical signal

processing offers high measurement accuracy and long-term consistency, as well as
reliable handling of harmonics and transients. Digital filtering techniques and adaptive
stabilization of measured values ensure the highest security in establishing the devic-
es’ correct responses. Device errors are recognized and quickly annunciated by inte-
grated self-monitoring routines. Failure of protection during a fault is therefore almost
entirely prevented.
You may choose devices with separate protective and process control functions, or
select a solution that implements both requirements.
The following solutions are available:
G Protection and control in separate devices,
G Protective devices that provide the capability of control of a circuit breaker or prima-
ry switching device through a communication interface,
G Devices with combined features that, in addition to protective functions, offer on-site
operation for several circuit breakers and primary switching devices and extensive
substation control functions.
4-2 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
4.1 General
4.1.2 Communication
SIPROTEC® 4 devices are completely suited for the requirements of modern commu-
nication technology. They have interfaces that allow for integration into higher-level
control centres, and user friendly operation through an on-site PC or via a modem con-
nection. Simple, comfortable device setup and operation are provided.
SIPROTEC® 4 devices support the widespread, internationally accepted communica-
tion standards, e.g.
G EC 60870-5-103,
G PROFIBUS FMS/DP,
G DNP 3.0,
G Modbus,
G UCA II / Ethernet (future)
Operation and Observation To Network Control Centers

IEC60870-5-101
SICAM WinCC
DIGSI 4
DCF, GPS
Time Synchronization
SICAM SC
IEC60870-5-103
Profibus FMS
Field Devices
Figure 4-1 Integration of field devices in the SICAM substation control system — example
7SD52 Manual 4-3

C53000–G1176–C132–2
In the sample configuration in Figure 4-1, data transmitted from the field devices can
be processed in the sub-station control device SICAM SC, displayed at the operating
and observation station SICAM WinCC, and transferred by the remote terminal unit
interfaces (via the network channels) to network control centres (SCADA).
In the case when commands are sent to the devices, equally flexible processing is
possible; that is, substation switching operations can be initiated from the network
control centres, as well as from the operation and observation unit of the substation
control system.
Note:
All SIPROTEC® 4 devices also operate with the proven star coupler (e.g. 7XV5). Thus,
for simple applications, you can retrieve all information from your office or while on the
road.
The protocol PROFIBUS DP enables the uncomplicated integration of SIPROTEC®

devices into PLC-based process control systems (e.g. SIMATIC S5/S7). The protocols
DNP3.0 and MODBUS ASCII/RTU allow the integration into a large number of pro-
cess control systems and control systems of different manufacturers.
4.1.3 Settings
The devices in the SIPROTEC® 4 family are delivered with default settings. After set-
tings are made for specific applications, the devices are suitable for direct use in power
systems.
The windows-based DIGSI® 4 software program offers an application-oriented inter-
face with thorough guidance for quick and simple setting of the devices.
DIGSI® 4 is installed on a normal personal computer. For local use, the PC is connect-
ed to the operating serial interface on the front panel of the device.
4.1.4 Operations
All on-site operations of a SIPROTEC® 4 device can be done with DIGSI® 4. Exam-
ples of operations are switching, retrieval of information, or changing of setting groups.
These operations can also be performed using the operator control panel on the front
of the SIPROTEC® 4 device.
4.1.5 Oscillographic Fault Records
DIGSI® 4 can also be used to retrieve oscillographic fault data captured by the
SIPROTEC® 4 device. The DIGRA 4 software program can then be used to provide
several different graphical representations of the captured signals. DIGRA 4 also cal-
culates additional values on the basis of the captured signals. The program presents
the data in analogue curves with time base, phasor diagrams, locus diagrams, and
harmonic charts.
4-4 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
4.2 Operator Control Facilities
4.2.1 Operator Control Panel On Device
The operating panels of SIPROTEC® 4 devices are ergonomically designed and easy
to read. The operating panels allow on-site control operations to be done, individual
settings to be entered, and all information required for operations to be displayed.
The operating panel contains either a full graphical display or a four-line display, de-
pending on the specific device of the SIPROTEC® 4 family.
Operating Panel
with Four-Line
Display
SIEMENS SIPROTEC
RUN ERROR 7SA522
MAIN MENU 01/05

SIEMENS SIPROTEC
RUN ERROR 7SA522
Annunciation 1
Measurement 2
MAIN MENU 01/04
SIEMENS SIPROTEC
RUN ERROR 7SJ61/62
Annunciation 1
MENU
Measurement 2
MAIN MENU 01/05
Annunciation 1
MENU
Measurement 2
LED ESC ENTER Trip MENU

Pickup A
Event Log Pickup B

F1 7 8 9
Pickup C
Operation. ENTER
F2 4 5 6 LED Pickup GND ESC
Pri
Device faulty
F3 1 2 3
F1 7 8 9
F4 0 +/-
LED F2 4 5 6 ESC ENTER
F3 1 2 3
Event Log F1 7 8 9
F4 Operation. 0 +/-
Pri F2 4 5 6
Trip Log F3 1 2 3
F4 0 +/-
Figure 4-2 SIPROTEC® 4 Device, operator control panel with four-line display — examples
Note:
Refer to Chapter 2 to determine the type of operating field for your specific
SIPROTEC®4 device.
7SD52 Manual 4-5

C53000–G1176–C132–2
The functions of the operating and display elements on the operator control panel are
described below.
Display Process and device information are displayed in the LCD. Commonly displayed infor-
mation includes measured values, counter values, binary information regarding the
condition of the device, protection information, general messages, and alarms.
The light for the display is normally off. The light automatically turns on whenever a
key is pressed on the operating field. If no input from the operator control panel occurs
for ten minutes, then the light turns off again. The light can be controlled via a binary
input that is configured (programmed) for this purpose.
Keys The keys have various functions.

G Navigation through the operating menus of the device are accomplished with the
, , , keys.
G The main menu is opened with the MENU key.
G Changes are cancelled or confirmed with the ESC and ENTER keys, respectively.
G Numerical values are entered with the 0 to 9 keys, the . key for a decimal
point, and the +/– key for a negative sign. If a value of infinity (∞) is desired, press
the decimal point key twice; ∞ appears in the display.
G The F1 to F4 keys are programmable. The keys are typically used to execute com-
monly performed actions. Labelling strips are provided.
G Latched LEDs and output relays are reset and the group of LEDs are tested with
the LED key.
LEDs G “RUN” and “ERROR” LEDs indicate the condition of the device.
G All other LEDs are freely configured to indicate process information, status, events,
etc. Labelling strips are provided.
Operating Serial Local communication with the device is established through the front operating serial
Interface interface with a PC running DIGSI® 4. The interface on the device is a 9-pin, female,
D-subminiature port.
4-6 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
4.2.2 DIGSI® 4 Tool
DIGSI® 4 uses the familiar Windows operating environment.
User Guide In DIGSI® 4 only the settings that are available within a specific device are shown in
the specific windows. If a protective feature is changed from disabled to enabled in the
Device Configuration, then the settings relevant to that feature become available.
Entering settings for SIPROTEC® 4 devices is easy due to many types of assistance
offered, such as context menus, pop-up lists for the selection of available options, and
specific limits for the entry of numerical values.
Configuring A configuration matrix is used to assign the binary inputs, output relays, and LEDs. In-
Inputs and Outputs formation to be stored in the various buffers and transmitted via the system interface
is also selected in this matrix. The setting options are presented in an easy-to-read
tabular format. Parts of the matrix can be minimized or expanded as desired to simplify
the displayed sections, and therefore the setting process. Filter functions can reduce
the size of the matrix to display only relevant information.
Passwords Password entry is required for tasks such as changing settings, executing control
commands, or exercising the test and diagnostics features. The passwords protect
against unauthorized access to these critical tasks.
Commissioning DIGSI® 4 simplifies commissioning with test functions for the binary inputs, outputs
Aids and LEDs. Control of primary equipment can be done. The measured values of the
device can be viewed with the program. Oscillographic fault records can be triggered
with DIGSI® 4.
Help System The help system clarifies the individual functions and settings, and provides additional
support.
Note:
Detailed information about DIGSI® 4 can be found in the DIGSI® 4 Manual, order
number E50417-H1176-C097.
7SD52 Manual 4-7

C53000–G1176–C132–2
4.3 Information Retrieval
A SIPROTEC® 4 device has an abundance of information that can be used to obtain

an overview of the present and past operating conditions of the device and the portion
of the power system being protected or controlled by the device. The information is
represented in separate groups:
G Annunciations,
G Measurements,
G Oscillographic fault records.
Remote If the device is integrated into a substation control system, then information transfer
can take place, via a connection to the system interface of the SIPROTEC® 4 device,
to:
G higher level control systems, or
G substation control devices, e.g. SICAM SC.
Local On site, the operator control panel of the SIPROTEC® 4 device can be used to retrieve
information.
DIGSI® 4 Information retrieval is simple and fast when DIGSI® 4 is used. For local use, connect
a PC to the operating serial interface at the front of the SIPROTEC® 4 device. For re-
mote retrieval of information, communication occurs via a modem connected to the
service serial interface. DIGSI® 4 must operate in the Online mode to obtain informa-
tion from the device.
4-8 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
4.3.1 Annunciations
The scope of the indication (messages) that are given under Annunciation is deter-
mined when settings for the configuration of functions are applied to the SIPROTEC®
device.
The messages are divided into the following categories, and displayed using DIGSI® 4
or the operator control panel of the device:
G Operating messages: Messages independent of network faults, e.g. messages
about switching operations or monitoring functions;
G Fault messages;
G Ground fault messages (for devices with sensitive ground fault detection);
G General interrogation; display of present condition messages;
G Spontaneous messages; continuous display of important messages from the de-
vice; e.g., after faults, switching operations, etc.
Figure 4-3 DIGSI® 4, annunciations
Display in DIGSI® 4 To view the indications in DIGSI® 4 Online:

• Select Annunciation in the navigation (left) window.
All annunciation groups are shown in the data (right) window.
• Double click on an annunciation group in the data window, such as Event Log.
The data and time appear. Double click on the entry. The list of indications appears.
7SD52 Manual 4-9

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Display on To display messages in the operating field of the SIPROTEC® 4 device:

the Device
• Select Main Menu → Annunciation →
e.g. Event Log or Trip Log.
MAIN MENU 01/05

---------------------
>Annunciation –> 1
>Measurement –> 2 ANNUNCIATION 01/05
---------------------
>Event Log –> 01
>Trip Log –> 02 EVENT LOG 19/19
---------------------
06.19.98 11:52:05,461
Reset LED ON
Figure 4-4 SIPROTEC® 4, device display of operating messages in the event log — example
TRIP LOG 01/08

---------------------
>Last Fault –> 1 LAST FAULT 01/10
>2nd Last Fault –> 2 ---------------------
06.22.98 23:49:34.845
Network Fault 6 ON
Figure 4-5 SIPROTEC® 4, device display of fault messages— example
4-10 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
4.3.2 Measurements
The measured values that are registered are divided into the following categories for
display in DIGSI® 4 or on the operating field of the device:
G Primary values, based on the measured secondary values and the settings entered
for the current transformers and voltage transformers.
G Secondary values, which are the measured values or are derived from the meas-
ured values.
G Percentage values, relative to nominal ratings.
G Other values calculated by the device, e.g. thermal values or user-defined values.
G Statistics values.
Figure 4-6 DIGSI® 4 measured value display — example
Display in DIGSI® 4 To display the measured values in the DIGSI® 4 Online:

• Select Measurement in the navigation (left) window. The measured value groups
appear in the data (right) window.
• Double click on a group, for example Primary Values.
• Double click on the next item in the data window, Operational values, pri-
mary in the example. The date and time appear.
• Double click on the date and time, and the measured values appear.
7SD52 Manual 4-11

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Display on To display the measured values in the operating field of the SIPROTEC® 4 device:
the Device
• Select Main Menu → Measurement →
e.g. Operation. pri.
MAIN MENU 02/05

---------------------
>Measurement –> 2 MEASUREMENT 01/12
--------------------
>Operation. pri –> 01
>Operation. sec –> 02
MEASUREMENT 01/12
---------------------
>Operation. pri –> 01 OPERATION. PRI 02/24
>Operation. sec –> 02 ---------------------
>IL1 = 1062.8A
>IL2 = 1081.5A
Figure 4-7 SIPROTEC® 4, device display of measured values — example
4.3.3 Oscillographic Fault Records
As an option, SIPROTEC® 4 devices can have waveform capturing and event record-
ing. Furthermore, the elements that are shown in the fault records can be selected by
the user.
The fault record data are retrieved from the device memory by DIGSI® 4 and are
stored as oscillographic records in standard COMTRADE format.
The DIGRA 4 program is used to convert the oscillographic data into graphical repre-
sentations that can be used to analyse the fault or the event captured by the device.
DIGRA 4 calculates additional values from the waveform data, e.g. impedances and
rms values, and displays the captured and calculated values in:
G analogue curves with timebase (time signals),
G phasor diagrams,
G locus diagrams, and
G harmonic graphs.
4-12 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
digra009
Figure 4-8 DIGRA 4 graphical representations of the waveform data — view examples
Details can be found in the DIGSI® 4 manual, order number E50417-H1176-C097,

and the DIGRA 4 manual, order number E50417-H1176-C070.
7SD52 Manual 4-13

C53000–G1176–C132–2
4.4 Control
The multiple application possibilities for SIPROTEC® 4 devices allow an equally flex-
ible concept for command processing and control.
Remote If the device is integrated into a master control system, then command outputs can be
remotely controlled via the system interface using telegrams from
G Higher-level control systems, or
G substation control devices such as SICAM SC.
Local On-site, the SIPROTEC® 4 device offers the possibility to control a circuit breaker or
primary switching equipment using the operator control panel.
For devices with a four-line display, switching operations are controlled using:
• Main menu → Control → Breaker/Switch → Control → Equipment and in-
tended direction ON or OFF (Figure 4-9), or
• The Function Keys F1 to F4.
The functionality of these keys is programmable.
MAIN MENU 03/05

---------------------
Measurement –> 2
>Control –> 3 CONTROL 01/03
--------------------
>Breaker/Switch–> 1
>Tagging –> 2
CONTROL 01/03
--------------------
>Breaker/Switch–> 1 BREAKER/SWITCH 02/04
>Tagging –> 2 --------------------
>Display –> 1
>Control –> 2
Figure 4-9 On-site control using the operator control panel
The status of a primary switch can be read out on the display using BREAKER/SWITCH
→ Display (Figure 4-10).
BREAKER/SWITCH 01/04
---------------------
>Display –> 1 DISPLAY 01/03
>Control –> 2 --------------------
>52Breaker OPEN
Disc.Swit. CLOS
Figure 4-10 Determining primary switch status using the operator control panel
4-14 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
4.4 Control
DIGSI® 4 Control operations can be carried out using the DIGSI® 4 Tool. Connect a PC to the
operating interface of the device on site, or communicate with the SIPROTEC® device
using a modem and the service interface.
DIGSI® 4 must operate in the Online mode for this function.
• Select Control in the Navigation window and double click on Breaker /
Switches in the data window.
In the dialogue window that follows, all relevant primary switching equipment is dis-
played in a table with the present status.
• Enter the intended switching direction in the Scheduled column. Answer the ques-
tion with Yes.
The password is requested, the interlocking conditions are checked, and the com-
mand is issued.
Note:
The control option of DIGSI® 4 is typically used during commissioning, and for test and
diagnostic purposes.
CFC Using the graphically supported design tool CFC for logic functions in DIGSI® 4, infor-
mation can be logically combined. Command outputs can be derived from the output
of logic functions. The link of the output of the CFC functions to the respective device
outputs is determined in the configuration matrix.
Passwords Only authorized personnel can perform switching operations. Switching operations
are protected by passwords.
Interlocking Command outputs may be subject to interlocking checks, which can be configured in-
dividually and graphically using the CFC logic too. Standard interlocking, such as
ground switch closed status indication, may be already contained in the basic settings
of certain device types when delivered from the factory.
Command Process- Details about the command output time, checkback indication monitoring time, etc.,
ing Times are entered within the framework of the settings.
Event Recording All switching operations are recorded in the message list with date and time.
7SD52 Manual 4-15

C53000–G1176–C132–2
4.5 Manual Overwrite / Tagging
Manual Overwrite If the breaker/switch position is not available from the switch-gear, the status of the
switchgear device can be manually set to the actual present position using the opera-
tor control panel: Main Menu → Control → Breaker/Switch → Man. Over-
write. The simulated switching status is used for interlocking checks, and for auto-
matically initiated switching operations.
Set Status For convenience during commissioning or at other times, decoupling of the informa-
tion exchange between the switchgear and the protective device may be desired for a
short period, without disconnecting the wires. This function is activated using the op-
erator control panel: Main Menu → Control → Breaker/Switch → Set Status.
Tagging To identify unusual operating conditions in the power system, tagging can be done.
The tagging can, for example, be entered as additional operating conditions in inter-
locking checks, which are set up with CFC. Tagging is configured in the same way as
for operating devices.
• The status of the tagging is displayed on the operating panel, Main Menu → Con-
trol → Tagging → Display (Figure 4-11),
or changed using
• Main Menu → Control → Tagging → Set.
MAIN MENU 03/05

--------------------
Annunciation –> 1
Measurement –> 2
Control –> 3 CONTROL 02/03
---------------------
Breaker/Switch –> 1
Tagging –> 2 TAGGING 01/02
Interlock –> 3 ---------------------
Display –> 1
Set –> 2
Figure 4-11 Tagging equipment from the operator control panel
Note:
The Manual Overwrite function is always done using the operator control panel on the
SIPROTEC® 4 devices.
4-16 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
4.6 General about the Setting Procedures
The SIPROTEC® 4 devices are delivered with standard default settings. Changes to
the settings are done with DIGSI® 4.
The setting procedure for a SIPROTEC® 4 device consists of
q Overall Protection and Control Design:
G determining the functions that are to be used (device configuration),
G assigning the binary inputs, outputs, LEDs, buffers, system port, etc. (I/O-configu-
ration
G defining user-definable logic functions (CFC).
q Specific Settings:
G settings for all elements to be used,
G settings of the protective functions,
G settings of the process control functions.
Settings are first done Off-line. The settings are then loaded into the SIPROTEC® 4
device on-site using the operating serial interface, or remotely by modem and the
service interface.
Figure 4-12Setting a SIPROTEC® 4 device using DIGSI® 4
The transfer of data from DIGSI® 4 to the SIPROTEC® 4 device is indicated in the dis-
play. The progress of the transfer is displayed. See Figure 4-13.
7SD52 Manual 4-17

C53000–G1176–C132–2
LOAD PARAMETER
---------------------
·····················
·····················
····
---------------------
Download active
Figure 4-13 Screen of Device during Settings Transfer
Setting Sequence When setting a SIPROTEC® 4 device, adhere to the following sequence:
G Specify the interfaces, the device data, and the time synchronization,
G Determine the device functions to be used,
G Design the assignment of the inputs and outputs using the configuration matrix,
G Set the default display (optional),
G Design all of the special logic that is to be employed using CFC (optional),
G Enter the power system data,
G Apply the settings to groups A to D (groups B to D optional),
G Set the passwords.
Setting steps partially build on the decisions from the previous steps. By following the
sequence listed, unnecessary changes and rework are avoided. The sequence en-
sures that information required for an individual step will be available.
Note:
Changes to the configuration matrix and the control display are protected by password
No. 7 (Password for parameter set).
4-18 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Settings for Setting changes to individual protective elements and functions can be done using the
Protective operator control panel on the SIPROTEC® 4 device.
Elements
Other settings such as input/output and device configuration can be viewed from the
front panel, but not changed.
• Display the settings on the LCD using Main Menu → Settings →
e.g. Masking (I/O).
• Change settings such as date and time using Main Menu → Settings → Setup/
Extras.
MAIN MENU 04/05

---------------------
Annunciation –> 1
Measurement –> 2
Control –> 3
Settings –> 4 SETTINGS 10/11
Test/Diagnose –> 5 ---------------------
Device Config. –> 01
P.System Data1 –> 03
Group A –> 04
Group B –> 05
Group C –> 06
Group D –> 07
Change Group –> 08
Osc.Fault Rec. –> 09
Setup/Extras –> 10
Device –> 11
---------------------
Active Group is: A
Figure 4-14 Changing settings using the operator control panel — example
Note:
Changes to the individual settings are protected by Password No. 5 (Password for
single settings).
7SD52 Manual 4-19

C53000–G1176–C132–2
4.7 Configuration of the Scope of Device Functions
The individual devices within the SIPROTEC® 4 family can be supplied with various
protective functions. The ordering number of the device determines the available func-
tions. The functions are specified more precisely through the process of enabling and
disabling in the Device Configuration area of the settings.
To specify the active functions using DIGSI® 4:
• Double click on Device Configuration in the data window.
• Click on the individual fields and select the functions to be enabled.
Figure 4-15 DIGSI® 4, setting the device configuration — example
The device configuration can be viewed from the operator control panel on the
SIPROTEC® 4 device.
• In the main menu, select Settings → Device Config.
DEVICE CONFIG. 07/16

--------------------
0117 Coldload Pickup
Enabled
Figure 4-16 Viewing device configuration from the operator control panel — example
4-20 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
4.8 Configuration of Inputs and Outputs (Configuration Matrix)
A configuration matrix is used to determine processing of the binary inputs, outputs,

LEDs, and indication buffers.
Configuration is performed with DIGSI® 4.
The configuration matrix is primarily divided into the following columns:

q Device functions
q Information, e.g. indications or command with
G information number, identification of the information,
G display text, representative brief text of the information on the device display,
G long text, extensive description of the information,
G type, identification of the information, e.g. CF_D2 double command with 2 output
contacts and feedback indication;
q Source, that is, origin of the information with
G binary inputs
G function keys F, freely programmable keys on the operating field, e.g. assigned
switching operations, etc. as the origin of the information,
G CFC C (programmable logic), user-specific logic outputs as the origin of the infor-
mation;
q Destination of the information, with
G binary outputs for the output of signals,
G LED, display of information on the device front, e.g. messages,
G system interface S, transmission of information, e.g. to a substation control system,
G CFC C (programmable logic), information as an input to a user-specified logic,
G buffer, in which the information should be entered,
– operation annunciation buffer or
– fault annunciation buffer,
G control menu CR, primary device can be controlled or tagging can be set.
The user determines the configurations by

G clicking on the appropriate column, or by
G Using the context menu: L (latched), U (unlatched), H (activate high),
L (activate low), (configured), (not configured), etc.
DIGSI® 4 checks the entry for plausibility and locks the input field if necessary.
A locked input field is shown in gray.
7SD52 Manual 4-21

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Figure 4-17 DIGSI® 4, input/output assignment with the configuration matrix — example
Filter Functions With the use of filters, either all information can be displayed or a selection can be
done according to indications, commands, or measured values.
Additionally, there is a filter setting that differentiates between information configured
and not configured.
The filters allows for a quick overview and simple checking of the configuration set-
tings.
Also, columns and rows can be temporarily hidden from view, so that you can view
only the sections of the total matrix that are relevant.
New Information A further function of the configuration matrix is the capability to define new information.
This is accomplished by inserting a new line, defining the appropriate information type,
and assigning it to a source and a destination. The new information can also be dis-
played in the LCD of the SIPROTEC® 4 device after it has been downloaded to the
device.
Function Keys The function keys on the operator control panel of the SIPROTEC® 4 device can be
assigned to commonly performed operating functions, e.g. initiation of a switching op-
eration. Select the appropriate function key F1 to F4 in the Source F column for the
related information (e.g. switching command).
4-22 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
CFC SIPROTEC® 4 device information can be connected in a user-specified manner using

the programmable logic components of the DIGSI® 4 CFC. For example, the user can
implement interlocking checks, create grouped messages, or derive limit value viola-
tion messages.
Information can be both a source and a destination in combined CFC editing. The spe-
cific logic’s inputs, e.g. the individual messages that are to be combined to form a
grouped message, must be marked in the Destination C column. The logic’s output,
the grouped message in this example, is derived from the Source C column.
Viewing the Config- The configuration can be seen on the operating panel of the SIPROTEC® 4 device.
uration on the
• In the main menu, select Settings → Masking (I/O).
Operating Panel
MASKING (I/O) 01/03

---------------------
>Binary Inputs –> 1
>LED –> 2
• In the next menu, select Masking (I/O) → e.g. Binary Inputs.
BINARY INPUTS 02/20

---------------------
>Binary Input 1 –> –
>Binary Input 2 –> –
Figure 4-18 Reading the configuration using the operator control panel, example assignment
of binary input 2
7SD52 Manual 4-23

C53000–G1176–C132–2
4.9 Programmable Logic CFC
The CFC program in DIGSI® 4 can be used to create additional logic in SIPROTEC®
4 devices. For example, special interlocking conditions for controlled equipment can
be designed. Limit checks for measured values can be created, and corresponding
control can be designed.
SIPROTEC® 4 devices may have some CFC functions set at the factory, according to
the type and version of the device.
User-defined CFC functions are done in graphical form. Generic logic modules (AND,
OR, NAND, etc.) and analog modules that are specially created for the requirements
of process control engineering (e.g., MAX, MIN, etc.) are available.
The CFC-modules are combined to form complete CFC-logic functions in order to
G perform system-specific checks (e.g. interlocking),
G generate messages if measured values approach a critical value, or
G build group messages for transfer to a substation control systems.
Figure 4-19 DIGSI® 4, CFC basic options — example
4-24 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
4.9 Programmable Logic CFC
CFC Designing Figure 4-20 shows the graphical nature of the CFC logic tool, and some of the com-
ponents that can be used to build the logic.
Note:
CFC settings are protected in DIGSI® 4 by Password No. 7 (Password for parameter
set).
Details about designing with the CFC program can be found in the instruction book,
order number E50417-H1176-C098.
Figure 4-20 CFC Logic — example
7SD52 Manual 4-25

C53000–G1176–C132–2
4.10 Power System Data
Power System In the window for Power System Data 1, important settings are entered that relate to
Data 1 the power system and primary equipment connected to the device. The settings in-
clude:
G system data such as frequency, voltage, etc.
G data for the main current transformers and voltage transformers,
G circuit breaker or primary switch-gear information.
Figure 4-21 DIGSI® 4 window for setting the power system data 1 — example
Power System Power System Data 2 are part of the setting groups, which can be switched over dur-
Data 2 ing operation (see chapter 4.11). These include for example:
G Primary Operating Voltage
G Primary Operating Current
G Characteristic Data of the protected object etc.
4-26 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
4.11 Setting Groups
4.11 Setting Groups
A SIPROTEC® 4 device has up to four setting groups A through D. The setting options
for each group are the same; however, the applied settings can be, and are typically
intended to be, different in each group. The active setting group can easily be changed
while the device is in-service. A major advantage of multiple setting groups is the ca-
pability of optimizing the protection and control for the existing configuration of the net-
work being protected. In other words, the protection and control can be changed as
the network changes.
The setting groups are saved in the device. The setting groups can be changed during
operation using DIGSI® 4, from the operator control panel on the device, by triggering
binary inputs, or via the system interface.
Figure 4-22 DIGSI® 4, Entering Settings in Setting Group A; Other Groups are Similar
Note:
Settings that are common to all protective functions, such as Power System Data 2,
can be dynamically activated like the settings in Groups A through D.
7SD52 Manual 4-27

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Settings Double click on a protective function shown in the listbox of Figure 4-22 to obtain a
dialogue box for entering the settings associated with this function (Figure 4-23).
Figure 4-23 DIGSI® 4, entering settings for a protective function — example
Changing Setting The setting groups can be changed during operation using DIGSI® 4, from the opera-
Groups tor control panel on the device, by triggering binary inputs, or via the system interface.
The active setting group is indicated.
CHANGE GROUP 02/02

---------------------
0301 ACTIVE GROUP
Group A
0302 CHANGE to
Group A
Group A
Group B
Group C
Group D
Binary Input
IEC60870–5–103
Figure 4-24 SIPROTEC® 4 device, changing setting groups on the operator control panel
4-28 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
4.12 General Device Settings
4.12 General Device Settings
The settings of the display to show information of network faults on the LEDs and the
LCD on the front of the SIPROTEC® 4 device are defined in the DIGSI® 4 window
shown in Figure 4-25.
Figure 4-25 DIGSI® 4, general device settings (targets) — example
The setting can also be changed at any time using the operator control panel on the
SIPROTEC® 4 device: Main Menu → Settings → Device.
7SD52 Manual 4-29

C53000–G1176–C132–2
4.13 Time Synchronization
Time tracking in a SIPROTEC® 4 device can be implemented using:

G DCF77 Radio Receiver (Time Signal from PTB Braunschweig),
G IRIG-B Radio Receiver (Time Signal from the global positioning satellite (GPS) sys-
tem),
G signals via the system interface from, for example, a substation control system,
G radio clock using a system-specific synchronizer box,
G minute impulses on a binary input.
Setting of the time synchronization is done exclusively with DIGSI® 4:
• Double click on Time Synchronization in the data window and enter the set-
tings.
Figure 4-26 DIGSI® 4, setting of the time synchronization — example
Read-out on the Using the SIPROTEC® 4 device operator control panel, the time synchronization set-
Operator Control tings can be retrieved: Main Menu → Settings → Setup/Extras → Clock Set-
Panel up.
SETUP/EXTRAS 02/06
---------------------
Date/Time –> 1
Clock Setup –> 2 CLOCK SETUP 01/03
Serial Ports –> 3 ---------------------
Device-ID –> 4 Offset 0min
MLFB/Version –> 5 5 Error Time 2min
Contrast –> 6 Source Internal
Figure 4-27 Read-out of time synchronization settings from the operator control panel
4-30 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
4.14 Serial Interfaces
Devices in the SIPROTEC® 4 family can be equipped with up to four serial interfaces
and a time.
G The system interface is used for connection with higher-level control centers. The
following protocols are presently available:
• IEC 60870-5-103,
• PROFIBUS FMS,
• PROFIBUS DP,
• DNP3.0 Level 2,
• MODBUS ASCII/RTU
G The time control interface is used for time synchronization (e.g. IRIG B),
G The service interface (DIGSI® 4, Modem) is for connection to remote diagnostic
facilities, e.g. DIGSI® 4 via modem and/or a star connection. All DIGSI® 4 opera-
tions are possible via this interface,
G The PC-interface at front is used for on-site connection of a PC, on which DIGSI® 4
is installed. All operations that are possible using DIGSI® 4 can be done at this in-
terface.
In the DIGSI® 4 Interface Settings window (under Serial Ports) you can define,
among other items, settings for:
G Transmission protocols and
G Transmission speeds.
Note:
The service (DIGSI® 4, Modem) and system interface (SCADA) can be equipped with
different modules for connection to other devices via optical fibers or an RS 232/485
bus.
The following an example for the configuring of an IEC-interface. In Chapter 5 you will
learn more about how to configure further protocols.
To set the framing and baud rate:
• Double click on Serial Ports in the data window and enter the specific settings
in the window that follows.
7SD52 Manual 4-31

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Figure 4-28 DIGSI® 4, interface settings window
Read-out on the The interface settings can be checked using the SIPROTEC® 4 device operator con-
Operator Control trol panel.
Panel
In the main menu, select Settings → Setup/Extras → Serial Ports → follow-
ing menus.
SETUP/EXTRAS 03/06
---------------------
Date/Time –> 1
Clock Setup –> 2
Serial Ports –> 3 SERIAL PORTS 01/03
Device–ID –> 4 ---------------------
Front Port –> 1
MLFB/Version –> 5 5 System Port –> 2
Contrast –> 6 Service Port –> 3
Figure 4-29 Read-out of serial interface settings from the operator control panel, example
Note:
The interface for connecting a time control device is described in the Sub-section 4.14,
Time Synchronization.
4-32 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
4.15 Passwords
4.15 Passwords
Passwords are assigned to a SIPROTEC® 4 device to protect against unintended

changes to the device or unauthorized operations from the device, such as switching.
The following access levels are defined:
G Switching/tagging/manual overwrite,
G Non-interlocked switching,
G Test and diagnostics,
G Hardware test menus,
G Individual settings,
G Setting Groups.
Figure 4-30 DIGSI® 4, window indicating the active passwords — example
When using DIGSI® 4 or the operator control panel on the SIPROTEC® 4 device, a
password is requested for the specific functions.
Note:
Password protection against unauthorized access is only in place during on-line op-
eration. The passwords for setting changes are first activated when the settings are
loaded into the device. The passwords are irrelevant in the DIGSI® 4 off-line mode.
To deactivate a password, you must know the password.
7SD52 Manual 4-33

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Passwords can only be changed using DIGSI® 4.

To change an existing password:
• In the Passwords window shown in Figure 4-30, double click on the password to be
changed. In the next window (Figure 4-31), enter the present password, the new
password, and confirm with the new password again and OK.
Figure 4-31 DIGSI® 4, changing passwords
Passwords are numbers up to 8 digits.

At delivery all passwords are set to 000000.
Note:
If the password for setting group switching has been forgotten, a temporary password
can be received from Siemens. The temporary password can be used to define a new
password for this function.
The registration number of the DIGSI® 4 software package will be required to re-
ceive the temporary password.
4-34 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Configuration 5
Configuration is the process of customizing the relay for the intended application.
To accomplish this, the following questions must be answered:
• Which functions do you need?
• Which information and measured quantities need to be retrieved via which inputs?
• Which information, measured data, and control actions need to be issued via which
outputs?
• Which user-definable functions need to be performed in CFC (Continuous Function
Chart)?
• Which information should be displayed on the front panel of the device?
• Which interfaces are to be used?
• Which time source is to be used to synchronize the internal clock?
This chapter describes in details how to configure the 7SD52.
5.1 Configuration of the Scope of Functions 5-2

5.2 Configuration of Information, Measured Values, and Commands 5-7
5.3 Creating User Defined Functions with CFC 5-31
5.4 Serial Interfaces 5-40
5.5 Date and Time Stamping 5-44
7SD52 Manual 5-1

C53000–G1176–C132–2
5 Configuration
5.1 Configuration of the Scope of Functions
General The 7SD52 relay contains a series of protective and additional functions. The scope
of hardware and firmware is matched to these functions. Furthermore, commands
(control actions) can be suited to individual needs of the protected object. In addition,
individual functions may be enabled or disabled during configuration, or interaction be-
tween functions may be adjusted.
Example for the configuration of the scope of functions:
7SD52 devices should be intended to be used for overhead lines and transformers.
Overload protection should only be applied on transformers. If the device is used for
overhead lines this function is set to Disabled and if used for transformers this func-
tion is set to Enabled.
Note:
Available functions and default settings are depending on the ordering code of the re-
lay (see ordering code in the Appendix for details).
Determination of Configuration settings may be entered using a PC and the software program DIGSI® 4
Functional Scope and transferred via the operating interface on the device front, or via the serial service
interface. Operation via DIGSI® 4 is described in Chapter 4 as well as in the DIGSI® 4
manual, order number E50417–H1176–C097.
Entry of password No. 7 (for setting modification) is required to modify configuration
settings (see Chapter 4, last section). Without the password, the settings may be read,
but cannot be modified and transmitted to the device.
Figure 5-1 Device Configuration dialogue box in DIGSI® 4 — example
5-2 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
The functional scope with the available options is set in the Device Configuration
dialogue box (see Figure 5-1) to match equipment requirements. To change a func-
tion, click on the corresponding line under Scope, and select the desired option in the
list which appears. The drop-down list closes automatically upon selection of an item.
Before closing the dialogue box, transfer the modified functional setting to the relay by
clicking on the item DIGSI → Device. The data is stored in the relay in a non-volatile
memory buffer.
The configured functional scope can be viewed at the front of the relay itself, but can-
not be modified there. The settings associated with the functional scope can be found
in the MAIN MENU under → Settings → Device Config.
Special Cases Most settings are self-explanatory. The special cases are described below.
If the setting group change-over function is to be used, the setting in address 0103
Grp Chge OPTION must be set to Enabled. In this case, it is possible to apply up to
four different groups of settings for the function parameters (refer also to Subsection
6.1.2). During normal operation, a convenient and fast switch-over between these set-
ting groups is possible. The setting Disabled implies that only one function parame-
ter setting group can be applied and used.
Address 0110 Trip mode applies only to devices with single-pole or three-pole trip-
ping. Set 1-/3pole if single-pole is also desired, i. e. if the device is supposed to op-
erate with single-pole or with single-pole/three-pole automatic reclosure. It must be
provided that the device is equipped with an automatic reclosure function or that an
external device is used to carry out the automatic reclosure. Additionally the circuit
breaker must be suited for single-pole tripping.
Note:
When changed address 0110, then first save this alteration by clicking OK. Re-open
the dialogue box, since there are other settings which are dependent on the selection
in address 0110.
The differential protection function DIFF.PROTECTION (address 0112) as a main

function of the device should always be Enabled. This also implies the supplemen-
tary functions of the differential protection such as breaker intertrip.
For the transmission of the protection signals each device is equipped with one or two
protection data interfaces. The assignment of the protection data interfaces is essen-
tial for the differential protection system, i.e. the interaction of the devices at the ends
of the protected object. Activate the protection data interface no. 1 in address 0115
P. INTERFACE 1, to activate the protection data interface no. 2 refer to address
0116 P. INTERFACE 2. At least one protection data interface has to be set to En-
abled, so that the differential protection makes sense. A protected object with two
ends requires at least one protection data interface. If there are more ends, it must be
guaranteed that all devices that belong together are interconnected directly or in-di-
rectly (via other devices). For more information about options see Section 6.4.1 refer-
ring to “Communication Topology”.
The Direct Local Trip (address 0122 DTT Direct Trip) is a command that is initi-
ated from an external device for tripping the local circuit breaker.
A preselection of the tripping characteristic of the time overcurrent protection can be
made in address 0126 Back-Up O/C. In addition to the definite-time overcurrent pro-
7SD52 Manual 5-3

C53000–G1176–C132–2
5 Configuration
tection (definite time) an inverse-time overcurrent protection can be configured that

either operates according to an IEC characteristic (TOC IEC) or to an ANSI charac-
teristic (TOC ANSI). The characteristics are shown in the Technical Data (Section
10.6). The time overcurrent protection may naturally also be set to Disabled.
If the device provides an automatic reclosure function (AR), the addresses 0133 and
0134 are relevant. If no automatic reclosure is desired for the feeder the device
7SD52 is connected to, or if an external device carries out the automatic reclosure,
address 0133 AUTO RECLOSE is set to Disabled. Automatic reclosure is only per-
mitted for overhead lines. It must not be used in any other case. If the protected object
consists of a combination of overhead lines and other equipment (e.g. overhead line
in a block with a transformer or overhead line/cable), reclosure is only permissible if it
can be ensured that it can only take place in the event of a fault on the overhead line.
In the address mentioned the number of desired reclosure cycles is set. Choose the
desired number of AR-cycles from a total scope of 8 AR cycles. You can also set
ADT (adaptive dead time): in this case the behaviour of the automatic reclosure de-
pends on the cycles of the remote end. However, at one end of the line the number of
cycles must be configured. This end must provide an infeed. The other end (or ends
in case of more than 2 ends) may operate with adaptive dead time. See Subsection
6.9.1 for detailed information.
The AR control mode under address 0134 allows a total of four options. You can
determine whether the sequence of automatic reclosure cycles is defined by the fault
situation of the pickup of the starting protection function(s) or by the type of trip com-
mand. The automatic reclosure can also operate with or without action time.
The Trip w/ Tact or Trip w/o Tact command setting is preferred when single-
pole or single/three-pole automatic reclosure cycles are desired and are possible. In
this case different dead times (for every AR-cycle) are possible after single-pole trip-
ping and after three-pole tripping. The tripping protection function determines the type
of tripping: single-pole or three-pole. The dead time is controlled dependent on this.
Using the Pickup w/ Tact or Pickup w/o Tact setting, different dead times can
be set for the auto-reclosure cycles after single, two- and three-phase pickup on faults.
The fault detection (pickup) image of the protection functions at the instant the trip
command disappears is decisive. This operating mode also enables the dead times to
be made dependent on the type of fault for three-pole AR-cycles; but tripping is always
three-pole.
The Trip w/ Tact or Pickup w/ Tact (with action time) setting provides an action
time for every AR-cycle. This is started by the general pickup signal (i. e. logic OR
combination of all internal and external pickup signals of all protection functions which
are configured to start the automatic reclosure function). If there is yet no trip com-
mand when the action time has expired, the corresponding automatic reclosure cycle
cannot be executed. See Subsection 6.9.1 for more information. For the time graded
protection this setting is recommended. If the protection function to operate with re-
closure does not have a general fault detection signal for starting the action times, se-
lect the setting Trip w/o Tact or Pickup w/out Tact (without action time).
For the trip circuit supervision the number of trip circuits that shall be monitored is set
in address 0140 TripCirc.Superv with the following settings: 1 trip circuit,
2 trip circuits or 3 trip circuits.
The number of relays (address 0143 NUMBER OF RELAY must be equal to the
number of ends of the protected object. Take into consideration that each set of cur-
rent transformer that limits the protected object. The line shown in Figure 5-2 provides
5-4 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
four ends and therefore four devices, as the line is limited by four sets of current trans-
formers. Two devices would normally be sufficient if current transformers 1 and 2 as
well as 3 and 4 are connected in parallel at the secondary side and if connecting each
pair of transformer sets to only one device. But, if an external fault occurred, causing
a high short-circuit current passing the current transformers 1 and 2, the devices
would be understabilized.
7SD52 7SD52
1 3
Device 1 Device 3
7SD52 7SD52
2 4
Device 2 Device 4
Figure 5-2 Protected object with 4 ends and 4 devices
If the device is connected to voltage transformers, set this condition in address 0144
V-TRANSFORMER. Only if set connected, the voltage dependent functions (meas-
ured values of voltages, power and power factor) can be registered by the device.
If a power transformer is located within the protected zone, set this condition in ad-
dress 0145 TRANSFORMER. The data of the transformer are registered by the device
during the configuration of the general protection data (see “Topological Data for
Transformers (optional)” in Subsection 6.1.3).
5.1.1 Setting Overview
Note: Depending on the type and version of the device it is possible that addresses
are missing or have different default settings.
Addr. Setting Title Setting Options Default Setting Comments

103 Grp Chge OPTION Disabled Disabled Setting Group Change Option
Enabled
104 OSC. FAULT REC. Disabled Enabled Oscillographic Fault Records

Enabled
110 Trip 1pole 3pole only 3pole only 1pole trip permitted
1-/3pole
112 DIFF.PROTECTION Enabled Enabled Differential protection

Disabled
115 P. INTERFACE 1 Enabled Enabled Protection Interface 1 (Port D)

Disabled
7SD52 Manual 5-5

C53000–G1176–C132–2
5 Configuration

116 P. INTERFACE 2 Disabled Disabled Protection Interface 2 (Port E)
Enabled
118 GPS-SYNC. Enabled Disabled GPS synchronization

Disabled
122 DTT Direct Trip Disabled Disabled DTT Direct Transfer Trip
Enabled
124 HS/SOTF-O/C Disabled Disabled Instantaneous HighSpeed/SOTF

Enabled Overcurrent
126 Back-Up O/C Disabled Time Overcurrent Backup overcurrent

Time Overcurrent Curve IEC Curve IEC
Time Overcurrent Curve
ANSI
133 Auto Reclose 1 AR-cycle Disabled Auto-Reclose Function

2 AR-cycles
3 AR-cycles
4 AR-cycles
5 AR-cycles
6 AR-cycles
7 AR-cycles
8 AR-cycles
Adaptive Dead Time (ADT)
Disabled
134 AR control mode with Pickup and Action time with Trip but wit- AR control mode
with Pickup but without hout Action time
Action time
withTrip and Action time
with Trip but without Action
time
139 BREAKER Disabled Disabled Breaker Failure Protection

FAILURE Enabled
140 Trip Cir. Sup. Disabled Disabled Trip Circuit Supervision

1 trip circuit
2 trip circuits
3 trip circuits
142 Therm.Overload Disabled Disabled Thermal Overload Protection

Enabled
143 NUMBER OF 2 relays 2 relays Number of relays

RELAY 3 relays
4 relays
5 relays
6 relays
144 V-TRANSFORMER not connected connected Voltage transformers

connected
145 TRANSFORMER NO NO Transformer inside protection

YES zone
5-6 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
5.2 Configuration of Information, Measured Values, and Commands
General Upon delivery, the display on the front panel of the relay, some of the function keys,
the binary inputs and outputs (output contacts) are assigned to certain information.
These assignments may be modified, for most information, allowing adaptation to the
local requirements.
During configuration, certain information within the relay is assigned to certain physi-
cal interfaces (e.g., binary inputs and output contacts) or logical interfaces (e.g. user-
defined logic, CFC).
It must be determined which information should be linked with which device interface.
It may also be determined which properties the information should have.
Messages and statistical values from earlier events can be lost during configuration;
therefore, operational and fault data and statistic counters which are memorized in the
relay should be read and saved if desired, prior to changing the configuration.
5.2.1 Preparation
Before configuration is started, the overall interfacing requirements must be assessed.

The required inputs and outputs must be coordinated with the number of physical in-
puts and outputs present on the relay. The types of indications and commands, and
their requirements, must be taken into account.
Indications Indications may be information of the device regarding events and conditions that can
be transmitted via output contacts (e.g. start-up of the processor system or a trip signal
of a protective function). These are defined as output indications. Indications also
include information from the plant to the relay regarding plant events and conditions
(e.g. position of a circuit breaker). These are defined as input indications.
Depending on the type, indications may be further classified. Figures 5-3 and 5-4
show typical indication types schematically. Two binary inputs whose normal condi-
tions are opposite, and which are monitored by the relay, are required for a double
point indication.
(Internal logic
information) (Plant)
Restart
(7SD52) L+ Output indication via relay contact
Figure 5-3 Output indication (OUT)
7SD52 Manual 5-7

C53000–G1176–C132–2
5 Configuration
M
e.g. mcb e.g. Isoloator
(7SD52) (7SD52)
L+ Binary input L+
(e.g. BI1) Binary input
L–
(e.g. BI 2)
(Plant)
(Plant)
Binary input
L– (.e.g. BI 3)
Single point indication (SP) Double point indication (DP)
Figure 5-4 Input indications (SP & DP)
Control Commands Control commands are output indications which are specially configured for the trans-
mission of control signals to power plant switching devices (circuit breakers, isolators,
etc.).
G For each device to be controlled, determine if switching is to be done with 1 contact,
11/2 contacts (single contact and common), or 2 contacts; with a single or double
command; and with or without feedback signals. See Table 5-1 and Figures 5-5 to
5-9. The information to be processed and the command type are determined with
these decisions.
G Assign the necessary binary inputs and outputs in the SIPROTEC® device to the
specific function. Important to note are:
− Messages and commands associated with a switching device must always occu-
py sequential binary inputs and outputs in the SIPROTEC® device;
− The TRIP (OFF)–command is always configured prior to the associated CLOSE
(ON)–command;
− Limitations may arise because of the commoning of some binary inputs and out-
puts in the SIPROTEC® device.
Once the type of a command has been established, DIGSI® 4 reserves a correspond-
ing number of output relay contacts. For this, the corresponding output relays are
numbered consecutively. This must be observed when wiring the relays to the corre-
sponding power plant devices to be controlled.
Table 5-1 shows the most important command types. They are made available as op-
tions in the configuration matrix for the SIPROTEC® device (see also “Binary Outputs
for Switching Devices” in Subsection 5.2.4). All double commands, with and without
feedback indications, are also available as transformer step commands. The following
Figures 5-5 through 5-9 show time diagrams, control settings, and the sequence of re-
lay positioning in the configuration matrix for frequently used command types.
Table 5-1 Most important command types
Single Command with With 1 relay without feedback C_S

Single Output with feedback CF_S
Double Command with With 2 relays without feedback C_D2
Single Outputs with feedback CF_D2
5-8 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Table 5-1 Most important command types
Double Command with Single With 3 relays without feedback C_D3

Outputs plus Common Output with feedback CF_D3
Double Command with Double With 4 relays without feedback C_D4
Outputs with feedback CF_D4
Double Command with Double With 3 relays without feedback C_D12
(Close) and Single (Trip) with feedback CF_D12
Outputs
For double commands, the first output relay is selected using DIGSI® 4. The other out-
put relays will be automatically selected by DIGSI® 4. In the sequence of output relays,
each TRIP command is placed before the associated CLOSE command. For
commands with feedback indications, DIGSI® 4 reserves another line in the configu-
ration matrix for the switching device feedback indications. Here, the OPEN position
feedback is placed before the CLOSED position feedback as well.
For Figures 5-5 through 5-9, the following abbreviations apply:
− C+ Relay contact for closing
− C– Relay contact for tripping
− CC Relay contact is common
− CCC Relay contact is common to a bus
− L+; L– Control voltage
CLOSE
command L+
C+
C+
CLOSE Switching
t device
1
L–
Matrix configuration: X
C+
Figure 5-5 Single command with single contact
7SD52 Manual 5-9

C53000–G1176–C132–2
5 Configuration
CLOSE TRIP
L+
command command
C+ C–
C+
CLOSE Switching TRIP
C– device
L–
1 2 t
Matrix configuration: XX
C+
C–
Figure 5-6 Double command with single contact each
CLOSE TRIP L+
command command C+ C–
C+
C– device
CC
CC
1 2 3 t
L–
Matrix configuration: XXX
C+
CC
C–
Figure 5-7 Double command with single contact each plus a common contact
CLOSE TRIP
command command L+
C+1 C+1 C–1
C+2 CLOSE Switching TRIP

device
C–1
C+2 C–2
C–2
L–
t
1 2 3 4
Matrix configuration: XXXX

C–1
C+1
C–2
C+2
Figure 5-8 Double command with double contacts (with 4 relays)
5-10 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
CLOSE TRIP L+
command command C+1 C–
C+1
C+2 device
C– C+2
L–
t
1 2 3
Matrix configuration: XXX

C–
C+1
C+2
Figure 5-9 Double command with double and single contacts (with 3 relays)
5.2.2 Structure and Operation of the Configuration Matrix
General This section deals with the structure and operation of the configuration matrix. The
configuration matrix can be viewed without making any configuration changes. Infor-
mation characteristics and configuration steps are described in Subsection 5.2.3, and
configuration is demonstrated in Subsection 5.2.4.
Configuration of information is performed, using a PC and the DIGSI® 4 software pro-
gram, via the operator or service interface. The configuration is represented in
DIGSI® 4 as a matrix (Figure 5-10). Each row is assigned to an information of the de-
vice. It is identified by a function number No, LCD text (display text D), an explanation
(long text L, minimized in Figure 5-10), and an information type T. The columns give
the interfaces which should be the sources and/or destinations of the information. In
addition to physical device inputs and outputs, there may be internal interfaces for
user definable logic (CFC), message buffers, or the device display.
7SD52 Manual 5-11

C53000–G1176–C132–2
5 Configuration
Filters Information Catalog Standard View Short view
Figure 5-10 Extract from the configuration matrix in the DIGSI® 4 user interface — example
Information in the rows is assigned to appropriate interfaces in the columns via an en-
try in the intersecting cell. This establishes which information controls which destina-
tion, or from which source which information is received.
In the configuration matrix, not only the configuration is shown, but also the property
of configuration. For example, information regarding an event which is configured for
display on a LED may be latched or unlatched.
The possible combinations of information and interfaces is dependent on the informa-
tion type. Impossible combinations are filtered out by DIGSI® 4 plausibility checks.
The matrix columns are divided into three categories: Information, Source, and Desti-
nation. To the left of the matrix, information is divided into information groups.
Reducing the The matrix may become very extensive because of the amount of information con-
Matrix tained within. Therefore, it is useful to limit the display via filtering to certain informa-
tion, thus reducing the number of rows.
5-12 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
The tool-bar below the menu bar contains two pull-down menus by which information
may be filtered. Using the first menu, the rows can be limited to indications, com-
mands, indications and commands, or measured and metered values. The second
menu allows to display only configured information, information configured to physical
inputs and outputs, or non-configured information.
A further reduction in the number of rows is possible, by compressing an information
group to one row. This is done by double-clicking on the group label area (located to
the far left). If this is done, the number of rows is reduced, allowing the user to focus
on the information groups of interest. A second double-click restores all rows in the
information group.
To limit the width of the matrix, two possibilities exist: The tool bar allows to switch be-
tween standard view and short view, or individual columns can be hidden.
In the latter case you double-click on the field with the column heading thus hiding the
contents of the associated column. In the example of Figure 5-10, the long text (L) un-
der Information is not shown. By double-clicking on long text field (L), the long text
becomes visible again, and vice versa.
With two options on the tool bar you may switch between standard view and short
view, thus modifying the all columns under the Source and Destination title
blocks. The columns associated with the Information block remain unchanged.
In standard view, all binary inputs, binary outputs, and LEDs are accessible, as shown
in Figure 5-10 for the binary outputs and LEDs.
In short view (not illustrated in the figure), a common column is displayed for each of
the sources and destinations. Within the individual cells of a common column, infor-
mation regarding the configuration type is available in an abbreviated form. For exam-
ple, the abbreviation H1 in a cell of the common binary input (BI) column means that
the corresponding information is configured with active voltage (High) to binary input
1. If an information is assigned to several sources or destinations, the abbreviations
of all destinations are shown, separated by commas. If there is not enough space in
the cell for the simultaneous display of all abbreviations, a double-click on the cell and
movement of the text cursor within the cell allows to scroll through the entire contents
of the cell.
To switch between standard view and short view, the menu item View can also be
used.
Information Groups All information is organized into information groups. In addition to general relay infor-
mation, information regarding individual device functions is also included.
By clicking on an information group title area with the right mouse button, a context
menu can be viewed, which contains information regarding the properties of that infor-
mation group. This is particularly useful if the information group is associated with a
function that contains parameter settings.
If the information group belongs to a protective function for the relay, a dialogue win-
dow can be accessed in which the settings of the protective function may be read out
and modified. The procedure for entering settings of a protective function is described
in general in Chapter 4. Details regarding the settings for various functions are found
in Chapter 6.
The settings group to be processed may be selected via the menu item View → Set-
ting Group.
7SD52 Manual 5-13

C53000–G1176–C132–2
5 Configuration
Information The column header Information contains the function number, the LCD text (dis-
play text), an explanation (long text), and the information type. The following abbrevi-
ations are used for the information types:
• Annunciations:
− SP Single Point indication (binary input, e.g. LED reset, refer also to
Subsection 5.2.1),
− DP Double Point indication (binary input, refer also to Subsection 5.2.1),
− OUT OUTput indication (protection output signals e.g. pickup, trip ...),
− IntSP Internal Single Point indication,
− IntDP Internal Double Point indication,
− TxTap Transformer Tap Changer.
• Control Commands for switching devices:
− C_S Single Command with Single output without feedback,
− CF_S Single Command with Single output with Feedback,
− C_SN Single Command with Single output Negated without feedback,
− C_D2 Double Command (2 relays) with single outputs without feedback,
− CF_D2 Double Command (2 relays) with single outputs with Feedback,
− C_D12 Double Command with 1 trip output and 2 close outputs without feed-
back,
− CF_D12 Double Command with 1 trip output and 2 close outputs with Feedback,
− C_D3 Double Command (3 relays) with single outputs and common output
without feedback,
− CF_D3 Double Command (3 relays) with single outputs and common output
with Feedback,
− C_D4 Double Command (4 relays) with double outputs without feedback,
− CF_D4 Double Command (4 relays) with double outputs with Feedback,
− C_D2N Double Command (2 relays) with single outputs Negated without
Feedback,
− CF_D2N Double Command (2 relays) with single outputs Negated with Feedback.
• Measured Values:
− MV Measured Value,
− MVU Measured Value, User defined,
− LVU Limit Value, User defined.
• Metered Values:
− PMV Pulse Metered Value.
The information contains various properties depending on the information type, which
are partially fixed and may be partially influenced.
Source The source denotes the origin of the information which the matrix receives for further
processing. Possible sources are:
− BI Binary Input,
− F Function key, which may serve to introduce a switching action,
− C CFC, i.e., message comes from user-definable logic.
5-14 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Destination The destination indicates to which interface the information is forwarded. Possible
destinations are:
− BO Binary Output,
− LED LED display on the device front panel,
− Buffer Annunciation Buffers with Operation messages (event log) and fault mes-
sages (Trip log) in the device,
− S System Interface,
− C CFC, Information is processed by CFC program of the user-definable logic,
− CM Control of switchgear if a switch plant is indicated in the Control Menu of the
device.
5.2.3 Establishing Information Properties
General Different types of information contain different types of properties. To view the proper-
ties associated with a specific information unit (indication, command, etc.), position the
mouse on the specific row under Information, and then use the right mouse button
to access a context menu where Properties can be selected.
For example, if the cursor is positioned on a specific output indication, the right mouse
button is pressed, and the menu item Properties is selected, then a choice of
whether the indication should appear in the oscillographic fault records (Figures 5-11,
5-12, and 5-13) is presented. For internal single point indications, the default status of
the indication (on, off, or undefined) after device reset can be selected as well (Figure
5-12).
Note that the possible properties of information for the system interface depend on the
facilities of transmission protocol. See also Section “Protocol Dependent Functions” in
the Appendix.
Output Indication
(OUT)
Figure 5-11 Information properties — example for the information type “Output Indication”
(OUT)
7SD52 Manual 5-15

C53000–G1176–C132–2
5 Configuration
Internal Single
Point Indication
(IntSP)
Figure 5-12 Information properties — example for the information type “Internal Single Point
Indication” (IntSP)
Singe Point
Indication (SP)
Figure 5-13 Information properties — example for information type “Single Point Indication”
(SP)
Double Point In addition to the properties entered for single point indications, a “Suppress interme-
Indication (DP) diate position” check box is available, which may be checked to suppress the interme-
diate indication during operations. If this field is marked, then the filter time, which can
also be set (see margin heading “Filtering/Contact Chatter Suppression” below), is
only effective for the intermediate (= undefined position) indication. Hence, briefly un-
5-16 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
defined conditions or contact chattering will not lead to an alarm; however, defined
changes in the condition (final positions) are immediately reported.
Figure 5-14 Information properties — example for information type “Double Point Indication”
(DP)
Transformer Tap The transformer tap changer position is communicated, via binary inputs, in a speci-
Changer (TxTap) fied encoding format (maximum of 62 positions). Only binary inputs that are in direct
order with regard to numbering can be used.
For the encoding formats available (binary code, BCD code, “1-of-n” code), four set-
tings (number of taps, number of bits, display offset, and tap interval) may be pro-
grammed. Their bit pattern corresponds to an individual transformer tap changer po-
sition which is represented in the device display and in the indication buffers (Figure
5-15).
If “Moving contact” is activated, the tap position is valid and accepted only when the
moving contact of the tap changer has signalled its final position.
7SD52 Manual 5-17

C53000–G1176–C132–2
5 Configuration
Figure 5-15 Information Properties Example for Information Type “Transformer Tap
Changer” (TxTap)
If none of the available encoding formats is selected, each individual tap changer po-
sition may be set in a table. The table is accessed after the pull-down menu Table for
encoding is opened, by selecting the button at the side.
The encoded transformer tap changer position bit pattern is transformed into digital
values between 1 and 62. An unrecognized pattern is interpreted as position 63.
The number of bits coincides with the number of the binary inputs to be configured,
and limits the number of positions to be represented.
Using the display offset, the beginning of the evaluated bits may have an offset of a
programmed number. The stepping of the transfomer taps may be modified, using the
tap interval feature (see example).
Example:
Four transformer position settings are to be represented by three binary inputs, using
the designators 3 through 6. The encoding is binary.
Orientation Desired representation

BI1 BI2 BI3
- - - 63.00
X - - 3.00
- X - 4.00
X X - 5.00
- - X 6.00
X - X 63.00
5-18 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Using three binary inputs (= 3 bits), a maximum of 23 = 8 position settings may be rep-
resented in binary code. In order to begin the representation of transformer tap chang-
er positions with the value 3, the display offset is chosen accordingly. The following
must be set on the information property window:
Encoding Binary
Number of taps 4
Number of bits 3
Display offset 2
Tap interval 1
The three binary inputs used for this must have sequential numbers, such as BI 1,
BI 2, and BI 3.
Filtering/Contact For input indications (single point indications SP, double point indications DP, trans-
Chatter Suppres- former tap changer TxTAP), filter times may be entered (pick-up and drop-out delays)
sion to suppress momentary changes in potential at the binary input (e.g. contact chatter),
refer also to Figure 5-13 to 5-15. Filtering occurs during an input change of state, with
the same setting values whether coming or going. Information is only distributed when
the new state continues to exist after a preset time interval (in milliseconds). The set-
ting range is from 0 to 86,400,000 ms, or 24 hours. Whether or not the filter interval is
restarted for each change of state during the filtering (filter re-triggering) is selectable.
It is also possible to set chatter suppression for each indication (Figure 5-13 and 5-14).
The contact chatter settings, themselves, are set the same for all input indications (see
Subsection 5.2.6).
User Defined Meas- For the information type “Measured Values User Defined” (MVU), the units, the conver-
ured Values (MVU) sion factor, and the number of significant digits following the decimal point may be
and Limit Values specified. For the information type “Limit Values User Defined” (LVU), a limit value may
(LVU) be programmed (Figure 5-16).
7SD52 Manual 5-19

C53000–G1176–C132–2
5 Configuration
Figure 5-16 Information properties example for information type “Limit Value User Defined”
(LVU)
If, for example, a low current reporter should be established using the CFC logic, and
the percentage of the measured current should be matched to a certain amp value,
the following values are entered in window according to Figure 5-16:
The Dimension is A (amps). The Conversion Factor is 150: 150 A corresponds
to 100 % input current. The limit value upon start-up is set for 120 A.
Entering Your Own The available information in the configuration matrix is determined by the device type
Information and the configured functional scope. If necessary, you may extend the configuration
matrix to information groups or individual information defined and entered by yourself.
Such user defined groups and information may be deleted at any time, in contrast to
predefined groups and information.
In order to insert a new information group, click on a cell within a group that is next to
the location where the new group should be located. After pressing the right mouse
button, a context menu appears (Figure 5-17).
Figure 5-17 Dialogue box to insert a new information group — example
If one of the first two alternatives is selected, a second dialogue box opens, in which
the name of the new information group is entered, in short text (display text) and in
long text (Figure 5-18). After clicking OK, the new group is positioned.
5-20 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Figure 5-18 Entry of the name of a user defined information group — example
Information may be entered into the new information group using the information cat-
alog (Figure 5-19). The information catalog is found in the menu bar under the View
option, or via an icon in the toolbar. User information may be entered into both the user
defined groups and any other available information group.
Figure 5-19 Information catalog window — example
The information catalog is basically structured the same way as the DIGSI® 4 Manag-
er with folders and sub-folders. To proceed to information of sub-folders in the catalog,
click on a plus symbol or double-click on an folder icon. The designation of the initial
levels of the catalog correspond to the information groups Annunciations, Com-
mands, Measured Values and Counter Values.
To insert a specific information unit into an information group, first select it in the cat-
alog, and using the left mouse button, it should then be dragged from the information
catalog window to a group area on the left of the matrix. After the mouse button is re-
leased, the new information unit is inserted into the proper group.
In order to change the user defined information, double-click on the field containing
the new information and edit the text.
Note:
When inserting information of the type Control with FeedBack, two new rows will
be created within the group: one line for the actual command, and one for the associ-
ated feedback message.
7SD52 Manual 5-21

C53000–G1176–C132–2
5 Configuration
Deleting Groups Only user defined groups and information can be deleted. To delete an entire group,
and Information click on the field containing the group designator, then press the right mouse button to
open the context menu, and select Delete Group. A confirmation window will ap-
pear (Figure 5-20).
Figure 5-20 Confirmation window before deleting a user defined group
Click Yes if you actually want to delete the group.
Note:
When deleting a group, all information definitions within this group will be deleted.
To delete individual entries, click under Information in the line with the entry to be
deleted. Then press the right mouse button to open the context menu, and select De-
lete Information. The remaining steps are the same as those for deleting a
group.
5.2.4 Performing Configuration
The actual assignment between the information (rows) and the sources and destina-
tions (columns) of the information is made in the cell of intersection. You click into the
cell and press the right mouse button. A pull down menu appears where you may de-
termine the properties of the assignment. In certain cases, the pull down menu will of-
fer X (allocated) or _ (not allocated) as the configuration choices. In other cases, three
options will be offered (e.g. L = latched, U = unlatched, and _ = not allocated). Entries
resulting in an implausible configuration are blocked and inaccessible to the user.
Configuring Binary Single point indications, double point indications, and pulse metered values can all be
Inputs as Sources configured as binary inputs. In addition, whether or not binary inputs are activated by
the presence of control voltage can be established. That is,
• “H” (High with voltage active): Control voltage at the binary input terminals activates
the indication;
• “L” (Low with voltage active): Control voltage at the binary input terminals deacti-
vates the indication.
5-22 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Note:
A single logical indication shall not be configured to two binary inputs, since an OR-
combination of both signals is not ensured. The operating program allows only one
combination, and deletes the first combination when a second is established.
In addition, a single point indication cannot be configured to a binary input and to CFC
as a source at the same time. In this case, an error message would be displayed. Click
on OK, and select another configuration.
Figure 5-21 Error message resulting from double configuration
If a double point indication (DP) is configured to one binary input (e.g. feedback indi-
cations from switching devices), the next binary input is also set in the matrix. If this
configuration is undone, the second binary input is automatically de-configured. The
order of the feedback inputs is always defined: TRIP before CLOSE.
Configuring a The four function keys on the front of the relay may also be configured as sources in
Function Key as a order to establish a link using CFC. In this situation, each function key may be linked
Source with one single internal indication. A function key may be occupied because it has al-
ready been set as an operating function for the relay. As delivered from the factory,
the device’s function keys F1, F2, and F3 are pre-configured:
F1 operating messages
F2 primary measured values
F3 overview of the last eight fault messages
Note:
When an indication is configured to a function key, its factory-assigned function is de-
leted. Re-establishment of the factory default function of the F-keys is only possible
by initializing the relay with a new factory parameter set created within DIGSI® 4. All
device settings have to be re-entered.
In order to configure a new indication, select one of the options (OPEN/CLOSE, ON/
OFF, etc.) from the indication group in the information catalog and drag it to the left
side of the matrix. Upon release, a new row appears in the matrix. If the mouse is po-
sitioned at the intersection of this row with column F, and the right mouse button is
pressed, a context menu opens (Figure 5-22) in which the function key may be set as
a source by clicking the proper choice.
7SD52 Manual 5-23

C53000–G1176–C132–2
5 Configuration
Figure 5-22 Selecting a function key as an information source — example
Configuring CFC as If certain information should be created as a result of the implementation of a user de-
a Source fined logic function (CFC), this information must appear in the matrix as a source from
CFC. Otherwise, this information will not be available to the user when editing the CFC
logic.
You must not configure information to CFC as a source if it is already configured to a
binary input.
Configuring Binary Up to 30 information units (commands and indications) may be configured to one bi-
Outputs as a nary output (output relay). One indication may be configured to up to 30 binary outputs
Destination (LEDs and output relays).
During configuration of binary outputs, you may select, for each output relay (besides
of the logic function itself), whether it should be latched (L) or unlatched (U). If you se-
lect latched, the output relay remains energized, even after the indication is no longer
present. It must be manually reset by pressing the LED Reset button on the front panel
of the device, or via a binary input with the indication function “>LED Reset”, or via
the serial system interface. If unlatched is selected, the output relay disengages as
soon as the indication disappears.
Accelerated Binary The binary outputs BA1 up to BA7 of device 7SD52 have a response time which is
Outputs approx. 2 ms shorter. Therefore they are very suited for sending trip and close com-
mands of the protection functions as well as for remote commands.
High-Speed Binary Depending on the version (7SD52**–*N/P/Q/R/S/T***–) there are five solid-state high-
Outputs speed binary outputs: BA16, BA20, BA21, BA22 and BA23. They have a response
time of less than 1 ms. Concerning these device versions these outputs should be giv-
en preference for the issuing of trip commands.
Binary Outputs for A special case is the configuring binary outputs for switching devices. For switching
Switching Devices devices, the type of command (e.g., single or double commands, with or without feed-
back) is defined and configured to the output relay. If the preset command types are
not desired, then appropriate command types can be selected from the Information
catalog (see also “Entering Your Own Information” in the previous subsection) and in-
serted into the configuration matrix.
5-24 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Example:
Double Command with
2 relays (acc. Table 5-1)
Figure 5-23 Window information catalog (example for different command types)
If a command with multiple outputs is configured, all binary outputs required in the ma-
trix for the configuration are automatically defined. If one of these outputs is de-con-
figured, all other binary outputs associated with the command will be automatically de-
configured.
Please pay attention to the comments and switching examples in Section 5.2.1, par-
ticularly the fixed defined sequence of relay assignments (TRIP before CLOSE).
When configuring commands, the context menu is dependent on the type of com-
mand. In some cases, the selection latched/unlatched is not available. Instead, the al-
ternatives are X (configured), _ (not configured), and F (busy flag). The latter means,
independent of the switching direction, an indication is issued during each operation
of the switching device.
For double commands with a common output, a fourth alternative C (Common contact)
appears. Using this, one binary output may be defined as the common output (com-
mon contact). When this is the case, several double commands with common contacts
may be assigned to the same common output (common contact), thus saving binary
outputs. This assumes the signals at the common outputs have the same potential.
Using the Object Properties dialogue window, additional properties for com-
mands issued to the switching device may be defined. Thus, the operating mode
(pulse or latched output of a switching command), the seal-in time for pulse com-
mands, the output delay of the command, and feedback monitoring may be set (see
Figure 5-24). The output delay is relevant for equipment which removes an indication
before the switching is completed.
7SD52 Manual 5-25

C53000–G1176–C132–2
5 Configuration
Figure 5-24 Dialogue box: Object properties for a command with feedback — example
The conditional checks that should be conducted before execution of a switching com-
mand can also be defined:
• Device position (scheduled/actual): The switching command is ignored and a cor-
responding indication is issued if the switching device is already in the intended po-
sition. If this check is activated, switching direction control occurs not only for inter-
locked, but also for non-interlocked switching.
• Zone controlled (Bay Specific Interlocking): Logic functions created with CFC in the
relay are processed for interlocked switching.
• Blocked by protection: CLOSE commands to the switchgear are blocked as soon
as one of the protective functions or elements in the relay picks up. TRIP com-
mands, in contrast, can always be executed.
• Double operation: Parallel switching operations are blocked with respect to each
other: while one switching operation is being conducted, a second one cannot be
performed with the same switching object.
• Switching Authority – Local Commands: A local control switching command is only
allowed if local control is enabled on the relay (via lock-switch or setting).
• Switching Authority – Remote Commands: A remote control switching command is
only allowed if remote control is enabled on the relay (via lock-switch or setting).
Configuring a LED Single point indications (SP), output indications (OUT), and internal single point indi-
Display as a Desti- cations (IntSP) may be assigned to LEDs. When this is done, you may select whether
nation the indications are to be latched (L) or unlatched (U).
Up to 10 indications may be assigned to a LED display. One indication may be as-
signed to a maximum of 10 outputs (LEDs and output relays).
5-26 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Configuring an Dependent on the type and version of a relay, a maximum of three indication buffers
Indication Buffer may be available for messages: Operation (Event Log) Buffer (O), Fault (Trip Log)
as a Destination Buffer (T) and Earth Fault Message Buffer (E). The indications from protective func-
tions are firmly assigned to these indication buffers. For the others, Table 5-2 provides
an overview of which indication type may be configured to which buffer.
Table 5-2 Overview of Indication Buffers
Information Type ↓ \Message Buffer → O E T

Single Point Indications (SP) X X
Double Point Indications (DP) X
Output Indications (OUT) X X
Internal Single Point Indications (IntSP) X X
Internal Double Point Indications (DP) X
Select one of the following options for the named indication types:
• O (on or coming) – the indication is stored in the buffer with the time of its arrival,
• OO (on/off or coming/going) – the indication is stored in the buffer with the time of
its arrival and departure,
• _ (not configured) – the indication is not stored in a buffer.
Configuring CFC Single point, double point, and output indications, as well as limit and measured val-
as a Destination ues, may be configured to CFC as the destination. This is a precondition for this infor-
mation being processed by CFC.
Configuring the In addition to the measured values available in the relay, user defined measured and
Measured Value limit values may be configured into the measured value window. These values also
Window as a Desti- become available in the device display in the assigned measurement window.
nation
Configuring the User defined pulse values derived from the measured values may be configured into
Metered Value the metered value window so that they may be displayed at the front relay panel.
Window as a
Destination
Retrieving Device Retrieving the configurations is also possible from the device front. You may access
Configurations configuration information under Main Menu: → Settings → Masking (I/O).
from the Device
The menu title MASKING (I/O) appears in the title bar. Configuration information re-
Front
garding each (physical) input and output is indicated in the display.
Any new user defined information is also shown in the display once loaded into the
relay from DIGSI® 4.
When selecting the MASKING (I/O) menu, either binary inputs, LEDs, or binary out-
puts may be selected. Selection of binary inputs is illustrated in Figure 5-25.
7SD52 Manual 5-27

C53000–G1176–C132–2
5 Configuration
MASKING (I/O) 01/03

---------------------
>Binary Inputs –> 1 BINARY INPUTS 02/11
>LED –> 2 ---------------------
Binary Outputs –> 3 >Binary Input 1–> –
>Binary Input 2–> –
Figure 5-25 Reading the configuration in the front display of the device — example
Information regarding a binary input may be displayed by using the navigation keys to
select the binary input. See Figure 5-26.
BINARY INPUT 2
---------------------
>>Reset LED SP H
---------------------
Status at Terminal 0
Figure 5-26 Selection of binary input 2 — example
In the example of Figure 5-26, information is displayed regarding binary input 2. The
display for binary input 2 indicates that it is configured as reset of the latched LEDs
using a single point indication with voltage active (High). The present conditions of bi-
nary input 2 is also given as 0 (not active). If a binary input is active, a 1 is displayed.
Assignment of LEDs may be indicated at the relay, itself, using a replaceable labelling
strip with plain text on the front panel located, directly next to the LEDs.
Presettings The LED indication presettings, those of the binary inputs and outputs are summa-
rized in Appendix A, Section A.4.
5.2.5 Transferring Metered Values
The transferring of metered values from the buffer of a SIPROTEC® device to a sub-
station controller may be performed both cyclically and/or by external polling.
In the configuration matrix, click on Options and then on Restore Metered Val-
ues. A dialogue box, which contains a register for editing the individual values for cy-
clical transferring will open.
Cyclical Restora- Here, you may specify the source of the cyclical trigger for the transfer. Also, you may
tion set the time interval and determine whether the metered value buffer should be delet-
ed after transfer from the SIPROTEC® device has taken place.
Triggering occurs based on the absolute time set according to the set time interval.
5-28 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Figure 5-27 Dialogue box to restore metered values and program cyclical restoration
5.2.6 Settings for Contact Chatter Blocking
Contact Chatter The contact chatter filter checks whether the number of condition changes at a binary
Suppression input exceeds a preset value during a predetermined time interval. If this occurs, the
binary input will be blocked for a certain time, so the event list does not contain a large
number of unnecessary entries. The setting values necessary for this feature may be
entered in a dialogue box, as shown in Figure 5-28. This dialogue box can be found
from the open configuration matrix by clicking Options in the menu bar and then se-
lecting Chatter Blocking.
Figure 5-28 DIGSI® 4: Setting the chatter blocking feature
Defining the Moni- The operating mode of the chatter blocking feature is determined by five settings:
toring Criteria
• Number of permissible state changes
This setting establishes how often the state of a binary input within the Initial
Test Time may change. If this number is exceeded, the binary input is or remains
blocked. If the setting is 0 the chatter blocking is disabled.
• Initial test time
Within this time interval (in seconds), the number of state changes of a binary input
is checked. The time interval begins with the first activation of a signal to the binary
input.
7SD52 Manual 5-29

C53000–G1176–C132–2
5 Configuration
• Number of chatter tests

This number represents how many check cycles should be conducted before the
binary input is finally blocked. Please consider that even a high set value can be
reached over the normal life span of the device and could lead to blocking of the
binary input. Therefore this value can also be set to infinity. For this, enter the char-
acter sequence of oo.
• Chatter Idle Time
If the Number of permissible state changes at a binary input is exceeded
during the Initial test time or the Subsequent test time, the Chatter
idle time interval is initiated. The affected binary input is blocked for this time
interval. The Chatter idle time setting is entered in minutes. This settings can
only be programmed if the Number of chatter tests is not set to zero.
• Subsequent test time – Within this time interval, the number of state changes
at a binary input is checked again. This interval begins after the Chatter idle
time interval has expired. If the number of state changes is within allowable limits,
the binary input is released. Otherwise, the idle interval is restarted, until the maxi-
mum Number chatter tests is reached again. The Subsequent test time
setting is entered in seconds. This settings can only be programmed if the Number
of chatter tests is not set to zero.
The settings for the monitoring criteria of the chatter blocking feature are set only once
for all binary inputs; however, the status of the chatter suppression can be set individ-
ually for each binary input. See “Filtering/Contact Chatter Suppression” in Subsection
5.2.3.
Note:
Chatter blocking cannot be activated for any of the standard protective indications.
The following should be noted:

• If there is contact chatter at a binary input and the input is blocked, the correspond-
ing indication will be displayed with “CCF” (example: “>Door open CCF ON”). Al-
so, the indication “Contact chatter filter” reports this condition. Both mes-
sages are shown in the operating buffer (event log).
• Chattering of a single point indication is set as ON (coming) if the binary input is ac-
tivated by energization (configured High-active).
• Chattering of a single point indication is set as OFF (going) if the binary input is de-
activated by energization (configured Low-active).
• If this behaviour causes undesired results in individual situations, an interlocking
may be configured in CFC.
• Chattering of a double point indication will be considered as an “intermediate” con-
dition.
5-30 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
5.3 Creating User Defined Functions with CFC
General The 7SD52 relay is capable of implementing user defined logic functions which may
be processed by the relay. This CFC feature (Continuous Function Chart) is needed
to process user defined supervision functions and logic conditions (e.g. interlocking
conditions for switching devices) or to process measured values. Interlocking condi-
tions and command sequences, for example, may be programmed, using pre-defined
function modules, by persons without any specialized software programming abilities.
A total of 21 types of functional modules (FM), with which the desired functions may
be composed, are saved in a library. Detailed explanations are in the CFC manual,
order number E50417–H1176–C098, or in the DIGSI® 4 manual, order number
E50417–H1176–C097.
The creation of a logical PLC function is performed by means of a personal computer
using application DIGSI® 4 and transferred via the operator or service interface. In or-
der to create user defined logic functions, the indications and measured values re-
quired by these functions must first be configured in the matrix with CFC as the source
or destination (see Section 5.2).
CFC can be started by double-clicking on CFC. The names of all available CFC charts
will appear. The desired CFC chart for processing can be selected via a double-click
of the mouse. The CFC program will start, and the chart will be displayed. If no chart
is available yet, you can create a new chart via the menu Create → CFC–Chart.
Run-Time Proper- The functions to be implemented in CFC may be divided into four task levels:
ties
• Measured values: This task is processed cyclically every 600 milliseconds
(MV_BEARB = measurement value processing) and might become slower if the de-
vice is in pick-up state.
• System logic: Operation is triggered by events (i.e. these functions are processed
for each change of state at one of its inputs). System logic has lower priority than a
protection function and will be suppressed as soon as the relay picks up
(PLC1_BEARB = slow PLC processing).
• Protective functions: These functions have the highest priority, and, like the system
logic functions, are event-controlled and processed immediately after a change of
state (PLC_BEARB = fast PLC processing).
• Switchgear Interlocking: This task is triggered by commands. In addition it is proc-
essed cyclically approximately every second. It might becomes slower if device is
in pick-up state (SFS_BEARB = interlocking).
The function to be implemented must be associated to one of these four task levels.
To implement a function from the Settings → CFC menu, activate the menu by se-
lecting Edit, then Run Sequence, and then the desired task level (See Figure 5-29).
7SD52 Manual 5-31

C53000–G1176–C132–2
5 Configuration
Figure 5-29 Establishing the task level
Within the Run Sequence menu, select Edit, and then Predecessor for In-
stallation, to ensure that the function modules selected from the library will be im-
plemented into the desired task level (Figure 5-30).
Figure 5-30 Assignment of function modules to the selected task level — example
The proper assignment is important for several reasons. For example, if interlocking
logic were to be set up in the measured values task level, indications would constantly
be created by the cyclical processing, filling the buffer unnecessarily. On the other
hand, the interlocking condition at the moment of a switching operation may not be
processed at the right time, since measured value processing is done only every
600 ms.
Table 5-3 Selection guide for function modules and task levels
Run-Time Level
Function Modules Description MW_BEARB PLC1_BEARB PLC_BEARB SFS_BEARB
Meter process. Slow PLC Fast PLC Interlocking
ABSVALUE Absolute value X – – –

AND AND-gate – X X X
BOOL_TO_CO Boolean to control (conversion) – X X –
5-32 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Table 5-3 Selection guide for function modules and task levels
Run-Time Level
Function Modules Description MW_BEARB PLC1_BEARB PLC_BEARB SFS_BEARB
Meter process. Slow PLC Fast PLC Interlocking
BOOL_TO_DI Boolean to double point (conversion) – X X X

BOOL_TO_IC Boolean to internal annunciation
(conversion)
BUILD_DI Create double point annunciation – X X X
CMD_INF Command information – – – X
CONNECT Connection – X X X
D_FF D-flipflop – X X X
DI_TO_BOOL Double point to boolean – X X X
LIVE_ZERO Live-zero, non linear curve X – – –
LOWER_SETPOINT Lower limit X – – –
NAND NAND-gate – X X X
NEG Negator – X X X
NOR NOR-gate – X X X
OR OR-gate – X X X
RS_FF RS-flipflop – X X X
SR_FF SR-flipflop – X X X
TIMER Timer – X X –
LONG_TIMER Long timer (max. 1193 h) – X X –
UPPER_SETPOINT Upper limit X – – –
X_OR XOR-gate – X X X
ZERO_POINT Zero suppression X – – –
Configuration The configuration is performed within the configuration sheets (see Figure 5-31).
Sheet
Configuration sheet 1
IS1 1
FM1
Input 3 1
FM2 FM3 Output
signals signals
IS2 2 3 1 2 OS4
IS3 2
Function modules
Figure 5-31 Principal representation of function modules in a CFC working page
7SD52 Manual 5-33

C53000–G1176–C132–2
5 Configuration
The left border column of the configuration sheet shows the inputs; the right border
column shows the outputs of a function. In the above diagram the inputs are connect-
ed with input signals IS1 to IS3. These may be indications from the breaker (via binary
inputs), from device function keys, or from a protective function. The output signal
(OS4 in the diagram) may control an output relay, for example, and can create entries
in the message buffers, depending on the preset configuration.
Configuring and The default run-time sequence is determined by the sequence of the insertion of the
Connecting Func- logic modules. You may redefine the run-time sequence by pressing <CTRL> – <F11>
tion Modules on the PC keyboard. Please refer to the CFC manual. The necessary function mod-
ules (FM) are contained in a library located to the right of the configuration chart. The
module also indicates to which of the four run-time levels it is assigned. The modules
possess at least one input and one output. In addition to these inputs and outputs,
which are displayed on the configuration sheet, a module may have additional inputs.
The additional inputs can be made visible by selecting the module title block, pressing
the right mouse button, selecting the menu option Number Of I/Os... (see Figure
5-32), and then increasing the number.
Figure 5-32 Example of an OR gate: module menu
Under the Object Properties menu, you may edit the name of the module, insert
a comment, or edit run-time properties and connection parameters.
Connecting modules with each other, and linking them with system input and output
signals, is performed by selection of the desired modules input or output and subse-
quently pressing the right mouse button, and selecting the menu option Insert Con-
nection to Operand (see Figure 5-33).
Figure 5-33 Example of module input menu
5-34 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
A window with a list of input signals will appear. By selecting one of these signals and
activating with OK, the selected signal is entered into the left border panel and, from
there, a connection is created to the module input. Selection of an output is done in
the same manner. A connection between two modules is established by a simple se-
quential clicking on the two connections.
If the link line display becomes unwieldy or impossible because of space limitations,
the CFC editor creates a pair of connectors (target icons) instead. The link is recog-
nizable via correlated numbering (see Figure 5-34).
Connector
Figure 5-34 Example of a connector
Consistency check In addition to the sample configuration chart 1, other configuration sheets may exist.
The contents of any particular configuration sheet is compiled by DIGSI® 4 into a pro-
gram and processed by the protective device. For CFC charts developed by the user,
syntactic correctness can be verified by clicking the menu command Chart, and then
Check Consistency. The consistency check will determine if the modules violate
conventions of various task levels, or any of the space limitations described below.
Check of functional correctness must be performed manually.
The completed CFC chart can be saved via menu item Chart, and Close. Likewise,
the CFC chart may be reopened and edited by clicking on Chart, selecting the appro-
priate chart, and clicking on Open.
Please note that certain limits and restrictions exist due to the available memory and
processing time required. For each of the four PLC task levels there is only a finite
processing time available within the processor system. Each module, each input to a
module (whether connected or not), each link generated from the border columns de-
mands a specific amount of processing time. The sum total of the individual process-
ing times in a task level may not exceed the defined maximum processing time for this
level.
The processing time is measured in so called TICKS. In the 7SD52 the following max-
imum TICKS are permitted in the various task levels:
Table 5-4 Maximum number of TICKS in the task levels of 7SD52
Run-Time Level Limits in TICKS

MW_BEARB (Measured value processing) 10000
PLC1_BEARB (Slow PLC processing) 1900

PLC_BEARB (Fast PLC processing) 200
SFS_BEARB (Interlocking) 10000
7SD52 Manual 5-35

C53000–G1176–C132–2
5 Configuration
In the following table, the amount of TICKS required by the individual elements of a
CFC chart is shown. A generic module refers to a module for which the number of in-
puts can be changed. Typical examples are the logic modules AND, NAND, OR, NOR.
Table 5-5 Processing times in TICKS required by the individual elements
Individual Element Amount of TICKS

Module, basic requirement 5
each input more than 3 inputs for generic modules 1
Connection to an input 6
Connection to an output signal 7
Additional for each configuration sheet 1
The utilized processor capacity which is available for the CFC can be checked under
Option → Reports in the register Check consistency. By scrolling, an area is
reached, where information regarding the cumulated memory consumption of the
memory reserved for CFC can be read in percent. Figure 5-35 is an example showing
an over-utilization by 56 % in the task level PLC_BEARB (marked in the Figure), while
the other task levels are within the permissible range.
Figure 5-35 Read-out of the CFC configuration degree of utilization
If the limits are exceeded during configuration of the CFC, DIGSI® 4 issues a warning
(refer to Figure 5-36). After acknowledgement of this alarm, the system utilisation can
be viewed as described above.
5-36 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Figure 5-36 Warning message on reaching the limits
A few examples are given below.
Example 1 (MW): A configuration for low-current monitoring alarm (see Figure 5-37) which can be pro-
Low Current duced using CFC, should be a first example. This element may be used to detect op-
Monitor eration without load, or to recognize open circuited conditions. By connecting meas-
ured current values with a limit function via an OR function, an indication may be gen-
erated which can be used to cause switching operations.
• The configuration sheet is assigned to task level MW_BEARB.
• Four function modules (3 lower-value limit modules and an OR gate), are taken
from the function module library and copied into the configuration sheet.
• In the left panel, the measurement values to be monitored (IL1, IL2, IL3 in % of the
nominal current) are each selected and connected with the measured value inputs
of each limit module function.
• A lower limit setpoint value (IL<) is linked with the limit inputs of each of three limit
sensor functions.
• The limit value function outputs are passed on to the OR gate.
• The output of the OR gate is connected to the right border column at annunciation
“I< alarm”.
The limit value message is triggered when the preset limit value is below the setpoint
(low current) in at least one of the three phases. The hysteresis of the limit values is
fixed and need not be entered (5 % of set point plus 0.5 % of nominal value).
7SD52 Manual 5-37

C53000–G1176–C132–2
5 Configuration
Measurement FM:
Vol
IL1
Annunciation BO
Lower
Setpoint
Set points
Limit
IL<
Measurement FM:
Vol
IL2 FM:
Annunciation BO
Lower
Setpoint
>1 I<
alarm OUT
Limit
Set points
IL<
FM:
Measurement
Vol
Annunciation BO
IL3 Lower
Limit Setpoint
Set points
IL<
Figure 5-37 Under-current monitoring as an example of user defined measurement value

processing
Example 2: Interlocking logic (see Figure 5-38) is to be implemented for the operation of an isolat-
Isolation Switch ing switch using function key 4. The user must take the switch position indications of
Interlocking the corresponding isolation switch and the grounding switch into account. The CLOSE
and TRIP indications from the auxiliary contacts of each switch are used.
• Function modules NOR (2 required), XOR, and AND are taken from the library and
copied into the working page.
• The number of inputs of the AND gate is increased to 7.
• The CLOSE indications from the circuit breaker (CB) and from the grounding switch
(GS) are supplied to the inputs of the NOR functions.
• The OPEN indications from the circuit breaker (CB) and from the grounding switch
(GS) are supplied to the inputs of the AND function.
• The switch position indications from the disconnect switch (IS) are linked to the in-
puts of the XOR function.
• The outputs of the NOR and XOR gates are connected to the inputs of the AND
function.
• Function key 4 is linked with an input of the AND function.
• The output of the AND gate is linked to the right border column at the switching com-
mand “Disconnector Close”.
5-38 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Function
Key 4
CB is
CLOSED
≥1
CB is
OPEN
GS is ≥1
CLOSED
&
GS is Disconnector
OPEN Close
IS is
CLOSED
=1
IS is
OPEN
Door
is CLOSED
Figure 5-38 Interlocking an disconnect switch as an example of a user defined interlock pro-
tective function
Example 3 (PLC1): By using slow PLC processing, an additional, event-driven logic condition may be con-
Additional Logic structed which delivers indications regarding switch-gear operating status. These in-
dications may be passed externally via LEDs or relay contacts, or used as input sig-
nals for further logical links. In the example (see Figure 5-39), the output information
indication from the circuit breaker interlocking logic (CB TRIP) and a joint indication
from all protective element trip signals (Protection TRIP) are linked to a new “Circuit
Breaker Operation” message. Furthermore, the single point indication (SP) Test
Oper, which may be coupled via a binary input, is linked with an internal reusable
“Test oper.” message.
CB TRIP
≥1 Circuit Breaker
Protection TRIP
Operation
>Test Oper. Test Oper.
Figure 5-39 Additional logic as an example for a PLC_1 event-driven logic condition
7SD52 Manual 5-39

C53000–G1176–C132–2
5 Configuration
The device contains one or more serial interfaces: an operator interface integrated into
the front panel, and — depending on the model ordered — a service interface and a
system interface for connection of a central control system. Certain standards are nec-
essary for communication via these interfaces, which contain device identification,
transfer protocol, and transfer speed.
Configuration of these interfaces is performed using the DIGSI® 4 software program.
Click on Setting in the navigation window and double-click in the data window on
Interfaces. Next, select the specific data in the resulting dialogue box (Figure 5-
40). The dialogue box contains a varying number of tabs (depending on the capabili-
ties of the PC and the relay) with setting options for the interfaces.
Figure 5-40 DIGSI® 4, Settings of the PC interface — example
Serial port on PC In the first tab, you enter the communication interface of the PC which is connected to
the 7SD52 relay (COM1, COM2, etc.). Manual entry of settings for data format and
baud-rate need not be made if these values were taken from the “Operator Inter-
face” tab or the “Service interface” tab (if present). In fact, many settings are
read from DIGSI® 4 directly via the interface, and the corresponding setting fields are
then inaccessible (see Figure 5-40). Alternatively, the option Independent of de-
vice may be selected.
Data exchange is monitored by the PC for the reaction times of the device. You may,
within preset limits, configure maximum relay reaction times. The displayed values
RQ 1 and RQ 2 correspond to the preset reaction times in milliseconds. In general,
these values should not be modified. Modification is only necessary if a time-out often
occurs during communication with the device. In order to modify these values, enter
an integer value for RQ 1, between 200 and 9999, and for RQ 2, from 0 to 9999.
5-40 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Service and Opera- Settings for the interfaces at the device can performed in these tabs. The link address-
tor Interface es and maximum message gap appear in the Service Interface and Operator
Interface tab besides the settings for data format and transfer speed (example Fig-
ure 5-41).
Figure 5-41 DIGSI® 4, Settings for the service interface — example
For the IEC communication, each SIPROTEC® device must have a unique IEC ad-
dress assigned to it. Only the addresses which are within the current address range
and have not yet been occupied are displayed.
The setting for the maximum message gap is only applicable when the device is to
communicate using a modem via one of the interfaces. A gap is the maximum allow-
able time duration of interrupted transmission within one telegram transmission.
Transfer gaps are created when using modems as a result of data compression, error
correction, and baud-rate differences. For good data transmission between modems,
a setting of 1.0 sec is recommended. For poor connections, this value should be in-
creased.
Large values slow down communications in case of errors. When using a direct PC
connection, Max. message gaps may be set to 0.0 sec.
Note:
Do not use operator interface for modem communication!.
Other Interfaces Enter specific settings and addresses to identify devices in the other tabs, if neces-
sary, or check the preset values.
7SD52 Manual 5-41

C53000–G1176–C132–2
5 Configuration
Device addresses are used by the system to identify each device and must be unique
throughout the substation. Detailed instructions for setting the interfaces are available
in the “DIGSI® 4 Communications” manual.
If you desire to expand or modify interfaces later, refer to the modification instructions
for the interfaces, and if necessary for the hardware, see also instructions in Sub-sec-
tion 8.1.3 of this manual.
Profibus FMS on For a Profibus connection — if available — between a SIPROTEC® device and the
the PC SICAM® SAS or DIGSI® 4, a minimum transfer rate of 500 kBaud is recommended for
disturbance-free communication.
Signal Idle State For optical connections, the signal idle state is preset for “light off.” Modification of the
signal idle state is accomplished in the tab for the interface settings (see Figure 5-42).
Figure 5-42 Settings for an optical interface — example
Reading and Modi- Reading and partial modification of the most important interface settings is possible,
fying Interface Set- using the key-pad and display on the device panel. You may access the setting page
tings at the Device for the interface via MAIN MENU through Settings → Setup/Extras → Serial
Ports.
Under the sub-menu title SERIAL PORTS, you will find Front, System, and Service
Port, and selections may be made using the navigation button. By pressing the
button, the sub-menu for a particular interface can be accessed. The display and
the ability to change settings directly at the device are the same at both the front and
service interfaces. Figure 5-43 shows the data of the front (operator) interface, as an
example.
5-42 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
FRONT PORT 01/04

---------------------
>Phys.Addr. >>>>>1
>Baudrate 38400 Baud
Parity 8E1 (DIGSI)
Gaps 0.0sec
Figure 5-43 Reading and setting the front interface at the device panel — example
The type and number of system interface(s) is dependent on the device type and ver-
sion and might be completely missing. The system interface data may be read at the
device, but cannot be modified there, whereas the data for the operator and service
interface can be modified. In addition to the settings already mentioned for the opera-
tor and service interfaces, the signal idle state for an optical link may also be read at
the device. For an electrical interface, the response “OFF–Sig. Inactive” appears
as shown in Figure 5-44.
SYSTEM PORT
---------------------
>IEC60870–5–103 –> 1 IEC60870–5–103
>Profibus –> 2 --------------------
>Phys.Address > 1
>Baudrate 38400 Baud
Parity 8E1 (DIGSI)
Gaps 0.0sec
OFF–Sig. Inactive
Figure 5-44 Read-out of system interface setting values in the device display — example
7SD52 Manual 5-43

C53000–G1176–C132–2
5 Configuration
5.5 Date and Time Stamping
Integrated date and time stamping allows for the exact evaluation of sequence of
events, e.g. operational or fault messages (event log or trip log), or limit violations. The
following clock settings are available:
• Internal RTC clock (Real Time Clock),
• External synchronization sources (DCF, IRIG B, SyncBox, IEC 60870-5-103),
• External minute impulses via binary input.
Note:
The device is delivered from the factory with the internal RTC clock selected as the
time source.
For the differential protection with 7SD52 devices the time usually is synchronized in
only one device, the so-called “Timing Master” device; generally it is the device with
index 1. It synchronizes the other device (or other devices for more than two ends) via
the protection communication. Thus it can be assured that all devices of the protection
system operate on the same time basis. Note that this time synchronization is different
from synchronization of the measured values of the differential protection system. The
operation of the differential protection system including the synchronous exchange of
measured values works automatically and independent on this time synchronization.
Time Synchroniza- Settings for time synchronization may be found in DIGSI® 4 under Settings → Time
tion synchronization (Figure 5-45).
Figure 5-45 Setting Window in DIGSI® 4 – example
5-44 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
To open the Time Synchronization & Format window, double-click on Time

Synchronization. See Figure 5-46.
Figure 5-46 Dialogue box for time synchronization and format in DIGSI® 4 — example
You may select the time standard for internal time stamping from the following modes:
Table 5-6 Operating modes for time synchronization
Item Operating Mode Explanations

1 Internal Clock Internal synchronization using RTC
2 IEC 60870–5–103 External synchronization using the system

interface and the IEC 60870–5–103 protocol
3 IRIG B Time signal External synchronization using IRIG B
4 DCF77 Time signal External synchronization using DCF 77
5 SIMEAS time signal Sync. Box External synchronization using SIMEAS

Sync. Box
6 Pulse via binary input External synchronization with pulse via bina-
ry input
7 Internal or Timing Master
8 IEC 60870 or Timing Master

as Item 1 to 6 but the time is normally syn-
9 IRIG B or Timing Master chronized by the timing master; only in case
10 DCF77 or Timing Master if transmission failure the time is synchro-
nized by the selected source
11 Sync. Box or Timing Master
12 Binary input or Timing Master
7SD52 Manual 5-45

C53000–G1176–C132–2
5 Configuration
The RTC runs, even when the auxiliary voltage is absent, by means of an internal bat-
tery. During the device powering up, or if the auxiliary voltage has failed, this RTC is
the first synchronization source for the internal clock, independent of operating mode
selected.
In “Internal” mode, the system time is controlled using only the RTC as the syn-
chronization source. It may be set manually. The procedure for manual date/time set-
ting is given in Section 7.2.1.
If an external source is selected, only the selected synchronization source is used. If
the source fails, the internal clock continues unsynchronized.
If time synchronization is to take place via a central control system, the option IEC–
60870–5–103 must be selected (Figure 5-46).
When using radio clock signals, you must take into account that it can take up to three
minutes after device start-up or restored reception for the received time signal to be
decoded. The internal clock is not re-synchronized until then.
With IRIG B, the year must be set manually, because this standard does not include
a year value. Note: If in IRIG B the year date is erroneously set to a year date before
“1991”, the year is set to “1991” during the first synchronization.
For synchronization using pulses via a binary input, the present device time will ad-
vance to 00 seconds of the next minute for values greater than or equal 30 seconds
when the positive slope of the pulse arrives. For second values less than 30, the de-
vice time will be set to 00 seconds of the current minute. Because this signal is not
monitored, each pulse has a direct effect on the internal clock.
For the device or devices wherein the time is normally synchronized by the “Timing
Master”, set one of the options adding “...or timing master” (Item 7 to 12 in
Table 5-6). The indicated time is then only applied by the device if it does not receive
a time from the “Timing master”.
Synchronization The “Synchronization Offset” (Time correction) setting allows correlation of the
Offset time signal received from the radio clock to local time (time zone). The maximum set-
table offset is ± 23 h 59 min = ±1439 min.
Error Message The tolerance time (Monitoring / Fault indication after) for time synchroni-
Based on Toler- zation fault indicates how long cyclical synchronization may be absent until an alarm
ance Time is given.
External or internal synchronization normally occurs every minute. The setting for the
tolerance time must, therefore, always be at least two minutes. Under poor radio clock
reception conditions, you may delay the trigger of the “error” status condition even
longer.
Changing the Syn- When changing synchronization mode, the hardware will change over to the new
chronization Mode source within one second. This causes breakdown of cyclical synchronization, and the
internal clock will be disrupted — as at start-up — until the new synchronization
source takes over.
After modification to the synchronization offset in the time signal/operating mode, or
when changing year in IRIG B, the cyclical synchronization is not lost, but there is a
jump. To call attention to this, the time value causing a jump is reported with “Time
5-46 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
interruption ON” — without the synchronization offset, and subsequently with

“Time interruption OFF” — with the synchronization offset.
Operating Messag- After the “Time interruption ON” message, the you must take into account that
es from the Timing the clock will jump. This message is issued under the following circumstances:
System
− if a synchronization interruption lasts longer than the tolerance time interval men-
tioned above, or as mentioned above, if the synchronization mode is changed;
− if a time jump is anticipated. The message itself is stamped with the old time.
The message “Time interruption OFF” is triggered:
− when the synchronization is re-established (e.g., after a break in reception by the
radio clock);
− immediately after a time jump. This message is stamped with the new time after the
jump, thus allowing determination of the jump interval.
Time Format The time display may be set using either the European format (DD.MM.YYYY) or the
US format (MM/DD/YYYY).
7SD52 Manual 5-47

C53000–G1176–C132–2
5 Configuration
5-48 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Functions 6
This chapter describes the numerous functions available on the SIPROTEC® 7SD52
relay. The setting options for each function are explained, including instructions to de-
termine setting values and formulae where required.
6.1 General 6-2

6.2 Differential Protection 6-23
6.3 Breaker Intertrip and Remote Tripping 6-38
6.4 Protection Data Interfaces and Differential Protection Topology 6-42
6.5 Direct Local Trip 6-54
6.6 Direct Remote Trip and Transmission of Binary Information (optional) 6-56
6.7 Instantaneous High-Current Switch-onto-Fault Protection 6-60
6.8 Time Overcurrent Protection 6-64
6.9 Automatic Reclosure 6-79
6.10 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection 6-108
6.11 Thermal Overload Protection 6-125
6.12 Monitoring functions 6-129
6.13 Function Control 6-142
6.14 Commissioning Tools 6-155
6.15 Ancillary Functions 6-157
6.16 Processing of Commands 6-168
7SD52 Manual 6-1

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
6.1 General
A few seconds after the device is switched on, the initial display appears in the LCD.
In the 7SD52 the measured values are displayed.
The setting parameters can be entered via the keypad and display on the front of the
device, or by means of a personal computer connected to the front or service interface
of the device utilising the DIGSI® 4 software package. The level 5 password (individ-
ual parameters) is required.
From the Select the MAIN MENU by pressing the MENU key. Using the key, select Settings,
DeviceFront and then press the key to navigate to the SETTINGS display (see Figure 6-1).
In the SETTINGS display, use the key to select the desired function, and then use
the key to navigate to that function (e.g. use the key to select the P.System
Data1 function, and then use the key to navigate to the P.SYSTEM DATA1 dis-
play, as shown in Figure 6-2).
In general, an item number appears in the menu list to the right of each selection. Nav-
igation can be accomplished using the item number in place of the and keys.
This feature is particularly helpful in large menus (e.g. setting lists). Based on the ex-
ample above, from the MAIN MENU, the SETTINGS display can be reached by press-
ing 4 on the keypad, and then the P.SYSTEM DATA1 display can be reached by
pressing 0 3 on the keypad.
MAIN MENU 04/05

---------------------
Annunciation –> 1
Measurement –> 2
Control –> 3
Settings –> 4 SETTINGS 03/11
Test/Diagnosis–> 5 ---------------------
Device Config.–> 01
P.System Data1–> 03
Active Group is A
Figure 6-1 Example of navigation from the front control panel
Each setting contains a four-digit address number followed by the setting title as
shown in Figure 6-2. The value of the current setting is displayed in the line just below
the setting address number and title. The value may be text (Figure 6-2, setting 0201)
or numerical (Figure 6-2, setting 0202).
P.SYSTEM DATA1 01/16

---------------------
0201 CT Starpoint
towards Line
0202 Unom PRIMARY
12.00kV
Figure 6-2 Example of power system data display
6-2 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6.1 General
Settings are selected using the and keys. When the ENTER key is pressed, the
user is prompted for a password. The user should enter Password No. 5 and then
press the ENTER key. The current value of the setting appears in a text box, with a blink-
ing text insertion cursor.
Text Values A text setting may be modified using the and keys to select one of two or more
options.
Numerical Values A numerical setting may be modified by overwriting the current value using the numer-
(including ∞) ical keypad (see Figure 6-3). A value of “infinity” may be entered by pressing the dec-
imal key twice . . . The “∞”−symbol will appear in the display.
If the number entered is not within allowable limits, the maximum or minimum allow-
able value will appear in the lower portion of the display. To enter a new, allowable
value, the ENTER key should be pressed again.
Note that measured values and limit values must be entered in secondary quantities
when using the front control panel of the device.
Confirmation Any modification to a setting value must be confirmed by pressing the ENTER key. A
blinking asterisk is an indication that setting modification mode is still open. Other
modifications can be made to settings, even in sub-menus (if present), as long as set-
ting modification mode is still open. The actual modification of settings occurs once
setting modification mode is closed (see below, “Exiting the Setting Mode”).
Example for numerical setting:

P.SYSTEM DATA1 02/16
---------------------
0202>Unom PRIMARY ENTER
> >12.00kV
PW Settings? Enter password No. 5 and confirm with

=------- ENTER
0202
Unom PRIMARY 15.00 Enter the new value and confirm with ENTER
P.SYSTEM DATA [02/16 The modified setting value appears in the

--------------------- list; a blinking asterisk in the title bar indi-
0202 Unom PRIMARY cates setting modification mode is still
> > > 15.00kV
open.
Figure 6-3 Example of setting modification using the front control panel
If a setting modification is not confirmed with the ENTER key, the original value reappears
after one minute, and a message window appears after three minutes notifying the
user that the setting modification period has expired. When the ENTER key is pressed, a
further message window appears, notifying the user that the setting modifications
were discarded. Further modification of settings is possible by pressing the ENTER key
and re-entering the password.
7SD52 Manual 6-3

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
Exiting the Setting If an attempt is made to exit setting modification mode using the key or the MENU key,
Mode the message Are you sure? will be displayed followed by the responses Yes, No,
and Escape (see Figure 6-4). If the response Yes is selected, modification of settings
can be confirmed by pressing the ENTER key. To cancel pending modifications to settings
and exit setting modification mode, the response No must be selected. Press the
key until the response No is highlighted. Press the ENTER key to confirm and exit. Incor-
rect entries may be retracted in this manner. To remain in the setting modification
mode, press the key until the response Escape is highlighted. Press the ENTER key
to confirm, and the user can remain in setting modification mode without down-loading
modifications.
Are you sure?

>Yes No Escape ENTER
Settings are ok
>Continue ENTER
Figure 6-4 Ending the setting mode using the front control panel
:
From PC with When using DIGSI® 4, the settings can be carried out Offline. Double-click on
DIGSI® 4 Parameters to display the relevant selection.
Select the desired option, e.g. Power System Data 1, in the right-hand panel of the
window and double-click it (Figure 6-5).
Figure 6-5 Parameterizing with DIGSI® 4 — an example
The dialogue box for defining the individual parameters of the selected function is dis-
played. In our example we selected Power System data 1 (Figure 6-6). For exten-
sive functions, the parameters may be span several pages that can be accessed by
clicking on the tabs at the top border (in example Figure 6-6 Power system data and
Breaker).
6-4 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6.1 General
Figure 6-6 Power system data with DIGSI® 4 — an example
Each parameter has a 4-digit address number (under No.) followed by the designation
of the parameter (under Settings). Column Value can contain a figure or text. If you
position the cursor in the column Value on a field with a numerical value, the admis-
sible input range will be indicated.
Click on the value which you want to alter.
Text Values A drop-down list with the possible statuses is displayed for text parameters. Click on
the desired option. The drop-down list closes and the new “value” appears in the text
field.
Numerical Values Numerical values are entered by direct input, if necessary with decimal comma (not
(incl. ∞) dot!). For infinite you enter two small letters “oo” one after the other. Confirm the input
with the button Accept or proceed to a different value which you want to alter.
If the value entered is not within the admissible range of values or if a symbol has been
entered which is not admissible, a corresponding message will appear on the display.
After acknowledging with OK, the unaltered value is displayed. You can now make a
new input or alter a different parameter.
Primary or Second- Numerical values derived from measured quantities can be entered as either primary
ary Values or secondary values. DIGSI® 4 converts them automatically provided that the CT data
and the transformation ratios have been entered correctly.
To toggle between the input of secondary and primary values, proceed as follows:
G Click on Options in the menu bar (see Figure 6-7).
G Select the desired alternative by clicking on it.
7SD52 Manual 6-5

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
Figure 6-7 Selecting the input of primary or secondary values — example
Additional Settings Some parameters which are only used in exceptional cases or for special applications
may be hidden initially. They can be viewed if you click on Display Additional
Settings.
Confirmation Each entry may be confirmed by clicking Apply. Valid values are accepted automat-
ically when another field is selected.
The final acceptance of a modified setting takes place once the setting mode is exited
(see below “Exiting the Setting Mode”).
The dialogue box may be closed by clicking OK. Once closed, another function may
be selected for setting modification, or you can exit the setting mode.
Exiting the Setting In order to transfer the modified setting values to the relay, the user should click on
Mode DIGSI → Device. The user will be prompted for Password No. 5. After entering the
password and confirming with OK, data is transferred to the relay where modifications
become effective.
6-6 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6.1 General
6.1.1 Power System Data 1
The device requires some plant and power system data in order to be able to adapt its
functions accordingly. The data required include for instance rated data of the station
and the measuring transformer, polarity and connection of the measured quantities, if
necessary features of the circuit breakers, and others. These data are grouped under
Power System Data 1.
Press MENU to open the main menu. Select the option SETTINGS with key and with
key the menu Settings. Select Power System Data 1 in the menu SETTINGS
to retrieve the power system data.
With DIGSI® 4 double-click on Settings to display the relevant selection. The Power
system data 1 can only be changed using DIGSI® 4.
Polarity of the Cur- Address 201 CT Starpoint asks for the polarity of the current transformers, i.e. the
rent Transformers position of the transformer starpoint (Figure 6-8). The setting defines the measuring
direction of the device (current in line direction is defined as positive at all line ends).
The reversal of this parameter also reverses the polarity of the residual current input
IE.
Busbar
IL1 IE
IL2
IL3
IL1
IE IL2
IL3
Line Line
201 CT Starpoint 201 CT Starpoint
= towards Line = towards Busbar
Figure 6-8 Polarity of the current transformers
Rated Quantities of In principle, the differential protection is designed such that it can operate without
the Instrument measured voltages. However, voltages can be connected. These voltages allow to
Transformers display and log voltages, and to calculate various components of power. If necessary,
they can also serve for determining the line voltage in case of automatic reclosure.
During configuration of the device functions (Section 5.1), it has been determined
whether the device is to work with or without measured voltages.
In the addresses 203 Unom PRIMARY and 204 Unom SECONDARY you inform the de-
vice of the primary and secondary rated voltage (phase-to-phase) of the voltage trans-
formers. These settings are not relevant if no voltage transformers are connected and
configured when determining the functional scope according to Section 5.1.
In the addresses 205 CT PRIMARY and 206 CT SECONDARY you inform the device
of the primary and secondary rated currents of the voltage transformers (phases).
Address 206 CT SECONDARY must correspond to the nominal current of the device,
otherwise the processor system cannot be started. Also make sure that the secondary
7SD52 Manual 6-7

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
rated CT currents are in accordance with the rated current of the device, because
otherwise the device will calculate wrong primary data (refer also to Subsection
8.1.3.3 under margin header “Input/Output Board I/O–2”).
The correct primary data are required for the calculation of the proper primary infor-
mation of the operational measured values. If the settings of the device are performed
with primary values using DIGSI® 4, these primary data are an indispensable require-
ment for the fault-free operation of the device.
Connection of the Four inputs for measured voltages are available if the device is connected to the volt-
Voltages age transformers. This subtitle is not relevant if no voltages are connected.
Three voltage inputs are connected to the voltage transformer set. Various possibili-
ties exist for the fourth voltage input U4:
• Connect the input U4 to the open delta winding e–n of the voltage transformer set,
see also Appendix A, Figure A-18:
Address 210 is set in that case to: U4 transformer = Udelta transf..
With U4 connected to the e–n–windings (open delta) of the voltage transformer set,
the voltage transformation of the transformer is normally
⁄ --------------
- ⁄ ---------------
U Nprim U Nsec U Nsec
-----------------
3 3 3
The factor Uph/Uen (secondary voltage, address 211 Uph / Udelta) must be set
to 3/√3 = √3 ≈ 1.73. For other transformation ratios, e.g. for the calculation of the
residual voltage via interposed transformer set, the factor must be adapted accord-
ingly. This factor is important for the monitoring of measured quantities and the scal-
ing of the measured values and fault values.
• If the input U4 is not required, set:
Address 210 U4 transformer = Not connected.
In this case as well, the factor Uph / Udelta (address 211, see above) is impor-
tant, since it is used for the scaling of the measured values and the fault values.
Connection of the The device has four measured current inputs, three of which are connected to the cur-
Currents rent transformer set. Various possibilities exist for the fourth current input I4:
• Connect the input I4 to the residual current of the CT star-point of the protected line
(standard circuit arrangement, see also Appendix A, Figure A-15):
Address 220 is set in that case to: I4 transformer = Neutral current and
Address 221 I4/Iph CT = 1.
• Connect the input I4 to a separate ground current transformer of the protected line
(e.g. a summation current transformer, see also Appendix A, Figure A-16).
Address 220 is set in that case to: I4 transformer = Neutral current and
Address 221 I4/Iph CT is set to:
Transformation of ground current transformer
I 4 ⁄ I ph CT = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Transformation of phase current transformers
6-8 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6.1 General
Example:
Phase-current transformers 500 A/5 A
Ground current transformer 60 A/1 A
60 ⁄ 1
I 4 ⁄ I ph CT = ----------------- = 0.600
500 ⁄ 5
• If the input I4 is not required, set:

Address 220 I4 transformer = Not connected,
Address 221 I4/Iph CT is not relevant.
In this case, the neutral current is calculated from the sum of the phase currents.
Rated Frequency The rated frequency of the network is set under address 230 Rated Frequency.
The default setting is made in the factory in accordance with the design variant and
needs to be changed only if the device is to be used for a different purpose than or-
dered for. It can be set to 50 Hz or 60 Hz.
Trip Command The minimum trip command duration TMin TRIP CMD is set in address 240A. This
Duration duration is valid for all protection and control functions which can issue a trip com-
mand. It also determines the duration of a tripping pulse during the circuit breaker test
via the device. This parameter can only be changed with DIGSI® 4 under “Additional
Settings”.
The maximum duration of a closing command TMax CLOSE CMD is set in address
241A. This setting is valid for all closing commands of the device. It also determines
the duration of a closing pulse during the circuit breaker test via the device. This du-
ration must be long enough to ensure that the circuit breaker has closed. There is no
risk in setting it too long, because the closing command is interrupted in any case as
soon as a protective function trips the circuit breaker again. This parameter can only
be changed with DIGSI® 4 under “Additional Settings”.
Circuit Breaker 7SD52 allows a circuit breaker test during operation by means of a tripping and a clos-
Test ing command entered on the front panel or via DIGSI® 4. The duration of the trip com-
mands is set as explained above. Address 242 T-CBtest-dead determines the time
from the end of the tripping command until the beginning of the closing command dur-
ing the test. It should not be less than 0.1 s.
Current Transform- The basic principle of the differential protection assumes that all currents flowing into
er Characteristics a healthy protected section add up to zero. If the current transformer sets at the line
ends have different transformation errors in the overcurrent range, the sum of the sec-
ondary currents can reach considerable peaks due to the saturation of the transform-
ers when a short-circuit current flows through the line. These peaks may feign an in-
ternal fault. The features included in the 7SD52 to prevent errors in case of current
transformer saturation work completely satisfying if the protection knows the response
characteristic of the current transformers.
For this, the characteristic data of the current transformers and of their secondary cir-
cuits are set (see also Figure 6-17 in Subsection 6.2.1, page 6-27). The preset values
are adequate in most cases; they correspond to usual current transformers for protec-
tion purposes.
7SD52 Manual 6-9

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
The rated accuracy limit factor n of the current transformers and the rated power PN
are usually stated on the rating plate of the current transformers. The information
stated refers to reference conditions (rated current, rated burden). For example (ac-
cording to IEC 60185)
Current transformer 10P10; 30 VA → n = 10; PN = 30 VA
Current transformer 10P20; 20 VA → n = 20; PN = 20 VA
The operational accuracy limit factor n' is derived from this rated data and the actual
secondary burden P':
n' PN + Pi
---- = -------------------
n P' + P i
with n' = operational accuracy limit factor (effective accuracy limit factor)
n = rated accuracy limit factor of CTs (distinctive number behind P)
PN= rated burden of current transformers [VA] for rated current
Pi = internal burden of the current transformers [VA] at rated current
P' = actually connected burden (devices + secondary lines) [VA] at rated current
Usually, the internal burden of current transformers is stated in the test report. If un-
known, it can be calculated roughly from the DC resistance Ri of the secondary wind-
ing.
P i ≈ Ri · I N 2
The ratio between the operational accuracy limit factor and the rated accuracy limit
factor n'/n is parameterized under address 251 K_ALF/K_ALF_N.
The CT error at rated current is set under address 253 E% ALF/ALF_N. It is equal to
the “current measuring deviation for primary rated current intensity F1” according to
IEC 60185. It is
– 1 % for a 5P transformer,
– 3 % for a 10P transformer.
The CT error for rated accuracy limit factors is set under address 254 E% K_ALF_N.
It is derived from the number preceding the “P” of the transformer data.
With this data the device establishes an approximate CT error characteristic and cal-
culates the restraint quantity (see also Subsection 6.2.1).
Exemplary calculation:
Current transformer 5P10; 20 VA
transformation 600 A/5 A
internal burden 2 VA
Secondary lines 4 mm2 Cu
length 20 m
Device 7SD52 IN = 5 A
burden at 5 A 0.3 VA
The resistance of secondary lines is (with the resistivity for copper ρCu =
0.0175 Ωmm2/m)
2
Ωmm 20 m
R i = 2 ⋅ 0.0175 ------------------ ⋅ ----------------- = 0.175 Ω
2
m 4 mm
6-10 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6.1 General
Here, the most unfavourable case is assumed, i.e. the current (as it is the case with
single-phase faults) flows back and forth via the secondary lines (factor 2). From that
the power for rated current IN = 5 A is calculated
Pi = 0.175 Ω · (5 A)2 = 4.375 VA
The entire connected burden consists of the burden of the incoming lines and the bur-
den of the device:
P' = 4.375 VA + 0.3 VA = 4.675 VA
Thus the ratio of the accuracy limit factors is as follows
n' PN + Pi 20 VA + 2 VA
---- = ------------------- = -------------------------------------------- = 3.30
n P' + P i 4.375 VA + 2 VA
This leads to the following setting values:

Address 251 K_ALF/K_ALF_N = 3.30 (from the calculation above)
Address 253 E% ALF/ALF_N = 1.0 (from the accuracy for rated current)
Address 254 E% K_ALF_N = 5.0 (from 5P10)
The presettings correspond to current transformers 10P with rated burden.
Naturally only those settings are sensible where address 253 E% ALF/ALF_N is set
lower than address 254 E% K_ALF_N.
Power Transformer If the protected object covers a power transformer with voltage regulation, a differen-
with Voltage Regu- tial current may occur even during normal healthy operation under steady-state con-
lation ditions. This differential current depends on the current intensity as well as on the po-
sition of the tap changer of the transformer. Since this differential current is current-
proportional it is meaningful to consider it like a current transformer error. You may cal-
culate the maximum differential current at the limits of the tap changer under nominal
conditions (referred to the mean current) and add it to the current transformer error as
discussed above (addresses 253 and 254). This correction is performed only at that
relay facing the regulated winding of the power transformer.
Transformer YNd5
35 MVA
110 kV/25 kV
Y–side regulated ±10 %
From this resulting:
rated current at nominal voltage IN = 184 A
rated current at UN + 10 % Imin = 167 A
rated current at UN – 10 % Imax = 202 A
I min + I max 167 A + 202 A
mean current value I mean = --------------------------- = ------------------------------------- = 184.5 A
2 2
The maximum deviation from this mean current is
I max – I mean 202 A – 184.5 A
max. deviation δ max = ------------------------------- = ------------------------------------------ = 0.095 = 9.5 %
I mean 184.5 A
This maximum deviation δmax [in %] has to be added to the current transformer errors
as determined above, addresses 253 E% ALF/ALF_N and 254 E% K_ALF_N.
7SD52 Manual 6-11

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
It must be considered that this deviation is referred to the mean current value between
the extrema of the tap changer position at rated apparent power, not to the current val-
ue at rated voltage and rated power. This demands a further correction of the data of
the protected object as discussed in Subsection 6.1.3 under subtitle “Topological Data
for Transformers (optional)” (page 6-16).
6.1.1.1 Setting Overview
Note: The setting ranges and presettings listed in this table refer to a nominal current
value IN = 1 A. For a secondary nominal current value IN = 5 A the current values are
to be multiplied by 5. For setting primary values the transformation ratio of the trans-
formers also must be taken into consideration. The presetting of the nominal frequen-
cy corresponds to the nominal frequency according to the device version.
Note: Addresses which have an “A” attached to their end can only be changed in
DIGSI® 4, under “Additional Settings”.

201 CT Starpoint towards Line towards Line CT Starpoint
towards Busbar
203 Unom PRIMARY 1.0..1200.0 kV 400.0 kV Rated Primary Voltage
204 Unom SECONDARY 80..125 V 100 V Rated Secondary Voltage (L-L)
205 CT PRIMARY 10..5000 A 1000 A CT Rated Primary Current
206 CT SECONDARY 1A 1A CT Rated Secondary Current

5A
210 U4 transformer not connected not connected U4 voltage transformer is

Udelta transformer
211 Uph / Udelta 0.10..9.99 1.73 Matching ratio Phase-VT To Open-

Delta-VT
220 I4 transformer not connected Neutral Current (of I4 current transformer is

Neutral Current (of the the protected line)
protected line)
221 I4/Iph CT 0.010..5.000 1.000 Matching ratio I4/Iph for CT's
230 Rated Frequency 50 Hz 50 Hz Rated Frequency

60 Hz
240A TMin TRIP CMD 0.02..30.00 sec 0.10 sec Minimum TRIP Command Duration
241A TMax CLOSE CMD 0.01..30.00 sec 1.00 sec Maximum Close Command Duration
242 T-CBtest-dead 0.00..30.00 sec 0.10 sec Dead Time for CB test-autoreclosure
251 K_ALF/K_ALF_N 1.00..10.00 1.00 k_alf/k_alf nominal
253 E% ALF/ALF_N 0.5..50.0 % 5.0 % CT Error in % at k_alf/k_alf nominal
254 E% K_ALF_N 0.5..50.0 % 10.0 % CT Error in % at k_alf nominal
6-12 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6.1 General
6.1.2 Setting Groups
Purpose of Setting A setting group is a collection of setting values to be used for a particular application.
Groups In the 7SD52 relay, four independent setting groups (A to D) are possible. The user
can switch between setting groups locally, via binary inputs (if so configured), via the
operator or service interface using a personal computer, or via the system interface.
A setting group includes the setting values for all functions that have been selected as
Enabled during configuration (see Chapter 5). Whilst setting values may vary among
the four setting groups, the selected functions of each setting group remain the same.
Multiple setting groups allows a specific relay to be used for more than one application.
While all setting groups are stored in the relay, only one setting group is active at a
given time.
If multiple setting groups are not required, Group A is the default selection, and the
rest of this sub-section is of no importance.
If multiple setting groups are desired, address 0103 Grp Chge OPTION must have
been set to Enabled in the relay configuration. Refer to Chapter 5. Each of these sets
(A to D) is adjusted one after the other.
Copying Setting In most cases, only a few settings will vary from setting group to setting group. For this
Groups reason, an option exists to copy stored setting values from one setting group to anoth-
er setting group using DIGSI® 4:
To copy the setting values from setting group to another setting group, you should
highlight the setting group in the list whose setting values are to be copied. Next, go
to the menu bar, click on Edit and select Copy (see Figure 6-9).
Figure 6-9 Copying a setting group in DIGSI® 4
7SD52 Manual 6-13

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
The next step is to highlight the name of setting group in the list into which the setting
values should be copied. Go to the menu bar, click on Edit and select Paste. A con-
firmation box will appear (see Figure 6-10). Select Yes to copy the setting values.
Note:
All existing setting values in the setting group that has been copied to will be overwrit-
ten. An inadvertent copy operation can be reversed by closing and reopening the
DIGSI® 4 session without saving changes.
Figure 6-10 DIGSI® 4: Confirmation before copying a setting group
Setting groups may be copied more easily using the “Drag & Drop” feature. To use the
“Drag & Drop” feature, the name of the setting group in the list whose setting values
are to be copied should be highlighted. Holding down the left mouse button, the cursor
can then be dragged to the name of the setting group into which the setting values are
to be copied.
After copying setting groups, it is only necessary to modify those setting values that
are to be set differently.
Restoring Factory The factory settings may be restored for a modified setting group. To restore factory
Settings settings to a setting group, the name of the setting group whose settings are to be re-
stored is highlighted. Next, select the menu option Edit and then click on Reset. A
confirmation box appears, click on Yes to confirm restoration of factory settings.
Note:
All setting values in the setting group being restored to factory settings will be over-
written. An inadvertent reset operation can be reversed by closing and reopening the
DIGSI® 4 session without saving changes.
Switching between The procedure to switch from one setting group to another during operations is de-
Setting Groups scribed in Sub-section 7.2.2. The option of switching between several setting groups
externally via binary inputs is described in Subsection 8.1.2.
6-14 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6.1 General

301 ACTIVE GROUP Group A Group A Active Setting Group is
Group B
Group C
Group D
302 CHANGE Group A Group A Change to Another Setting

Group B Group
Group C
Group D
Binary Input
Protocol
6.1.2.2 Information Overview
F.No. Alarm Comments

7 >Set Group Bit0 >Setting Group Select Bit 0
8 >Set Group Bit1 >Setting Group Select Bit 1
Group A Group A
Group B Group B
Group C Group C
Group D Group D
6.1.3 General Protection Data (Power System Data 2)
General protection data (P.SYSTEM DATA2) includes settings associated with all
functions rather than a specific protective or monitoring function. In contrast to the
P.SYSTEM DATA1 as discussed in Sub-section 6.1.1, these settings can be changed
over with the setting groups. To modify these settings, select the SETTINGS menu op-
tion Group A (setting group A), and then P.System Data2.
The other setting groups are Group B, Group C, and Group D, as described in
Subsection 6.1.2.
The nominal operating data under Power System Data 2 should be set to the same
values at all ends of the protected object. This ensures uniform measured values dis-
played during commissioning and operation and sent to a central computer station.
Rated Values of The statements under this subtitle refer to protected lines (cables or overhead lines) if
Protected Lines no power transformer is situated within the protected zone, i.e. for models without
transformer option or if the transformer option is disabled during configuration of the
7SD52 Manual 6-15

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
scope of function (address 145 TRANSFORMER = NO, see Section 5.1). If a transformer
is part of the protected zone, proceed with the next subtitle “Topological Data for
Transformers (optional)”.
With address 1103 FullScaleVolt. you inform the device of the primary rated volt-
age (phase-to-phase) of the equipment to be protected (if voltages are applied). This
setting influences the displays of the operational measured values in %.
The primary rated current (address 1104 FullScaleCurr.) is that of the protected
object. For cables the thermal continuous current-loading capacity can be selected.
For overhead lines the rated current is usually not defined; set the rated current of the
current transformers (as set in address 205, Subsection 6.1.1). If the current trans-
formers have different rated currents at the ends of the protected object, set the high-
est rated current value for all ends.
This setting will not only have an impact on the indication of the operational measured
values in per cent, but must also be exactly the same for all ends of the protected
object, since it is the base for the current comparison at all ends.
Topological Data The statements under this subtitle apply to protected objects which cover a power
for Transformers transformer being situated within the protected zone, i.e. for models with transformer
(optional) option and if the transformer option is enabled during configuration of the scope of
function (address 145 TRANSFORMER = YES, see Section 5.1). If no transformer is part
of the protected zone, this subtitle can be passed over.
The topological data make it possible to relate all measured quantities to the rated
data of the power transformer.
With address 1103 FullScaleVolt. you inform the device of the primary rated volt-
age (phase-to-phase) of the transformer to be protected. This setting is also needed
for computing the current reference value of the differential protection. Therefore, it is
important to set the correct rated voltage for each end of the protected object
even if no measured voltages are applied to the relay.
In general, select the rated voltage of the transformer winding facing the device. But,
if the protected transformer is equipped with a voltage tap changer at one winding,
then do not use the rated voltage of that winding but the voltage that corresponds to
the mean value of the currents at the ends of the control range of the tap changer. In
this way the fault currents caused by voltage regulation are minimized.
Transformer YNd5
35 MVA
110 kV/25 kV
Y–side regulated ±10 %
Thus resulting for the regulated winding (110 kV):
maximum voltage Umax = 121 kV
minimum voltage Umin = 99 kV
Setting value for the rated voltage at this side (address 1103)
2 2
FullScaleVolt. = -------------------------------- = ---------------------------------------- = 108.9 kV
1 1 1 1
------------- + ------------ ------------------ + ---------------
U max U min 121 kV 99 kV
6-16 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6.1 General
The OPERATION POWER (address 1106) is the direct primary rated apparent power
for transformers and other machines. The same operation power value must be set
for all ends of the protected object since it is the basis for the current comparison
at all ends.
The power must always be entered as a primary value, even if the device is generally
configured in secondary values. The device calculates the rated current of the protect-
ed object from this power.
The VECTOR GROUP I (address 1162) is the vector group of the power transformer,
always from the device’s perspective. The device which is used for the reference end
of the transformer, normally the one at the high voltage side, must keep the numerical
index 0 (default setting). The relevant vector group index must be stated for the other
winding(s).
Example:
Transformer Yy6d5
For the Y–end is set: VECTOR GROUP I = 0,
for the y–end is set: VECTOR GROUP I = 6,
for the d–end is set: VECTOR GROUP I = 5.
If a different winding is chosen as reference winding, e.g. the d-winding, this has to be
taken into consideration:
For the Y–end is set: VECTOR GROUP I = 7 (12 – 5),
for the y–end is set: VECTOR GROUP I = 1 (6 – 5),
for the d–end is set: VECTOR GROUP I = 0 (5 – 5 = 0 = reference side).
Address 1161 VECTOR GROUP U is normally set in the same way as address 1162
VECTOR GROUP I. If the vector group of the transformer is adapted with external
means, e.g. because there are matching transformers in the measuring circuit that are
still used, set VECTOR GROUP I = 0, at all ends. In this case the differential protection
operates without proper matching computation. But, the measuring voltages transmit-
ted via the transformer would not be adapted in the 7SD52 and therefore not correctly
calculated and displayed. Address 1161 VECTOR GROUP U serves to remove this dis-
advantage. Set the correct vector group of the transformer according to the above-
mentioned considerations.
Address 1162 VECTOR GROUP I is therefore relevant for the differential protection,
whereas address 1161 VECTOR GROUP U serves as a basis for the computation of
measured voltages beyond the transformer.
Address 1163 TRANS STP IS is used to set whether the power transformer starpoint
facing the device is grounded or not. If the starpoint is grounded, the device will elim-
inate the zero sequence current of the relevant side, since this zero sequence current
may cause a spurious tripping in case of a ground fault outside of the protected zone.
Circuit Breaker Various protection and ancillary functions require information on the status of the cir-
Status cuit breaker for faultless operation. The device has a circuit breaker status recognition
which processes the status of the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts and it also contains
a metrological opening and closing recognition (see also Section 6.13).
The open-pole current PoleOpenCurrent, which is safely undershot when the circuit
breaker pole is open, is set in address 1130A. High sensitivity may be set if parasitic
currents (e.g. from induction) can be excluded when the line is de-energized. Other-
wise the value must be increased correspondingly.
7SD52 Manual 6-17

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
The seal-in time SI Time all Cl. (address 1132A) determines how long the pro-
tection functions that are effective when the line is energized (e.g. the increased pick-
up threshold for the differential protection) are enabled when the internal status rec-
ognition has recognized the closing of the breaker or when the device receives a sig-
nal via a binary input and the CB auxiliary contact that the circuit breaker has been
closed. Therefore, this seal-in time should be longer than the CB operating time during
the closing plus the command time of the relevant protective function plus the CB op-
erating time during opening. This parameter can only be changed with DIGSI® 4 under
“Additional Settings”.
Address 1134 Line status determines the criteria for the functioning of the inte-
grated status recognition. With CurrentOpenPole the rise of the open-pole current
above the threshold set in address 1130A (PoleOpenCurrent, see above) is inter-
preted as the closing of the circuit breaker. Current AND CB, on the other hand,
means that both the currents and the position of the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts
are processed for the status recognition. This means, that Current AND CB should
be set if the auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker exist and are connected and allo-
cated to corresponding binary inputs, and CurrentOpenPole in all other cases. Note
that the I>>>–stage of the instantaneous high-speed trip (see Section 6.7) can only
work if the auxiliary contacts for all devices at the ends of the protected object are con-
nected.
Whilst the SI Time all Cl. (address 1132A, see above) becomes effective with
each energization of the line, SI Time Man.Cl (address 1150A) determines the time
during which a possible influence on the protection functions becomes effective after
the manual closing (e.g. the switch-on pickup threshold for differential protection or
overcurrent protection, see loc cit). This parameter can only be changed with DIGSI®
4 under “Additional Settings”.
Three-Pole Three-pole coupling is only relevant if single-pole auto-reclosures are carried out. If
Coupling not, tripping is always three-pole. The rest of this subtitle is then irrelevant.
Address 1155 3pole coupling determines whether any multi-phase pickup leads
to a three-pole tripping command or whether only multi-pole tripping decision results
in a three-pole tripping command. This setting is only relevant for versions with single-
pole and three-pole tripping and is only available there. It does not have an impact on
the differential protection since pickup and tripping are equivalent. The time overcur-
rent protection function, however, can also pick up in the event of a fault occurred out-
side the protected object, without tripping. More information on the functions is also
contained in Subsection 6.13.3, “Fault Detection Logic of the Entire Device”.
With the setting with PICKUP, each multi-phase pickup causes a three-pole tripping,
even if only a single-phase ground fault has occurred in the protected area and a fur-
ther external fault, e.g. through overcurrent, is recognized. Even if a single-pole trip-
ping command is already present, each further pick-up will lead to a three-pole cou-
pling.
If, on the other hand, the address is set on with TRIP (normal setting for differential
protection), only multi-pole tripping commands will lead to a three-pole tripping. There-
fore, if a single-phase fault occurs within the protected zone and a further fault outside
of it, single-pole tripping is possible. A further fault during the single-pole tripping will
only lead to a three-pole coupling, if it occurs within the protected zone.
This parameter is valid for all protection functions of 7SD52 which are capable of
single-pole tripping. Standard setting: with TRIP.
6-18 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6.1 General
Applying the time overcurrent protection function the difference is noticeable when
multiple faults occur, which means faults that nearly occur at the same time at different
places in the system.
If, for example, two single-phase ground faults occur on different lines — these may
also be parallel lines — (Figure 6-11), the protective relays of all four line ends detect
a fault L1–L2–E, i.e. the pickup image is consistent with a two-phase ground fault. But
since each of the two lines has only a single-phase fault, a single-phase auto-reclos-
ure on each of the two lines is desirable. This is possible with setting 1155 3pole
coupling to with TRIP. Each of the four devices recognizes a single-pole internal
fault and is therefore able to perform a single-pole trip.
L1–E
L2–E
Figure 6-11 Multiple fault on a double-circuit line
In some cases, however, a three-pole trip would be preferable in this fault scenario,
e.g. if the double-circuit line is located close to a large generator unit (Figure 6-12).
This is because the generator considers the two single-phase ground faults as one
double ground fault, with correspondingly high dynamic stress of the turbine shaft.
With 1155 3pole coupling set to with PICKUP, the two lines are switched off,
since each device picks up as with L1–L2–E, i.e. as with a multi-phase fault.
L1–E
L2–E
Figure 6-12 Multiple fault on a double-circuit line close to a generator
Address 1156A Trip2phFlt determines that the short-circuit protection functions

perform only a single-pole trip in case of isolated two-phase faults (clear of ground),
provided that single-pole tripping is possible and permitted. This allows a single-pole
reclosure cycle for this kind of fault. The trip type can be set to 1pole leading Ø or
1pole lagging Ø. The parameter is only available in versions with single-pole and
three-pole tripping. This parameter can only be changed with DIGSI® 4 under “Addi-
tional Settings”. If this possibility is to be used, you have to bear in mind that the
phase selection should be the same throughout the entire network and that it must be
the same at all ends of one line. More information on the functions is also contained
in Subsection 6.13.3 “Fault Detection Logic of the Entire Device”. The usual default
setting is 3pole.
7SD52 Manual 6-19

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
Note: The setting ranges and presettings listed in this table refer to a nominal current
value IN = 1 A. For a secondary nominal current value IN = 5 A the current values are
to be multiplied by 5. For setting primary values, the transformation ratio of the trans-
formers must also be taken into consideration.

1106 OPERATION 10.0..5000.0 MVA 692.8 MVA Operational power of protection
POWER zone
1161 VECTOR GROUP U 0..11 0 Vector group numeral for voltage
1162 VECTOR GROUP I 0..11 0 Vector group numeral for current
1163 TRANS STP IS Solid Earthed Solid Earthed Transformer starpoint is

Not Earthed
1103 FullScaleVolt. 1.0..1200.0 kV 400.0 kV Measurement: Full Scale Voltage

(100%)
1104 FullScaleCurr. 10..5000 A 1000 A Measurement: Full Scale Current

(100%)
1130A PoleOpenCurrent 0.05..1.00 A 0.10 A Pole Open Current Threshold
1132A SI Time all Cl. 0.01..30.00 sec 0.10 sec Seal-in Time after ALL closures
1134 Line status with Pole Open Current with Pole Open Cur- Line status
Threshold only rent Threshold only
with CBaux AND Pole Open
Current
1150A SI Time Man.Cl 0.01..30.00 sec 0.30 sec Seal-in Time after MANUAL clos-
ures
1155 3pole coupling with Pickup with Trip 3 pole coupling

with Trip
1156A Trip2phFlt 3pole 3pole Trip type with 2phase faults

1pole, leading phase
1pole, lagging phase
6-20 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6.1 General
6.1.3.2 Information Overview

301 Pow.Sys.Flt. Power System fault
302 Fault Event Fault Event
351 >CB Aux. L1 >Circuit breaker aux. contact: Pole L1
352 >CB Aux. L2 >Circuit breaker aux. contact: Pole L2
353 >CB Aux. L3 >Circuit breaker aux. contact: Phase L3
356 >Manual Close >Manual close signal
357 >CloseCmd.Blo >Block all close commands from external
361 >FAIL:Feeder VT >Failure: Feeder VT (MCB tripped)
366 >CB1 Pole L1 >CB1 Pole L1 (Pos. Contact=Breaker)
371 >CB1 Ready >Circuit Breaker 1 READY for reclosing
378 >CB faulty >CB faulty
379 >CB 3p Closed >CB aux. contact 3pole Closed
380 >CB 3p Open >CB aux. contact 3pole Open
381 >1p Trip Perm >Single-phase trip permitted from ext.AR

382 >Only 1ph AR >External AR programmed for 1phase only
383 >Enable ARzones >Enable all AR Zones / Stages
385 >Lockout SET >Lockout SET
386 >Lockout RESET >Lockout RESET
410 >CB1 3p Closed >CB1 aux. 3p Closed (for AR, CB-Test)
411 >CB1 3p Open >CB1 aux. 3p Open (for AR, CB-Test)
501 Relay PICKUP Relay PICKUP
503 Relay PICKUP L1 Relay PICKUP Phase L1
506 Relay PICKUP E Relay PICKUP Earth
507 Relay TRIP L1 Relay TRIP command Phase L1
510 Relay CLOSE General CLOSE of relay
511 Relay TRIP Relay GENERAL TRIP command
512 Relay TRIP 1pL1 Relay TRIP command - Only Phase L1
7SD52 Manual 6-21

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions

515 Relay TRIP 3ph. Relay TRIP command Phases L123
530 LOCKOUT LOCKOUT is active
533 IL1 = Primary fault current IL1
536 Final Trip Final Trip
545 PU Time Time from Pickup to drop out
546 TRIP Time Time from Pickup to TRIP
560 Trip Coupled 3p Single-phase trip was coupled 3phase
561 Man.Clos.Detect Manual close signal detected
563 CB Alarm Supp CB alarm suppressed
6-22 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6.2 Differential Protection
The differential protection is the main feature of the device. It is based on current com-
parison. For this, one device must be installed at each end of the zone to be protected.
The devices exchange their measured quantities via communications links and com-
pare the received currents with their own. In case of an internal fault the allocated cir-
cuit breaker is tripped.
7SD52 is designed for protected objects with up to 6 ends. A version which covers
power transformers or machines in unit connection is available as an option. The pro-
tected zone is limited selectively at its ends by the current transformer sets.
6.2.1 Function Description
Basic Principle with Differential protection is based on current comparison. It makes use of the fact that
Two Ends e.g. a line section L (Figure 6-13) carries always the same current i (dashed line) at
its two ends in healthy operation. This current flows into one side of the considered
zone and leaves it again on the other side. A difference in current is a clear indication
of a fault within this line section. If the actual current transformation ratios are the
same, the secondary windings of the current transformers CT1 and CT2 at the line
ends can be connected to form a closed electric circuit with a secondary current I; a
measuring element M which is connected to the electrical balance point remains at
zero current in healthy operation.
When a fault occurs in the zone limited by the transformers, a current I1 + I2 which is
proportional to the fault currents i1 + i2 flowing in from both sides is fed to the meas-
uring element. As a result, the simple circuit shown in Figure 6-13 ensures a reliable
tripping of the protection if the fault current flowing into the protected zone during a
fault is high enough for the measuring element M to respond.
i i1 L i2 i
Station 1 Station 2
CT1 CT2
I i1 + i2 I
I1 I2
I1 + I2
Figure 6-13 Basic principle of differential protection for a line with two ends
Basic Principle with For lines with three or more ends or for busbars, the principle of differential protection
Multiple Ends is extended in that the total sum of all currents flowing into the protected object is zero
in healthy operation, whereas in case of a fault the total sum is equal to the fault cur-
rent (see Figure 6-14 as an example for four ends).
7SD52 Manual 6-23

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
Protected
object
CT1 CT2 CT3 CT4
I1 I2 I3 I4 I1 + I2
M
+ I3 + I4
i1 i2 i3 i4
Figure 6-14 Basic principle of differential protection for four ends
Transmission of If the entire protected object is located in one place — as is the case with generators,
Measured Values transformers, busbars —, the measured quantities can be processed immediately.
This is different for lines where the protected zone spans a certain distance from one
substation to the other. To be able to process the measured quantities of all line ends
at each line end, these have to be transmitted in a suitable form. In this way, the trip-
ping condition at each line end can be checked and the respective local circuit breaker
can be operated if necessary.
7SD52 transmits the measured quantities as digital telegrams via communication
channels. For this, each device is equipped with at least one protection data interface.
Figure 6-15 shows this for a line with two ends. Each device measures the local cur-
rent and sends the information on its intensity and phase relation to the opposite end.
The interface for this communication between protection devices is called the protec-
tion data interface. As a result, the currents can be added up an processed in each
device.
1 2
i1 i2
I1 I2
I1 I1
I1 + I2 I1 + I2
I2 I2
7SD52 7SD52
Figure 6-15 Differential protection for a line with two ends
In case of more than two ends, a communication chain is built up by which each device
is informed about the total sum of the currents flowing into the protected object. Figure
6-16 shows an example for four ends. Ends 1 and 2 are derived from the arrange-
ments of the current transformers shown on the left. Although this is actually only one
line end, it should be treated in terms of differential protection as two ends because
the current is measured in two places. Line end 3 is situated on the opposite side. The
line is also equipped with a branch feeder leading to end 4.
Each device receives its local currents from the current transformers. Device 1 meas-
ures the current i1 and transmits its data as complex phasor I1 to device 2. Device 2
adds the share I2 to its own measured current i2 and sends this partial sum to device
4. Device 4 proceeds in the same way so that I4 is added. The partial sum I1 + I2 + I4
finally reaches device 3 which then adds I3. Vice versa, a corresponding chain leads
6-24 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
from device 3 via device 4 and device 2 to device 1. In this way, the total sum of the
four currents measured at the measuring points is available to all four devices.
The sequence of the devices in the communication chain need not correspond to the
indexation, as shown in Figure 6-16. The allocation is carried out during the parame-
terization of the topology, as explained in Section 6.4.
I1
i1 7SD52
I1
I2 +I3 +I4 i3 3
I1
I2 +I3 +I4
I3
I2 +I3 +I4
I1
I2 7SD52
i2
I1 +I2 7SD52
I3 +I4
I1 +I2 +I4
I3
2 I1 + I2 I1 +I2 +I4
I4 I3
I3 +I4
i4 I1 +I2 +I4
I3
7SD52
4
I1 +I2
I3 +I4
Figure 6-16 Differential protection for a line with four ends
The communication chain can also be connected to a ring, as shown in dashed lines
in Figure 6-16. This provides for redundancy of transmission: even if one communica-
tion link fails, the entire differential protection system will be fully operational. The de-
vices recognize a disturbance in communication and switch over automatically to a dif-
ferent way of communication. It is also possible to switch off one line end, e.g. for a
check or a revision, and put the local protection out of operation. With a communica-
tion ring, the rest of the operation can proceed without disturbances.
You will find detailed information on the topology of device communication in Section
6.4.
Measured Value The devices measure the local currents asynchronously. This means that each device
Synchronization measures, digitizes and pre-processes the associated currents of the current trans-
formers with its own, random processor pulse. If the currents of two or more line ends
are to be compared, it is necessary, however, to process all currents with the same
time base.
All devices which belong together exchange their time with each telegram. The device
with index 1 functions as a “timing master” thus determining the time base. The other
devices then calculate the time delay from the transmission and processing times re-
7SD52 Manual 6-25

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
lated on the timing master. With this rough synchronization the equality of the time
bases with a precision of ± 0.5 ms is provided.
To reach a sufficiently precise synchronization all current values are marked with a
“time stamp” before they are transmitted from one device to the other as digital tele-
grams. This time stamp indicates at which point in time the transmitted current data
were valid. Therefore, the receiving devices can carry out an optimized synchroniza-
tion of the current comparisons based on the received time stamp and their own time
management, i.e. they can compare the currents which were actually measured at ex-
actly the same time (<5 µs tolerance).
The transmission periods are permanently monitored by the devices using the time
stamps and considered at the respective receiving end.
The frequency of the measured quantities, which is decisive for the comparison of
complex phasors, is also continuously measured and, if necessary, corrected to
achieve a synchronous comparison of the phasors. If the device is connected to volt-
age transformers and at least one voltage of a sufficient level is available, the frequen-
cy is derived from this voltage. If not, the measured currents are used for the determi-
nation of the frequency. The measured frequencies are interchanged between the de-
vices via the communication link. Under these conditions all devices work with the cur-
rently valid frequency.
Restraint The precondition for the basic principle of differential protection is that the total sum of
all currents flowing into the protected object is zero in healthy operation. This precon-
dition is only valid for the primary system and even there only if shunt currents of a
kind produced by line capacitances or magnetizing currents of transformers and reac-
tors can be neglected.
The secondary currents which are applied to the devices via the current transformers,
are subject to measuring errors caused by the response characteristic of the current
transformers and the input circuits of the devices. Transmission errors such as signal
jitters can also cause deviations of the measured quantities. As a result of all these
influences, the total sum of all currents processed in the devices in healthy operation
is not zero. Therefore, the differential protection is stabilized against these influences.
Charging Currents Due to the capacitances of the three phases against ground and against one another,
charging currents are flowing even in healthy operation and cause a difference of cur-
rents at the ends of the protected zone. Especially when cables are used, the capac-
itive charging currents can reach considerable magnitude.
Charging currents do not depend on the intensity of the measured currents. In healthy
operation they can be considered as being almost constant under steady-state condi-
tions, since they are only determined by the voltage and the capacitances of the lines.
They can therefore be taken into account during the setting of the sensitivity of the dif-
ferential protection (see also Subsection 6.2.2 under “Pickup Value of Differential Cur-
rent”). The same is true for the steady-state magnetizing currents across shunt reac-
tances. For transient inrush currents 7SD52 has a separate inrush restraint feature
(see below under the subtitle “Inrush Restraint”).
Current To consider the influences of current transformer errors, each device calculates a self-
Transformer Errors restraining quantity ∆I. This is calculated by estimating the possible local transformer
errors from the data of the local current transformers and the intensity of the measured
currents. The transformer data have been parameterized under the power system
6-26 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
data (cf. Subsection 6.1.1 under “Current Transformer Characteristics”, page 6-9) and
apply to each individual device.
Ifault
IN
Approximation
Current Tansformer Error
n'/n Itransformer/IN
Figure 6-17 Approximation of the current transformer errors
Further Influences Further measuring errors which may arise in the device itself by hardware tolerances,
calculation tolerances, deviations in time or which are due to the “quality” of the meas-
ured quantities such as harmonics and deviations in frequency, are also estimated by
the device and increase the local self-restraining quantity automatically. Here, the per-
missible variations in the data transmission and processing periods are also consid-
ered.
Deviations in time are caused by residual errors during the synchronization of meas-
ured quantities, data transmission and operating time variations, and similar events.
When GPS–synchronization is used, these influences are eliminated and do not in-
crease the self-restraining quantity.
If an influencing parameter cannot be determined — e.g. the frequency if no sufficient
measured quantities are available — the measuring error will be set by definition to
the maximum permissible deviation. For the frequency this means that if the frequency
cannot be determined, because no sufficient measured quantities are available, the
device will assume rated frequency. But since the actual frequency can deviate from
the rated frequency within the permissible range (±20 % of the rated frequency), the
restraint will be increased automatically. As soon as the frequency has been deter-
mined (max. 100 ms), the restraint will be decreased correspondingly. This is impor-
tant during operation if no measured quantities are existing in the protected area be-
fore a fault occurs, e.g. if a line with the voltage transformers on the line side is
switched onto a fault. Since the frequency is not yet known at this point of time, an in-
creased restraint will be active until the actual frequency is determined. This may de-
lay the tripping somewhat, but only close to the pickup threshold, i.e. in case of very
low-current faults.
These self-restraining quantities are calculated by each device from the total sum of
the possible deviations and transmitted to the other devices. In the same way as the
total currents (differential currents) are calculated (see above, “Transmission of Meas-
ured Values“), each device calculates thus the total sum of the restraining quantities
and thereby stabilizes the differential currents.
It is due to the self-restraint that the differential protection works with a maximum of
sensitivity at all times, since the restraining quantities adapt themselves automatically
in a dynamic way to possible errors. In this way, even high-resistance faults, with high
load currents at the same time, can be detected effectively.
7SD52 Manual 6-27

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
Inrush Restraint If the protected area includes a power transformer, a high inrush current can be ex-
pected when connecting the transformer. This inrush current flows into the protected
zone but does not leave it again.
The inrush current can reach a multiple of the rated current and is characterized by a
relatively high content in second harmonics (double rated frequency) which is almost
absent in the case of a short-circuit. If the content in second harmonics exceeds an
adjustable threshold in differential current, the tripping will be prevented.
The inrush restraint has an upper limit: if a certain (adjustable) current value is exceed-
ed, it will not be effective any more, since there must be an internal current-intensive
short-circuit.
Figure 6-18 shows a simplified logic diagram. The conditions for the inrush restraint
are examined in each device in which this function has been activated. The blocking
condition is transmitted to all devices so that it is effective at all ends of the protected
object.
2301 INRUSH REST.

OFF
„1“
ON
2nd HARMONIC 2302
fN
ILx
& Inrush detect. Lx
2fN
MAX INR. PEAK 2305

Lx = L1, L2, L3
depending on phase
Figure 6-18 Logic diagram of the inrush restraint for one phase
Since the inrush restraint works individually for each phase, the protection is fully ef-
fective even with the transformer switched onto a single-phase fault, whereas it is pos-
sible that an inrush current may be flowing in a different, healthy phase. It is, however,
possible to set the protection in a way that when the permissible harmonic content in
the current of only one single phase is exceeded, not only the phase with the inrush
current but also the remaining phases of the differential stage are blocked. This so-
called “crossblock” function can be limited in time. Figure 6-19 shows the logic dia-
gram.
The “crossblock” function affects all devices as well, since it extends the inrush re-
straint to all three phases.
6-28 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Opposite end(s)
Inrush detect. L1
≥1 Inrush block. L1
Inrush detect. L2
Inrush detect. L3
2310 CROSSB 2HM
2303 CROSSBLOCK
≥1 T &
NO
„1“
YES
Figure 6-19 Logic diagram of the “crossblock” function for one end
Evaluation of The evaluation of measured values is performed separately for each phase. Addition-
Measured Values ally, the residual current is evaluated.
Each device calculates a differential current from the total of the current phasors that
were formed at each end of the protected zone and transmitted to the other ends. The
differential current value is equal to the value of the fault current that is registered by
the differential protection system. In the ideal case it is equal to the fault current value.
In a healthy system the differential current value is low and similar to the charging cur-
rent.
The restraining current counteracts the differential current. It is the total of the maxi-
mum measured errors at the ends of the protected object and is calculated from the
actual measured values and power system parameters that were set. Therefore the
highest possible error value of current transformers within the nominal range and/or
the short-circuit current range is multiplied with the current flowing through each end
of the protected object. The total value, including the measured internal errors, is then
transmitted to the other ends. This is the reason why the restraining current is an im-
age of the greatest possible measurement error of the entire differential protection
system.
The pickup characteristic of the differential protection (Figure 6-20) derives from the
restraining characteristic Idiff = Irest (45°–curve) that is cut below the setting value I-
DIFF>. It complies with the formula
Irest = I-DIFF> + Σ (current errors)
If the calculated differential current exceeds the pickup limit and the greatest possible
measurement error, the fault must be internal (shaded area in Figure 6-20).
7SD52 Manual 6-29

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
Idiff
Tripping
I-DIFF> Irest
Figure 6-20 Pickup characteristic of the differential protection Idiff>–stage
High-Speed Charge The charge comparison protection function is a differential stage which is superim-
Comparison posed on the current comparison (the actual differential protection). If a high-current
fault occurs, high-speed tripping decision is then possible.
The charge comparison protection function does not sum up the complex current
phasors at the ends of the protected object, but the integral of currents calculated ac-
cording to the following formula:
t2
Q = ò i(t) dt
t1
It includes the integration interval from t1 to t2, for the 7SD52 device determined as a
quarter AC cycle.
The calculated charge Q is a scalar value which is faster to determine and to transmit
than a complex phasor.
The charges of all ends of the protected object are added in the same way as done
with the current phasors of the differential protection. Thus the total of the charges is
available at all ends of the protected zone.
Right after a fault occurrence within the protected zone a charge difference emerges.
For high fault currents which can lead to saturation of current transformers, a decision
is taken before the saturation begins.
The charge difference of external faults is theoretically equal to zero at the beginning.
The charge comparison protection function immediately detects the external fault and
blocks its own function. If saturation begins in one or more current transformers which
limit the protected zone, the before-mentioned function remains blocked. Thus possi-
ble differences resulting from the saturation are excluded. Generally it is assumed that
6-30 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
an initial saturation of current transformers only takes place after the expiration of at
least one integration interval (1/4 cycle) that commenced with the occurrence of a fault.
Each phase is subject to the charge comparison. Therefore an internal fault (evolving
fault) in a different phase after the external fault occurred is registered immediately.
The functional limitation of the charge comparison is reached in the less probable case
that an internal fault (evolving fault) appears after occurrence of an external fault with
considerable current transformer saturation in the same phase; this must then be de-
tected by the actual differential protection.
Furthermore the charge comparison is influenced by charge currents from lines and
shunt currents from transformers (steady-state and transient) that also cause a charge
difference. Therefore the charge comparison is, as aforesaid, a function suited to com-
plete the differential protection ensuring a fast tripping for high-current short-circuits.
Blocking/Inter- The differential protection can be blocked via a binary input. The blocking at one end
blocking of a protected object affects all ends via the communications link (interblocking). If the
overcurrent protection is configured as an emergency function, all devices will auto-
matically switch over to this emergency operation mode.
FNo 3525
> Diff block
see Figure 6-22
Diff>> L1
Diff>> L3
Diff>> L2
Qrest L1 –
Qrest L2 + Q>
Qrest L3
1233 I-DIFF>>
&
FNo 3137
Qdiff L1 ≥1
Q> I-Diff>> Flt.
Qdiff L2
Qdiff L3
Irest L1 – FNo 3133 ... 3135

Irest L2 + I> ≥1 Diff. Flt. L1
Irest L3 Diff. Flt. L2
1210 I-DIFF> Diff. Flt. L3
Idiff L1
I> FNo 3139
Idiff L2 ≥1 &
≥1 I-Diff> Flt.
Idiff L3
1213 I-DIF>SWITCH ON
I> &
Diff> L1
Diff> L2
Diff> L3
Rushblock. L1
Rushblock. L2 see Figure 6-22
Rushblock. L3
L1
L2
L3
Switch-on recognition
Figure 6-21 Logic diagram of the differential protection
7SD52 Manual 6-31

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
Pickup of the Differ- Figure 6-21 shows the logic diagram of the differential protection. The phase-segre-
ential Protection gated stages are totalled to phase information. Additionally the device provides infor-
mation of which stage picked up.
As soon as the differential protection function registers a fault within its tripping zone,
the signal “Diff. Gen. Flt.” (general fault detection of the differential protection)
is issued. For the differential protection function itself, this pickup signal is of no con-
cern since the tripping conditions are available at the same time. This signal, however,
is necessary for the initiation of internal or external supplementary functions (e.g. fault
recording, automatic reclosure).
Tripping Logic of The tripping logic of the differential protection combines all decisions of the differential
the Differential Pro- stages and forms output signals which are also influenced by the central tripping logic
tection of the entire device (Figure 6-22).
The pickup signals that identify the concerned stages of the differential protection can
be delayed via the time stage T-DELAY I-DIFF>. Independently from this condition,
a single-phase pickup can be blocked for a short time in order to bridge the transient
oscillations on occurrence of a single earth fault in a resonant-earthed system.
The output signals generated by the stages are combined to the output signals
“Diff. Gen. TRIP”, “Diff TRIP 1p L1”, “Diff TRIP 1p L2”, “Diff TRIP 1p
L3”, “Diff TRIP L123” in the tripping logic. Here, the single-pole information indi-
cates that only single-pole tripping is to be carried out. The actual generation of the
commands for the tripping (output) relay is executed within the tripping logic of the en-
tire device (see Subsection 6.13.4).
from Figure 6-21
Diff>> L1
FNo 3141
Diff>> L2 Diff. Gen. TRIP
Diff>> L3
1218 T3I0 1PHAS
L1 FNo 3142
L2 =1 Diff TRIP 1p L1
T
L3
FNo 3143
Diff TRIP 1p L2
1217 T-DELAY I-DIFF>
L1 Tripping logic FNo 3144
T 0
L2 of the unit Diff TRIP 1p L3
≥1
L3
&
FNo 3145
L1 L1
Diff> L1 Diff TRIP L123
from Figure 6-21
&
FNo 3146
L2 L2
Diff> L2 Diff TRIP 1pole
FNo 3147
& Diff TRIP 3pole
L3 L3
Diff> L3
Figure 6-22 Tripping logic of the differential protection
6-32 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6.2.2 Setting the Function Parameters
General The differential protection can be switched ON or OFF with address 1201 STATE OF
DIFF.. If a single device is switched off at any end of a protective object, the calcula-
tion of measured values becomes impossible. The entire differential protection system
of all ends then is blocked.
Pickup Value of The current sensitivity is set with address 1210 I-DIFF>. It is determined by the en-
Differential Current tire current flowing into a protected zone in case of a fault. This is the total fault current
regardless of how it is distributed between the ends of the protected object.
This pickup value must be set to a value that is higher than the total steady-state shunt
current of the protected object. For cables and long overhead lines, the charging cur-
rent is to be considered in particular. It is calculated from the operational capacitance:
IC = 3.63 · 10–6 · UN · fN · CB' · s
With IC Charging current to be calculated in A primary
UN Rated voltage of the network in kV primary
fN Rated frequency of the network in Hz
CB' Per unit line length service capacitance of the line in nF/km or nF/mile
s Length of the line in km or miles
For lines with multiple ends, the total sum of all line sections is taken as the length.
Considering the variations of voltage and frequency, the value set should be at least
2 to 3 times higher than the calculated charging current. Moreover, the pickup value
should not be less than 15 % of the operating rated current. The operating rated cur-
rent either derives from the rated apparent power of a transformer in the protected
area (see “Topological Data for Transformers (optional)” in Subsection 6.1.3, page 6-
16) or from the addresses 1104 FullScaleCurr. according to Subsection 6.1.3,
“Rated Values of Protected Lines” (page 6-15). It must be equal at all ends of the pro-
tected object.
If setting is performed from a personal computer using DIGSI® 4, the parameters can
be set either as primary or as secondary quantities. If secondary quantities are set, all
currents must be converted to the secondary side of the current transformers.
110 kV single-conductor oil-filled cable 240 mm2 in a 50-Hz-network with the data:
s (length) = 16 km
CB ' = 310 nF/km
Current transformers 600 A/5 A
From that the steady-state charging current is calculated:
IC = 3.63 · 10–6 · UN · fN · CB' · s = 3.63 · 10–6 · 110 · 50 · 310 · 16 = 99 A
For the setting with primary values approximately the double value is to be set, i.e.:
Setting value I-DIFF> = 198 A
7SD52 Manual 6-33

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
For the setting with secondary values this value has to be converted to secondary
quantity:
198 A
Setting value I-DIFF> = --------------- ⋅ 5 A = 1.65 A
600 A
Pickup Value dur- When switching on long, unloaded cables, overhead lines and arc-compensated lines,
ing Switch-on pronounced higher-frequency transient reactions may take place. Although these are
damped considerably by means of digital filters in the differential protection, a pickup
value I-DIF>SWITCH ON (address 1213) can be set to reliably prevent single-sided
pickup of the protection. This pickup value is always active when a device has recog-
nized the connection of a dead line at its end. For the duration of the seal-in time SI
Time all Cl. which was set with the general protection data under address 1132A
(Subsection 6.1.3 under margin “Circuit Breaker Status”, page 6-17), all devices are
then switched over to this particular pickup value. A setting to three to four times the
steady-state charging current ensures usually the stability of the protection during
switch-on of the line. For switch-on of a transformer or shunt reactor, an inrush re-
straint is incorporated (see below under Subtitle “Inrush Restraint”, page 6-35).
Final checks will be carried out during commissioning (see Subsection 8.3.13).
Delays In special cases of application it may be useful to delay the tripping of the differential
protection with an additional timer, e.g. in case of reverse interlocking. The delay time
T-DELAY I-DIFF> (address 1217A) is only started upon detection of an internal
fault. This parameter can only be changed with DIGSI® 4 under “Additional Set-
tings”.
If the differential protection is applied to an isolated or resonant-earthed network, it
must be ensured that tripping is avoided during the transient oscillations of a single
earth fault. With address 1218A T3I0 1PHAS the pickup to a single earth fault is
therefore delayed for 0.04 s. In extended resonant-earthed networks this time should
be increased. Setting the address to ∞ the single-phase tripping is totally suppressed.
This parameter can only be changed with DIGSI® 4 under “Additional Settings”.
Pickup Value of The pickup threshold of the charge comparison stage is set in address 1233 I-
Charge Compari- DIFF>>. The RMS value of the current is decisive. The conversion into charge value
son Stage is carried out by the device itself.
Setting near the operational nominal current is adequate in most cases. Please also
remember that the setting is related to the operational rated values that must be equal
(primary) at all ends of the protected object.
Since this stage reacts very fast, a pickup of capacitive charging currents (for lines)
and inductive magnetizing currents (for transformers or reactors) — also for switch-on
condition — must be excluded.
For overhead lines and cables the setting value should not be lower than 4 times the
steady-state charging current value (as already calculated in the above calculation ex-
ample). In resonant-earthed systems also the value of the non-compensated system
earth fault current may not be undershot. It derives from the total capacitive earth fault
current without considering the Petersen coil. As the Petersen coil serves to compen-
sate nearly the total earth fault current, its rated current can be taken as a base.
For transformers set the value INTrafo/ukTrafo.
The pickup thresholds are finally checked during commissioning (Subsection 8.3.13).
6-34 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Inrush Restraint The inrush restraint of the differential protection is only necessary when the devices
are operated on a transformer or on lines which end on transformers. It can be
switched ON and OFF with address 2301 INRUSH REST..
It is based on the evaluation of the second harmonic which exists in the inrush current.
Ex-works a ratio of 15 % of the 2nd HARMONIC I2fN/IfN is set under address 2302,
which can normally be taken over. The fraction necessary for the restraint can howev-
er be changed. In order to be able to achieve a higher degree of restraint in case of
exceptionally unfavourable inrush conditions, you may also set a smaller value.
However, if the local measured current exceeds a value set in address 2305 MAX IN-
RUSH PEAK, there will be no inrush restraint. The peak value is decisive. The set value
should be higher than the maximum inrush current peak value that can be expected.
For transformers a value of above √2·INTrafo/ukTrafo can be set. If a line ends on a
transformer, a smaller value may be selected, considering the damping of the current
by the line.
The “crossblock” function can be activated (YES) or deactivated (NO) with address
2303 CROSS BLOCK. The time after exceeding of the current threshold for which this
crossblock is to be activated is set under address 2310 CROSSB 2HM. With setting ∞
the “crossblock” function is always active until the second harmonic content in all
phases has dropped below the set value.
Note: The indicated setting ranges and default settings refer to a secondary rated cur-
rent of IN = 1 A. For the secondary rated current of IN = 5 A these values are to be
multiplied by 5. For the setting of primary values the transformation ratio of the trans-

1201 STATE OF DIFF. OFF ON State of differential protection
ON
1210 I-DIFF> 0.10..20.00 A 0.30 A I-DIFF>: Pickup value
1213 I-DIF>SWITCH ON 0.10..20.00 A 0.30 A I-DIFF>: Value under switch on

condition
1217A T-DELAY I-DIFF> 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 0.00 sec I-DIFF>: Trip time delay
1218A T3I0 1PHAS 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 0.00 sec Delay 1ph-faults (comp/isol.
star-point)
1233 I-DIFF>> 0.8..100.0 A; ∞ 1.2 A I-DIFF>>: Pickup value
2301 INRUSH REST. OFF OFF Inrush Restraint

ON
2302 2nd HARMONIC 10..45 % 15 % 2nd. harmonic in % of funda-

mental
7SD52 Manual 6-35

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions

2303 CROSS BLOCK NO NO Cross Block
YES
2305 MAX INRUSH 1.1..25.0 A 15.0 A Maximum inrush-peak value

PEAK
2310 CROSSB 2HM 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 0.00 sec Time for Crossblock with 2nd
harmonic
6.2.4 Information Overview

3102 2nd Harmonic L1 Diff: 2nd Harmonic detected in phase L1
3120 Diff active Diff: Active
3132 Diff. Gen. Flt. Diff: Fault detection
3133 Diff. Flt. L1 Diff: Fault detection in phase L1
3136 Diff. Flt. E Diff: Earth fault detection
3137 I-Diff>> Flt. Diff: Fault detection of I-Diff>>
3139 I-Diff> Flt. Diff: Fault detection of I-Diff>
3141 Diff. Gen. TRIP Diff: General TRIP
3142 Diff TRIP 1p L1 Diff: TRIP - Only L1
3145 Diff TRIP L123 Diff: TRIP L123
3146 Diff TRIP 1pole Diff: TRIP 1pole
3147 Diff TRIP 3pole Diff: TRIP 3pole
3148 Diff block Diff: Differential protection is blocked
3149 Diff OFF Diff: Diff. protection is switched off
3176 Diff Flt. 1p.L1 Diff: Fault detection L1 (only)
3177 Diff Flt. L1E Diff: Fault detection L1E
6-36 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2

3180 Diff Flt. L12 Diff: Fault detection L12
3190 Test Diff. Diff: Set Teststate of Diff. protection
3191 Comm. Diff Diff: Set Commissioning state of Diff.
3192 TestDiff.remote Diff: Remote relay in Teststate
3193 Comm.Diff act. Diff: Commissioning state is active
3194 >Test Diff. Diff: >Test Diff.
3195 >Comm. Diff Diff: >Comm. Diff
3525 > Diff block >Differential protection blocking signal
3526 Diffblk.rec PI1 Differential blocking received at PI1
3527 Diffblk.rec PI2 Differential blocking received at PI2
3528 Diffblk.sen PI1 Differential blocking sending via PI1
3529 Diffblk.sen PI2 Differential blocking sending via PI2
7SD52 Manual 6-37

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
6.3 Breaker Intertrip and Remote Tripping
7SD52 allows to transmit a tripping command created by the local differential protec-
tion to the other end or ends of the protected object (intertripping). Likewise, any de-
sired command of another internal protection function or of an external protection,
monitoring or control equipment can be transmitted for remote tripping.
The reaction when such a command is received can be set individually for each de-
vice.
Commands are transmitted separately for each phase, so that a simultaneous single-
pole auto-reclosure is always possible, provided that devices and circuit breakers are
designed for single-pole tripping.
Transmission The transmission signal can originate from two different sources (Figure 6-23). If the
Circuit parameter I-TRIP SEND is set to YES, each tripping command of the differential pro-
tection is routed immediately to the transmission function “ITrp.sen. L1” to “... L3” (in-
tertrip) and transmitted via the protection data interfaces and communications links.
Furthermore, it is possible to trigger the transmission function via binary inputs (re-
mote tripping). This can be done either separately for each phase via the input func-
tions “>Intertrip L1”, “>Intertrip L2” and “>Intertrip L3”, or for all phases
together (three-pole) via the binary input function “>Intertrip 3pol”. The transmis-
sion signal can be delayed with T-ITRIP BI and prolonged with T-ITRIP PROL BI.
1303 T-ITRIP BI
I-TRIP SEND 1301 1304 T-ITRIP PROL BI
NO
Diff TRIP L1 YES
Diff TRIP L2
Diff TRIP L3
FNo 3501 ... 3503 ≥1
>Intertrip L1 ITrp.sen. L1
T T
>Intertrip L2 ≥1 ITrp.sen. L2
ITrp.sen. L3
>Intertrip L3
L1
L2
L3
FNo 3504
>Intertrip 3pol
Protection Protection
Data Interface Data Interface
Figure 6-23 Logic diagram of the intertrip — transmission circuit
6-38 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
In order to ensure that the transmission signal reaches all devices in objects with more
than two ends, it is also looped through the protection data interface.
Receiving Circuit On the receiving end the signal can lead to a trip. Alternatively it can also cause an
alarm only. In this way it is possible to determine for each end of the protected object
whether the received signal is to trip at this particular end or not.
Figure 6-24 shows the logic diagram. If the received signal is supposed to cause a trip,
it will be forwarded to the tripping logic. The tripping logic of the entire device (see also
Subsection 6.13.4) ensures, if necessary, that the conditions for single-pole tripping
are fulfilled (e.g. single-pole tripping permissible, auto-reclosure function ready).
FNo 3518
1302 I-TRIP REC
ITrp.TRIP 1p L1
FNo 3519
ITrp.TRIP 1p L2
Trip FNo 3520
≥1 ITrp.TRIP 1p L3
Alarm Tripping logic
Protection Data FNo 3521
Interface
ITrp.TRIP L123
FNo 3522
Diff TRIP 1pole
FNo 3523
Diff TRIP 3pole
FNo 3517
ITrp. Gen. TRIP
FNo 3505 ... 3510

I-TRIP REC PIx L1
L1 I-TRIP REC PIx L2
L2 I-TRIP REC PIx L3
L3 x = 1, 2
Figure 6-24 Logic diagram of the intertrip — receiving circuit
Further Options Since the signals for remote tripping can be set to cause only an alarm, any other de-
sired signals can be transmitted in this way as well. After the binary input(s) have been
activated, the signals which are set to cause an alarm at the receiving end are trans-
mitted. These alarms can in turn execute any desired actions at the receiving end. It
should be noted that for the transmission of remote alarms and remote commands a
further 24 transmission channels and, in addition, 4 fast transmission channels are op-
tionally available (see also Section 6.6).
7SD52 Manual 6-39

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
General The intertrip function for tripping caused by the differential protection can be activated
(YES) or deactivated (NO) with address 1301 I-TRIP SEND. Since the differential pro-
tection devices theoretically operate with the same measured values at all ends of the
protected object, a tripping in the event of an internal fault normally is also carried out
at all ends, regardless of the infeed conditions at the ends. In special cases, i.e. if fault
currents are to be expected near to the pickup threshold, it may occur that one or more
ends do not issue a tripping command due to inevitable device tolerances. For these
cases I-TRIP SEND = YES ensures the tripping at all ends of the protected object.
Intertrip/Remote If the intertrip function is activated, it will automatically start when the differential pro-
Tripping tection trips.
If the relevant binary inputs are allocated and activated by an external source, the in-
tertrip signal is transmitted as well. In this case, the signal to be transmitted can be
delayed with address 1303 T-ITRIP BI. This delay stabilizes the originating signal
against dynamic interferences which may possibly occur on the control cabling. Ad-
dress 1304 T-ITRIP PROL BI is used to extend a signal after it has been effectively
injected from an external source.
The reaction of a device to receiving an intertrip/remote tripping signal is set in ad-
dress 1302 I-TRIP RECEIVE. If it is supposed to cause tripping, Trip must be set.
If the received signal, however, is supposed to cause an alarm only, Alarm only
must be set even if this annunciation is to be further processed externally.
The setting times depend on the individual case of application. A delay is necessary if
the external control signal originates from a disturbed source and a stabilization
seems appropriate. Of course, the control signal has to be longer than the delay for
the signal to be effective. If the signal is processed externally at the receiving end, a
prolongation time might become necessary for the transmitting end so that the reac-
tion desired at the receiving end can be executed reliably.

1301 I-TRIP SEND YES NO State of transmit. the intertrip command
NO
1302 I-TRIP RECEIVE Alarm only Alarm only Reaction if intertrip command is receiv.
Trip
1303 T-ITRIP BI 0.00..30.00 sec 0.02 sec Delay for intertrip via binary input
1304 T-ITRIP PROL BI 0.00..30.00 sec 0.00 sec Prolongation for intertrip via bin.input
6-40 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2

3501 >Intertrip L1 I.Trip: >Intertrip L1 signal input
3504 >Intertrip 3pol I.Trip: >Intertrip 3 pole signal input
3505 ITrp.rec.PI1.L1 I.Trip: Received at Prot.Interface 1 L1
3511 ITrp.sen.PI1.L1 I.Trip: Sending at Prot.Interface 1 L1
3517 ITrp. Gen. TRIP I.Trip: General TRIP
3518 ITrp.TRIP 1p L1 I.Trip: TRIP - Only L1
3521 ITrp.TRIP L123 I.Trip: TRIP L123
3522 Diff TRIP 1pole I.Trip: TRIP 1pole
3523 Diff TRIP 3pole I.Trip: TRIP 3pole
7SD52 Manual 6-41

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
6.4 Protection Data Interfaces and Differential Protection Topology
As described in the explanation of the function principle of differential protection (Sub-

section 6.2.1), the devices which belong to the protected object limited by the current
transformer sets, have to exchange the data of the ends of the protected object. This
does not only apply for the measured quantities relevant for the differential protection
itself, but also for all data which are to be available at the ends. This includes the syn-
chronization and topological data as well as the intertripping, transfer trip, remote an-
nunciation signals and measured values. The topology of the protected object, the al-
location of the devices to the ends of the protected object and the allocation of the
ways of communication to the devices’ protection data interfaces form the topology of
the differential protection system and its communication.
Communication For a standard layout of lines with two ends, you require one protection data interface
Topology for each device. This is the protection data interface PI 1 (see also Figure 6-25). The
corresponding protection data interface must be configured as Enabled during con-
figuring the scope of functions (Section 5.1).
1 2
PI1 PI1
Index 1 Index 2
7SD522 7SD522
Figure 6-25 Differential protection with two 7SD52 devices, each of them having one
protection data interface (transmitter/receiver)
1 2
PI1 PI1
Index 1 Index 2
7SD523 7SD523
PI2 PI2
Figure 6-26 Differential protection for two ends with two 7SD523 devices, each of them hav-
ing two protection data interfaces (transmitter/receiver)
With 7SD523 it is also possible to connect both protection data interfaces with each
other provided the two devices have two protection data interfaces each and the rele-
6-42 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
vant means for transmission are available. This provides for 100 % redundancy as far
as the transmission is concerned (Figure 6-26). The devices autonomously search for
the fastest communication link. If this link is faulty, the devices automatically switch
over to the other link which is then used until the faster one is healthy again.
For more than two ends each end requires a 7SD523 device. Thus a communication
chain or a communication ring can be formed. A setup with a maximum of six devices
is possible.
Figure 6-27 shows a communication chain with four devices. Ends 1 and 2 originate
from the arrangement of the current transformers shown on the left-hand side. Al-
though this is actually only one line end, it should be treated in terms of differential pro-
tection as two ends because the current is measured in two places. This is to make
sure that the transformation errors of both transformer sets are considered by the re-
straint, especially for a fault current flowing from end 1 to end 2 (external fault).
The communication chain begins at the protection data interface PI1 of device with in-
dex 1, continues in the device with index 2 at PI1, extents from device with index 2 at
PI2 to the device with index 4, etc. until it reaches the device with index 3 at PI1. The
example shows that the indexing of the devices must not necessarily have to corre-
spond to the sequence of the communication chain. It is also irrelevant which protec-
tion data interfaces are connected to which protection data interfaces.
7SD523
PI1
Index 1
3
7SD523 PI1
Index 2
7SD523
PI2
Index 3
2 PI1
PI1
7SD523
4 Index 4
PI2
Figure 6-27 Differential protection four ends with four 7SD523 in a chain topology
Figure 6-28 shows the same line arrangement as Figure 6-27. The communication
links, however, have been complemented to form a closed ring. This communication
ring has the advantage, as compared to the chain shown in Figure 6-27, that the entire
communication system works even if one communications link fails. The devices de-
tect the failure and switch automatically over to the remaining paths of communication.
In this example PI1 is always connected to PI2 of the following device.
7SD52 Manual 6-43

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
By the way, the two above possibilities for two devices can be regarded as special cas-
es of chains and rings: The connection as shown in Figure 6-25 forms a communica-
tion chain with only one chain element, and Figure 6-26 shows a ring which is com-
pressed into one two-way connection.
1
PI2
7SD523
PI1
Index 1
3
7SD523 PI2
Index 2
PI 1 7SD523
PI1
Index 3
2 PI2
PI1
7SD523
4 Index 4
PI2
Figure 6-28 Differential protection four ends with four 7SD523 in a chain topology
Communication The communication is achieved by direct optical fibre connections or via communica-
Media tion networks. Which kind of media is used, depends on the distance and on the com-
munication media available. For shorter distances a direct connection via optical fibres
having a transmission rate of 512 kBit/s is possible. Otherwise we recommend com-
munication converters. A transmission via modem and communication networks can
also be realized. Please take into consideration that the tripping times of the differen-
tial protection devices depend on the transmission quality and that they are prolonged
in case of a reduced transmission quality and /or an increased transmission time.
Figure 6-29 shows some examples for communication connections. In case of a direct
connection the distance depends on the type of the optical fibre. Table 6-1 lists the
available options. Different types of communication modules can be installed in the
devices. For ordering information see Appendix A, Subsection A.1.1.
Table 6-1 Communication via direct connection

Module Connector Optical Permissible path Distance,
Fibre type
type type wavelength attenuation typical
FO5 ST Multimode 820 nm 8 dB 1.5 km
62.5/125 µm 0.95 miles
FO6 ST Multimode 820 nm 16 dB 3.5 km
62.5/125 µm 2.2 miles
6-44 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Table 6-1 Communication via direct connection

Module Connector Optical Permissible path Distance,
Fibre type
type type wavelength attenuation typical
FO7 ST Monomode 1300 nm 7 dB 10 km
9/125 µm 6.25 miles
FO8 FC Monomode 1300 nm 18 dB 35 km
9/125 µm 22 miles
If communication converters are used, the device and the communication converter
are always linked with a FO5 module via optical fibres. The converter itself is equipped
with different interfaces for the connection to the communication network. For ordering
information see Appendix A, Subsection A.1.1.
typical 1,5 km with typical 3,5 km with

62,5/125 µm Multimode fibre 62,5/125 µm Multimode fibre
7SD52 7SD52 7SD52 7SD52
FO5 with FO6 with
ST-connector ST-connector
at both ends at both ends
typical 10 km with typical 35 km with

9/125 µm Monomode fibre 9/125 µm Monomode fibre
7SD52 7SD52 7SD52 7SD52
FO7 with FO8 with
ST-connector FC-connector
at both ends at both ends
Communication Communication
typical 1.5 km with Converter Converter typical 1.5 km with
62.5/125 µm Multimode fibre 62.5/125 µm Multimode fibre
7SD52
o Communication Network e 7SD52
e o
FO5 with FO5 with
ST-connector X.21 or X.21 or ST-connector
at both ends G703.1 G703.1 at both ends
Communication Communication
typical 1.5 km with Converter Converter typical 1.5 km with
62.5/125 µm Multimode fibre 62./125 µm Multimode fibre
o e 7SD52
7SD52 e o
FO5 with 2-wire FO5 with
ST-connector telephone ST-connector
at both ends cable at both ends
Figure 6-29 Examples for communication connections
7SD52 Manual 6-45

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
Note:
The redundancy of communication connections (ring topology) requires a consequent
separation of all devices participating in the communication. For example, different
communication routes should not be conducted via the same multiplexer, as there is
no alternative which could be used if the multiplexer should fail.
Transmission Fault The communication is continuously monitored by the devices.

and Transmission
Single faulty data telegrams are not a direct risk if they occur only occasionally. They
Failure
are recognized and counted in the device which detects the disturbance and can be
read out as statistical information.
If several faulty telegrams or no data telegrams at all are received, this is regarded as
a data fault as soon as a time delay for data disturbance alarm (default setting
100 ms, can be altered) is exceeded. A corresponding alarm is output. If the system
offers no alternative way of communication (as ring topologies would do), the differen-
tial protection will stop operating. All devices are affected by the disturbance, since the
formation of differential currents and restraint currents is no longer possible at any of
the ends. If the backup overcurrent protection is configured, it will be the only short-
circuit protection still active. As soon as the data communication works fault-free
again, the devices will automatically switch back to differential protection operation.
Transmission time jumps that, for example, can occur in case of switchover in the
communication network are recognized and corrected by the devices. The differential
protection system continues to operate without interruption. The transmission times
are measured again and actualized within less than 2 seconds. If GPS–synchroniza-
tion (with satellite receiver) is used, full sensitivity will be achieved also in this case
since asymmetric transmission times are recognized and corrected immediately.
If the communication is interrupted for a permanent period (which is longer than a set-
table time period), this is regarded as a transmission failure. A corresponding alarm
is output. The same reactions apply as for the data fault. GPS-failure is annunciated,
too.
General about The protection data interfaces connect the devices with the communication media.
Protection Data The communication is permanently monitored by the devices. Address 1509 T-DATA
Interfaces DISTURB defines after which delay time the user is informed about faulty or missing
data telegrams. Address 1510 T-DATAFAIL is used to set the time after which a
transmission failure alarm is output.
Protection Data The protection data interface 1 can be switched ON or OFF with address 1501 STATE
Interface 1 PROT I 1. If it is switched OFF, this corresponds to a transmission failure. In case of
6-46 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
a ring topology, the differential protection and all functions which require the transmis-
sion of data, can continue their operation, but not in case of a chain topology.
In address 1502 CONNEC. 1 OVER, set the transmission media that you want to con-
nect to protection data interface PI 1. The following media are possible
F.optic direct, i.e. communication directly by fibre-optic cable with 512 kBit/s;
Com conv 64 kB, i.e. via communication converters with 64 kBit/s (G703.1 or X.21);
Com conv 128 kB, i.e. via communication converters 128 kBit/s (X.21) or 2-wire
copper bidirectional;
Com conv 512 kB, i.e. via communication converters 512 kBit/s (X.21).
The possibilities may vary for the different device versions. The data must be identical
at both ends of a communication route.
The setting depends on the features of the communication media. As a general rule,
it can be stated that the higher the transmission rate the shorter the response time of
the differential protection system.
The devices measure and monitor the transmission times. Deviations are corrected,
as long as they are within the permissible range. These permissible ranges are set un-
der addresses 1505A and 1506A and can normally be left at their default values.
The maximum permissible transmission time (address 1505A PROT 1 T-DELAY) is
preset to a value that does not exceed the usual delay of communication networks.
This parameter can only be changed with DIGSI® 4 under “Additional Settings”. If it
is exceeded during operation (e.g. because of switchover to a different way of trans-
mission), the message “PI1 TD alarm” will be issued. Increased transmission times
only have an impact on the tripping time of the differential protection system.
The maximum transmission time difference (outgoing telegram vs. return telegram)
can be altered in address 1506A PROT 1 UNSYM.. This parameter can only be
changed with DIGSI® 4 under “Additional Settings”. With a direct fibre-optic connec-
tion, this value can be set to 0. For transmission via communication networks a higher
value may be needed. The standard value is 100 µs (presetting). If GPS–synchroni-
zation is used this value is relevant only in case the GPS–signal is missing. As soon
as the GPS–synchronization is restored the transmission time differences are com-
pensated again.
The permissible transmission time difference has a direct influence on the sensitivity
of the differential protection. The automatic self-restraint of the protection adapts the
restraint quantities to these differences so that a spurious operation of the differential
protection due to these influences is prevented. Thus, higher difference values reduce
the sensitivity of the protection, which may be noticeable in case of very low-current
faults. With GPS–synchronization, transmission time differences do not affect the sen-
sitivity of the protection as long as GPS–synchronization is intact. When the GPS–syn-
chronization detects that the permissible time difference is exceeded during operation,
the message “PI 1 PD unsym.” will be issued.
Address 1511 PI1 SYNCMODE is only relevant if GPS–synchronization is used. It de-
termines the conditions for differential protection operation when the protection com-
munication has been established (initially or after transmission failure):
• PI1 SYNCMODE = TEL or GPS means that the differential protection will become
active as soon as the protection communication has been established (data tele-
grams are received). Until the GPS–synchronization is effective, the differential pro-
tection operates with increased self-restraint determined by the maximum transmis-
sion time difference without GPS (address 1506A PROT 1 UNSYM.).
7SD52 Manual 6-47

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
• PI1 SYNCMODE = TEL and GPS means that the differential protection is active,
after reception of proper protection data telegrams, first when GPS–synchroniza-
tion has taken place. The operator can determine by manual acknowledgement (via
a binary input) that the differential protection starts operation with increased self-
restraint determined by the maximum transmission time difference without GPS
(address 1506A PROT 1 UNSYM.). When the GPS–synchronization is re-estab-
lished, full sensitivity is regained since transmission time differences are compen-
sated by the GPS–synchronization.
• PI1 SYNCMODE = GPS SYNC OFF means that no GPS–synchronization takes
place for this protection data interface. This is meaningful if no transmission time
differences are expected (e.g. for fibre-optic direct data link). This setting option can
also be used to remove this protection data interface from the GPS synchronization.
Protection Data If protection data interface 2 exists and is used, the same possibilities apply as for pro-
Interface 2 tection data interface 1. The corresponding parameters are set with addresses 1601
STATE PROT I 2 (ON or OFF), 1602 CONNEC. 2 OVER, 1605A PROT 2 T-DELAY,
and 1606A PROT 2 UNSYM.. Here again, the last two settings can only be changed
with DIGSI® 4 under “Additional Settings”. If GPS–synchronization is used, address
1611 PI2 SYNCMODE applies, too.
GPS Satellite If GPS synchronization (order option) is used, this synchronization mode can be
Synchronization switched ON or OFF in address 1801 GPS-SYNC..
Address 1803A TD GPS FAILD is used to set the delay time after which an alarm is
output “GPS loss” after a GPS failure is detected.
Further parameters concerning GPS–synchronization are set for the individual protec-
tion data interfaces (see above).
Communication First of all, define your communication topology: number the devices consecutively.
Topology This number is a consecutive device index that serves for your own overview. It starts
for each differential protection system (i.e. for each protected object) with 1. For the
differential protection system the device with index 1 is always the timing master, i.e.
the absolute time management of all devices which belong together depends on the
absolute time management of this device. As a result the time information of all devic-
es is comparable at all times. The device index serves for unique definition of the de-
vices within the differential protection system (i.e. for one protected object).
Allocate also an identification number (device–ID) for each device. The device–ID is
used by the communication system to identify each individual device. It must be be-
tween 1 and 65534 and must be unique within the communication system. The ID
number identifies the devices in the communication system since the exchange of in-
formation between several differential protection systems (thus also for several pro-
tected objects) can be performed via the same communication system.
Please make sure that the possible communications links and the existing interfaces
are in accordance with each other. If not all devices are equipped with two protection
data interfaces, those with only one protection data interface must be located at the
ends of the communication chain. In Figure 6-27 these are the devices with index 1
and 3. A ring topology is only possible, if all devices of a differential protection system
provide two protection data interfaces.
For a protected object with two ends (e.g. a line) the addresses 1701 ID OF RELAY
1 and 1702 ID OF RELAY 2 are set, e.g. for device 1 the device-ID 16 and for device
6-48 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
2 the device-ID 17 (Figure 6-30, compare also with Figures 6-25 and 6-26). The indi-
ces of the devices and the device-IDs do not have to match here, as mentioned above.
Figure 6-30 Differential protection topology for 2 ends with 2 devices — example
Figure 6-31 Differential protection topology for 4 ends with 4 devices — example
For a protected object with more than two ends (and corresponding number of devic-
es), the further ends are allocated to their device IDs with the parameter addresses
1703 ID OF RELAY 3, 1704 ID OF RELAY 4, 1705 ID OF RELAY 5, and 1706
ID OF RELAY 6. A maximum of 6 ends with 6 devices is possible for a protected
7SD52 Manual 6-49

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
object. Figure 6-31 gives an example with 4 relays (compare also Figure 6-27 and 6-
28). During the configuration of the protection functions (Section 5.1) the number of
devices required for the relevant case of application was set in address 143 Num. of
relays. Device IDs can be entered for as many devices as were configured under
that address, no further IDs are offered during setting.
Finally, you enter in address 1710 LOCAL RELAY the index of the actual local device.
Enter the index of each device (according the consecutive numbering used). Each in-
dex from 1 to the entire number of devices must be used only once, none must be
used twice.
Make sure that the settings of the differential protection topology for the differential
protection system are consistent:
• Each device index must only be used once;
• Each device index must be allocated unambiguously to one device ID;
• Each device index must be the index of a local device once;
• The device with index 1 is the source for the absolute time management (timing
master).
During the start-up of the protection system, the above listed conditions are checked.
If one out of these conditions is not fulfilled, no differential protection operation is pos-
sible. The device signals “DT inconsistent” (“Device table inconsistent”).
Protection Data
Interfaces

1509 T-DATA DISTURB 0.05..2.00 sec 0.10 sec Time delay for data disturbance
alarm
1510 T-DATAFAIL 0.0..60.0 sec 6.0 sec Time del for transmission failure
alarm
1512 Td ResetRemote 0.00..300.00 sec; ∞ 0.00 sec Remote signal RESET DELAY for
comm.fail
1501 STATE PROT I 1 ON ON State of protection interface 1

OFF
6-50 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2

1502 CONNEC. 1 OVER Direct connection with fibre Direct connection Connection 1 over
optic cabel with fibre optic
Communication converter cabel
with 64 kBit/s
Communication converter
with 128 kBit/s
with 512 kBit/s
1505A PROT 1 T-DELAY 0.1..30.0 ms 30.0 ms Prot 1: Maximal permissible delay

time
1506A PROT 1 UNSYM. 0.000..3.000 ms 0.100 ms Prot 1: Diff. in send and receive time
1511 PI1 SYNCMODE Telegram and GPS Telegram and PI1 Synchronizationmode
Telegram or GPS GPS
GPS synchronization OFF
1601 STATE PROT I 2 ON ON State of protection interface 2

OFF
1602 CONNEC. 2 OVER Direct connection with fibre Direct connection Connection 2 over
optic cabel with fibre optic
Communication converter cabel
with 64 kBit/s
with 128 kBit/s
with 512 kBit/s
1605A PROT 2 T-DELAY 0.1..30.0 ms 30.0 ms Prot 2: Maximal permissible delay

time
1606A PROT 2 UNSYM. 0.000..3.000 ms 0.100 ms Prot 2: Diff. in send and receive time
1611 PI2 SYNCMODE Telegram and GPS Telegram and PI2 Synchronizationmode
Telegram or GPS GPS
GPS synchronization OFF
1801 GPS-SYNC. ON OFF GPS synchronization

OFF
1803A TD GPS FAILD 0.5..60.0 sec 2.1 sec Delay time for local GPS-pulse loss
Topological Data

1701 ID OF RELAY 1 1..65534 1 Identification number of relay 1
7SD52 Manual 6-51

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions

1710 LOCAL RELAY relay 1 relay 1 Local relay is
relay 2
relay 3
relay 4
relay 5
relay 6
Protection Data
Interfaces

3215 Wrong Firmware Incompatible Firmware Versions
3217 PI1 Data reflec Prot Int 1: Own Datas received
3227 >PI1 light off >Prot Int 1: Transmitter is switched off
3229 PI1 Data fault Prot Int 1: Reception of faulty data
3230 PI1 Datafailure Prot Int 1: Total receiption failure
3233 DT inconsistent Device table has inconsistent numbers
3234 DT unequal Device tables are unequal
3235 Par. different Differences between common parameters
3236 PI1<->PI2 error Different PI for transmit and receive
3239 PI1 TD alarm Prot Int 1: Transmission delay too high
3243 PI1 with Prot Int 1: Connected with relay ID
3252 >SYNC PI1 RESET > PI1 Synchronization RESET
3218 PI2 Data reflec Prot Int 2: Own Datas received
3228 >PI2 light off >Prot Int 2: Transmitter is switched off
3231 PI2 Data fault Prot Int 2: Reception of faulty data
3232 PI2 Datafailure Prot Int 2: Total receiption failure
3240 PI2 TD alarm Prot Int 2: Transmission delay too high
3244 PI2 with Prot Int 2: Connected with relay ID
3253 >SYNC PI2 RESET > PI2 Synchronization RESET
3245 >GPS failure > GPS failure from external
3247 GPS loss GPS: local pulse loss
3248 PI 1 GPS sync. GPS: Prot Int 1 is GPS sychronized
3249 PI 2 GPS sync. GPS: Prot Int 2 is GPS sychronized
6-52 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2

3250 PI 1 PD unsym. GPS:PI1 unsym.propagation delay too high
3251 PI 2 PD unsym. GPS:PI2 unsym.propagation delay too high
Topological Data

3451 >Logout > Logout input signal
3457 Ringtopology System operates in a closed Ringtopology
3458 Chaintopology System operates in a open Chaintopology
3464 Topol complete Communication topology is complete
3475 Rel1Logout Relay 1 in Logout state
3484 Logout Local activation of Logout state
3487 Equal IDs Equal IDs in constellation
7SD52 Manual 6-53

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
6.5 Direct Local Trip
Direct Trip of the Any signal from an external protection, monitoring or control device can be injected
Local Circuit into the processing of 7SD52 via binary inputs. It can be delayed, output as an alarm
Breaker and be routed to one or more output relays. Figure 6-32 shows the logic diagram. If
the devices and circuit breakers are designed for single-pole control, single-pole trip-
ping is possible. The tripping logic of the device ensures that the conditions for single-
pole tripping are fulfilled (e.g. single-pole tripping permissible, reclosure function
ready).
The direct local trip can be switched on and off by parameters, and blocked via a bi-
nary input.
FNo 4417 2202 Trip Time DELAY

>DTT Trip L123
FNo 4432
FNo 4412 ≥1 T 0
& DTT TRIP 1p. L1
>DTT Trip L1
FNo 4433
FNo 4413 ≥1 T 0 DTT TRIP 1p. L2
>DTT Trip L2 & Tripping logic FNo 4434
DTT TRIP 1p. L3
FNo 4414 ≥1 T 0
FNo 4435
>DTT Trip L3 &
DTT TRIP L123
2201 FCT Direct Trip FNo 4421

ON DTT OFF
„1“
OFF
≥1
FNo 4422
FNo 4403 & DTT BLOCK
>BLOCK DTT
Figure 6-32 Logic diagram of the direct local trip (DTT)
A precondition for the direct local trip is that during the configuration of the functions
(Section 5.1) FCT Direct Trip = Enabled has been configured in address 122. It
can also be switched ON and OFF with address 2201 FCT Direct Trip.
For direct local trip a trip time delay can be set in address 2202 Trip Time DELAY.
This delay can be used as a grading margin.
A tripping command which has been issued is maintained for at least the minimum trip-
ping command duration TMin TRIP CMD which was configured for the device in ad-
dress 240A (Subsection 6.1.1). This ensures that the circuit breaker can be operated
reliably even if the control pulse is very short.
6-54 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6.5 Direct Local Trip

2201 FCT Direct Trip ON OFF Direct Local Trip
OFF
2202 Trip Time DELAY 0.00..30.00 sec; ∞ 0.01 sec Trip Time Delay

4403 >BLOCK DTT >BLOCK Direct Local Trip function
4412 >DTT Trip L1 >Direct Local Trip INPUT Phase L1
4417 >DTT Trip L123 >Direct Local Trip INPUT 3ph L123
4421 DTT OFF Direct Local Trip is switched OFF
4422 DTT BLOCK Direct Local Trip is BLOCKED
4432 DTT TRIP 1p. L1 Direct Local TRIP command - Only L1
4435 DTT TRIP L123 Direct Local TRIP command L123
7SD52 Manual 6-55

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
6.6 Direct Remote Trip and Transmission of Binary Information

(optional)
7SD52 allows the transmission of up to 28 items of binary information of any type from
one device to the others via the communications links provided for protection tasks.
Four of them are transmitted like protection signals with high priority, i.e. very fast, and
are therefore especially suitable for the transmission of external protection and trip sig-
nals which are generated outside of 7SD52. The other 24 are transmitted in the back-
ground and are therefore suitable for any information that does not depend on high-
speed transmission, such as information on the events taking place in a substation
which may also be useful in other substations as well. See also for Technical Data in
Section 10.4.
The information is injected into the device via binary inputs and can be output at the
other ends again via binary outputs. The integrated user-defined CFC logic allows to
perform on both the transmitting and the receiving side logical operations on the sig-
nals and on other information from the device’s protection and monitoring functions.
Also an internal indication can be assigned via CFC to a transmission input and trans-
mitted to the remote end(s).
The binary outputs and the binary inputs to be used must be allocated appropriately
during the configuration of the input and output functions (see Section 5.2). The 4
high-priority signals are injected into the device via the binary inputs “>Remote
Trip1” to “>Remote Trip4”, are transmitted to the devices at the other ends and
can be processed at each receiving side with the output functions “RemoteTrip1
rec” to “RemoteTrip4 rec”.
The other 24 items of information are injected into the device via the binary inputs
“>Rem. Signal 1” to “>Rem.Signal24” and are available under “Rem.Sig
1recv” to “Rem.Sig24recv” at each receiving end.
No settings are required for the transmission of binary information. Each device sends
the injected information to all other devices at the ends of the protected object. Where
a selection is necessary, it will have to be carried out via appropriate routing and, if
necessary, a logical operation at the receiving side.

3541 >Remote Trip1 >Remote Trip 1 signal input
3545 RemoteTrip1 rec Remote Trip 1 received
6-56 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6.6 Direct Remote Trip and Transmission of Binary Information (optional)

3549 >Rem. Signal 1 >Remote Signal 1 input
3550 >Rem.Signal 2 >Remote Signal 2 input
3558 >Rem.Signal10 >Remote Signal 10 input
3573 Rem.Sig 1recv Remote signal 1 received
7SD52 Manual 6-57

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions

3549 >Rem. Signal 1 >Remote Signal 1 input
6-58 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6.6 Direct Remote Trip and Transmission of Binary Information (optional)

3582 Rem.Sig10recv Remote signal 10 received
7SD52 Manual 6-59

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
6.7 Instantaneous High-Current Switch-onto-Fault Protection
General Informa- The instantaneous high-current switch-onto-fault protection function is provided to dis-
tion connect immediately and without delay feeders that are switched onto a high-current
fault. It serves e.g. as a rapid protection for connecting a feeder with closed grounding
disconnector. In order to function properly, the devices at all ends of the protected ob-
ject must know the circuit breaker positions (breaker auxiliary contacts).
A second stage works fast and without delay, regardless of the circuit breaker position.
I>>> Stage The pickup of the I>>> stage measures each phase current and compares it to the set-
ting value I>>>. The currents are numerically filtered so that only the fundamental
component is evaluated. This high-current pickup is practically unaffected by DC com-
ponents in the fault current as well as in the secondary current after switching off high
currents. If the setting value is exceeded by more than twice its value, the stage will
automatically use the peak value of the unfiltered measured quantity so that extremely
short command times are possible.
This stage is only enabled when the local circuit breaker is closed while all remaining
line ends of the protected object are open. The devices exchange the status of their
respective circuit breakers continuously via the communication link. If the protected
object is already live (from a different end) the stage is not effective. An indispensable
precondition for the functioning of the I>>> stage is that the auxiliary contacts of the
circuit breakers are connected at all ends of the protected object and allocated to the
relevant binary inputs. If this is not the case, this stage is not effective. The central
function control communicates the information of the circuit breaker position to the
high-current instantaneous tripping (see also Subsection 6.13.2).
Figure 6-33 shows the logic diagram. The I>>> stage at the bottom of the diagram op-
erates separately for each phase. During the manual closing of the circuit breaker all
three phases are enabled via the signal “HS/SOF TRIPL123” which is issued by the
central functional control of the protection, provided that the manual closing can be
recognized there (see Subsection 6.13).
Tripping can also be enabled separately for each phase by the signals “SOF TRIP
1pLx”. This applies also to e.g. automatic reclosure after single-pole tripping. Then,
single-pole tripping with this stage is possible, but only if the device is designed for
single-pole tripping.
I>>>> Stage The I>>>> stage trips regardless of the position of the circuit breakers. Here, the cur-
rents are also numerically filtered and the peak-value of the currents is measured from
the double setting value onwards. Figure 6-33 shows the logic diagram in the upper
part.
Therefore, this stage is used when current grading is possible. This is possible with a
small source impedance and at the same time a high impedance of the protected ob-
ject (example can be found with the advice on setting, Subsection 6.7.2).
The I>>>> stage is enabled automatically by the current-step monitoring dI/dt of the de-
vice for a duration of 50 ms. This stage operates separately for each phase.
6-60 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
2405 I>>>>
I>>>> FNo 4285...4287

d
≥1 I>>>>O/C p.upL1
dt 50 ms
I>>>>O/C p.upL2
2·√2·I>>>> I>>>>O/C p.upL3
FNo 4289
2404 I>>> SOTF TRIP 1pL1
FNo 4290
SOTF TRIP 1pL2
IL1 FNo 4291
I>>>
IL2
≥1 SOTF TRIP 1pL3
IL3 ≥1
FNo 4295
Tripping logic SOTF TRIP L123
2·√2·I>>>
FNo 4292
SOTF TRIP 1p
SOTF enab. L1 FNo 4294
SOTF enab. L2 (all ends SOTF TRIP 3p
SOTF enab. L3 open)
≥1 FNo 4282...4284
&
SOTF enab. L123 SOF O/CpickupL1
L1 SOF O/CpickupL2
L2 SOF O/CpickupL3
L3
Figure 6-33 Logic diagram of the instantaneous high-speed SOTF overcurrent function
A precondition for the use of the instantaneous high-speed SOTF overcurrent function
is that during the configuration of the device functions (Section 5.1) SOTF Func. =
Enabled has been configured in address 124. It can also be switched ON and OFF
with address 2401 FCT HS/SOTF-O/C.
I>>> Stage The magnitude of fault current which leads to the pickup of the I>>>-stage is set as
I>>> in address 2404. This stage is active only during the connecting of local end
while the circuit breakers at all other ends of the protected object are open. Choose a
value which is high enough for the protection not to pickup on the RMS value of the
inrush current produced during the connection of the protected object. On the other
hand, fault currents flowing through the protected object need not be considered.
During setting with a personal computer and DIGSI® 4 the values can be entered in
primary or secondary quantities. If secondary quantities are configured, the currents
are converted to the secondary side of the current transformers.
I>>>> Stage The I>>>> stage (address 2405A) works regardless of the circuit breaker position.
Since it trips extremely fast it must be set high enough not to pickup on a fault current
flowing through the protected object. This means that it can be used only if the protect-
ed object allows current grading, as is the case with transformers, series reactors or
long lines with small source impedance. In other cases it is set to ∞ (default setting).
This parameter can only be changed with DIGSI® 4 under “Additional Settings”.
7SD52 Manual 6-61

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
During setting with a personal computer and DIGSI® 4 the values can be entered in
primary or secondary quantities. If secondary quantities are configured, the currents
are converted to the secondary side of the current transformers.
110 kV overhead line 150 mm2 with the data:
s (length) = 60 km
R1/s = 0.19 Ω/km
X1/s = 0.42 Ω/km
Short-circuit power at the feeding end:
Sk" = 3.5 GVA (subtransient, since the I>>>> stage can respond to the first
peak value)
From that the line impedance ZL and the source impedance ZS are calculated:
Z1/s = √0.192 + 0.422 Ω/km = 0.46 Ω/km
ZL = 0.46 Ω/km · 60 km = 27.66 Ω
2 2
110 kV
S = ------------------------------ = 3.46 Ω
3500 MVA
The three-phase short-circuit current at the line end is I"k end (with source voltage
1.1·UN):
1.1 ⋅ U N 1.1 ⋅ 110 kV
I" k end = ------------------------------------- = ---------------------------------------------------------------- = 2245 A
3 ⋅ ( ZV + ZL ) 3 ⋅ (3.46 Ω + 27.66 Ω )
With a safety factor of 10 % the following primary setting value results:

Setting value I>>>> = 1.1 · 2245 A = 2470 A
Or the secondary setting value:
2245 A
Settingvalue I>>>> = 1.1 ⋅ ------------------- ⋅ 5 A = 20.6 A
600 A
i.e. in case of fault currents exceeding 2470 A (primary) or 20.6 A (secondary) you can
be sure that a short-circuit has occurred on the protected line. This line can be discon-
nected immediately.
Note:
The calculation was carried out with absolute values, which is sufficiently precise for
overhead lines. If the angles of the source impedance and the line impedance vary
considerably, a complex calculation will have to be carried out.
6-62 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2

2401 FCT HS/SOTF-O/C ON ON Inst. High Speed/SOTF-O/C is
OFF
2404 I>>> 0.10..15.00 A; ∞ 1.50 A I>>> Pickup
2405A I>>>> 1.00..25.00 A; ∞ ∞A I>>>> Pickup

4253 >BLOCK SOTF-O/C >BLOCK Instantaneous SOTF Overcurrent
4271 SOTF-O/C OFF SOTF-O/C is switched OFF
4272 SOTF-O/C BLOCK SOTF-O/C is BLOCKED
4273 SOTF-O/C ACTIVE SOTF-O/C is ACTIVE
4281 SOTF-O/C PICKUP SOTF-O/C PICKED UP
4282 SOF O/CpickupL1 SOTF-O/C Pickup L1
4285 I>>>>O/C p.upL1 High Speed-O/C Pickup I>>>> L1
4289 HS/SOF TRIP1pL1 High Speed/SOTF-O/C TRIP - Only L1
4292 HS/SOF TRIP 1p High Speed/SOTF-O/C TRIP 1pole
4293 HS/SOF Gen.TRIP High Speed/SOTF-O/C General TRIP
4294 HS/SOF TRIP 3p High Speed/SOTF-O/C TRIP 3pole
4295 HS/SOF TRIPL123 High Speed/SOTF-O/C TRIP command L123
7SD52 Manual 6-63

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
6.8 Time Overcurrent Protection
General Informa- The 7SD52 has a time overcurrent protection function which can be used as either a
tion back-up or an emergency overcurrent protection.
Whereas the differential protection can only operate correctly if each device receives
the data of the other devices properly, the emergency overcurrent protection requires
only the local currents. The emergency overcurrent protection is automatically activat-
ed when the data communication of the differential protection is disturbed (emergency
operation) and the differential protection is blocked as a result.
This means that emergency operation will replace the differential protection for short-
circuit protection if the data communication fails and cannot be re-established by a
data bypass (e.g. in a ring topology).
If the overcurrent protection is set as a back-up overcurrent protection, it will work in-
dependently of other protection and monitoring functions, i.e. also independently of
the differential protection. The back-up overcurrent protection can also be used as
sole short-circuit protection if no suitable channels for the communication between the
protection devices are available during the initial commissioning.
The overcurrent protection has a total of four stages for each phase current and for
the ground current; these are:
• Two overcurrent stages with independent trip time (definite time overcurrent protec-
tion),
• One overcurrent stage with current-dependent trip time (inverse time overcurrent
protection),
• A further overcurrent stage which has an additional enable input and can therefore
be used as an emergency stage e.g. if the remaining stages are used as back-up
stages, or as a stub protection.
These four stages do not depend on one another and can be combined as desired.
Blocking from external criteria is possible via binary inputs just like instantaneous trip-
ping. It is also possible to switch to any one or more of the stages if the protected ob-
ject is switched onto a fault. The stages not required can be deactived by setting the
pickup value to ∞.
Measured Quanti- The phase currents are fed to the device via the input transformers of the measure-
ties ment input. The ground current 3·I0 is either measured directly or calculated, depend-
ing on the version ordered and the use of the device’s fourth current input I4.
If I4 is connected to the starpoint of the current transformer set, the ground current will
be available directly as measured quantity.
If I4 is connected to a separate ground current transformer, this will be used, while con-
sidering the factor I4/Iph CT (address 221, see Subsection 6.1.1) of the “Power
System Data 1”.
6-64 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
If the ground current is not connected to the fourth current input I4 (address 220 I4
transformer = Not connected, see Subsection 6.1.1), the device will calculate
the ground current from the phase currents. Of course, all three phase currents of
three star-connected current transformers must be available and connected in this
case.
Definite Time High- Each phase current is compared with the setting value Iph>> after numerical filtering;
current Stage I>> the ground current is compared with 3I0>> PICKUP. Currents above the associated
pickup value are detected and annunciated. When the relevant delay time T Iph>>
or T 3I0>> has expired, a tripping command is issued. The reset value is approxi-
mately 5 % less than the pickup value, but at least 1.5 % of the rated current below it.
Figure 6-34 shows the logic diagram of the I>> stages. They can be blocked via the
binary input “>BLOCK O/C I>>”. In addition, the ground current stage can be blocked
separately via the binary input “>BLOCK O/C Ie>>”, e.g. during a single-pole dead
time before reclosure in order to avoid a spurious tripping with the zero phase-se-
quence system which is present then.
Iph>> 2610 2611 T Iph>>
I>> PU L1
I>> PU L2
IL1 T 0
I>> PU L3
Iph>> &
IL2
≥1 I>> TRIP L1
IL3
I>> TRIP L2
I>> TRIP L3
&
L1
L2
L3
3I0>> PICKUP 2612 2613 T 3I0>>
I>> PU E
IE
3I0>> T 0
& ≥1 I>> TRIP E
&
E
FNo 7107
>BLOCK O/C Ie>>
FNo 7104
>BLOCK O/C I>>
2614 I>> Telep/BI
FNo 7110 YES
>O/C InstTRIP ≥1
NO
Switching YES
onto a T 0
fault NO
2615 I>> SOTF

SOTF Time DELAY 2680
further
stages
Figure 6-34 Logic diagram of the I>> stage
7SD52 Manual 6-65

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
The binary input “>O/C InstTRIP” and the function block “Switch onto fault” are the
same for all stages and explained in detail below. They can, however, affect the phase
and/ or ground stages separately. This can be achieved with two parameters:
• I>> Telep/BI (address 2614) defines whether an instantaneous tripping without
delay of this stage is possible (YES) via the binary input “>O/C InstTRIP” or im-
possible (NO). This parameter is also used for instantaneous tripping before auto-
matic reclosure.
• I>> SOTF (address 2615) defines whether an instantaneous tripping is to be per-
formed by this stage (YES) or not (NO) if the line is switched onto a fault.
Definite Time Over- The logic of the overcurrent stages I> is designed like the I>> stages, except that in all
current Stage I> designations Iph>> is replaced by Iph> and 3I0>> PICKUP by 3I0>.
Inverse Time Over- The logic of the current-dependent (inverse time) stage operates basically like the
current Stage Ip other stages. However, the time delay is calculated here based on the type of the set
characteristic (parameter IEC Curve), the intensity of the current and a time multi-
plier (Figure 6-35). A preselection of the possible characteristics has been made dur-
ing the configuration of the protection functions. Moreover, a constant additional time
T Ip Add or T 3I0p Add can be selected which is added to the current-dependent
time. The possible characteristics are shown in Section 10.6 in the Technical Data.
Figure 6-35 shows the logic diagram. Here, exemplary setting addresses for the IEC
characteristics are shown. The setting notes (Subsection 6.8.2) explain the various
setting addresses in detail.
6-66 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
2660 IEC Curve
2640 IP> 2642 T Ip TimeDial
Ip PU L1
Ip PU L2
Ip PU L3
IL1
t
IL2 IP & T 0
IL3 I ≥1 Ip TRIP L1
Ip TRIP L2
Ip TRIP L3
2646 T IP Add
T 3I0P
&
L1
L2
L3
3I0p PICKUP 2650 2652 T 3I0p TimeDial
Ip PU E
IE
T 0 t
3I0P
&
I
≥1 Ip TRIP E
2656 T 3I0P Add
&
FNo 7109
>BLOCK O/C Iep
FNo 7106
>BLOCK O/C Ip
2670 I(3I0)p Tele/BI
FNo 7110 YES
>O/C InstTRIP ≥1
NO
Switching YES
onto a T 0
fault NO
2671 I(3I0)p SOTF

further
stages
Figure 6-35 Logic diagram of the Ip stage (inverse-time overcurrent protection) — example for IEC characteris-
tics
Additional Overcur- The additional definite time or instantaneous overcurrent stage I–STUB has an extra
rent Stage I–STUB enable input (Figure 6-36) and is therefore also suitable e.g. as a stub protection or as
an emergency stage if the remaining stages are used as backup stages. The enable
input “>I-STUB ENABLE” can be assigned to the output signal “Emer. mode” (either
via binary outputs and inputs or via the user-definable logic CFC functions). The stage
is then automatically active when the differential protection is not effective, e.g. due to
a data disturbance.
7SD52 Manual 6-67

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
The I–STUB stage can, however, also be used as a standard additional and independ-
ent overcurrent stage, since it works independent of the other stages. In this case, the
release input “>I-STUB ENABLE” must be permanently activated (via a binary input
or CFC).
Iph> STUB 2630 2631 T Iph STUB
I-STUB PU L1
I-STUB PU L2
IL1 T 0
I-STUB PU L3
Iph &
IL2
≥1 I-STUB TRIP L1
IL3
I-STUB TRIP L2
I-STUB TRIP L3
&
L1
L2
L3
3I0> STUB 2632 2633 T 3I0 STUB
I-STUB PU E
IE
3I0 & T 0
≥1 I-STUB TRIP E
&
E
FNo 7132
>BLOCK O/CIe>>>
FNo 7130
>BLOCK I-STUB
FNo 7131 ≥1
>I-STUB ENABLE
2634 I-STUB Telep/BI

FNo 7110 YES
>O/C InstTRIP. ≥1
NO
Switching YES
onto a T 0
fault NO
2635 I-STUB SOTF

further
stages
Figure 6-36 Logic diagram of the I–STUB stage
Instantaneous If automatic reclosure is to be carried out, a rapid clearing of the fault is usually desir-
Tripping before able before reclosure. A “ready for reclosure” signal from an external automatic reclos-
Automatic ure device can be injected via binary input “>O/C InstTRIP”. The internal automatic
Reclosure reclosure function — if existent — acts on this input as well. Any stage of the overcur-
rent protection can thus perform an instantaneous trip before reclosure via the param-
eters I...Telep/BI.
6-68 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Switching onto a To perform an instantaneous trip when the circuit breaker is manually closed onto a
Fault dead fault, the manual closing command of the control discrepancy switch can be fed
to the device via a binary input. The overcurrent protection then performs a three-pole
trip with no or almost no delay. The stage(s) for which the instantaneous trip after man-
ual closing is valid are determined by parameters (see also logic diagrams Figure 6-
34, 6-35 and 6-36).
Pickup and Trip- The pickup signals of the individual phases (or the ground) and of the stages are linked
ping Logic in such a way that both the phase information and the stage which has picked up are
output (Table 6-2).
For the tripping signals, the stage which caused the tripping is output as well. For
single-pole tripping, the pole is identified (see also Subsection 6.13.4 Tripping Logic
of the Entire Device).
Table 6-2 Pickup signals of the time overcurrent protection

Internal message Figure Output message FNo
I>> PU L1 6-34
I> PU L1
O/C Pickup L1 7162
Ip PU L1 6-35
I-STUB PU L1 6-36
I>> PU L2 6-34
I> PU L2
O/C Pickup L2 7163
Ip PU L2 6-35
I-STUB PU L2 6-36
I>> PU L3 6-34
I> PU L3
O/C Pickup L3 7164
Ip PU L3 6-35
I-STUB PU L3 6-36
I>> PU E 6-34
I> PU E
O/C Pickup E 7165
Ip PU E 6-35
I-STUB PU E 6-36
I>> PU L1 6-34
I>> PU L2 6-34
O/C PICKUP I>> 7191
I>> PU L3 6-34
I>> PU E 6-34
I> PU L1
I> PU L2
O/C PICKUP I> 7192
I> PU L3
I> PU E
Ip PU L1 6-35
Ip PU L2 6-35
O/C PICKUP Ip 7193
Ip PU L3 6-35
Ip PU E 6-35
I-STUB PU L1 6-36
I-STUB PU L2 6-36
I-STUB PICKUP 7201
I-STUB PU L3 6-36
I-STUB PU E 6-36
(all pick-ups) O/C PICKUP 7161
7SD52 Manual 6-69

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
General During the configuration of the device functions (see Section 5.1, address 126) the
Information available characteristics have been defined. Depending on the configuration and de-
pending on the version ordered, only those parameters are accessible which are valid
for the available characteristics.
Address 2601 is set according to the desired mode of operation of the overcurrent
protection: Operating Mode = ON means that the overcurrent protection works in-
dependently of other protection functions, i.e. as a backup overcurrent protection. If it
is to work only as an emergency function in case of a transmission failure, Only Em-
er. prot must be set. Finally, it can also be set to OFF.
If some stages are not needed, those not needed can be deactivated by setting the
pickup value to ∞. But if you set only an associated time delay to ∞ this does not sup-
press the pickup signals but prevents the timers from running.
The I–STUB stage is even effective if Only Emer. prot has been set for the oper-
ating mode of the overcurrent protection.
One or several stages can be set as instantaneous tripping stages when switching
onto a fault. This is chosen during the setting of the individual stages (see below). To
avoid a spurious tripping due to transient overcurrents a delay SOTF Time DELAY
(address 2680) can be set. Normally the default setting 0.00 is correct. A short delay
can be useful in case of long cables for which high inrush currents can be expected,
or for transformers. This delay depends on the intensity and duration the of the tran-
sient phenomena and on the stages used for the instantaneous tripping.
High-Current The I>> stages Iph>> (address 2610) and 3I0>> PICKUP (address 2612) together
Stages Iph>>, 3I0>> with the I> stages or the Ip stages result in a two-stage characteristic. Of course, all
Definite Time three stages can be combined as well. If a stage is not required, the pickup value is
set to ∞. The I>> stages always operate with a defined delay.
If the I>> stages are used for instantaneous tripping before the automatic reclosure,
the current-setting corresponds to the I> or Ip stages. In this case only the different de-
lay times are of interest. The times T Iph>> (address 2611) and T 3I0>> (address
2613) can than be set to 0.00 or a very low value, as the fast clearance of the fault
takes priority over the selectivity before the automatic reclosure is initiated. These
stages have to be blocked before final trip in order to achieve the selectivity.
For very long lines with a small source impedance or on applications with large reac-
tances (e.g. transformers, series reactors), the I>> stages can also be used for current
grading. In this case they must be set in such a way that they do not pick up in case
of a fault at the end of the line. The times can then be set to 0.00 or to a small value.
During the parameterization from a personal computer using DIGSI® 4, the parame-
ters can be set as primary or secondary quantities. If secondary quantities are used,
all currents must be converted to the secondary side of the current transformers.
110 kV overhead line 150 mm2 with the data:
s (length) = 60 km
R1/s = 0.19 Ω/km
X1/s = 0.42 Ω/km
6-70 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Short-circuit power at the beginning of the line:

Ssc' = 2.5 GVA
From that the line impedance ZL and the source impedance ZS are calculated:
Z1/s = √0.192 + 0.422 Ω/km = 0.46 Ω/km
ZL = 0.46 Ω/km · 60 km = 27.66 Ω
2 2
110 kV
ZS = ------------------------------ = 4.84 Ω
2500 MVA
The three-phase fault current at the line end is Isc End:

1.1 ⋅ U N 1, 1 ⋅ 110 kV
I scEnd = ------------------------------------- = ---------------------------------------------------------------- = 2150 A
3 ⋅ ( ZS + ZL ) 3 ⋅ ( 4.84 Ω + 27.66 Ω )
With a safety factor of 10 %, the following primary setting value is calculated:

Setting value I>> = 1.1 · 2150 A = 2365 A
Or the secondary setting value:
2150 A
Settingvalue I>> = 1.1 ⋅ ------------------- ⋅ 5 A = 19.7 A
600 A
i.e. in case of fault currents exceeding 2365 A (primary) or 19.7 A (secondary) you can
be sure that a short-circuit has occurred on the protected line. It can be disconnected
by the overcurrent protection immediately.
Note: the calculation was carried out with absolute values, which is sufficiently precise
for overhead lines. If the angles of the source impedance and the line impedance vary
considerably, a complex calculation will have to be carried out.
A similar calculation can be carried out for ground faults, with the maximum earth cur-
rent occurring at the line end during a short-circuit being decisive.
The set times are pure additional delays which do not include the inherent operating
time of the protection.
The parameter I>> Telep/BI (address 2614) defines whether the time delays T
Iph>> (address 2611) and T 3I0>> (address 2613) can be bypassed by the binary
input “>O/C InstTRIP” (FNo 7110) or by the operational automatic reclosure func-
tion. The binary input (if allocated) is the same for all stages of the overcurrent protec-
tion. With I>> Telep/BI = YES you define that the I>> stages trip without delay after
pickup if the binary input was activated. For I>> Telep/BI = NO the set delays are
always active. Instantaneous tripping by the operational auto-reclosure function
should only be chosen if the overcurrent protection is set to emergency function. Since
the differential protection guarantees a fast and selective tripping with or without auto-
reclosure, the overcurrent protection as a back-up protection may not perform a non-
selective trip, even before auto-reclosure.
If the I>> stage is to perform an instantaneous trip (when the line is switched onto a
fault) or a trip with a short time delay SOTF Time DELAY (address 2680, refer to
“General Information” above), set the parameter I>> SOTF (address 2615) to YES.
Any other stage can be selected as well for this instantaneous tripping.
7SD52 Manual 6-71

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
Overcurrent Stages For the setting of the current pickup value, Iph> (address 2620), the maximum oper-
Iph>, 3I0> ating current is most decisive. Pickup through overload must be excluded, since the
Definite Time device works in this operating mode as a short-circuit protection, not as an overload
protection, and the command times are relatively short. The pickup value should
therefore be set to a higher value than the maximum (over-)load to be expected, i.e.
approx. 10 % for lines and approximately 20 % for transformers and motors.
During configuration from a personal computer using DIGSI® 4 the parameters can be
set either to primary or secondary quantities. If secondary quantities are used, all cur-
rents must be converted to the secondary side of the current transformers.
110 kV overhead line 150 mm2 as above:
Maximum transmitted power
Pmax = 120 MVA corresponding to
Imax = 630 A
Current transformer 600 A/5 A
Safety factor 1.1
With settings in primary quantities the following setting value is calculated:
Setting value I> = 1.1 · 630 A = 693 A
With settings in secondary quantities the following setting value is calculated:
630 A
Setting value I> = 1.1 ⋅ ---------------- ⋅ 5 A = 5.8 A
600 A
The ground current stage 3I0> (address 2622) should be set to detect the smallest
ground fault current to be expected.
The time delay T Iph> (address 2621) results from the time grading schedule de-
signed for the network. For use as an emergency overcurrent protection, shorter delay
times make sense (one grading time step above instantaneous tripping), since this
function is to work only in case of an interruption of the data communication of the dif-
ferential protection.
The time T 3I0> (address 2623) can normally be set shorter, according to a separate
time grading schedule for ground currents.
The set times are mere additional delays for the independent stages, which do not in-
clude the inherent operating time of the protection. If only the phase currents are to be
monitored for a stage, set the pickup value of the ground current stage to ∞.
The parameter I> Telep/BI (address 2624) defines whether the time delays T
Iph> (address 2621) and T 3I0> (address 2623) can be bypassed by the binary
input “>O/C InstTRIP” (FNo 7110) or by the operational automatic reclosure func-
tion. The binary input (if allocated) is the same for all stages of the overcurrent protec-
tion. With I> Telep/BI = YES you define that the I> stages trip without delay after
pickup if the binary input was activated. For I> Telep/BI = NO the set delays are
always active. Instantaneous tripping by the operational auto-reclosure function
should only be chosen if the overcurrent protection is set to emergency function. Since
the differential protection guarantees a fast and selective tripping with or without auto-
reclosure, the overcurrent protection as a back-up protection may not perform a non-
selective trip, even before auto-reclosure.
6-72 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
If the I> stage is to perform an instantaneous trip, when the line is switched onto a fault,
or a trip with a short time delay SOTF Time DELAY (address 2680, refer to “General
Information” above), set the parameter I> SOTF (address 2625) to YES. However,
the stage selected for instantaneous tripping should not be too sensitive since a strong
fault current is to be expected when switching onto a fault, and transient pickup of the
selected stage on switching on must be avoided.
Overcurrent Stages Various characteristics can be chosen for the inverse time stages, depending on the
IP, 3I0P version ordered and the configuration (Section 5.1, address 126). For Back-Up O/C
Inverse Time with = TOC IEC, the following IEC-characteristics are available under address 2660 IEC
IEC Characteristics Curve:
Inverse (Type A in accordance with IEC 60255–3),
Very Inverse (Type B in accordance with IEC 60255–3),
Extremely Inv. (Type C in accordance with IEC 60255–3), and
LongTimeInverse (Type B in accordance with IEC 60255–3).
The characteristics and the formulae on which they are based, are shown in the Tech-
nical Data (Section 10.6).
The considerations for the overcurrent stages of the definite-time overcurrent protec-
tion (see above) are also valid for the setting of the pickup values Ip> (address 2640)
and 3I0p PICKUP (address 2650). It should be noted that a safety margin has al-
ready been included between the pickup value and the setting value and that the pro-
tection picks up only when the setting value is exceeded by 10 %.
Referring to the above example, the maximum operational current to be expected can
be set here:
Primary: Setting value Ip> = 630 A,
Secondary: Setting value Ip> = 5.25 A, i.e. (630 A / 600 A) · 5 A.
The time multiplier T Ip Time Dial (address 2642) derives from the time grading
schedule set for the network. For the use as emergency overcurrent protection shorter
delay times make sense (one grading time step above instantaneous tripping), since
this function is to work only in case of an interruption of the data communication of the
differential protection.
The time multiplier T 3I0p TimeDial (address 2652) can normally be set shorter,
according to a separate time grading schedule for ground currents. If only the phase
currents are to be monitored, set the pickup value of the ground current stage to ∞.
In addition to the current-dependent delays, a delay of constant length can be set, if
necessary. The settings T Ip Add (address 2646 for phase currents) and T 3I0p
Add (address 2656 for ground current) are added to the times of the set characteris-
tics.
The parameter I(3I0)p Tele/BI (address 2670) defines whether the time delays
T Ip Time Dial (address 2642) including the additional time T Ip Add (address
2646) and T 3I0p TimeDial (address 2652) including the additional time T 3I0p
Add (address 2656) can be bypassed by the binary input “>O/C InstTRIP” (FNo
7110) or by the operational automatic reclosure function. The binary input (if allocat-
ed) is the same for all stages of the overcurrent protection. With I(3I0)p Tele/BI
= YES you define that the IPstages trip without delay after pickup if the binary input was
activated. For I(3I0)p Tele/BI = NO the set delays are always active. Instantane-
ous tripping by the operational auto-reclosure function should only be chosen if the
overcurrent protection is set to emergency function. Since the differential protection
7SD52 Manual 6-73

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
guarantees a fast and selective tripping with or without auto-reclosure, the overcurrent
protection as a backup protection may not perform a non-selective trip, even before
auto-reclosure.
If the inverse time stage is to perform an instantaneous trip, when the line is switched
onto a fault, or a trip with a short time delay SOTF Time DELAY (address 2680, refer
to “General Information” above), set the parameter I(3I0)p SOTF (address 2671)
to YES. However, the stage selected for instantaneous tripping should not be too sen-
sitive since a strong fault current is to be expected when switching onto a fault, and
transient pickup of the selected stage on switching on must be avoided.
Overcurrent Stages Various characteristics can be chosen for the inverse time stages, depending on the
IP, 3I0P version ordered and the configuration (Section 5.1, address 126). For Back-Up O/C
Inverse Time with = TOC ANSI, the following ANSI-characteristics are available under address 2661
ANSI Characteris- ANSI Curve:
tics
Inverse,
Short Inverse,
Long Inverse,
Moderately Inv.,
Very Inverse,
Extremely Inv. and
Definite Inv.
The characteristics and the formulae on which they are based, are shown in the Tech-
nical Data (Section 10.6).
The considerations for the overcurrent stages of the definite-time overcurrent protec-
tion (see above) are also valid for the setting of the pickup values Ip> (address 2640)
and 3I0p PICKUP (address 2650). It should be noted that a safety margin has al-
ready been included between the pickup value and the setting value and that the pro-
tection picks up only when the setting value is exceeded by 10 %.
Referring to the above example, the maximum operational current to be expected can
be set here:
Primary: setting value Ip> = 630 A,
Secondary: setting value Ip> = 5.25 A, i.e. (630 A / 600 A) · 5 A.
The time multiplier Time Dial TD Ip (address 2643) derives from the time grading
schedule set for the network. For the use as emergency overcurrent protection shorter
delay times make sense (one grading time step above instantaneous tripping), since
this function is to work only in the case of an interruption of the data communication of
the differential protection.
The time multiplier TimeDial TD3I0p (address 2653) can normally be set shorter,
according to a separate time grading schedule for ground currents. If only the phase
currents are to be monitored, set the pickup value of the ground current stage to ∞.
In addition to the current-dependent delays, a delay of constant length can be set, if
necessary. The settings T Ip Add (address 2646 for phase currents) and T 3I0p
Add (address 2656 for ground current) are added to the times of the set characteris-
tics.
The parameter I(3I0)p Tele/BI (address 2670) defines whether the time delays
Time Dial TD Ip (address 2643) including the additional time T Ip Add (ad-
dress 2646) and TimeDial TD3I0p (address 2653) including the additional time T
6-74 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
3I0p Add (address 2656) can be bypassed by the binary input “>O/C InstTRIP”
(FNo 7110) or by the operational automatic reclosure function. The binary input (if al-
located) is the same for all stages of the overcurrent protection. With I(3I0)p Tele/
BI = YES you define that the IP stages trip without delay after pickup if the binary input
was activated. For I(3I0)p Tele/BI = NO the set delays are always active. Instan-
taneous tripping by the operational auto-reclosure function should only be chosen if
the overcurrent protection is set to emergency function. Since the differential protec-
tion guarantees a fast and selective tripping with or without auto-reclosure, the over-
current protection as a back-up protection may not perform a non-selective trip, even
before auto-reclosure.
If the inverse time stage is to perform an instantaneous trip (when the line is switched
onto a fault) or a trip with a short time delay SOTF Time DELAY (address 2680, refer
to “General Information” above), set the parameter I(3I0)p SOTF (address 2671)
to YES. However, the stage selected for instantaneous tripping should not be too sen-
sitive since a strong fault current is to be expected when switching onto a fault, and
transient pickup of the selected stage on switching on must be avoided.
Additional Stage The I–STUB stage can be used as an additional definite time overcurrent stage, since
I–STUB it works independently of the other stages. In this case, the enable input “>I-STUB
ENABLE” (FNo 7131) must be activated permanently (via a binary input or CFC). Al-
ternatively, it can be used as a stub bus protection. In this case, the enable input “>I-
STUB ENABLE” is activated by the indication of the open line disconnector.
Since the I–STUB stage has an additional enable input, it is also suitable e.g. as an
emergency stage if the remaining stages are used as backup stages. The release in-
put “>I-STUB ENABLE” (FNo 7131) can be assigned the output signal “Emer. mode”
(either via binary outputs and inputs or via the user-definable logic CFC functions).
The considerations for the use of the I–STUB stage as an emergency function are the
same as for the I> stages. The setting value Iph> STUB (address 2630) must here
too be higher than the maximum operational current to be expected, in order to avoid
pickup without fault. The delay T Iph STUB (address 2631), however, can be shorter
than defined in the time grading schedule, since this stage works only in emergency
operation, i.e. in case of a communication failure of the differential protection. Normal-
ly, one time step above the base time of the differential protection is sufficient.
The ground current stage 3I0> STUB (address 2632) should correspondingly pick up
on the smallest ground current to be expected during a ground fault and the delay T
3I0 STUB (address 2633) should exceed the base time of the differential protection
by a grading time. If only the phase currents are to be monitored, set the pickup value
of the ground fault stage to ∞.
The I–STUB stages can also be accelerated by the enable signal “>O/C InstTRIP”
(FNo 7110), e.g. before an auto-reclosure. This is defined with parameter I-STUB
Telep/BI (address 2634). Set it on YES if the I–STUB stages are to trip without delay
as long as the binary input “>O/C InstTRIP” is activated or the internal auto-reclos-
ure function is ready to operate. Instantaneous tripping by the operational auto-reclos-
ure should only be chosen if the I–STUB stage is set as an emergency function. If the
differential protection is out of operation, this emergency stage guarantees instanta-
neous tripping before auto-reclosure.
Instantaneous tripping when the line is switched onto a fault is also possible with the
I–STUB stage. Set parameter I-STUB SOTF (address 2635) to YES, if instantaneous
tripping is desired.
7SD52 Manual 6-75

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions

2601 Operating Mode ON ON Operating mode
Only Emergency protection
OFF
2680 SOTF Time DELAY 0.00..30.00 sec 0.00 sec Trip time delay after SOTF
2610 Iph>> 0.10..25.00 A; ∞ 2.00 A Iph>> Pickup
2611 T Iph>> 0.00..30.00 sec; ∞ 0.30 sec T Iph>> Time delay
2612 3I0>> PICKUP 0.05..25.00 A; ∞ 0.50 A 3I0>> Pickup
2613 T 3I0>> 0.00..30.00 sec; ∞ 2.00 sec T 3I0>> Time delay
2614 I>> Telep/BI NO YES Instantaneous trip via Teleprot./

YES BI
2615 I>> SOTF NO NO Instantaneous trip after Swit-

YES chOnToFault
2620 Iph> 0.10..25.00 A; ∞ 1.50 A Iph> Pickup
2621 T Iph> 0.00..30.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec T Iph> Time delay
2622 3I0> 0.05..25.00 A; ∞ 0.20 A 3I0> Pickup
2623 T 3I0> 0.00..30.00 sec; ∞ 2.00 sec T 3I0> Time delay
2624 I> Telep/BI NO NO Instantaneous trip via Teleprot./

YES BI
2625 I> SOTF NO NO Instantaneous trip after Swit-

YES chOnToFault
2640 Ip> 0.10..4.00 A; ∞ ∞A Ip> Pickup
2642 T Ip Time Dial 0.05..3.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec T Ip Time Dial
2643 Time Dial TD Ip 0.50..15.00; ∞ 5.00 Time Dial TD Ip
2646 T Ip Add 0.00..30.00 sec 0.00 sec T Ip Additional Time Delay
2650 3I0p PICKUP 0.05..4.00 A; ∞ ∞A 3I0p Pickup
2652 T 3I0p TimeDial 0.05..3.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec T 3I0p Time Dial
2653 TimeDial TD3I0p 0.50..15.00; ∞ 5.00 Time Dial TD 3I0p
2656 T 3I0p Add 0.00..30.00 sec 0.00 sec T 3I0p Additional Time Delay
6-76 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2

2660 IEC Curve Normal Inverse Normal Inverse IEC Curve
Very Inverse
Extremely Inverse
Long time inverse
2661 ANSI Curve Inverse Inverse ANSI Curve

Short Inverse
Long Inverse
Moderately Inverse
Very Inverse
Extremely Inverse
Definite Inverse
2670 I(3I0)p Tele/BI NO NO Instantaneous trip via Teleprot./

YES BI
2671 I(3I0)p SOTF NO NO Instantaneous trip after Swit-

YES chOnToFault
2630 Iph> STUB 0.10..25.00 A; ∞ 1.50 A Iph> STUB Pickup
2631 T Iph STUB 0.00..30.00 sec; ∞ 0.30 sec T Iph STUB Time delay
2632 3I0> STUB 0.05..25.00 A; ∞ 0.20 A 3I0> STUB Pickup
2633 T 3I0 STUB 0.00..30.00 sec; ∞ 2.00 sec T 3I0 STUB Time delay
2634 I-STUB Telep/BI NO NO Instantaneous trip via Teleprot./

YES BI
2635 I-STUB SOTF NO NO Instantaneous trip after Swit-
YES chOnToFault
7SD52 Manual 6-77

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions

7104 >BLOCK O/C I>> >BLOCK Backup OverCurrent I>>
7105 >BLOCK O/C I> >BLOCK Backup OverCurrent I>
7106 >BLOCK O/C Ip >BLOCK Backup OverCurrent Ip
7107 >BLOCK O/C Ie>> >BLOCK Backup OverCurrent Ie>>
7108 >BLOCK O/C Ie> >BLOCK Backup OverCurrent Ie>
7109 >BLOCK O/C Iep >BLOCK Backup OverCurrent Iep
7110 >O/C InstTRIP >Backup OverCurrent InstantaneousTrip
7130 >BLOCK I-STUB >BLOCK I-STUB
7131 >I-STUB ENABLE >Enable I-STUB-Bus function
7132 >BLOCK O/CIe>>> >BLOCK Backup OverCurrent Ie>>>
7151 O/C OFF Backup O/C is switched OFF
7152 O/C BLOCK Backup O/C is BLOCKED
7153 O/C ACTIVE Backup O/C is ACTIVE
7161 O/C PICKUP Backup O/C PICKED UP
7162 O/C Pickup L1 Backup O/C PICKUP L1
7165 O/C Pickup E Backup O/C PICKUP EARTH
7191 O/C PICKUP I>> Backup O/C Pickup I>>
7192 O/C PICKUP I> Backup O/C Pickup I>
7193 O/C PICKUP Ip Backup O/C Pickup Ip
7201 I-STUB PICKUP O/C I-STUB Pickup
7211 O/C TRIP Backup O/C General TRIP command
7212 O/C TRIP 1p.L1 Backup O/C TRIP - Only L1
7215 O/C TRIP L123 Backup O/C TRIP Phases L123
7221 O/C TRIP I>> Backup O/C TRIP I>>
7222 O/C TRIP I> Backup O/C TRIP I>
7223 O/C TRIP Ip Backup O/C TRIP Ip
7235 I-STUB TRIP O/C I-STUB TRIP
6-78 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6.9 Automatic Reclosure
Experience shows that about 85 % of the arc faults on overhead lines are extinguished
automatically after being tripped by the protection. The line can therefore be reclosed.
Reclosure is performed by an automatic reclosure function (AR). An example of the
normal time sequence of a double-shot reclosure is shown in Figure 6-37.
If the circuit breaker poles can be operated individually, a single-pole trip followed by
an auto-reclosure is often initiated in the case of single-phase faults and a three-pole
trip with auto-reclosure in the case of multi-phase faults in the network with earthed
system starpoint. If the fault still exists after reclosure (arc not extinguished or metallic
short-circuit), the protection issues a final trip. Repeated reclosure attempts are made
in some networks.
Automatic reclosure is only permitted on overhead lines because the possibility of
automatic extinguishing of a fault arc only exists there. It must not be used in any other
case. If the protected object consists of a mixture of overhead lines and other equip-
ment (e.g. overhead line in block with a transformer or overhead line/cable), it must be
ensured that reclosure can only be performed in the event of a fault on the overhead
line.
In the version with single-pole tripping, 7SD52 allows phase-segregated, single-pole
tripping. A single- and three-pole, single and multiple shot automatic reclosure func-
tion is integrated, depending on the order version.
7SD52 can also operate together with an external automatic reclosure device. In this
case the signal exchange between 7SD52 and the external reclosure device must
take place via the binary inputs and outputs.
It is also possible to have the integrated automatic reclosure function controlled by an
external protection (e.g. alternate protection). The use of two 7SD52 with auto-reclos-
ure or the use of one 7SD52 with auto-reclosure and a second protection with its own
auto-reclosure are equally possible.
Pickup
aborted aborted
Action
time
Trip
command
dead time dead time
Close 1st reclosure 2nd reclosure
command
aborted reclaim
Reclaim
time
time
1st reclosure unsuccessful; further 2nd reclosure successful, no further
tripping during reclaim time tripping during reclaim time
“AR in
progress” start with 1st trip command
Figure 6-37 Timing diagram of a double-shot reclosure with action time (2nd reclosure successful)
7SD52 Manual 6-79

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
The integrated automatic reclosure function allows up to 8 reclosure attempts. The

first four reclosure cycles may operate with different parameters (action and dead
times, single/three-pole). The parameters of the fourth cycle apply from the fifth cycle
onwards.
Selectivity before In order for the automatic reclosure to be successful, all faults on the whole overhead
Reclosure line must be cleared at all line ends at the same — as short as possible — time. This
is the usual case in differential protection schemes because the strict selective zone
definition of the protected object by the current transformer sets always allows unde-
layed tripping.
However, fast tripping of the protection may also be desired before reclosure after trip-
ping by other short-circuit protection functions. For this purpose, every short-circuit
protection which can start the automatic reclosure function has the possibility of initi-
ating undelayed tripping in at least one stage when the automatic reclosure function
is ready for the first reclosure cycle.
Fast tripping before reclosure is also possible for multiple reclosures. Appropriate links
between the output messages (e.g. 2nd reclosure ready: “AR 2.CycZoneRel”) and
the inputs for undelayed tripping of the protective functions can be established via the
binary inputs and outputs or the integrated user-definable logic functions (CFC).
Start Starting the automatic reclosure function means storing the first trip signal of a network
fault generated by a protection function operating with automatic reclosure. In the case
of multiple reclosure, starting therefore only takes place once which is with the first trip
command. Storing this signal is the prerequisite for all subsequent activities of the au-
tomatic reclosure function.
The starting is important when the first trip command has not appeared before expiry
of an action time (see below under “Action Times”).
Automatic reclosure is not started if the circuit breaker has not been ready for at least
one TRIP–CLOSE–TRIP–cycle at the instant of the first trip command. This can be
achieved by setting parameters. See also subtitle “Interrogation of Circuit Breaker
Ready” (page 6-82).
Setting parameters can be used for every short-circuit protection function to determine
whether or not this is to operate with reclosure, i.e. whether or not it is to start the
automatic reclosure function. The same applies accordingly for trip commands which
are applied externally via binary inputs and/or generated by transfer trip signals/re-
mote tripping.
The protection and monitoring functions of the device which do not react to short-
circuit-like phenomena do not start the automatic reclosure because reclosure is of no
use here. In 7SD52, for example, this is the overload protection.
Action Times It is often desirable to suppress the readiness for reclosure if the short-circuit has ex-
isted for a certain time, e.g. because it is assumed that the arc has burned in to such
an extent that there is no longer any chance of automatic extinguishing during the
dead time. For reasons of selectivity also (see above), frequently faults with delayed
trip should not lead to reclosure.
6-80 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
The automatic reclosure function of 7SD52 can be operated with or without action
times (configuration parameter AR control mode, address 134, see Section 5.1).
Provision of a pickup signal is not necessary from the protective functions or external
protection equipment if the auto-reclosure function is operated without action time.
Starting of the auto-reclosure takes place then as soon as the first trip command ap-
pears.
In operation with action time, an action time is available for each reclosure cycle. The
action times are always started by the pickup signals linked with OR of all protective
functions which can start the automatic reclosure function. If there is still no trip com-
mand available at the end of an action time, the corresponding reclosure cycle cannot
be performed.
For each reclosure cycle, it can be set whether or not it allows a start. With the first
general fault detection, only those action times the cycles of which allow a start have
a meaning because the other cycles may not start. Using the action times and the start
permission you can control which cycles can be run under different command time
conditions.
Example 1: 3 cycles are set. Starting of the auto-reclosure is allowed for at least the
first cycle. It is assumed that the action times are set as follows:
1.AR: T-ACTION = 0.2 s;
Since reclosure is ready before the fault occurs, the first trip of a time overcurrent pro-
tection following a fault is fast, i.e. before the end of any action time. The automatic
reclosure function is started as a result. After unsuccessful reclosure the 2nd cycle
would then become active; but the time overcurrent protection would not trip in this ex-
ample until after 1 s according to its grading time. Since the action time for the second
cycle was exceeded here, it is blocked. The 3rd cycle with its parameters is therefore
performed now. If the trip command after the 1st reclosure had not appeared within
1.2 s after the 1st reclosure, there would be no further reclosure.
Example 2: 3 cycles are set. Starting of the auto-reclosure is only allowed for the first.
The action times are set as in example 1.
The first protection trip takes place 0.5 s after starting. Since the action time for the 1st
cycle has already expired at this time, this cannot start the automatic reclosure func-
tion. However, the 2nd and 3rd cycles cannot take place because they are not set to
start. There is therefore no reclosure, because no starting at all can take place.
Example 3: 3 cycles are set. Starting of the auto-reclosure is allowed for at least the
first two cycles. The action times are set as in example 1.
The first protection trip takes place 0.5 s after starting. Since the action time for the 1st
cycle has already expired at this time, it cannot start the automatic reclosure function
but the 2nd cycle, for which starting is allowed, is activated immediately. This starts
the automatic reclosure function, the 1st cycle is practically skipped.
Control Modes of The dead times — these are the times from elimination of the fault (drop off of the trip
the Automatic command or signalling via auxiliary contacts) to the initiation of the automatic close
Reclosure command — may vary, depending on the automatic reclosure control mode selected
when determining the function scope (Section 5.1) and the resulting signals of the
starting protective functions.
In the Trip... control mode single-pole or single/three-pole reclosure cycles are pos-
sible if the device and the circuit breaker are suitable for single-pole trip. In this case
different dead times after single-pole tripping on the one hand and after three-pole trip-
7SD52 Manual 6-81

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
ping on the other hand are possible (for every reclosure cycle). The tripping protective
function determines the type of tripping: single-pole or three-pole. Control of the dead
time depends on this.
In the Pickup... control mode, different dead times can be set for every reclosure
cycle after single-, two- and three-phase faults. Decisive here is the pickup situation
of the protective functions at the instant the trip command disappears. This control
mode enables the dead times to be made dependent on the type of fault in the case
of three-pole reclosure cycles.
Blocking Reclosure Different events lead to blocking of automatic reclosure. No reclosure is possible for
example if it is blocked via a binary input. If the automatic reclosure has not yet been
started, it cannot be started at all. If a reclosure cycle is already in progress, dynamic
lock-out takes place (see below).
Every cycle can also be blocked individually by a binary input. In this case the cycle
concerned is invalid and will be skipped in the sequence of permissible cycles. If block-
ing takes place while the cycle concerned is in progress, this leads to aborting of the
reclosure, i.e. no reclosure takes place even if other valid cycles have been parame-
terized.
Internal blockings restricted with certain time periods are processed during the course
of reclosure cycles:
The reclaim time T-RECLAIM begins with every automatic reclosure command. If the
reclosure is successful, all the functions of the automatic reclosure return to the idle
state at the end of the reclaim time; a fault after expiry of the reclaim time is treated as
a new fault in the network. Re-tripping of a protective function within the reclaim time
initiates the next reclosure cycle in the case of multiple reclosure; if no further reclos-
ure is permitted, the last reclosure is treated as unsuccessful in the case of re-tripping
within the reclaim time. The automatic reclosure is locked out dynamically.
The dynamic lock-out locks the reclosure for the duration of the dynamic lock-out time
(0.5 s). This occurs for example after a final tripping or other events which block the
automatic reclosure after it has been started. Restarting is blocked for this time. When
this time has elapsed, the automatic reclosure returns to its idle position and is ready
to process a new fault in the network.
If the circuit breaker is closed manually (by the control discrepancy switch connected
to a binary input, see also Subsection 6.13.1), the automatic reclosure is blocked for
a manual-close-blocking time T-BLOCK MC. When a trip command is given during this
time, it can be assumed that a metallic short-circuit be present (e.g. closed earthing
isolator). Every trip command within this time is therefore final. With the user definable
logic functions (CFC) further control functions can be processed in the same way as
a manual–close command.
Interrogation of Precondition for a reclose attempt after trip is that the circuit breaker is ready for at
Circuit Breaker least one TRIP–CLOSE–TRIP–cycle at the instant the automatic reclosure function is
Ready started (i.e. before the first trip command). The ready status of the circuit breaker is
signalled to the device through the binary input “>CB1 Ready” (FNo 371). If no such
signal is available, the circuit breaker interrogation can be suppressed (presetting) be-
cause otherwise automatic reclosure would not be possible at all.
This interrogation usually suffices for a single reclosure scheme. Since, for example,
the air pressure or the spring tension for the circuit breaker mechanism drops after the
trip, no further interrogation should take place.
6-82 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
It is of advantage, particularly in the case of multiple reclosure, to check the ready sta-
tus of the circuit breaker not only at the instant of the first trip command but also before
every reclosure. The reclosure is blocked as long as the CB does not indicate its ready
status for another CLOSE–TRIP–cycle.
The recovery time of the circuit breaker can be monitored by the 7SD52. This moni-
toring time CB TIME OUT begins as soon as the CB ready signal becomes inactive.
The dead time may be extended if no readiness is signalled at the end of it. However,
if the circuit breaker does not indicate its ready status for a longer period than the mon-
itoring time, reclosure is locked out dynamically (see also above under subtitle “Block-
ing Reclosure” page 6-82).
Processing the If the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts are connected to the device, the reaction of the
Auxiliary Contact circuit breaker is also checked for plausibility.
Position of the
In the case of individual control of the individual breaker poles this concerns each in-
Circuit Breaker
dividual breaker pole. This assumes that the auxiliary contacts are connected to the
appropriate binary inputs for each pole (“>CB1 Pole L1”, FNo 366); “>CB1 Pole
L2”, FNo 367); and “>CB1 Pole L3”, (FNo 368).
If the series connections of the make and break auxiliary contacts are connected in-
stead of the individual pole auxiliary contacts, the CB is assumed to have all poles
open when the series connection of the break contacts is closed (binary input “>CB1
3p Open”, FNo 411). It is assumed to have all poles closed when the series connec-
tion of the make contacts is closed (binary input “>CB1 3p Closed”, (FNo 410). If
none of these input messages is active, it is assumed that the breaker is open at one
pole (even if this condition also exists theoretically when two poles are open).
The device checks the position of the circuit breaker continuously: As long as the aux-
iliary contacts indicate that the CB is not closed (three-pole), the automatic reclosure
function cannot be started. This guarantees that a close command can only be given
when the CB was previously tripped (out of the closed state).
The valid dead time begins when the trip command disappears or signals taken from
the CB auxiliary contacts indicate that the CB (pole) has opened.
If the CB opens three-pole after a single-pole trip command, this is considered as a
three-pole tripping. If three-pole reclosure cycles are allowed, the dead time for three-
pole tripping becomes active in the control mode with trip command (see above under
subtitle “Control Modes of the Automatic Reclosure”, page 6-81); in control by pickup,
the pickup configuration of the starting protective function(s) is still decisive. If three-
pole cycles are not allowed, the reclosure is locked out dynamically. The trip command
then was final.
The latter also applies if the CB is tripped at two poles after a single-pole trip com-
mand. The device only detects this if the auxiliary contacts for each pole are connect-
ed individually. The device couples the poles immediately resulting in a three-pole trip
command.
If the CB auxiliary contacts indicate that at least one further pole has opened during
the dead time after single-pole tripping, a three-pole reclosure cycle is initiated with
the dead time for three-pole reclosure provided this is permitted. If the auxiliary con-
tacts are connected for each pole individually, the device can detect a two-pole open
CB. In this case the device immediately sends a three-pole trip command providing
the forced three-pole trip is activated (see Subsection 6.9.2 under subtitle “Forced
Three-pole Trip”, page 6-97).
7SD52 Manual 6-83

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
Sequence of a If the automatic reclosure is ready, the short-circuit protection trips all three poles for
Three-pole all faults within the stages parameterized for auto-reclosure. The automatic reclosure
Auto-reclose Cycle function is started. When the trip command drops off or the circuit breaker opens (aux-
iliary contact criterion) an (adjustable) dead time starts. At the end of this dead time
the circuit breaker receives a close command. At the same time the (adjustable) re-
claim time is started. If AR control mode = Pickup ... was set under address 134
during configuration of the protective functions, different dead times can be parame-
terized depending on the type of fault detected by the protection.
If the fault has been eliminated (successful reclosure), the reclaim time expires and all
functions return to their quiescent state. The fault is cleared.
If the fault has not been eliminated (unsuccessful reclosure), the short-circuit protec-
tion initiates a final three-pole trip following a protection stage active without reclosure.
Any fault during the reclaim time leads to final tripping.
After unsuccessful reclosure (final tripping), the automatic reclosure is locked out dy-
namically (see also above under subtitle “Blocking Reclosure”, page 6-82).
The sequence above applies for single-shot reclosure. In the 7SD52 multiple reclos-
ure (up to 8 shots) is also possible (see below).
Sequence of a Single-pole auto-reclosure cycles are only possible if the device includes the option
Single-pole for single-pole tripping and this had been enabled in the protective function configura-
Auto-reclose Cycle tion (address 110, see also Section 5.1). Of course, the circuit breaker must also be
suitable for single-pole tripping.
If the automatic reclosure is ready, the short-circuit protection trips single-pole for all
single-phase faults within the stages parameterized for reclosure. It can also be deter-
mined, by setting (address 1156A Trip2phFlt, see also Subsection 6.1.3), that
single-pole tripping should take place for two-phase, earth-free faults. Single-pole trip-
ping is of course only possible by short-circuit protective functions which can deter-
mine the faulty phase.
In the case of multi-phase faults, the short-circuit protection performs a final three-pole
trip following a protection stage active without reclosure. Every three-pole tripping is
final. The automatic reclosure is locked dynamically (see also above under subtitle
“Blocking Reclosure”, page 6-82).
The automatic reclosure is started in the case of single-pole tripping. The (adjustable)
dead time for the single-pole auto-reclosure cycle starts with drop-off of the trip com-
mand or opening of the circuit breaker pole (auxiliary contact criterion). At the end of
this dead time the circuit breaker receives a close command. At the same time the (ad-
justable) reclaim time is started. If the reclosure is blocked during the dead time fol-
lowing a single-pole trip, immediate three-pole tripping can take place as an option
(“Forced Three-pole Trip”, see below, page 6-97).
tion initiates a final three-pole trip following a protection stage active without reclosure.
Any fault during the reclaim time leads to final tripping.
After unsuccessful reclosure (final tripping), the automatic reclosure is blocked dy-
namically (see also above under subtitle “Blocking Reclosure”, page 6-82).
6-84 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
The sequence above applies for single-shot reclosure. In the 7SD52 multiple reclos-
ure (up to 8 shots) is also possible (see below).
Sequence of a This operating mode is only possible if the device is includes the option for single-pole
Single and Three- tripping and this had been enabled in the protective functions configuration (address
pole Auto- 110, see also Section 5.1). Of course, the circuit breaker must also be suitable for sin-
reclosure gle-pole tripping.
If the automatic reclosure is ready, the short-circuit protection trips single-pole for
single-phase faults within the stage(s) configured for automatic reclosure and three-
pole for multi-phase faults. It can also be determined, by setting (address 1156A
Trip2phFlt, see also Subsection 6.1.3), that single-pole tripping should take place
for two-phase, earth-free faults. Single-pole tripping is of course only possible for
short-circuit protective functions which can determine the faulty phase. The stages
parameterized for reclosure apply for all fault types.
The automatic reclosure is started at the moment of tripping. Depending on the type
of fault the (adjustable) dead time for the single-pole auto-reclosure cycle or the (sep-
arately adjustable) dead time for the three-pole auto-reclosure cycle starts with the
drop off of the trip command or opening of the circuit breaker (pole). At the end of the
dead time the circuit breaker receives a close command. At the same time the (adjust-
able) reclaim time is started. If the reclosure is blocked during the dead time following
a single-pole trip, immediate three-pole tripping can take place as an option (“Forced
Three-pole Trip”, see below, page 6-97).
tion initiates a final three-pole trip following a protection stage active without auto-
reclosure. Any fault during the reclaim time leads to final three-pole tripping.
After unsuccessful reclosure (final tripping) the automatic reclosure is blocked dynam-
ically (see also above under subtitle “Blocking Reclosure”, page 6-82).
The sequence above applies for single-shot reclosure. In 7SD52 multiple reclosure
(up to 8 shots) is also possible (see below).
Multiple Auto- If a fault still exists after a reclosure attempt, further reclosure attempts can be made.
reclosure Up to 8 reclosure attempts are possible with the automatic reclosure function integrat-
ed in 7SD52.
The first four reclosure cycles are independent of each other. Each one has separate
action and dead times, can operate with single- or three-pole trip and can be blocked
separately via binary inputs. The parameters and intervention possibilities of the fourth
cycle also apply for the fifth cycle and further cycles.
The sequence is in principle the same as in the different reclosure programs described
above. However, in this case, if the first reclosure attempt was unsuccessful, the re-
closure is not blocked but the next reclosure cycle begins. The respective dead time
starts with drop-off of the trip command or opening of the circuit breaker (pole) (auxil-
iary contact criterion). The circuit breaker receives a further close command after this.
At the same time the reclaim time is started.
Until the set maximum number of permissible auto-reclose cycles has been reached,
the reclaim time is reset with every new trip command after reclosure and started
again with the next close command.
7SD52 Manual 6-85

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
If one of the cycles is successful, i.e. the fault has been eliminated after reclosure, the
reclaim time expires and all functions return to their quiescent states. The fault is
cleared.
If none of the cycles is successful, the short-circuit protection initiates a final three-pole
trip after the last permissible reclosure, following a protection stage active without
auto-reclosure. The automatic reclosure is blocked dynamically (see also above under
subtitle “Blocking Reclosure”, page 6-82).
Handling If single-pole or single- and three-pole reclosure cycles are executed in the network,
Evolving Faults particular attention must be paid to evolving faults.
Evolving faults are faults which occur during the dead time after clearance of the first
fault.
There are various ways of handling evolving faults in the 7SD52 depending on the re-
quirements of the network:
For detection of an evolving fault you can select whether the trip command of a pro-
tective function during the dead time or every further fault detection (pickup) is the cri-
terion for an evolving fault.
There are also various selectable possibilities for the response of the internal auto-
reclose function to a detected evolving fault.
a) EV. FLT. MODE Stops AutoRecl:
The reclosure is blocked as soon as a evolving fault is detected. Tripping caused
by the evolving fault is three-pole. This applies irrespective of whether three-pole
cycles have been permitted or not. There are no further reclosure attempts; the
auto-reclosure is blocked dynamically (see also above under subtitle “Blocking Re-
closure”, page 6-82).
b) EV. FLT. MODE starts 3p AR:
As soon as an evolving fault is detected the auto-reclosure function is switched over
to a cycle for three-pole auto-reclosure. Every trip command is three-pole. The sep-
arately settable dead time for evolving faults begins with elimination of the evolving
fault; after this the circuit breaker receives a close command. The further procedure
is the same as for single- and three-pole cycles.
The complete dead time in this case consists of the part of the dead time for the
single-pole reclosure up to the elimination of the evolving fault plus the dead time
for the evolving fault. This is useful because the duration of the dead time after the
three-pole tripping is essential for the stability of the network.
If auto-reclosure is blocked due to an evolving fault without the protection issuing a
three-pole trip command (e.g. for evolving fault detection with pickup), the device can
send a three-pole trip command so that the circuit breaker does not remain open with
one pole (“Forced Three-pole Trip”, see below, page 6-97).
Dead Line Check If the voltage of a disconnected phase does not disappear after tripping on a fault,
(DLC) auto-reclosure can be prevented. This presupposes that the voltage transformers are
installed on the line side and connected to the device. This has to be in accordance
with the configuration described in Section 5.1. The dead line check must be switched
active. The automatic reclosure function then checks the disconnected line for no-volt-
age. This requires an adequate measuring time within the dead time. If the voltage has
not disappeared the reclosure is blocked dynamically.
6-86 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
This dead-line check on the line is of advantage if a small generator (e.g. wind gener-
ator) is connected along the line.
Adaptive In all the previous possibilities it has been assumed that defined and equal dead times
Dead Time (ADT) have been set at all line ends, if necessary for different fault types and/or auto-reclos-
ure cycles.
It is also possible to set the dead times at one line end only and to configure the adap-
tive dead time at the other end (or ends). This presumes that voltage transformers are
arranged on the line side and connected to the device.
Figure 6-38 shows an example. It is assumed that the device I is operating with de-
fined dead times whereas the adaptive dead time is configured at position II. It is im-
portant that the line is fed at least from busbar A, i.e. the side with the defined dead
times.
With the adaptive dead time the automatic reclosure function at the line end II decides
independently whether and when reclosure is useful and permissible and when it is
not. The criterion is the line voltage at end II, which was re-applied from end I following
reclosure there. Reclosure therefore takes place at end II as soon as it is detected that
voltage has been re-applied to the line from end I.
In the illustrated example, the line is disconnected at positions I and II. In I reclosure
takes place after the parameterized dead time.
If the fault has been cleared (successful reclosure), line A–B is re-connected to the
voltage at busbar A through position I. Device II detects this voltage and also recloses
after a short delay (to ensure a sufficient voltage measuring time). The fault is ended.
If the fault has not been cleared after reclosure at I (unsuccessful reclosure), the line
is re-connected at I but no healthy voltage appears at II. The device there detects this
and does not reclose.
In the case of multiple reclosure the process may be repeated at I several times until
one of the reclosure attempts is successful or a final trip takes place.
A B overreaching time-graded protection
I Diff–zone II A, B busbars
(defined dead times) (ADT) I, II relais locations
Figure 6-38 Example of adaptive dead time (ADT)
As the example shows, the adaptive dead time has the following advantages:
• The circuit breaker at position II is not reclosed at all if the fault persists and is not
unnecessarily stressed as a result.
• With non-selective tripping on an external fault due to an overreaching time-graded
protection at position I no further auto-reclosure attempts occur at position II be-
cause the fault current path via busbar B and position II remains interrupted even
after several reclosure attempts at I.
• At position I overreaching is allowed in the case of multiple reclosures and even in
the case of final tripping because the open breaker at position II forms the limit of
any overreaching zone at I.
7SD52 Manual 6-87

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
Close Command With close command transmission the dead times are only set at one line end. The
Transmission other is set to “adaptive dead time”. The latter only reacts to the received close com-
(Remote Close) mands from the transmitting end.
The transmission of the close command at the transmitting line end is delayed until it
is sure that the local reclosure was successful. This means a further possible local
fault detection is checked after reclosure. This prevents unnecessary closing at the re-
mote end on the one hand but also extends the time until reclosure takes place there.
This is not critical for a single-pole auto-reclosure or in radial or meshed networks be-
cause no stability problems are to be expected.
In the 7SD52 relay the existing protection data interfaces are used to transmit the
close command.
Connecting an If 7SD52 is to work with an external reclosure device, specific binary inputs and out-
External Auto- puts must be taken into consideration. The following inputs and outputs are recom-
Reclosure Device mended to be used:
Binary inputs:
383 >Enable ARzonesThrough this binary input the external reclosure device
controls stages of the individual protective functions being
active before reclosure (e.g. accelerated stages). The in-
put can be omitted if no accelerated stage is required (e.g.
differential protection, see also above under subtitle “Se-
lectivity before Reclosure”, page 6-80).
382 >Only 1ph AR The external reclosure device is programmed only as 1-
pole; the stages of the individual protective functions being
active before reclosure are activated via FNo 383 only in
the case of single-phase faults; in the case of multiple-
phase faults the corresponding stages are not enabled.
The input can be omitted if no overreaching stage is re-
quired (e.g. differential protection, see also above under
subtitle “Selectivity before Reclosure”, page 6-80).
381 >1p Trip Perm The external reclosure device allows 1-pole tripping (logic
inversion or 3-pole coupling). If the input is not activated or
not allocated, 3-pole tripping takes place by the protective
functions for every fault type. If the external reclosure de-
vice cannot supply this signal but supplies a “3-pole cou-
pling” signal instead, this must be taken into account in the
allocation of the binary inputs (see Section 5.2): The signal
must be inverted there (L–active = active without voltage).
Binary outputs:
501 Relay PICKUP General pickup of the device (if required by the external
auto-reclosure device).
515 Relay TRIP 3ph. General trip of the device 3-pole,
512 Relay TRIP 1pL1 Trip of the device 1-pole L1.
6-88 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2

In order to obtain a phase-segregated trip indication, the respective single-pole trip
commands must be combined with the three-pole trip commands as one output.
Figure 6-39 shows the interconnection between 7SD52 and an external reclosure de-
vice with a program selector switch, as a connection example.
Depending on the requirement of the external reclosure device, the three single-pole
outputs (FNo 512, 513, 514) can be combined into one “single-pole tripping”–output,
the FNo 515 sends the “three-pole tripping” signal to the external AR device.
For exclusively three-pole auto-reclosure cycles, the general pickup (FNo 501, if re-
quired by the external reclosure device) and general trip signal (FNo 511) from 7SD52
(see Figure 6-40) usually suffice.
external
7SD52 AR device
Relay PICKUP
Relay TRIP 3ph

Relay TRIP 1pL1
Relay TRIP 3ph

Relay TRIP 1pL2
Relay TRIP 3ph.

Relay TRIP 1pL3
L+ L–
>Enable ARzones
>1p Trip Perm
L+
>Only 1ph AR
L– L–
3-pole
1-pole 1-/3-pole
Selector
L+ switch
Figure 6-39 Connection example with external auto-reclosure device for 1-/3-pole AR with
mode selector switch
7SD52 Manual 6-89

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
external
7SD52 AR device
Relay PICKUP
Relay TRIP
L+ L–
>Enable ARzones
L– L+
Figure 6-40 Connection example with external auto-reclosure device for 3-pole AR
Control of the Inter- If 7SD52 is equipped with the internal automatic reclosure function, this can also be
nal Auto-Reclosure controlled by an external protection device. This is useful for example for line ends with
by an External redundant protection or backup protection when the second protection is used for the
Protection Device same line end and is to work with the automatic reclosure function integrated in the
7SD52.
Specific binary inputs and outputs must be considered in this case. It must be decided
whether the internal auto-reclosure is to be controlled by the starting (pickup) or by the
trip command of the external protection (see also above under “Control Modes of the
Automatic Reclosure“, page 6-81).
If the auto-reclosure is controlled by the trip command, the following inputs and out-
puts are recommended to be used:
The auto-reclosure is started via the binary inputs:
2711 >AR Start general fault detection (pickup) for the automatic reclosure
(only required for action time),
2712 >Trip L1 AR trip command L1 for automatic reclosure,
2713 >Trip L2 AR trip command L2 for automatic reclosure,
2714 >Trip L3 AR trip command L3 for automatic reclosure.
The general fault detection is decisive for starting the action times. It is also necessary
if the automatic reclosure is to detect evolving faults by fault detection. In other cases
this input information is superfluous.
The trip commands decide whether the dead time for single-pole or three-pole auto-
reclosure cycles is activated or whether the reclosure is blocked in three-pole tripping
(depending on the parameterization of dead times).
Figure 6-41 shows the interconnection between the internal automatic reclosure of
7SD52 and an external protection device, as a connection example for single- and
three-pole auto-reclosure.
To couple the external protection three-pole and to release its accelerated stages be-
fore reclosure if necessary, the following output functions are suitable:
6-90 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
2864 AR 1p Trip Perm internal automatic reclosure ready for 1-pole reclose
cycle, i.e. allows 1-pole tripping (logic inversion of the 3-
pole coupling).
2889 AR 1.CycZoneRel internal automatic reclosure ready for the first reclose
cycle, i.e. enables the stage of the external protection de-
cisive for reclosure, the corresponding outputs can be
used for other cycles. The output can be omitted if the ex-
ternal protection does not require an overreach stage
(e.g. differential protection).
2820 AR Program1polei internal automatic reclosure is programmed for single-
pole AR, i.e. only reclosures after single-pole tripping.
The output can be omitted if no overreach stage is used
(e.g. differential protection).
Instead of the individual phase-dedicated trip commands, the single-pole and three-
pole tripping can be signalled to the internal automatic reclosure — provided the ex-
ternal protection device supports it —, i.e. you can assign the following binary inputs
of the 7SD52:
2711 >AR Start general fault detection for the internal automatic
reclosure (only required for action time),
2715 >Trip 1p for AR trip command 1-pole for the internal automatic reclosure,
2716 >Trip 3p for AR trip command 3-pole for the internal automatic reclosure.
If only three-pole reclosure cycles are to be executed, it is sufficient to assign the bi-
nary input “>Trip 3p for AR” (FNo 2716) for the trip signal. Figure 6-42 shows an
example. Any overreaching stages of the external protection are enabled again by “AR
1.CycZoneRel” (FNo 2889) and of further cycles if applicable.
7SD52 Manual 6-91

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
external
protection 7SD52
device
Pickup >AR Start
Tripping L1 >Trip L1 AR
L+ L–
Relase AR-stages AR 1.CycZoneRel
(if nec. for further AR)
3-phase coupling AR 1p Trip Perm
only 1-pole AR Program1pole
L– L–
Figure 6-41 Connection example with external protection device for 1-/3-pole reclosure;
AR control mode = Trip
external
protection 7SD52
device
Pickup >AR Start
Tripping >Trip 3p for AR
L+ L–
Relase AR-stages AR 1.CycZoneRel

(if nec. for further AR)
L– L+
Figure 6-42 Connection example with external protection device for 3-pole reclosure;
AR control mode = Trip
If the internal automatic reclosure function is controlled by the pickup, the phase-ded-
icated pickup signals of the external protection must be connected if distinction shall
be made between different types of fault. The general trip command is sufficient to in-
dicate tripping (FNo 2746). Figures 6-43 and 6-44 show connection examples.
6-92 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
external
protection 7SD52
device
Pickup L1 >Pickup L1 AR
Tripping >Trip for AR
L+ L–
Release AR-stage AR 1.CycZoneRel
(if nec. for other AR)
L– L+
Figure 6-43 Connection example with external protection device for fault detection depend-
ent dead time — dead time control by pickup signals of the protection device for
each phase;
AR control mode = Pickup
external
protection 7SD52
device
Pickup 1-phase >Pickup 1ph AR
Tripping >Trip for AR
L+ L–
Release AR Stage AR 1.CycZoneRel
(if nec. for other AR)
L– L+
Figure 6-44 Connection example with external protection device for fault detection depend-
ent dead time — dead time control by pickup signals of the protection device
1-phase, 2-phase and 3-phase;
AR control mode = Pickup
7SD52 Manual 6-93

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
2 Protection If redundant protection is provided for a feeder and each protection operates with its
Systems with 2 own automatic reclosure function, certain signal exchanges are necessary between
Automatic Reclo- the two protection systems. The connection example in Figure 6-45 shows the neces-
sure Functions sary cross-connections.
7SD52 2nd Protection

internal 2nd AR
AR function device
BI >AR Start AR start BI
BI >Trip L1 AR Trip L1 BI
L– L–
Prot. function
L+ 2nd prot. device L+
SO Pickup*) Pickup SO
SO Trip L1*) Trip L1 SO
L+ Relay TRIP 1pL1 L+

K Relay TRIP 3ph. Trip L1 C
Relay TRIP 1pL2

Relay TRIP 1pL3

BI – Binary input
SO – Signal output
C – Commands
*) – for all protective functions
L1 L2 L3
operating with AR to circuit breaker
Figure 6-45 Connection example for 2 protection devices with 2 auto-reclosure functions
If the auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker are connected phase segregated, a
three-phase coupling is guaranteed when more than one CB pole is tripped by the
7SD52. This requires that the three-pole intertrip is activated (see Subsection 6.9.2
6-94 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
under subtitle “Forced Three-pole Trip”, page 6-97). An external automatic three-pole
coupling is therefore unnecessary if the above conditions are satisfied. This prevents
two-pole tripping under all circumstances.
General If no reclosure is required on the feeder for which the differential protection 7SD52 is
used (e.g. for cables, transformers, motors or similar), the automatic reclosure func-
tion must be disabled during configuration (see Section 5.1, address 133). The auto-
matic reclosure is then totally removed, i.e. the automatic reclosure is not processed
in the 7SD52. No signals are generated, binary inputs for the automatic reclosure are
ignored. All parameters for setting the automatic reclosure are inaccessible and insig-
nificant.
If, on the other hand, the internal automatic reclosure is to be used, the type of reclos-
ure must be set in the configuration of the device scope (see Section 5.1) under ad-
dress 133 Auto Reclose and the AR control mode under address 134.
Up to 8 reclosure attempts are possible with the integrated automatic reclosure func-
tion of 7SD52. Whereas the settings in the addresses 3401 to 3441 are common to
all reclosure cycles, the individual settings of the cycles are made from address 3450
onwards. You can set different individual parameters for the first four reclosure cycles.
The same parameters of the fourth cycle apply to the fifth cycle and further.
Under address 3401 AUTO RECLOSE the automatic reclosure function can be
switched ON or OFF.
Prerequisite for an automatic reclosure being possible after trip on a fault is that the
circuit breaker is ready for at least one TRIP–CLOSE–TRIP–cycle at the instant the
auto-reclosure is started (i.e. at the initiation of the first trip command). The ready
status of the circuit breaker is indicated to the device through the binary input “>CB1
Ready” (FNo 371). If no such signal is available, leave the setting under address
3402 CB? 1.TRIP = NO because otherwise no auto-reclosure would be possible at
all. If circuit breaker interrogation is possible, you should set CB? 1.TRIP = YES.
Furthermore, the ready status of the circuit breaker can be interrogated before every
reclosure. This is stated when setting the individual reclosure cycles (see below).
To check the ready status of the circuit breaker is regained during the dead times, you
can set a circuit breaker ready monitor time under address 3409 CB TIME OUT. The
time is set slightly longer than the recovery time of the circuit breaker after a TRIP–
CLOSE–TRIP–cycle. If the circuit breaker has not been ready again within this time,
there is no reclosure, the auto-reclosure is blocked dynamically.
Waiting for the circuit breaker charge mechanism can lead to a lengthening of the
dead times. Interrogation of a synchronism check (if used) can also delay reclosure.
To avoid uncontrolled prolongation you can set a maximum extension of the dead time
in this case under address 3411A T-DEAD EXT.. This extension is unlimited if you
set ∞. This parameter can only be changed with DIGSI® 4 under “Additional Set-
tings”. Remember that longer dead times are only permissible after three-pole tripping
when no stability problems occur or a synchronism check takes place before reclos-
ure.
7SD52 Manual 6-95

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
The reclaim time T-RECLAIM (address 3403) is the time after which the network fault
is considered to be cleared after a successful reclosure. Re-tripping of a protective
function within this time initiates the next reclosure cycle in the case of multiple reclos-
ures; if no further reclosure is permitted, the last reclosure is treated as unsuccessful.
The reclaim time must therefore be longer than the longest command time of a pro-
tective function which can start the automatic reclosure function.
A few seconds are generally sufficient. In regions with frequent thunderstorms or
storms a shorter reclaim time is advisable to reduce the danger of final tripping as a
result of repeated lightning strikes or conductor flashovers (conductor vibration).
A long reclaim time must be selected in the case of multiple reclosure (see above) if
there is no circuit breaker monitoring possibility (e.g. due to missing auxiliary contacts
and CB–ready–information). Then the reclaim time must be longer than the recovery
time of the circuit breaker.
The blocking duration in manual-close detection T-BLOCK MC (address 3404) must
guarantee safe closing and tripping of the circuit breaker (0.5 s to 1 s). If a fault has
been detected by a protective function within this time after detected closing of the cir-
cuit breaker, a final three-pole trip is carried out and no reclosure will take place. If this
is undesirable, address 3404 is set to 0.
The options for handling evolving faults are described in Subsection 6.9.1 under sub-
title “Handling Evolving Faults”, page 6-86. The handling of evolving faults is not rele-
vant on line ends where the adaptive dead time is applied (address 133 Auto
Reclose = ADT, Section 5.1). Addresses 3406 and 3407 are then insignificant and
inaccessible.
You can define recognition of an evolving fault under address 3406. EV. FLT.
RECOG. with PICKUP means that, during a dead time, every fault detection (pickup)
of a protective function will be interpreted as an evolving fault. With EV. FLT.
RECOG. with TRIP a fault during a dead time is only interpreted as an evolving fault
if it has led to a trip command of a protective function. This may also include trip com-
mands which are coupled in externally via a binary input or which have been transmit-
ted from any other end of the protected object. If an external protection device oper-
ates together with the auto-reclosure, evolving fault detection with pickup presuppos-
es that a pickup signal of the external device is also connected to the 7SD52; other-
wise an evolving fault can only be detected with the external trip command even if
with PICKUP was set here.
Select the reaction to evolving faults under address 3407. EV. FLT. MODE = Stops
AutoRecl means that no reclosure takes place after detection of an evolving fault.
This is always useful when only single-pole reclosure is to take place or when stability
problems are to be expected due to closing after a subsequent three-pole dead time.
If a three-pole reclose cycle is to be initiated by tripping of the evolving fault, set EV.
FLT. MODE = starts 3p AR. In this case a three-pole reclose cycle with separately
adjustable dead time is started with the three-pole trip command on the evolving fault.
This is only useful if three-pole reclosure is also permitted.
Address 3408 T-Start MONITOR monitors the reaction of the circuit breaker after a
trip command. If the CB has not opened after this time (from the beginning of the trip
command), the automatic reclosure is locked dynamically. The criterion for opening is
the position of the circuit breaker auxiliary contact(s) or the disappearance of the trip
command. If a circuit breaker failure protection (internal or external) is used on the
same feeder, this time should be shorter than the delay time of the circuit breaker fail-
ure protection so that no reclosure takes place if the circuit breaker fails.
6-96 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
If the reclosure command is transmitted to the other end(s), you can delay this trans-
mission with address 3410 T RemoteClose. This transmission requires that the de-
vice(s) at the remote end(s) operates with adaptive dead time (address 133 Auto
Reclose = Adaptive Dead Time at the remote end(s), see also Section 5.1). This
parameter is otherwise irrelevant. If no transmission of the close command is desired,
although ADT is set at one of the other ends, set T RemoteClose = ∞. On the one
hand, this delay serves to prevent the remote end device(s) from reclosing unneces-
sarily the when local reclosure is unsuccessful. The setting of T RemoteClose
should therefore be a total of the closing time of the circuit breaker, the maximum re-
sponse time and command duration of the protection function, the tripping time of the
circuit breaker, the drop-off time of the protection function and a safety margin. On the
other hand, it should be noted that the line is not available for energy transport until
the remote end has also reclosed. It must therefore be added to the dead time in the
consideration of the network stability.
Configuration of This configuration concerns the interaction between the protective and supplementary
the Automatic functions of the device and the automatic reclosure function. Here you can determine
Reclosure which functions of the device are to start the automatic reclosure and which not.
In 7SD52 this concerns:
Address 3420 AR WITH DIFF, i.e. with differential protection,
Address 3421 AR w/ SOTF-O/C, i.e. with instantaneous high-speed overcurrent
tripping,
Address 3423 AR WITH I.TRIP, i.e. with intertrip and remote trip,
Address 3424 AR w/ DTT, i.e. with externally coupled direct trip command,
Address 3425 AR w/ BackUpO/C, i.e. with time overcurrent protection.
For the functions which are to start the auto-reclosure function, the corresponding ad-
dress is set to YES, for the others to NO. The remaining functions (overload protection,
breaker failure protection) cannot start the auto-reclosure because reclosure is of no
use here.
Forced Three-pole If reclosure is blocked during the dead time of a single-pole cycle without a three-pole
Trip trip command having been initiated, the breaker remains open at one pole. With ad-
dress 3430 AR TRIP 3pole you determine that the tripping logic of the device sends
a three-pole trip command in this case (pole discrepancy prevention). Set this address
to YES if the breaker can be controlled single-pole and has no pole discrepancy super-
vision itself. Nevertheless, the device pre-empts the pole discrepancy supervision of
the CB because the forced three-pole trip of the device is immediately initiated as soon
as the reclosure is blocked following a single-pole trip or if the CB auxiliary contacts
report an implausible breaker state (see also Subsection 6.9.1 under subtitle
“Processing the Auxiliary Contact Position of the Circuit Breaker“, page 6-83). The
forced three-pole trip is also initiated when only three-pole cycles are allowed but a
single-pole open position is indicated externally through the binary inputs.
The forced three-pole trip is unnecessary if only a common three-pole control of the
circuit breaker is possible.
Dead Line Check Under address 3431 the dead line check can be switched active. It presupposes that
(DLC) voltage transformers are installed on the line side of the feeder and connected to the
device. If this is not the case or the function is not used, set DLC / RDT = WITHOUT.
DLC / RDT = DLC means that the dead line check is used. An automatic reclosure is
only possible if it was determined that the line had been dead. In this case, the phase-
7SD52 Manual 6-97

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
earth voltage limit is set in address 3441 U-dead< below which the line is considered
voltage-free (disconnected). The setting is made in secondary Volts. This value can
be entered as a primary value when parameterizing with a PC and DIGSI® 4. Address
3438 T U-stable determines the minimum measuring time for determining the volt-
age-free condition.
Adaptive When operating with adaptive dead time, it must be ensured in advance that one end
Dead Time (ADT) per line operates with defined dead times and has an infeed. The other (or others in
multi-branch lines) may operate with adaptive dead time. You will find details about
the procedure in Subsection 6.9.1 under subtitle “Adaptive Dead Time (ADT)” on page
6-87 and “Close Command Transmission (Remote Close)“, page 6-88.
For the line end with defined dead times the number of desired reclosure cycles must
be set in the configuration of the protective functions (Section 5.1) under address 133
Auto Reclose. Additionally the intertrip command of the differential protection
should be activated (see Subsection 6.4.2, address 1301 I-TRIP SEND = YES). For
the devices operating with adaptive dead time, Auto Reclose = ADT must be set in
the configuration of the protective functions (Section 5.1) under address 133. Only the
parameters described below are interrogated in the latter case. Then no settings are
made for the individual reclosure cycles.
The adaptive dead time may be voltage-controlled or Remote–CLOSE–controlled.
Both is even possible at the same time. In the first case, reclosure after tripping takes
place as soon as the voltage from the re-energized remote end is detected. This re-
quires that the voltage transformers are installed on the line side of the feeder and con-
nected to the device. With Remote–CLOSE–controlled adaptive dead time, the auto-
reclosure function waits for the reception of the remote close command from the re-
mote end.
The action time T-ACTION ADT (address 3433) is the time after pickup of any pro-
tective function which can start the automatic reclosure within which the trip command
must appear. If the trip command has not appeared before expiry of the action time,
there is no reclosure. Depending on the configuration of the functional scope (see
Section 5.1) the action time may also be omitted; this applies especially when a start-
ing protective function does not provide a pickup indication.
The dead times are controlled by the reclosure command of the device at the line end
with defined dead times. In cases where this reclosure command is missing, e.g. be-
cause reclosure has been blocked there during the dead time, the auto-reclosure func-
tion of the device with adaptive dead time must return to the quiescent state after some
time. This takes place after the maximum wait time T-MAX ADT (address 3434). This
must be long enough to include the last possible reclosure of the initiating end. In the
case of single-shot reclosure, the total sum of maximum dead time plus reclaim time
of the device of the initiating end is sufficient. In the case of multiple reclosure the
worst case is that all reclosures of the initiating end except the last one are unsuccess-
ful. The time of all these cycles must be taken into account. To save having to make
exact calculations, you may use the total sum of all dead times and all command times
of the trippings plus a reclaim time.
Under address 3435 ADT 1p allowed you determine whether single-pole tripping
is to be allowed (on condition that single-pole tripping is possible at all). If NO, the pro-
tection trips three-pole for all fault types. If YES the possible tripping situations of the
starting protective functions are decisive.
Under address 3436 ADT CB? CLOSE you determine whether circuit breaker ready
is to be interrogated before reclosure after adaptive dead time. If you set YES the dead
6-98 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
time may be extended if at the end of this time the circuit breaker is not ready for a
CLOSE–TRIP–cycle. The dead time is extended by the circuit breaker monitoring time
at the most; this was set for all reclosure cycles under address 3409 (see above). You
will find details about the circuit breaker monitoring in the function description, Sub-
section 6.9.1, under subtitle “Interrogation of Circuit Breaker Ready“, page 6-82.
If there is a danger of stability problems in the network during a three-pole reclosure
cycle, you should set address 3437 ADT SynRequest to YES. In this case a check
is made before reclosure following a three-pole trip whether the voltages of the feeder
and busbar are sufficiently synchronous. This requires that an external synchro-check
device is available for this. If only single-pole reclosure cycles are executed or no sta-
bility problems are to be expected during three-pole dead times (e.g. due to a high de-
gree of interconnection within the network or in radial networks), set address 3437 to
NO.
Addresses 3438 and 3440 are only significant if the voltage-controlled adaptive dead
time is used. Set under address 3440 U-live> the limit for the phase-earth voltage
above which the line is to be considered fault-free. The setting must be lower than the
smallest operating voltage to be expected. The setting is made in secondary Volts.
This value can be entered as a primary value when parameterizing with a PC and
DIGSI® 4. Address 3438 T U-stable determines the measuring time available for
determining the voltage. It should be longer than any transient voltage oscillations re-
sulting from line energization.
1st Reclosure If working on a line with adaptive dead time, no other parameters are needed for the
Cycle individual reclosure cycles here. All following parameters assigned to the individual
cycles are then superfluous and inaccessible.
Address 3450 1.AR: START is only available, if the automatic reclosure is configured
with action time, i.e. if the address 134 AR control mode = Pickup w/ Tact or
Trip w/ Tact (the first only for three-pole tripping) was set during the configuration
of the protective functions (refer to Section 5.1). It determines whether an automatic
reclosure start is to take place at all with the first cycle. This address is included mainly
for the sake of uniformity of the parameters for every reclosure attempt and is set to
YES for the first cycle. If several cycles are to be executed you can control the effect
of the individual cycles with this parameter together with different action times. Notes
and examples can be found in Subsection 6.9.1 under subtitle “Action Times” (page
6-80).
The action time 1.AR: T-ACTION (address 3451) is the time after pickup of any pro-
tective function which can start the automatic reclosure within which the trip command
must appear. If the trip command has not appeared before expiry of the action time,
there is no reclosure. Depending on the configuration of the functional scope (see
Section 5.1) the action time may also be omitted; this applies especially when a start-
ing protective function does not provide a pickup indication.
Depending on the configured control mode of the automatic reclosure (see Section 5.1
under address 134 AR control mode) only addresses 3456 and 3457 (if control
mode Trip...) or the addresses 3453 to 3455 (if control mode Pickup...) are avail-
able.
In the control mode Trip... you can set different dead times for single-pole and three-
pole reclose cycles. Whether single-pole or three-pole tripping takes place depends
solely on the protective functions which start the auto-reclosure function. Single-pole
tripping is only possible of course if the device and the corresponding protective func-
tion are also capable of single-pole tripping.
7SD52 Manual 6-99

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
Address 3456 1.AR Tdead1Trip is the dead time after 1-pole tripping,
Address 3457 1.AR Tdead3Trip is the dead time after 3-pole tripping.
If you only want to allow a single-pole reclosure cycle, set the dead time for three-pole
tripping to ∞. If you only want to allow a three-pole reclosure cycle, set the dead time
for single-pole tripping to ∞; the protection then trips three-pole for every fault type.
The dead time after single-pole tripping (if set) 1.AR Tdead1Trip (address 3456)
should be long enough to allow for the fault arc to be extinguished and the surrounding
air be de-ionized so that the reclosure is likely to be successful. The longer the line,
the longer is this time due to the charging of the conductor capacitances. The typical
values are 0.9 s to 1.5 s.
For three-pole tripping (address 3457 1.AR Tdead3Trip) the stability of the network
is the main concern. Since the disconnected line cannot transfer any synchronizing
forces, only a short dead time is often permitted. The usual values are 0.3 s to 0.6 s.
If the device is operating with a synchronism check device, a longer dead time may be
tolerated under certain circumstances. Longer three-pole dead times are also possible
in networks with a high degree of interconnection or in radial networks.
In the control mode with Pickup... you can make the dead times dependent on the
type of fault detected by pickup of the starting protective function(s):
Address 3453 1.AR Tdead 1Flt is the dead time after 1-phase pickup,
Address 3454 1.AR Tdead 2Flt is the dead time after 2-phase pickup,
Address 3455 1.AR Tdead 3Flt is the dead time after 3-phase pickup.
If the dead time is to be the same for all types of faults, set all three parameters to
the same value. Note that these settings only cause different dead times for different
pickups. The tripping can only be three-pole.
If you have set starts 3p AR when setting the reaction to evolving faults (see above
under “General”, page 6-96) address 3407 EV. FLT. MODE, you can set a separate
value 1.AR: Tdead EV. (address 3458) for the three-pole dead time after clearance
of the evolving fault. Stability aspects are also decisive here. Normally it can be set
equal to address 3457 1.AR Tdead3Trip.
Under address 3459 1.AR: CB? CLOSE you determine whether circuit breaker ready
is to be interrogated before this first reclosure. If you set YES the dead time may be
extended if at the end of this time the circuit breaker is not ready for a CLOSE–TRIP–
cycle. The dead time is extended by the circuit breaker monitoring time at the most;
this was set for all reclosure cycles under address 3409 (see above). You will find de-
tails about the circuit breaker monitoring in the function description, Subsection 6.9.1,
under subtitle “Interrogation of Circuit Breaker Ready”, page 6-82.
If there is a danger of stability problems in the network during a three-pole reclosure
cycle, you should set address 3460 1.AR SynRequest to YES. In this case a check
is made before reclosure following a three-pole trip whether the voltages of the feeder
and busbar are sufficiently synchronous. This requires that an external synchro-check
device is available for this. If only single-pole reclosure cycles are executed or no sta-
bility problems are to be expected during three-pole dead times (e.g. due to close
meshing of the network or in radial networks), set address 3460 to NO.
2nd to 4th If several cycles have been set in the configuration of the function scope (Section 5.1),
Reclosure Cycle you can set individual reclosure parameters for the 2nd to 4th cycles. The possibilities
are the same as for the 1st cycle. Only some of the following parameters may be avail-
able here depending on the configuration of the protective function (Section 5.1).
6-100 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
For the 2nd cycle:

Address 3461 2.AR: START; start in 2nd cycle allowed at all
Address 3462 2.AR: T-ACTION; active time for the 2nd cycle
Address 3464 2.AR Tdead 1Flt; dead time after 1-phase starting
Address 3467 2.AR Tdead1Trip; dead time after 1-pole tripping
Address 3469 2.AR: Tdead EV.; dead time in case of sequential fault
Address 3470 2.AR: CB? CLOSE; check CB ready before reclosure
Address 3471 2.AR SynRequest; synchronism check after 3-pole tripping
For the 3rd cycle:
Address 3472 3.AR: START; start in 3rd cycle allowed at all
Address 3473 3.AR: T-ACTION; active time for the 3rd cycle
For the 4th cycle:
Address 3483 4.AR: START; start in the 4th cycle allowed at all
Address 3484 4.AR: T-ACTION; active time for the 4th cycle
5th to 8th If more than 4 cycles have been set in the configuration of the function scope (Section
Reclosure Cycles 5.1), the cycles following the fourth cycle operate with the same settings as the fourth
cycle.
7SD52 Manual 6-101

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions

3401 AUTO RECLOSE OFF ON Auto-Reclose Function
ON
3402 CB? 1.TRIP YES NO CB ready interrogation at 1st trip

NO
3403 T-RECLAIM 0.50..300.00 sec 3.00 sec Reclaim time after successful AR cycle
3404 T-BLOCK MC 0.50..300.00 sec; 0 1.00 sec AR blocking duration after manual close
3406 EV. FLT. RECOG. with Pickup with Trip Evolving fault recognition
with Trip
3407 EV. FLT. MODE Stops Auto Reclose starts 3pole AR- Evolving fault (during the dead time)
starts 3pole AR-cycle cycle
3408 T-Start MONITOR 0.01..300.00 sec 0.50 sec AR start-signal monitoring time
3409 CB TIME OUT 0.01..300.00 sec 3.00 sec Circuit Breaker (CB) Supervision Time
3410 T RemoteClose 0.00..300.00 sec; ∞ 0.20 sec Send delay for remote close command
3411A T-DEAD EXT. 0.50..300.00 sec; ∞ ∞ sec Maximum dead time extension
3450 1.AR: START YES YES Start of AR allowed in this cycle

NO
3451 1.AR: T-ACTION 0.01..300.00 sec; ∞ 0.20 sec Action time
3453 1.AR Tdead 1Flt 0.01..1800.00 sec; ∞ 1.20 sec Dead time after 1phase faults
3456 1.AR Tdead1Trip 0.01..1800.00 sec; ∞ 1.20 sec Dead time after 1pole trip
3458 1.AR: Tdead EV. 0.01..1800.00 sec 1.20 sec Dead time after evolving fault
3459 1.AR: CB? CLOSE YES NO CB ready interrogation before reclosing

NO
3460 1.AR SynRequest YES NO Request for synchro-check after 3pole

NO AR
3461 2.AR: START YES NO AR start allowed in this cycle

NO
3467 2.AR Tdead1Trip 0.01..1800.00 sec; ∞ ∞ sec Dead time after 1pole trip
6-102 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2


NO

NO AR

NO

NO

NO AR

NO

NO

NO AR
3420 AR WITH DIFF YES YES AR with differential protection ?

NO
3421 AR w/ SOTF-O/C YES YES AR with switch-onto-fault overcurrent

NO
3423 AR WITH I.TRIP YES YES AR with intertrip ?

NO
7SD52 Manual 6-103

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions

3424 AR w/ DTT YES YES AR with direct transfer trip
NO
3425 AR w/ BackUpO/C YES YES AR with back-up overcurrent

NO
3430 AR TRIP 3pole YES YES 3pole TRIP by AR

NO
3431 DLC / RDT Without Without Dead Line Check

Dead Line Check (DLC)
3433 T-ACTION ADT 0.01..300.00 sec; ∞ 0.20 sec Action time
3434 T-MAX ADT 0.50..3000.00 sec 5.00 sec Maximum dead time
3435 ADT 1p allowed YES NO 1pole TRIP allowed

NO
3436 ADT CB? CLOSE YES NO CB ready interrogation before reclosing

NO
3437 ADT SynRequest YES NO Request for synchro-check after 3pole
NO AR
3438 T U-stable 0.10..30.00 sec 0.10 sec Supervision time for dead/live voltage
3440 U-live> 30..90 V 48 V Voltage threshold for live line or bus
3441 U-dead< 2..70 V 30 V Voltage threshold for dead line or bus
The following paragraphs explain some important device information signals in brief
insofar as they are not explained in the following lists or covered in detail in the pre-
ceding subsections.
“>BLK 1.AR-cycle” (FNo 2742) to “>BLK 4.-n. AR” (FNo 2745)
The respective auto-reclose cycle is blocked. If the blocking signal is already active
when the auto-reclosure is started, the concerned cycle is not executed and may be
skipped (if further cycles are allowed). The same applies accordingly if auto-reclosure
was already started ignoring a possibly blocked cycle. If a cycle is blocked during its
execution, automatic reclosure is locked out dynamically; there are then no further au-
tomatic reclosures.
“AR 1.CycZoneRel” (FNo 2889) to “AR 4.CycZoneRel” (FNo 2892)
The automatic reclosure is ready for the respective reclosure cycle. The information
indicates which cycle will be executed next. For example, external protective functions
can be set to enable accelerated or overreaching stages before the respective reclos-
ure.
6-104 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
“AR is blocked” (FNo 2783)

The automatic reclosure is blocked (e.g. circuit breaker not ready). The information in-
dicates to the system management that there will be a final tripping, i.e. without reclos-
ure for a coming network fault. If the automatic reclosure has been started, this infor-
mation does not appear.
“AR is NOT ready” (FNo 2784)
The automatic reclosure is not ready for reclosure at the moment. In addition to the
“AR is blocked” (FNo 2783) mentioned above there are also obstructions during
the course of the auto-reclosure cycles such as “action time run out” or “last reclaim
time running”. The information is particularly helpful during relay testing because no
reclosure can be initiated while this indication is active.
“AR in progress” (FNo 2801)
This information appears with starting of the automatic reclosure, i.e. with the first trip
command which is to start the automatic reclosure. If the reclosure attempt was suc-
cessful (or all in the case of several), this information disappears at the end of the last
reclaim time. If no reclosure attempt was successful or reclosure was blocked, it resets
with the last — the final — trip command.
“AR Sync.Request” (FNo 2865)
Measuring request to an external synchronism check device. The information appears
at the end of a dead time subsequent to three-pole tripping if a synchronism request
was parameterized for the corresponding cycle. Reclosure only takes place when the
synchronism check device has provided release signal “>Sync.release” (FNo
2731).
“>Sync.release” (FNo 2731)
Release of reclosure by an external synchronism check device if this was requested
by the output information “AR Sync.Request” (FNo 2865).

127 AR ON/OFF Auto Reclose ON/OFF (via system port)
2701 >AR ON >Auto reclose ON
2702 >AR OFF >Auto reclose OFF
2703 >BLOCK AR >BLOCK Auto reclose
2711 >AR Start >External start of internal Auto reclose
2712 >Trip L1 AR >AR: Ext. Trip L1 for internal AR
2715 >Trip 1p for AR >Ext. 1pole Trip for internal Auto Recl.
2716 >Trip 3p for AR >Ext. 3pole Trip for internal Auto Recl.
2727 >AR RemoteClose >AR: Remote Close signal
2731 >Sync.release >AR: Synchronism from ext. sync.-check
2737 >BLOCK 1pole AR >AR: Block 1pole AR-cycle
2738 >BLOCK 3pole AR >AR: Block 3pole AR-cycle
2739 >BLK 1phase AR >AR: Block 1phase-fault AR-cycle
7SD52 Manual 6-105

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions

2742 >BLK 1.AR-cycle >AR: Block 1st AR-cycle
2743 >BLK 2.AR-cycle >AR: Block 2nd AR-cycle
2744 >BLK 3.AR-cycle >AR: Block 3rd AR-cycle
2745 >BLK 4.-n. AR >AR: Block 4th and higher AR-cycles
2746 >Trip for AR >AR: External Trip for AR start
2747 >Pickup L1 AR >AR: External pickup L1 for AR start
2750 >Pickup 1ph AR >AR: External pickup 1phase for AR start
2781 Auto recl. OFF Auto recloser is switched OFF
2782 Auto recl. ON Auto recloser is switched ON
2783 AR is blocked AR: Auto-reclose is blocked
2784 AR is NOT ready Auto recloser is NOT ready
2787 CB not ready AR: Circuit breaker not ready
2788 AR T-CBreadyExp AR: CB ready monitoring window expired
2801 AR in progress Auto-reclose in progress
2809 AR T-Start Exp AR: Start-signal monitoring time expired
2810 AR TdeadMax Exp AR: Maximum dead time expired
2818 AR evolving Flt AR: Evolving fault recognition
2820 AR Program1pole AR is set to operate after 1p trip only
2821 AR Td. evol.Flt AR dead time after evolving fault
2839 AR Tdead 1pTrip AR dead time after 1pole trip running
2840 AR Tdead 3pTrip AR dead time after 3pole trip running
2841 AR Tdead 1pFlt AR dead time after 1phase fault running
2844 AR 1stCyc. run. AR 1st cycle running
2846 AR 3rdCyc. run. AR 3rd cycle running
2845 AR 2ndCyc. run. AR 2nd cycle running
2847 AR 4thCyc. run. AR 4th or higher cycle running
6-106 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2

2848 AR ADT run. AR cycle is running in ADT mode
2851 AR Close Auto-reclose Close command
2852 AR Close1.Cyc1p AR: Close command after 1pole 1st cycle
2853 AR Close1.Cyc3p AR: Close command after 3pole 1st cycle
2854 AR Close 2.Cyc AR: Close command after 2nd cycle
2861 AR T-Recl. run. AR: Reclaim time is running
2862 AR Successful Auto reclose cycle successful
2863 AR Lockout Auto reclose Lockout
2864 AR 1p Trip Perm AR: 1pole trip permitted by internal AR
2865 AR Sync.Request AR: Synchro-check request
2871 AR TRIP 3pole AR: TRIP command 3pole
2889 AR 1.CycZoneRel AR 1st cycle zone extension release
2890 AR 2.CycZoneRel AR 2nd cycle zone extension release
2891 AR 3.CycZoneRel AR 3rd cycle zone extension release
2892 AR 4.CycZoneRel AR 4th cycle zone extension release
2893 AR Zone Release AR zone extension (general)
2894 AR Remote Close AR Remote close signal send
2796 AR on/off BI AR: Auto-reclose ON/OFF via BI
7SD52 Manual 6-107

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
6.10 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection
6.10.1 Method of Operation
General The circuit breaker failure protection provides rapid backup fault clearance, in the
event that the circuit breaker fails to respond to a trip command from a feeder protec-
tion.
Whenever e.g. a short-circuit protection relay of a feeder issues a trip command to the
circuit breaker, this is repeated to the breaker failure protection (Figure 6-46). A timer
T–BF in the breaker failure protection is started. The timer runs as long as a trip com-
mand is present and current continues to flow through the breaker poles.
Busbar
Protection
trip Circuit breaker failure protection
T–BF 0
I> BF &
Feeder
Feeder protection Trip
(internal or external) busbar
Figure 6-46 Simplified function diagram of circuit breaker failure protection with current flow
monitoring
Normally, the breaker will open and interrupt the fault current. The current monitoring
stage I> BF quickly resets (typical 10 ms) and stops the timer T–BF.
If the trip command is not executed (breaker failure case), current continues to flow
and the timer runs to its set limit. The breaker failure protection then issues a com-
mand to trip the backup breakers which interrupt the fault current.
The reset time of the feeder protection is not relevant because the breaker failure pro-
tection itself detects the interruption of the current.
For protection functions where the tripping criteria is not dependent on current (e.g.
Buchholz protection), current flow is not a reliable criterion to determine the correct re-
sponse of the breaker. In such cases, the circuit breaker position can be derived from
the auxiliary contacts of the breaker. Therefore, instead of monitoring the current, the
condition of the auxiliary contacts is monitored (see Figure 6-47). For this purpose, the
outputs from the auxiliary contacts must be connected to binary inputs on the relay (re-
fer also to Subsection 6.13.2).
6-108 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Busbar
L+
Protection
trip Circuit breaker failure protection
T–BF 0
Feeder protection
Feeder &
Trip
(internal or external) busbar
Figure 6-47 Simplified function diagram of circuit breaker failure protection controlled by the
circuit breaker auxiliary contact(s)
Current Flow Each of the phase currents and an additional plausibility current (see below) are fil-
Monitoring tered by numerical filter algorithms so that only the fundamental frequency is used for
further evaluation.
Special features detect the instant of current interruption. With sinusoidal currents,
current interruption is detected after approx. 10 ms. With aperiodic DC current com-
ponents in the fault current and/or in the current transformer secondary circuit after in-
terruption (e.g. current transformers with linearized core), or saturation of the current
transformers caused by the DC component in the fault current, it can take one AC cy-
cle before the interruption of the primary current is reliably detected.
The currents are monitored and compared with the set threshold. In addition to the
three phase currents, two further current detectors are provided in order to allow a
plausibility check (see Figure 6-48):
As plausibility current, the earth current (residual current IE = 3·I0) is preferably used.
If the residual current from the starpoint of the current transformer set is connected to
the device this is used for 3·I0. If the residual current is not available the device calcu-
lates it according to the formula:
3·I0 = IL1 + IL2 + IL3.
Additionally, the value of three times the negative sequence current 3·I2 is used for
plausibility check. This is calculated by the 7SD52 according to the formula:
3·I2 = IL1 + a2 · IL2 + a · IL3
where
a = ej120°.
These plausibility currents do not have any direct influence on the basic functionality
of the breaker failure protection but they allow a plausibility check in that at least two
current thresholds must have been exceeded before any of the breaker failure delay
times can be started, thus providing high security against false operation.
7SD52 Manual 6-109

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
3902 I> BF
Current
criterion
IL1
I> & >1 L1>
&
IL2
I> & >1 L2>
&
IL3
I> & >1 L3>
&
3I2
I>
>1
plausi-
bility
3I0
I>
Figure 6-48 Current flow monitoring with the plausibility currents 3·I0 and 3·I2
Processing of the The position of the circuit breaker is derived from the central function control of the de-
Circuit Breaker vice (refer also to Subsection 6.13.2). Evaluation of the breaker auxiliary contacts is
Auxiliary Contacts carried out in the breaker failure protection function only when the current flow moni-
toring has not picked up. Once the current flow criterion has picked up during the trip
signal from the feeder protection, the circuit breaker is assumed to be open as soon
as the current disappears, even if the associated auxiliary contact does not (yet) indi-
cate that the circuit breaker has opened (Figure 6-49). This gives preference to the
more reliable current criterion and avoids false operation due to a defect e.g. in the
auxiliary contact mechanism or circuit. This interlock feature is provided for each indi-
vidual phase as well as for three-pole trip.
It is possible to disable the auxiliary contact criterion. If you set the parameter switch
Chk BRK CONTACT (Figure 6-50 top) to NO, the breaker failure protection can only be
started when current flow is detected. The position of the auxiliary contacts is then not
evaluated even if the auxiliary contacts are connected to the device.
On the other hand, current flow is not a reliable criterion for proper operation of the
circuit breaker for faults which do not necessarily cause detectable current flow (e.g.
6-110 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Buchholz protection). Information regarding the position of the circuit breaker auxiliary
contacts is required in these cases to check the correct response of the circuit breaker.
For this purpose, the binary input “>BF Start w/o I” is provided (Figure 6-50 left).
This input initiates the breaker failure protection even if no current flow is detected.
L1>
& S Q
Start only L1 R
FNo 351 1) & CBaux L1 closed
>CB Aux. L1
1
FNo 380 2) >1 ) if phase segregated auxiliary contacts available
2
>CB 3p Open ) if series connection of NC contacts available
Figure 6-49 Interlock of the auxiliary contact criterion — example for phase L1
Common Phase Common phase initiation is used, for example, for lines without automatic reclosure,
Initiation for lines with only three-pole automatic reclosure, for transformer feeders, or if the bus-
bar protection trips. This is the only available initiation mode if the applied 7SD52
model is able to trip three-pole only.
If the breaker failure protection is intended to be initiated by further external protection
devices, it is recommended, for security reasons, to connect two starting criteria to the
7SD52 device: the trip command to the input “>BF Start 3pole” and an additional
release signal (e.g. fault detection, pickup) to the input “>BF release”. For Buchholz
protection it is recommended that the trip command is connected to the 7SD52 by two
separate wire pairs in order to achieve dual-channel initiation of the breaker failure
protection.
Nevertheless, it is possible to initiate the breaker failure protection in single-channel
mode should a separate release criterion not be available. The binary input “>BF re-
lease” must then not be assigned to any physical input of the device during configu-
ration.
The scheme functionality is shown in Figure 6-50. When the trip signal is given from
any internal or external feeder protection and at least one current flow criterion (ac-
cording to Figure 6-48) is present, the breaker failure protection is initiated and the cor-
responding delay time(s) is (are) started.
If the current criterion is not fulfilled for any of the phases the position of the circuit
breaker auxiliary contact(s) is interrogated provided that this is available. If the circuit
breaker poles have individual auxiliary contacts, the series connection of the three
normally closed (NC) auxiliary contacts is used. The circuit breaker has operated cor-
rectly after a three-pole trip command only when none of the phases carries current
and when all three NC auxiliary contacts have closed.
If an internal protection function or an external protection device trips without current
flow, the internal input “Start internal w/o I” or the external input “>BF Start w/o I”
is used to initiate the breaker failure protection. In these cases the breaker auxiliary
contact position is the only criterion for the response of the circuit breaker.
7SD52 Manual 6-111

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
Initiation can be blocked via the binary input “>BLOCK BkrFail” (e.g. during testing
of the feeder protection relay). Additionally, an internal blocking option is provided.
3909 Chk BRK CONTACT

(similar to Fig 6-49)
YES
CBaux≥1pole closed
NO
(from Fig 6-48)
L1> >1
L2> >1
L3>
&
Start internal w/o l
>1
FNo 1439 >1 & Start L123
>BF Start w/o I &
FNo 1461
Start internal 3pole FNo 1461

>1 BF Start
FNo 1415
>BF Start 3pole Configuration
not allocated
„1“
FNo 1432
allocated
>BF release
FNo 1403
>BLOCK BkrFail &
Internal blocking
Figure 6-50 Breaker failure protection with common phase initiation
Phase Segregated Phase segregated initiation of the breaker failure protection is necessary if the circuit
Initiation breaker poles can be operated individually, e.g. if single-pole automatic reclosure is
used. This is possible if the device is able to trip single-pole.
If the breaker failure protection is intended to be initiated by further external protection
devices, it is recommended, for security reasons, to connect an additional release sig-
nal (e.g. fault detection, pickup) at the input “>BF release”, in addition to the trip
commands at the inputs “>BF Start L1”, “>BF Start L2”, and “>BF Start L3”.
Figure 6-51 shows the connections of this dual-channel initiation.
Nevertheless, it is possible to initiate the breaker failure protection in single-channel
mode should a separate release criterion not be available. The binary input “>BF re-
lease” must then not be assigned to any physical input of the device during configu-
ration.
If the external protection device does not provide a general fault detection signal, a
general trip signal can be used instead. Alternatively, the parallel connection of a sep-
arate set of trip contacts can produce such a release signal as shown in Figure 6-52.
The starting condition logic for the delay times is shown in Figure 6-53. In principle, it
is designed similar to that for the common phase initiation, but, individually for each of
the three phases. Thus, current flow and initiation conditions are processed for each
individual phase. In case of single-pole trip before an automatic reclose cycle, current
interruption is reliably monitored for the tripped breaker pole only.
6-112 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Initiation of a single-phase, e.g. “Start L1 only” is active when the starting input (= trip
command of any feeder protection) appears for only this phase and current flow is de-
tected in at least this phase. If current flow is not detected, the auxiliary contact posi-
tion can be interrogated according to Figure 6-49, dependent on the setting (Chk BRK
CONTACT = YES).
external 7SD52
prot. device
Trip L1 >BF Start L1
Pick-up >BF release
L+ L–
Figure 6-51 Breaker failure protection with phase segregated initiation — example for initia-
tion by an external protection device with release by a fault detection signal
external 7SD52
prot. device
Trip L1

Trip L2

Trip L3
L+ >BF release
L–
Figure 6-52 Breaker failure protection with phase segregated initiation — example for initia-
tion by an external protection device with release by a separate set of trip con-
tacts
The auxiliary contact criterion is also processed for each individual breaker pole. If
however the breaker auxiliary contacts are not available for each individual breaker
pole, then a single-pole trip command is assumed to be correctly executed only when
the series connection of the normally open (NO) auxiliary contacts is interrupted. This
information is given to the breaker failure protection by the central function control of
the device (refer to Subsection 6.13.2).
7SD52 Manual 6-113

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
3909 Chk BRK CONTACT

YES
CBaux L1 closed
NO >1
L1>
Start internal L1
>1
FNo 1435 & Start only L1
>BF Start L1 &
YES
CBaux L2 closed
NO >1
L2>
Start internal L2
>1
FNo 1436 & Start only L2
>BF Start L2 &
YES
CBaux L3 closed
NO >1
L3>
Start internal L3
>1
FNo 1437
& & Start only L3
>BF Start L3
>2
CBaux ≥1p closed

YES
NO
L1> >1
L2> >1
L3>
&
Start internal w/o I

>1 >1 & Start L123
FNo 1439 &
>BF Start w/o I
Start internal 3pole

>1
FNo 1415
Configuration FNo 1461
>BF START 3pole
not allocated >1 BF Start
„1“
FNo 1432
allocated
>BF release
FNo 1403
>BLOCK BkrFail &
Internal blocking
Figure 6-53 Initiation conditions with phase segregated initiation
6-114 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
The three-phase starting signal “Start L123” is generated if trip signals appear in more
than one pole (regardless from which protection function). Phase segregated initiation
is then blocked. The input “>BF Start w/o I” (e.g. from Buchholz protection) op-
erates in three-phase mode as well. The function is the same as with common phase
initiation.
The additional release-signal “>BF release” (if assigned to a binary input) affects all
starting conditions. Initiation can be blocked via the binary input “>BLOCK BkrFail”
(e.g. during test of the feeder protection relay). Additionally, an internal blocking option
is provided.
Delay Timers When the starting conditions are fulfilled, the associated timers of the breaker failure
protection are started. The circuit breaker pole(s) must open before the respective
time has elapsed.
Different delay timers are provided for operation after common phase initiation and
phase segregated initiation. A further time stage can be used for two-stage breaker
failure protection.
With single-stage breaker failure protection, the trip command is routed to the adjacent
circuit breakers should the local feeder breaker fail (refer to Figure 6-46 or 6-47). The
adjacent circuit breakers are all those which must trip in order to interrupt the fault cur-
rent, i.e. the breakers which feed the busbar or the busbar section to which the feeder
under consideration is connected. The possible initiation conditions for the breaker
failure protection are those discussed above. Depending on the application of the
feeder protection, common phase or phase segregated initiation conditions may oc-
cur. Tripping by the breaker failure protection is always three-pole.
The simplest solution is to start the delay timer T2 (Figure 6-54). The phase-segregat-
ed initiation signals are ignored if the feeder protection always trips three-pole or if the
circuit breaker is not capable of single-pole tripping.
If different delay times are required after a single-pole trip or three-pole trip it is possi-
ble to use the timer stages T1-1pole and T1-3pole according to Figure 6-55.
3906 T2 (Trip
Start only L1 busbar)
Start only L2 FNo 1494
>1 T 0
BF T2-TRIP(bus)
Start only L3
Start L123
Figure 6-54 Single-stage breaker failure protection with common phase initiation
With two-stage breaker failure protection, the trip command of the feeder protection is
usually repeated, after a first time stage, to the feeder circuit breaker, often via a sec-
ond trip coil or set of trip coils. That is if the breaker has not responded to the original
trip command. A second time stage monitors the response to this repeated trip com-
mand and is used to trip the breakers of the relevant busbar section, if the fault has
not yet been cleared after the second trip command.
7SD52 Manual 6-115

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
3904 T1-1pole
Start only L1
T 0
Start only L2 >1 (Trip
busbar)
Start only L3
FNo 1476
3905 T1-3pole
>1
BF T1-TRIP L123
T 0
Start L123
Figure 6-55 Single-stage breaker failure protection with different delay timers
For the first time stage, different time delays can be selected for a single-pole trip and
three-pole trip by the feeder protection. Additionally, you can select (parameter 1p-
RETRIP (T1)) whether this repeated trip should be single-pole or three-pole.
3904 T1-1pole 3903 1p-RETRIP (T1) (accordingly for

other phases)
Start only L1 YES FNo 1472
T 0
Start only L2 >1 & BF T1-TRIP 1pL1
NO
Start only L1
Start only L3
(Trip repetition
3905 T1-3pole feeder breaker)
FNo 1476
>1
T 0 BF T1-TRIP L123
Start L123
3906 T2 (Trip
busbar)
FNo 1494
>1 T 0
BF T2-TRIP (bus)
Figure 6-56 Two-stage breaker failure protection with phase segregated initiation — one
phase
Circuit Breaker not There may be cases when it is already obvious that the circuit breaker associated with
Operational a feeder protection relay cannot clear a fault, e.g. when the tripping voltage or the trip-
ping energy is not available.
In such a case it is not necessary to wait for the correct response of the feeder circuit
breaker. If provision has been made for the detection of such a condition (e.g. control
voltage monitor or air pressure monitor), the monitor alarm signal can be fed to the bi-
nary input “>CB faulty” (FNo 378) of the 7SD52. On occurrence of this alarm and
a trip command by the feeder protection, a separate timer T3-BkrDefective, which
is normally set to 0, is started (Figure 6-57). In this case, the adjacent circuit breakers
(busbar) are tripped immediately.
6-116 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
(all initiation FNo 1461 3907 T3-BkrDefective

conditions BF Start
Fig 6-50/6-53)
FNo 1493
FNo 378 T 0
>CB faulty
& BF TRIP CBdefec
Figure 6-57 Circuit breaker not operational
Transfer Trip to the The 7SD52 has the facility to provide an additional intertrip signal to the circuit breaker
Remote End Circuit at the remote line end in the event that the local feeder circuit breaker fails. For this,
Breaker the transmission of the trip command is used.
To perform this intertrip, the desired command — usually the trip command which is
intended to trip the adjacent breakers — is assigned to the input function for intertrip
of the devices. This can be achieved by external wiring: the command output is con-
nected to the binary input “>Intertrip 3pol”. Refer also to Section 6.3. An easier
procedure is to combine the command output with the intertrip input via the user de-
finable logic functions (CFC, see Section 5.3).
End Fault An end fault is defined here as a short-circuit which has occurred at the end of a line
Protection or protected object, between the circuit breaker and the current transformer set.
This situation is shown in Figure 6-58. The fault is located — as seen from the current
transformers (= measurement location) — on the busbar side, thus, it will not be re-
garded by the feeder protection relay as a feeder fault. It can only be detected by a
bus-bar protection. Nevertheless, a trip command given to the feeder circuit breaker
cannot clear the fault since the opposite end continues to feed the fault. Thus, the fault
current does not stop flowing even though the feeder circuit breaker has properly re-
sponded to the trip command.
Busbar
Trip by
protection
ISC
Feeder
Figure 6-58 End fault between circuit breaker and current transformers
The end fault protection has the task to recognize this situation and to transmit a trip
signal to the remote end of the protected object to clear the fault. For this purpose, the
output command “BF EndFlt TRIP” is available to trigger the intertrip input of the
differential protection — if applicable, together with other commands that need to be
transferred. This can be achieved by external connection or via CFC.
7SD52 Manual 6-117

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
The end fault is detected when the current continues flowing although the circuit
breaker auxiliary contacts indicate that the breaker is open. In the 7SD52, an addition-
al criterion is the presence of any breaker failure protection initiate signal. The
scheme’s functionality is shown in Figure 6-59. If the breaker failure protection is initi-
ated and current flow is detected (current criteria “L∗>” according Figure 6-48), but no
circuit breaker pole is closed (auxiliary contact criterion “any pole closed”), then a timer
T-EndFault is started. At the end of this time an intertrip signal is transmitted to the
opposite end(s) of the protected object.
(from Fig 6-48)
L1>
L2> >1
L3> 3922 T-ENDFault
FNo 1461
BF Start
&
FNo 1495
T 0
& BF EndFlt TRIP
≥1 pole closed
Figure 6-59 Function block diagram of end fault protection
Circuit Breaker The pole discrepancy supervision has the task to detect discrepancies in the position
Pole Discrepancy of the three circuit breaker poles. Under steady-state conditions, either all three poles
Supervision of the breaker must be closed, or all three poles must be open. Discrepancy is permit-
ted only for a short time interval during a single-pole automatic reclose cycle.
The scheme’s functionality is shown in Figure 6-60. The signals which are processed
here are the same as those used for the breaker failure protection. The pole discrep-
ancy condition is established when at least one pole is closed (“any pole closed”) and
at the same time not all poles are closed (“any pole open”).
Additionally, the current criteria (from Figure 6-48) are processed. Pole discrepancy
can only be detected when current is not flowing through all three poles (<3), i.e.
through only one or two poles. When current is flowing through all three poles, all three
poles must be closed even if the breaker auxiliary contacts indicate a different status.
If pole discrepancy is detected, this is indicated by a fault detection signal. This signal
identifies the pole which was open and caused the trip command of the pole discrep-
ancy supervision.
6-118 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
L1> FNo 1497

& BF CBdiscr L1
(from Figure 6-48)

L2> FNo 1498
& BF CBdiscr L2
L3> FNo 1499

& BF CBdiscr L3
<3 3932 T-PoleDiscrep.
FNo 1500
T 0
any pole closed & BF CBdiscr TRIP
any pole open
Figure 6-60 Function block diagram of pole discrepancy supervision
General The breaker failure protection and its ancillary functions (end fault protection, pole dis-
crepancy supervision) can only operate if they were configured as Enabled during
setting of the scope of functions (see Section 5.1, address 139).
Breaker Failure The complete breaker failure protection including its ancillary functions is switched
Protection OFF or ON under address 3901 FCT BreakerFail.
The current threshold I> BF (address 3902) should be selected such that the protec-
tion will operate with the smallest expected short-circuit current. To ensure this, the
value should be 10 % less than the minimum anticipated fault current. On the other
hand, the value should not be set lower than necessary.
Normally, the breaker failure protection evaluates the current flow criterion as well as
the position of the breaker auxiliary contact(s). If the auxiliary contact(s) status is not
available in the device, this criterion cannot be processed. In this case, set address
3909 Chk BRK CONTACT to NO.
The breaker failure protection in the 7SD52 can be operated single-stage or two-stage
Two-stage Breaker With two-stage operation, the trip command is repeated after a time delay T1 to the
Failure Protection local feeder breaker, normally to a different set of trip coils of this breaker. A choice
can be made whether this trip repetition shall be single-pole or three-pole if the initial
feeder protection trip was single-pole (provided single-pole trip is possible). This
choice is made in address 3903 1p-RETRIP (T1). Set this parameter to YES if you
wish single-pole trip for the first stage, otherwise to NO.
If the breaker does not respond to this first stage trip, the adjacent circuit breakers
must be tripped provided the fault has not yet been cleared. The adjacent breakers are
those of the other feeders on the busbar or busbar section and, if applicable, the
breaker at the remote end of the protected object.
7SD52 Manual 6-119

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
In the 7SD52, after a further delay time T2 (address 3906), the adjacent circuit break-
ers (i.e. the breakers of the busbar zone and, if applicable, the breaker at the remote
end) are tripped provided the fault has not yet been cleared. An example of the time
sequence is illustrated in Figure 6-61.
Separate delay times can be set:
− for single- or three-pole trip repetition to the local feeder circuit breaker after 1-pole
trip of the feeder protection under address 3904 T1-1pole,
− for three-pole trip repetition to the local feeder circuit breaker after 3-pole trip of the
feeder protection under address 3905 T1-3pole,
− for trip of the adjacent circuit breakers (busbar zone and remote end if applicable)
under address 3906 T2.
The delay times are set dependant on the maximum operating time of the feeder cir-
cuit breaker and the reset time of the current detectors of the breaker failure protec-
tion, plus a safety margin which allows for any tolerance of the delay timers. The time
sequence is illustrated in Figure 6-61. For sinusoidal currents one can assume that the
reset time of the current detectors is less than 15 ms but if current transformer satura-
tion is expected then 25 ms should be assumed.
Fault inception
Fault clearance time normal
Prot. CB operating time Reset Safety

trip (local) I> BF margin
Initiation breaker
failure protection
Time delay T1 of breaker Trip command Reset Safety

failure protection repetition I> BF margin
Time delay T2 of breaker CB operating time

failure protection (adjacent CBs)
Total fault clearance time with breaker failure
Figure 6-61 Time sequence example for normal clearance of a fault, and with circuit breaker
failure, using two-stage breaker failure protection
Single-stage With single-stage operation, the adjacent circuit breakers (i.e. the breakers of the bus-
Breaker Failure bar zone and, if applicable, the breaker at the remote end) are tripped after a delay
Protection time T2 (address 3906) following initiation, should the fault not have been cleared
within this time.
The timers T1-1pole (address 3904) and T1-3pole (address 3905) are then set to
∞ since they are not needed.
Alternatively, you may use the T1–timers for single-stage protection if you wish to uti-
lize the facility of setting different delay times after single-pole trip and three-pole trip
of the feeder protection. In this case, set the desired times under addresses 3904 T1-
6-120 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
1pole and 3905 T1-3pole but set address 3903 1p-RETRIP (T1) to NO to avoid
single-pole trip to the busbar. Set T2 (address 3906) to ∞ or equal to T1-3pole. Be
sure that the correct trip commands are assigned to the respective trip relay(s).
Fault inception
Fault clearance time normal
Prot. CB operating time Reset Safety

trip I> BF margin
Initiation breaker
failure protection
Time delay T2 of breaker CB operating time

failure protection (adjacent CBs)
Total fault clearance time with breaker failure
Figure 6-62 Time sequence example for normal clearance of a fault, and with circuit breaker
failure, using single-stage breaker failure protection
The delay times are determined from the maximum operating time of the feeder circuit
breaker, the reset time of the current detectors of the breaker failure protection, plus
a safety margin which allows for any tolerance of the delay timers. The time sequence
is illustrated in Figure 6-62. For sinusoidal currents one can assume that the reset time
of the current detectors is less than 15 ms but if current transformer saturation is ex-
pected then 25 ms should be assumed.
Circuit Breaker not If the circuit breaker associated with the feeder is not operational (e.g. control voltage
Operational failure or air pressure failure), it is obvious that the local breaker cannot clear the fault.
Time delay before tripping the adjacent breakers is not necessary in this case. If the
relay is informed about this disturbance (via the binary input “>CB faulty”, the adja-
cent circuit breakers (busbar and remote end if applicable) are tripped after the time
T3-BkrDefective (address 3907) which is usually set to 0.
Address 3908 Trip BkrDefect. determines to which output the trip command is
routed in the event that the breaker is not operational when a feeder protection trip oc-
curs. Select that output which is intended to trip the adjacent breakers (busbar trip).
End Fault Protec- The end fault protection can be switched ON or OFF separately under address 3921
tion End Flt. stage. An end fault is a short-circuit between the circuit breaker and the
current transformer set of the feeder. The end fault protection presumes that the de-
vice is informed about the circuit breaker position via breaker auxiliary contacts con-
nected to binary inputs.
If, during an end fault, the circuit breaker is tripped by a busbar protection (the fault is
seen as a busbar fault determined from the location of the current transformers), the
fault current will continue to flow, because the fault is fed from the remote end of the
protected object.
The time T-EndFault (address 3922) is started when, during the time of pickup con-
dition of the feeder protection, the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts indicate open
7SD52 Manual 6-121

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
poles and, at the same time, current flow is still detected (address 3902). The trip com-
mand of the end fault protection is used for the transmission of an intertrip signal to
the remote end circuit breaker.
Thus, the delay time must be set such that it can bridge out short transient apparent
end fault conditions which may occur during switching of the breaker.
Pole Discrepancy The pole discrepancy supervision can be switched ON or OFF separately under ad-
Supervision dress 3931 PoleDiscrepancy. It is only useful if the breaker poles can be operated
individually. It avoids that only one or two poles of the local breaker remain open con-
tinuously. It presumes that either the breaker auxiliary contacts of each pole, or the se-
ries connection of the normally open contacts (NO contacts) and of the normally
closed contacts (NC contacts) be connected to binary inputs on the device. If these
conditions are not fulfilled, switch the pole discrepancy supervision OFF.
The delay time T-PoleDiscrep. (address 3932) determines how long a breaker
pole discrepancy condition of the feeder circuit breaker, i.e. only one or two poles
open, may be present before the pole discrepancy supervision issues a three-pole trip
command. This time must clearly be longer than the duration of a single-pole automat-
ic reclose cycle. However, the time should be less than the permissible duration of an
unbalanced load condition which is caused by the unsymmetrical position of the circuit
breaker poles. Conventional values are 2 s to 5 s.
Note: The indicated secondary current values for setting ranges and default settings
refer to IN = 1 A. For the nominal current 5 A these values are to be multiplied by 5.
For the setting of primary values the transformation ratio of the current transformers
must also be taken into consideration.

3901 FCT BreakerFail ON ON Breaker Failure Protection is
OFF
3902 I> BF 0.05..20.00 A 0.10 A Pick-up threshold I>
3903 1p-RETRIP (T1) NO YES 1pole retrip with stage T1 (local trip)
YES
3904 T1-1pole 0.00..30.00 sec; ∞ 0.00 sec T1, Delay after 1pole start (local trip)
3905 T1-3pole 0.00..30.00 sec; ∞ 0.00 sec T1, Delay after 3pole start (local trip)
3906 T2 0.00..30.00 sec; ∞ 0.15 sec T2, Delay of 2nd stage (busbar trip)
3907 T3-BkrDefective 0.00..30.00 sec; ∞ 0.00 sec T3, Delay for start with defective bkr.
3908 Trip BkrDefect. NO NO Trip output selection with defective

trips with T1-trip-signal bkr
trips with T2-trip-signal
trips with T1 and T2-trip-
signal
6-122 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2

3909 Chk BRK CONTACT NO YES Check Breaker contacts
YES
3921 End Flt. stage ON OFF End fault stage is

OFF
3922 T-EndFault 0.00..30.00 sec; ∞ 2.00 sec Trip delay of end fault stage
3931 PoleDiscrepancy ON OFF Pole Discrepancy supervision

OFF
3932 T-PoleDiscrep. 0.00..30.00 sec; ∞ 2.00 sec Trip delay with pole discrepancy

1401 >BF on >BF: Switch on breaker fail protection
1402 >BF off >BF: Switch off breaker fail protection
1403 >BLOCK BkrFail >BLOCK Breaker failure
1432 >BF release >BF: External release
1439 >BF Start w/o I >BF: External start 3pole (w/o current)
1415 >BF Start 3pole >BF: External start 3pole
1435 >BF Start L1 >BF: External start L1
1440 BkrFailON/offBI Breaker failure prot. ON/OFF via BI
1451 BkrFail OFF Breaker failure is switched OFF
1452 BkrFail BLOCK Breaker failure is BLOCKED
1453 BkrFail ACTIVE Breaker failure is ACTIVE
1461 BF Start Breaker failure protection started
1493 BF TRIP CBdefec BF Trip in case of defective CB
1472 BF T1-TRIP 1pL1 BF Trip T1 (local trip) - only phase L1
1476 BF T1-TRIP L123 BF Trip T1 (local trip) - 3pole
1494 BF T2-TRIP(bus) BF Trip T2 (busbar trip)
1495 BF EndFlt TRIP BF Trip End fault stage
7SD52 Manual 6-123

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions

1496 BF CBdiscrSTART BF Pole discrepancy pickup
1497 BF CBdiscr L1 BF Pole discrepancy pickup L1
1500 BF CBdiscr TRIP BF Pole discrepancy Trip
6-124 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6.11 Thermal Overload Protection
The thermal overload protection prevents damage to the protected object caused by
thermal overloading, particularly in case of transformers, rotating machines, power re-
actors and cables. It is in general not applicable for overhead lines, since no reliable
temperature rise can be calculated due to the great variations in the environmental
conditions (temperature, wind). In this case, however, a current-dependent alarm
stage can indicate an imminent overload.
The unit computes the temperature rise according to a thermal single-body model
based on the following thermal differential equation
I 2
-------- + ------- ⋅ Θ = ------- ⋅ æ -------------ö
dΘ 1 1
dt τ th τ th k ⋅ I Nø
è
with Θ – current level of temperature rise referred to the final temperature rise
for the maximum continuous permissible line current k · IN
τth – thermal time constant for temperature rise
k – k–factor which states the maximum permissible continuous current
referred to the rated current of the current transformers
I – present RMS current
IN – rated current of current transformers
The solution of this equation under steady-state conditions is an e–function whose
asymptote shows the final temperature rise Θend. When the temperature rise reaches
the first settable temperature threshold Θalarm, which is below the final temperature
rise, a warning alarm is given in order to allow an preventive load reduction. When the
second temperature threshold, i.e. the final temperature rise or tripping temperature,
is reached, the protected object is disconnected from the network. The overload pro-
tection can, however, also be set on Alarm Only. In this case only an alarm is given
when the final temperature rise is reached.
The temperature rises are calculated separately for each phase in a thermal replica
from the square of the associated phase current. This guarantees a true RMS value
measurement and also includes the effect of harmonic content. A choice can be made
whether the maximum calculated temperature rise of the three phases, the average
temperature rise, or the temperature rise calculated from the phase with maximum
current should be decisive for evaluation of the thresholds.
The maximum permissible continuous thermal overload current Imax is described as a
multiple of the rated current IN:
Imax = k · IN
In addition to the k-factor, the time constant τth as well as the alarm temperature Θalarm
must be entered in the settings of the protection.
Apart from the thermal alarm stage, the overload protection also includes a current
overload alarm stage Ialarm, which can be provided as early warning that an overload
current is imminent, even when the temperature rise has not yet reached the alarm or
trip temperature rise values.
The overload protection can be blocked via a binary input. In doing so, the thermal rep-
lica are reset to zero.
7SD52 Manual 6-125

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
4203 TIME CONSTANT

4206 CALC. METHOD
4202 K–FACTOR
4204 Θ ALARM
IL1
i2 Θ Θmax
IL2 FNo 1516
Θ
IL3 Θ> & O/L Q Alarm
Θ(Imax)
4205 I ALARM
FNo 1517
& Winding O/L
I> Θ≥1
≥1 FNo 1521
L1 & ThOverload TRIP
L2
L3 FNo 1515
FNo 1503 & O/L I Alarm
>BLK ThOverload
≥1
4201 Ther. OVER LOAD
OFF
“1“ Alarm Only
ON
Figure 6-63 Logic diagram of the thermal overload protection
General Informa- A precondition for the use of the thermal overload protection is that Overload =
tion Enabled was configured under address 142 (Section 5.1). It can be switched ON or
OFF under address 4201 Ther. OVER LOAD. Furthermore Alarm Only can be set.
With that latter setting the protection function is active but only provides an alarm when
the tripping temperature rise is reached, i.e. the output function “ThOverload TRIP”
is not active.
k–Factor The rated current of the device is taken as the base current for detecting an overload.
The setting factor k is set under address 4202 K-FACTOR. It is determined by the re-
lation between the permissible thermal continuous current and this rated current:
I max
k = ------------
IN
The permissible continuous current is at the same time the current at which the e–
function of the temperature rise has its asymptote. It is not necessary to determine the
tripping temperature since it results automatically from the final rise temperature at
k · IN. Manufacturers of electrical machines usually state the permissible continuous
current. If no data are available, k is set to 1.1 times the rated current of the protected
object. For cables, the permissible continuous current depends on the cross-section,
the insulation material, the design and the way they are laid. It can be derived from the
relevant technical tables.
Please note that the overload capability of electrical equipment relates to its primary
current. This has to be considered if the nominal primary current of the equipment dif-
fers from the rated current of the current transformers.
6-126 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Example:
Belted cable 10 kV 150 mm2
Permissible continuous current Imax = 322 A
322 A
k = --------------- = 0.805
400 A
Setting value K-FACTOR = 0.80
Time Constant τ The thermal time constant τth is set under the address 4203 TIME CONSTANT. This
value is normally stated by the manufacturer. Please note that the time constant is set
in minutes. Quite often other values for determining the time constant are stated which
can be converted into the time constant as follows:
• 1–s current
τ th perm. 1-s current 2
--------- = ------ ⋅ æ --------------------------------------------------------ö
1
min 60 perm. contin. currentø
è
• permissible current for application time other than 1 s, e.g. for 0.5 s
τ th perm. 0.5–s current 2
--------- = -------- ⋅ æ --------------------------------------------------------ö
0.5
min 60 è perm. contin. currentø
• t6–time; this is the time in seconds for which a current of 6 times the rated current
of the protected object may flow
τ th
--------- = 0.6 ⋅ t6
min
Example:
Cable as above with
permissible 1–s current 13.5 kA
τ th 13500 A 2
--------- = ------ ⋅ æ ----------------------ö = ------ ⋅ 42 = 29.4
1 1 2
min 60 è 322 A ø 60
Setting value TIME CONSTANT = 29.4 min.
Alarm Stages By setting a thermal alarm stage Q ALARM (address 4204) an alarm can be provided
before the tripping temperature is reached, so that a trip can be avoided by preventive
load reduction or by switching over. The percentage is referred to the tripping temper-
ature rise.
The current overload alarm setpoint I ALARM (address 4205) is stated as a factor of
the rated device current and should be set equal to or slightly below the permissible
continuous current k · IN. It can also be used instead of the thermal alarm stage. In this
case the thermal alarm stage is set to 100 % and thus practically ineffective.
Calculating the The thermal replica is calculated individually for each phase. Address 4406 CALC.
Temperature Rise METHOD decides whether the highest of the three calculated temperatures (Q max) or
their arithmetic average (Average Q) or the temperature calculated from the phase
with maximum current (Q at Imax) should be decisive for the thermal alarm and tripping
stage.
7SD52 Manual 6-127

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
Since an overload usually occurs in a balanced way, this setting is of minor impor-
tance. If unbalanced overloads are to be expected, however, these options lead to dif-
ferent results.
Averaging should only be used if a rapid thermal equilibrium is possible in the protect-
ed object, e.g. with belted cables. If the three phases are, however, more or less ther-
mally isolated (e.g. single conductor cables or overhead lines), one of the maximum
settings should be chosen at any rate.
multiplied by 5. For the setting of primary values the transformation ratio of the current
transformers must also be taken into consideration.

4201 Ther. OVER LOAD OFF OFF Thermal overload protection
ON
Alarm Only
4202 K-FACTOR 0.10..4.00 1.10 K-Factor
4203 TIME CONSTANT 1.0..999.9 min 100.0 min Time Constant
4204 Θ ALARM 50..100 % 90 % Thermal Alarm Stage
4205 I ALARM 0.10..4.00 A 1.00 A Current Overload Alarm Setpoint
4206 CALC. METHOD Theta Max Theta Max Method of Acquiring Temperature
Average \T
\T @ Imax

1503 >BLK ThOverload >BLOCK Thermal Overload Protection
1511 Th.Overload OFF Thermal Overload Protection OFF
1512 Th.Overload BLK Thermal Overload Protection BLOCKED
1513 Overload ACT Overload Protection ACTIVE
1515 O/L I Alarm Overload Current Alarm (I alarm)
1516 O/L Θ Alarm Overload Alarm! Near Thermal Trip
1517 Winding O/L Winding Overload
1521 ThOverload TRIP Thermal Overload TRIP
6-128 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6.12 Monitoring functions
The device incorporates comprehensive monitoring functions which cover both hard-
ware and software; the measured values are continuously checked for plausibility, so
that the current and voltage transformer circuits are also included in the monitoring
system to a large extent. Furthermore, binary inputs are available for supervision of
the trip circuits.
6.12.1.1 Hardware Monitoring
The complete hardware including the measurement inputs and the output relays is
monitored for faults and inadmissible states by monitoring circuits and by the proces-
sor.
Auxiliary and The processor voltage is monitored by the hardware as the processor cannot operate
Reference Voltages if the voltage drops below the minimum value. In that case, the device is not opera-
tional. When the correct voltage has re-established the processor system is restarted.
Failure or switch-off of the supply voltage sets the system out of operation; this status
is signalled by a fail-safe contact. Transient dips in supply voltage will not disturb the
function of the relay (see also Subsection 10.1.2 in the Technical Data).
The processor monitors the offset and the reference voltage of the ADC (analog-to-
digital converter). In case of inadmissible deviations the protection is blocked; persist-
ent faults are signalled.
Back-up Battery The back-up battery guarantees that the internal clock continues to work and that me-
tered values and alarms are stored if the auxiliary voltage fails. The charge level of the
battery is checked regularly. If the voltage drops below the permissible minimum the
alarm “Fail Battery” is output.
If the device is not supplied with auxiliary voltage for more than 12 to 24 hours, the
internal back-up battery is switched off automatically, i.e. the time is not registered any
more. Messages and fault recordings however remain stored.
Memory Modules All working memories (RAMs) are checked during start-up. If a fault occurs, the start
is aborted and an LED starts flashing. During operation the memories are checked
with the help of their checksum.
For the program memory (EPROM), the cross-check sum is cyclically generated and
compared to a stored reference program cross-check sum.
For the parameter memory (EEPROM), the cross-check sum is cyclically generated
and compared to the cross-check sum that is refreshed after each parameterization
change.
If a fault occurs the processor system is restarted.
7SD52 Manual 6-129

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
Sampling The sampling frequency and the synchronism between the internal buffer modules is
Frequency continuously monitored. If deviations cannot be corrected by another synchronization,
the device sets itself out of operation and the red LED “Blocked” lights up; the “Device
OK” relay drops off and signals the malfunction by its healthy status contact.
Measured Value There are four measurement inputs in the current paths. If the three phase currents
Acquisition: and the ground current of the current transformer starpoint or of an separate summa-
Currents tion current transformer of the protected line are connected to the device, the sum of
the four digitized current values must always be zero. A fault in the current path is rec-
ognized when
iF = |iL1 + iL2 + iL3 + kI · iE | > SI THRESHOLD · IN + SI FACTOR · Σ|i|
Factor kI (parameter I4/Iph CT) considers the possibly different ratio of a separate
IE–transformer (e.g. summation current transformer). SI THRESHOLD and SI FAC-
TOR are setting parameters. The component SI FACTOR · Σ|i| takes into account
permissible current proportional transformation errors in the input converters which
may particularly occur under conditions of high fault currents (Figure 6-64). The reset-
ting ratio is approx. 97 %. Σ|i| is the sum of all rectified currents:
Σ|i| = |iL1 | + |iL2 | + |iL3 | + |kI · iE |
As soon as a summation current fault is detected after or before a system disturbance,
the differential protection is blocked. This fault is reported with “Failure Si“. For not
causing a blocking due to transformation errors (saturation) in case of high fault cur-
rents, this monitoring function is not effective during a system fault.
Note:
Current sum monitoring can only operate properly when the residual current of the
protected line is fed to the fourth current input (I4) of the relay.
iF
IN
Slope:
ΣI FACTOR
ΣI THRESHOLD
Σ|i|
IN
Figure 6-64 Summation current monitoring
6-130 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6.12.1.2 Software Monitoring
Watchdog For continuous monitoring of the program sequences, a watchdog timer is provided in
the hardware (hardware watchdog) which will reset and completely restart the proces-
sor system in the event of processor failure or if a program falls out of step.
A further software watchdog ensures that any error in the processing of the programs
will be recognized. Such errors also lead to a reset of the processor.
If such an error is not eliminated by restarting, another restart attempt is initiated. If the
fault is still present after three restart attempts within 30 s, the protection system will
take itself out of service, and the red LED “Blocked” lights up. The “Device OK” relay
drops off and signals the malfunction by its healthy status contact.
6.12.1.3 Monitoring of External Transformer Circuits
The device detects and signals most of the interruptions, short-circuits, or wrong con-
nections in the secondary circuits of current or voltage transformers (an important
commissioning aid). For this the measured values are checked in background routines
at cyclic intervals, as long as no pickup condition exists.
Current Balance In healthy network operation it can be expected that the currents will be approximately
balanced. The monitoring of the measured values in the device checks this balance.
For this the lowest phase current is set in relation to the highest. An unbalance is de-
tected when
|Imin | / |Imax | < BAL. FACTOR I provided that
Imax / IN > BALANCE I LIMIT / IN
Imax is the highest, Imin the lowest of the three phase currents. The balance factor
BAL. FACTOR I represents the degree of unbalance of the phase currents, the lim-
iting value BALANCE I LIMIT is the lower threshold of the operating range of this
monitoring function (see Figure 6-65). Both parameters can be set. The resetting ratio
is approx. 97 %.
This fault is indicated with the alarm “Fail I balance“.
7SD52 Manual 6-131

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
Imin
IN
Slope:
BAL.FACTOR I
BALANCE I LIMIT
Imax
IN
Figure 6-65 Current balance monitoring
Voltage Balance In healthy network operation it can be expected that the voltages are nearly balanced.
If measured voltages are connected to the device, this symmetry is checked by the
device. To ensure the monitoring function not picking up during a single earth fault,
which can also be a permanent operating state in non-earthed networks, the phase-
to-phase voltages are being considered.
Thus the lowest phase-to-phase voltage is set in relation to the highest. An unbalance
is detected when
|Umin | / |Umax | < BAL. FACTOR U provided that |Umax| > BALANCE U-LIMIT
Umax is the highest, Umin the lowest of the three phase-to-phase voltages. The sym-
metry factor BAL. FACTOR U is the measure for the asymmetry of the phase voltages,
the limiting value BALANCE U-LIMIT is the lower threshold of the operating range of
this monitoring function (see Figure 6-66). Both parameters can be set. The resetting
ratio is approx. 97 %.
This fault is indicated with the alarm “Fail U balance“.
Umin
V
Slope:
BAL.FACTOR U
Umax
BALANCE U-LIMIT
V
Figure 6-66 Voltage balance monitoring
Broken-Wire During steady-state operation the broken wire monitoring registers interruptions in the
Monitoring secondary circuit of the current transformers. In addition to the hazard potential
caused by high voltages in the secondary circuit, this kind of interruptions simulates
6-132 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
differential currents to the differential protection, such as those evoked by faults in the
protected object.
The broken-wire monitor scans the current of each phase and picks up when the cur-
rent drops abruptly to 0 (from > 0.1·IN), while no corresponding drop appears in the
earth current. The differential protection is blocked immediately in the relevant phase.
This blocking has an impact on all ends of the protected object. The device issues the
message “Broken Iwire” indicating also the affected phase.
The blocking is cancelled as soon as the device is again supplied with current in the
relevant phase. It is also suppressed as long as a high fault current (> 2.5 ·IN) is reg-
istered by any device of the differential protection system.
Note:
The broken-wire monitor only operates if the earth current of a separate earth current
transformer of the protected line is connected to the fourth current input (I4) of the re-
lay, or if no earth current is connected to this input.
6.12.1.4 Trip Circuit Supervision
The differential protection relay 7SD52 is equipped with an integrated trip circuit su-
pervision. Depending on the number of available binary inputs that are not connected
to a common potential, supervision modes with one or two binary inputs can be select-
ed. If the allocation of the necessary binary inputs does not comply with the selected
monitoring mode, an alarm is given (with identification of the non-compliant circuit). If
single-pole tripping is possible, trip circuit supervision can be performed for each cir-
cuit breaker pole provided the binary inputs are available.
Supervision Using If two binary inputs are used, they are connected according to Figure 6-67, one in par-
Two Binary Inputs allel to the assigned command relay contact of the protection and the other parallel to
the circuit breaker auxiliary contact.
A precondition for the use of the trip circuit supervision is that the control voltage for
the circuit breaker is higher than the total of the minimum voltages drops at the two
binary inputs (UCtrl > 2·UBImin). As at least 19 V are needed at each binary input, su-
pervision can be used with a control voltage higher than 38 V.
7SD52 Manual 6-133

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
UCtrl
L+ 7SD52
FNo 6854
UBI1 >TripC1 TripRel
7SD52
TR FNo 6855
>TripC1 Bkr.Rel
Legend:
TR — Trip relay contact
CB — Circuit breaker
UBI2 TC — Circuit breaker trip coil
Aux.1 — Circuit breaker auxiliary contact (make)
TC Aux.1 Aux.2 Aux.2 — Circuit breaker auxiliary contact (break)
CB
UCtrl — Control voltage (trip voltage)
UBI1 — Input voltage of 1st binary input
UBI2 — Input voltage of 2nd binary input
Note: The diagram shows the circuit breaker in closed
L– state.
Figure 6-67 Principle of the trip circuit supervision with two binary inputs
Depending on the state of the trip relay and the circuit breaker, the binary inputs are
triggered (logic state “H” in Table 6-3) or short-circuited (logic state “L”).
A state in which both binary inputs are not activated (“L”) is only possible in healthy
trip circuits for a short transition period (trip relay contact closed but circuit breaker not
yet open).
This state is only permanent in the event of interruptions or short-circuits in the trip cir-
cuit, a battery voltage failure. Therefore, this state is one of the supervision criteria.
Table 6-3 Status table of the binary inputs depending on TR and CB
No Trip relay Circuit breaker Aux.1 Aux.2 BI 1 BI 2

1 open CLOSED closed open H L
2 open OPEN open closed H H
3 closed CLOSED closed open L L
4 closed OPEN open closed L H
The states of the two binary inputs are interrogated periodically, approximately every
500 ms. Only after n = 3 of these consecutive state queries have detected a fault an
alarm is given (see Figure 6-68). These repeated measurements result in a delay of
this alarm and thus avoid that an alarm is given during short-time transient periods.
After the fault is removed in the trip circuit, the fault message is reset automatically af-
ter the same time delay.
6-134 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
FNo 6854
>TripC1 TripRel FNo 6865
& T T
FAIL: Trip cir.
FNo 6855
>TripC1 Bkr.Rel T approx. 1 to 2 s
Figure 6-68 Logic diagram of the trip circuit supervision with two binary inputs
Supervision Using The binary input is connected in parallel to the respective command relay contact of
One Binary Input the protection device according to Figure 6-69. The circuit breaker auxiliary contact is
bridged with the help of a high-ohmic substitute resistor R.
The control voltage for the circuit breaker should be at least twice as high as the min-
imum voltage drop at the binary input (UCtrl > 2·UBImin). Since at least 19 V are nec-
essary for the binary input, this supervision can be used with a control voltage higher
than 38 V.
An calculation example for the substitute resistance of R is shown in Subsection 8.1.2,
margin “Trip Circuit Supervision”.
In normal operation the binary input is energized when the trip relay contact is open
and the trip circuit is healthy (logic state “H”), as the monitoring circuit is closed via the
auxiliary contact (if the circuit breaker is closed) or via the substitute resistance R. The
binary input is short-circuited and thus deactivated only as long as the tripping relay is
closed (logic state “L”).
If the binary input is permanently deactivated during operation, an interruption in the
trip circuit or a failure of the (trip) control voltage can be assumed.
UCtrl
L+ 7SD52
FNo 6854
UBI >TripC1 TripRel
7SD52
TR
Legend:
TR — Trip relay contact
R TC — Circuit breaker trip coil
Aux.1 — Circuit breaker auxiliary contact (make)
UR Aux.2 — Circuit breaker auxiliary contact (break)
R — Substitute resistor
TC Aux.1 Aux.2
CB UCrtl — Control voltage (trip voltage)
UBI — Input voltage of binary input
UR — Voltage across the substitute resistor
Note: The diagram shows the circuit breaker in closed state.
L–
Figure 6-69 Principle of the trip circuit supervision with one binary input
As the trip circuit supervision is not operative during a system fault condition (picked-
up status of the device), the closed trip contact does not lead to an alarm. If, however,
the trip contacts of other devices are connected in parallel, the alarm must be delayed
with Alarm Delay (see also Figure 6-70). After the fault in the trip circuit is removed,
the alarm is reset automatically after approximately 1.5 to 2 seconds.
7SD52 Manual 6-135

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
4003 Alarm Delay

FNo 6854
>TripC1 TripRel FNo 6865
& T Tr
FAIL: Trip cir.
Fault
Tr approx. 1 to 2 s
Figure 6-70 Logic diagram of the trip circuit supervision with one binary input
6.12.1.5 Fault Reactions
Depending on the kind of fault detected, an alarm is given, the processor is restarted
or the device is taken out of operation. If the fault is still present after three restart at-
tempts the protection system will take itself out of service and indicate this condition
by drop-off of the “Device OK” relay, thus indicating the device failure. The red LED
“Blocked” on the device front lights up, provided that there is an internal auxiliary volt-
age, and the green LED “RUN” goes off. If the internal auxiliary voltage supply fails,
all LEDs are dark. Table 6-4 shows a summary of the monitoring functions and the
fault reactions of the device.
Table 6-4 Summary of the fault reactions of the device
Supervision Possible causes Fault reaction Alarm Output

2)
Auxiliary voltage External (aux. voltage) Device out of operation All LEDs dark DOK drops off
failure Internal (converter) or alarm, if possible “Error 5V“
Measured value ac- Internal (converter or ref- Protection out of opera- LED “ERROR” DOK2) drops off
quisition erence voltage) tion, alarm “Error A/D-conv.“
Back-up battery Internal (back-up battery) Alarm “Fail Battery“ as allocated
Hardware watchdog Internal (processor Device out of operation LED “ERROR“ DOK2) drops off
failure)
Software watchdog Internal (program flow) Restart attempt1) LED “ERROR“ DOK2) drops off
Working memory Internal (RAM) Restart attempt1), LED flashes DOK2) drops off
Restart abort
device out of operation
Program memory Internal (EPROM) Restart attempt1) LED “ERROR“ DOK2) drops off
Parameter Internal (EEPROM or Restart attempt1) LED “ERROR“ DOK2) drops off
memory RAM)
Scanning Internal (clock generator) Device out of operation LED “ERROR“ DOK2) drops off
frequency
1 A/5 A–setting 1/5 A jumper wrong Alarms: “Error1A/5Awrong“ DOK2) drops off
Protection out of opera- “Error A/D-conv.“
tion LED “ERROR“
Calibration data Internal (EEPROM or Alarm: “Alarm NO calibr” as allocated
RAM) Using default values
1)
After three unsuccessful attempts the device is put out of operation
2)
DOK = “Device OK” relay
6-136 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Table 6-4 Summary of the fault reactions of the device
Supervision Possible causes Fault reaction Alarm Output

2
Modules Module does not Alarms: “Error Board 1...” DOK ) drops off
comply with ordering Protection out of opera- and if applicable
number tion “Error A/D-conv.“
Summation Internal (measured data Alarm “Failure Si“ as allocated
current acquisition)
Current symmetry External (system or Alarm “Fail I balance“ as allocated
transformer)
Wire break External (system or Alarm “Broken Iwire“ as allocated
transformer)
Voltage symmetry External (system or Alarm “Fail U balance“ as allocated
current transforme)r
Trip circuit External (trip circuit or Alarm “FAIL: Trip cir.“ as allocated
supervision control voltage)
1)
After three unsuccessful attempts the device is put out of operation
2) DOK = “Device OK” relay
6.12.1.6 Group Alarms
Certain messages of the monitoring functions are already combined to group alarms.
Table 6-5 shows an overview of these group alarms an their composition.
Table 6-5 Group alarms
Group alarm Composed of

FNo Designation FNo Designation
161 Fail I Superv. 289 Failure Si
163 Fail I balance
164 Fail U Superv. 167 Fail U balance
160 Alarm Sum Event 289 Failure Si
163 Fail I balance
167 Fail U balance
361 >FAIL:Feeder VT
68 Clock SyncError
177 Fail Battery
193 Alarm NO calibr
3464 Topol complete, negated
183 Error Board 1
184 Error Board 2 1)
185 Error Board 3 1)
186 Error Board 41)
187 Error Board 51)
188 Error Board 61)
189 Error Board 71)
1) depending on the version (number of printed circuit boards)
7SD52 Manual 6-137

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
Table 6-5 Group alarms
Group alarm Composed of

FNo Designation FNo Designation
140 Error Sum Alarm 144 Error 5V
192 Error1A/5Awrong
181 Error A/D-conv.
1
) depending on the version (number of printed circuit boards)
The sensitivity of the measurement supervision can be altered. Experiential values set
ex works are sufficient in most cases. If an extremely high operational unbalance of
the currents and/or voltages is to be expected in the specific application, or if during
operation monitoring functions are activated sporadically, the relevant parameters
should be set less sensitive.
Symmetry The symmetry supervision can be switched ON or OFF in address 2901 MEASURE.
Supervision SUPERV.
Address 2902A BALANCE U-LIMIT determines the threshold voltage (phase-to-
phase) above which the voltage symmetry supervision is effective (see also Figure 6-
66). Address 2903A BAL. FACTOR U is the associated balance factor, i.e. the gradi-
ent of the symmetry characteristic (Figure 6-66). This parameter can only be changed
with DIGSI® 4 under “Additional Settings”.
Address 2904A BALANCE I LIMIT determines the threshold current above which
the current balance supervision is effective (also see Figure 6-65). Address 2905A
BAL. FACTOR I is the associated balance factor, i.e. the gradient of the balance
characteristic (Figure 6-65).
Broken Wire The broken wire supervision can be switched ON or OFF in address 2908 BROKEN
Supervision WIRE.
Summated Current The summated current supervision can be switched ON or OFF in address 2921 FAST
Supervision S i SUPERV.
Address 2906A SI THRESHOLD determines the threshold current above which the
summation current supervision (see Figure 6-64) is effective (absolute value, only re-
ferred to IN). The relative value (referred to the maximum phase current) for the pickup
of the summated current supervision (Figure 6-64) is set in address 2907A SI FAC-
TOR. This parameter can only be changed with DIGSI® 4 under “Additional Settings”.
Note:
Current sum monitoring can operate properly only when the residual current of the
protected line is connected to the fourth current input (I4) of the relay.
6-138 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Trip Circuit When address 140 TripCirc.Superv was configured (Section 5.1), the number of
Supervision trip circuits that are to be monitored was set. If the trip circuit supervision function is
not used at all, Disabled is set there.
The trip circuit supervision can be switched ON or OFF in address 4001 FCT Trip-
Superv.. The number of the binary inputs per trip circuit is entered under address
4002 No. of BI. If the routing of the binary inputs required for this does not comply
with the selected supervision mode, an alarm is given (with identification of the non-
compliant circuit).
The trip circuit alarm is delayed for approximately 1 s to 2 s in supervision with two bi-
nary inputs, whereas the delay can be set under address 4003 Alarm Delay for
supervision with one binary input. 1 s to 2 s are sufficient if only device 7SD52 is con-
nected to the trip circuits as the trip circuit supervision does not operate during a sys-
tem fault. If, however, the trip contacts of other devices work also on the trip circuit in
parallel, the alarm must be delayed for longer than the longest possible duration of a
tripping command.
Measurement Note: The indicated setting ranges and default settings refer to a secondary rated cur-
Supervision rent of IN = 1 A. For the secondary rated current of IN = 5 A these values are to be

2901 MEASURE. ON ON Measurement Supervision
SUPERV OFF
2902A BALANCE U-LIMIT 10..100 V 50 V Voltage Threshold for Balance Monitoring
2903A BAL. FACTOR U 0.58..0.95 0.75 Balance Factor for Voltage Monitor
2904A BALANCE I LIMIT 0.10..1.00 A 0.50 A Current Balance Monitor
2905A BAL. FACTOR I 0.10..0.95 0.50 Balance Factor for Current Monitor
2908 BROKEN WIRE ON ON Fast broken current-wire supervision

OFF
2921 FAST Σ i SUPERV ON ON State of fast current summation supervis

OFF
2906A ΣI THRESHOLD 0.10..2.00 A 0.25 A Summated Current Monitoring Threshold
2907A ΣI FACTOR 0.00..0.95 0.50 Summated Current Monitoring Factor
7SD52 Manual 6-139

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
Trip Circuit
Supervision

4001 FCT TripSuperv. ON OFF TRIP Circuit Supervision is
OFF
4002 No. of BI 1..2 2 Number of Binary Inputs per trip circuit
4003 Alarm Delay 1..30 sec 2 sec Delay Time for alarm
Hardware and Soft-

ware Monitoring

140 Error Sum Alarm Error with a summary alarm
144 Error 5V Error 5V
160 Alarm Sum Event Alarm Summary Event
177 Fail Battery Failure: Battery empty
181 Error A/D-conv. Error: A/D converter
182 Alarm Clock Alarm: Real Time Clock
183 Error Board 1 Error Board 1
192 Error1A/5Awrong Error:1A/5Ajumper different from setting
193 Alarm NO calibr Alarm: NO calibration data available
Measurement
Supervision

161 Fail I Superv. Failure: General Current Supervision
163 Fail I balance Failure: Current Balance
6-140 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2

164 Fail U Superv. Failure: General Voltage Supervision
167 Fail U balance Failure: Voltage Balance
197 MeasSup OFF Measurement Supervision is switched OFF
295 Broken wire OFF Broken wire supervision is switched OFF
296 Σi superv. OFF Current summation superv is switched OFF
289 Failure Σi Alarm: Current summation supervision
290 Broken Iwire L1 Alarm: Broken current-wire detected L1
Trip Circuit
Supervision

6854 >TripC1 TripRel >Trip circuit superv. 1: Trip Relay
6855 >TripC1 Bkr.Rel >Trip circuit superv. 1: Breaker Relay
6861 TripC OFF Trip circuit supervision OFF
6865 FAIL: Trip cir. Failure Trip Circuit
6866 TripC1 ProgFAIL TripC1 blocked: Binary input is not set
7SD52 Manual 6-141

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
6.13 Function Control
The function control is the control centre of the device. It coordinates the sequence of
the protection and ancillary functions, processes their decisions and the information
coming from the power system. Among these are
• switch-in recognition,
• processing of the circuit breaker position,
• fault detection/pickup logic,
• tripping logic.
6.13.1 Switch-in Recognition
During energization of the protected object, several measures may be required or de-
sirable; e.g. for manual closure onto a fault usually instantaneous tripping is desired.
This is done e.g. in the overcurrent protection by bypassing the delay time of specific
stages. For every short-circuit protection function which can be delayed, at least one
stage can be selected that will operate instantaneously in the event of a manual clos-
ing, as mentioned in the relevant sections. Also see Subsection 6.1.3 under the sub-
title “Circuit Breaker Status”, page 6-17.
The manual closing command must be indicated to the device via a binary input. The
command duration is fixed to a defined length (to be set under address 1150A SI
Time Man.Cl). That is to make the processing of the switch-in recognition independ-
ent of the actual duration of an individual manual closing operation. Figure 6-71 shows
the logic diagram.
1150 SI Time Man.Cl

FNo 356
>Manual Close FNo 561
& T Man.Clos.Detect
FNo 2851
AR Close
Figure 6-71 Logic diagram of the manual closing procedure
If the 7SD52 is equipped with an integrated auto-reclosure function, the integrated

manual closing logic differentiates automatically between an external control com-
mand via the binary input and an automatic reclosure through the internal auto-reclose
function. Thus the binary input configured with “>Manual Close” can be connected
directly to the circuit of the closing coil of the circuit breaker (Figure 6-72). With the
user definable logic functions (CFC) further control functions can be processed in the
same way as a manual–close command.
If, however, external closing commands are possible which must not activate the man-
ual closing function (e.g. external reclosure device), the binary input configured with
“>Manual Close” must be activated by a separate contact of the control-discrepancy
switch (Figure 6-73).
6-142 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
L+
Control 7SD52
discrep.
switch
FNo 356
>Manual Close
FNo 2851
AR Close
CBC
CB
Legend:
CBC — Circuit breaker closing coil
L–
Figure 6-72 Manual closing with internal auto-reclosure function
L+
Control
7SD52
External discrep.
switch
AR device FNo 356
>Manual Close
Reclose
command
CB CBC
Legend:
CBC — Circuit breaker closing coil
L–
Figure 6-73 Manual closing with external auto-reclosure device
6.13.2 Processing of the Circuit Breaker Position
Several protection and ancillary functions require information on the status of the cir-
cuit breaker for proper functioning. This is e.g. helpful for
− the conditions when connecting the protected object (cf. Subsection 6.7.1) to the
network,
− start of the dead times before auto-reclosure (cf. Subsection 6.9.1),
− plausibility check before auto-reclosure (cf. Subsection 6.9.1),
− the enabling condition for the high-current switch-on-to-fault protection (I>>> stage,
cf. Subsection 6.7.1), also applicable for all ends of the protected object,
− the circuit breaker failure protection (cf. Subsection 6.10.1),
− the verification of the reset conditions for the tripping command (cf. Subsection
6.13.4),
− the trip circuit check with the help of the TRIP–CLOSE–test cycle (cf. Subsection
6.13.5).
7SD52 Manual 6-143

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
The device is equipped with a circuit breaker position logic (Figure 6-74), which offers
different options depending on which auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker are avail-
able and on how they are connected to the device.
In most cases it is sufficient to have the status of the circuit breaker signalled by its
auxiliary contact to the device via a binary input. This is valid if the circuit breaker is
always operated three-pole. In this case the make contact of the auxiliary contact is to
be connected to a binary input which must be allocated to the input function “>CB 3p
Closed” (FNo 379). Then the other inputs are not assigned and the logic is limited to
the transmission of this input information.
If the breaker poles can be operated individually and e.g. only the series-connected
break contacts (pole open) are available, the associated binary input is also allocated
to function “>CB 3p Open” (FNo 380). The other inputs are not assigned either in that
case.
If the breaker poles can be closed individually and the auxiliary contacts are acces-
sible individually, each auxiliary contact should be assigned its own binary input as far
as possible if the device can and is supposed to perform single-pole tripping. With the
help of this connection, the device can process a maximum amount of information.
Three binary inputs are necessary for this:
− “>CB Aux. L1” (FNo 351), for the auxiliary contact of pole L1,
The inputs FNo 379 and FNo 380 are not used in this case.
If the breaker poles can be operated individually, two binary inputs are sufficient if both
the series-connected make contacts (pole closed) and the series-connected break
contacts (pole open) of the auxiliary contacts of the three poles are available. The
series circuit of the make contacts is allocated on the input function “>CB 3p Closed”
(FNo 379) and the series circuit of the break contacts on the input function “>CB 3p
Open” (FNo 380) in this case.
Please note that Figure 6-74 shows the entire logic of all connection possibilities. Only
a part of the inputs is used for the respective application as described above.
The 8 output signals of the circuit breaker status logic can be processed by the indi-
vidual protection and ancillary functions. The output signals are blocked if the signals
transmitted from the circuit breaker are not plausible: for example, the circuit breaker
cannot be open and closed at the same time.
In 7SD52 the position of the circuit breaker poles detected by the device is also trans-
mitted to the remote end device(s). This way the position of the circuit breaker poles
is also recognized by at all other ends. The high-current switch-on-to-fault protection
(see 6.7.1) makes use of this function.
Special binary inputs are available for the auto-reclosure function and for the circuit
breaker check; they are to be handled in the same way and additionally allocated if
necessary. These inputs have an analogue meaning to the inputs described above
and are identified with “CB1 ...” for easier distinction:
− “>CB1 3p Closed” (FNo 410) for the series circuit of the make contacts of the
auxiliary contacts,
− “>CB1 3p Open” (FNo 411) for the series circuit of the closing contacts of the aux-
iliary contacts,
− “>CB1 Pole L1” (FNo 366) for the auxiliary contact of pole L1,
6-144 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
− “>CB1 Pole L2” (FNo 367) for the auxiliary contact of pole L2,
− “>CB1 Pole L3” (FNo 368) for the auxiliary contact of pole L3.
CB auxiliary contacts:
FNo 380 R 380

L1 L2 L3
>CB 3p Open
(Series-connected break contacts)
R 380 ≥1
& any pole closed
FNo 351 R 351

L1
>CB Aux. L1
≥1
& L1 closed
R 351 ≥1
& L1 open
L2 FNo 352 R 352

>CB Aux. L2
≥1
& L2 closed
R 352 ≥1
& L2 open
L3 FNo 353 R 353

>CB Aux. L3
≥1
& L3 closed
R 353 ≥1
& L3 open
FNo 379 R 379

L1 L2 L3
>CB 3p Closed
(Series-connected make contacts)
≥1
& any pole open
R 379
8
L1, L2, L3 Circuit breaker
auxiliary contacts Plausibility
FNo ... Binary input with FNo check
PoleOpenCurrent
R ... Binary input is allocated 3
Figure 6-74 Circuit breaker position logic
7SD52 Manual 6-145

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
6.13.3 Fault Detection Logic of the Entire Device
Phase Segregated The fault detection logic combines the pickup signals of all protection functions. For
Pickup those protection functions which allow phase-segregated pickup, the pickup informa-
tion is provided per phase. When a protection function has detected an earth fault, this
is also indicated. Thus the alarms “Relay PICKUP L1”, “Relay PICKUP L2”, “Re-
lay PICKUP L3” and “Relay PICKUP E” are available.
These alarms can be allocated to LEDs or output relays. Some protection functions
can also indicate the phase pickup as a group signal for the local displaying of fault
messages and for the transmission of the messages to a PC or a central control sys-
tem, e.g. “Diff Flt. L12E” for differential protection pickup L1–L2–E; only one of
these is displayed at a time and represents the entire pickup situation.
General Pickup The pickup signals are combined with OR and lead to a general pickup of the device.
It is signalled with the alarm “Relay PICKUP”. If no protection function of the device
has picked up any longer, “Relay PICKUP” disappears (message: “Going”).
The general pickup is the precondition for a number of internal and external conse-
quential functions. Among these functions, which are controlled by the general pickup,
are:
• Start of a fault log: All fault messages are entered into the trip log from the beginning
of the general pickup to the drop-off.
• Initialization of the fault recording: The recording and storage of fault wave forms
can additionally be made subject to the presence of a trip command.
• Creation of spontaneous messages: Certain fault messages can be displayed as so
called spontaneous messages (see “Spontaneous Alarms” below). This display can
additionally be made subject to the presence of a trip command.
• Start of the action time of the auto-reclosure (if available and used).
External functions can be controlled via an output contact. Examples are:
• Reclosure devices,
• Further additional devices or similar.
Spontaneous Spontaneous alarms are alarms that are displayed automatically after a general pick-
Alarms up of the device or after the trip command of the device. In the case of 7SD52 they are
the following:
• “Relay PICKUP“: pickup of the differential protection with phase indication;
• “PU Time: the operating time from the general pickup to the dropout of the
device, the time is given in ms;
• “TRIP Time: the operating time from the general pickup to the first trip
command of the device, the time is given in ms.
6-146 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6.13.4 Tripping Logic of the Entire Device
Three-pole Three-pole tripping is the usual action of the device in the event of a fault, single-pole
Tripping tripping, however, is also possible depending on the version ordered (see below). If a
single-pole tripping is generally not possible or not desired, the output function “Relay
TRIP 3ph.” is used for the output of commands to the circuit breaker. In these cases
the following subtitle on “Single-pole Tripping” is not relevant.
Single-pole Single-pole tripping is advisable only for overhead lines on which auto-reclosures are
Tripping to be executed and which are equipped with circuit breakers suitable for single-pole
tripping on all ends. In this case, in the event of a single-phase fault, the faulty phase
can be tripped single-pole with subsequent reclosure; in the event of two-phase or
three-phase faults with or without ground a three-pole tripping is issued in general.
Preconditions for pole-segregated tripping concerning the device are,
• that the device is equipped with pole-segregated tripping (according to the order
specification),
• that the tripping protection function is suitable for pole-segregated tripping (for ex-
ample, not for overload protection),
• that the binary input “>1p Trip Perm” is allocated and activated or that the internal
auto-reclosure function is ready for auto-reclosure on single-pole tripping.
In all other cases tripping will be three-pole. The binary input “>1p Trip Perm” is the
logic inversion of a three-pole coupling and is activated by an external auto-reclosure
device as long as this is ready for a single-pole auto-reclosure cycle.
With the 7SD52, three-pole coupling of the trip command is also possible if tripping
only concerns one phase but more than one phase has picked up. This can be the
case e.g. if two faults occur in two different places of which only one is within the range
of the differential protection zone. This is achieved with the help of setting parameter
3pole coupling which can be set to with PICKUP (each multiphase pickup leads
to three-pole tripping) or with TRIP (three-pole tripping in the event of a multi-pole
trip command).
The tripping logic combines the trip signals of all protection functions. Trip commands
are output per phase if the protection functions allow single-pole tripping. The relevant
informations are “Relay TRIP L1”, “Relay TRIP L2” and “Relay TRIP L3”.
These informations can be allocated to LEDs or output relays. In the event of a three-
pole tripping all three informations are provided.
If single-pole tripping is possible, the protection functions can also output a group sig-
nal for the local displaying of alarms and for the transmission of the alarms to a PC or
a central control system, e.g. “Diff TRIP 1p L1”, “Diff TRIP 1p L2”, “Diff
TRIP 1p L3” for single-pole tripping by the differential protection and “Diff TRIP
L123” for three-pole tripping. Only one of these alarms is displayed at a time. These
informations are also used as trip commands to the circuit breaker.
7SD52 Manual 6-147

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
Single-pole The single-pole tripping after a two-phase fault is a special case. If a phase-to-phase
Tripping after a fault clear of ground occurs in a grounded system, the fault may be cleared by a single-
Two-phase Fault pole auto-reclosure, since this is sufficient to interrupt the fault current loop. The phase
selected for this must be the same on all line ends and should be the same every-
where else within the system.
The setting parameter Trip2phFlt allows to select whether this tripping should be
1pole leading Ø, i.e. single-pole tripping of the leading phase, or 1pole lagging
Ø, i.e. single-pole tripping of the lagging phase. Standard setting is 3pole, i.e. three-
pole tripping after two-phase faults (default setting).
Table 6-6 shows a summary of the conditions for single-pole or three-pole tripping.
Table 6-6 Single- and three-pole tripping depending on the type of fault
Type of fault Parameter Output signals for tripping

(of protection Trip2phFlt Relay TRIP Relay TRIP Relay TRIP Relay TRIP
functions) 1pL1 1pL2 1pL3 3ph.
L1 (any) X
L2 (any) X
L3 (any) X
L1 E (any) X
L2 E (any) X
L3 E (any) X
L1 L2 3pole X
L1 L2 1pole leading Ø X
L1 L2 1pole lagging Ø X
L2 L3 3pole X
L1 L3 3pole X
L1 L2 E (any) X
L2 L3 E (any) X
L1 L3 E (any) X
L1 L2 L3 (any) X
L1 L2 L3 E (any) X
E (any) X
General Tripping All tripping signals of the protection functions are OR–combined and lead to the alarm
“Relay TRIP“. This can be allocated to an LED or output relay.
6-148 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Terminating the Once a trip command is activated, it is stored separately for each pole (each of the
Trip Command three poles after three-pole tripping, see Figure 6-75). At the same time a minimum
trip command duration TMin TRIP CMD is started to ensure that the command is sent
to the circuit breaker long enough if the tripping protection function should drop off too
quickly. The trip commands cannot be terminated until the last protection function has
dropped off (no function activated) AND the minimum trip command time is over.
Another condition for terminating the trip command is that the circuit breaker is open
(with single-pole tripping the relevant circuit breaker pole). The current must have
fallen below the value that corresponds to the setting value PoleOpenCurrent (ad-
dress 1130A, refer to “Circuit Breaker Status” in Subsection 6.1.3, page 6-17) plus
10 % of the fault current.
FNo 507
Trip L1 S Q Relay TRIP L1
from protection fucntions
CB open L1
& R
FNo 508
CB open L2
& R
FNo 509
CB open L3
& R
&
TMin TRIP CMD 240
≥1
T
Figure 6-75Storage and termination of the trip command
Reclosure When tripping the circuit breaker with a protection function the manual reclosure must
Interlocking often be blocked until the cause for the protection function operation is found. 7SD52
therefore provides the integrated reclosure interlocking function.
The interlocking feature is realized by a RS flipflop which is protected against auxiliary
voltage failure (see Figure 6-76). The RS flipflop is set via a binary input “>Lockout
SET” (FNo 385). With the output alarm “LOCKOUT” (FNo 530), if interconnected cor-
respondingly, a reclosure of the circuit breaker (e.g. for automatic reclosure, manual
close signal, synchronization, closing via control) can be blocked. Only once the cause
for the protection operation is known, should the interlocking be reset by a manual re-
set via binary input “>Lockout RESET” (FNo 386).
FNo 385 FNo 530

>Lockout SET S Q LOCKOUT
FNo 386 R
>Lockout RESET
Figure 6-76 Reclosure lockout
7SD52 Manual 6-149

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
Conditions which cause reclosure interlocking and control commands which have to
be interlocked can be set individually. The two inputs and the output can be wired via
the correspondingly allocated binary inputs and outputs or be linked via user-defined
logic functions (CFC).
If, for example, each trip by the protection function has to cause a reclosing lock-out,
then combine the tripping command “Relay TRIP” (FNo 511) with the binary input
“>Lockout SET” (FNo 385). If automatic reclosure is applied, only the final trip of the
protection function should activate reclosing lock-out. Then combine the output alarm
“Final Trip” (FNo 536) with the interlocking input “>Lockout SET” (FNo 385), so
that the interlocking function is not activated when an automatic reclosure is still ex-
pected to come.
In the most simple case the output alarm “LOCKOUT” (FNo 530) can be allocated to
the output which trips the circuit breaker without creating further links. Then the trip-
ping command is maintained until the interlock is reset via the binary reset input. Nat-
urally it has to be ensured in advance that the close coil at the circuit breaker — as is
usually done — is blocked as long as a tripping command is maintained.
The output alarm “LOCKOUT” can also be applied to interlock certain closing com-
mands (externally or via CFC), e.g. by combining the output alarm with the binary input
“>CloseCmd.Blo” (FNo 357) or by connecting the inverted alarm with the bay inter-
locking of the feeder.
The reset input “>Lockout RESET” (FNo 386) resets the interlocking state. This input
is initiated by an external device which is protected against unauthorized or uninten-
tional operation. The interlocking state can also be controlled by internal sources, e.g.
a function key, operation of the device or using DIGSI® 4 on a PC.
For each case please make sure the corresponding logical combinations, security
measures, etc. are taken into account for the routing of the binary inputs and outputs
(Section 5.2) and are also considered for the setting of user-defined logic functions
(Section 5.3), if necessary.
Breaker Tripping While on feeder without automatic reclosure every trip command by a protection func-
Alarm Suppression tion is final, it is desirable, when using automatic reclosure, to prevent the operation
detector of the circuit breaker (fleeting contact on the breaker) from sending an alarm
if the trip of the breaker is not final (Figure 6-77).
For this purpose, the signal from the circuit breaker is routed via a correspondingly al-
located output contact of the 7SD52 (output indication “CB Alarm Supp”, FNo 563).
An output relay with a normally closed contact (NC contact) must be available and has
to be allocated. In the idle state and when the device is turned off, this contact remains
closed.
Prior to the command, with the internal automatic reclosure in the ready state, the con-
tact is opened so that no signal from the circuit breaker is forwarded.
Also when closing the breaker via the binary input “>Manual Close” (FNo 356) or
via the integrated automatic reclosure the contact is opened so that no breaker alarm
can be passed during closure.
Further optional closing commands which are not sent via the device cannot be taken
into consideration. Closing commands for control can be linked to the alarm suppres-
sion via the user-defined logic functions (CFC).
If the device issues a final trip command, the contact remains closed. This is the case,
during the reclaim time of the automatic reclosure cycle, when the automatic reclosure
6-150 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
is blocked or switched off or, due to other reasons is not ready for automatic reclosure
(e.g. tripping only occurred after the action time expired).
Figure 6-78 shows time diagrams for manual trip and close as well as for protection
tripping with a single unsuccessful automatic reclosure attempt.
(Signalling
L+ Voltage) 7SD52
Close Trip FNo 563

CB operation
CB detector CB Alarm Supp
Alarm:
“Breaker Trip”
Figure 6-77 Breaker tripping alarm suppression
Manual trip
(as desired)
Manual Close via

binary input
“>Manual Close”
Fault inception
Protection
pick-up
Protection
trip
Auto-reclosure
(AR) AR dead time
CB Pole
CB Operation
Detector
Binary output
“CB Alarm Supp”
Alarm:
“Breaker Trip”
Manual opening Final trip of protection function
Figure 6-78 Breaker tripping alarm suppression — sequence examples
7SD52 Manual 6-151

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
“No Trip no Flag” The storage of alarms allocated to local LEDs and the availability of spontaneous
alarms can be made dependent on the device sending a trip command. Fault event
information is then not output when one or more protection functions have picked up
due to a fault but no tripping occurred because the fault was removed by another de-
vice (e.g. on a different line). The information is thus limited to faults on the protected
line “no trip – no flag”.
Figure 6-79 shows the logic diagram of this function.
610 FltDisp.LED/LCD
Target on PU
“1“
Target on TRIP
Device TRIP
&
Reset LED and spontaneous alarms
Device dropoff
Figure 6-79 Logic diagram of the “no–trip–no–flag” function (command-dependent alarms)
CB Operation The number of trips caused by the device 7SD52 is counted. If the device is to be used
Statistics for single-pole tripping, this number is counted for each CB pole individually.
Furthermore, the current switched for each pole is acquired, provided as an informa-
tion and summated in a memory.
If the device is equipped with an integrated auto-reclosure function, the automatic
closing commands are counted, separately for reclosure after single-pole trip, after
three-pole trip, as well as separately for the first reclosure cycle and further reclosure
cycles.
The levels of these counted values are buffered against auxiliary voltage failure. They
can be set to zero or to any other initial value. For further information see Subsection
7.1.2.
6.13.5 Circuit Breaker Test
The differential protection 7SD52 allows an easy check of the trip circuits and the cir-
cuit breakers.
The test programs according to Table 6-7 are available for the test. Of course, single-
pole tests are available only if the device is suitable for single-pole tripping.
The output alarms mentioned must be allocated to the relevant command relays (ac-
cording to Subsection 5.2.4) that are used for controlling the circuit breaker coils.
The test is started via the operation panel on the front of the device or via the PC with
DIGSI® 4. To know how to proceed refer to Section 7.3. Figure 6-80 shows the chron-
ological sequence of one TRIP–CLOSE test cycle. The set times are those stated in
Subsection 6.1.1 for “Trip Command Duration” and “Circuit Breaker Test”.
6-152 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Where the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts indicate the status of the circuit breaker or
of its poles to the device via binary inputs, the test cycle can only be initiated if the cir-
cuit breaker is closed.
The information on the circuit breaker status during the circuit breaker test is not au-
tomatically adopted from the position logic according to 6.13.2 (Figure 6-74). It is rath-
er that special binary inputs are provided to process the breaker status feedbacks for
the circuit breaker test. This must be taken into consideration when allocating the bi-
nary inputs, as described in Subsection 6.13.2. (Page 6-144).
The device displays the states of the test sequence with the respective indications.
Table 6-7 Circuit breaker test programs
Item Circuit
Test programs Output alarms (FNo)
no. breaker
1 Single-pole TRIP/CLOSE cycle phase L1 CB1-TESTtrip L1 (7325)
2 Single-pole TRIP/CLOSE cycle phase L2 CB1-TESTtrip L2 (7326)
3 Single-pole TRIP/CLOSE cycle phase L3 LS 1 CB1-TESTtrip L3 (7327)
4 Three-pole TRIP/CLOSE cycle CB1-TESTtrip123 (7328)
Associated close command CB1-TEST close (7329)
TRIP
CLOSE
TMin TRIP CMD T-CBtest-dead TMax CLOSE CMD t

240 242 241
Figure 6-80 TRIP–CLOSE test cycle
6.13.6 Setting the function parameters
The parameters for the tripping logic of the entire device and the circuit breaker test
have already been set in Subsections 6.1.3 and 6.1.1.
Address 610 FltDisp.LED/LCD still decides whether the alarms that are allocated
to local LEDs and the spontaneous alarms that appear on the local display after a fault
should be stored on every pickup of a protection function (Target on PU) or whether
they should be stored only when a tripping command is given (Target on TRIP).
7SD52 Manual 6-153

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
Fault Display

610 FltDisp.LED/LCD Display Targets on every Pickup Display Targets on Fault Display on LED / LCD
Display Targets on TRIP only every Pickup
Circuit Breaker
Test

7325 CB1-TESTtrip L1 CB1-TEST TRIP command - Only L1

7328 CB1-TESTtrip123 CB1-TEST TRIP command L123
7329 CB1-TEST close CB1-TEST CLOSE command
7345 CB-TEST running CB-TEST is in progress
7346 CB-TSTstop FLT. CB-TEST canceled due to Power Sys. Fault
7347 CB-TSTstop OPEN CB-TEST canceled due to CB already OPEN
7348 CB-TSTstop NOTr CB-TEST canceled due to CB was NOT READY
7349 CB-TSTstop CLOS CB-TEST canceled due to CB stayed CLOSED
7350 CB-TST .OK. CB-TEST was succesful
CB1tst L1 CB1-TEST trip/close - Only L1
CB1tst 123 CB1-TEST trip/close Phases L123
6-154 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6.14 Commissioning Tools
6.14 Commissioning Tools
The device is provided with a comprehensive commissioning and monitoring tool that
checks the communication and the whole differential protection system. Using a per-
sonal computer in conjunction with a web-browser this tool enables the user to chart
the state of the system and the communication of the differential protection clearly.
The necessary operator software is integrated in the device; online-help can be found
on the DIGSI® 4–CD and is also available in the Internet.
To ensure a proper communication between the device and the PC browser the trans-
mission speed must be equal for both. Furthermore, the user must set an IP-address
so that the browser can identify the device.
Thanks to the “IBS-tool” the user is able to operate the device with the PC. On the PC-
screen the front panel of the device is emulated, a function that can also be deactivat-
ed by the settings.
6.14.2 Setting Parameters
The parameters of the “IBS-tool” can be set separately for the front operating interface
and the service interface. The relevant addresses are those which relate to the inter-
face that is used for communication with the PC and the “IBS-tool”.
Addresses 4401 to 4406 are to configure the front interface. The 12-digit IP-address
is formatted as follows: ***.***.***.***. There is a 3-digit block in each of the following
setting addresses: 4401 IP-A (A.x.x.x), 4402 IP-B (x.B.x.x), 4403 IP-C
(x.x.C.x) and 4404 IP-D (x.x.x.D).
The address 4405 NUM LOCK determines if the differential protection device should
be operated with the “IBS–tool” from the PC. When setting YES, the devices cannot
be operated by the front panel emulation of the PC. This is the normal state during op-
eration. Once this address is set to NO during commissioning, all device parameters
can be changed to correct, for example, false or inconsistent settings.
In address 4406 LCP/NCP set if your PC-interface supports LCP (Link Control Proto-
col) and NCP (Network Control Protocol). To make possible the long-distance data
transmission for a point-to-point connection the setting must be YES (default setting).
When using a star coupler only one device (master-device) requires the setting YES,
the other devices require NO.
Addresses 4411 IP-A (A.x.x.x), 4412 IP-B (x.B.x.x), 4413 IP-C
(x.x.C.x) and 4414 IP-D (x.x.x.D), 4415 NUM LOCK and 4416 LCP/NCP are
to configure the rear interface.
7SD52 Manual 6-155

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions

4401 IP-A (A.x.x.x) 0..255 141 IP-address ×××.xxx.xxx.xxx(Position 1-3)
4402 IP-B (x.B.x.x) 0..255 142 IP-address xxx.×××.xxx.xxx(Position 4-6)
4403 IP-C (x.x.C.x) 0..255 255 IP-address xxx.xxx.×××.xxx(Position 7-9)
4404 IP-D (x.x.x.D) 0..255 150 IP-address xxx.xxx.xxx.×××(Pos. 10-12)
4405 NUM LOCK YES YES Num Lock

NO
4406 LCP/NCP NO YES Front interface supports LCP/NCP mode

YES
4411 IP-A (A.x.x.x) 0..255 141 IP-address ×××.xxx.xxx.xxx(Position 1-3)
4412 IP-B (x.B.x.x) 0..255 142 IP-address xxx.×××.xxx.xxx(Position 4-6)
4413 IP-C (x.x.C.x) 0..255 255 IP-address xxx.xxx.×××.xxx(Position 7-9)
4414 IP-D (x.x.x.D) 0..255 160 IP-address xxx.xxx.xxx.×××(Pos. 10-12)
4415 NUM LOCK YES YES Num Lock

NO
4416 LCP/NCP NO YES Service interface supports LCP/NCP mode

YES
6-156 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6.15 Ancillary Functions
The auxiliary functions of the 7SD52 relay include:

• processing of messages,
• processing of operational measured values,
• storage of fault record data.
6.15.1 Processing of Messages
For the detailed fault analysis, the information regarding the reaction of the protection
device and the measured values following a system fault are of interest. For this pur-
pose, the device provides information processing which operates in a threefold man-
ner:
Indicators (LEDs) Important events and states are indicated with optical indicators (LED) on the front
and Binary Outputs plate. The device furthermore has output relays for remote indication. Most of the sig-
(Output Relays) nals and indications can be marshalled, i.e. routing can be changed from the preset-
ting with delivery. In Appendix A and Section 5.2 the state of the delivered relay (pre-
setting) and marshalling facilities are extensively discussed.
The output relays and the LEDs may be operated in a latched or unlatched mode
(each may be individually set).
The latched state is saved against loss of auxiliary supply. It is reset:
− locally by operation of the key LED reset on the front of the device,
− from remote via a binary input,
− via one of the serial interfaces,
− automatically on detection of a new fault.
Condition messages should not be latched. Also, they cannot be reset until the condi-
tion to be reported has reset. This applies to e.g. messages from monitoring functions,
or similar.
A green LED indicates that the device is in service (“RUN”); it can not be reset. It ex-
tinguishes if the self-monitoring of the microprocessor recognizes a fault or if the aux-
iliary supply fails.
In the event that the auxiliary supply is available while there is an internal device fail-
ure, the red LED (“ERROR”) is illuminated and the device is blocked.
Information on the Events and states can be obtained from the LCD on the front plate of the device. A
Integrated Display personal computer can be connected to the front interface or the service interface for
(LCD) or to a Per- retrieval of information.
sonal Computer
In the quiescent state, i.e. as long as no system fault is present, the LCD can display
selectable operational information (overview of the operational measured values). In
7SD52 Manual 6-157

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
the event of a system fault, information regarding the fault, the so-called spontaneous
messages, are displayed instead. The quiescent state information is displayed again
once the fault messages have been acknowledged. The acknowledgement is identical
to the resetting of the LEDs (see above).
The device in addition has several event buffers for operational messages, switching
statistics, etc., which are saved against loss of auxiliary supply by means of a battery
buffer. These messages can be displayed on the LCD at any time by selection via the
keypad or transferred to a personal computer via the serial service or PC interface.
The retrieval of events/alarms during operation is extensively described in Subsection
7.1.1.
Following a system fault, it is for example possible to retrieve important information re-
garding its sequence of events, such as pick-up and trip. The start of the fault is time
stamped with the absolute time of the internal system clock. The sequence of events
during the disturbance is indicated with a relative time referred to the instant of fault
detection (first pickup of a protection function), so that the duration of the fault until trip-
ping and up to the reset of the trip command can be ascertained. The resolution of the
time information is 1 ms.
With a PC and the protection data processing program DIGSI® 4 it is also possible to
retrieve and display the events with the convenience of visualisation on the screen and
a menu-guided dialogue. The data may be printed or stored for later evaluation.
The protection device stores the messages of the last eight system faults; in the event
of a ninth fault, the oldest is erased.
A system fault starts with the recognition of the fault by the fault detection functions,
i.e. first pickup of any protection function, and ends with the reset of the fault detection,
i.e. dropout of the last protection function, or after the expiry of the auto-reclose re-
claim time, so that several unsuccessful auto-reclose cycles are also stored as a com-
bined unit. Accordingly a system fault may contain several individual fault events (from
fault detection up to reset of fault detection).
Information to a If the device has a serial system interface, stored information may additionally be
Control Centre transferred via this interface to a centralised control and monitoring system. Several
communication protocols are available for the transfer of this information.
6.15.2 Measurement during Operation
Displaying of A number of measured values and the values derived thereof are available for inter-
Measured Values rogation in site or for data transmission (see Table 6-8).
Precondition for a correct display of primary and percentage values is the complete
and correct entry of the nominal values of the instrument transformers and the power
system according to Subsection 6.1.1.
Depending on the version ordered, the connection of the device, and the configured
protection functions, only a part of the measured operating values listed in Table 6-8
is available. The residual voltage 3U0 is the e-n-voltage multiplied by √3 (if Uen is con-
nected) or calculated from the phase-to-ground-voltages 3U0 = |UL1 + UL2 + UL3|. For
this the three voltage inputs phase-to-ground must be connected. Overload measured
values can appear only if the overload protection was configured Enabled.
6-158 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Table 6-8 Operational measured values of the local device
Measured values primary secondary

IL1, IL2, IL3 Phase currents A A
3I0 Ground current (residual current) A A
ϕ(IL1–IL2), ϕ(IL2–IL3), Phase angle of the phase currents ° —
ϕ(IL3–IL1) towards each other
I1, I2 Positive and negative sequence A A
component of currents
UL1–L2, UL2–L3, UL3–L1 Phase-to-phase voltages kV V
UL1–E, UL2–E, UL3–E Phase-to-ground voltages kV V
3U0 Displacement voltage kV V
(Residual voltage)
ϕ(UL1–UL2), ϕ(UL2–UL3), Phase angle of the phase voltages ° —
ϕ(UL3–UL1) towards each other
ϕ(UL1–IL1), ϕ(UL2–IL2), Phase angle of the phase voltages ° —
ϕ(UL3–IL3) towards the phase currents
U1, U2 Positive and negative sequence kV V
component of voltages
S, P, Q Apparent, active and reactive power MVA, MW, —
MVAR
cos ϕ Power factor (abs) (abs)
f Frequency Hz Hz
ΘL1/ΘTRIP, ΘL2/ΘTRIP, Thermal value of each phase, % —
ΘL3/ΘTRIP referred to the tripping value
Θ/ΘTRIP Thermal resultant value, referred % —
to the tripping value, calculated
according to the set method
The operational measured values are also calculated in the event of a running fault
and approximately every 0.2 s.
Differential The differential and restraint values of the differential protection are listed in Table 6-9.
Protection Values
Table 6-9 Measured values of the differential protection
Measured values % referring to

IDiffL1, IDiffL2, IDiffL3 Calculated differential currents Rated operating current 1)
of the three phases
IRestL1, IRestL2, Calculated restraint currents Rated operating current 1)
IRestL3 of the three phases
1
) for lines according to address 1104 (see Subsection 6.1.3),
for transformers calculated from address 1106 (see Subsection 6.1.3) IN = SN /(√3·UN)
7SD52 Manual 6-159

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
Remote Measured When the 7SD52 devices communicate, the data of the opposite ends of the protected
Values object can be read out. The currents and voltages involved as well as phase shifts be-
tween the local and remote measured quantities can be displayed. This is especially
helpful for checking the correct and coherent phase allocation at the different line ends
and for the verification of the vector group if a power transformer is within the protected
zone. Furthermore, the device addresses of the other device are transmitted. In this
way all important data of all ends are available at any line end. All possible data are
listed in Table 6-10.
Table 6-10 Operational measured values transmitted from the other ends and compared
with the local values
Data % referring to
Device ADR Device address of the remote device (abs)
IL1, IL2, IL3 remote Phase currents of the remote device Rated operat. current 1)
IL1, IL2, IL3 local Phase currents of the local device Rated operat. current 1)
ϕ(IL1), ϕ(IL2), ϕ(IL3) Phase angles between the remote °
and the local phase currents
UL1, UL2, UL3 remote Voltages of the remote device Rated operat. voltage/√3 2)
UL1, UL2, UL3 local Voltages of the local device Rated operat. voltage/√3 2)
ϕ(UL1), ϕ(UL2), ϕ(UL3) Phase angles between the remote °
and the local voltages
1
) for lines according to address 1104 (see Subsection 6.1.3),
for transformers calculated from address 1106 (see Subsection 6.1.3) IN = SN /(√3·UN)
2) according to address 1103 (see Subsection 6.1.3)
Transmission In 7SD52 the data concerning the protection communication is registered in statistics.
Statistics The transmission times of the information between the devices via interfaces (send
and receive) are measured continuously. The values are kept stored in the Statis-
tics folder. The availability of the transmission media is also reported. The availabil-
ity is indicated in %/min and %/h. This allows the user to assess the quality of the
transmission.
If GPS–synchronization is used, the transmission times for both directions and each
protection data interface are regularly measured and indicated.
“IBS-tool” The commissioning tool “IBS-tool” enables the user to chart on a PC-screen the cur-
rents, voltages (if connected to the system) and their phase angles for all devices con-
nected to the differential protection system. In addition to phasor diagrams showing
the measured values also numerical values, frequency and device addresses are in-
dicated. For more details refer to Subsection 7.1.3.2.
6-160 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6.15.3 Fault Recording
The differential protection 7SD52 is equipped with a fault recording function. The in-
stantaneous values of the measured quantities
iL1, iL2, iL3, 3 i0, uL1, uL2, uL3, 3 u0 and IDiffL1, IDiffL2, IDiffL3, IRestL1, IRestL2, IRest L3
(voltages depending on the connection) are sampled at 1 ms intervals (for a frequency
of 50 Hz) and stored in a cyclic buffer (20 samples per period). During a system fault
these data are stored over a time span that can be set (5 s at the longest for each fault
record). Up to 8 faults can be stored. The total capacity of the fault record memory is
approx. 15 s. The fault recording buffer is updated when a new fault occurs, so that
acknowledging is not necessary. Fault recording can be initiated, additionally to the
protection pickup, via the integrated operator panel, the serial operator interface and
the serial service interface.
For the differential protection system of a protected object all fault records of all ends
are synchronized by time management features. This ensures that all fault records op-
erate with exactly the same time basis. Therefore equal measured values are coinci-
dent at all ends.
The data can be retrieved via the serial interfaces by means of a personal computer
and evaluated with the protection data processing program DIGSI® 4 and the graphic
analysis software SIGRA 4. The latter graphically represents the data recorded during
the system fault and calculates additional information from the measured values. A se-
lection may be made as to whether the measured quantities are represented as pri-
mary or secondary values. Binary signal traces (marks) of particular events e.g. “fault
detection”, “tripping” are also represented.
If the device has a serial system interface, the fault recording data can be passed on
to a central device via this interface. The evaluation of the data is done by the respec-
tive programs in the central device. The measured quantities are referred to their max-
imum values, scaled to their rated values and prepared for graphic representation. In
addition, internal events are recorded as binary traces (marks), e.g. “fault detection”,
“tripping”.
Where transfer to a central device is possible, the request for data transfer can be ex-
ecuted automatically. It can be selected to take place after each fault detection by the
protection, or only after a trip.
Data Storage for The configuration of the fault recording memory is done in the sub-menu Oscillo-
Fault Recording graphic Fault Recordings of the menu Settings.
Distinction is made between the starting instant (i.e. the instant where time tagging is
T = 0) and the criterion to save the record (address 402 WAVEFORMTRIGGER). With
the setting Save w. Pickup, the starting instant and the criterion for saving are the
same: the pickup of any protective element. The option Save w. TRIP) means that
the pickup of a protective function still starts fault recording but the record is saved only
if the device issues a trip command. The third option for address 402 is Start w.
7SD52 Manual 6-161

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
TRIP: A trip command issued by the device is both the starting instant and the criterion
to save the record.
A fault event starts with the fault detection of any protection function and ends with the
reset of the last fault detection. Usually this is also the extent of a fault recording (ad-
dress 403 SCOPE OF WAVEFORM DATA = Fault event). If automatic reclosure is
implemented, the entire system disturbance — possibly with several reclose attempts
— up to the final fault clearance can be stored (address 403 SCOPE OF WAVEFORM
DATA = Power System fault). This facilitates the representation of the entire sys-
tem fault history, but also consumes storage capacity during the auto-reclosure dead
time(s).
The actual storage amount of data encompasses the pre-trigger time PRE. TRIG.
TIME (address 411) before the starting instant, the normal recording time and the
post-fault time POST REC. TIME (address 412) after the storage criterion has reset.
The maximum permissible storage period per fault recording MAX. LENGTH is set in
address 410. A maximum recording time of 5 s is available per fault recording. In total
up to 8 fault records with a total recording time of max. 15 s can be stored.
An oscillographic record can be triggered and saved via a binary input or via the op-
erating interface connected to a PC. The trigger is dynamic. The length of the fault re-
cording is set in address 415 BinIn CAPT.TIME (maximum length however is MAX.
LENGTH, address 410). The pre- and post-fault times are additive. If the time for the
binary input is set to ∞, the length of the record equals the time that the binary input is
activated (static), the maximum length however still is MAX. LENGTH (address 410).

402A WAVEFORMTRIGGER Save with Pickup Save with Pickup Waveform Capture
Save with TRIP
Start with TRIP
403A WAVEFORM DATA Fault event Fault event Scope of Waveform Data
Power System fault
410 MAX. LENGTH 0.30..5.00 sec 2.00 sec Max. length of a Waveform Capture
Record
411 PRE. TRIG. TIME 0.05..0.50 sec 0.25 sec Captured Waveform Prior to Trigger
412 POST REC. TIME 0.05..0.50 sec 0.10 sec Captured Waveform after Event
415 BinIn CAPT.TIME 0.10..5.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec Capture Time via Binary Input
6-162 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Statistics

2895 AR #Close1./1p= No. of 1st AR-cycle CLOSE commands 1pole
2896 AR #Close1./3p= No. of 1st AR-cycle CLOSE commands 3pole
2897 AR #Close2./1p= No. of higher AR-cycle CLOSE commands 1p
2898 AR #Close2./3p= No. of higher AR-cycle CLOSE commands 3p
1000 # TRIPs= Number of breaker TRIP commands
1001 TripNo L1= Number of breaker TRIP commands L1
1027 Σ IL1 = Accumulation of interrupted current L1
1030 Last IL1 = Last fault current Phase L1
7751 PI1 TD Prot.Interface 1:Transmission delay
7875 PI1 TD R Prot.Interface 1:Transmission delay rec.
7876 PI1 TD S Prot.Interface 1:Transmission delay send
7752 PI2 TD Prot.Interface 2:Transmission delay
7877 PI2 TD R Prot.Interface 2:Transmission delay rec.
7878 PI2 TD S Prot.Interface 2:Transmission delay send
7753 PI1A/m Prot.Interface 1: Availability per min.
7754 PI1A/h Prot.Interface 1: Availability per hour
7755 PI2A/m Prot.Interface 2: Availability per min.
7756 PI2A/h Prot.Interface 2: Availability per hour
Measured Values

601 IL1 = I L1
602 IL2 = I L2
603 IL3 = I L3
610 3I0 = 3I0 (zero sequence)
7SD52 Manual 6-163

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions

619 I1 = I1 (positive sequence)
620 I2 = I2 (negative sequence)
7731 Φ IL1L2= PHI IL1L2 (local)
621 UL1E= U L1-E
622 UL2E= U L2-E
623 UL3E= U L3-E
624 UL12= U L12
625 UL23= U L23
626 UL31= U L31
631 3U0 = 3U0 (zero sequence)
634 U1 = U1 (positive sequence)
635 U2 = U2 (negative sequence)
641 P= P (active power)
642 Q= Q (reactive power)
643 PF = Power Factor
645 S= S (apparent power)
7734 Φ UL1L2= PHI UL1L2 (local)
7737 Φ UIL1= PHI UIL1 (local)
644 Freq= Frequency
801 Θ /Θtrip = Temperat. rise for warning and trip
802 Θ /ΘtripL1= Temperature rise for phase L1
Remote Values

7761 Relay ID Relay ID of 1. relay
7762 IL1_opN= IL1(% of Operational nominal current)
6-164 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2

7763 ΦI L1= Angle IL1_rem <-> IL1_loc
7769 UL1_opN= UL1(% of Operational nominal voltage)
7770 ΦU L1= Angle UL1_rem <-> UL1_loc




7SD52 Manual 6-165

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions




6-166 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2

Diff-Values

7742 IDiffL1= IDiffL1(% Operational nominal current)
7745 IRestL1= IRestL1(% Operational nominal current)
7748 Diff3I0= Diff3I0 (Differential current 3I0)
Fault Recording

4 >Trig.Wave.Cap. >Trigger Waveform Capture
203 Wave. deleted Waveform data deleted
FltRecSta Fault Recording Start
7SD52 Manual 6-167

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
6.16 Processing of Commands
General In addition to the protective functions described so far, control command processing
is integrated in the SIPROTEC® 7SD52 to coordinate the operation of circuit breakers
and other equipment in the power system. Control commands can originate from four
command sources:
− Local operation using the keypad on the local user interface of the device
− Local or remote operation using DIGSI® 4,
− Remote operation via system (SCADA) interface (e.g. SICAM),
− Automatic functions (e.g. using a binary inputs, CFC).
The number of switchgear devices that can be controlled is basically limited by the
number of available and required binary inputs and outputs. For the output of control
commands it has be ensured that all the required binary inputs and outputs are con-
figured and provided with the correct properties (see also Subsection 5.2.4 under “Ac-
celerated Binary Outputs”).
If specific interlocking conditions are needed for the execution of commands, the user
can program the device with bay interlocking by means of the user-defined logic func-
tions (CFC) (see Section 5.3).
The “Control of Switchgear” is described in Section 7.4.
6.16.1 Types of Commands
Two types of commands can be issued with this device:

• Control commands,
• Internal / pseudo commands.
Control Commands These commands operate binary outputs and change the power system status:
• Commands for the operation of circuit breakers (without synchro-check) as well as
commands for the control of isolators and earth switches,
• Step commands, e.g. for raising and lowering transformer taps,
• Commands with configurable time settings (Petersen coils).
Internal / Pseudo These commands do not directly operate binary outputs. They serve to initiate internal
Commands functions, simulate or acknowledge changes of state.
• Manual entries to change the feedback indication of plant such as the status condi-
tion, for example in the case when the physical connection to the auxiliary contacts
is not available or is defective. The process of manual entries is recorded and can
be displayed accordingly.
6-168 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
• Additionally, tagging commands can be issued to establish internal settings, such

as switching authority (remote / local), parameter set changeover, data transmis-
sion inhibit and metering counter reset or initialization.
• Acknowledgment and resetting commands for setting and resetting internal buffers.
• Status information commands for setting / deactivating the “information status” for
the information value of an object:
− Controlling activation of binary input status,
− Blocking binary outputs.
6.16.2 Steps in the Command Sequence
Safety mechanisms in the command sequence ensure that a command can only be
released after a thorough check of preset criteria has been successfully concluded.
Additionally, user-defined interlocking conditions can be configured separately for
each device. The actual execution of the command is also monitored after its release.
The entire sequence of a command is described briefly in the following:
Check Sequence • Command entry (e.g. using the keypad on the local user interface of the device)
− Check password → access rights;
− Check switching mode (interlocking activated/deactivated) → selection of deac-
tivated interlocking status.
• User configurable interlocking checks that can be selected for each command
− Switching authority (local, remote),
− Switching direction control (target state = present state),
− Zone controlled/bay interlocking (logic using CFC),
− System interlocking (centrally via SICAM),
− Double operation (interlocking against parallel switching operation),
− Protection blocking (blocking of switching operations by protective functions).
• Fixed commands
− Timeout monitoring (time between command initiation and execution can be con-
trolled),
− Configuration in process (if setting modification is in process, commands are re-
jected or delayed),
− Equipment not present at output (if controllable equipment is not assigned to a
binary output, then the command is denied),
− Output block (if an output block has been programmed for the circuit breaker, and
is active at the moment the command is processed, then the command is de-
nied),
− Component hardware malfunction,
7SD52 Manual 6-169

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
− Command in progress (only one command can be processed at a time for each
circuit breaker or switch),
− 1-out-of-n check (for schemes with multiple assignments and common potential
contact, it is checked whether a command has already been initiated for the
common output contact).
Monitoring the − Interruption of a command because of a cancel command,

Command Execu-
− Running time monitor (feedback message monitoring time).
tion
6.16.3 Interlocking
Interlocking is executed by the user-defined logic (CFC). The interlocking checks of a

SICAM/SIPROTEC®-system are classified into:
• System interlocking checked by a central control system (for interbay interlocking)
• Zone controlled/bay interlocking checked in the bay device (for the feeder-related
intelocking)
System interlocking relies on the system data base in the central control system. Zone
controlled/bay interlocking relies on the status of the circuit breaker and other switches
that are connected to the relay.
The extent of the interlocking checks is determined by the configuration and interlock-
ing logic of the relay.
Switchgear which is subject to system interlocking in the central control system is
identified with a specific setting in the command properties (in the routing matrix).
For all commands the user can select the operation mode with interlocking (normal
mode) or without interlocking (test mode):
− for local commands by reprogramming the settings with password check,
− for automatic commands via command processing with CFC,
− for local / remote commands by an additional interlocking command via Profibus.
6.16.3.1 Interlocked/Non-Interlocked Switching
The command checks that can be selected for the SIPROTEC®-relays are also re-
ferred to as “standard interlocking”. These checks can be activated (interlocked) or de-
activated (non interlocked) via DIGSI® 4.
Deactivated interlock switching means the configured interlocking conditions are by-
passed in the relay.
Interlocked switching means that all configured interlocking conditions are checked in
the command check routines. If a condition could not be fulfilled, the command will be
6-170 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
rejected by a message with a minus added to it (e.g. “CO-”), followed by an operation

response information. Table 6-11 shows some types of commands and messages. For
the device the messages designated with *) are displayed in the event logs, for
DIGSI® 4 they appear in spontaneous messages.
Table 6-11 Types of command and messages

Type of command Abbrev. Message
Control issued CO CO+/–
Manual tagging (positive / negative) MT MT+/–
Input blocking IB IB+/– *)
Output blocking OB OB+/– *)
Control abortion CA CA+/–
The “plus” sign indicated in the message is a confirmation of the command execution:
the command execution was as expected, in other words positive. The “minus” is a
negative confirmation, the command was rejected. Figure 6-81 shows the messages
relating to command execution and operation response information for a successful
operation of the circuit breaker.
The check of interlocking can be programmed separately for all switching devices and
tags that were set with a tagging command. Other internal commands such as manual
entry or abort are not checked, i.e. carried out independent of the interlocking.
EVENT LOG
---------------------
19.06.99 11:52:05,625
Q0 CO+ close
19.06.99 11:52:06,134
Q0 FB+ close
Figure 6-81 Example of a message when closing the circuit breaker Q0
Standard The standard interlocking includes the checks for each device which were set during
Interlocking the configuration of inputs and outputs, see Subsection 5.2.4 under “Accelerated Bi-
nary Outputs”.
An overview for processing the interlocking conditions in the relay is shown by Figure
6-82.
7SD52 Manual 6-171

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
Device with Source Switching Authority Switching Mode

of Command =
On/Off
LOCAL
& Local
SAS REMOTE1),
Local &
DIGSI
AUTO
&
Remote &
Switching Authority
(Local/Remote)
& DIGSI
Switching Authority DIGSI

DIGSI or
Remote
&
Switching Mode Non-Interlocked

Local
or SCHEDULED=ACT .y/n
&
Switching Mode
Remote
Interlocked
&
or
SCHEDULED=ACT.y/n
System Interlock.*)y/n Command
Field Interlocking y/n or Output
feedback Indication Protection Blockingy/n to Relay
On/Off Double Oper. Blocky/n
SW. Auth. LOCA> y/n
Protection Blocking Sw. Auth. REMOTEy/n
52 Close
52 Open
Event *) Starting With Version 4.2

Condition
1)
Source REMOTE also includes SAS.
LOCALCommand via substation controller.
REMOTECommand via telecontrol system to substation controller and from substation con-
troller to device.
Figure 6-82 Standard Interlocking Arrangements
The display shows the configured interlocking reasons. The are marked by letters ex-
plained in the following table 6-12.
Table 6-12 Interlocking commands
Interlocking commands Abbrev. Message

Control authorization L L
System interlock S S
6-172 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Interlocking commands Abbrev. Message

Zone controlled Z Z
Target state = present state P P
(check switch position)
Block by protection B B
Figure 6-83 shows all interlocking conditions (which usually appear in the display of
the device) for three switchgear items with the relevant abbreviations explained in
table 6-12. All parameterized interlocking conditions are indicated
(see Figure 6-83).
Interlocking 01/03
--------------------
Q0 Close/Open S – Z P B
Figure 6-83 Example of configured interlocking conditions
Control Logic using For zone controlled/field interlocking, control logic can be programmed, using the
CFC CFC. Via specific release conditions the information “released” or “bay interlocked”
are available.
6.16.4 Recording and Acknowledgement of Commands
During the processing of the commands, independent of the further processing of in-
formation, command and process feedback information are sent to the message
processing centre. These messages contain information on the cause. The messages
are entered in the event list.
Acknowledgement All information which relates to commands that were issued from the device front
of Commands to “Command Issued = Local” is transformed into a corresponding message and shown
the Device Front in the display of the device.
Acknowledgement The messages which relate to commands with the origin “Command Issued = Local/
of Commands to Remote/DIGSI” are sent back to the initiating point independent of the routing (config-
Local/Remote/Digsi uration on the serial digital interface).
The acknowledgement of commands is therefore not provided with a response indica-
tion as it is done with the local command but with ordinary recorded command and
feedback information.
7SD52 Manual 6-173

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 Functions
Monitoring of Feed- The processing of commands monitors the command execution and timing of feed-
back Information back information for all commands. At the same time the command is sent, the moni-
toring time is started (monitoring of the command execution). This time controls
whether the device operation is executed with the required final result within the mon-
itoring time. The monitoring time is stopped as soon as the feedback information is de-
tected. If no feedback information arrives, a response “Timeout command monitoring
time” is indicated and the command sequence is terminated.
Commands and information feedback are also recorded in the event list. Normally the
execution of a command is terminated as soon as the feedback information (FB+) of
the relevant switchgear arrives or, in case of commands without process feedback in-
formation, the command output resets.
The “plus” appearing in a feedback information confirms that the command was suc-
cessful, the command was as expected, in other words positive. The “minus” is a neg-
ative confirmation and means that the command was not executed as expected.
Command Output The command types needed for tripping and closing of the switchgear are described
and Switching in Section 5.2 and Subsection 5.2.1.
Relays

Cntrl Auth Control Authority
ModeLOCAL Controlmode LOCAL
ModeREMOTE Controlmode REMOTE
6-174 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Control During Operation 7
This chapter describes interaction possibilities with the SIPROTEC® 7SD52 device
during operation. The information that can be obtained and the procedure for retriev-
ing the data are discussed. Methods of influencing the device functions during opera-
tion and controlling the system using the device are covered.
Detailed knowledge about the device functions is not required at this point. However,
the configuration of the device covered in Chapter 5 — especially configuration of the
input and output functions — is assumed to have already taken place.
Please note that the examples shown are general and may differ in wording or details
from the device at hand. Also, depending on the model variant, some of the functions
discussed below may not be available.
7.1 Read-out of Information 7-2

7.2 Control of Device Functions 7-28
7.3 Circuit Breaker Test Function 7-40
7.4 Control of Switchgear 7-44
7SD52 Manual 7-1

C53000–G1176–C132–2
7 Control During Operation
7.1 Read-out of Information
General The device provides a great deal of information that can be obtained on-site or from
data transfer:
• Messages,
• Operating measurement and metered values,
• Waveform data in oscillographic fault records.
This information is individually discussed below. Methods for viewing, retrieving, ac-
knowledging, and storing this information on a PC are also explained.
7.1.1 Messages
7.1.1.1 Output of Messages
Messages provide operating information about the power system, the device, and the
measurements. Other messages give an overview of important events such a network
fault and the operation of device functions. The information provided is useful in
checking overall operation of the device during testing and commissioning.
Password entry is not required to read messages.
The messages generated in the device can be presented in various ways:
• Display using light-emitting diodes (LEDs) on the front of the device,
• Operation of output relays connected to external signalling equipment,
• Display in the LCD on the front of the device,
• Display on the screen of a PC running the DIGSI® 4 program, connected to the op-
erating or service interface of the device,
• Transfer to a master station using one of the serial system interfaces (if available).
Light-Emitting The green light-emitting diode with the label “RUN” lights continuously during normal
Diodes operation.
The red LED with the label “ERROR” indicates that the processor system has recog-
nized an internal problem. If this LED lights up, then the device is not operational.
Chapter 9 discusses steps to take if a failure occurs in the device.
The other LEDs on the front of the device display the messages in accordance with
the configuration, as discussed in Chapter 5. The description of each LED illumination
should then be indicated on the label strips.
If the messages for the LEDs are latched, then the memory can be reset with the LED
key LED . This key simultaneously serves as a functional check for all of the LEDs ex-
cept the “RUN” and “ERROR” LEDs. While the key is pressed, all of these LEDs must
light.
7-2 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
LEDs that display a condition should light for as long as the condition is maintained.
The LED action is therefore generally not latched. Of course, these LEDs are also in-
cluded in the function check with the LED key LED .
Output Relays Indications can be configured to output relays for external indication (e.g. annunciator,
sequence-of-events recorder, RTU, etc), and operate like LEDs. See also Chapter 5
for details.
Front Panel To retrieve messages using the front panel:

First press the MENU key MENU. The MAIN MENU appears. The first menu item (Annun-
ciation) is marked.
All menus and message lists begin with a title. The number in the upper right corner
of the display indicates presently selected menu entry or message, and, behind the
slash, the total number of menu entries or messages (see Figure 7-1, each first line).
Press the key to go to the ANNUNCIATION sub-menu, as shown in Figure 7-1. In
this menu the messages can be reached by entering the associated selection number,
or by selecting the desired entry using the and keys and moving further with the
key. This procedure is described in more detail below.
MAIN MENU 01/05

---------------------
Measurement –> 2 ANNUNCIATION 01/05
---------------------
>Event Log –> 1
Trip Log –> 2
Figure 7-1 Selection of messages on the operator control panel — example
PC–Interfaces A personal computer running the DIGSI® 4 program can be connected to the operat-
ing interface on the front of the device to retrieve the messages. A PC can also be con-
nected to the service interface on the back of the device. This connection typically ap-
plies when the PC is hard-wired with several devices, using a data bus (station com-
puter) or modem.
Details about the operation of DIGSI® 4 are contained in the “DIGSI® 4 Device Oper-
ation” handbook, order no. E50417-H1176-C097.
7SD52 Manual 7-3

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Figure 7-2 Function selection screen in DIGSI® 4 — example
If the DIGSI® 4 Online directory is opened with a double-click, the operating func-
tions for the device appear in the navigation window (Figure 7-2). By double clicking
on Annunciation, the tree structure expands and shows the individual message
groups. The groups are described in detail below.
System (SCADA) The system interface (if available) is generally hardwired and transfers all device in-
Interface formation to a master station via data cable or optical fibre cable.
Division of The messages are categorized as follows:

Messages
• Event Log: these are operating messages that can occur during the operation of the
device. They include information about the status of device functions, measurement
data, system data, and similar information.
• Trip Log: these are fault messages from the last eight network faults that were proc-
essed by the device.
• Switching statistics; these messages count the trip commands initiated by the de-
vice, close commands, values of accumulated circuit currents and interrupted cur-
rents.
• Erasing and setting the messages named above.
A complete list of all message and output functions that can be generated by the de-
vice, with the associated information number (FNo), can be found in the Appendix.
The lists also indicate where each message can be sent. The lists are based on a
SIPROTEC® 4 device with the maximum complement of functions. If functions are not
present in the specific version of the device, or if they are set as “Disabled” in device
configuration, then the associated messages cannot appear.
7-4 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
7.1.1.2 Event Log (Operating Messages)
Operating messages contain information that the device generates during operation
and about the operation. Up to 200 operating messages are stored in chronological
order in the device. New messages are added at the end of the list. If the memory has
been exceeded, then the oldest message is overwritten for each new message.
Faults in the power system are indicated with “Network Fault” and the present fault
number. The fault messages (Trip Log) contain details about the history of faults.
This topic is discussed in Subsection 7.1.1.3.
All predefined operating messages are listed and explained in a table in Appendix A.7.
In a specific case, of course, only the appropriate messages appear in the display. The
appendix also shows whether the message is only issued as “ON” (to indicate an
event), or as “ON” and “OFF” (to designate the beginning and end of a condition).
From the With the device ready for operation, first press the MENU key. The MAIN MENU appears.
DeviceFront The first menu item (Annunciation) is marked.
Press the key to enter the ANNUNCIATION menu (see Figure 7-1).
Here, select the menu item Event Log (already marked). The EVENT LOG table ap-
pears.
If no messages are present, then the text “list is empty” appears. Otherwise im-
portant events and changes in conditions are listed in chronological order (see Figure
7-3 as an example). Upon entering the menu, the newest (last) message is displayed
at first. The applicable date and time are noted in the display line directly above the
message. If the memory for the operating messages is not full, then the end of the en-
tries is indicated by “END”.
EVENT LOG 19/19

---------------------
06/19/99 11:52:05.625
Reset LED ON
Figure 7-3 Example of an operating message in the operating field of the device
The and keys can be used to move up and down in the event log.
Press the MENU key to return to the MAIN MENU.
:
From PC with Click on Annunciation. The options appear in the data window (Figure 7-4).
DIGSI® 4
Double click on the desired message group in the data window, in this case Event
Log. A date and time appear in the data window as shown in Figure 7-4.
Double click on the date and time and the contents of the message group are dis-
played in another window.
7SD52 Manual 7-5

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Figure 7-4 Selection of operational messages in DIGSI® 4 — example
Figure 7-5 Example of operational messages in DIGSI® 4
7-6 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
7.1.1.3 Trip Log (Fault Messages)
Spontaneous The spontaneous messages appear automatically in the display, after a general pick-
Messages up of the device. The most important data about a fault can be viewed on the device
front in the sequence shown in Figure 7-6.
The spontaneous messages can be acknowledged by pressing the LED key. After ac-
knowledgement, the default display is shown.
Diff Pickup L1E Protection function that had picked up first, e.g.
differencial protection, with phase information;
PU Time 93 ms Elapsed time from pick-up until drop-off;
TRIP Time 0 ms Elapsed time from pick-up until the first trip com-
mand of a protection function;
differential protection mostly 0
Figure 7-6 Display of spontaneous messages in the display — example
Retrieved The messages for the last eight network faults can be retrieved. The definition of a net-
messages work fault is such that the time period from fault detection up to final clearing of the
system fault is considered to be one network fault. If auto-reclosure occurs, then the
network fault ends after the last reclosing shot, which means after a successful or final-
unsuccessful reclosing. Therefore, the entire clearing process, including the reclosing
attempt (or all reclosing attempts), occupies only one fault log buffer. Within a network
fault, several fault events can occur (from the first pick-up of a protective function to
the last drop-out of a protective function). Without auto-reclosing, every fault event is
a network fault.
Altogether up to 600 indications can be stored. Oldest data are erased for newest data
when the buffer is full.
All available indications are displayed and explained in the Appendix A.7. In a specific
case, of course, only the applicable messages appear on the display.
From the With a device ready for operation, first press the MENU key. The MAIN MENU appears.
DeviceFront The first menu item (Annunciation) is marked.
Press the key to enter the ANNUNCIATION sub-menu (see Figure 7-1).
Using the key, select the sub-menu item Trip Log and move to the Trip Log sub-
menu using the key. The TRIP LOG selection appears.
In this sub-menu, the indications for the last 8 network faults can be selected, again
using the and keys. See the example in Figure 7-7.
If no messages are present for a fault, then entrance is denied and “List Empty” is
displayed.
The messages within a fault record are listed in chronological order and numbered,
from the oldest to the newest.
The inception of a fault is identified with the date and time in hours, minutes, and sec-
onds (resolution to ms). See the example in Figure 7-7.
The individual messages that are associated with the fault are tagged with a relative
time. At least one complete individual message always appears in the display.
7SD52 Manual 7-7

C53000–G1176–C132–2
TRIP LOG 01/08

---------------------
>Last Fault –> 1 LAST FAULT 01/10
>2nd Last Fault –> 2 ---------------------
06/22 23:49:34,845
etc Network Fault 6 ON
Figure 7-7 Example of fault messages in the front display
Use the and keys to move up and down in the fault messages.
Use the key to move back into the TRIP LOG level; or press the MENU key to go back
to the MAIN MENU.
:
From PC with Click on Annunciation. The options appear in the data window (see Figure 7-2).
DIGSI® 4
Double click on the desired message group in the data window, in this case the Trip
Log. A list appears in the data window, as shown in Figure 7-8.
By double clicking on an entry in the list view, the associated contents of the network
fault is displayed in another window. The entries are chronologically listed with the
newest message appearing first.
Figure 7-8 Selection of fault messages in DIGSI® 4 — example
7-8 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Figure 7-9 Example of fault messages in DIGSI® 4
7.1.1.4 Saving and Erasing the Messages
Normally, erasing the messages is not necessary because the oldest messages are
automatically erased when new events are entered, if the memory is full at the time.
However, erasure of the stored messages may be useful, for instance, after revision
of the plant, so that in the future the memory only contains information about actual
events. Erasing the memory takes place separately for each of the message groups.
Note:
When the Trip Log (fault messages) is erased, then the fault records are erased, too,
and all corresponding counters are set to zero. If, however, a fault record is erased (cf.
Sub-section 7.1.4), the fault messages are unaffected.
From the If erasure is desired, first press the MENU key. The MAIN MENU appears. The first menu
DeviceFront item Annunciation is marked.
Press the key to enter the ANNUNCIATION menu (see Figure 7-1).
Using the key, select the item Set/Reset, and switch to the sub-menu using the
key.
Here, select the message group to be erased using the key, and then press the
ENTER key. See Figure 7-10 as an example.
Password No. 5 (for setting changes) is required at this point. After entering the pass-
word and confirming with the ENTER key, the safety question “Are you sure?” ap-
pears. The response “YES” is the default (Figure 7-10). Confirm with the ENTER key, if
the message group should really be erased. If the message group should not be
erased, press the key so that the response “NO” is highlighted, and confirm this an-
7SD52 Manual 7-9

C53000–G1176–C132–2
swer with the ENTER key. Before confirming with the ENTER key, the responses can be tog-
gled between “YES” and “NO” using the and keys. Alternatively, the ESC key can
be pressed to cancel the erasure procedure.
SET/RESET 01/04 Select the associated message group or press

--------------------- the associated number key to select the mes-
>Event Log 01
>Trip Log 02 sages to be erased.
Etc
PW Settings? Enter Password No. 5 (for setting change) and

ENTER
=------- confirm with ENTER
Confirm “Yes” with the ENTER key and complete

Are you sure? the erasing of the selected messages, or
>Yes No switch to “No” with the key and cancel the
erasure with the ENTER key.
Figure 7-10 Erasing messages from the front panel
:
From PC with Operating the device from the PC via DIGSI 4 enables the user to save the above de-
DIGSI® 4 scribed messages on your hard disc before clearing them from the device. Proceed
as if reading out the messages. However, instead of opening the information list by
making a double-click on the event group, select the option File → Save in the menu
of the DIGSI window. Then DIGSI automatically creates a directory for the event
group. For more details also refer to the instruction manual of DIGSI 4, ordering no.
E50417-H1100-C097, Section 9.4.
If all event groups required are stored in the PC, they can be deleted from the device
- as before described - via the front panel.
Naturally all messages stored via DIGSI 4 can be deleted from your hard disc like any
other object.
7.1.1.5 General Interrogation
:
From PC with The present condition of a SIPROTEC® device can be examined by using DIGSI® 4
DIGSI® 4 to view the contents of the “General Interrogation” annunciation.
The messages are found by double-clicking on Annunciation (see Figure 7-2),
double-clicking on General Interrogation, and double-clicking on the date and
time that appear in the right window. All of the messages that are needed for a general
interrogation are shown along with the actual values and states.
7-10 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
7.1.1.6 Spontaneous Messages
:
From PC with The spontaneous messages that can be displayed via DIGSI® 4 are refreshed imme-
DIGSI® 4 diately.
Find the message groups by clicking on Annunciation (Figure 7-2).
Double click Spontaneous Annunciation in the data window. The date and time
appear in the data window. By double clicking on them, the Spontaneous Annunciation
window opens, as shown in the following figure. Each entering message appears im-
mediately, without requiring that an update be initiated.
Figure 7-11 Spontaneous annunciation window — example
7.1.2 Switching Statistics
The messages in switching statistics are counters for the accumulation of interrupted
currents by each of the breaker poles, the number of trips issued by the device to the
breaker. The interrupted currents are in primary terms.
Switching statistics can be viewed on the LCD of the device, or on a PC running
DIGSI® 4 and connected to the operating or service interface.
A password is not required to read switching statistics; however, a password is re-
quired to change or delete the statistics.
In 7SD52 the statistics register the data of the protection communication. The trans-
mission time of the information from device to device via protection data interfaces
(coming and going) is measured steadily and registered in the folder “Statistic”. The
availability of the means of transmission is also indicated. The availability is indicated
in %/min and %/h. This enables the user to assess the transmission quality.
7SD52 Manual 7-11

C53000–G1176–C132–2
7.1.2.1 Viewing the Switching Statistics
For each trip command initiated by a protective element of the device, the magnitude
of interrupted current for each circuit breaker pole is determined and stored. The cur-
rent magnitudes are added to previously interrupted currents, and the accumulated
values are stored.
DeviceFront The first menu item Annunciation is marked.
Press the key to enter the ANNUNCIATION sub-menu (see Figure 7-1).
Use the key to select the item Statistic, and switch to the list of statistics values
using the key. The STATISTIC list appears. See Figure 7-12.
STATISTICS 1/05
---------------------
Σ IL1= 0.00kA
Σ IL2= 0.00kA
Etc.
Figure 7-12 Switching statistics viewed from the front display — example
:
From PC with Under Annunciation (Figure 7-2), the switching statistics can be found by double
DIGSI® 4 clicking. Double click on Statistic. The contents of the statistic counters is dis-
played in another window. See Figure 7-13.
Figure 7-13 List of statistic values in DIGSI® 4 — example
7-12 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
7.1.2.2 Resetting and Setting the Switching Statistics
The memories and counters for switching statistics are secured against a loss of pow-
er supply voltage. The values can, however, be set to zero, or to any desired value
within certain setting limits.
From the In the STATISTIC (see previous sub-section) sub-menu (see previous sub-section),
DeviceFront select the value to be set by using the key, and then press the ENTER key. See Figure
7-14 for an example of changing the trip counter. After a password is entered, the cur-
sor blinks and the number value is highlighted in a box. The number can be overwritten
using the number keys. If the new value is outside of the allowable range, either above
or below, then the maximum or minimum limit value appears at the bottom edge of the
screen. Confirm the change with the ENTER key.
STATISTICS 08/08
---------------------
åIL3= 214.53kA
Trip Count= >34 ENTER
Oper.Count=
Trip Hrs.= 3420000
34
Max 2147483648
Figure 7-14 Setting statistics values from the device front — example
:
From PC with In the Statistic window (see previous sub-section), mark the value that is to be set.
DIGSI® 4 With the right mouse button, open a context menu and select Set. See Figure 7-15.
After the password for individual settings is entered, the previous value in the window
can be overwritten.
Figure 7-15 Setting statistic values in DIGSI® 4 — example
7SD52 Manual 7-13

C53000–G1176–C132–2
7.1.3 Measured Values
Operating measured values are determined in the background by the processor sys-
tem. They can be called up at the front of the device, read out via the operating inter-
face using a PC with DIGSI® 4, or transferred to a central master station via the sys-
tem interface (if available).
No password entry is required to view the measured values. The values are updated
every few seconds.
Most measured values can be displayed in primary quantities, secondary quantities,
and percentages based on nominal values. A precondition for correct display is that
the nominal values be correctly set in the power system data. The secondary quanti-
ties are those which are directly applied to the analog inputs of the device.
7.1.3.1 Measured Values
Default Display Under normal conditions, the so-called default display is the default image in the relay
display. It shows measured values of the protected equipment. Depending on the relay
type, a number of predefined basic displays are available. Using the and keys,
one of the displayed images may be selected (see example in Figure 7-16).
% I ULE ULL
L1 100.1 102.0 102.2
L2 102.5 102.5 100.0
L3 98.7 98.7 99.8
Figure 7-16 Default displays — example
Read-out of In the 7SD52 with maximum functionality the measured values as shown in Table 7-1
Measured Values to 7-3 are available.
The displacement voltage 3U0 is either measured directly (3U0 = √3·Uen, if Uen is con-
nected to the voltage input U4) or calculated (from 3U0 = |UL1-E + UL2-E + UL3-E|).
The power measurements P, Q are positive, if real power or inductive reactive power
flows into the protected object. This is assuming that this direction has been parame-
terized as “forward”.
The sign of the power factor cos ϕ corresponds to the sign of the real power.
In addition to those measured values listed in the table, it is possible to retrieve user
defined measurement, metering and set points, if these were generated during the
configuration of the device according to Section 5.2 and/or 5.3.
The differential and restraint values of the differential protection according to Table 7-
2 can also be read out.
7-14 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Remote measured values come from the remote ends of the protected object. Cur-
rents, voltages and the phase displacement between local and remote measured val-
ues can be viewed for each device of the differential protection system. Furthermore
the addresses of the partner devices are transmitted to the substation. Thus all impor-
tant data are available in one place. The remote measured values are listed in Table
7-3.

IL1, IL2, IL3 phase currents A A
3I0 earth currents A A
ϕ(IL1–IL2), ϕ(IL2–IL3), phase angles of phase currents ° —
ϕ(IL3–IL1) in relation
I1, I2 positive and negative sequence A A
currents
UL1–L2, UL2–L3, UL3–L1 line voltages kV V
UL1–E, UL2–E, UL3–E phase–earth voltages kV V
3U0 displacement voltage kV V
ϕ(UL1–UL2), ϕ(UL2–UL3), phase angles of phase voltages in ° —
ϕ(UL3–UL1) relation
ϕ(UL1–IL1), ϕ(UL2–IL2), phase angles of phase voltages in ° —
ϕ(UL3–IL3) relation to phase currents
U1, U2 positive and negative sequence kV V
voltages
S, P, Q apparent, real, and reactive power MVA, MW, —
MVAR
cos ϕ power factor (abs) (abs)
f frequency Hz Hz
ΘL1/Θtrip, ΘL2/Θtrip, thermal value of each line % —
ΘL3/Θtrip related to trip value
Θ/Θtrip thermal value, % —
related to trip value, calculated
according to the configured method
Table 7-2 Measured values of the differential protection
Measured values % referred to

IDiffL1, IDiffL2, IDiffL3 calculated differential currents of the operational nominal
three lines current 1)
IRestL1, IRestL2, IRestL3 calculated restraint currents operational nominal
of the three lines current 1)
1
) for lines acc. to address 1104 (refer to Subsection 6.1.3),
for transformers acc. to address 1106 (refer to Subsection 6.1.3) IN = SN /(√3·UN)
7SD52 Manual 7-15

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Table 7-3 Operating measured values transmitted from the other end in comparison with
the local operating measured values
Data % referred to
Device ADR device address of the remote device (absolute)
IL1, IL2, IL3 remote phase currents of the remote device operating nominal current 1)
IL1, IL2, IL3 local phase currents of the local device operating nominal current 1)
ϕ(IL1), ϕ(IL2), ϕ(IL3) phase angles between remote and °
local phase currents
UL1, UL2, UL3 remote voltages of remote device operating nominal voltage /√3 2)
UL1, UL2, UL3 local voltages of local device operating nominal voltage / √3 2)
ϕ(UL1), ϕ(UL2), ϕ(UL3) phase angles between remote and °
local voltages
1
2
) acc. to address 1103 (refer to Subsection 6.1.3)
DeviceFront
Use the key to select the menu item Measurement, and switch to the list of meas-
ured values using the key. The MEASUREMENT selection appears. See figure 7-17.
MAIN MENU 02/05

---------------------
Annunciation –> 1
>Measurement –> 2
MEASUREMENT 01/12
--------------------
>Operation. pri 01
>Operation. sec 02
Etc.
Figure 7-17 Selection of measured values on the front — example
The measured values are divided into the following groups:

01 Operation. pri Operating measured values, primary.
11 Operation. sec Operating measured values, secondary.
21 Percent Operating measured values, in percent of nominal quanti-
ties.
51 User Defined Measured values that are defined by the user during initial
setting of the device (see Section 5.3).
61 Set Points Impulse counter generated by the user defined logic CFC
(according to Section 5.3).
7-16 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
71 Set points (MV) Threshold values generated by the user defined logic CFC
(according to Section 5.3).
If a measured value is not available, then instead of the measured value, 3 dots ap-
pear. If the value is undefined (e.g., cos ϕ, when no current is flowing), then “–––” ap-
pears (3 horizontal bars). If a measured value overruns, then “«««” (3 asterisks) is
displayed.
Use the key to select the measured value group that has the values desired, and
switch to the display of this group with the key. Figure 7-18 shows an example for
the display of operating measured values.
MEASUREMENT 01/14
--------------------
>Operation. pri 01 OPERATION. PRI 02/25
>Operation. sec 11 ---------------------
>IL1 = 1062.8A
Etc. >IL2 = 1081.5A
Etc.
Figure 7-18 Viewing operating measured values on the front display
Move up and down in the table of measured value groups using the and keys.
Use the key to return to the MEASUREMENT sub-menu. Use the MENU key to return to
the MAIN MENU.
:
From PC with The measured value groups are found under Measurement (Figure 7-2) with a double
DIGSI® 4 click, as shown in Figure 7-19, left.
Figure 7-19 Measurement window in DIGSI® 4 — example
The measured values are divided into the following groups:

• Primary (local) with
Operational values, primary,
• Secondary (local) with
Operational values, secondary,
7SD52 Manual 7-17

C53000–G1176–C132–2
• Rated in % (local; remote) with

Differential an Restraint Current
Angles
Measurements from relay 1,
related to nominal operational values.
• Others with
Thermal overload values,
User defined measured values,
User defined counter,
Set point value of measured value,
i.o.w. only such values that were generated in the configuration (according to Sec-
tion 5.2) and/or with the user definable logic CFC (according to Section 5.3).
If a measured value is not available, then instead of the measured value, 3 dots ap-
pear. If the value is undefined (e.g., cos ϕ, when no current is flowing), then “–––” ap-
pears (3 horizontal bars). If the measured value overruns, then “«««” (3 asterisks)
are displayed.
Double click on the desired measure value group; e.g. Primary (local). The next
sub-group is displayed.
Double click on the desired sub-group; e.g. Operational values, primary.
By double clicking on an entry in the list on the right side of the window, the associated
contents of the measured value group are displayed in another window, as shown in
Figure 7-20.
Figure 7-20 Example of measured values shown in DIGSI® 4
7-18 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
7.1.3.2 Illustrating Measured Values
The IBS-Tool The IBS-tool allows to illustrate the measured values of both ends of the protected ob-
ject during commissioning and during operation. The IBS-tool offers a wide range of
commissioning and monitoring functions that allows a detailed illustration of the differ-
ential protection communication and the power system conditions via a personal com-
puter equipped with a browser. For more details refer to the “Online Help” for the IBS-
tool. The “Online Help” can be downloaded from the INTERNET download area under
http://www.ev.siemens.de/en/pages/siprote1.htm.
Local Measured With the IBS-tool the you can view the local measured values according to Table 7-4
Values on the PC-screen. Currents and voltages appear as vector diagrams and are indicated
as numerical values (such as angles and frequency). See Figure 7-21.

IL1, IL2, IL3 phase currents A A
3I0 earth current A A
ϕ(IL1–IL2), ϕ(IL2–IL3), phase angles of phase currents ° —
ϕ(IL3–IL1) in relation
UL1–E, UL2–E, UL3–E phase–earth voltages kV V
3U0 displacement voltage kV V
ϕ(UL1–UL2), ϕ(UL2–UL3), phase angles of phase voltages ° —
ϕ(UL3–UL1) in relation
ϕ(UL1–IL1), ϕ(UL2–IL2), phase angles of phase voltages ° —
ϕ(UL3–IL3) in relation to phase currents
f frequency Hz Hz
7SD52 Manual 7-19

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Figure 7-21 Local measured values — example for voltages and currents
Remote Measured For the remote device — in case of more than two ends for each of the remote devices
Values — the local measured values can be compared with the remote measured values, re-
fer to Table 7-5. Figure 7-22 gives an example.
Table 7-5 Operating measured values transmitted from the other ends in comparison with
Data % referred to
Device ADR device address of the remote device (absolute)
IL1, IL2, IL3 remote phase currents of the remote device operating nominal current 1)
IL1, IL2, IL3 local phase currents of the local device operating nominal current 1)
ϕ(IL1), ϕ(IL2), ϕ(IL3) phase angles between remote and °
local phase currents
UL1, UL2, UL3 remote voltages of remote device operating nominal voltage /√3 2)
1) for lines acc. to address 1104 (refer to Subsection 6.1.3),
2
7-20 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Table 7-5 Operating measured values transmitted from the other ends in comparison with
Data % referred to
UL1, UL2, UL3 local voltages of local device operating nominal voltage / √3 2)
ϕ(UL1), ϕ(UL2), ϕ(UL3) phase angles between remote and °
local voltages
1
2
Figure 7-22 Local and remote measured values — example for voltages and (flowing) currents
7SD52 Manual 7-21

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Values Measured The differential and restraint values are listed below the local and remote addresses
by the Differential (Figure 7-22). Additionally the position of the differential and restraint values can be
Protection viewed in the pickup characteristic. See Figure 7-23.
Figure 7-23 Pickup characteristic of the differential protection - example showing an operating state
7.1.3.3 Setting and Retrieval of User Defined Set-points
In the 7SD52 measured value set-points can be configured with the user definable log-
ic CFC (see Section 5.3). If during normal operation a measured value reaches one of
these set-points, the device generates an alarm which is indicated as an operational
event. As is the case for all operational messages, it is also possible in this case to
output the information to LED and/or output relay and via the interfaces.
If such set-points were defined during the configuration of the device, they can be
viewed and — with password No. 5 — they can be changed:
7-22 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
DeviceFront
ured values using the key. The MEASUREMENT selection appears.
There, select the menu item Set Points (MV) with the key, and switch to the
list of limit values using the key (see Figure 7-24).
Measurement 13/14
---------------------
>Set Points(MV) 71 SET POINTS (MV) 01/11
Reset 81 ---------------------
IL1 Limit 100.0 A
IL2 Limit 100.0 A
u.s.w.
PW Settings? Enter password Nr. 5 (for individual para-

ENTER
= ------ meters) and confirm with ENTER
IL1 Limit 90.0% ENTER
Are you sure?

ENTER
>Yes No Escape
Figure 7-24 Setting of set-points on the device front — example
With the keys and paging up and down in the set-point table is possible.
To change a set-point, it must be marked by means of the keys and and sub-
sequently the key ENTER must be pressed.
A prompt for the entry of password No. 5 (for individual parameters) appears. After en-
try of the password and confirmation thereof with ENTER , the current value appears in a
frame with a flashing cursor. The current value must be overwritten with the desired
new value with the numeric keys. If the permissible range for the setting value is ex-
ceeded to the top or the bottom, the maximum or minimum set point value appears at
the bottom of the display when the value is entered.
Press the ENTER .key. The new value now appears in the list of set point values.
In the same way, further set points, if available, can be modified.
If this level is exited with the key or MENU the query “Are you sure?”, with the de-
fault answer “Yes” appears (Figure 7-23). Confirm with the key ENTER , if the modified
value must be accepted. If the value must not be modified the key, so that the an-
swer “No” is marked, and confirm with the ENTER key. If the value is to be modified once
more, mark “Abort”, confirm this with the ENTER key and re-enter the value.
:
From PC with Set points are only available in online-mode. The metered value groups are found un-
DIGSI® 4 der Measurement (Figure 7-25) with a double click. Select Other and then Set
Points (Measured Values)(Figure 7-25).
By double clicking on an entry in the list view in the right side of the window, the limit
values are loaded. Mark the number of the value that is to be changed. With the right
7SD52 Manual 7-23

C53000–G1176–C132–2
mouse button, open the context menu and click on Set, as shown in Figure 7-25. A
password inquiry (password no. 5 for individual settings) occurs. Next, the dialogue
field Set Metered Value is opened. Enter the desired value in the entry field. Then
click on OK.
The entered value is transferred to the device and the display within the window in Fig-
ure 7-25 is updated.
Figure 7-25 Setting of set-points in DIGSI® 4 — example
7.1.3.4 Retrieval and Resetting of User Defined Pulse Metered Values (PMV)
In the 7SD52 it is possible to define pulse metered values with the user definable logic
(CFC) (see Section 5.3).
If such pulse metered values were defined during the configuration of the device, they
can — with password No. 5 — be reset to 0:
DeviceFront
ured values using the key. The MEASUREMENT selection appears.
There select with key the menu item User Defined Counter and switch to the
RESET option with the key (refer to Figure 7-26).
Reset
--------------------
Meter res > 0
Figure 7-26 Resetting of pulse metered values on the device front
7-24 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
With the keys and you may page up and down in the table, if several positions
are available.
If one of the memories should be reset, mark it with the keys and , and then se-
lect it by pressing the ENTER key.
A prompt to enter the password No. 5 (for individual parameters) appears. After entry
of the password and confirmation with ENTER , the reset command is executed.
Press the ENTER key. The display confirms the entry with “Change OK. Continue”.
Confirm again by pressing the ENTER key. The resetting is complete.
If further counters are available, they can be reset in the same manner.
With the key, a return to the level Measurement is possible, with the MENU key, you
may jump to the MAIN MENU.
:
From PC with Double click on Measurement (Figure 7-2). Select Other and then User Defined.
DIGSI® 4
By double clicking on an entry in the list view in the right side of the window, the limit
values are loaded. Mark the number of the value that is to be changed. With the right
mouse button, open the context menu and click on Set. A password inquiry (password
for individual settings) occurs. Next, the dialogue field Set Value is opened. Enter
the desired value in the entry field, if applicable, the value 0. Then click on OK.
The new value is transferred to the relay.
7.1.4 Fault Records
Waveform or rms data is stored in the device and can be graphically represented on
a personal computer using DIGSI® 4, together with the graphic program SIGRA 4. The
settings associated with fault recording — such as duration and pre- and post-trigger
times — had been are set according to Chapter 6.
7.1.4.1 Viewing Fault Records
:
From PC with To view the fault recording data on a screen, one of the programs SIGRA 4 or Com-
DIGSI® 4 trade Viewer (included with SIMATIC Manager) is needed. Do the following:
Double click on Oscillographic Records (Figure 7-27). The folders listed in the
right window show an overview of oscillographic records. The records are identified
with a network fault number, a fault record number, and the date and time.
By double clicking on an fault record in the list view in the right side of the window, one
of the above programs is opened, and the selected waveform data are loaded. (See
also DIGSI® 4, Operating Handbook, order no. E50417–H1176–C097, Subsection
8.3.3).
7SD52 Manual 7-25

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Figure 7-27 Retrieval of fault records in DIGSI® 4 – example
SIGRA 4 provides support in the analysis of faults on the power system. The program
graphically prepares the data recorded during a fault, and calculates additional meas-
urement quantities, such as impedances or rms values.
The quantities can be represented in these views:
• Time signals
• Phasor diagrams
• Locus diagrams
• Harmonics
Selection takes place using the menu bar (View), or clicking in the symbol bar above
the represented switching fields. Figure 7-28 shows all four views simultaneously.
The recorded data read into the PC memory are first shown in full on the screen. Cur-
rent, and possibly voltage, for each phase and the ground are represented separately.
The fault number, data and time, network, and feeder are also displayed.
Representation of primary or secondary quantities can be selected. The base values
for currents and voltages are the nominal values of the transformers (CTs or VTs). An
identical scale is used for all currents, relative to the largest occurring current value,
and for all voltages, relative to the largest occurring voltage value.
7-26 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Figure 7-28 SIGRA 4 — Diagrams in the four possible views — example
During configuration any signal can be selected in its properties to be displayed in the
fault record. (See chapter 5.2.3.)
Further details about the many possibilities that SIGRA 4 offers can be found in the
SIGRA handbook (Order No. E50417–H1176–C070).
7.1.4.2 Saving the Fault Records
Storage of Fault Oscillographic records that are received from the device are not automatically saved
Recording Data in the PC. The data can, however, be saved in files.
For more details, see the DIGSI® 4 Operating Handbook, Order No. E50417–H1176–
C097, Section 9.4.
The oscillographic records stored in the device do not need to be erased, since the
data are stored in a revolving buffer. The oldest data are automatically overwritten by
the newest data.
7SD52 Manual 7-27

C53000–G1176–C132–2
7.2 Control of Device Functions
You may change individual functions and messages in a 7SD52 while the device is in-
service. Some examples are given above, including erasing stored information (Sub-
section 7.1.1.4) and setting/resetting counters and set-points (Subsections 7.1.2.2
and 7.1.3.4). In this section, three other control capabilities are discussed. They are
correcting the date and time, changing the settings group, and affecting information at
the system interface during test operations.
7.2.1 Read and Set Date and Time
Whether and by which synchronization source the internal clock should be set was al-
ready determined in Section 5.5, “Date and Time Stamping”. Once the device is not
supplied with power, the internal time clock (RTC) continues working by taking its pow-
er from the integrated buffer battery. Right after the running up of the device it displays
a plausible time. The time then is changed automatically by the synchronization
source linked to the device or is altered manually. Before initiating a synchronization
process which is going to stamp a valid time, different types of time indication in the
device display are possible. The following paragraph gives you more details about this
matter.
In a differential protection system with 7SD52 devices the time is usually synchronized
by only one device, the so-called “Timing master”. Generally it is the device with index
1. It synchronizes all partner-devices via the protection communication. The time can
therefore only be changed in this device. However, the state and time can be read out
in all devices of a differential protection system at any time.
Time Status Besides the display of date and time, the status of these readings is also provided. The
text of the status display can have the appearances given in Table 7-6, under regular
conditions of time control.
Table 7-6 Time Status

Status Bits No.
-- -- -- -- 1
synchronized
-- -- -- ST 2
-- -- ER -- 3
-- -- ER ST 4
not synchronized
-- NS ER -- 5
-- NS -- -- 6
7-28 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
The text symbols, or “status bits”, for the time status have the following meanings:
NS Not synchronized Time was neither set manually nor synchronized after
power-up.
ER Time error At the moment, there is no cyclical synchronization
within the tolerance times (time can jump)
ST Daylight savings The latest synchronization signal received supplied a

time daylight savings time bit
Representation of Various representations of the date and time stamp may be given in the DATE/TIME
the Time sub-menu and in all messages stamped with the date and time. The year number
stored in the device and the values of the status bits “Not synchronized” and “Time er-
ror” determine the representations. The possible representations and the associated
causes are listed in Table 7-7.
Table 7-7 Representations of Date and Time:
Item Display (Example) Year Time Error Time Invalid

Date Time
1 00.00.0000 15?07:15 Year = 1990 irrelevant
2 04/19/1999 15?07:15 Yes No
3 04?19/1999 15?07:15 1990<Year<2090 Yes Yes
4 04/09/1998 15:07:15 No No
5 00?00.0000 15?07:15 No Yes
? appearing in the date and time field indicate that the clock synchronisation has been
lost.
• Item 1 appears if the internal clock RTC did not have a valid time upon start-up. The
messages in the memory buffers are dated 01/01/1990.
Corrective action: Set the date and time manually (see margin header “Changing
the Time” below).
• Item 2 appears if the time was actually set, but not synchronized. This can happen:
− briefly upon device power-up,
− if synchronization is lost; that is, if the cyclical synchronization is interrupted for a
time longer than the set tolerance time.
Corrective action: If an external synchronizing source is being used, check the
source and the connection.
• Item 3 is displayed if the RTC had a valid value upon device start-up but the time
was neither manually set nor synchronized since.
Corrective action: Set the date and time manually, or wait until the cyclical synchro-
nization takes effect.
7SD52 Manual 7-29

C53000–G1176–C132–2
• Item 4 displays the normal condition; that is, the time is synchronized cyclically ac-
cording to the type of operation.
• Item 5 is displayed if synchronization via the system interface is marked as “invalid”.
Changing the Time The time can be changed

− by setting the time manually, using the integrated control panel or DIGSI® 4,
− by adjusting the settings for time control.
The date and time can be manually set during operation, provided the device allows
this. A precondition is that the appropriate type of operation for time control must be
selected (see Section 5.7).
When the source of time synchronization is “internal” or “pulse via binary input” the
date and time can be manually set during operation at any instant. The annunciations
“time error ON” and “time error OFF” appear in the annunciation log to indicate time
synchronization and loss of time synchronization, respectively.
In the other operating modes, manual adjustments are only accepted if the synchroni-
zation is momentarily lost. The messages “time error ON” and “time error OFF” are giv-
en when manually changing the year in the IRIG B mode.
Without healthy or external time synchronisation the free running date and time can
also be relatively adjusted (+/– 23:59:59) using the entry field Diff.–time.
This input possibility is not to be confused with the parameter Offset (see Section
5.7), which affects the specific general offset to the received synchronization time of
the radio clock receiver (e.g. local time vs. GMT time).
DeviceFront
Select Settings, and in the sub-menu SETUP/EXTRAS. To set the date and time
manually, choose the selection Date/Time and move to the DATE/TIME display us-
ing the key. See Figure 7-29.
SETUP/EXTRAS 01/06
--------------------
>Date/Time –> 1 DATE/TIME
>Clock Setup –> 2 Status: -- -- --
>06/24/1999 21:07:32
Diff.–time: --------
Figure 7-29 Manual date and time adjustment from the front panel
To change one of the previous settings (date, time, differential time), mark the item us-
ing the and keys, and then press the ENTER key.
The actual setting appears in a frame with a blinking cursor. Overwrite this setting with
the desired new one using the number keys. Be careful to enter the format properly.
Confirm the change with the ENTER key.
To change the time offset or the tolerance time for a clock error signal, select Clock
Setup under SETUP/EXTRAS, as shown in Figure 7-30. Under Offset, the time off-
set can be changed. Under Error Time, the time delay for the alarm can be adjust-
7-30 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
ed. These adjustments are done in the same manner as setting the time, by overwrit-
ing the displayed values and confirming with the ENTER key.
To return to the SETUP/EXTRAS level, press the key, several times if necessary. To
return to the MAIN MENU, press the MENU key.
SETUP/EXTRAS 02/06
--------------------
>Date/Time –> 1
>Clock Setup –> 2 CLOCK SETUP 01/03
--------------------
Offset >0min
Error Time 2min
Source Internal
Figure 7-30 Date and time settings from the front panel
:
From PC with To manually change the date and time of the device:
DIGSI® 4
Click on Device in the menu bar as shown in Figure 7-31. Select the command Set
Clock.
Figure 7-31 Selecting the command Set Clock in DIGSI® 4
A dialog field, Set clock & date in device, is opened. The displayed values
are the present date and time. The day of the week is automatically derived from the
date — and cannot be edited.
• Edit the input fields Date and Time. The format depends on your regional settings
of the PC. See Figure 7-32.
Date: mm/dd/yyyy or dd.mm.yyyy
Time: hh.mm.ss
Click on OK to transfer the entered values into the device. The previous values are
changed and the dialog field is closed.
7SD52 Manual 7-31

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Figure 7-32 Dialog Field: Set clock & date in device
If you realize during operation that the time offset and tolerance time are set too sen-
sitive, these parameters settings can be changed according to the description in Sec-
tion 5.5.
7.2.2 Changeover of Setting Groups
Four different setting groups for the protective functions are available. The active
group can be changed onsite while the 7SD52 is in-service by using the integrated op-
erating field on the device or the operating interface on a PC running DIGSI® 4. Alter-
natively, you may decide that the active setting group be remotely controlled via binary
inputs or the system (SCADA) interface.
Password No. 5 (password for individual settings) is required to change setting
groups.
The first setting group is called group A. The others are groups B, C, and D. If setting
group changing is to be used, then settings for the groups to be employed must have
been entered (see Section 6) and the switching process must be Enabled under Ad-
dress 0103 Grp Chge OPTION.
From the When the device is ready for operation, first press the MENU key. The MAIN MENU ap-
DeviceFront pears.
Using the key, select the menu item Settings and switch to the settings with the
key. The selection SETTINGS appears.
Using the key, select the item Change Group and move to the selection of groups
with the key. The sub-menu CHANGE GROUP appears, as shown in Figure 7-33.
The first Address 0301 is marked. The address displays the setting group presently
in effect (in Figure 7-33, the active group is Group A).
Using the key, select Address 0302 and confirm with the ENTER key.
Enter the password for individual settings, and confirm.
7-32 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Using the key, select one of the four groups A, B, C, or D, or give control to another
source.
If Binary Input (activation using binary inputs) is selected, setting group switching
is controlled by binary inputs, provided appropriate configuration has been done and
the necessary physical connections are present (see Section 5.2).
If via Protocol is chosen, setting group changes can be controlled via the system
serial interface.
CHANGE GROUP 01/02 The currently-active setting group is displayed un-

--------------------
0301 ACTIVE GROUP der Address 0301.
Group A
The setting group can be changed under Address

0302 CHANGE to 0302: by pressing the ENTER key, after entering the
>Group A
password, two possible alternatives are displayed
in a new window each time:
>Group A
Group B Using the keys, select one of the alterna-
Group C tives and confirm with the ENTER key;
Group D
via Binary Input
via Protocol
The next question (“Are you sure?”) is an-
swered with Yes and the selected alternative is
Are you sure? confirmed, or is answered with No using the
ENTER Yes No key and the change is cancelled with the ENTER key.
Figure 7-33 Switching setting groups from the front panel — example
Control of the setting groups can always be regained by switching to one of the groups
A through D.
The key can be used to return to the SETTINGS sub-menu; the MENU key can be
pressed to returns to the MAIN MENU.
:
From PC with By opening the Online directory with a double click in DIGSI® 4, the operating func-
DIGSI® 4 tions for the device appear in the left part of the window. See Figure 7-34.
7SD52 Manual 7-33

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Figure 7-34 Function selection window in DIGSI® 4 — example
Double click on Settings to find Change Group in the data window (Figure 7-34
right).
Double click on Change Group. The Change Group window is opened, as shown
in Figure 7-35.
Figure 7-35 Setting group switching in DIGSI® 4 — example
7-34 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
The active setting group is displayed. To switch to another setting group, click on the
field Value and select the desired option from the drop-down list. Before closing the
window, transfer the change to the device. This is done by clicking on the button
Digsi → Device. A request for Password No. 7 (password for setting groups) is
given. Enter the correct password, and then click on OK.
7.2.3 Test Messages to the System (SCADA) Interface during Test Operation
Depending on the type of protocol, all messages and measured values transferred via
the system (SCADA) interface can be identified with an added message “test opera-
tion”- bit while the devive is being tested onsite (test mode). This identification pre-
vents the messages from being incorrectly interpreted as resulting from an actual pow-
er system event. As another option, all messages and measured values normally
transferred via the SCADA interface can be blocked during the testing (“Block data
transmission”).
A password for test and diagnostics is required (password no. 4) to block the messag-
es and measured values.
Data transmission block can be accomplished by controlling binary inputs, by using
the operating panel on the device, or via DIGSI® 4.
If binary inputs are used, then the appropriate inputs must have been configured.
DeviceFront
Using the key, highlight the menu item Test/Diagnose, and then press the
key to enter sub-menu. TEST/DIAGNOSE will appear at the top of the menu.
At this point, highlight the menu item Test Enable using the key, and then press
the key to enter sub-menu. TEST ENABLE will appear at the top of the menu. See
Figure 7-36.
TEST DIAGNOSE 02/06

--------------------
Device Reset –> 1
>Test Enable –> 2 TEST ENABLE
Blk Data Trans–> 3 --------------------
Hardware Test –> 4 >Test mode OFF
Set/Reset –> 11
SIEMENS Intern 12
Figure 7-36 Applying test mode from the front panel — example
To switch to test mode, press the ENTER key, enter the password for test and diagnos-
tics, and confirm with the ENTER key. A new window appears with the options ON and
OFF. Use the and keys to select the desired mode, and press the ENTER key. The
question “Are you sure?” is displayed. Highlight the desired response and press
the ENTER key. If the mode is changed, the device responds with the message “Con-
trol Executed”.
7SD52 Manual 7-35

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Use the key to return to the TEST/DIAGNOSE level; press the MENU key to return to
the MAIN MENU.
The procedure for changing the Block Data Transmission mode is the same. See Fig-
ure 7-37 (simplified).
TEST/DIAGNOSE 03/06
--------------------
>Blk Data Trans–> 3 BLK DATA TRANS
Hardware Test –> 4 --------------------
>DataStop OFF
Figure 7-37 Applying data transmission block from the front panel (simplified) — example
The settings for the test mode and the data transmission block are normally OFF. Def-
initions:
− Test mode – With the ON setting, the “test mode“-bit is transferred for messages
compatible with IEC 60870–5–103.
− DataStop – With the ON setting, no messages or measured values are trans-
ferred (“data tranmission block”).
:
From PC with Click on Device in the menu bar to reach the commands Block Data Transmis-
DIGSI® 4 sion or Test Mode. See Figure 7-38.
Figure 7-38 Applying “Test Mode” or “Block Data Transmission” in DIGSI® 4 — example
Click on Block Data Transmission to activate or deactivate the transfer block.

After entry of Password No. 4 for test and diagnostics, and confirmation with OK, the
setting change is complete.
Activation is indicated with a check mark in front of the command.
7-36 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Follow the same procedure for the command Test Mode, if this option is desired.
Note:
Remember to change the settings for Test Mode or Block Data Transmission back
to the desired, in-service settings (both typically OFF) when the tests are complete.
7.2.4 Changeover of Operating Mode
During testing and station revision it is possible to change the operating mode of a de-
vices in order to perform such work with minimum effect on running operation.
The following modes are available:
• Log out device: logging out a device from the differential protection system with the
circuit breaker being switched off. For more than two ends the differential protection
continues to be active at the other ends; thus, the other ends may remain switched
on. As the local circuit breaker is open (as well as the outgoing disconnector) revi-
sion work can be done at the local feeder without affecting operation at the other
ends.
This mode can also be set via a binary input (FNo 3451 “>Logout”) if this has been
configured when allocating the binary inputs (see also Section 5.2).
• Test mode: All currents from the other devices are set to zero in the local device.
Thus the local device has been isolated from the differential protection system and
can be checked. If the device has been logged out before (see above), all the other
devices can operate normally. Otherwise, the differential protection system is
blocked in all linked devices. Emergency operation with time overcurrent protection
is feasible.
• Commissioning mode: All tripping commands of the differential protection system
are blocked. The differential system as an entity can be checked using primary or
secondary values.
The first two modes are in particular relevant for operation. For mode changeover,
password No. 2 is required (for switching/tagging/manual overwriting). Every mode
that has been changed is stored in the device safe from an auxiliary voltage failure.
From the With a device ready for operation first press the MENU key. The MAIN MENU appears.
DeviceFront
Select the item Control with and move to the selection of control options using
. The selection CONTROL appears.
With select the item Taggings and move to the selection of TAGGINGS (see Fig-
ure 7-39) using .
Then select the item Set with and move to the next display SET with (see Figure
7-39).
7SD52 Manual 7-37

C53000–G1176–C132–2
TAGGING 02/02
--------------------
Display –> 01
>Set –> 02 SET 01/03
--------------------
>Log out OFF
Test mode OFF
Figure 7-39 Set taggings at the front cover — example
Using the and keys you can select the mode to be set.
With you indicate your intention to change the corresponding mode. The password
for interlocked switching (No. 2) will then be requested.
Having entered and confirmed the password with ENTER , you can change over to: ON for
mode setting, OFF for deleting this mode. Every mode can be determined separately.
Press the ENTER key. Answer the question “Are you sure?” with Yes, confirm with
ENTER .
If the feeder is still current-carrying, or if the circuit breaker is signalled to be closed by

the auxiliary contacts, the device will refuse tag setting for this mode and will show a
corresponding message on the display.
When the mode has been confirmed, testing and revision works can be done as de-
scribed above. As the mode set has been saved as tag message, the auxiliary voltage
may also be switched off.
With the key you return to the MEASUREMENT level, with MENU you can return to the
MAIN MENU.
In order to change to normal operation proceed in the same way and set the corre-
sponding modes to OFF.
:
From PC with When you double-click to open the Online directory in DIGSI® 4 you will see the op-
DIGSI® 4 erating functions in the left part of the display window (Figure 7-40).
Figure 7-40 Function selection window in DIGSI® 4 — example
7-38 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
In the Control subdirectory you can click on the Taggings under Function Selec-
tion in the right window.
Double-click Taggings. A dialogue box “Tagging” is opened. (Figure 7-41).
Figure 7-41 Tagging dialogue box
In the “Name” column the different modes have been listed, “Status” refers to the cur-
rent state with “OFF” meaning that the mode is not effective, “ON” meaning that it is
effective.
By clicking one of buttons under “Scheduled” you can change the desired mode. In
a security query you will be requested to confirm this.
Then you will be requested to enter the password for switching/tagging/substituting. If
you want to make multiple changes, you only have to enter the password before im-
plementing the first action.
Having entered the password, confirm with the “OK” button.
If the feeder is still current-carrying, or if the circuit breaker has been signalled closed
by the auxiliary contacts, the device refuses tag setting for this mode and displays a
corresponding message on the monitor.
When the mode has been confirmed, testing and revision works can be done as de-
scribed above. As the mode set has been saved as tag indication, the auxiliary voltage
may also be switched off.
7SD52 Manual 7-39

C53000–G1176–C132–2
7.3 Circuit Breaker Test Function
The circuit breaker and the trip circuits can be tested during normal operation by exe-
cution of a TRIP and CLOSE command via the device.
A prerequisite for this test is that the required test commands were allocated to the cor-
responding command relays during the configuration of the device. It is also possible
to test the individual circuit breaker poles, provided that the device is capable of single-
pole tripping, the circuit breaker is capable of single-pole tripping and that the wiring
and routing has been done accordingly.
A maximum of 4 test programs is available (refer to Table 7-8). For the circuit breaker
CB1 it may be possible to initiate single- and three-pole TRIP/CLOSE cycles. In the
event of three-pole tripping, only item 4 is important.
Table 7-8 Circuit breaker test programs
Item Test Program Operational Messages

1 1-pole TRIP/CLOSE–cycle phase L1 CB1–TEST TRIP command – Only L1
4 3-pole TRIP/CLOSE–cycle CB1–TEST TRIP command L123
associated close command CB1–TEST CLOSE command
In the event that circuit breaker auxiliary contacts are used to derive the switching
state of the circuit breaker via binary inputs to the device, the test cycle can only be
initiated when the circuit breaker is in the closed position.
A further prerequisite for the initiation of the test is that no protection function in the
device has picked up, and that the circuit breaker is ready.
The device indicates the status of the test sequence with corresponding messages in
the display or on the monitor of a PC. If the device refuses to run or terminates the test
sequence, it is likely that one of the preconditions for the execution of the test cycle
has not been satisfied. The reason for the refusal or termination is also shown in the
front display or monitor of the PC.
CB-TEST running Circuit breaker test in progress

CB-TSTstop FLT. Circuit breaker test cannot be started as a system fault is present
CB-TSTstop OPEN Circuit breaker test cannot be started as the circuit breaker is not
closed
CB-TSTstop NOTr Circuit breaker test cannot be started as the circuit breaker is not
ready
CB-TSTstop CLOS Circuit breaker test has been terminated as the CB is still closed (pri-
or to CB test reclosure)
CB-TST .OK. Circuit breaker test cycle has been completed successfully
7-40 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
The following diagram shows the test sequence in principal:
TRIP
CLOSE
T TRIP CMD.MIN. T PAUSE TEST T CLS. CMD MAX. t

Figure 7-42 TRIP-CLOSE test cycle
The initiation of the test is done via the keypad and display on the front of the device
or with a PC running DIGSI® 4. Entry of the password (password No. 4 for test and
diagnostics) is required.
DANGER!
A successful initiation of a test cycle may cause closure of the circuit breaker if
an external reclose device is available!
DeviceFront
Select the Test/Diagnose option using the key and enter the sub-menu TEST/
DIAGNOSE with the key.
With the key, the CB test (21) is now marked and the test program is selected
with the key.
A prompt for entry of password No. 4 (test and diagnostics) appears. After entry of the
password and confirmation with ENTER , the query “Breaker closed?” appears, with
the default response “Yes” (Figure 7-43). This must be confirmed by pressing the ENTER
key if the circuit breaker is definitely closed.
If circuit breaker auxiliary contacts are connected and marshalled, the device rejects
the test cycle when the auxiliary contacts indicate that the circuit breaker is not closed,
even if the operator confirms the opposite. Only if no auxiliary contacts are marshalled,
will the device rely on the confirmation by the operator.
If the test cycle should be cancelled, press the key in response to the above query,
so that the answer “No” is marked. This must be confirmed with the ENTER key. Prior to
the confirmation with the ENTER it is possible to toggle between “Yes” and “No” with the
and keys. Alternatively, the test sequence may also be cancelled by pressing
the ESC key.
7SD52 Manual 7-41

C53000–G1176–C132–2
MAIN MENU 05/05

---------------------
>Settings 4
>Test/Diagnose 5 TEST/DIAGNOSE 07/07
---------------------
>SIEMENS intern 12
>CB test 21
CB Test 01/08 Select the desired test program or press the

---------------------
>CB1tst L1 1 relevant numeric key to select the desired test
>CB1tst L2 2 sequence.
u.s.w.
S
PW Test+Diagnose? Enter password Nr. 4 (for test and diagnostics)
ENTER
=------- and confirm with ENTER .
Press the ENTER to confirm with “Yes” and

Breaker closed? thereby execute the selected breaker test cy-
>Yes No cle, or change to ”No” with the key to termi-
nate the test when ENTER is pressed.
After confirmation that the CB is closed, the CB

CB Test 01/08
--------------------- test cycle is executed, subsequently a feed-
>CB1tst L1 1 back message stating successful completion
Control Executed of the test , or a relevant alarm appears.
Figure 7-43 Circuit breaker trip test cycle from the front of the device
:
From PC with If the Online directory in DIGSI® 4 is opened with a double click, the operation func-
DIGSI® 4 tions of the device appear in the left hand side of the window.
By clicking on the Test function, a list of the available functions appears on the
right hand side of the display (Figure 7-44).
By a double click on the Circuit breaker test, a dialogue window is opened in
which the desired test sequence can be marked for selection.
Following a double click, a prompt for the entry of password No. 4 (for test and diag-
nosis) appears.
After entry of the password and confirmation with Ok the test sequence is executed.
In the spontaneous event window, the execution of the test is displayed with the cor-
responding control responses and messages.
7-42 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Figure 7-44 Circuit breaker trip test in DIGSI® 4
7SD52 Manual 7-43

C53000–G1176–C132–2
7.4 Control of Switchgear
A SIPROTEC® 4 device 7SD52 contains control functions that allow for opening and
closing of power system switching devices (i.e. circuit breakers). Local control is pos-
sible utilizing different elements of the 7SD52. Breaker control from a remote location
is also possible using the SCADA interface or DIGSI® 4. (Performing control functions
with a PC running DIGSI® 4, connected to the front serial port, is considered a “re-
mote” operation for breaker control purposes.) Some control actions from a 7SD52 in-
clude unsynchronized commands for circuit breakers, disconnectors, ground switch-
es, etc., and stepping commands for increasing or decreasing transformer LTC steps.
Safety mechanisms in the command path ensure a command can only take place if
the check of previously defined safety criteria is concluded positively.
Note:
It is an important precondition for the switchgear control that the corresponding binary
inputs and outputs were allocated during the configuration (according to Section 5.2).
Furthermore the lockout conditions must have been made available for the device by
means of user-definable logic functions (according to Section 5.3).
If a power system switching device has auxiliary contacts that indicate the position of
the device and these contacts are connected to the 7SD52 and configured as double-
point indications then the switching device provides feedback indication that are mon-
itored for plausibility of control actions. If a switching device does not indicate either
the closed or open position, the display for the switching device indicates an invalid
position in the 7SD52. All subsequent control operations to the equipment are inter-
locked.
Control from a 7SD52 to a power system equipment can originate from four sources:
− Local operation using the operator control panel,
− Binary inputs,
− Remote operation using the SCADA interface,
− Operation with a PC, via the operating interface and DIGSI® 4.
Switching priority for the four command sources is set using the Switching Authority.
For Interlocked Switching, all programmed interlocking conditions are checked before
a control operation is performed. If one of the conditions is not met, then the command
is rejected and an error message is recorded and displayed. The following tests can
be activated (on) or deactivated (off) for a switching device:
• Switching authority (Local/Remote),
• Zone controlled (Field interlocking e.g., logic in CFC),
• Substation controller, to be implemented with Version 4.2,
• Double operation (blocking of multiple control operations),
• Blocking by protection (control operations blocked by protective functions),
• Device position (check SCHEDULED = ACTUAL comparison).
7-44 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
7.4.1 Display Equipment Position and Control
DeviceFront
Using the key, select the menu item Control, and go to editing the control func-
tions with the key. The selection CONTROL appears (See Figure 7-45).
MAIN MENU 03/05

--------------------
Messurement –> 2
--------------------
>Breaker/Switch –> 1
Tagging –> 2
Figure 7-45 Control selections from the front panel
Select, by means of the key, the item Breaker/Switch, and continue with the
item by pressing the key. The selection BREAKER/SWITCH appears. See Figure
7-46.
Select Display (default) and press the key. The selection DISPLAY appears, in
which the positions of all planned switching devices can be read out.
--------------------
>Display –> 1 DISPLAY 01/03
>Control –> 2 --------------------
>52Breaker OPEN
>Disc.Swit. CLOS
Figure 7-46 Display of switch positions in the HMI — example
The key can be used to return to BREAKER/SWITCH.

To control a switching device, select the option Control in the BREAKER/SWITCH
sub-menu and press the key to go to the table of operating resources that can be
controlled. See Figure 7-47. All planned switching devices appear. The actual position
of each switch is displayed first. Use the and keys to move to the desired
switch.
---------------------
>Display –> 1
--------------------
52Breaker >CLOS
Disc.Swit. CLOS
GndSwit. OFF
Figure 7-47 Control of switching devices from the operator control panel — example
7SD52 Manual 7-45

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Select the switch to be controlled using the and keys and press the ENTER key.
Enter Password No. 1 (for interlocked switching) and acknowledge with the ENTER key.
Note: if the switching mode is NON–INTERLOCKED (Test) (Sub-section 7.4.7), all
switching operations are only possible with Password No. 2 (for non-interlocked
switching).
A new window appears. Depending on the operating and command type of the select-
ed switching device, various options are offered. Move between them using the and
keys.
CONTR 1/03
---- >OPEN ----
PS > CLOSE ON
Tre Escape ON
Figure 7-48 Selection window for control operations on the front panel — example
To perform control, confirm with the ENTER key. A safety inquiry appears, “Are you
sure?”. If the response is “YES”, the switching operation is initiated (provided the Lo-
cal command is allowed). A message is displayed and recorded indicating the results
of the control action. Acknowledge this by pressing the ENTER key once again.
The command is not executed if the switching operation is restricted. The operation
may be restricted for reasons pertaining to, for example, switching authority (see Sub-
section 7.4.6) or interlocking (see Sub-section 7.4.7). A message is displayed and re-
corded indicating the results of the control action. Acknowledge the message by
pressing the ENTER key. Parameters to set control properties can be examined in the
display. Refer to Sub-section 7.4.4.
The key can be used to return to BREAKER/SWITCH. Press the MENU key to return
to the MAIN MENU.
:
From PC with When the Online window in DIGSI® 4 is opened with a double click, the operating
DIGSI® 4 functions for the device appear in the left part of the window (Figure 7-34). Clicking on
Control displays the associated function selection in the data window. See Figure 7-
49.
Figure 7-49 Window for control of operating resources in DIGSI® 4 — example
7-46 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
By double clicking on Breaker/Switches, a dialog field is opened in which the

present status of each switch is visible. See Figure 7-50. Control can be performed
from this dialog box provided the switching authority is set to REMOTE.
The switching authority is first transferred to DIGSI® 4 at the moment the control win-
dow shown in Figure 7-50 is opened. The configuration matrix discussed in Section
5.2 determines the control devices that have information displayed in this field.
Figure 7-50 Dialog box for performing control in DIGSI® 4 — example
A description of the switching device is displayed in the left column of the dialog field.
This represents the contents of the Long Text column within the configuration ma-
trix.
The actual position of the switch is displayed in the Status column (OPEN, CLOSE,
Intermediat). The switching possibilities are displayed in the Scheduled column.
Four control fields are shown in the right part of the dialog field. If a check mark is dis-
played in one of these fields, AB (Access Block = Block Input Acquisition), TB (Trans-
mission Block = Serial Interface Blocked), TR (Manual Overwriting), and CB (Chatter
Block), the associated block function is set or the feedback indications of the device
have been simulated.
Normally, operating devices are switched in the interlocked (Normal) mode.
The configured interlocking conditions are checked before a control command is car-
ried out. As soon as a control command is entered in the Scheduled column, Pass-
word No. 1 for interlocked switching is requested for safety reasons. Further control
possibilities remain possible until the control dialog field is closed, or the switching
mode is changed.
If a control command is successfully executed, then the display of the actual condition
of the affected switch is updated in the window.
Operating resources can be switched without interlocking condition checks; however,
the correct Password No. 2 for non-interlocked switching must be entered. Mark the
option Unlock by clicking on the field.
7SD52 Manual 7-47

C53000–G1176–C132–2
DANGER!
Only highly qualified personnel who have an exact knowledge of the power sys-
tem conditions shall perform non-interlocked switching. Inappropriate switch-
ing operations can lead to death, serious personnel injury and property dam-
age.
7.4.2 Manual Overwriting
When using the Control with Feedback feature, the device checks the feedback in-
dications before and after a control command is issued. If for some reason, the phys-
ical connection from a circuit breaker auxiliary contact to the binary inputs of the device
is broken, inadvertently shorted, or disconnected, commands may be blocked. If this
situation occurs, and the affected switching device is to be operated, the desired de-
vice position indication can be simulated through “manual overwriting” (Input Tag-
ging). The entered device position indication in the 7SD52 can be used to simulate and
check interlocking conditions.
To accomplish manual overwriting in the 7SD52 the binary inputs of the affected de-
vice must be decoupled first. AB (Access Block = Block Input Acquisition) This decou-
pling of the system is accomplished by setting the respective status. The decoupling
is discussed in Sub-section 7.4.3.
From the To enter the desired position indication for a switching device:
DeviceFront
With a 7SD52 ready for operation, first press the MENU key. The MAIN MENU appears.
Using the key, select the menu item Control and go to the control functions with
the key. The selection CONTROL appears.
By pressing the key, the BREAKER/SWITCH sub-menu is entered (see Figure 7-
51).
Select the item Man. Overwrite using the key, and move to the next selection
using the key. MAN. OVERWRITE appears, as shown in Figure 7-51.
The actual position of each switching device is displayed. Move to the desired switch
using the and keys.
---------------------
Display —> 1
Control –> 2
>Man. Overwrite –> 3 MAN. OVERWRITE 01/03
Set status —> 4 --------------------
52Breaker >OPEN
Disc.Swit. CLOS
GndSwit. OPEN
Figure 7-51 Manual overwriting for switching devices from the front panel — example
7-48 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
By pressing the ENTER key, a selection window is opened for the marked switch, in
which manual overwriting can be done with the options OPEN/CLOSE. See Figure 7-
52.
Make the selection using the and keys, and confirm with the ENTER key.
Enter Password No. 2 (for non-interlocked switching) and acknowledge with the ENTER
key.
MAN. O 01/03
------ >OPEN -------
>52Bre CLOS >OPEN
>Disc. CLOS
Figure 7-52 Selection window for manual overwriting of a switch position, front panel —
example
A safety inquiry appears: “Are you sure?” Provided manual overwriting is allowed,
a response of “YES” results in an appropriate message on the display. Acknowledge
the message by pressing the ENTER key again.
Manual overwriting is cancelled if the process is restricted because, for example, “in-
put ignored” is not set (see Subsection 7.4.3). Manual overwriting is also canceled
if the user aborts the procedure. The display provides an appropriate message if man-
ual overwriting is canceled. Acknowledge the message by pressing the ENTER key.
Return to the BREAKER/SWITCH sub-menu using the key, or the MAIN MENU by
pressing the MENU key.
:
From PC with For safety reasons, manual overwriting is only possible locally using the keypad on the
DIGSI® 4 front panel of the device. The feature is not available in DIGSI® 4.
7.4.3 Set Status
A feature of the 7SD52 that is especially useful during testing and commissioning of
the device is the capability of temporarily removing the coupling between a switching
device and the 7SD52, or between the SCADA and the 7SD52, without physically dis-
connecting the equipment. This type of separation is also necessary, for instance, if a
switch position feedback message is not functioning properly (refer to Sub-section
7.4.2). The menu item SET STATUS is used to perform the decoupling.
The menu displays a list of all planned switching devices and associated status infor-
mation identified by a letter. The letters have the following meanings:
• T Device is tagged (manually overwritten).
• I Input ignored, which means the acquisition of an input status is de-coupled from
the process (from the switch-gear).
7SD52 Manual 7-49

C53000–G1176–C132–2
• B Blocked, which means data transmissions to the central device (or SCADASCA-
DA) are blocked.
• C Chatter block active, which means, because of frequent message changes, the
chatter block was set.
• O Output block active, which means the command output is de-coupled from the
process (from the system).
• – None of the listed limitations is in effect.
Note:
Input ignored only works for physical inputs! Do not set the block for indications cre-
ated by CFC.
DeviceFront
Using the key, select the menu item Control and go to editing the control func-
tions with the key. The selection CONTROL appears.
Enter the BREAKER/SWITCH menu by pressing the key.
Select the item Set Status with the key and switch to the next option using the
key. SET STATUS appears, as shown in Figure 7-53.
---------------------
Display —> 1
Control –> 2
>Man. Overwrite –> 3
>Set status —> 4 SET STATUS 02/03
--------------------
52Breaker T I - - O
Disc.Swit.->- - - -
GndSwit. - - - - -
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Column
Figure 7-53 Set status at the front panel — example
Move the cursor, using the and keys, to each of the second (Input Ignore) and
fifth (Control Block) columns of the switching device for which a status change is de-
sired. Entries in this table can only be made in these two columns.
Press the ENTER key. A selection window is opened that displays the meaning of the
field and the change options that are available.
The second column is reserved for setting Input Ignore (I); the fifth for setting the out-
put block (O). The first, third, and fourth columns can only be read in this menu.
The example in Figure 7-53 shows the position for the circuit breaker (52) was tagged
(T) after the input ignore (I) was set, which means the message input was de-coupled
from the system. The output block is active (O), so the command output is also de-
coupled from the system. For the disconnect switch and the ground switch, no limita-
tions are set.
7-50 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Select the desired changes using the and keys, and confirm with the ENTER key.
Enter Password No. 2 (for non-interlocked switching) and acknowledge with the ENTER
key.
A safety inquiry appears: “Are you sure?” If the response is “YES”, and provided
the return routing is allowed, then the display gives an appropriate message.
To return to the BREAKER/SWITCH level, press the key as necessary. Press the
MENU key to return to the MAIN MENU.
:
From PC with For safety reasons, Status changes are only possible locally using the keypad on the
DIGSI® 4 front panel of the device. Status changes are not possible in DIGSI® 4.
7.4.4 Interlocking
Operating equipment such as circuit breakers, disconnectors and ground switches

can be subject to interlocking conditions. These conditions can be viewed at the de-
vice under the menu item INTERLOCK; however, the conditions cannot be changed.
The Interlock display has an object table similar to the one described for Set Status.
The table provides the set interlocking conditions, which prevent, or could prevent, a
local control operation. Letters identify the interlocking conditions. The meanings of
the letters are:
• L Local/Remote (Switching Authority),
• S Equipment is subject to System Interlocking (in Substation Controller). Com-
mands entered locally are sent to the central computer or controller,
• Z Zone controlled (Field- or Bay-Interlocking),
• P Check switch position (test actual vs. scheduled),
• B Blocking by picked-up protection elements,
• – Non-Interlocked.
:
From PC with With a device ready for operation, first press the MENU key. The MAIN MENU appears.
DIGSI® 4
Using the key, select the menu item Control and move to editing the control func-
Select the item Interlock with the key and switch to the next selection using the
key. The selection INTERLOCK appears. See Figure 7-54.
7SD52 Manual 7-51

C53000–G1176–C132–2
CONTROL 03/03
--------------------
>Tagging –> 2 >
>Interlock –> 3 INTERLOCK 01/03
--------------------
>52Breaker L – Z P B
>DiscSwit. L – Z P B
GndSwit. L – Z P B
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Column
Figure 7-54 Example of interlocking conditions for switching equipment, front panel
:
From PC with Interlocking is set for each switching device during project planning (see Sub-section
DIGSI® 4 5.2.4) using the matrix and the dialog box “Object Properties”. Readout of the actively
set interlocking is always possible, across the entire path, without a password.
If the Online window in DIGSI® 4 is opened with a double click, the operating func-
tions for the device appear in the left part of the window (Figure 7-34). Double clicking
on Settings brings up the function selection in the right side of the window. By dou-
ble clicking on Masking I/O, the matrix is opened. Mark the switching device (in the
line for the operating message of the switching device). Using the right mouse key, the
properties of the switching device can now be called up. The conditions for Inter-
lock Switching, among other items, are recognizable in the dialog box that opens.
Active test conditions are identified with a check mark.
7.4.5 Tagging
To identify unusual operating conditions in the power system, tagging can be done.
The tagging can, for example, be entered as additional operating conditions in inter-
locking checks, which are set up with CFC. Tagging is configured in the same way as
for operating devices.
:
From PC with With a device ready for operation, first press the MENU key. The MAIN MENU appears.
DIGSI® 4
Select the item Tagging with the key and switch to the next selection using the
key. The selection TAGGING appears. See Figure 7-55.
• The status of the tagging is displayed Tagging → Display,
• or changed using
• Tagging → Set.
7-52 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
MAIN MENU 03/05

--------------------
Annunciation –> 1
Measurement –> 2
Control –> 3 CONTROL 02/03
---------------------
Breaker/Switch –> 1
Tagging –> 2 TAGGING 01/02
Interlock –> 3 ---------------------
Display –> 1
Set –> 2
Figure 7-55 Tagging equipment from the HMI — example
:
From PC with For safety reasons, tag only locally using the keypad on the front panel of the device.
DIGSI® 4 Do no tag with DIGSI 4.
7.4.6 Switching Authority
Switching authority determines the command sources that are permitted for control.
DeviceFront
Here, select the menu item Control Auth. with the key and switch to the next
selection using the key. The selection CONTROL AUTH. appears (see Figure 7-56).
Pressing the ENTER key opens a selection window in which the options LOCAL/REMOTE
are offered.
CONTROL 04/05
--------------------
>Interlock –> 3
>Control Auth. –> 4 CONTROL AUTH.
--------------------
Switch Auth.> Local
PW Unlock Control? Enter password No. 2 (for non-interlocked

ENTER
=------- switching) and acknowledge with ENTER
CONTRO
------ >Remote -----
Switc Local Local ENTER
Figure 7-56 Setting switching authority with the operator control panel — example
7SD52 Manual 7-53

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Choose the desired option using the and keys, and confirm with the ENTER key.
Acknowledge the subsequent message pressing the ENTER key.
Use the key to return to the SWITCH AUTH level; the MENU key to return to the MAIN
MENU.
:
From PC with For safety reasons, switching authority can only be changed locally using the keypad
DIGSI® 4 on the front panel of the device. Switching authority cannot be changed with DIGSI® 4.
To perform control with DIGSI® 4, switching authority at the device must be set to RE-
MOTE, or the test conditions for remote control of switching authority must not be set
to active. Switching authority is first transferred to DIGSI® 4 when the control window
(see Figure 7-50) is opened.
7.4.7 Switching Mode
The switching mode can be changed during operation; so, for example, non-inter-
locked switching can be enabled during the commissioning of the installed equipment.
DANGER!
Only highly qualified personnel who have an exact knowledge of the power sys-
tem conditions shall perform non-interlocked switching. Inappropriate switch-
ing operations can lead to death, serious personnel injury and property dam-
age.
DeviceFront
Here, select the menu item Switch Mode with the key and switch to the next se-
lection using the key. The selection SWITCH MODE appears (see Figure 7-57).
CONTROL 05/05 SWI

-------------------- --->INTERLOCKED -
>Switch Auth –> 4 IN NON–INTERLOCKED
>Switch Mode –> 5 NO
Figure 7-57 Operating menu for switching mode using front panel
Pressing the ENTER key opens a selection window in which the options INTERLOCKED/
NON-INTERLOCKED are offered.
Make the choice using the and keys, and confirm with the ENTER key.
Acknowledge the safety inquiry that follows by again pressing the ENTER key. Use the
key to return to the CONTROL level. Press the MENU key to return to the MAIN MENU.
7-54 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
:
From PC with When the On-line window in DIGSI® 4 is opened with a double click, the operating
DIGSI® 4 functions for the device appear in the left part of the window (Figure 7-34). Clicking on
Controls brings up the function selection in the right side of the window (Figure 7-
49). By double clicking on Breaker/Switches, a dialog field is opened in which,
among other options, the option for interlocked and non-interlocked (Unlock) switching
is offered.
To switch operating resources without a check of the associated interlocking condi-
tions, mark the option Unlock by clicking in that field, see section 7.3.1.
To set the switching mode for interlocked switching, the aforementioned option field
must not be marked. The marking is removed by clicking in the field again.
Further switching operations are possible until the dialogue field Breaker/Switch-
es is closed, or the switching mode is changed.
7.4.8 Control Messages
In the course of system control, the device generates several messages that docu-
ment the process. For example, messages may be given to report the end of a com-
mand or provide the reason for a command denial.
7.4.9 Other Commands
If the device is equipped with a serial interface for connection to the System (SCADA)
interface. it can receive standardized commands (according to the supported protocol)
and transmit them to the respective switching devices, or activate internal functions,
e.g. block inputs/outputs or set tags (manual overwrite), or release processing of func-
tions in the CFC. This command processing is determined during project planning and
configuration of the matrix.
7SD52 Manual 7-55

C53000–G1176–C132–2
7-56 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Installation and Commissioning 8
This chapter is primarily for personnel who are experienced in installing, testing, and
commissioning protective and control systems, and are familiar with applicable safety
rules, safety regulations, and the operation of the power system.
Installation of the 7SD52 is described in this chapter. Hardware modifications that
might be needed in certain cases are explained. Connection verifications required be-
fore the device is put in service are also given. Commissioning tests are provided.
Some of the tests require the protected object (line, transformer, etc.) to carry load.
8.1 Mounting and Connections 8-2

8.2 Checking the Connections 8-24
8.3 Commissioning 8-29
8.4 Final Preparation of the Device 8-55
7SD52 Manual 8-1

C53000–G1176–C132–2
8 Installation and Commissioning
8.1 Mounting and Connections
Warning!
The successful and safe operation of the device is dependent on proper handling, in-
stallation, and application by qualified personnel under observance of all warnings and
hints contained in this manual.
In particular the general erection and safety regulations (e.g. IEC, ANSI, DIN, VDE,
EN or other national and international standards) regarding the correct use of hoisting
gear must be observed. Non-observance can result in death, personal injury, or sub-
stantial property damage.
Preconditions Verification of the ratings of the 7SD52 according to Subsection 3.2.1 as well as
matching to ratings of the power equipment must have been completed.
8.1.1 Installation
Panel Flush Depending on the version of the device, the housing size may be 1/2 or 1/1 of a 19 inch
Mounting rack. For the size 1/2 (Figure 8-1) there are 4 covers and four holes for securing the
device, with size 1/1 (Figure 8-2) there are six covers and six securing holes.
G Remove the 4 covering caps located on the corners of the front cover, for size
1/ the 2 additional covering caps located centrally at the top and bottom, reveal the
1
4 or 6 slots in the mounting flange.
G Insert the device into the panel cut-out and fasten with 4 or 6 screws. Refer to Figure
10-5 or 10-6 in Section 10.13 for dimensions.
G Replace the four or six cover caps.
G Connect the ground on the rear plate of the device to the protective ground of the
panel. Use at least one M4 screw for the device ground. The cross-sectional area
of the ground wire must be greater than or equal to the cross-sectional area of any
other control conductor connected to the device. Furthermore, the cross-section of
the ground wire must be at least 2.5 mm2.
G Connect the plug terminals and/or the screwed terminals on the rear side of the de-
vice according to the wiring diagram for the panel.
When using forked lugs or directly connecting wires to screwed terminals, the
screws must be tightened so that the heads are even with the terminal block before
the lugs or wires are inserted.
A ring lug must be centred in the connection chamber so that the screw thread fits
in the hole of the lug.
Section 2.1 has pertinent information regarding wire size, lugs, bending radii, etc.
8-2 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Elongated
holes SIEMENS SIPROTEC
RUN ERROR 7SD52
MAIN MENU 01/04
Annunciation 1
Measurement 2
MENU
LED ESC ENTER
F1 7 8 9
F2 4 5 6
F3 1 2 3
F4 0 +/-
Figure 8-1 Panel flush mounting of a 7SD52 (housing size 1/2)
Elongated SIEMENS SIPROTEC

RUN ERROR 7SD52
holes
MAIN MENU 01/04
Annunciation 1
Measurement 2
MENU
LED ESC ENTER
F1 7 8 9
F2 4 5 6
F3 1 2 3
F4 0 +/-
Figure 8-2 Panel flush mounting of a 7SD52 (housing size 1/1)
7SD52 Manual 8-3

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Rack Mounting and Depending on the version of the device, the housing size may be 1/2 or 1/1 of a 19 inch
Cubicle Mounting rack. For the size 1/2 (Figure 8-3) there are 4 covers and four holes for securing the
device, with size 1/1 (Figure 8-4) there are six covers and six securing holes.
To install the device in a frame or cubicle, two mounting brackets are required. The
ordering codes are stated in the appendix in Section A.1.1.
G Loosely screw the two mounting brackets in the rack with four screws.
G Remove the 4 covering caps located on the corners of the front cover, for size
1
/1 the 2 additional covering caps located centrally at the top and bottom, reveal the
4 or 6 slots in the mounting flange.
G Fasten the device to the mounting brackets with four or six screws.
G Replace the four or six covering caps.
G Tighten the mounting brackets to the rack using eight screws.
G Connect the ground on the rear plate of the device to the protective ground of the
rack. Use at least one M4 screw for the device ground. The cross-sectional area of
the ground wire must be greater than or equal to the cross-sectional area of any oth-
er control conductor connected to the device. Furthermore, the cross-section of the
ground wire must be at least 2.5 mm2.
Mounting bracket
SIEMENS SIPROTEC
RUN ERROR 7SD52
MAIN MENU 01/04
Annunciation 1
Measurement 2
MENU
LED ESC ENTER
F1 7 8 9
F2 4 5 6
F3 1 2 3
F4 0 +/-
Mounting bracket
Figure 8-3 Installing a 7SD52 in a rack or cubicle (housing size 1/2)
8-4 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
SIEMENS SIPROTEC
RUN ERROR 7SD52
MAIN MENU 01/04
Annunciation 1
Measurement 2
MENU
LED ESC ENTER
F1 7 8 9
F2 4 5 6
F3 1 2 3
F4 0 +/-
Figure 8-4 Installing a 7SD52 in a rack or cubicle (housing size 1/1)
G Connect the plug terminals and/or the screwed terminals on the rear side of the de-
vice according to the wiring diagram for the rack.
When using forked lugs or directly connecting wires to screwed terminals, the
screws must be tightened so that the heads are even with the terminal block before
the lugs or wires are inserted.
A ring lug must be centred in the connection chamber so that the screw thread fits
in the hole of the lug.
Section 2.1 has pertinent information regarding wire size, lugs, bending radii, etc.
Panel Surface G Secure the device to the panel with four screws. Refer to Figures 10-5 to 10-8 in
Mounting Section 10.13 for dimensions.
G Connect the ground of the device to the protective ground of the panel. The cross-
sectional area of the ground wire must be greater than or equal to the cross-sec-
tional area of any other control conductor connected to the device. Furthermore, the
cross-section of the ground wire must be at least 2.5 mm2.
G Solid, low-impedance operational grounding (cross-sectional area ≥ 2.5 mm2) must
be connected to the grounding surface on the side. Use at least one M4 screw for
the device ground.
G Connect the screwed terminals on the top and bottom of the device according to the
wiring diagram for the panel. Section 2.2 has pertinent information regarding wire
size, lugs, bending radii, etc.
7SD52 Manual 8-5

C53000–G1176–C132–2
8.1.2 Termination variants
Outline diagrams are shown in Appendix A.2. Connection examples for current and
voltage transformer circuits are provided in Appendix A.3. It must be checked that the
setting configuration of the Power System Data 1 (P.System Data 1) corre-
sponds with the connections to the device.
Currents The Figures A-15 and A-16 show examples of the current transformer connection op-
tions.
For the normal connection according to Figure A-15 address 0220 must be set to I4
transformer = In prot. line, and furthermore address 0221 must be set to I4/
Iph CT = 1.000.
For the connection as shown in Figure A-16 the setting of address 0220 must also be
I4 transformer = In prot. line. The factor 0221 I4/Iph CT may deviate
from 1. For notes on how to calculate the factor, refer to Subsection 6.1.1 under “Con-
nection of the Currents”.
Voltages This Section is only relevant if the measured voltages are connected to the device, a
condition which was already set during the configuration (address 0144, see Section
5.1).
The Figures A-17 and A-18 show examples of the voltage transformer connection op-
tions.
For the normal connection as shown in Figure A-17 the fourth voltage measuring input
U4 is not used. Correspondingly address 0210 must be set to U4 transformer =
Not connected. The factor in address 0211 Uph / Udelta must however be set
to 1.73 (this factor is used internally for the conversion of measurement and fault re-
cording values).
Figure A-18 shows the additional connection of an e-n-winding of the voltage trans-
former set. Address 0210 U4 transformer = Ux transformer must be set. The
factor in address 0211 Uph / Udelta depends on the transformation ratio of the e-
n-winding. For more information refer to “Connecting the Voltage” in Subsection 6.1.1.
Binary Inputs and The configuration of the binary inputs and outputs, i.e. the individual adaptation to the
Outputs system conditions, is described in Section 5.2. The preset allocation of the binary in-
puts and outputs of the device can be found in Tables A-1 and A-2 in Section A.4 of
Appendix A. Also check if the labels on the front panel correspond to the configured
message functions.
Changing Setting If binary inputs are used to switch setting groups, note:
Groups with Binary
• Two binary inputs must be dedicated to the purpose of changing setting groups
Inputs
when four groups are to be switched. One binary input must be set for “>Set
Group Bit 0”, the other input for “>Set Group Bit 1”. If either of these input
functions is not assigned, then it is considered as not controlled.
• To control two setting groups, one binary input set for “>Set Group Bit 0” is
sufficient since the binary input “>Set Group Bit 1”, which is not assigned, is
considered to be not controlled.
8-6 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
• The status of the signals controlling the binary inputs to activate a particular setting
group must remain constant as long as that particular group is to remain active.
Table 8-1 shows the relationship between “>Set Group Bit 0”, “>Set Group Bit
1”, and the setting groups A to D. Principal connection diagrams for the two binary in-
puts are illustrated in Figure 8-5. The figure illustrates an example in which both Set
Group Bits 0 and 1 are configured to be controlled (actuated) when the associated bi-
nary input is energized (high).
Table 8-1 Setting group selection with binary inputs — example
Binary Input Events

>Set Group Bit 0 >Set Group Bit 1 Active Group
no no Group A
yes no Group B
no yes Group C
yes yes Group D
no = not energized
yes= energized
Selector switch for

setting group
A
B
L–
L+ C
D Binary input set for: 7
“>Set Group Bit 0”, High
A 7SD52
B
L+ C L–
D
Binary input set for: 8
”>Set Group Bit 1”, High
Figure 8-5 Connection diagram (example) for setting group switching with binary inputs
Trip Circuit Super- It must be noted that two binary inputs or one binary input and one bypass resistor R
vision must be connected in series. The pick-up threshold of the binary inputs must therefore
be substantially below half the rated control DC voltage.
If two binary inputs are used for the trip circuit supervision, these binary inputs must
be volt-free i.o.w. not be commoned with each other or with another binary input.
If one binary input is used, a bypass resistor R must be employed (refer to Figure 8-
6). This resistor R is connected in series with the second circuit breaker auxiliary con-
tact (Aux2), to also allow the detection of a trip circuit failure when the circuit breaker
auxiliary contact 1 (Aux1) is open, and the command relay contact has reset. The val-
ue of this resistor must be such that in the circuit breaker open condition (therefore
7SD52 Manual 8-7

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Aux1 is open and Aux2 is closed) the circuit breaker trip coil (TC) is no longer picked
up and binary input (BI1) is still picked up if the command relay contact is open.
UCTR
L+ 7SD52
UBI >RTC Status

7SD52
RTC
Legend:
RTC —
Relay Tripping Contact
R CB —
Circuit Breaker
TC —
circuit breaker Trip Coil
Aux1 —
circuit breaker Auxiliary contact
(closed when CB is closed)
TC Aux1 Aux2 Aux2 — circuit breaker Auxiliary contact
CB (closed when CB is open)
R — bypass Resistor
UCTR — Control voltage (trip voltage)
UBI — input voltage for Binary Input
L–
Figure 8-6 Trip circuit supervision with one binary input
This results in an upper limit for the resistance dimension, Rmax, and a lower limit Rmin,
from which the optimal value of the arithmetic mean should be selected.
R max + R min
R = ---------------------------------
2
In order that the minimum voltage for controlling the binary input is ensured, Rmax is
derived as:
U CRT – U BI min
R max = æ --------------------------------------ö – R CBTC
è I BI (High) ø
So the circuit breaker trip coil does not remain energized in the above case, Rmin is
derived as:
U CTR – U TC (LOW)
R min = R TC ⋅ æ -----------------------------------------------ö
è U TC (LOW) ø
IBI (HIGH) Constant current with BI on (=1.7 mA)

UBI min Minimum control voltage for BI
=19 V for delivery setting for nominal voltage of 24/48/60 V
=88 V for delivery setting for nominal voltage of 110/125/220/250 V
UCTR Control voltage for trip circuit
RCBTC DC resistance of circuit breaker trip coil
UCBTC (LOW) Maximum voltage on the circuit breaker trip coil that does not lead to tripping
If the calculation results that Rmax < Rmin, then the calculation must be repeated, with
the next lowest switching threshold UBI min, and this threshold must be implemented
in the relay using plug-in bridges (see Sub-section 8.1.3).
For the power consumption of the resistance:
U CTR 2
P R = I ⋅ R = æ ----------------------------ö ⋅ R
2
è R + R CBTCø
8-8 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Example:
IBI (HIGH) 1.7 mA (from SIPROTEC® 7SD52)
UBI min 19 V for delivery setting for nominal voltage 24/48/60 V
88 V or delivery setting for nominal voltage 110/125/220/250 V
UCTR 110 V from trip circuit (control voltage)
RCBTC 500 Ω from trip circuit (resistance of CB trip coil)
UCBTC (LOW) 2 V from trip circuit (max. voltage not to trip breaker)
R max = æ ----------------------------------ö – 500 Ω

110 V – 19 V
è 1.7 mA ø
R min = 500 Ω æ ------------------------------ö – 500 Ω

110 V – 2 V
è 2V ø
R max = 53 kΩ
R min = 27 kΩ
R max + R min
R = -------------------------------- = 40 kΩ
2
The closest standard value of 39 kΩ is selected; the power is:

2
P R = æ ----------------------------------------ö ⋅ 39 kΩ
110 V
è 39 kΩ + 0.5 kΩø
P R ≥ 0.3 W
7SD52 Manual 8-9

C53000–G1176–C132–2
8.1.3 Hardware Modifications
8.1.3.1 General
Hardware modifications might be necessary or desired. For example, a change of the

pick-up threshold for some of the binary inputs might be advantageous in certain ap-
plications. Terminating resistors might be required for the communication bus. In ei-
ther case, hardware modifications are needed. If modifications are done or interface
modules are replaced, please observe the details in Subsections 8.1.3.2 to 8.1.3.5.
Power Supply There are different input ranges for the power supply voltage. Refer to the data for the
Voltage 7SD52 ordering numbers in Section A.1 of Appendix A. The power supplies with the
ratings 60/110/125 VDC and 110/125/220/250 VDC are interconvertible. Jumper set-
tings determine the rating. The assignment of these jumpers to the supply voltages are
illustrated below in Section 8.1.3.3 under subtitle “Input/Output Board I/O–1 and I/O–
10”. When the relay is delivered, these jumpers are set according to the name-plate
sticker. Generally, they need not be altered.
Nominal Currents Jumper settings determine the rating of the current input transducers of the device.
When the relay is delivered, these jumpers are set according to the name-plate sticker
to 1 A or 5 A. The physical arrangements of these jumpers that correspond to the dif-
ferent current ratings are described below in Section 8.1.3.3 under subtitle „Input/Out-
put Board I/O–2“.
Note:
If nominal current ratings are changed exceptionally, then the new ratings must be re-
corded under address 0206 CT SECONDARY in the Power System Data 1
(P.System Data 1) (see Subsection 6.1.1).
Control Voltages When the device is delivered from the factory, the binary inputs are set to operate with
for Binary Inputs a voltage that corresponds to the rated voltage of the power supply. In general, to op-
timize the operation of the inputs, the pickup voltage of the inputs should be set to
most closely match the actual control voltage being used. Each binary input has a
pickup voltage that can be independently adjusted; therefore, each input can be set
according to the function performed.
A jumper position is changed to adjust the pickup voltage of a binary input. The phys-
ical arrangement of the binary input jumpers in relation to the pickup voltages is ex-
plained below in Section 8.1.3.3 under “Input/Output Board I/O–1 and I/O–10”.
Note:
If the 7SD52 performs trip circuit monitoring, two binary inputs, or one binary input and
a resistor, are connected in series. The pickup voltage of these inputs must be less
than half of the nominal DC voltage of the trip circuit.
8-10 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Type of Contact for Input and output boards may contain relays the contact of which can be set as normal-
Binary Outputs ly closed or normally open contact. Therefore it is necessary to rearrange a jumper.
Subsection 8.1.3.3, “Input/Output Board I/O–1 and I/O–10” and “Input/Output Board I/
O–2” describes to which type of relays in which boards this applies.
Interface Modules The serial interface modules can be replaced. Which kind of interfaces and how the
interfaces can be replaced is described in „Replacing Interface Modules”, Subsection
8.1.3.4.
Termination of If the device is equipped with a serial RS 485 port, the RS 485 bus must be terminated
Serial Interfaces with resistors at the last device on the bus to ensure reliable data transmission. For
this purpose, terminating resistors are provided on the interface modules. The physi-
cal arrangement and jumper positions on the interface modules CPU–board are ex-
plained in Subsection 8.1.3.4 “RS485 Interfaces”.
As delivered from the factory, the resistors are switched out.
8.1.3.2 Disassembling the Device
If changes to jumper settings are required to modify the rating of the power supply, the
nominal rating of the current inputs, the pickup voltage of binary inputs, or the state of
the terminating resistors, proceed as follows:
Caution!
Jumper-setting changes that affect nominal values of the device render the ordering
number and the corresponding nominal values on the nameplate sticker invalid. If
such changes are necessary, the changes should be clearly and fully noted on the de-
vice. Self-adhesive stickers are available that can be used as replacement stickers.
o Prepare area of work. Provide a grounded mat for protecting components subject to
damage from electrostatic discharges (ESD). The following equipment is needed:
− screwdriver with a 5 to 6 mm wide tip,
− 1 Philips screwdriver,
− 4.5 mm socket or nut driver.
o Unfasten the screw-posts of the D-subminiature connector on the back panel at loca-
tion “A”.
This activity does not apply if the device is for surface mounting.
o If the device has more communication interfaces on the rear, the screws located diag-
onally to the interfaces must be removed.
This activity is not necessary if the device is for surface mounting.
o Remove the four or six caps on the front cover and loosen the screws that become
accessible.
7SD52 Manual 8-11

C53000–G1176–C132–2
o Carefully pull off the front cover. The front cover is connected to the CPU board with
a short ribbon-cable.
Caution!
Electrostatic discharges through the connections of the components, wiring, plugs,
and jumpers must be avoided. Wearing a grounded wrist strap is preferred. Otherwise,
first touch a grounded metal part.
The order of the boards for housing size 1/2 is shown in Figure 8-7, for housing size
1
/1 refer to Figure 8-8.
o At one end, disconnect the ribbon-cable between the front cover and the CPU board
(). To disconnect the cable, push up the top latch of the plug connector and push
down the bottom latch of the plug connector. Carefully set aside the front cover.
o Disconnect the ribbon-cables between the CPU board () and the I/O-11 boards
().
o Remove the boards and set them on the grounded mat to protect them from electro-
static damage. A greater effort is required to withdraw the CPU board, especially in
versions of the device for surface mounting, because of the plug connectors.
o Check the jumpers according to Figures 8-9 to 8-14 and the following notes. Change
or remove the jumpers as necessary.
1 Processor printed circuit board CPU

2 Input/output printed circuit board I/O-1
3 Input/output printed circuit board I/O-2
Slot 5 Slot 19 Slot 33 7SD52**–*A/E/J
1 2 3
BI1 to Binary inputs (BI)
BI8
Figure 8-7 Front view of the device with housing size 1/2 after removal of the front cover
(simplified and scaled down)
8-12 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
1 Processor printed circuit

board CPU
2 Input/output printed circuit
board I/O-1
board I/O-2
1 42 1 42
board I/O-1 or I/O–10 1)
1
) depending on version
Slot 5 Slot 19 Slot 33 Slot 19 Slot 33

1 2 4 3
BI1 to BI9 to 7SD52**–*C/G/L

BI8 BI16 Binary inputs (BI)
1 2 2 4 3
BI17 to BI1 to BI9 to 7SD52**–*D/H/M

BI24 BI8 BI16 Binary inputs (BI)
1 2 4 3
BI1 to BI9 to 7SD52**–*N/Q/S

BI8 BI16 Binary inputs (BI)
1 2 2 4 3
BI17 to BI1 to BI9 to 7SD52**–*P/R/T

BI24 BI8 BI16 Binary inputs (BI)
Figure 8-8 Front view of the device with housing size 1/1 after removal of the front cover (simplified and scaled down)
7SD52 Manual 8-13

C53000–G1176–C132–2
8.1.3.3 Jumper Settings on Printed Circuit Boards
Input/Output Board The design of a jumper setting for the input/output board I/O–1 is shown in Figure 8-
I/O–1 and I/O–10 9. the input/output board I/O–10 in Figure 8-10.
o The power supply is situated
for housing size 1/2 on the input/output board I/O–1 ( in Figure 8-7, slot 19),
for housing size 1/1 on the input/output board I/O–1 ( in Figure 8-8, slot 33 left).
The preset rated voltage of the integrated power supply is checked according to Table
8-2, the quiescent state of the life contact is checked according to Table 8-3.
Table 8-2 Jumper settings for the nominal voltage of the integrated power supply on the
input/output board I/O–1 with power supply
Nominal voltage
Jumper DC 110/125/220/250 V
DC 60/110/125 V DC 24/48 V
AC 115 V
X51 1–2 2–3 Jumpers
X51 to X53 not
X52 1–2 and 3–4 2–3
fitted
X53 1–2 2–3
can be interchanged not changeable
Table 8-3 Jumper settings for the quiescent state of the life contact on the input/output
board I/O–1 with power supply
Jumper Open in quiescent state (NO) Closed in quiescent state (NC) presetting
X40 1–2 2–3 2–3
o Depending on the device version the contacts of some binary outputs can be changed
from normally open to normally closed operation (see also in Appendix, Section A.2).
The following outputs can be modified:
Version 7SD52∗∗–∗D/H/M (housing size 1/1 with 32 binary outputs)
BO16 and BO24 (Figure 8-8, slot 19 left and right);
Version 7SD52∗∗–∗C/G/L (housing size 1/1 with 24 binary outputs)
BO16 (Figure 8-8, slot 19 right);
Version 7SD52∗∗–∗P/R/T (housing size 1/1 with 32 binary outputs and acceleration)
BO24 (Figure 8-8, slot 19 left).
Table 8-4 shows the jumper settings for the contact mode.
8-14 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Table 8-4 Jumper settings for the contact mode of outputs BO16 and BO24 on the input/output board I/O–1
Device version printed circuit Open in quiescent Closed in quiescent state

for Jumper Presetting
7SD52∗∗–∗ board state (NO) (NC)
D/H/M slot 19 left BA16 X40 1–2 2–3 1–2
slot 19 right BA24 X40 1–2 2–3 1–2
C/G/L slot 19 right BA16 X40 1–2 2–3 1–2
P/R/T slot 19 left BA24 X40 1–2 2–3 1–2
3
2
1
X51
F1
X40
1
2
3
3
2
1
X53
X52
3 4
2
1
X22
X21
LMH
X24
X23
LMH
X26
X25
LMH
X28
X27
LMH
X30
X29
LMH
X73 (AD2)
X72 (AD1)
X32
X31
X71 (AD0)
LMH
H L
X34
X33
LMH
X36
X35
LMH
Figure 8-9 Input/output board I/O–1 with representation of the jumper settings re-
quired for the module configuration
7SD52 Manual 8-15

C53000–G1176–C132–2
X22
X21
LMH
X24
X23
LMH
X26
X25
LMH
X28
X27
LMH
X30
X29
LMH
X73 (AD2)
X72 (AD1)
X32
X31
X71 (AD0)
LMH
H L
X34
X33
LMH
X36
X35
LMH
Figure 8-10 Input/output board I/O–10 with representation of the jumper settings
required for the module configuration
o Check of the control voltage of the binary inputs:

BI1 to BI8 (for housing size 1/2) according to Table 8-5,
BI1 to BI24 (for housing size 1/1depending on version) according to Table 8-6.
8-16 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Table 8-5 Jumper settings for the pickup voltages of the binary inputs BI1 through BI8 on
the input/output board I/O–1, for housing size 1/2
Binary inputs
Jumper Pickup 17 V 1) Pickup 73 V 2) Pickup 154 V 3)
Slot 19
BI1 X21/X22 L M H
BI2 X23/X24 L M H
BI3 X25/X26 L M H
BI4 X27/X28 L M H
BI5 X29/X30 L M H
BI6 X31/X32 L M H
BI7 X33/X34 L M H
BI8 X35/X36 L M H
1
) Factory setting for devices with power supply voltages DC 24 to 125 V
2
) Factory setting for devices with power supply voltages DC 110 to 250 V and AC 115 V
3) Factory setting for devices with power supply voltages DC 220 to 250 V and AC 115 V
Table 8-6 Jumper settings for the pickup voltage of the binary inputs BI1 through BI24 on
the input/output boards I/O–1 or I/O–10, for housing size 1/1
Binary inputs
Pickup Pickup Pickup
Slot 33 Slot 19 Slot 19 Jumper
17 V 1) 73 V 2) 154 V 3)
left right left
BI1 BI9 BI17 X21/X22 L M H
1
) Factory setting for devices with power supply voltages DC 24 to 125 V
2) Factory setting for devices with power supply voltages DC 110 to 250 V and AC 115 V
3
) Factory setting for devices with power supply voltages DC 220 to 250 V and AC 115 V
o The jumpers X71 to X73 serve for identification of the modules on the internal serial
bus for housing size 1/1. They must not be changed. Table 8-7 shows the jumper po-
sitions. These jumpers are not fitted in housing size 1/2.
7SD52 Manual 8-17

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Table 8-7 Jumper settings for the bus address of the input/output boards I/O–2
Presetting Presetting
Jumper
Slot 19 left Slot 19 right
X71 H L
X72 L L
X73 H H
Input/Output Board The design of the input/output board I/O–2 is show in Figure 8-11.
I/O–2
o The contact of BO13 binary output can be changed from normally closed to normal-
ly open operation (see also Section A.2, in Appendix A):
for housing size 1/2 ( in Figure 8-7, slot 33),
for housing size 1/1 ( in Figure 8-8, slot 33, right).
Table 8-8 Jumper setting for the quiescent state of the contact of output BO13
Jumper Open in quiescent state Closed in quiescent state Presetting

(NO) (NC)
X41 1–2 2–3 1–2
o The preset rated currents of the current transformer are checked on the input/output
board I/O–2. All jumpers must be set unitary for one rated current, i.e. one jumper (X61
to X64) for each current transformer, additionally there is one common jumper X60.
o The jumpers X71 to X73 serve for identification of the modules on the internal serial
bus. They must not be changed. Table 8-9 shows the jumper positions:
for housing size 1/2 ( in Figure 8-7, slot 33),
for housing size 1/1 ( in Figure 8-8, slot 33, right).
Table 8-9 Jumper settings for the bus address of the input/output boards I/O–2
Jumper Presetting
X71 1–2 (H)
X72 1–2 (H)
X73 2–3 (L)
8-18 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
3
2
1
X41
X71 X72 X73
(AD0)
1
2
3
(AD1)
1
2
3
(AD2)
L
H
X60
5A 3
2
1A 1
X61
5A 3
2
1A 1
T2 T1
X62
1A 1
2
5A 3
T3 T4
X63
X64
1A 1
2
5A 3
5A 3
2
1A 1
Figure 8-11 Jumpers on the input/output board I/O–2 for the input current transformers
7SD52 Manual 8-19

C53000–G1176–C132–2
8.1.3.4 Interface Modules
Replacing Inter- The interface modules are located on the processor board CPU ( in Figure 8-7 or
face Modules Figure 8-8). Figure 8-12 shows the CPU board and the location of the interface mod-
ules.
Mounting location
(rear side of housing)
Protection data interface 2 E
Protection data interface 1 D
Service interface C
System interface B
Figure 8-12 Processor board CPU with the interface modules (max. complement)
Please note the following:

• Interface modules can only be exchanged for devices with flush mounting housing.
Interface modules for devices with surface mounting housing must be exchanged
in our manufacturing centre.
8-20 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
• Use only interface modules that can be ordered as an option of the device (see also
Appendix A.1).
• With interfaces with bus capability, ensure that the bus termination is correct (if ap-
plicable); see head margin “RS485 Interfaces” below.
Table 8-10 Exchange interface modules for devices with flush mounting housing
Interface Mounting Location Exchange Module

RS232
System Interface B RS485
LWL 820 nm
RS232
Service Interface C RS485
LWL 820 nm
Protection Data Interface 1 D FO5 to FO8
Protection Data Interface 2 E FO5 to FO8
The ordering numbers of the exchange modules are listed in Appendix A.1.1 (Acces-
sories).
RS232 Interfaces The interface RS232 can be transformed into interface RS485 according to Figure 8-
14.
Figure 8-12 shows the PCB of the CPU with the location of the modules. Figure 8-13
shows how jumpers of interface RS232 are located on the interface module.
Here, terminating resistors are not required. They are always disabled.
1 2 3
X3
8X
1 X6
2 X7
3 X4
X12 X5
1 2 3 1 2 3
1
X11
2
3
X10
1 2 3 1
2
3
X13
Jumpers illustrated C53207-

in Factory position A324-B180
Figure 8-13 Location of the jumpers on interface module for RS232
With jumper X11 the flow control which is important for modem communication is en-
abled. Jumper settings are explained in the following:
Jumper setting 2–3: The modem control signals CTS (Clear-To-Send) according to
RS232 are not available. This is a standard connection via star coupler or optical fibre
7SD52 Manual 8-21

C53000–G1176–C132–2
converter. They are not required since the connection to the SIPROTEC® devices is
always operated in the half-duplex mode. Please use connection cable with order
number 7XV5100–4.
Jumper setting 1–2: Modem signals are made available. For a direct RS232 connec-
tion between the device and the modem this setting can be selected optionally. We
recommend to use a standard RS232 modem connection cable (converter 9-pole on
25-pole).
Table 8-11 Jumper setting for CTS (Clear-To-Send) on the interface module
Jumper /CTS from RS232 interface /CTS controlled by /RTS

X11 1–2 2–3 *)
*) Factory setting
RS485 Interfaces The interface RS485 can be transformed into interface RS232 according to Figure 8-
13.
Using interfaces with bus capability requires a termination for the last device at the
bus, i.e. terminating resistors must be switched to the line. Talking about the 7SD52
this refers to the version with the RS485 interface.
The terminating resistors are connected to the corresponding interface module that is
mounted to the processor input/output board CPU (Figure 8-12).
The module for the RS485 interface is illustrated in Figure 8-14. When it leaves the
facilities the jumpers are set in such a way that the terminating resistors are switched
off. The two jumpers of a module must always be plugged in the same direction.
1 2 3
X3
8X
1 X6
2 X7
Terminating resistors 3 X4
X12 X5
Jumper 1 2 3 1 2 3
Connected Disconnected 1
X11
2
X3 2-3 1-2*) 3
X10
1 2 3 1
X4 2-3 1-2*) 2
3
*) Factory Setting
X13
C53207-
A324-B180
Figure 8-14 Location of the jumpers for the terminating resistors of the RS485–interface
module
Terminating resistors can also be implemented outside the device (e.g. in the plug
connectors) as shown in Figure 8-15. In that case the terminating resistors provided
on the interface module must be switched out.
8-22 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
+5 V
390 Ω
A/A´
220 Ω
B/B´
390 Ω
Figure 8-15 External terminating resistors
8.1.3.5 To Reassemble the Device
To reassemble the device, proceed as follows:

o Carefully insert the boards into the housing. The installation locations of the boards
are shown in Figures 8-7 and 8-8.
For the model of the device designed for surface mounting, use the metal lever to in-
sert the CPU board. The installation is easier with the lever.
o First insert the plug connectors on the ribbon cable in the input/output boards I/O and
then on the processor board CPU. Be careful not to bend any of the connecting pins!
Do not use force!
o Insert the plug connector of the ribbon cable between the processor board CPU and
the front cover in the socket on the front cover.
o Press the latches of the plug connectors together.
o Replace the front cover and secure to the housing with the screws.
o Replace the covers.
o Re-fasten the interfaces on the rear of the device housing.
This activity is not necessary if the device is for surface mounting.
7SD52 Manual 8-23

C53000–G1176–C132–2
8.2 Checking the Connections
8.2.1 Data Connections
The tables of the following margin headers list the pin-assignments for the different se-
rial interfaces of the device and the time synchronization interface. The physical ar-
rangement of the connectors is illustrated in Figure 8-16.
RS232 RS485
5 1 1
RS232-LWL
9 6 6
6 9 9
1 5 5
P-Slave
AME
Operating Interface Time Synchronization
at the Front Side Interface at the
Serial Interface Rear Side
at the Rear Side (Panel Flush Mounting)
Figure 8-16 9-pin D-subminiature sockets
PC Operating Inter- When the recommended communication cable is used, correct connection between
face at Front the SIPROTEC® device and the PC is automatically ensured. See the Appendix A,
Subsection A.1.1 for an ordering description of the cable.
System (SCADA) When a serial interface of the device is connected to a central substation control sys-
Interface tem, the data connection must be checked. A visual check of the transmit channel and
the receive channel is important. Each connection is dedicated to one transmission di-
rection. The data output of one device must be connected to the data input of the other
device, and vice versa.
The data cable connections are designated in sympathy with DIN 66020 and ISO
2110 (see also Table 8-12):
− TxD data transmit
− RxD data receive
− RTS request to send
− CTS clear to send
− DGND signal/chassis ground
The cable shield is to be grounded at only both ends.
The physical arrangement of the connectors is illustrated in Subsection 2.1.5, Figure
2-16.
8-24 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Table 8-12 Pin-assignment of the D-subminiature ports
Pin No. Operating RS232 RS485 RS485

interface
1 Shield (with shield ends electrically connected)
2 RxD RxD – –
3 TxD TxD A/A' (RxD/TxD–N) B/B' (RxD/TxD–P)
4 – – – CNTR–A (TTL)
5 DGND DGND C/C' (DGND) C/C' (DGND)
6 – – – +5 V (max. load 100 mA)
7 RTS RTS –*) –
8 CTS CTS B/B' (RxD/TxD–P) A/A' (RxD/TxD–N)
9 – – – –
*) Pin 7 also may carry the RS232 RTS signal to an RS485 interface. Pin 7 must therefore
not be connected!
RS 485 The RS485 interface is capable of half-duplex service with the signals A/A' and B/B'
Termination with a common relative potential C/C' (DGND). Verify that only the last device on the
bus has the terminating resistors connected, and that the other devices on the bus do
not. Jumpers for the terminating resistors are on the interface modules RS 485 (Figure
8-14). It is also possible that the terminating resistors are arranged externally (Figure
8-15).
If the bus is extended, make sure again that only the last device on the bus has the
terminating resistors switched in, and that all other devices on the bus do not.
Time Either 5 VDC, 12 VDC or 24 VDC time synchronization signals can be processed if the
Synchronization connections are made as indicated in Table 8-13.
Interface
Table 8-13 Pin-assignment for the D-subminiature port of the time synchronization
interface
Pin-No. Designation Signal meaning
1 P24_TSIG Input 24 V
2 P5_TSIG Input 5 V
3 M_TSIG Return Line
4 M_TSYNC*) Return Line*)
5 Screen Shield potential
6 – –
7 P12_TSIG Input 12 V
8 P_TSYNC*) Input 24 V*)
9 Screen Shield potential
*) only for GPS signal
7SD52 Manual 8-25

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Optical Fibres Refer to Subsection 8.2.2 for differential protection communication.

For the system (SCADA) interface, signals transmitted over optical fibres are unaffect-
ed by interference. The fibres guarantee electrical isolation between the connections.
Transmit and receive connections are identified with the symbols for transmit
and for receive.
The character idle state for the optical fibre interface is “Light off.” If this setting is to
be changed, use the operating program DIGSI® 4, as described in Section 5.4.
Warning!
Laser injection! Do not look directly into the fibre-optic elements!
8.2.2 Checking the Differential Protection Communication
The differential protection communication is conducted either directly from device to

device via optical fibres or via communication converters and a communication net-
work or a dedicated transmission medium.
Optical Fibres The direct optical fibre connection is visually checked like the other optical fibre con-
nections. There is one connection for each direction. Therefore the output of the one
device must be connected to the input of the other device and vice versa. Transmis-
sion and receiving connections are identified with the symbols for transmit
and for receive. The visual check of the assignment of the transmission and
receive channels is relevant. For use of the FO5–modules and the recommended fibre
type for short distances, laser class 1 is valid. Higher laser powers can occur in other
cases.
Warning!
Laser injection! Do not look into the LEDs or fibre-optic elements! Do not use optical
instruments! Laser class 3A according to EN 60825–1.
If using more than two devices, the connections of all protection data interfaces are
checked according the topology selected.
Communication Optical fibres are usually used for the connections between the devices and commu-
Converter nication converters. The optical fibres are checked in the same manner as the optical
fibre direct connections.
Set address 1502 CONNEC. 1 OVER or 1602 CONNEC. 2 OVER (see also Section
6.4.2) to configure the correct type of connection.
Further For further connections a visual control is sufficient for the time being. Electrical and
connections functional controls are done during commissioning (Section 8.3.5).
8-26 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
8.2.3 Checking Power Plant Connections
Warning!
Some of the following test steps will be carried out in presence of hazardous voltages.
They shall be performed only by qualified personnel which is thoroughly familiar with
all safety regulations and precautionary measures and pay due attention to them.
Caution!
Operating the device on a battery charger without a connected battery can lead to un-
usually high voltages and consequently, the destruction of the device. For limit values
see Subsection 10.2.1 under Technical Data.
Before the device is energized for the first time, the device should be in the final operating environment for at least 2 hours to equalize the temperature and to minimize humidity and avoid condensation. Connection are checked with the device at its final location. The plant must first be switched off and grounded.
o Protective switches (e.g. test switches, fuses, or miniature circuit breakers) for the
power supply and the measured voltages must be opened.
o Check the continuity of all current and voltage transformer connections against the
system and connection diagrams:
G Are the current transformers grounded properly?
G Are the polarities of the current transformers the same?
G Is the phase relationship of the current transformers correct?
G Are the voltage transformers grounded properly (if used)?
G Are the polarities of the voltage transformers correct (if used)?
G Is the phase relationship of the voltage transformers correct (if used)?
G Is the polarity for current input I4 correct (if used)?
G Is the polarity for voltage input U4 correct (if used, e.g. with open delta winding)?
o Check the functions of all test switches that may be installed for the purposes of sec-
ondary testing and isolation of the device. Of particular importance are test switches
in current transformer circuits. Be sure these switches short-circuit the current trans-
formers when they are in the test mode (open).
o The short-circuit feature of the current circuits of the device are to be checked. An
ohmmeter or other test equipment for checking continuity is needed.
G Remove the front panel of the device (see Figure 8-7 or 8-8).
G Remove the ribbon cable connected to the I/O–2 board ( in Figure 8-7 or 8-8), and
pull the board out until there is no contact between the board and the rear connec-
tions of the device.
G At the terminals of the device, check continuity for each pair of terminals that re-
ceives current from the CTs.
G Firmly re-insert the I/O–2 board. Carefully connect the ribbon cable. Do not bend
any connector pins! Do not use force!
7SD52 Manual 8-27

C53000–G1176–C132–2
G Check continuity for each of the current terminal-pairs again.

G Attach the front panel and tighten the screws.
o Connect an ammeter in the supply circuit of the power supply. A range of about 2.5 A
to 5 A for the meter is appropriate.
o Close the protective switches to apply voltage to the power supply. Check the polarity
and magnitude of the voltage at the device terminals.
o The measured steady-state current should correspond to the quiescent power con-
sumption of the device. Transient movement of the ammeter merely indicates the
charging current of capacitors.
o Remove the voltage from the power supply by opening the protective switches.
o Disconnect the measuring equipment; restore the normal power supply connections.
o Apply voltage to the power supply.
o Close the protective switches for the voltage transformers (if used).
o Verify that the voltage phase rotation at the device terminals is correct.
o Open the protective switches for the voltage transformers (if used) and the power sup-
ply.
o Check the trip circuits to the power system circuit breakers.
o Check the close circuits to the power system circuit breakers (if used).
o Verify that the control wiring to and from other devices is correct.
o Check the signalling connections.
o Close the protective switches to apply voltage to the power supply.
o If communication converters are used, check the auxiliary voltage supply for the com-
munication converters.
o If the communication converter is connected to the communication network, its
“device-ready”-relay (DR) picks up. This also signalizes that the clock pulse of the
communication network is recognized. Further checks are performed according to
Subsection 8.3.5.
o Please also observe carefully the documentation on the communication converter.
8-28 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
8.3 Commissioning
8.3 Commissioning
Warning!
Hazardous voltages are present in this electrical equipment during operation. Non–
observance of the safety rules can result in severe personal injury or property dam-
age.
Only qualified personnel shall work on and around this equipment after becoming thor-
oughly familiar with all warnings and safety notices of this manual as well as with the
applicable safety regulations.
Particular attention must be drawn to the following:
• The earthing screw of the device must be connected solidly to the protective earth
conductor before any other electrical connection is made.
• Hazardous voltages can be present on all circuits and components connected to the
supply voltage or to the measuring and test quantities.
• Hazardous voltages can be present in the device even after disconnection of the
supply voltage (storage capacitors!).
• Wait for at least 10 s after having disconnected the supply voltage before you re-
apply the voltage in order to achieve defined initial conditions.
• The limit values stated in the Technical Data must not be exceeded at all, not even
during testing and commissioning.
When testing the device with secondary test equipment, make sure that no other
measurement quantities are connected. Take also into consideration that the trip and
close commands to the circuit breakers and other primary switches are disconnected
from the device unless expressly stated.
DANGER!
Current transformer secondary circuits must have been short-circuited before
the current leads to the device are disconnected!
If test switches are installed that automatically short-circuit the current transformer
secondary circuits, it is sufficient to place them into the “Test” position provided the
short-circuit functions has been previously tested.
For the commissioning switching operations have to be carried out. A prerequisite for
the prescribed tests is that these switching operations can be executed without dan-
ger. They are accordingly not meant for operational checks.
Warning!
Primary tests must only be carried out by qualified personnel, who are familiar with the
commissioning of protection systems, the operation of the plant and the safety rules
and regulations (switching, earthing, etc.).
7SD52 Manual 8-29

C53000–G1176–C132–2
8.3.1 Testing Mode and Transmission Blocking
If the device is connected to a substation control system or a server, the user is able
to modify, in some protocols, information that is transmitted to the substation (see Sec-
tion A.5 “Protocol Dependent Functions” in Appendix A).
In the testing mode all messages sent from a SIPROTEC®4–device to the substa-
tion are marked with an extra test bit so that the substation is able to identify them as
messages announcing no real faults. Furthermore the transmission blocking
function leads to a total blocking of the message transmission process via the system
interface in the testing mode.
Refer to Subsection 7.2.3 to know how the testing mode and the transmission blocking
can be enabled and disabled. Please note that it is necessary to be Online during
the configuration of the device with DIGSI® 4 to be able to use the testing mode.
8.3.2 Checking Time Synchronization
If external time synchronization sources are used (IRIG B, DCF77) the data of the time
source (antenna system, time generator) are checked (see Subsection 10.1.4 under
“Time Synchronization”). Using time signal IRIG B or DCF77 the correct time must
appear at last 3 minutes after startup of the processor system, i.e. the clock alarm
must go off (message “Alarm Clock OFF” in the operating messages or spon-
taneous messages, refer also to Subsection 7.2.1, margin header “Time Status”).
Additionally, if GPS–synchronization is used, check that the GPS signal is received:
Approximately 3 seconds after startup of the processor system, the message “GPS
loss OFF” appears.
8.3.3 Checking the System (SCADA) Interface
Preliminary Provided that the device is equipped with a system (SCADA) interface that is used for
Notes the communication with a substation, it is possible to test via the DIGSI® 4 operational
function if messages are transmitted correctly. Do not apply this test feature while the
device is in service on a live system!
DANGER!
The transmission and reception of messages via the system (SCADA) interface
by means of the testing mode is the real exchange of information between the
SIPROTEC®4 device and the substation. Connected equipment such as circuit
breakers or disconnectors can be operated as a result of these actions!
8-30 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
8.3 Commissioning
Note:
After termination of this test, the device will reboot. All annunciation buffers are
erased. If required, these buffers should be extracted with DIGSI® 4 prior to the test.
The system interface test is carried out Online using DIGSI® 4:

G Double-click on the Online directory to open the required dialogue box.
G Click on Test and the functional options appear on the right side of the window.
G Double-click on Testing Messages for System Interface shown in the list
view. The dialogue box Generate Indications opens (refer to Figure 8-17).
Structure of the In the column Indication, all message texts that were configured for the system in-
Dialogue Box terface in the matrix will then appear. In the column Status Scheduled the user has
to define the value for the messages to be tested. Depending on the type of message
different entering fields are available (e.g. message ON / message OFF). By double-
clicking onto one of the fields the required value can be selected from the list.
Figure 8-17 Dialogue box: Generate indications
7SD52 Manual 8-31

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Changing the Clicking for the first time onto one of the field in column Action you will be asked for
Operating State password no. 6 (for hardware test menus). Having entered the correct password mes-
sages can be issued. To do so, click on Send. The corresponding message is issued
and can be read out either from the event log of the SIPROTEC®4 device as well as
from the central master computer.
As long as the windows is open, further tests can be performed.
Test in Message For all information that is transmitted to the central station the following is to be
Direction checked under Status Scheduled:
G Make sure that each checking process is carried out carefully without causing any
danger (see above and refer to DANGER!)
G Click on Send and check whether the transmitted information reaches the central
station and shows the desired reaction.
Test in Command The information beginning with “>” is transmitted towards the device. This kind of in-
Direction formation must be sent by the central station. Check whether the reaction is correct.
f
Exiting the Test To end the system interface test, click on Close. The device is briefly out of service
Mode while the processor system starting up. The dialogue box closes.
8.3.4 Checking the Binary Inputs and Outputs
Preliminary Notes The binary inputs, outputs, and LEDs of a SIPROTEC®4 device can be individually
and precisely controlled using DIGSI® 4. This feature is used to verify control wiring
from the device to plant equipment during commissioning. This test feature shall not
be used while the device is in service on a live system.
DANGER!
Changing the status of a binary input or output using the test feature of DIGSI® 4
results in an actual and immediate corresponding change in the SIPROTEC® de-
vice. Connected equipment such as circuit breakers or disconnectors will be
operated as a result of these actions!
Note: After termination of the hardware test, the device will reboot. Thereby, all annun-
ciation buffers are erased. If required, these buffers should be extracted with DIGSI® 4
prior to the test.
The hardware test can be done using DIGSI® 4 in the online operating mode:
G Open the Online directory by double-clicking; the operating functions for the de-
vice appear.
G Click on Test; the function selection appears in the right half of the screen.
G Double-click in the list view on Hardware Test. The dialogue box of the same
name opens (see Figure 8-18).
8-32 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
8.3 Commissioning
Figure 8-18 Dialogue box for hardware test — example
Structure of the The dialogue box is divided into three groups: BI for binary inputs, REL for output
Test Dialogue Box relays, and LED for light-emitting diodes. Each of these groups is associated with an
appropriately marked switching area. By double-clicking in an area, components with-
in the associated group can be turned on or off.
In the Status column, the present (physical) state of the hardware component is
displayed. The binary inputs and outputs are indicated by an open or closed switch
symbol, the LEDs by a dark or illuminated LED symbol.
The possible intended condition of a hardware component is indicated with clear text
under the Scheduled column, which is next to the Status column. The intended
condition offered for a component is always the opposite of the present state.
The right-most column indicates the commands or messages that are configured
(masked) to the hardware components.
Changing the To change the condition of a hardware component, click on the associated switching
Hardware field in the Scheduled column.
Conditions
Password No. 6 (if activated during configuration) will be requested before the first
hardware modification is allowed. After entry of the correct password a condition
change will be executed.
Further condition changes remain possible while the dialog box is open.
Test of the Binary Each individual output relay can be energized allowing a check of the wiring between
Outputs the output relay of the 7SD52 and the plant, without having to generate the message
that is assigned to the relay. As soon as the first change of state for any one of the
output relays is initiated, all output relays are separated from the internal device func-
tions, and can only be operated by the hardware test function. This implies that a
7SD52 Manual 8-33

C53000–G1176–C132–2
switching signal to an output relay from e.g. a protection function or control command
cannot be executed.
G Ensured that the switching of the output relay can be executed without danger (see
above under DANGER!).
G Each output relay must be tested via the corresponding Scheduled–cell in the di-
alog box.
G The test sequence must be terminated (refer to margin heading “Exiting the Proce-
dure”), to avoid the initiation of inadvertent switching operations by further tests.
Test of the Binary To test the wiring between the plant and the binary inputs of the 7SD52 the condition
Inputs in the plant which initiates the binary input must be generated and the response of the
device checked.
To do this, the dialogue box Hardware Test must again be opened to view the phys-
ical state of the binary inputs. The password is not yet required.
G Each state in the plant which causes a binary input to pick up must be generated.
G The response of the device must be checked in the Status–column of the dialogue
box. To do this, the dialogue box must be updated. The options may be found below
under the margin heading “Updating the Display”.
If however the effect of a binary input must be checked without carrying out any switch-
ing in the plant, it is possible to trigger individual binary inputs with the hardware test
function. As soon as the first state change of any binary input is triggered and the
password nr. 6 has been entered, all binary inputs are separated from the plant and
can only be activated via the hardware test function.
G Terminate the test sequence (see above under the margin heading „Exiting the Pro-
cedure“).
Test of the LED’s The LED’s may be tested in a similar manner to the other input/output components.
As soon as the first state change of any LED has been triggered, all LEDs are sepa-
rated from the internal device functionality and can only be controlled via the hardware
test frunction. This implies that no LED can be switched on anymore by e.g. a protec-
tion function or operation of the LED reset key.
Updating the When the dialog box Hardware Test is opened, the present conditions of the hard-
Display ware components at that moment are read in and displayed. An update occurs:
− for each harware component, if a command to change the condition is successfully
performed,
− for all hardware components if the Update button is clicked,
− for all hardware components with cyclical updating if the Automatic Update
(20sec) field is marked.
Exiting the To end the hardware test, click on Close. The dialog box closes. The device becomes
Procedure unavailable for a brief start-up period immediately after this. Then all hardware com-
ponents are returned to the operating conditions determined by the plant settings.
8-34 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
8.3 Commissioning
8.3.5 Checking the Communication Topology
General The communication topology can either be checked from the PC using DIGSI® 4 or a
web browser via the “IBS-Tool”. If you choose to work with the IBS-Tool, please note
the Help files referring to the “IBS-Tool”.
You can either connect the PC to the device locally using the operator interface at the
front, or the service interface at the rear of the device (Figure 8-19). Or you can log
into the device using a modem via the service interface (example in Figure 8-20).
If you use the “IBS-Tool”:
G Make sure that the 12-digit IP-address valid for the browser is set correctly accord-
ing to the following format: ***.***.***.***. A three-digit block of the IP address is in-
serted into each address from 4401 to 4404, or 4411 to 4414.
G Set the address 4405 or 4415 NUM LOCK to No, if you are directly interfaced to the
device. You will then have the option to operate the device with the “IBS-Tool”.
G If you are interfaced to the devices via modem you can set the address 4405 or
4415 NUM LOCK to No. You will then have the option to access all devices with the
“IBS-Tool”.
7SD52 7SD52
:
Figure 8-19 PC interfacing directly to the device — schematic example
7SD52 7SD52
d em
Mo
d em
Mo
: Mo
d em
Figure 8-20 PC interfacing via modem — schematic example
Checking a For two devices linked with fibre optical cables (as in Figure 8-19 or 8-20), this con-
Connection Using nection is checked as follows.
Direct Link
7SD52 Manual 8-35

C53000–G1176–C132–2
o Both devices at the link ends have to be switched on.

o Check in the Event Log (see also Subsection 7.1.1.2) or spontaneous annunciations
(see Subsection 7.1.1.6) for the following:
G If the message “PI1 with” (protection data interface 1 connected with, FNo. 3243)
is provided with the device index of the other device, a link has been established
and one device has recognized the other.
G If the protection data interface 2 has also been connected, a corresponding mes-
sage will appear (FNo 3244).
o In the event of a communication link error the message “PI1 Data fault” (FNo.
3229) or “PI2 Data fault” (FNo. 3231) will be displayed. In this case, check the
fibre optical cable link again:
G Have the devices been linked correctly and no cables been interchanged?
G Are the cables free from mechanical damage, intact, and the connectors locked?
G Repeat check if necessary.
Proceed with “Consistency of Topology and Parameterization”.
Checking a If a communication converter is used, please note the instructions enclosed with the
Connection via a device. The communication converter has a test setting where its outputs are looped
Communication back to the inputs.
Converter
Links via the communication converter are tested by means of local loop-back (Figure
8-21, left).
Remote
Local Communication Communication
Converter Converter
optical CC–1 electrical Communication Network electrical CC–2 optical

7SD52 7SD52
local
:
Figure 8-21 Differential protection communication via communication converter and communication network
— schematic example
o Both devices at the link ends have to be switched on.

o First configure the communication converter CC–1:
G Disconnect the auxiliary supply voltage from both poles.
DANGER!
Before opening the communication converter, it is absolutely necessary to iso-
late it from the auxiliary supply voltage at all poles! There is a danger to life by
energized parts!
8-36 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
8.3 Commissioning
G Open the communication converter.

G Set the jumpers to the matching position for the correct interface type and transmis-
sion rate; they must be identical with the parameterization of the 7SD52 (address
1502 CONNEC. 1 OVER for protection data interface 1, 1602 CONNEC. 2
OVER for protection data interface 2, see also Subsection 6.4.2).
G Move the communication converter into test position (jumper X32 in position 2–3).
G Close the communication converter housing.
o Reconnect the auxiliary supply voltage for the communication converter.
o The communication network (X.21 or G.703.1) must be active and connected to the
communication converter. Check this by means of the “device ready”–contact of the
communication converter (continuity at the NO contact).
o If the “device ready”–contact of the communication converter does not close, check
the connection between the communication converter and the net (communication de-
vice). The communication device must emit the correct transmitter clock to the com-
munication converter.
o Change the interface parameters at the 7SD52 (at the device front or via DIGSI® 4):
G Address 1502 CONNEC. 1 OVER = F.optic direct when you are testing protection
data interface 1,
G Address 1602 CONNEC. 2 OVER = F.optic direct when you are testing protection
data interface 2.
o Check the Event Log (see also Subsection 7.1.1.2) or spontaneous annunciations
(see also Subsection 7.1.1.6):
G Message 3217 “PI1 Data reflec ON” (Protection interface 1 data reflection ON)
when you are testing protection data interface 1.
G Message 3218 “PI2 Data reflec ON” (Protection interface 2data reflection ON)
when you are testing protection data interface 2.
G When working with both interfaces, note that the current interface of the 7SD52 is
connected to its associated communication converter.
G If the message is not transmitted check for the following:
− Has the 7SD52 fibre optical transmitting terminal output been correctly linked
with the fibre optical receiving terminal input of the communication converter and
vice versa (No erroneous interchanging)?
− Does the 7SD52 device have the correct interface module and is it working cor-
rectly?
− Are the fibre optic cables intact?
− Are the parameter settings for interface type and transmission rate at the com-
munication converter correct (see above; note the DANGER instruction!)?
G Repeat the check after correction if necessary.
7SD52 Manual 8-37

C53000–G1176–C132–2
o Reset the interface parameters at the 7SD52 correctly:

G Address 1502 CONNEC. 1 OVER = required setting, when you have tested the pro-
tection data interface 1,
G Address 1602 CONNEC. 2 OVER = required setting, when you have tested the pro-
tection data interface 1.
o Disconnect the auxiliary supply voltage of the communication converter at both poles.
Note the above DANGER instruction!
o Reset the communication converter to normal position (X32 in position 1-2) and close
the housing again.
o Reconnect the supply voltage of the communication converter.
Perform the above check at the other end with the device being connected there and
its corresponding communication converter.
Continue with “Consistency of Topology and Parameterization“.
Consistency of Having performed the above checks, the linking of a device pair — including their com-
Topology and munication converters if applicable — has been completely tested and connected to
Parameterization auxiliary supply voltage. Now the devices communicate by themselves.
o Now check the Event Log (see also Subsection 7.1.1.2) or spontaneous annunciations
(see also Subsection 7.1.1.6) of the device where you are working:
G Message FNo. 3243 “PI1 with” (protection data interface 1 linked with) followed
by the device index of the other device, if interface 1 is applying. For protection data
interface 2 the message is FNo 3244 “PI2 with”.
G If the devices are at least connected once, the message FNo 3464 “Chaintopol-
ogy” will then be displayed, too.
G If no other devices are involved in the topology as an entirety, the message FNo
3464 “Topol complete” (Topology complete) will appear.
G And if the device parameterization is also consistent, i.e. the prerequisites for set-
ting the Configuration of the Scope of Functions (Section 5.1), the Power System
Data 1 (6.1.1), the General Protection Data (Power System Data 2) (6.1.3), the set-
tings for Protection Data Interfaces and Differential Protection Topology (Section
6.4.2) have been considered, the fault message, i.e. FNo. 3229 “PI1 Data
fault” or FNo. 3231 “PI2 Data fault”, for the interface just checked, will dis-
appear. The communication and consistency test has now been completed.
G If the fault message of the interface being checked does not disappear, however,
the fault must be found and eliminated. Table 8-14 lists messages that indicate such
faults.
8-38 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
8.3 Commissioning
Table 8-14 Messages announcing inconsistency
FNo Setting Meaning / Measures

3233 DT inconsistent “Device table inconsistent”: the indexing of the devices is in-
consistent (missing numbers or one number used twice,
see Section 6.4.2
3234 DT unequal “Device table unequal”: the ID-numbers of the devices are
unequal (see Section 6.4.2)
3235 Par. different “Parametrization different”: different functional parameters were
set for the devices. They have to be equal at both ends:
Differential protection available or not (see Section 5.1),
Transformer in protected zone or not (see Section 5.1),
Nominal frequency (see Section 6.1.1),
Operational power or current (see Section 6.1.3)
Availability of the The quality of protection data transmission depends on the availability of the protec-
Protection Data tion data interfaces and the transmission. Therefore, check the statistic information of
Interfaces the device. For further details refer to Subsection 7.1.2.1.
Check the following messages:
G FNo 7753 “PI1A/m” indicates the availability of the protection data interface 1 per
minute, FNo 7754 “PI1A/h” per hour. After 2 minutes of data transfer the first value
should indicate at least 99.85 % per-minute-availability, after one hour the per-hour-
availability should be at least 99.85 %.
G If protection data interface 2 is used, the corresponding messages can be found un-
der FNo 7755 “PI2A/m” (per minute) and FNo 7756 “PI2A/h” (per hour).
G If the values are not attained, the protection communication must be checked.
If GPS–synchronization is used, the transmission times can be retrieved, separately
for each direction:
G Concerning protection data interface 1, FNo 7876 “PI1 TD S” indicates the trans-
mission time in sending direction, FNo 7875 “PI1 TD R” in receiving direction.
G Concerning protection data interface 2, FNo 7878 “PI2 TD S” indicates the trans-
mission time in sending direction, FNo 7877 “PI2 TD R” in receiving direction.
In other cases, the mean value of both directions can be retrieved:
G FNo 7751 “PI1 TD” indicates the transmission time via protection data interface 1.
G FNo 7752 “PI2 TD” indicates the transmission time via protection data interface 2.
Checking further If more than two devices have been linked, that is if the object to be protected has
Links more than two ends, or, if two devices have been linked via both protection data inter-
faces to create redundancy, repeat all checks for every possible link as described
above including the consistency check.
If all devices involved in the topology communicate properly and all parameters are
consistent, the message FNo 3464 “Topol complete” appears.
7SD52 Manual 8-39

C53000–G1176–C132–2
If there is a ring topology, the message FNo 3457 “Ringtopology” must also appear
after closing the ring.
However, if you have got a ring topology which only issues the message “Chainto-
pology” instead of “Ringtopology”, the differential protection system is function-
able, but the ring has not yet been closed. Check the missing link as described above
including the consistency test until all links to the ring have been made.
Finally, there should be no more fault messages of the protection data interfaces.
“IBS-Tool” The topology can be displayed as a graph on the monitor using the “IBS-Tool”. For this
you need a personal computer and a web browser. Figure 8-22 exemplifies a differen-
tial protection system for three ends with a ring topology. The devices have been prop-
erly linked (green shaded squares) and work as differential protection (Status: Differ-
ential Mode). The PC has been interfaced to the device with index 2 (PC–connected
relay).
Figure 8-22 illustrates the interface data of a 7SD52 with GPS–synchronization as an
example. The PC has been interfaced to the device with index 3. The transmission
time at protection data interface 1 is 0.000 ms, at protection data interface 2 it is
0.763 ms in transmission direction, 0.772 ms in receiving direction.
Figure 8-22 Example of a ring topology with three ends communicating correctly
8-40 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
8.3 Commissioning
Figure 8-23 Example of viewing the transmission times and availability of the protection data interfaces
8.3.6 Checking for Breaker Failure Protection
If the device is equipped with the breaker failure protection and this function is used,
the interaction with the breakers of the power plant must be tested.
Because of the manifold application facilities and various configuration possibilities of
the power plant it is not possible to give detailed description of the test steps neces-
sary to verify the correct interaction between the breaker failure protection and the
breakers. It is important to consider the local conditions and the protection and plant
drawings.
It is advised to isolate the circuit breaker of the tested feeder at both sides, i.e. to keep
the busbar disconnector and the line disconnector open, in order to ensure operation
of the breaker without risk.
Caution!
Tripping of the complete busbar or busbar section may occur even during tests at the
local feeder breaker. Therefore, it is recommended to interrupt the tripping commands
to the adjacent (busbar) breakers e.g. by switch-off of the associated control voltage.
Nevertheless ensure that trip remains possible in case of a real primary fault if parts
of the power plant are in service.
The trip command of the tested differential protection is made ineffective so that the
local breaker can be tripped only by the breaker failure protection function.
The following lists do not claim to cover all possibilities. On the other hand, they may
contain items that can be bypassed in the actual application.
7SD52 Manual 8-41

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Circuit Breaker The circuit breaker auxiliary contact(s) form an essential part of the breaker failure pro-
Auxiliary Contacts tection system in case they have been connected to the device. Make sure that the
correct assignment has been checked (Subsection 8.3.4).
External Initiation If the breaker failure protection is intended to be initiated by external protection devic-
Conditions es, each of the external initiation conditions must be checked. Depending on the de-
vice version and the setting on the breaker failure protection, single-pole trip or single-
and three-pole trip are possible. Note that the internal pole discrepancy supervision or
the pole discrepancy supervision of the breaker itself may lead to a later three-pole trip
after single-pole trip during the tests. Reconsider the settings of the breaker failure
protection and its ancillary functions. Refer to Subsection 6.10.2 (addresses 3901
etc.) if more information is desired.
At least the tested phase of the device must be subjected to a test current to enable
initiation of the breaker failure protection. This may be a secondary injected current.
Following every initiation the message “BF Start” (FNo 1461) must appear in the
fault annunciations (trip log) or in the spontaneous messages.
The following applies for phase segregated initiation:
G Start by single-pole trip command L1 of the external protection:
Binary inputs “>BF Start L1” (FNo 1435) and if necessary “>BF release” (FNo
1432); look up in the trip log or spontaneous messages.
Trip command depending on the settings.
G Start by three-pole trip command L1, L2, L3 of the external protection via all three
binary inputs:
Binary inputs “>BF Start L1” (FNo 1435) and “>BF Start L2” (FNo 1436) and
“>BF Start L3” (FNo 1437), and if necessary “>BF release” (FNo 1432); look
up in the trip log or spontaneous messages.
Trip command three-pole.
The following applies for common phase initiation:
G Start by three-pole trip command L123 of the external protection:
Binary inputs “>BF Start 3pole” (FNo 1415) and if necessary “>BF release”
(FNo 1432); look up in the trip log or spontaneous messages.
Trip command three-pole (dependent on settings).
Switch off test current.
The following applies if initiation without current flow is possible:
G Start by trip command of the external protection without current flow:
Binary inputs “>BF Start w/o I” (FNo 1439) and if necessary “>BF release”
(FNo 1432); look up in the trip log or spontaneous messages.
Trip command three-pole (dependent on settings).
8-42 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
8.3 Commissioning
Busbar trip The most important thing is the check of the correct distribution of the trip commands
to the adjacent circuit breakers in case the local breaker fails.
The adjacent circuit breakers are those of all feeders which must be tripped in order
to ensure interruption of the fault current should the local breaker fail. In other words,
the adjacent breaker are those of all feeders which may feed the same busbar or bus-
bar section as the faulty feeder.
The identification of the adjacent feeders depends widely on the topology of the bus-
bar and its possible arrangement or switching states. That is why a generally detailed
test description cannot be specified.
In particular if multiple busbars are concerned the trip distribution logic to the other
breakers must be checked. It must be verified for each busbar section that all breakers
connected to the same section are tripped in case the concerned feeder breaker fails,
and no other breakers.
Remote Trip If the trip command of the breaker failure protection or its ancillary functions (e.g. end
fault protection) is intended to trip also the circuit breaker of the remote end of the con-
cerned feeder, the correct transmission and reception of this remote trip must be
checked. Practically, this is performed in conjunction with the transmission checks ac-
cording to Subsection 8.3.10.
Termination of the After completion of the tests, re-establish all provisory measures which might have
Checks been taken for the above tests. Ensure that the states of all switching devices of the
plant are correct, that interrupted trip commands are reconnected and control voltages
are switched on, that setting values which might have been altered are reverted to cor-
rect values, and that protective function are switched to the intended state (on or off).
8.3.7 Checking the Instrument Transformer Connections of One Line End
Should secondary test equipment be connected to the device, it is to be removed or,

if applying, test switches should be in normal operation position.
Note:
It must be taken into consideration that tripping can occur even at the opposite ends
of the protected object, if connections were made wrong.
Before energizing the object to be protected at any end, short-circuit protection must
be ensured at least at the feeding ends. If a separate back-up protection (e.g. overcur-
rent protection) is available, this has to be put into operation and switched to alert first.
Voltage and Rotary If the device has been connected to voltage transformers, these connections are
Field Test checked using primary values. For devices without voltage transformer connection the
rest of this margin header may be omitted.
The voltage transformer connections are individually tested at either end of the object
to be protected. At the other end(s) the circuit breaker(s) remain open first.
7SD52 Manual 8-43

C53000–G1176–C132–2
o Having closed the local circuit breaker, none of the measurement monitoring functions
in the device may respond.
G If there was a fault message, however, the Event Log (see also Subsection 7.1.1.2)
or spontaneous messages (see also Subsection 7.1.1.6) could be checked to in-
vestigate the reason for it.
G At the indication of symmetry monitoring there might actually be asymmetries of the
primary system. If they are part of normal operation, the corresponding monitoring
function is set less sensitive (see Subsection 6.12.2 under “Voltage Balance”, page
6-132).
The voltages can be read on the display at the front, or called up in the PC via the op-
erator or service interface, and compared with the actual measured quantities as pri-
mary or secondary values (refer to Subsection 7.1.3.1). Apart from the absolute values
of the line-earth and line-line voltages, voltage phase differences are indicated so that
the correct phase sequence and polarity reversal of individual voltage transformers
can be seen. The voltages can also be read with the “IBS-Tool” (see below, “Current
Test”).
o The voltages should be almost equal. All the three angles ϕ(ULx–ULy) must be approx-
imately 120°.
G If the measured quantities are not plausible, the connections must be checked and
revised after switching off the line. If the phase difference angle between two volt-
ages is 60° instead of 120°, one voltage must be polarity-reversed. The same ap-
plies if there are phase-to-phase voltages which almost equal the phase-to-ground
voltages instead of having a value that is √3 greater. The measurements are to be
repeated after setting the connections right.
G In general, the phase rotation is a clockwise phase rotation. If the system has an
counter-clockwise phase rotation, this must go for all ends of the protected object.
The measured value allocation must be checked and corrected, if required, after the
line has been isolated. The phase rotation check must then be repeated.
o Open the miniature circuit breaker of the feeder voltage transformers. The measured
voltages in the operational measured values (Subsection 7.1.3.1) appear with a value
close to zero (small measured voltages are of no concern).
G Check in the event log (Section 7.1.1.2) or spontaneous messages (Section
7.1.1.6) that the VT mcb trip was noticed (message “>FAIL:Feeder VT ON”). A
precondition is that the position of the VT mcb is connected to the device via a bi-
nary input.
o Close the VT mcb: The above message appears in the event log as “OFF”, i. e.
“>FAIL:Feeder VT OFF”).
G If one of the events does not appear, the connection and routing of these signals
(Subsection 5.2.4) must be checked.
G If the “ON”-state and “OFF”-state are swapped, the contact type (H-active or L-ac-
tive) must be checked and remedied (Subsection 5.2.4).
o The protected object is switched off.
o The check must be carried out for all ends.
8-44 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
8.3 Commissioning
8.3.8 Checking the Instrument Transformer Connections of Two Line Ends
Current Test The connections of the current transformers are tested with primary values. A load
current of at least 5 % of the rated operational current is required. Any direction is pos-
sible.
This test cannot replace visual inspection of the correct current transformer connec-
tions. Therefore, the inspection according to Section 8.2.3 is a prerequisite.
o The current transformer connections are tested at each end of the protected object.
The current flows through the protected object. For more than two ends, one current
path (i.e. two ends) is tested first.
o After closing the circuit breakers, none of the measured value monitoring functions in
the 7SD52 must respond. However, in the event of a monitoring signal, the reason for
this signal can be investigated in the Event Log (see Section 7.1.1.2) or in the sponta-
neous messages (Section 7.1.1.6).
G If current summation errors occur, check the matching factors (see Section 6.1.1,
“Connection of the Currents”).
G Messages from the symmetry monitoring could occur because there actually are
asymmetrical conditions in the primary system. If they are part of normal operation,
the corresponding monitoring function is set less sensitive (see Section 6.12.2,
“Symmetry Supervision”).
Currents can be viewed as primary or secondary measured values in the front display
panel or via the operator or service interface with a personal computer, and compared
with the actually measured values (see also Section 7.1.3.1). The absolute values as
well as the phase differences of the currents are indicated so that the correct phase
sequence and polarity of individual transformers can also be seen.
The “IBS Tool” provides comfortable read-out possibilities for all measured values with
visualisation using phasor diagrams (Figure 8-24).
o The current amplitudes must be approximately the same. Each one of the three angles
ϕ(ILx–ILy) must be approximately 120°.
G If the measured values are not plausible, the connections must be checked and cor-
rected after switching off the protected object and short-circuiting the current trans-
formers. If, for example, the phase difference between two currents is 60° instead
of 120°, one of the currents must have a reversed polarity. The same is the case, if
a substantial earth current 3I0 occurs:
− 3I0 ≈ phase current Þ one or two phase currents are missing,
− 3I0 ≈ doubled phase current Þ one or two phase currents have a reversed po-
larity.
7SD52 Manual 8-45

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Figure 8-24 Local measured values in the “IBS Tool” — example of plausible measured values
o The measurements are to be repeated after setting the connections right.

o The previously stated tests of the measured values are to be repeated at the other end
of the tested current path. The current value of the other end can also be read out lo-
cally as percentage values as well as the phase angles (cf. Subsection 7.1.3).
In the “IBS Tool”, the local and remote measured values can be graphically displayed.
Figure 8-25 shows an example.
Polarity Check If the device is connected with voltage transformers, the local measured values al-
ready provide a polarity test.
For more than two ends, one current path is continued to be tested first. A load current
of at least 5 % of the rated operational current is required. Any direction is possible but
must be known.
o With closed circuit breakers, the power values can be viewed as primary and second-
ary measured values in the front display panel or via the operator or service interface
with a personal computer (see also Subsection 7.1.3.1).
Here, again, the IBS Tool is a comfortable help as the vector diagrams also show the
correlation between the currents and voltages (Figure 8-25). Cyclically and acyclically
swapped phases can easily be detected.
8-46 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
8.3 Commissioning
Figure 8-25 Local and remote measured values in the “IBS Tool” — examples for plausible measured values
o With the aid of the measured power values you are able to verify that they correlate to
the load direction, reading either at the device itself or in DIGSI® 4 (Figure 8-26).
G P positive, if active power flows into the protected object,
G P negative, if active power flows towards the busbar,
G Q positive, if (inductive) reactive power flows into the protected object,
G Q negative, if (inductive) reactive power flows towards the busbar.
Therefore, the power results and their components must have opposite signs at both
ends.
It must be taken into consideration that high charging currents, which might occur with
long overhead lines or with cables, are capacitive, i.e. correspond to a negative reac-
tive power into the line. In spite of a resistive-inductive load, this may lead to a slightly
negative reactive power at the feeding end whereas the other end shows an increased
7SD52 Manual 8-47

C53000–G1176–C132–2
negative reactive power. The lower the load current for the test, the higher the signif-
icance of this influence. In order to get unambiguous results, you should increase the
load current if necessary.
P
Positive active power in
the direction of the line
SLoad
jQ
Positive reactive power Negative reactive power

in the direction of the line in the direction of the line
Figure 8-26 Complex (apparent) power
o The power measurement provides an initial indication as to whether the measured val-
ues of one end have the correct polarity.
G If the reactive power is correct but the active power has the wrong sign, cyclic phase
swapping of the currents (right) or of the voltages (left) might be the cause.
G If the active power direction is correct but the reactive power has the wrong sign,
cyclic phase swapping of the currents (left) or of the voltages (right) might be the
cause.
G If both the active power and the reactive power have the wrong sign, the polarity
according to the address 201 CT Starpoint is to be checked and corrected.
The phase angles between currents and voltages must also be conclusive. Each one
of the three phase angles ϕ (ULx–ILx) must be approximately the same and must rep-
resent the operating status. In the event of power in the direction of the protected ob-
ject, they represent the current phase displacement (cos ϕ positive); in the event of
power in the direction of the busbar they are higher by 180° (cos ϕ negative). However,
charging currents might have to be taken into consideration (see above).
o The measurements may have to be repeated after correction the connections.
o The above described tests of the measured values also have to be performed at the
other end of the tested current path. The current and voltage values as well as the
phase angles of the other end can also be read out locally as percentage values (Sub-
section 7.1.3). Note that currents flowing through the object (without charging cur-
rents) ideally have opposite signs at both ends, i.e. turned by 180°.
In the “IBS Tool” the local and remote measured values can be shown graphically. You
can see an example in Figure 8-25.
o The protected object is now switched off, i.e. the circuit breakers are opened.
8-48 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
8.3 Commissioning
Polarity Check for If the standard connection of the device is used whereby the current measuring input
the Current I4 is connected in the starpoint of the set of current transformers (refer also to the con-
Input I4 nection circuit diagram in the Appendix, Figure A-15), then the correct polarity of the
earth current path in general automatically results.
If however the current I4 is derived from a separate summation CT (e.g. a core balance
CT) an additional direction check with this current is necessary.
o The test is done with a disconnected trip circuit and primary load current. It must be
noted that during all simulations that do not exactly correspond with cases that may
occur in practice, the non-symmetry of measured values may cause the measured val-
ue monitoring to pick up. These must therefore be ignored during such tests.
.
DANGER!
Working on measurement transformers requires the highest precautions!
Short-circuit the secondary side of the current transformers before any current
connections to the device are opened!
L1
Bus
L2
bar
L3
(alternatively
disconnect here)
e
bypass one n
phase
Ue Un UL1 UL2 UL3 Un

IL1
IL2
IL3
I4
7SD52
Line
Figure 8-27 Polarity testing for I4, example with current transformers configured in a
Holmgreen connection
o To generate a displacement voltage, the e–n winding of one phase in the voltage
transformer set (e.g. L1) is bypassed (refer to Figure 8-27). If no connection on the
e–n windings of the voltage transformer is available, the corresponding phase is open
circuited on the secondary side. Via the current path only the current from the current
transformer in the phase from which the voltage in the voltage path is missing, is con-
nected; the other CTs are short-circuited. If the line carries load in the first quadrant,
the protection is in principle subjected to the same conditions that exist during an earth
fault in the direction of the line.
7SD52 Manual 8-49

C53000–G1176–C132–2
o The same manipulation is carried out with the current and voltage transformers at the
other end.
o Figure 8-28 illustrates an example corresponding to the circuit in Figure 8-27, when
the current flows in direction of the object to be protected. The currents IL2 and IL3 are
almost zero, an earth current 3I0 of the same value as IL1 appears. Accordingly, the
voltage UL1E is missing and a zero sequence voltage 3U0 appears.
o In the event of a polarity fault, 3I0 is in opposite phase with IL1 or the zero sequence
voltage 3U0 supplements the other two voltages to a (here false) voltage star. Open
the circuit breakers, short-circuit current transformers and set current and voltage
transformer connections right. Repeat test.
o Having finished the test, open all circuit breakers, short-circuit current transformers
and restore current and voltage transformer connections.
Local Measurement – Primary Values
Currents: Voltages:
+90° +90°
±180° 0° ±180° 0°
–90° –90°
Address: 2 Frequency: 50.00 Hz

IL1 = 199.71 A, 0.0 ° UL1E = 0.71 kV, 10.4 °
IL2 = 0.00 A, 0.0 ° UL2E = 133.44 kV, –109.3 °
IL3 = 0.00 A, 0.3 ° UL3E = 132.34 kV, 130.4 °
3I0 = 199.37 A, –0.1 ° 3U0 = 133.00 kV, -169.8 °
Figure 8-28 Local measured values — example for single-phase, asymmetrical test
Measuring Differen- The test for two ends is terminated with the reading of the differential and restraint cur-
tial and Restraint rents which simultaneously check that the current transformer connections have been
Currents restored correctly after the I4 test (if performed).
8-50 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
8.3 Commissioning
o Read out the differential and restraint currents. They are available for every phase at
the device display or in DIGSI® 4 amongst the measured values (cf. Subsection
7.1.3.1).
G The differential currents must be low, at least one scale less than the currents flow-
ing through. If high charging currents are to be expected in long overhead lines or
cables, these are additionally included in the differential currents.
Figure 8-29 Differential and restraint currents — example for plausible currents
G The restraint currents result from the pickup value I-DIFF> (address 1210, cf.
Subsection 6.2.2) in addition to the sum of the current errors to be tolerated: such
as the locally permissible current transformer error according to address 253 E%
ALF/ALF_N (cf. Subsection 6.1.1) the permissible current transformer errors at the
other ends according to that setting there, as well as the internal estimation of the
system errors (frequency, synchronization and delay time difference errors). With
the default values for I-DIFF> (0.3 IN) and E% ALF/ALF_N (5.0 % = 0.05) there is
I stab I I
----------- = 0.3 + 0.05 ⋅ -------- + 0.05 ⋅ -------- + Sytem errors
I NO I N1 I N2
Set value Permiss. Lo- Permiss. Re-

I-DIFF> cal CT error mote CT error
7SD52 Manual 8-51

C53000–G1176–C132–2
with
I the actual current flowing,
INO the nominal operating current as parameterized,
IN1 the primary nominal current of the local current transformers,
IN2 the primary nominal current of the current transformers of the remote end.
In the “IBS-Tool”, the differential and restraint currents are displayed as a graph in a
characteristics diagram. One example is illustrated in Figure 8-29.
o If there is a differential current in the size of twice the through-flowing current, you may
assume a polarity reversal of the current transformer(s) at one line end. Check the po-
larity again and set it right after short-circuiting all the three current transformers. If you
have modified these current transformers, also perform a power and angle test.
o Finally, open circuit breaker again.
o If parameter settings have been changed for the tests, reset them to the values nec-
essary for operation.
8.3.9 Checking the Instrument Transformer Connections for More than Two Ends
If there are more than two ends, all tests according to Subsection 8.3.8 — as far as
they are applying in this case — have to be repeated for the other current paths in such
a way that all ends of the object to be protected have been included in the current flow
test at least once. It is not necessary to test every possible current path.
At the ends not involved in a test the circuit breakers are to remain open. Also pay at-
tention to all safety notes, especially the DANGER warning in Section 8.3.8!
The circuit breakers are reopened after the last test.
In the event that parameters were modified for the tests, they finally have to be set to
the values necessary for operation.
8.3.10 Remote Tripping, Remote Signalling etc.
As soon as the communication between the devices has been established, the func-
tions that depend on the transmission can be tested.
This applies in particular to
G remote tripping via a binary input (cf. Section 6.3),
G transmission of further remote commands and remote signals (cf. Section 6.6),
G verification of remote circuit breaker positions.
The “IBS-Tool” can be used to achieve the latter. It contains a sheet where the circuit
breaker position is notified. Note that the circuit breaker position can only be indicated
reliably, if the circuit breaker's auxiliary contacts have been signalled to the corre-
sponding device via binary inputs. Without these auxiliary contacts the devices can
8-52 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
8.3 Commissioning
only deduce the circuit breaker positions from the current flow. But as the current may
be zero even if the circuit breaker is closed, you must expect wrong indications. The
circuit breaker position is, however, always interpreted by the protection functions in
such a way that it goes on the safe side if in doubt.
For all the other commands and information to be transmitted, generate the source of
the information and check that the desired effect is created at the receiving end. Also
note the following:
DANGER!
Make sure that switching operations produced by remote command can be per-
formed without any danger during the actual switching state!
8.3.11 Testing User Defined Functions
7SD52 has a vast capability for allowing functions to be defined by the user, especially
with the CFC logic. Any special function or logic added to the device must be checked.
Naturally, general test procedures cannot be given. Rather, the configuration of these
user defined functions and the necessary associated conditions must be known and
verified. Of particular importance are possible interlocking conditions of the switch-
gear (circuit breakers, isolators, etc.). They must be considered and tested.
8.3.12 Trip and Close Test with the Circuit Breaker
The circuit breaker and tripping circuits can be conveniently tested by the device
7SD52.
The procedure is described in detail in Section 7.3.
If the check does not produce the expected results, the cause may be established from
the text in the display of the device or the PC. If necessary, the connections of the cir-
cuit breaker auxiliary contacts must be checked:
It must be noted that the binary inputs used for the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts
must be assigned separately for the CB-test. It is accordingly not sufficient that the
auxiliary contacts are assigned to the binary inputs with FNo 351 to 353, 379 and/or
380 (depending on the options of the auxiliary contacts); in addition, the correspond-
ing FNos 366 to 368 and/or 410 and/or 411 (depending on the options of the auxiliary
contacts) must be configured (see also Section 6.13.2). These are exclusively used
for the CB-test. In addition, the ready state of the circuit breaker for the CB-test must
be indicated to the binary input FNo 371.
7SD52 Manual 8-53

C53000–G1176–C132–2
8.3.13 Stability Check and Triggering Oscillographic Recordings
At the end of commissioning, an investigation of switching operations of the circuit

breaker(s), under load conditions, should be done to assure the stability of the protec-
tion during the dynamic processes. Oscillographic recordings obtain the maximum in-
formation about the behaviour of the 7SD52.
Requirements Along with the capability of recording waveform data during system faults, the 7SD52
also has the capability of capturing the same data when commands are given to the
device via the service program DIGSI® 4, the serial interfaces, or a binary input. For
the latter, the binary input must be assigned to the function “>Trig.Wave.Cap.”
(FNo 4). Triggering for the oscillographic recording then occurs when the input is en-
ergized. For example, an auxiliary contact of the circuit breaker may be used to control
the binary input for triggering.
An oscillographic recording that is externally triggered (that is, without a protective el-
ement pickup or device trip) is processed by the device as a normal fault recording
with the exception that data are not given in the fault messages (trip log). The exter-
nally triggered record has a number for establishing a sequence.
Triggering with To trigger oscillographic recording with DIGSI® 4, click on Test in the left part of the
DIGSI® 4 window. Double click the entry Test Wave Form in the list in the right part of the win-
dow to trigger the recording. See Figure 8-30.
A report is given in the bottom left region of the screen. In addition, message segments
concerning the progress of the procedure are displayed.
The SIGRA program or the Comtrade Viewer program is required to view and analyse
the oscillographic data. Refer to Subsection 7.1.4
Figure 8-30 Triggering oscillographic recording with DIGSI® 4
8-54 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
8.4 Final Preparation of the Device
8.4 Final Preparation of the Device
Tighten the used screws at the terminals; those ones not being used should be slightly
fastened. Ensure all pin connectors are properly inserted.
Caution!
Do not use force! The tightening torques according to Chapter 2 must not be exceed-
ed as the threads and terminal chambers may otherwise be damaged!
Verify that all service settings are correct. This is a crucial step because some setting
changes might have been made during commissioning. The protective settings under
device configuration, input/output configuration are especially important (Section 5.1)
as well as the power system data, and activated Groups A through D (if applicable).
All desired elements and functions must be set ON. See Chapter 6. Keep a copy of all
of the in-service settings on a PC.
Check the internal clock of the device. If necessary, set the clock or synchronize the
clock if it is not automatically synchronized. For assistance, refer to Subsection 7.2.1.
The annunciation memory buffers should be cleared, particularly the operational mes-
sages (event log) and fault messages (trip log). Future information will then only apply
for actual system events and faults. To clear the buffers, press MAIN MENU → An-
nunciation → Set/Reset. Refer to Subsection 7.1.1 if further assistance is need-
ed. The numbers in the switching statistics should be reset to the values that were ex-
isting prior to the testing, or to values in accordance with the user's practices. Set the
statistics by pressing MAIN MENU → Annunciation → Statistic. Refer to Sub-
section 7.1.2 if more information is needed.
Press the ESC key, several times if necessary, to return to the default display.
Clear the LEDs on the front panel by pressing the LED key. Any output relays that were
picked up prior to clearing the LEDs are reset when the clearing action is performed.
Future indications of the LEDs will then apply only for actual events or faults. Pressing
the LED key also serves as a test for the LEDs because they should all light when the
button is pushed. Any LEDs that are lit after the clearing attempt are displaying actual
conditions.
The green “RUN” LED must be on. The red “ERROR” LED must not be lit.
Close the protective switches. If test switches are available, then these must be in the
operating position.
The device is now ready for operation.
7SD52 Manual 8-55

C53000–G1176–C132–2
8-56 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Maintenance and Fault Tracing 9
General comments about the routine checks and maintenance activities to ensure the
high reliability of the 7SD52 are given in this chapter. A procedure for replacing com-
ponents such as the buffer battery is discussed. Troubleshooting advice is provided.
A procedure for replacing the power supply fuse is described. Some comments con-
cerning the return of a device to the factory are given.
9.1 General 9-2

9.2 Routine Checks 9-3
9.3 Maintenance 9-5
9.4 Fault Tracing 9-8
9.5 Corrective Action/Repairs 9-10
9.6 Return 9-14
7SD52 Manual 9-1

C53000–G1176–C132–2
9 Maintenance and Fault Tracing
9.1 General
Siemens numerical protective and control SIPROTEC® 4 devices are designed to re-
quire no special maintenance. All measurement and signal processing circuits are fully
solid state. All input modules are also fully solid state. The output relays are hermeti-
cally sealed or provided with protective covers.
Since the device is almost completely self-monitored, from the measuring inputs to the
output relays, hardware and software problems are automatically reported. The self-
monitoring ensures the high availability of the device and generally allows for a cor-
rective rather than preventive maintenance strategy. Therefore, maintenance checks
in short intervals are not required.
Operation of the device is automatically blocked when a hardware failure is detected.
The “live status” relay drops out to provide an alarm by its breaking contact. If a prob-
lem is detected in the external measuring circuits, the device normally only provides
messages.
Recognized software failures result in the resetting and restarting of the processor
system. If such a failure is not resolved by the restart, further restart attempts are ini-
tiated. If a problem is still present after three restart attempts, the device is automati-
cally taken out of service. Then the “live status” contact drops out to provide an alarm
and the red “ERROR” LED on the front panel illuminates.
The reaction of the device to failures and problems can be viewed in chronological se-
quence in the operational messages (event log). See Sub-section 7.1.1. The messag-
es can be used to diagnose the problem.
When the device communicates with a master control system of the substation or oth-
er central control systems, the event and alarm messages are also sent over the serial
interface.
9-2 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
9.2 Routine Checks
9.2 Routine Checks
Routine checks of the characteristic curves or pick-up values of the protective ele-
ments are not necessary because they form part of the continuously supervised
firmware programs. The normally scheduled interval for plant maintenance can be
used for carrying out operational testing of the protective and control equipment. The
maintenance serves mainly to check the serial or hardwired interfaces of the device,
i.e. the coupling with the plant.
The steps listed below are recommended for routine checks. If a problem is detected
during these checks, refer to Section 9.4.
o Verify that the green “RUN” LED is lit on the front panel and the red “ERROR” LED is
not.
o Check that the states of the LEDs on the front panel give an accurate image of the
conditions of the device and the plant. Investigate any problems or uncertainties.
o Press the LED key. All of the LEDs should temporarily light except for the “ERROR”
LED. Only the LEDs indicating specific present conditions should remain lit.
o Read the measurement values and compare them to an independent source to check
the measuring circuits of the 7SD52. Refer to Subsection 7.1.3 for assistance.
o Review the messages given in the event log. Be sure there are no reports of unknown
problems or abnormal occurrences related to the device, the measuring circuits, or the
power system. See Sub-section 7.1.1.2 for help.
o Perform a reset (reboot) of the device. A complete check of the hardware is done. The
device is effectively out of service during the reset, which lasts for about 10 to 15 sec-
onds. To perform the reset from the operator control panel, press the MENU key and use
the and keys to select the Device Reset under the TEST/DIAGNOSE sub-
menu. Press the ENTER key, enter Password No. 4 for test and diagnostics, and answer
with Yes. During the reset, the “ERROR” and “RUN” LEDs are lit. After a successful
reset, the default display reappears and the LEDs return to indicate normal operation.
The device is then back in-service. To perform the reset with DIGSI® 4, establish the
Online mode, select Device in the menu bar, and then Reset. Enter the password
for test and diagnostics; then OK.
o Other testing can be done with DIGSI® 4 on-line. In Hardware Test under Test, the
conditions of all of the binary inputs, binary outputs, and LEDs can be monitored. Com-
pare the indicated conditions with the actual conditions. Do not change the states of
the device components because the power station is immediately affected!
Warning!
Alterations of the states of the binary inputs, outputs, and LEDs must not be done with
test features during normal operation. Any such change immediately affects the inputs
and outputs of the device, and therefore the connected switching devices! This in-
cludes, for instance, non-interlocked primary switching!
o The trip and close circuits for circuit breakers and other primary equipment can be ver-
ified with operator control actions. Refer to Section 7.3 for details.
o The IBS-tool enables the user to check measured data and states at both ends of the
protected object. For more details see Subsection 7.1.3.2.
7SD52 Manual 9-3

C53000–G1176–C132–2
o Individual devices can be switched out of the differential protection system for test and
revision works. See Subsection 7.2.4.
9-4 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
9.3 Maintenance
9.3 Maintenance
9.3.1 Replacing the Buffer Battery
The battery is used to retain the annunciation memories and fault recording data in the
event of an interruption of the power supply. The battery also maintains the internal
system clock with calendar after a loss of the power supply.
The battery is checked by the processor at regular intervals. If the capacity of the bat-
tery is found to be declining, an alarm is generated. The battery should be changed
when this alarm is given, or at the latest, after 10 years of service.
Recommended Battery:
Lithium Battery 3 V/1 Ah, Type CR 1/2 AA. For example:
− VARTA Order Number 6127 101 501
The battery is located near the front edge of the CPU printed circuit board. The front
panel of the device must be removed to change the battery.
To replace the battery:
o Save the annunciations and fault records. These are the data under the Annunciation
sub-menu (all items in this sub-menu). The records and data are lost when the battery
is removed. The simplest and fastest method is to use the save feature in DIGSI® 4
when the program is on-line.
Note: All of the protective and control settings, including the input/output configuration
and the CFC logic, are not affected by a power supply interruption. The settings are
stored independently of the battery. The settings are not lost when the battery is re-
moved, nor are the settings affected if the device operates without a battery.
o Have the replacement battery ready.
Caution!
Do not short the battery! Do not reverse the polarity of the battery! Do not lay the bat-
tery on the ground mat used to protect components from electrostatic discharges! Do
not recharge the battery!
o Isolate the power supply by opening the protective switches for both terminals.
Caution!
Electrostatic discharges through the connections of the components, wiring, and con-
nectors must be avoided. Wearing a grounded wrist strap is preferred; otherwise, first
touch a grounded metal part before handling the internal components. Do not insert or
remove interface connectors under live conditions!
7SD52 Manual 9-5

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Warning!
Hazardous voltages may exist in the device, even after the power supply is discon-
nected and the boards are withdrawn from the case! Capacitors can still be charged!
o Remove the covers on the front panel and loosen the screws that are securing the
front panel.
o Carefully pull off the front panel and bend it aside. The front panel is connected to the
internal CPU printed circuit board with a short ribbon-cable.
o Disconnect the ribbon-cable that links the front panel and the CPU board (), at the
side of the front panel. To disconnect the cable, push up on the top latch of the plug
connector and push down on the bottom latch of the plug connector. Carefully set
aside the front panel.
o The battery is located on the bottom-front side of the CPU (Ê) board. See Figure 9-1.
Battery grip
Battery
+ –
G1
Slot 5 Slot 19 Ê Processor board CPU

Ê Ë Ë Input/output board I/O
Figure 9-1 Front view without front panel – position of buffer battery (simplified and re-
duced)
o Remove the old battery from the snap-on connector using the plastic battery grip
o Remove the battery grip from the old battery, and place the grip on the new battery.
o Observing the polarity and firmly insert the new battery into the snap-on connector
9-6 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
9.3 Maintenance
o Connect the ribbon-cable between the CPU (Ê) board and the front panel. Be espe-
cially careful not to bend any of the connector pins! Do not use force! Be sure that the
plug connectors latch.
o Carefully replace the front panel being mindful of the ribbon-cable. Fasten the panel
to the case with the screws.
o Close the protective switches to apply voltage to the power supply.
o After the device is operating, data saved in DIGSI® 4 can be loaded back into the de-
vice.
If the internal system clock is not automatically synchronized via a serial interface,
then the clock should be set at this point. Refer to Subsection 7.2.1 if assistance is
needed to set the clock.
Warning!
The used battery contains Lithium. Do not throw the battery into the trash! It must be
disposed off in line with the applicable regulations!
Do not reverse the polarity! Do not completely discharge! Do not throw the bat-
tery into a fire! Explosion hazard!
9.3.2 Replacing Interface Modules
The serial interface modules are replaceable. If an interface is suspected to be defect,

the module can be replaced by a different module (only for test or definitely).
The replacing procedure is described precisely in Subsection 8.1.3.4. If a module is
replaced, please observe the hints for disassembly in Subsection 8.1.3.2 and reas-
sembly of the device in Subsection 8.1.3.5.
In 7SD522, the place for the protection data interface PROT I 2 which is not required
in this device can be used for a spare module.
7SD52 Manual 9-7

C53000–G1176–C132–2
9.4 Fault Tracing
If a device reports a problem or failure, the procedure below is recommended.

If none of the LEDs on the front panel are lit, then verify:
G Are the modules placed correctly and locked by the front panel?
G Are the plug-in connectors of the ribbon cables plugged properly into the modules
and are the interlockings latched correctly?
G Are the voltage magnitude and polarity correct for the power supply? Connection
drawings are shown in Section A.2 of Appendix A.
G Has the fuse in the power supply not blown. The location of the fuse is shown in
Figure 9-5. If the fuse needs to be replaced, see Subsection 9.5.2.
If the red “ERROR” LED is on and the green “RUN” LED is off, then the device has
recognized an internal fault. Re-initializing the device can be attempted (see Section
9.2).
If you see the following display, the device has arrived “monitor”-mode. In this case
you may initialize the device via DIGSI® 4:
MONITOR 01/05
---------------------
Equipment data –> 1
User interface –> 2
System I-face –> 3
Reset –> 4
Siemens intern –> 5
Figure 9-2 Monitor menu in the display
G Connect the SIPROTEC® 4 device to the PC and open the DIGSI® 4 application in
the PC.
G Select Initialize device in the menu Device (Figure 9-3).
Figure 9-3 Initializing device via DIGSI® 4 — example
9-8 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
9.4 Fault Tracing
G Enter password No. 7. The display becomes blank. After a successful initialization,
the LEDs return to indicate normal operation and the default display reappears. The
device settings are downloaded to the device provided they had been saved in the
PC after commissioning (refer to Section 8.4). The device is then in-service.
Further Assistance If these steps do not resolve the problem, please call your local Siemens representa-
tive or customer hot-line.
Our customer hot-line needs the following information to assist you:
− the complete order number of the device (“MLFB”),
− the serial number of the device (BF ...),
− the firmware version,
− the boot system version.
This information can be read out from the device panel. From the MAIN MENU select
Settings → Setup/Extras. The ordering code and the serial number can also be
found on the name plate sticker on the device housing.
If a device file had been created on the harddisk of the PC, the information can be
found in the device file using DIGSI® 4 in online mode as shown in Figure 9-4.
G Open the DIGSI® 4 application in the PC and select the device.
G Open the device in Offline mode.
G Select File → Properties from the menu bar. The desired information is shown.
Figure 9-4 Retrieving the device data in the device properties — example
7SD52 Manual 9-9

C53000–G1176–C132–2
9.5 Corrective Action/Repairs
9.5.1 Software Procedures
A restart of the processor system, as described in Section 9.2, can be done as an at-
tempt to solve a problem. Setting changes can be made to solve simple problems,
such as sporadic alarms from elements of the measured value supervision. These at-
tempts of solving problems can be done while the device is in service.
If a processor restart or setting change does not remedy the problem, then no further
action should be done while the device is in service. Instead, replace the device with
a tested spare.
9.5.2 Hardware Procedures
Hardware modifications or repair should be limited in scope to changes that are abso-
lutely necessary. Some examples of hardware repair are changing the mini-fuse in the
power supply and replacing a printed circuit board or module.
Hardware modifications or repair should only be done by experienced personnel. Do
not insert or extract a printed circuit board unless the device is completely isolated.
Soldering work must not be done on the printed circuit boards.
Disassembling the The device must be disassembled if work is to be done on the printed circuit boards.
Device The procedure below should be used.
o Prepare area of work. Provide a grounded mat for protecting components subject to
damage from electrostatic discharges (ESD). The following equipment is needed:
− Screwdriver with a 5 to 6 mm or 1/4 inch tip.
− #1 Phillips screwdriver.
− 4.5 mm socket or nut driver.
o Isolate the power supply by opening the protective switches (test switches, fuses, or
miniature circuit breakers) for both terminals.
o Disconnect all communication cables from the device. Carefully remove optical fibres
S
from the device. Apply protective caps to the fibre ends and the communication ports
on the device.
These activities do not apply if the device is for surface mounting.
Warning!
Laser injection! Do not look directly into the fibre-optic elements!
9-10 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
o Unfasten the screw-posts of the D-subminiature connector on the back panel at loca-
tion “A”.
This activity does not apply if the device is for surface mounting.
o If the device has more communication interfaces at locations “B” and/or “C” on the
rear, the screws located diagonally to the interfaces must be removed.
These activities are not necessary if the device is for surface mounting.
o Remove the corner covers on the front panel and loosen the screws that are holding
the front panel to the device case.
o Carefully pull off the front panel. The front panel is connected to the CPU board with
a short ribbon-cable.
On devices with detached operator panel, the front panel can be pulled off directly
(without a ribbon cable).
Caution!
Electrostatic discharges through the connections of the components, wiring, and con-
nectors must be avoided! Wearing a grounded wrist strap is preferred; otherwise, first
touch a grounded metal part. Do not insert or remove interface connectors under live
conditions!
Warning!
Hazardous voltages may exist in the device, even after the power supply is discon-
nected and the boards are withdrawn from the case! Capacitors can still be charged!
o At one end, disconnect the ribbon-cable that links the front panel and the CPU board
(), at the side of the front panel. To disconnect the cable, push up on the top latch of
the plug connector and push down on the bottom latch of the plug connector. Carefully
set aside the front panel.
For the surface mounted device, the 7-pin connector X16 must be disconnected from
the CPU board behind the D-subminiature port, and the ribbon-cable that runs to the
68-pin connector on the back must be detached.
o Disconnect the ribbon-cable between the CPU board and the I/O board.
o The boards can be removed and laid on the grounded mat to protect them from ESD
damage.
A greater effort is required to remove the CPU board from the device designed for sur-
face mounting, because of the type of connectors.
Replacing the
Power Supply Fuse
o Keep ready replacement fuse 5 x 20 mm. Verify the correct rating, correct character-
istic (T) as well as the correct coding.
This data is printed on the module (see Figure 9-5). The type of fuse depends on the
auxiliary supply voltage (refer to Table 9-1).
o The processor module CPU, which also incorporates the power supply (refer to Figure
8-7 in Subsection 8.1.3) must be removed and placed on a surface suitable for elec-
trostatically sensitive devices (ESD).
7SD52 Manual 9-11

C53000–G1176–C132–2
o Remove the defective fuse. Figure 9-5 illustrates the fuse.
2 3 4
C53207-A324-B20-
C53207-A324-B30-
C53207-A324-B40-
F1
B20 T4H250V
B30 B40 T2H250V
Figure 9-5 Power supply mini-fuse on the input/output board I/O–1
Table 9-1 Assigning of the mini-fuse rating to the device auxiliary voltage rating
7SD52∗ Version Rated Auxiliary Voltages Fuse Type

–2∗∗∗∗–∗∗∗∗ 24 V to 48 V DC T4H250V
–4∗∗∗∗–∗∗∗∗ 60 V to 125 VDC T2H250V
–5∗∗∗∗–∗∗∗∗ 110 V to 250 VDC; 115 VAC T2H250V
o Install the new fuse into the holder.

o Carefully install the processor board CPU in the case.
Reassembling the To reassemble the device:

Device
o Connect the ribbon-cable between the I/O board and the CPU board. Be especially
careful not to bend any of the connector pins! Do not use force! Be sure the connectors
latch.
o Connect the ribbon-cable between the CPU board and the front panel. Be especially
careful not to bend any of the connector pins! Do not use force! Be sure the plug con-
nectors latch.
o Carefully replace the front panel being mindful of the ribbon-cables. Fasten the front
panel to the case with the screws.
The following steps are not applicable for the surface mount version:
o Align and fix the rear interfaces again.
9-12 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
o Attach all D-subminiature plugs to the matching D-subminiature sockets.

o Screw in all the fibre optical connectors where applicable.
o Tighten all optical connectors. When connecting an FC–connector make sure that its
lug is plugged properly into the slot of the socket and it does not come out when tight-
ening the knurled nut. The knurled nut must not be tightened too strong.
Warning!
Laser injection! Do not look into the LEDs or fibre-optic elements! Do not use optical
instruments! Laser class 3A according to EN 60825–1.
Close the protective switches to apply voltage to the power supply. If the green “RUN”
LED does not light, there is a fault in the power supply. The device should be sent to
the factory. See Section 9.6.
7SD52 Manual 9-13

C53000–G1176–C132–2
9.6 Return
Siemens strongly recommends that no further repairs on defective devices, boards,

or components be done. Special electronic components are used for which proce-
dures for preventing electrostatic discharges must be followed. Most importantly, spe-
cial production techniques are necessary to avoid damaging the wave-soldered multi-
layer boards, the sensitive components, and the protective varnish.
If a problem cannot be solved by the procedures described in Section 9.5, then the
complete device (including front cover) should be returned to the factory.
The original transport packaging material should be used for returning a device. If al-
ternative packaging material is used, then the device and other contents must be pro-
vided with protection against shock and vibration according to IEC 60255–21–1
Class 2 and IEC 60255–21–2 Class 1.
Before returning a device, retrieve and save all of the configuration, function and con-
trol settings, and any important information. Note any changes that were made to the
jumpers on the internal printed circuit boards after the device was first delivered.
Note:
Repaired devices are returned from the factory with all jumpers on the printed circuit
boards set in the original positions according to the ordering number. All configuration,
function and control parameters have the default setting.
9-14 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Technical Data 10
This chapter provides the technical data of the SIPROTEC® 4 7SD52 device and its
individual functions, including the limiting values that must not be exceeded under any
circumstances. The electrical and functional data of fully equipped 7SD52 devices are
followed by the mechanical data, with dimensional drawings.
10.1 General Device Data 10-2

10.2 Differential Protection 10-11
10.3 Intertripping, External Direct Local and Remote Tripping 10-13
10.4 Transmission of Binary Information (optional) 10-14
10.5 Protection Data Interface and Differential Protection Topology 10-15
10.6 Time Overcurrent Protection (optional) 10-16
10.7 Instantaneous High-Current Switch-onto-Fault Protection 10-21
10.8 Automatic Reclosure Function (optional) 10-21
10.10 Thermal Overload Protection 10-23
10.11 Monitoring Functions 10-25
10.12 Supplementary Functions 10-26
10.13 Dimensions 10-28
7SD52 Manual 10-1

C53000–G1176–C132–2
10 Technical Data
10.1 General Device Data
10.1.1 Analog Inputs and Outputs
Nominal frequency fN 50 Hz or 60 Hz (adjustable)
Current Inputs Nominal current IN 1 A or 5 A

Power consumption per phase and earth path
– at IN = 1 A approx. 0.05 VA
– at IN = 5 A approx. 0.3 VA
Current overload capability per input
– thermal (rms) 500 A for 1 s
150 A for 10 s
20 A continuous
– dynamic (pulse) 1250 A (half cycle)
Requirements for For a maximum fault current

Current Transform- the current transformers must not be
ers saturated under steady-state conditions.
I F cont max
The accuracy limiting factor must be n’ ≥ -------------------------- AND n’ ≥ 30
at least 30 I N prim
Maximum ratio between primary I prim max

currents of current transformers --------------------- ≤ 8
I prim min
at the ends of the protected object
Voltage Inputs Nominal voltage UN 80 V to 125 V (adjustable)

Power consumption per phase at 100 V ≤0.1 VA
Voltage overload capability per phase
– thermal (rms) 230 V continuous
10.1.2 Power Supply
Direct Voltage Voltage supply via integrated DC/DC converter:

Nominal power supply direct voltage UNDC 24/48 VDC 60/110/125 VDC
Permissible voltage ranges 19 to 58 VDC 48 to 150 VDC
Nominal power supply direct voltage UNDC 110/125/220/250 VDC 220/250 VDC
Permissible voltage ranges 88 to 300 VDC 176 to 300 VDC
Permissible AC ripple voltage,

peak to peak ≤15 % of the nominal power supply voltage
10-2 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Power consumption
– quiescent approx. 5 W
– energized with 7SD52**–*A/E/J approx. 12 W
with 7SD52**–*C/G/L/N/Q/S approx. 15 W
with 7SD52**–*D/H/M/P/R/T approx. 18 W
plus approx. 1 W per protection data interface
Bridging time for failure/short-circuit ≥50 ms at UH = 48 V and UNDC ≥ 110 V
of the power supply ≥20 ms at UH = 24 V and UNDC = 60 V
Alternating Voltage Voltage supply via integrated AC/DC converter

Nominal power supply alternating voltage UNAC 115 VAC
Permissible voltage ranges 92 to 132 VAC
Power consumption
– quiescent approx. 6.5 VA
– energized with 7SD52**–*A/E/J approx. 17 VA
with 7SD52**–*C/G/L/N/Q/S approx. 20 VA
with 7SD52**–*D/H/M/P/R/T approx. 23 VA
plus approx. 1.5 VA per protection data interface
Bridging time for failure/short-circuit
of the power supply ≥ 50 ms
10.1.3 Binary Inputs and Outputs
Binary Inputs Number

with 7SD52**–*A/E/J 8 (allocatable)
with 7SD52**–*C/G/L/N/Q/S 16 (allocatable)
with 7SD52**–*D/H/M/P/R/T 24 (allocatable)
Nominal voltage 24 VDC to 250 VDC in 3 ranges, bipolar
Switching thresholds adjustable with jumpers
– for nominal voltages 24/48 VDC Upickup ≥ 19 VDC
60/110/125 VDC Udropoff ≤ 14 VDC
– for nominal voltages 110/125/ Upickup ≥ 88 VDC
220/250 VDC Udropoff ≤ 66 VDC
– for nominal voltages 220/250 VDC Upickup ≥ 176 VDC
Udropoff ≤ 117 VDC
Current consumption, energized approx. 1.8 mA
independent of the control voltage
Maximum permissible voltage 300 VDC
Input interference suppression 220 nF coupling capacitance at 220 V
with recovery time >60 ms
7SD52 Manual 10-3

C53000–G1176–C132–2
10 Technical Data
Binary Outputs Alarm/command relays (see also General Diagrams in Section A.2 of Appendix A)
Number and data dependent on device version (allocatable):
Ordering version NO NO NO NO/NC

(normal) (acceler- (high- (selectable)
ated) speed)
7SD52∗∗–∗A/E/J 7 7 – 1
7SD52∗∗–∗C/G/L 14 7 – 2
7SD52∗∗–∗N/Q/S 7 10 5 1
7SD52∗∗–∗D/H/M 21 7 – 3
7SD52∗∗–∗P/R/T 14 10 5 2
Switching capability MAKE 1000 W/VA
BREAK 30 VA
40 W resistive
25 W at L/R ≤ 50 ms
Switching voltage 250 V
Permissible current per contact 5 A continuous
30 A for 0.5 s
Permissible total current on common paths 5 A continuous
30 A for 0.5 s
Operating time, approx. 8 ms 5 ms 1 ms 8 ms
10.1.4 Communications Interfaces
Protection Data See Section 10.5

Interface
Operation Interface – Connection front panel, non-isolated, RS 232

9-pin DSUB socket
for connecting a personal computer
– Operation with DIGSI® 4
– Transmission speed min. 4 800 Baud; max. 115200 Baud
factory setting: 38400 Baud; parity: 8E1
– Maximum transmission distance 15 m (50 ft)
Service/Modem RS232/RS485/Optical isolated interface for data transfer

Interface acc. ordered version
(optional)
Operation with DIGSI® 4
10-4 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
RS232
– Connection for flush mounted case rear panel, mounting location “C”
9-pin DSUB socket
for surface mounted case at the inclined housing on the case bottom
shielded data cable
– Test voltage 500 V; 50 Hz
– Transmission speed min. 4 800 Baud; max. 115200 Baud
factory setting: 38400 Baud
RS485
– Connection for flush mounted case rear panel, mounting location “C”
9-pin DSUB socket
shielded data cable
– Transmission speed min. 4800 Baud; max. 115200 Baud
factory setting: 38400 Baud
Optical fibre
– Connector Type ST–connector
for flush mounted case rear panel, mounting location “C”
– Optical wavelength λ = 820 nm
– Laser class 1 acc. EN 60825–1/ –2 using glass fibre 50/125 µm or
using glass fibre 62.5/125 µm
– Permissible optical signal attenuation max. 8 dB using glass fibre 62.5/125 µm
– Maximum transmission distance 2 km (1.25 miles)
– Character idle state selectable; factory setting: “Light off”
System (SCADA) RS232/RS485/Optical isolated interface for data transfer

Interface (optional) to a master terminal
acc. to ordered version
RS232
– Connectionfor flush mounted case rear panel, mounting location “B”
9-pin DSUB socket
– Transmission speed min. 4800 Bd, max. 38400 Bd
factory setting: 19200 Bd
7SD52 Manual 10-5

C53000–G1176–C132–2
10 Technical Data
RS485
– Connection for flush mounted case rear panel, mounting location “B”
9-pin DSUB socket
– Test voltage 500 V, 50 Hz
– Transmission speed min. 4800 Bd, max. 38400 Bd
factory setting: 19200 Bd
Optical fibre
– Connector Type ST–connector
for flush mounted case rear panel, mounting location “B”
– Optical wavelength λ = 820 nm
– Laser class 1 acc. EN 60825–1/ –2 using glass fibre 50/125 µm or
using glass fibre 62.5/125 µm
– Permissible optical signal attenuation max. 8 dB, using glass fibre 62.5/125 µm
– Maximum transmission distance 2 km (11/4 miles)
– Character idle state selectable; factory setting: “Light off”
Time Synchroni- – Signal type DCF77/IRIG B/GPS

zation
– Connectionfor flush mounted case rear panel, mounting location “A”
9-pin DSUB socket
for surface mounted case at the terminal on the case bottom
– Signal properties for DCF77/IRIG B:
Nominal signal input voltage
5V 12 V 24 V
UIHigh 6.0 V 15.8 V 31 V
UILow 1.0 V at IILow = 0.25 mA 1.4 V at IILow = 0.25 mA 1.9 V at IILow = 0.25 mA
IIHigh 4.5 mA to 9.4 mA 4.5 mA to 9.3 mA 4.5 mA to 8.7 mA
RI 890 Ω at UI = 4 V 1930 Ω at UI = 8.7 V 3780 Ω at UI = 17 V
640 Ω at UI = 6 V 1700 Ω at UI = 15.8 V 3560 Ω at UI = 31 V
– Signal properties for GPS

Nominal signal voltage 24 V
PPS signal
pulse duty factor 1/999 to 1/1
max. rise/fall time deviation
of all receivers ±3 µs
GPS–receiver, antenna, power supply see Appendix A, Section A.1.1 Accessories
10-6 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
10.1.5 Electrical Tests
Specifications Standards: IEC 60255 (Product standards)

ANSI/IEEE C37.90.0; C37.90.0.1;
C37.90.0.2
DIN 57435 Part 303
See also standards for individual tests
Insulation Tests Standards: IEC 60255–5 and 60870–2–1

– High voltage test (routine test) 2.5 kV (rms); 50 Hz
all circuits except power supply,
binary inputs, and
communication/time sync. interfaces
– High voltage test (routine test) 3.5 kVDC
only power supply and binary inputs
– High Voltage Test (routine test) 500 V (rms); 50 Hz
only isolated communication
/time sync. interfaces
– Impulse voltage test (type test) 5 kV (peak); 1.2/50 µs; 0.5 Ws; 3 positive
all circuits except communication and 3 negative impulses in intervals of 5 s
/time sync. interfaces, class III
EMC Tests; Inter- Standards: IEC 60255–6 and –22 (Product standards)
ference Immunity EN 50082–2 (Generic standard)
(Type Tests) DIN 57435 Part 303
– High frequency test 2.5 kV (Peak); 1 MHz; τ = 15 µs;
IEC 60255–22–1, class III 400 surges per s; test duration 2 s
and VDE 0435 part 303, class III Ri = 200 Ω
– Electrostatic discharge 8 kV contact discharge;
IEC 60255–22–2 class IV 15 kV air discharge, both polarities;
and IEC 61000–4–2, class IV 150 pF; Ri = 330 Ω
– Irradiation with HF field, non-modulated10 V/m; 27 MHz to 500 MHz
IEC 60255–22–3 (report) class III
– Irradiation with HF field, amplitude 10 V/m; 80 MHz to 1000 MHz; 80 % AM;
modulated; IEC 61000–4–3, class III 1 kHz
– Irradiation with HF field, 10 V/m; 900 MHz; repetition frequency
pulse modulated 200 Hz; duty cycle of 50 %
IEC 61000–4–3/ENV 50204, class III
– Fast transient disturbance/burst 4 kV; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz; burst length = 15 ms;
IEC 60255–22–4 and repetition rate 300 ms; both polarities;
IEC 61000–4–4, class IV Ri = 50 Ω; test duration 1 min
– High energy surge voltages impulse: 1.2/50 µs
(SURGE), IEC 61000–4–5
installation class 3
power supply common mode: 2 kV; 12 Ω; 9 µF
diff. mode: 1 kV; 2 Ω; 18 µF
analogue inputs, binary inputs common mode: 2 kV; 42 Ω; 0.5 µF
and outputs diff. mode: 1 kV; 42 Ω; 0.5 µF
7SD52 Manual 10-7

C53000–G1176–C132–2
10 Technical Data
– Line conducted HF, amplitude 10 V; 150 kHz to 80 MHz; 80 % AM; 1 kHz

modulated; IEC 61000–4–6, class III
– Power system frequency magnetic 30 A/m continuous; 300 A/m for 3 s; 50 Hz
field; IEC 61000–4–8, class IV; 0.5 mT; 50 Hz
IEC 60255–6
– Oscillatory surge withstand capability 2.5 to 3 kV (peak value); 1 to 1.5 MHz
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 decaying wave; 50 surges per s;
duration 2 s; Ri = 150 Ω to 200 Ω
– Fast transient surge withstand cap- 4 kV to 5 kV; 10/150 ns; 50 surges per s;
ability, ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 both polarities; duration 2 s; Ri = 80 Ω
– Radiated electromagnetic interference 35 V/m; 25 MHz to 1000 MHz
ANSI/IEEE Std C37.90.2 amplitude and pulse modulated
– Damped oscillations 2.5 kV (peak value), polarity alternating;
IEC 60694, IEC 61000–4–12 100 kHz, 1 MHz, 10 MHz and 50 MHz;
Ri = 200 Ω
EMC Tests; Inter- Standard: EN 50081–* (Generic standard)

ference Emission
– Conducted interference, 150 kHz to 30 MHz
(Type Tests)
only power supply voltage limit class B
IEC–CISPR 22
– Radio interference field strength 30 MHz to 1000 MHz
IEC–CISPR 22 limit class B
10.1.6 Mechanical Stress Tests
Vibration and Standards: IEC 60255–21 and IEC 60068

Shock During
– Vibration sinusoidal
Operation
IEC 60255–21–1, class 2 10 Hz to 60 Hz: ±0.075 mm amplitude
IEC 60068–2–6 60 Hz to 150 Hz: 1 g acceleration
frequency sweep rate 1 octave/min
20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes.
– Shock half-sine shaped
IEC 60255–21–2, class 1 acceleration 5 g, duration 11 ms,
IEC 60068–2–27 3 shocks in each direction of
3 orthogonal axes
– Seismic vibration sinusoidal
IEC 60255–21–3, class 1 1 Hz to 8 Hz: ± 3.5 mm amplitude
IEC 60068–3–3 (horizontal axis)
1 Hz to 8 Hz: ± 1.5 mm amplitude
(vertical axis)
8 Hz to 35 Hz: 1 g acceleration
(horizontal axis)
10-8 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
8 Hz to 35 Hz: 0.5 g acceleration

(vertical axis)
Frequency sweep rate1 octave/min
1 cycle in 3 orthogonal axes
Vibration and Standards: IEC 60255–21 and IEC 60068

Shock During
– Vibration sinusoidal
Transport
IEC 60255–21–1, class 2 5 Hz to 8 Hz: ±7.5 mm amplitude
IEC 60068–2–6 8 Hz to 150 Hz: 2 g acceleration
Frequency sweep rate1 octave/min
20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes
– Shock half-sine shaped
IEC 60255–21–2, class 1 acceleration 15 g; duration 11 ms;
3 orthogonal axes
– Continuous shock half-sine shaped
IEC 60255–21–2, class 1 acceleration 10 g; duration 16 ms;
3 orthogonal axes
10.1.7 Climatic Stress Tests
Ambient Tempera- Standards: IEC 60255–6

tures
– recommended operating temperature –5 °C to +55 °C (+23 °F to +131 °F)
(when max. half of the inputs and outputs are subjected to
the max permissible values)
– recommended operating temperature –5 °C to +40 °C (+23 °F to +104 °F)

(when all inputs and outputs are subjected to
the max permissible values)
– limiting temporary (transient) –20 °C to +70 °C Visibility of display

may be impaired
operating temperature (–4 °F to 158 °F) above +55 °C/130 °F
in quiescent state, i.e. no pickup and no indications
– limiting temperature during storage –25 °C to +55 °C (–13 °F to 131 °F)

– limiting temperature during transport –25 °C to +70 °C (–13 °F to 158 °F)
Storage and transport of the device with factory packaging!
Humidity Permissible humidity mean value p. year ≤75 % relative humidity

on 56 days per year up to 93 % relative
humidity; condensation not permissible!
All devices shall be installed such that they are not exposed to direct sunlight, nor sub-
ject to large fluctuations in temperature that may cause condensation to occur.
7SD52 Manual 10-9

C53000–G1176–C132–2
10 Technical Data
10.1.8 Service Conditions
The device is designed for use in an industrial environment or an electrical utility en-
vironment, for installation in standard relay rooms and compartments so that proper
installation and electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) is ensured. In addition, the follow-
ing are recommended:
• All contactors and relays that operate in the same cubicle, cabinet, or relay panel
as the numerical protective device should, as a rule, be equipped with suitable
surge suppression components.
• For substations with operating voltages of 100 kV and above, all external cables
should be shielded with a conductive shield grounded at both ends. The shield must
be capable of carrying the fault currents that could occur. For substations with lower
operating voltages, no special measures are normally required.
• Do not withdraw or insert individual modules or boards while the protective device
is energized. When handling the modules or the boards outside of the case, stand-
ards for components sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD) must be observed.
The modules, boards, and device are not endangered when the device is complete-
ly assembled.
10.1.9 Construction
Housing 7XP20
Dimensions see drawings, Section 10.13
Weight (mass), approx.
– in flush mounted case, size 1/2 6 kg (13 lb)
– in flush mounted case, size 1/1 10 kg (22 lb)
– in surface mounted case, size 1/2 11 kg (24 lb)
– in surface mounted case, size 1/1 19 kg (42 lb)
Degree of protection acc. IEC 60529
– for the device
in surface mounted case IP 51
in flush mounted case
front IP 51
rear IP 50
– for human safety IP 2x with closed protection cover
10-10 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Pickup Values Differential currentIDIFF> 0.10 A to 20.00 A1) (steps 0.01 A)

Differential current
when switching onto a fault IDIFF switch on 0.10 A to 20.00 A1) (steps 0.01 A)
Differential current
High set differential currentIDIFF>> 0.8 A to 100.0 A1) (steps 0.01 A)
or ∞ (stage disabled)
Tolerances 5 % of setting value for 2 or 3 ends
10 % of setting value for 6 ends
or 10 mA1) per end
1)
Secondary values based on IN = 1 A; for IN = 5 A they must be multiplied with 5.
Tripping Times The tripping time depends on the number of ends and the communication speed. The
following data presuppose a transmission speed of 512 kBit/s and the output of com-
mands via high-speed output relays (7SD52**–*N/P/Q/R/S/T).
Pickup/trip times of the IDIFF>>–stages approx.

for 2 ends, minimum 9 ms
typical 12 ms
typical 12 ms
typical 20 ms
Drop-off time of the IDIFF>>–stages approx.

typical 35 ms to 50 ms
Pickup / trip times of the IDIFF>–stages approx.

for 2 ends, minimum (50 Hz) 27 ms
minimum (60 Hz) 24 ms
typical 30 ms
typical 31 ms
typical 38 ms
Drop-off time of the IDIFF>–stages approx.

typical 35 ms to 50 ms
7SD52 Manual 10-11

C53000–G1176–C132–2
10 Technical Data
Delay Times Delay time of the IDIFF>–stage 0.00 s to 60.00 s (steps 0.01 s)
TI-DIFF> or ∞ (stage ineffective)
Delay time of the IDIFF>–stage 0.00 s to 60.00 s (steps 0.01 s)
for 1-phase pickup T3I0 1PHAS or ∞ (stage ineffective for 1-phase pickup)
Expiry tolerance 1 % of setting value or 10 ms
The times set are pure delay times
Self-Restraint Current transformer error at each end of the protected object

Ratio between operating accuracy limit factor
and nominal accuracy limit factor n'/n 1.00 to 10.00 (steps 0.01)
Transformer error at n'/n 0.5 % to 50.0 % (steps 0.1 %)
Transformer error at n × IN (class) 0.5 % to 50.0 % (steps 0.1 %)
Further stabilizing quantities Frequency deviation,
(adaptive self-restraint) delay time differences, harmonics,
synchronous quality, jitter
Inrush Restraint Restraint ratio

2nd harmonic I2fN/IfN 10 % to 45 % (steps 1 %)
1
Maximum current for restraint 1.1 A to 25.0 A ) (steps 0.1 A)
Crossblock function can be enabled and disabled
Max. action time for crossblock 0.00 s to 60.00 s (steps 0.01 s)
CROSSB 2HM or ∞ (active until drop off)
1) Secondary values based on IN = 1 A; for IN = 5 A they must be multiplied with 5.
Conditioning for Vector group matching 0 to 11 (× 30°) (steps 1)

Transformers
Star-point conditioning earthed or unearthed
(optional)
(for each winding)
Emergency Communication failure see Section 10.6

Operation (optional)
Frequency Frequency correction within range 0.8 ≤ f/fN ≤ 1.2

stable when starting machine
10-12 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
10.3 Intertripping, External Direct Local and Remote Tripping
10.3 Intertripping, External Direct Local and Remote Tripping
Intertrip Intertripping of the opposite end

when singe–end tripping can be enabled and disabled
External Direct The operating time refers to the output of commands via high–speed output relays
Local Tripping (7SD52**–*N/P/Q/R/S/T).
Operating time, total approx. 6 ms
Trip time delay 0.00 s to 30.00 s (steps 0.01 s)
or ∞ (ineffective)
The set times are pure delay times.
External Direct Tripping of remote ends by a command that is coupled into a binary input
Remote Tripping
The operating time depends on the number of ends and the communication speed.
The following data presuppose a transmission speed of 512 kBit/s and the output of
commands via high–speed output relays (7SD52**–*N/P/Q/R/S/T).
Operating times, total approx.

typical 12 ms
typical 13 ms
typical 18 ms
Drop-off times, total approx.

for 2 ends, typical 19 ms
Trip time delay 0.00 s to 30.00 s (steps 0.01 s)

Trip time prolongation 0.00 s to 30.00 s (steps 0.01 s)
7SD52 Manual 10-13

C53000–G1176–C132–2
10 Technical Data
10.4 Transmission of Binary Information (optional)
Remote Commands Number of possible remote commands 4


typical 12 ms
typical 14 ms
typical 18 ms

Remote Annuncia- Number of possible remote annunciations 24

tions

typical 16 ms
typical 18 ms
typical 23 ms

10-14 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
10.5 Protection Data Interface and Differential Protection Topology
10.5 Protection Data Interface and Differential Protection Topology
Topology Number of devices for protected object 2 for 7SD522 (chain topology)
(= number of ends of the protected 2 to 6 for 7SD523 (chain topology
object limited by CTs) or ring topology)
Protection Data Number 1 (7SD522) or 2 (7SD523)

Interfaces – Connection optical fibre mounting position “D” (1 connection) or
mounting pos. “D” and “E” (2 connections)
for flush mounted case on the rear side
for surface mounted case on the bottom side
Connection modules for protection data interface(s), depending on the ordering
version:
Module Type of Optical Perm. path Distance,

Type of fibre
in device connector wavelength attenuation typical
FO5 1) ST Multimode 820 nm 8 dB 1.5 km
62.5/125 µm 0.95 miles
FO6 2) ST Multimode 820 nm 16 dB 3.5 km
62.5/125 µm 2.2 miles
FO7 2) ST Monomode 1300 nm 7 dB 10 km
9/125 µm 6.25 miles
FO8 2) FC Monomode 1300 nm 18 dB 35 km
9/125 µm 22 miles
1
) Laser class 1 according to EN 60825–1/ –2 using glass fibre 62.5/125 µm
2) Laser class 3A according to EN 60825–1/ –2
Protection Data Direct connection:

Communication
Transmission speed 512 kBit/s
Type of fibre
Optical wavelength
see Table above
Permissible path attenuation
Transmission distance
Connection via communication networks:
Communication converter see Appendix A, Section A.1.1 Accessories
Supported network interfaces G703.1 with 64 kBit/s;
X.21 with 64 or 128 or 512 kBit/s
Pilot wires up to 8 km (5 miles)
with 128 kBit/s
Connection to communication converter see Table above under module FO5
Transmission speed 64 kBit/s with G703.1
512 kBit/s or 128 kBit/s or
64 kBit/s with X.21
128 kBit/s with pilot wires
Max. transmission time 0.1 ms to 30 ms (steps 0.1 ms)
Max. transmission time difference 0.000 ms to 3.000 ms (steps 0.001 ms)
7SD52 Manual 10-15

C53000–G1176–C132–2
10 Technical Data
10.6 Time Overcurrent Protection (optional)
Operating Modes As emergency overcurrent protection or back-up overcurrent protection:

Emergency overcurrent protection operates on communication failure
Back-up overcurrent protection operates independent of any events
Characteristics Definite time stages (definite) IPh>>, 3I0>>, IPh>, 3I0>

Inverse time stage (IDMT) IP, 3I0P
one of the characteristics according to
Figure 10-1 to 10-3 can be selected
Current Stages High set stages IPh>> (phases) 0.10 A to 25.00 A1) (steps 0.01 A)
TIPh>> (phases) 0.00 s to 30.00 s (steps 0.01 s)
3I0>> (earth) 0.05 A to 25.00 A1) (steps 0.01 A)
T3I0>> (earth) 0.00 s to 30.00 s (steps 0.01 s)
Overcurrent stages IPh> (phases) 0.10 A to 25.00 A1) (steps 0.01 A)
(definite time) or ∞ (ineffective)
TIPh> (phases) 0.00 s to 30.00 s (steps 0.01 s)
3I0> (earth) 0.05 A to 25.00 A1) (steps 0.01 A)
T3I0> (earth) 0.00 s to 30.00 s (steps 0.01 s)
Overcurrent stages IP (phases) 0.10 A to 4.00 A1) (steps 0.01 A)
(inverse time acc. IEC) or ∞ (ineffective)
TIP (phases) 0.05 s to 3.00 s (steps 0.01 s)
TIPadd (phases) 0.00 s to 30.00 s (steps 0.01 s)
3I0P (earth) 0.05 A to 4.00 A1) (steps 0.01 A)
T3I0P (earth) 0.05 s to 3.00 s (steps 0.01 s)
T3I0Padd (earth) 0.00 s to 30.00 s (steps 0.01 s)
Overcurrent stages IP (phases) 0.10 A to 4.00 A1) (steps 0.01 A)
(inverse time acc. ANSI) or ∞ (ineffective)
DIP (phases) 0.50 s to 15.00 s (steps 0.01 s)
TIPadd (phases) 0.00 s to 30.00 s (steps 0.01 s)
10-16 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
3I0P (earth) 0.05 A to 4.00 A1) (steps 0.01 A)

D3I0P (earth) 0.50 s to 15.00 s (steps 0.01 s)
T3I0Padd (earth) 0.00 s to 30.00 s (steps 0.01 s)
Tolerances currents 3 % of set value or 1% of nominal current
with definite time times 1 % of set value or 10 ms
Tolerances currents Pickup at 1.05 ≤ I/IP ≤ 1.15;
with inverse time or 1.05 ≤ I/3I0P ≤ 1.15
(IEC) times 5 % ± 15 ms for 2 ≤ I/IP ≤ 20
and TIP/s ≥ 1;
or 2 ≤ I/3I0P ≤ 20
and T3I0P/s ≥ 1
(ANSI) times 5 % ± 15 ms for 2 ≤ I/IP ≤ 20
and DIP/s ≥ 1;
or 2 ≤ I/3I0P ≤ 20
and D3I0P/s ≥ 1
The set times are pure delay times with definite time protection.
1)
Further Definite Overcurrent IPh >STUB 0.10 A to 25.00 A1) (steps 0.01 A)
Stages; Stub Pro- (phases) or ∞ (ineffective)
tection
TIPh STUB 0.00 s to 30.00 s (steps 0.01 s)
(phases) or ∞ (ineffective)
3I0 >STUB 0.05 A to 25.00 A1) (steps 0.01 A)
(earth) or ∞ (ineffective)
T3I0 STUB 0.00 s to 30.00 s (steps 0.01 s)
(earth) or ∞ (ineffective)
Tolerances currents 3 % of setting value or 1% of rated current
times 1 % of setting value or 10 ms
Enable via special binary input is necessary.
1) Secondary values based on IN = 1 A; for IN = 5 A they must be multiplied with 5.
Operating Times of The operating time refers to the output of commands via high-speed output relays
Definite Stages (7SD52**–*N/P/Q/R/S/T).
Pickup time, minimum approx. 15 ms with fN = 50 Hz
approx. 13 ms with fN = 60 Hz
Pickup time, typical approx. 20 ms with fN = 50 Hz
Dropout time, typical approx. 30 ms with fN = 50 Hz
Drop-off to Pickup Current stages approx. 0.95 for IP/IN ≥ 0.5

Ratios
7SD52 Manual 10-17

C53000–G1176–C132–2
10 Technical Data
100 100
t [s] t [s]
30 30
20 20
10 Tp 10
3.2
5 5
1.6 Tp
3 3
2 3.2
0.8 2
1 1 1.6
0.4
0.5 0.5 0.8

0.2
0.3 0.3 0.4
0.2 0.1
0.2
0.2
0.1 0.05
0.1
0.1
0.05
0.05 0.05
1 2 3 5 7 10 20 1 2 3 5 10 20
I/Ip I/Ip
0.14 13.5
Normal inverse: - ⋅ Tp
t = -------------------------------- [s] Very inverse: 1
- ⋅ T p [s]
t = --------------------------
(Type A) ( I ⁄ Ip )
0.02
–1 (Type B) (I ⁄ I ) – 1
p
100 1000
t [s]
300
t [s]
20 200
10 100
5 50
3 30 Tp
2 20 3.2
1 Tp 10 1.6
3.2
0.5 5 0.8
0.3 1.6 3
0.4
0.2 2
0.8
0.2
0.1 1
0.4
0.05 0.1 0.2 0.05 0.1
0.05 0.5
1 2 3 5 10 20 1 2 3 5 7 10 20
I/Ip I/Ip
80
Extremely inverse: t = ---------------------------- ⋅ T p [s] 120
2 Longtime inverse: t = ---------------------------- ⋅ T [s]
(Type C) (I ⁄ I ) – 1 1 p
p (I ⁄ I ) – 1
p
t trip time
Tp setting value time multiplier Note: For earth fault read 3I0p instead of
I fault current
Ip setting value current Ip and T3I0p instead of Tp
Figure 10-1 Trip time characteristics of inverse time overcurrent protection, acc. IEC (phases and earth)
10-18 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
100 100
t [s] t [s]
30 30
20 20
10 10
7 7
5 D [s] 5
3 15 3
2 10 2
1 5 1 D [s]
0.7 0.7
15
0.5 0.5
2 10
0.3 0.3
0.2 1 0.2 5
0.1 0.5 0.1

0.07 2
0.07 0.5 1
0.05 0.05
1 2 3 5 10 20 1 2 3 5 10 20
I/Ip I/Ip
æ 8.9341 ö æ 0.2663 ö
INVERSE - + 0.17966÷ ⋅ D
t = ç ------------------------------------- [s] SHORT INVERSE - + 0.03393÷ ⋅ D
t = ç ------------------------------------- [s]
è ( I ⁄ I )2.0938 – 1 ø è ( I ⁄ I ) 1.2969 – 1 ø
p p
100 100
t [s] D [s] t [s]
50 50
15
10
20 20
5
10 10
5 2 5 D [s]
3 3 15
1
2 2 10
0.5
1 1 5
0.5 0.5
2
0.3 0.3
0.2 0.2 1
0.1 0.1 0.5
0.05 0.05
1 2 3 5 10 20 1 2 3 5 10 20
I/Ip I/Ip
æ 0.0103 ö
t = æè ------------------------- + 2.18592öø ⋅ D [s]
5.6143
LONG INVERSE (I ⁄ I ) – 1 MODERATELY INVERSE - + 0.0228÷ ⋅ D
t = ç -------------------------------- [s]
p è ( I ⁄ I )0.02 – 1 ø
p
Figure 10-2 Trip time characteristics of inverse time overcurrent protection, acc. ANSI/IEEE, (phases and earth)
7SD52 Manual 10-19

C53000–G1176–C132–2
10 Technical Data
100 100
t [s] t [s]
30 30
20 20
10 10
5 5
3 3
D [s]
2 2
15
10
1 1 D [s]
15
0.5 5
0.5
0.3 0.3 10
2
0.2 0.2
5
0.1 1
0.1
2
0.5 0.5 1
0.05 0.05
1 2 3 5 10 20 1 2 3 5 10 20
I/Ip I/Ip
æ 3,922 ö æ 5.64 ö
VERY INVERSE - + 0.0982÷ ⋅ D [s]
t = ç -------------------------- EXTREMELY INVERSE - + 0.02434÷ ⋅ D [s]
t = ç --------------------------
è ( I ⁄ I )2 – 1 ø è (I ⁄ I ) – 1
2
ø
p p
100
t [s]
30
20
t trip time
D setting value time multiplier
10
I fault current
Ip setting value current
5
D [s]
3 15
2 10
1 5
0.5
2
0.3
0.2 1 Note: For earth fault read 3I0p instead
of Ip and D3I0p instead of DIp
0.1
0.5
0.05
1 2 3 5 10 20
I/Ip
æ 0.4797 ö
DEFINITE INVERSE - + 0.21359÷ ⋅ D
t = ç ------------------------------------- [s]
è ( I ⁄ I )1.5625 – 1 ø
p
Figure 10-3 Trip time characteristics of inverse time overcurrent protection, acc. ANSI/IEEE (phases and earth)
10-20 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Pickup High-current pickup I>>> 0.10 A to 15.00 A1) (steps 0.01 A)

High-current pickup I>>>> 1.00 A to 25.00 A1) (steps 0.01 A)
Dropout to pickup ratio approx. 0.90
Pickup tolerance ≤ 3 % of set value or 1% of IN
1
) Secondary values based on IN = 1 A; for IN = 5 A they must be multiplied with 5.
Times The operating time refers to the output of commands via high-speed output relays
(7SD52**–*N/P/Q/R/S/T).
Shortest tripping time approx. 5 ms
10.8 Automatic Reclosure Function (optional)
Automatic Number of reclosure attempts max. 8,

Reclosures first 4 with individual settings
Operating modes 1-pole, 3-pole or 1-/3-pole
Control with pickup or trip command
Action times 0.01 s to 300.00 s; ∞ (steps 0.01 s)
Initiation possible without pickup and action time
Dead times for all cycles 0.01 s to 1800.00 s; ∞ (steps 0.01 s)
Dead times after evolving fault 0.01 s to 1800.00 s; (steps 0.01 s)
recognition
Reclaim time after reclosure 0.50 s to 300.00 s (steps 0.01 s)
Lockout time after dynamic blocking 0.5 s (fix)
Blocking time after manual closing 0.50 s to 300.00 s; 0 (steps 0.01 s)
Start signal monitoring time 0.01 s to 300.00 s (steps 0.01 s)
Circuit breaker supervision time 0.01 s to 300.00 s (steps 0.01 s)
Adaptive Dead Operating modes with voltage measurement or

Time / with close command transmission
Dead Line Check
Action time 0.01 s to 300.00 s; ∞ (steps 0.01 s)
Initiation possible without pickup and action time
Maximum dead time 0.50 s to 3000.00 s; ∞ (steps 0.01 s)
Voltage measurement dead line 2 V to 70 V (phase-to-earth)(steps 1 V)
Voltage measurement live line 30 V to 90 V (phase-to-earth)(steps 1 V)
Measuring time 0.10 s to 30.00 s (steps 0.01 s)
Delay for close comm. transmission 0.00 s to 300 s; ∞ (steps 0.01 s)
7SD52 Manual 10-21

C53000–G1176–C132–2
10 Technical Data
10.9 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection (optional)
Circuit Breaker Current flow monitoring 0.25 A to 20.00 A1) (steps 0.01 A)
Supervision Dropoff to pickup ratio approx. 0.95
Pickup tolerance 5 % of set value or 0.01 A1)
Breaker status monitoring
– with three-pole control binary input for CB auxiliary contact
– with individual pole control 1 binary input each for each pole, or
1 binary input each for NO and NC contacts
Note: Breaker failure protection can operate without the mentioned breaker auxiliary contacts but with re-
duced functionality. Processing of the auxiliary contacts are necessary for:
Breaker failure protection without or with insufficient current flow (e.g. Buchholz protection),
end fault protection, pole discrepancy supervision.
1)
Starting Conditions for beaker failure protection single-pole trip internally

three-pole trip internally
single-pole trip externally via
three-pole trip externally binary
inputs
three-pole trip without current
Times Pickup time approx. 5 ms with measured quantities

present
approx. 20 ms after switch-on of
measured quantities
Reset time ≤15 ms with sinusoidal meas. quantities,
≤25 ms maximum
Delay times for all stages 0.00 s to 30.00 s; ∞ (steps 0.01 s)
Time tolerance 1 % of setting value or 10 ms
End Fault with signal transmission to the opposite line end

Protection
Delay time 0.00 s to 30.00 s; ∞ (steps 0.01 s)
Pole Discrepancy Starting criterion any pole open and any pole closed
Supervision
Supervision time 0.00 s to 30.00 s; ∞ (steps 0.01 s)
10-22 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Setting Ranges Factor k according to IEC 60255–8 0.10 to 4.00 (steps 0.01)
Time factor τ 1.0 min to 999.9 min (steps 0.1 min)
Alarm temperaturerise Θalarm/Θtrip 50 % to 100 % related to the trip
temperature rise (steps 1 %)
Current alarm stage Ialarm 0.10 A to 4.00 A1) (steps 0.01 A)
1
Calculation Calculation method temperature rise maximum temperature rise of 3 phases

Method means of temperature rise of 3 phases
temperature rise from maximum current
Tripping see Figure 10-4

Characteristic
I ö 2 æ I pre ö 2
æ ------------- – -------------
Tripping characteristic è k ⋅ I Nø è k ⋅ I Nø
t = τ ⋅ ln ------------------------------------------------
-
for (I/ k · IN) ≤ 8 I ö2
æ ------------- –1
è k ⋅ I Nø
Meaning of abbreviations: t tripping time

τ thermal time constant
I actual load current
Ipre previous load current
k setting factor according to IEC 60255–8
IN rated current of protected object
Drop-off Θ/Θtrip drop-off with Θalarm

Ratios
Θ/Θalarm approx. 0.99
I/Ialarm approx. 0.95
Tolerances Relating to k · IN 2 % or 10 mA1); class 2 % according to

IEC 60 255–8
Relating to tripping time 3 % or 1 s; class 3 % according to
IEC 60 255–8 for I/(k ·IN) > 1.25
1
7SD52 Manual 10-23

C53000–G1176–C132–2
10 Technical Data
100 100
t [min] t [min]
50 Parameter: 50
Setting value;
Time constant
30 30
τ [min]
20 20
1000
Parameter:
10 10 Setting value;
500 Time constant
5 5
τ [min]
200 1000
3 3
2 2
100 500
1 1
50
200
0.5 0.5
20 100
0.3 0.3
0.2 0.2
10 50
0.1 0.1
5
20
1 2 1 2 5 10
0.05 0.05
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10 12
I / (k·IN) I / (k·IN)
without previous load current with 90 % previous load current
2
I ö2
æ ------------- I ö 2 æ I pre ö
æ -------------
èk ⋅ I ø
- è k ⋅ I -ø – çè ------------- k ⋅ I Nø
-÷
N N
t = τ ⋅ ln -------------------------------- [min] t = τ ⋅ ln --------------------------------------------------- [min]
I ö2
æ ------------- I ö2
æ -------------
- –1 - –1
èk ⋅ I ø èk ⋅ I ø
N N
Figure 10-4 Tripping characteristic of the overload protection
10-24 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
10.11 Monitoring Functions
10.11 Monitoring Functions
Measured Values Current sum IF = |i L1 + iL2 + iL3 + kI · iE | >

ΣI THRESHOLD · IN + ΣI FACTOR · Σ|i|
– SUM.I Threshold 0.05 A to 2.00 A1) (steps 0.01)
– SUM.I factor 0.00 to 0.95 (steps 0.01)
Current symmetry |Imin | / |Imax | < BAL.FACTOR I
as long as Imax / IN > BAL.I LIMIT / IN
– BAL.FACTOR I 0.10 to 0.95 (steps 0.01)
– BAL.I LIMIT 0.10 A to 1.00 A1) (steps 0.01 A)
Voltage symmetry |Umin | / |Umax | < BAL.FACTOR U
as long as |Umax | > BAL.U LIMIT
– BAL.FACTOR U 0.58 to 0.95 (steps 0.01)
– BAL.U LIMIT 10 V to 100 V (steps 1 V)
Open circuit Monitoring of current transformer circuits
on current step change in one phase
without residual current
1)
Trip Circuit Super- Number of supervised trip circuits 1 to 3

vision
Operation of each trip circuit with 1 binary input or with 2 binary inputs
Alarm delay 1 s to 30 s (steps 1 s)
7SD52 Manual 10-25

C53000–G1176–C132–2
10 Technical Data
10.12 Supplementary Functions
Operational Operational measured values of currents IL1; IL2; IL3

Measured Values in A primary and secondary and % of IN oper
– Tolerance 1 % of measured value or 1 % of IN
Operational measured values of currents 3I0; I1; I2
in A primary and secondary
– Tolerance 1 % of measured value or 1 % of IN
Phase angles of currents ϕ(IL1 –IL2); ϕ(IL2 –IL3); ϕ(IL3 –IL1) in °
– Tolerance 1° at rated current
Operational measured values of voltages UL1–L2; UL2–L3; UL3–L1
(if connected) in kV primary and V secondary
– Tolerance 1 % of measured value or 1 % of UN
Operational measured values of voltages UL1–E; UL2–E; UL3–E
Operational measured values of voltages UL1–E; UL2–E; UL3–E
(if connected) in % of UN oper /√3
Operational measured values of voltages 3U0; U1; U2
Phase angles of voltages (if connected) ϕ(UL1 –UL2); ϕ(UL2 –UL3); ϕ(UL3 –UL1) in °
– Tolerance 1° at rated voltage
Phase angles of voltages vs. currents ϕ(UL1 –IL1); ϕ(UL2 –IL2); ϕ(UL3 –IL3) in °
– Tolerance 1° at rated voltage and current
Operational measured values of power S; P; Q (apparent; active; reactive power)
(if voltage applied) in MVA, MW or Mvar primary
– Tolerance 2 % of measured apparent power (√3·U·I)
or 1 MVA/MW/Mvar
Operational measured values of
power factor (if voltage applied) cos ϕ
– Tolerance 0.02
Operational measured values
of frequency f in Hz
– Range 10 Hz to 75 Hz
– Tolerance 20 mHz within range fN ±10 %
at nominal measured values
Operational measured value ΘL1; ΘL2; ΘL3; Θres
for thermal value referred to tripping temperature rise Θtrip
Measured values of
the differential protection IDIFF L1; IDIFFL2; IDIFFL3;
IRESTL1; IREST L2; IRESTL3
in % of operational rated current
10-26 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
10.12 Supplementary Functions
Remote measured values of currents IL1; IL2; IL3 of remote end in % of IN oper;
ϕ(IL1); ϕ(IL2); ϕ(IL3) (remote vs. local) in °
Remote measured values of voltages UL1; UL2; UL3 of remote end
in % of UN oper /√3 ;
ϕ(UL1); ϕ(UL2); ϕ(UL3) (remote vs. local) in°
Fault Event Storage of the messages of the last 8 faults

Data Log with a total of max. 200 messages
Fault Recording Number of stored fault records max. 8

Storage period max. 5 s for each fault
(start with pickup or trip) approx. 15 s in total
Sampling rate at fN = 50 Hz 1 ms
Sampling rate at fN = 60 Hz 0.83 ms
The fault recordings are synchronized between the ends.
Statistics Number of trip events caused by

7SD52 pole segregated
Number of auto-reclose events caused segregated according to
by 7SD52 – 1-pole AR and 3-pole AR
– 1st AR and further AR’s
Total of interrupted currents
caused by 7SD52 pole segregated
Availability of transmission availability in %/min and %/h
Delay time of transmission resolution 0.01 ms
Real Time Clock Resolution for operational messages 1 ms

and Buffer Battery
Resolution for fault messages 1 ms
Buffer battery 3 V/1 Ah, type CR 1/2 AA
self-discharging time approx. 10 years
7SD52 Manual 10-27

C53000–G1176–C132–2
10 Technical Data
10.13 Dimensions
Housing for Panel Flush Mounting or Cubicle Installation Size 1/2 (of 19")
29.5 172 34 29.5 172 29 30
Mounting plate Mounting plate

266
244
266
244
2 2
Side view (with screwed terminals) Side view (with plug-in terminals)
225
220
221 + 2
5 or M4
255.8 ± 0.3
+1
245
6
5.4
13.2 180 ± 0.5

Rear view
7.3 206.5 ± 0.3
Panel cut-out
Dimensions in mm
Figure 10-5 Dimensions 7SD52 for panel flush mounting or cubicle installation (size 1/2)
10-28 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
10.13 Dimensions
Housing for Panel Flush Mounting or Cubicle Installation Size 1/1 (of 19")
29.5 172 34 29.5 172 29 30
Mounting plate Mounting plate

266
266
244
244
2 2
Side view Side view

(with screwed terminals) (with plug-in terminals)
450
445
Rear view
6 6
5 or M4
255.8 ± 0.3
245 + 1
446 + 2 Panel cut-out

(view from the device front)
5 or M4
6 6
216.1 ± 0.3
5.4
13.2 Dimensions in mm
13.2 405 ± 0.5
7.3 431.4 ± 0.3
Figure 10-6 Dimensions 7SD52 for panel flush mounting or cubicle installation (size 1/1)
7SD52 Manual 10-29

C53000–G1176–C132–2
10 Technical Data
Housing for Panel Surface Mounting Size 1/2 (of 19")
240
219 10.5 260
51 75
29.5
76 100
225
280
320
344
266
9 1 25
26 50
71
Front view
Side view
Dimensions in mm
Figure 10-7 Dimensions 7SD52 for panel surface mounting (size 1/2)
10-30 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
10.13 Dimensions
Housing for Panel Surface Mounting Size 1/1 (of 19")
465
444 10.5
101 150
151 200
450
280
320
344
9 1 50
51 100
Front view
260
29.5
266
71 Dimensions in mm
Side view
Figure 10-8 Dimensions 7SD52 for panel surface mounting (size 1/1)
7SD52 Manual 10-31

C53000–G1176–C132–2
10 Technical Data
10-32 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Appendix A
This appendix is primarily a reference for the experienced user. This Chapter provides
ordering information for the models of 7SD52. General diagrams indicating the termi-
nal connections of the 7SD52 models are included. Connection examples show the
proper connections of the device to primary equipment in typical power system con-
figurations. Tables with all settings and all information available in a 7SD52 equipped
with all options are provided.
A.1 Ordering Information and Accessories A-2

A.2 General Diagrams A-6
A.3 Connection Examples A-20
A.4 Preset Configurations A-24
A.5 Protocol Dependent Functions A-28
A.6 List of Settings A-29
A.7 List of Information A-41
A.8 Measured Values A-63
7SD52 Manual A-1

C53000–G1176–C132–2
A Appendix
A.1 Ordering Information and Accessories
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Differential Protection 7SD52

_ _ 0
Version
Differential protection for two-end operation 2
Differential protection for multi-end operation 3
Measured Current
IPh = 1A, IE = 1A 1
IPh = 5 A, IE = 5 A 5
Auxiliary Voltage (Power supply, Pick-up Threshold of Binary Inputs)

DC 24 to 48 V, binary input threshold 17 V 2) 2
DC 60 to 125 V 1), binary input threshold 17 V 2) 4
DC 110 to 250 V 1), AC 115 V, binary input threshold 73 V 2) 5
DC 220 to 250 V, AC 115 V, binary input threshold 154 V 2) 6
Housing, Number of Binary Inputs (BI) and Outputs (BO)

Flush mounting housing with screwed terminals, 1/2 19", 8 BI, 15 BO, 1 Live status contact A
Flush mounting housing with screwed terminals, 1/1 19", 16 BI, 23 BO, 1 Live status contact C
Flush mounting housing with screwed terminals, 1/1 19", 24 BI, 31 BO, 1 Live status contact D
Surface mounting housing with two-tier terminals, 1/2 19", 8 BI, 15 BO, 1 Live status contact E
Surface mounting housing with two-tier terminals, 1/1 19", 16 BI, 23 BO, 1 Live status contact G
Surface mounting housing with two-tier terminals, 1/1 19", 24 BI, 31 BO, 1 Live status contact H
Flush mounting housing with plug-in terminals, 1/2 19", 8 BI, 15 BO, 1 Live status contact J
Flush mounting housing with plug-in terminals, 1/1 19", 16 BI, 23 BO, 1 Live status contact L
Flush mounting housing with plug-in terminals, 1/1 19", 24 BI, 31 BO, 1 Live status contact M
Flush mounting housing with screwed terminals, 1/1 19", 16 BI, 23 BO (5 high-speed relays),
1 Live status contact N
Flush mounting housing with screwed terminals, 1/1 19", 24 BI, 31 BO (5 high-speed relays),
1 Live status contact P
Surface mounting housing with two-tier terminals, 1/1 19", 16 BI, 23 BO (5 high-speed relays),
1 Live status contact Q
Surface mounting housing with two-tier terminals, 1/1 19", 24 BI, 31 BO (5 high-speed relays),
1 Live status contact R
Flush mounting housing with plug-in terminals, 1/1 19", 16 BI, 23 BO (5 high-speed relays),
1 Live status contact S
Flush mounting housing with plug-in terminals, 1/1 19", 24 BI, 31 BO (5 high-speed relays),
1 Live status contact T
Region-Specific Default/Language Settings and Function Versions

Region GE, 50 Hz, IEC, German language (can be changed) A
Region world, 50/60 Hz, IEC/ANSI, Englisch language (can be changed) B
Region US, 60 Hz, ANSI, US-English language (can be changed) C
System Interface: Function and Hardware

No system interface 0
IEC Protocoll, electrical RS232 1
IEC Protokoll, electrical RS485 2
IEC Protokoll, optical 820 nm, ST-plug 3
continued next page A-3
1) with plug-in jumper one of the 2 voltage ranges can be selected

2
) for each binary input one of 3 pick-up threshold ranges can be selected with plug-in jumper
A-2 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Differential Protection 7SD52 _ _ 0
DIGSI/Modem Interface and Protection Data Interface 1 (Device Rear)

See additional specification M 9
Functions 1
Only 3-pole tripping without automatic reclosure 0
Only 3-pole tripping with automatic reclosure 1
1-/3-pole tripping without automatic reclosure 2
1-/3-pole tripping with automatic reclosure 3
With protection data interface 2 see additional specification N (3 has to be at position 6) 9
Backup Functions
without A
with emergency / backup time-overcurrent protection B
with emergency / backup time-overcurrent protection / breaker failure protection C
Additional Funktions 1
4 Remote Commands / 24 Remote Indication Transformer Expansions (Vector Group Adaption)
without without A
without with E
with without J
with with N
without external GPS synchronisation 0
with external GPS synchronisation 1
Additional Specification M + M
DIGSI/Modem Interface (Device Rear)
no DIGSI interface 0
DIGSI 4, electrical RS232 1
DIGSI 4, electrical RS485 2
DIGSI 4, optical 820 nm, ST-plug 3
Protection Data Interface 1

Optical 820 nm, 2 ST-plugs, optical fibre up to a length of 1.5 km, for direct connection or communication networks A
Optical 820 nm, 2 ST-plugs, optical fibre up to a lenght of 3.5 km, for direct connection via multimode fibre B
Optical 1300 nm, 2 ST-plugs, optical fibre up to a length of 10 km, for direct connection via monomode fibre C
Optical 1300 nm, 2 FC-plugs, optical fibre up to a length of 35 km, for direct connection via monomode fibre D
Additional Specification N + N
Functions 1
Only 3-pole tripping without automatic reclosure 0
Only 3-pole tripping with automatic reclosure 1
1-/3-pole tripping without automatic reclosure 2
1-/3-pole tripping with automatic reclosure 3
Protection Data Interface 2

Optical 820 nm, 2 ST-plugs, optical fibre up to a length of 1.5 km, for direct connection or communication networks A
Optical 820 nm, 2 ST-plugs, optical fibre up to a length of 3.5 km, for direct connection via multimode fibre B
Optical 1300 nm, 2 ST-plugs, optical fibre up to a length of 10 km, for direct connection via monomode fibre C
Optical 1300 nm, 2 FC-plugs, optical fibre up to a length of 35 km, for direct connection via monomode fibre D
Ordering example: 7SD5221–4AA39–2AJ0 +M1A
Differential protection
here: pos. 12 = 9 pointing at M1A, i.e. version with DIGSI-interface RS232 on the rear side
Protection data interface 1: 820 nm direct connection or communication networks
7SD52 Manual A-3

C53000–G1176–C132–2
A Appendix
A.1.1 Accessories
Communication Converter for the serial connection of the differential protection system 7SD52 to the
Converter synchronous communication interfaces X.21 or G.703 or copper cable (Cu)
Name Order No.
Optical–electrical communication converter (CC-X/G) 7XV5662-0AA00
Optical–electrical communication converter (CC-Cu) 7XV5662-0AC00
GPS
Name Order No.
GPS–receiver and antenna 7XV5664-0AA00
Power supply 7XV5810-0BA00
Voltage Transform-
er Miniature Circuit Nominal varies Order No.
Breaker Thermal 1.6 A; magnetic 6 A 3RV1611-1AG14
Interface Exchange interface modules

Modules
Name Order No.
RS232 C73207-A351-D641-1
RS485 C73207-A351-D642-1
LWL 820 nm C73207-A351-D643-1
F05 with ST–plug; 820 nm; C53207-A351-D651-1
multimode fibre up to a length of 1.5 km 1)
multimode fibre up to a length of 3.5 km
monomode fibre up to a length of 10 km
F08 with FC–plug; 1300 nm; C53207-A351-D654-1
monomode fibre up to a length of 35 km
1
) is also used for the connection to an optical-electrical communication converter
Terminal Block
Covering Caps Covering cap for terminal block type Order No.
18 terminal voltage, 12 terminal current block C73334-A1-C31-1
12 terminal voltage, 8 terminal current block C73334-A1-C32-1
Short Circuit Links

Short circuit links for purpose/terminal type Order No.
Voltage connections, 18 terminal, or 12 terminal C73334-A1-C34-1
Current connections,12 terminal, or 8 terminal C73334-A1-C33-1
A-4 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Plug-in Connectors
Connector Type Order No.
2 pin C73334-A1-C35-1
3 pin C73334-A1-C36-1
Mounting Bracket
for 19"-Racks Name Order No.
Angle Strip (Mounting Rail) C73165-A63-C200-3
Battery
Lithium-Battery 3 V/1 Ah, Type CR 1/2 AA Order No.
VARTA 6127 101 501
Interface Cable An interface cable is necessary for communication between the SIPROTEC device
and a PC. Requirements for the computer are Windows 95 or Windows NT4 and the
operating software DIGSI® 4.
Interface cable between PC or SIPROTEC device Order No.
Cable with 9-pin male/female connections 7XV5100-4
Operating Software Software for setting and operating SIPROTEC® 4 devices

DIGSI® 4
Operating Software DIGSI® 4 Order No.
DIGSI® 4, basic version with license for 10 computers 7XS5400-0AA00
®
DIGSI 4, complete version with all option packages 7XS5402-0AA0
Graphical Analysis Software for graphical visualization, analysis, and evaluation of fault data. Option
Program SIGRA package of the complete version of DIGSI® 4
Graphical analysis program DIGRA® Order No.
Full version with license for 10 machines 7XS5410-0AA0
DIGSI REMOTE 4 Software for remotely operating protective devices via a modem (and possibly a star
connector) using DIGSI® 4. (Option package of the complete version of DIGSI® 4.
DIGSI REMOTE 4 Order No.
SIMATIC CFC 4 Graphical software for setting interlocking (latching) control conditions and creating
additional function is SIPROTEC 4 devices. Option package for the complete version
of DIGSI® 4.
SIMATIC CFC 4 Order No.
7SD52 Manual A-5

C53000–G1176–C132–2
A Appendix
A.2 General Diagrams
A.2.1 Panel Flush Mounting or Cubicle Mounting
7SD52∗∗−∗A/J
Q1 *) BO1 K6
IL1
Q2 *) BO2 K7
Q3 *) BO3 K8
IL2
Q4 K5
Q5 IL3 K9
*) BO4
Q6 K10
Q7 K11 *) accelerated
I4 *) BO5
Q8 K12
R15 UL1 K13
*) BO6
R17 UL2 K14
R18 UL3 K15
*) BO7
R16 K16
R13 BO8 R1
U4
R14 BO9 R2
BO10 R3
K17 BI1 BO11 R4
K18 BO12 R6
J1 BI2
R5
J2
1 2
J3 BI3 BO13 R7
3 2
J4 BI4 R8
J6 BI5
BO14 R9
J5
R10
J7 BI6
BO15 R11
J8
R12
J9 BI7
J10 Live status 1 2
K3
J11 BI8 contact 3 2
K4
J12 +
Power (~)
K1
supply - K2
Protection data
Pin assignment of interfaces see Tables
interface 2 E
Protection data
D
8-12 and 8-13 in Section 8.2.1
interface 1
System
interface B
Service
interface C
Time
synchronization A
Operator
interface
Earthing at the Interference suppression

capacitors at the contacts,
rear wall
Ceramic, 4.7 nF, 250 V
Figure A-1 General diagram 7SD52∗∗–∗A/J (panel flush mounting or cubicle mounting)
A-6 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
7SD52∗∗−∗C/L
Q1 *) BO1 K6
IL1
Q2 *) BO2 K7
Q3 *) BO3 K8
IL2
Q4 K5
Q5 *) BO4 K9
IL3
Q6 K10
Q7 *) BO5 K11 *) accelerated outputs
I4 K12
Q8
R15 UL1 *) BO6 K13
R17 UL2 K14
R18 UL3 *) BO7 K15
K16
R16 BO8 R1
R13 U4 BO9 R2
R14
BO10 R3
K17 BI1 BO11 R4
K18 BO12 R6
J1 BI2 R5
J2 BO13
1 2
R7
J3 BI3 3 2
R8
J4 BI4
J6 BI5 BO14 R9
J5 R10
J7 BI6 BO15 R11
J8 R12
1 2
J9 BI7 BO16 P3
3 2
J10 P4
J11 BI8 BO17 P6
J12 BO18 P7
P17 BI9 BO19 P8
P18 P5
N1 BI10 BO20 P9
N2 P10
N3 BI11 BO21 P11
N4 BI12 P12
N6 BI13 BO22 P13
N5 P14
N7 BI14 BO23 P15
N8 P16
N9 BI15
Live status 1 2
K3
N10 contact 3 2
N11 BI16 K4
N12 +
Power (~)
K1
supply - K2
Protection data
interface 2 E
Protection data
interface 1 D
System
interface B
Service
interface C
Time
synchronization A
Operator
interface Interference suppression
Earthing at the Ceramic, 4.7 nF, 250 V
rear wall
Figure A-2 General diagram 7SD52∗∗–∗C/L (panel flush mounting or cubicle mounting)
7SD52 Manual A-7

C53000–G1176–C132–2
A Appendix
7SD52∗∗−∗N/S
Q1 *) BO1 K6
IL1
Q2 *) BO2 K7
Q3 *) BO3 K8
IL2
Q4 K5
Q5 *) BO4 K9
IL3
Q6 K10
Q7 *) BO5 K11 *) accelerated outputs
I4 K12
Q8 **) high-speed
R15 UL1 *) BO6 K13
R17 UL2 K14
R18 UL3 *) BO7 K15
K16
R16 BO8 R1
R13 U4 BO9 R2
R14
BO10 R3
K17 BI1 BO11 R4
K18 BO12 R6
J1 BI2 R5
J2 BO13
1 2
R7
J3 BI3 3 2
R8
J4 BI4
J6 BI5 BO14 R9
J5 R10
J7 BI6 BO15 R11
J8 R12
J9 BI7 **) BO16 P3
J10 P4
J11 BI8 *) BO17 P6
J12 *) BO18 P7
P17 BI9 *) BO19 P8
P18 P5
N1 BI10 **) BO20 P9
N2 P10
N3 BI11 **) BO21 P11
N4 BI12 P12
N6 BI13 **) BO22 P13
N5 P14
N7 BI14 **) BO23 P15
N8 P16
N9 BI15
Live status 1 2
K3
N10 contact 3 2
N11 BI16 K4
N12 +
Power (~)
K1
supply - K2
Protection data
interface 2 E
Protection data
interface 1 D
System
interface B
Service
interface C
Time
synchronization A
Operator
interface Interference suppression
Earthing at the Ceramic, 4.7 nF, 250 V
rear wall
Figure A-3 General diagram 7SD52∗∗–∗N/S (panel flush mounting or cubicle mounting)
A-8 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
7SD52∗∗−
Q1 *) BO1 K6
∗D/M Q2
IL1
*) BO2 K7
Q3 *) BO3 K8
IL2
Q4 K5
Q5 *) BO4 K9
IL3 K10
Q6
Q7 *) BO5 K11
I4 K12
Q8 *) accelerated outputs
R15 UL1 *) BO6 K13
R17 UL2 K14
R18 UL3 *) BO7 K15
K16
R16 BO8 R1
R13 U4 BO9 R2
R14 BO10 R3
K17 BI1 BO11 R4
K18 BO12 R6
J1 BI2 R5
J2 BO13
1 2
R7
J3 BI3 3 2
R8
J4 BI4
J6 BI5 BO14 R9
J5 R10
BO15 R11
J7 BI6
R12
J8 1 2
J9 BI7 BO16 P3
3 2
J10 P4
J11 BI8 BO17 P6
J12 BO18 P7
BO19 P8
P17 BI9
P18 P5
BO20 P9
N1 BI10
P10
N2
BO21 P11
N3 BI11 P12
N4 BI12
N6 BI13 BO22 P13
N5 P14
N7 BI14 BO23 P15
P16
N8
1 2
N9 BI15 BO24 H3
3 2
N10 H4
N11 BI16 BO25 H6
N12 BO26 H7
H17 BI17 BO27 H8
H18 H5
G1 BI18 BO28 H9
G2 H10
G3 BI19 BO29 H11
G4 BI20 H12
G6 BI21 BO30 H13
G5 H14
G7 BI22 BO31 H15
G8 H16
G9 BI23 Live status 1 2
K3
G10 contact 3 2
K4
+
G11 BI24 Power (~)
K1
G12 supply - K2
Protection data E
interface 2
Time Protection data
A synchronization D
interface 1
Operator System
interface interface B
Interference suppression
Earthing at the Service capacitors at the contacts,
rear wall interface C Ceramic, 4.7 nF, 250 V
Figure A-4 General diagram 7SD52∗∗–∗D/M (panel flush mounting or cubicle mounting)
7SD52 Manual A-9

C53000–G1176–C132–2
A Appendix
7SD52∗∗−
Q1 *) BO1 K6
∗P/T Q2
IL1
*) BO2 K7
Q3 *) BO3 K8
IL2
Q4 K5
Q5 *) BO4 K9
IL3 K10
Q6
Q7 *) BO5 K11
I4 K12
Q8 *) accelerated outputs
R15 UL1 *) BO6 K13
**) high-speed
R17 UL2 K14
R18 UL3 *) BO7 K15
K16
R16 BO8 R1
R13 U4 BO9 R2
R14 BO10 R3
K17 BI1 BO11 R4
K18 BO12 R6
J1 BI2 R5
J2 BO13
1 2
R7
J3 BI3 3 2
R8
J4 BI4
J6 BI5 BO14 R9
J5 R10
BO15 R11
J7 BI6
R12
J8
J9 BI7 **) BO16 P3
J10 P4
J11 BI8 *) BO17 P6
J12 *) BO18 P7
*) BO19 P8
P17 BI9
P18 P5
**) BO20 P9
N1 BI10
P10
N2
**) BO21 P11
N3 BI11 P12
N4 BI12
N6 BI13 **) BO22 P13
N5 P14
N7 BI14 **) BO23 P15
P16
N8
1 2
N9 BI15 BO24 H3
3 2
N10 H4
N11 BI16 BO25 H6
N12 BO26 H7
H17 BI17 BO27 H8
H18 H5
G1 BI18 BO28 H9
G2 H10
G3 BI19 BO29 H11
G4 BI20 H12
G6 BI21 BO30 H13
G5 H14
G7 BI22 BO31 H15
G8 H16
G9 BI23 Live status 1 2
K3
G10 contact 3 2
K4
+
G11 BI24 Power (~)
K1
G12 supply - K2
Protection data E
interface 2
Time Protection data
A synchronization D
interface 1
Operator System
interface interface B
Earthing at the Service capacitors at the contacts,
rear wall interface C Ceramic, 4.7 nF, 250 V
Figure A-5 General diagram 7SD52∗∗–∗P/T (panel flush mounting or cubicle mounting)
A-10 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
A.2.2 Panel Surface Mounting
7SD52∗∗−∗E
*) BO1
25 IL1 63
50 *) BO2 87
24 *) BO3 62
IL2
49 88
23 IL3 *) BO4 86
48 61 *) accelerated outputs
22 I4 *) BO5 85
47 60
20 UL1 84
*) BO6
19 UL2 59
44 UL3 83
*) BO7
45 58
21 BO8 74
U4
46 BO9 99
BO10 73
43 BI1 BO11 98
18 BO12 72
42 BI2 97
17
1 2
41 BI3 BO13 96
3 2
40 BI4 71
39 BI5
BO14 95
14 70
38 BI6 94
BO15
13 69
37 BI7
12 Live status 1 2
90
contact 3 2
36 BI8 65
11 +
Power (~)
L+
supply - L–
Earthing
terminal (26)
Pin assignment of
Operator interfaces see Table
interface
8-12 in Section 8.2.1
Earthing at the
side wall Interference suppression
Figure A-6 General diagram 7SD52∗∗−∗E (panel surface mounting)
For further serial interfaces refer to Figure A-7 and A-8.
7SD52 Manual A-11

C53000–G1176–C132–2
A Appendix
7SD52∗∗−∗E
(up to development
state /BB)
Channel B
RS232 RS485
5 CTS B
System
optical 6 RTS –
interface or 7 GND GND
electrical 8 TxD A
9 RxD –
10 Screen
Channel C
RS232 RS485
30 CTS B
Service
optical 31 RTS –
electrical 33 TxD A
34 RxD –
35 Screen
Protection data optical

interface 1 Channel D

interface 2 Channel E
2 IN SYNC
27 IN 12 V
electrical 3 COM SYNC
Time
synchronization 28 COMMON
4 IN 5 V
29 IN 24 V
1 Screen
Figure A-7 General diagram 7SD52∗∗−∗E up to development state /BB (panel surface
mounting)
A-12 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
7SD52∗∗−∗E
(beginning with
development state
/CC)
optical
System
interface
electrical Channel B
electric RS232/RS485
optical
Service
interface
electrical Channel C
For the pin assignment of

the interfaces see tables
8-12 and 8-13 in sub-
section 8.2.1
Protection optical
data interface 1 Channel D
Protection optical
Channel E
data interface 2
2 IN SYNC
27 IN 12 V
Clock electrical 3 COM SYNC
synchronisation 28 COMMON
4 IN 5 V
29 IN 24 V
1 Screen
Figure A-8 General diagram 7SD52∗∗−∗E beginning with development state /CC (panel
surface mounting)
7SD52 Manual A-13

C53000–G1176–C132–2
A Appendix
7SD52∗∗−∗G
50 *) BO1 123
IL1
100 *) BO2 172
49 *) BO3 122
IL2
99 173
48 *) BO4 171
IL3
98 121
47 *) BO5 170
I4 120
97 *) accelerated outputs
45 UL1 *) BO6 169
44 UL2 119
94 UL3 *) BO7 168
118
95 BO8 149
46 U4 BO9 199
96
BO10 148
75 BI1 BO11 198
25 BO12 147
74 BI2 197
24 1 2
BO13 196
73 BI3 3 2
146
23 BI4
22 BI5 BO14 195
72 145
71 BI6 BO15 194
21 144
1 2
70 BI7 BO16 190
3 2
20 140
69 BI8 BO17 139
19 BO18 188
90 BI9 BO19 138
40 189
89 BI10 187
39 BO20
137
86 BI11 186
36 BI12 BO21
136
35 BI13
BO22 185
85
135
84 BI14 184
34 BO23
134
83 BI15
33
82 BI16
32 Live status 1 2
174
contact 3 2
124
+
Power (~)
L+
supply - L–
Earthing
terminal (51)
Pin assignment of
interface
Earthing at the
side wall
Figure A-9 General diagram 7SD52∗∗−∗G (panel surface mounting)
A-14 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
7SD52∗∗−∗Q
50 *) BO1 123
IL1
100 *) BO2 172
49 *) BO3 122
IL2
99 173
48 *) BO4 171
IL3
98 121
47 *) BO5 170
I4 120
97 *) accelerated outputs
45 UL1 *) BO6 169 **) high-speed
44 UL2 119
94 UL3 *) BO7 168
118
95 BO8 149
46 U4 BO9 199
96
BO10 148
75 BI1 BO11 198
25 BO12 147
74 BI2 197
24 1 2
BO13 196
73 BI3 3 2
146
23 BI4
22 BI5 BO14 195
72 145
71 BI6 BO15 194
21 144
70 BI7 **) BO16 190
20 140
69 BI8 *) BO17 139
19 *) BO18 188
90 BI9 *) BO19 138
40 189
89 BI10 **) BO20 187
39 137
86 BI11 186
36 BI12 **) BO21
136
35 BI13
**) BO22 185
85
135
84 BI14 184
34 **) BO23
134
83 BI15
33
82 BI16
32 Live status 1 2
174
contact 3 2
124
+
Power (~)
L+
supply - L–
Earthing
terminal (51)
Pin assignment of
interface
Earthing at the
side wall
Figure A-10 General diagram 7SD52∗∗−∗Q (panel surface mounting)
7SD52 Manual A-15

C53000–G1176–C132–2
A Appendix
7SD52∗∗−∗H 50 *) BO1 123

IL1
100 *) BO2 172
49 *) BO3 122
IL2
99 173
48 *) BO4 171
IL3
98 121
47 *) BO5 170 *) accelerated outputs
I4 120
97
45 UL1 *) BO6 169
44 UL2 119
94 UL3 *) BO7 168
118
95 BO8 149
46 U4 BO9 199
96
BO10 148
75 BI1 BO11 198
25 BO12 147
74 BI2 197
24 BO13
1 2
196
73 BI3 3 2
146
23 BI4
22 BI5 BO14 195
72 145
71 BI6 BO15 194
21 144
1 2
70 BI7 BO16 190
3 2
20 140
69 BI8 BO17 139
19 BO18 188
90 BI9 BO19 138
40 189
89 BI10 187
BO20
39 137
86 BI11 186
BO21
36 BI12 136
35 BI13 185
BO22
85 135
84 BI14 184
BO23
34 134
83 BI15 1 2
33 BO24 166
3 2
116
82 BI16
BO25 115
32
BO26 164
68 BI17 BO27 114
18
165
67 BI18
BO28 163
17
113
66 BI19
BO29 162
16 BI20
112
15 BI21
65 BO30 161
111
64 BI22
14 BO31 160
110
63 BI23
13 Live status 1 2
174
62 BI24 contact 3 2
124 Interference suppression
12 + capacitors at the contacts,
Power (~)
L+
supply - Ceramic, 4.7 nF, 250 V
Earthing L–
terminal (51) Pin assignment of
Operator
interface interfaces see Table
Earthing at the
side wall
Figure A-11 General diagram 7SD52∗∗−∗H (panel surface mounting)

A-16 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
7SD52∗∗−∗R 50 *) BO1 123

IL1
100 *) BO2 172
49 *) BO3 122
IL2
99 173
48 *) BO4 171
IL3
98 121
47 *) BO5 170 *) accelerated outputs
I4 120
97 **) high-speed
45 UL1 *) BO6 169
44 UL2 119
94 UL3 *) BO7 168
118
95 BO8 149
46 U4 BO9 199
96
BO10 148
75 BI1 BO11 198
25 BO12 147
74 BI2 197
24 BO13
1 2
196
73 BI3 3 2
146
23 BI4
22 BI5 BO14 195
72 145
71 BI6 BO15 194
21 144
70 BI7 **) BO16 190
20 140
69 BI8 *) BO17 139
19 *) BO18 188
90 BI9 *) BO19 138
40 189
89 BI10 **) BO20 187
39 137
86 BI11 186
**) BO21
36 BI12 136
35 BI13 185
**) BO22
85 135
84 BI14 184
**) BO23
34 134
83 BI15 1 2
33 BO24 166
3 2
116
82 BI16
BO25 115
32
BO26 164
68 BI17 BO27 114
18
165
67 BI18
BO28 163
17
113
66 BI19
BO29 162
16 BI20
112
15 BI21
65 BO30 161
111
64 BI22
14 BO31 160
110
63 BI23
13 Live status 1 2
174
62 BI24 contact 3 2
124 Interference suppression
12 + capacitors at the contacts,
Power (~)
L+
supply - Ceramic, 4.7 nF, 250 V
Earthing L–
terminal (51) Pin assignment of
Operator
interface interfaces see Table
Earthing at the
side wall
Figure A-12 General diagram 7SD52∗∗−∗R (panel surface mounting)

7SD52 Manual A-17

C53000–G1176–C132–2
A Appendix
7SD52∗∗−∗G/H/Q/R
(up to development
state /BB)
Channel B
RS232 RS485
5 CTS B
optical 6 RTS –
System
electrical 8 TxD A
9 RxD –
10 Screen
Channel C
RS232 RS485
55 CTS B
Service
optical 56 RTS –
electrical 58 TxD A
59 RxD –
60 Screen

interface 1 Channel D

interface 2 Channel E
2 IN SYNC
52 IN 12 V
Time electrical 3 COM SYNC
synchronization 53 COMMON
4 IN 5 V
54 IN 24 V
1 Screen
Figure A-13 General diagram 7SD52∗∗−∗G/H/Q/R up to development state /BB (panel sur-
face mounting)
A-18 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
7SD52∗∗−∗G/H/Q/R
(beginning with
development state
/CC)
optical
System
interface Channel B
electrical electric RS232/RS485
optical
Service
interface Channel C
electrical
For the pin assignment of

the interfaces see tables
8-12 and 8-13 in sub-
section 8.2.1
Protection optical
data interface1 Channel D
Protection optical
data interface 2 Channel E
2 IN SYNC
52 IN 12 V
electrical 3 COM SYNC
Clock
synchronisation 53 COMMON
4 IN 5 V
54 IN 24 V
1 screen
Figure A-14 General diagram 7SD52∗∗−∗G/H/Q/R beginning with development state /CC
(panel surface mounting)
7SD52 Manual A-19

C53000–G1176–C132–2
A Appendix
A.3 Connection Examples
Current
Transformer
Connection
Examples Panel surface mounted
Flush mounted/cubicle
IL1
25 Q1 Q2 50
IL2
24 Q3 Q4 49
IL3
23 Q5 Q6 48
P2
S2
I4
P1
S1 22 Q7 Q8 47
7SD52
L1 L2 L3 Housing size 1/2
Panel surface mounted

IL1
50 Q1 Q2 100
IL2
49 Q3 Q4 99
IL3
48 Q5 Q6 98
P2
S2
I4
P1
S1 47 Q7 Q8 97
7SD52
L1 L2 L3 Housing size 1/1
Figure A-15 Current connections to three current transformers with a star-point connection
for earth current (residual 3I0 neutral current), normal circuit layout —
appropriate for all networks
A-20 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2

IL1
25 Q1 Q2 50
IL2
24 Q3 Q4 49
IL3
23 Q5 Q6 48
P2
S2
I4
S1 47 Q8 Q7 22
P1
7SD52
L1 L2 L3
P2 S2
P1 S1
Important! Cable shield grounding must be done on the cable side!
Note: Change of Address 0201 setting changes polarity of 3I0 current
input I4
Housing size 1/2

IL1
50 Q1 Q2 100
IL2
49 Q3 Q4 99
IL3
48 Q5 Q6 98
P2
S2
I4
S1 97 Q8 Q7 47
P1
7SD52
L1 L2 L3
P2 S2
P1 S1
Important! Cable shield grounding must be done on the cable side!
Note: Change of Address 0201 setting changes polarity of 3I0 current
input I4
Housing size 1/1
Figure A-16 Current connections to three current transformers and a separate neutral current
transformer (summation transformer) for earth current — preferred for solidly or
low-resistive earthed networks
7SD52 Manual A-21

C53000–G1176–C132–2
A Appendix
Voltage L1
Transformer L2
Connection L3
Examples

UL1
20 R15
A B
UL2
19 R17
UL3
44 R18
a b 45 R16
7SD52
Housing size 1/2
L1
L2
L3

UL1
45 R15
A B UL2
44 R17
UL3
94 R18
a b 95 R16
7SD52
Housing size 1/1
Figure A-17 Voltage connections to three Wye-connected voltage transformers (normal

circuit layout)
A-22 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
L1
L2
L3

UL1
20 R15
A B UL2
19 R17
UL3
44 R18
da dn a b 45 R16
U4
21 R13
46 R14
7SD52
Housing size 1/2
L1
L2
L3

UL1
45 R15
A B UL2
44 R17
UL3
94 R18
da dn a b 95 R16
U4
46 R13
96 R14
7SD52
Housing size 1/1
Figure A-18 Voltage connections to three Wye-connected voltage transformers with

additional open-delta windings (da–dn–winding)
7SD52 Manual A-23

C53000–G1176–C132–2
A Appendix
A.4 Preset Configurations
Binary Inputs
Table A-1 Binary input presettings
Binary Input LCD Text Function No. Remarks

BI 1 >Reset LED 5 Reset of latched indications,
H–active
BI 2 >Manual Close 356 Manual close command,
H–active
BI 3 — — no presetting
BI 4 >BLOCK O/C I>> 7104 Blocking of all stages of the time
>BLOCK O/C I> 7105 overcurrent protection,
>BLOCK O/C Ip 7106 H-active
>BLOCK O/C Ie>> 7107
>BLOCK O/C Ie> 7108
>BLOCK O/C Iep 7109
>BLOCK I-STUB 7130
>BLOCK O/CIe>>> 7132
BI 5 >CB 3p Open 380 Circuit breaker in closed position,
>CB1 3p Open 411 H-active
BI 6 >CB1 Ready 371 Circuit breaker ready for TRIP-CLOSE
cycle (CB check before AR),
H–active
BI 7 >Remote Trip1 3541 Direct transfer trip (remote trip 3-pole),
H-active
(further) — — no presetting
Binary Outputs
Table A-2 Binary output presettings
Binary LCD Text Function No. Remarks

Output
BO1 Relay PICKUP 501 Device (general) pickup,
non-latched
BO2 PI1 Data fault 3229 Data fault on reception at protection
data interface 1, non-latched
BO3 PI2 Data fault 4) 3231 4) Data fault on reception at protection
data interface 2, non-latched 4)
BO4 Relay TRIP 2) 511 2) Device (general) trip command,
non-latched 2)
Relay TRIP 1pL1 1) 512 1) Device trip command pole L1,
Relay TRIP 3ph. 1) 515 1) non-latched 1)
1) Devices with 1- and 3-pole trip 2) Devices with 3-pole trip only
3) Devices with auto-reclosure option 4) Devices with 2 protection data interfaces
A-24 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Table A-2 Binary output presettings
Binary LCD Text Function No. Remarks

Output
non-latched 2)
BO6 — 2) — 2) no presetting 2)
BO7 AR Close 3) 2851 3) Close command of auto-reclosure,
non-latched 3)
BO8 Diff block 3148 Differential protection blocked,
non-latched
BO9 AR is NOT ready 3) 2784 3) Auto-reclosure not ready,
non-latched 3)
BO10 Test Diff. 3190 Differential protection in test mode, lo-
TestDiff.remote 3192 cal or at a remote end, non-latched
BO11 Emer. mode 2054 Emergency mode in progress,
non-latched
BO12 Alarm Sum Event 160 Group alarm of all alarms,
non-latched
non-latched 2)
non-latched 2)
BO15 — 2) — 2) no presetting 2)
(further) — — no presetting
1 2
) Devices with 1- and 3-pole trip ) Devices with 3-pole trip only
3 4
) Devices with auto-reclosure option ) Devices with 2 protection data interfaces
7SD52 Manual A-25

C53000–G1176–C132–2
A Appendix
LEDs
Table A-3 LED presettings
LED LCD Text Function No. Remarks

LED1 Relay PICKUP L1 503 Device (general) trip command,
latched
LED2 Relay PICKUP L2 504 Device (general) pickup phase L1,
latched
LED3 Relay PICKUP L3 505 Device (general) pickup phase L2
latched
LED4 Relay PICKUP E 506 Device (general) pickup phase L3,
latched
LED5 DT inconsistent 3233 Inconsistencies between devices:
DT unequal 3234 Device table, settings, more than 1
Par. different 3235 device with the same address,
Equal IDs 3487 non-latched
LED6 Relay TRIP 2) 511 2) Device (general) trip command,
latched 2)
Relay TRIP 3ph. 1) 515 1) Device trip command three-pole,
latched 1)
LED7 — 2) — 2) no presetting 2)
Relay TRIP 1pL1 1) 512 1) Device trip command single-pole,
Relay TRIP 1pL2 1) 513 1) latched 1)
Relay TRIP 1pL3 1) 514 1)
LED8 Test Diff. 3190 Differential protection in test mode, lo-
TestDiff.remote 3192 cal or at a remote end, non-latched
LED9 PI1 Data fault 3229 Data fault on reception at protection
data interface 1, non-latched
LED10 PI2 Data fault 4) 3231 4) Data fault on reception at protection
data interface 2, non-latched 4)
LED11 Diff block 3148 Differential protection blocked,
non-latched
LED12 AR is NOT ready 3) 2784 3) Auto-reclosure not ready,
non-latched 3)
LED13 Emer. mode 2054 Emergency mode in progress,
non-latched
LED14 Alarm Sum Event 160 Group alarm of all alarms,
non-latched
1 2
) Devices with 1- and 3-pole trip ) Devices with 3-pole trip only
3 4
) Devices with auto-reclosure option ) Devices with 2 protection data interfaces
A-26 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Preset CFC–Charts 7SD52 provides a CFC configuration sheet with preset logical functions. These con-
vert the binary inputs “>DataStop” and “>Test mode” from single point indication
(SP) into internal single point indication (IntSP).
Negator
NEG PLC1_BEA
Negator 1/–
IN: Device >DataStop SP BO X1 Y BO OUT: Device UnlockDT IntSP
Timer
TIMER PLC1_BEA OR
Timer 4/– OR PLC1_BEA
0 BO R Q BO OR–Gate 5/–
IN: Diff. Prot >Test Diff. SP BO S QT1 BO BO X1 Y BO
10 I T1x1ms QT2 BO BO X2
10 I T2x1ms
INVERT COM
NEG PLC1_BEA BOOL_TO_IC PLC1_BEA
Negator 2/– Bool to intern 6/–
IN: Diff. Prot >Test Diff. SP BO X1 Y BO 16#0 W ORIGIN IE BO OUT: Diff. Prot Test Diff. IntSP
DM 16#0 W PROP
BUILD_DI PLC1_BEA 0 I TIMx100m
Create Double 3/– BO TRIG
0 BO TYP_DP_I Y W W VAL
BO VAL OFF
IN: Diff. Prot >Test Diff. SP BO VAL ON
7SD52 Manual A-27

C53000–G1176–C132–2
A Appendix
A.5 Protocol Dependent Functions
Protocol →
IEC 60870–5–103
Function ↓
Operational measured values Yes
Metering values Yes
Fault recording Yes
User-defined alarms and switch- Yes
ing objects
Time synchronization Via Protocol;
DCF77/IRIG B;
Interface;
Binary Input
Alarms with Time Stamp Yes
Commissioning Tools:
Alarm and measured Yes
value transmission
blocking
Generate test alarms Yes
A-28 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
A.6 List of Settings
Note: Depending on the version and the variant ordered some addresses are not used
or have different default settings. The setting ranges and presettings listed in the fol-
lowing table refer to a nominal current value IN = 1 A. For a secondary nominal current
value IN = 5 A the current values are to be multiplied by 5. For setting primary values
the transformation ratio of the transformer also must be taken into consideration.

103 Grp Chge OPTION Disabled Disabled Setting Group Change Option
Enabled
104 OSC. FAULT REC. Disabled Enabled Oscillographic Fault Records

Enabled
110 Trip 1pole 3pole only 3pole only 1pole trip permitted
1-/3pole
112 DIFF.PROTECTION Enabled Enabled Differential protection

Disabled
115 P. INTERFACE 1 Enabled Enabled Protection Interface 1 (Port D)

Disabled
116 P. INTERFACE 2 Disabled Disabled Protection Interface 2 (Port E)

Enabled
118 GPS-SYNC. Enabled Disabled GPS synchronization

Disabled
122 DTT Direct Trip Disabled Disabled DTT Direct Transfer Trip
Enabled
124 HS/SOTF-O/C Disabled Disabled Instantaneous HighSpeed/SOTF

Enabled Overcurrent
126 Back-Up O/C Disabled Time Overcurrent Backup overcurrent

Time Overcurrent Curve IEC Curve IEC
Time Overcurrent Curve ANSI
133 Auto Reclose 1 AR-cycle Disabled Auto-Reclose Function

2 AR-cycles
3 AR-cycles
4 AR-cycles
5 AR-cycles
6 AR-cycles
7 AR-cycles
8 AR-cycles
Adaptive Dead Time (ADT)
Disabled
134 AR control mode with Pickup and Action time with Trip but without AR control mode
with Pickup but without Action time Action time
withTrip and Action time
with Trip but without Action time
139 BREAKER FAILURE Disabled Disabled Breaker Failure Protection

Enabled
7SD52 Manual A-29

C53000–G1176–C132–2
A Appendix

140 Trip Cir. Sup. Disabled Disabled Trip Circuit Supervision
1 trip circuit
2 trip circuits
3 trip circuits
142 Therm.Overload Disabled Disabled Thermal Overload Protection

Enabled
143 NUMBER OF RELAY 2 relays 2 relays Number of relays

3 relays
4 relays
5 relays
6 relays
144 V-TRANSFORMER not connected connected Voltage transformers

connected
145 TRANSFORMER NO NO Transformer inside protection zone

YES
Addr. Setting Title Function Setting Options Default Setting Comments

201 CT Starpoint Power System towards Line towards Line CT Starpoint
Data 1 towards Busbar
203 Unom PRIMARY Power System 1.0..1200.0 kV 400.0 kV Rated Primary Voltage
Data 1
204 Unom SECONDARY Power System 80..125 V 100 V Rated Secondary Voltage (L-L)
Data 1
205 CT PRIMARY Power System 10..5000 A 1000 A CT Rated Primary Current

Data 1
206 CT SECONDARY Power System 1A 1A CT Rated Secondary Current

Data 1 5A
210 U4 transformer Power System not connected not connected U4 voltage transformer is
Data 1 Udelta transformer
211 Uph / Udelta Power System 0.10..9.99 1.73 Matching ratio Phase-VT To
Data 1 Open-Delta-VT
220 I4 transformer Power System not connected Neutral Current (of the I4 current transformer is
Data 1 Neutral Current (of the protected line)
protected line)
221 I4/Iph CT Power System 0.010..5.000 1.000 Matching ratio I4/Iph for CT's
Data 1
230 Rated Frequency Power System 50 Hz 50 Hz Rated Frequency

Data 1 60 Hz
240A TMin TRIP CMD Power System 0.02..30.00 sec 0.10 sec Minimum TRIP Command
Data 1 Duration
241A TMax CLOSE CMD Power System 0.01..30.00 sec 1.00 sec Maximum Close Command
Data 1 Duration
242 T-CBtest-dead Power System 0.00..30.00 sec 0.10 sec Dead Time for CB test-autore-
Data 1 closure
251 K_ALF/K_ALF_N Power System 1.00..10.00 1.00 k_alf/k_alf nominal

Data 1
A-30 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2

253 E% ALF/ALF_N Power System 0.5..50.0 % 5.0 % CT Error in % at k_alf/k_alf
Data 1 nominal
254 E% K_ALF_N Power System 0.5..50.0 % 10.0 % CT Error in % at k_alf nominal

Data 1
301 ACTIVE GROUP Change Group Group A Group A Active Setting Group is
Group B
Group C
Group D
302 CHANGE Change Group Group A Group A Change to a diffedent setting

Group B group
Group C
Group D
Binary Input
Protocol
402A WAVEFORMTRIGGER Oscillographic Save with Pickup Save with Pickup Waveform Capture
Fault Records Save with TRIP
Start with TRIP
403A WAVEFORM DATA Oscillographic Fault event Fault event Scope of Waveform Data
Fault Records Power System fault
410 MAX. LENGTH Oscillographic 0.30..5.00 sec 2.00 sec Max. length of a Waveform
Fault Records Capture Record
411 PRE. TRIG. TIME Oscillographic 0.05..0.50 sec 0.25 sec Captured Waveform Prior to
Fault Records Trigger
412 POST REC. TIME Oscillographic 0.05..0.50 sec 0.10 sec Captured Waveform after
Fault Records Event
415 BinIn CAPT.TIME Oscillographic 0.10..5.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec Capture Time via Binary Input
Fault Records
610 FltDisp.LED/LCD Device Display Targets on Display Targets on Fault Display on LED / LCD
every Pickup every Pickup
Display Targets on
TRIP only
1103 FullScaleVolt. Power System 1.0..1200.0 kV 400.0 kV Measurement: Full Scale

Data 2 Voltage (100%)
1104 FullScaleCurr. Power System 10..5000 A 1000 A Measurement: Full Scale Cur-
Data 2 rent (100%)
1106 OPERATION POWER Power System 10.0..5000.0 MVA 692.8 MVA Operational power of protec-
Data 2 tion zone
1130A PoleOpenCurrent Power System 0.05..1.00 A 0.10 A Pole Open Current Threshold
Data 2
1132A SI Time all Cl. Power System 0.01..30.00 sec 0.10 sec Seal-in Time after ALL closu-
Data 2 res
1134 Line status Power System with Pole Open Cur- with Pole Open Cur- Line status
Data 2 rent Threshold only rent Threshold only
with CBaux AND Pole
Open Current
1150A SI Time Man.Cl Power System 0.01..30.00 sec 0.30 sec Seal-in Time after MANUAL
Data 2 closures
1155 3pole coupling Power System with Pickup with Trip 3 pole coupling
Data 2 with Trip
7SD52 Manual A-31

C53000–G1176–C132–2
A Appendix

1156A Trip2phFlt Power System 3pole 3pole Trip type with 2phase faults
Data 2 1pole, leading phase
1pole, lagging phase
1161 VECTOR GROUP U Power System 0..11 0 Vector group numeral for
Data 2 voltage
1162 VECTOR GROUP I Power System 0..11 0 Vector group numeral for cur-
Data 2 rent
1163 TRANS STP IS Power System Solid Earthed Solid Earthed Transformer starpoint is
Data 2 Not Earthed
1201 STATE OF DIFF. Differential Pro- OFF ON State of differential protection

tection ON
1210 I-DIFF> Differential Pro- 0.10..20.00 A 0.30 A I-DIFF>: Pickup value

tection
1213 I-DIF>SWITCH ON Differential Pro- 0.10..20.00 A 0.30 A I-DIFF>: Value under switch on
tection condition
1217A T-DELAY I-DIFF> Differential Pro- 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 0.00 sec I-DIFF>: Trip time delay
tection
1218A T3I0 1PHAS Differential Pro- 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 0.00 sec Delay 1ph-faults (comp/isol.
tection star-point)
1233 I-DIFF>> Differential Pro- 0.8..100.0 A; ∞ 1.2 A I-DIFF>>: Pickup value

tection
1301 I-TRIP SEND Intertrip YES NO State of transmit. the intertrip

NO command
1302 I-TRIP RECEIVE Intertrip Alarm only Alarm only Reaction if intertrip command
Trip is receiv.
1303 T-ITRIP BI Intertrip 0.00..30.00 sec 0.02 sec Delay for intertrip via binary
input
1304 T-ITRIP PROL BI Intertrip 0.00..30.00 sec 0.00 sec Prolongation for intertrip via
bin.input
1501 STATE PROT I 1 Protection Inter- ON ON State of protection interface 1

face (Port D+E) OFF
1502 CONNEC. 1 OVER Protection Inter- Direct connection with Direct connection with Connection 1 over
face (Port D+E) fibre optic cabel fibre optic cabel
Communication con-
verter with 64 kBit/s
Communication con-
Communication con-
1505A PROT 1 T-DELAY Protection Inter- 0.1..30.0 ms 30.0 ms Prot 1: Maximal permissible
face (Port D+E) delay time
1506A PROT 1 UNSYM. Protection Inter- 0.000..3.000 ms 0.100 ms Prot 1: Diff. in send and receive
face (Port D+E) time
1509 T-DATA DISTURB Protection Inter- 0.05..2.00 sec 0.10 sec Time delay for data distur-
face (Port D+E) bance alarm
1510 T-DATAFAIL Protection Inter- 0.0..60.0 sec 6.0 sec Time del for transmission
face (Port D+E) failure alarm
A-32 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2

1511 PI1 SYNCMODE Protection Inter- Telegram and GPS Telegram and GPS PI1 Synchronizationmode
face (Port D+E) Telegram or GPS
GPS synchronization
OFF
1512 Td ResetRemote Protection Inter- 0.00..300.00 sec; ∞ 0.00 sec Remote signal RESET DELAY
face (Port D+E) for comm.fail
1601 STATE PROT I 2 Protection Inter- ON ON State of protection interface 2

face (Port D+E) OFF
1602 CONNEC. 2 OVER Protection Inter- Direct connection with Direct connection with Connection 2 over
face (Port D+E) fibre optic cabel fibre optic cabel
Communication con-
Communication con-
Communication con-
1605A PROT 2 T-DELAY Protection Inter- 0.1..30.0 ms 30.0 ms Prot 2: Maximal permissible
face (Port D+E) delay time
1606A PROT 2 UNSYM. Protection Inter- 0.000..3.000 ms 0.100 ms Prot 2: Diff. in send and receive
face (Port D+E) time
1611 PI2 SYNCMODE Protection Inter- Telegram and GPS Telegram and GPS PI2 Synchronizationmode
face (Port D+E) Telegram or GPS
GPS synchronization
OFF
1701 ID OF RELAY 1 Differential Topo- 1..65534 1 Identification number of relay 1

logy

logy

logy

logy

logy

logy
1710 LOCAL RELAY Differential Topo- relay 1 relay 1 Local relay is

logy relay 2
relay 3
relay 4
relay 5
relay 6
1801 GPS-SYNC. Protection Inter- ON OFF GPS synchronization

face (Port D+E) OFF
1803A TD GPS FAILD Protection Inter- 0.5..60.0 sec 2.1 sec Delay time for local GPS-pulse
face (Port D+E) loss
2201 FCT Direct Trip DTT Direct Trans- ON OFF Direct Transfer Trip (DTT)
fer Trip OFF
2202 Trip Time DELAY DTT Direct Trans- 0.00..30.00 sec; ∞ 0.01 sec Trip Time Delay
fer Trip
7SD52 Manual A-33

C53000–G1176–C132–2
A Appendix

2301 INRUSH REST. Differential Pro- OFF OFF Inrush Restraint
tection ON
2302 2nd HARMONIC Differential Pro- 10..45 % 15 % 2nd. harmonic in % of funda-

tection mental
2303 CROSS BLOCK Differential Pro- NO NO Cross Block

tection YES
2305 MAX INRUSH PEAK Differential Pro- 1.1..25.0 A 15.0 A Maximum inrush-peak value
tection
2310 CROSSB 2HM Differential Pro- 0.00..60.00 sec; ∞ 0.00 sec Time for Crossblock with 2nd
tection harmonic
2401 FCT HS/SOTF-O/C Instantaneous ON ON Inst. High Speed/SOTF-O/C is

HighSpeed SOTF OFF
Overcurrent
2404 I>>> Instantaneous 0.10..15.00 A; ∞ 1.50 A I>>> Pickup

HighSpeed SOTF
Overcurrent
2405A I>>>> Instantaneous 1.00..25.00 A; ∞ ∞A I>>>> Pickup

HighSpeed SOTF
Overcurrent
2601 Operating Mode Backup overcur- ON ON Operating mode

rent Only Emergency pro-
tection
OFF
2610 Iph>> Backup overcur- 0.10..25.00 A; ∞ 2.00 A Iph>> Pickup

rent
2611 T Iph>> Backup overcur- 0.00..30.00 sec; ∞ 0.30 sec T Iph>> Time delay
rent
2612 3I0>> PICKUP Backup overcur- 0.05..25.00 A; ∞ 0.50 A 3I0>> Pickup

rent
2613 T 3I0>> Backup overcur- 0.00..30.00 sec; ∞ 2.00 sec T 3I0>> Time delay
rent
2614 I>> Telep/BI Backup overcur- NO YES Instantaneous trip via Tele-
rent YES prot./BI
2615 I>> SOTF Backup overcur- NO NO Instantaneous trip after Swit-

rent YES chOnToFault
2620 Iph> Backup overcur- 0.10..25.00 A; ∞ 1.50 A Iph> Pickup

rent
2621 T Iph> Backup overcur- 0.00..30.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec T Iph> Time delay
rent
2622 3I0> Backup overcur- 0.05..25.00 A; ∞ 0.20 A 3I0> Pickup

rent
2623 T 3I0> Backup overcur- 0.00..30.00 sec; ∞ 2.00 sec T 3I0> Time delay
rent
2624 I> Telep/BI Backup overcur- NO NO Instantaneous trip via Tele-

rent YES prot./BI
2625 I> SOTF Backup overcur- NO NO Instantaneous trip after Swit-

A-34 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2

2630 Iph> STUB Backup overcur- 0.10..25.00 A; ∞ 1.50 A Iph> STUB Pickup
rent
2631 T Iph STUB Backup overcur- 0.00..30.00 sec; ∞ 0.30 sec T Iph STUB Time delay
rent
2632 3I0> STUB Backup overcur- 0.05..25.00 A; ∞ 0.20 A 3I0> STUB Pickup
rent
2633 T 3I0 STUB Backup overcur- 0.00..30.00 sec; ∞ 2.00 sec T 3I0 STUB Time delay
rent
2634 I-STUB Telep/BI Backup overcur- NO NO Instantaneous trip via Tele-

rent YES prot./BI
2635 I-STUB SOTF Backup overcur- NO NO Instantaneous trip after Swit-

2640 Ip> Backup overcur- 0.10..4.00 A; ∞ ∞A Ip> Pickup

rent
2642 T Ip Time Dial Backup overcur- 0.05..3.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec T Ip Time Dial
rent
2643 Time Dial TD Ip Backup overcur- 0.50..15.00; ∞ 5.00 Time Dial TD Ip

rent
2646 T Ip Add Backup overcur- 0.00..30.00 sec 0.00 sec T Ip Additional Time Delay
rent
2650 3I0p PICKUP Backup overcur- 0.05..4.00 A; ∞ ∞A 3I0p Pickup

rent
2652 T 3I0p TimeDial Backup overcur- 0.05..3.00 sec; ∞ 0.50 sec T 3I0p Time Dial
rent
2653 TimeDial TD3I0p Backup overcur- 0.50..15.00; ∞ 5.00 Time Dial TD 3I0p
rent
2656 T 3I0p Add Backup overcur- 0.00..30.00 sec 0.00 sec T 3I0p Additional Time Delay
rent
2660 IEC Curve Backup overcur- Normal Inverse Normal Inverse IEC Curve
rent Very Inverse
Extremely Inverse
Long time inverse
2661 ANSI Curve Backup overcur- Inverse Inverse ANSI Curve

rent Short Inverse
Long Inverse
Moderately Inverse
Very Inverse
Extremely Inverse
Definite Inverse
2670 I(3I0)p Tele/BI Backup overcur- NO NO Instantaneous trip via Tele-

rent YES prot./BI
2671 I(3I0)p SOTF Backup overcur- NO NO Instantaneous trip after Swit-

2680 SOTF Time DELAY Backup overcur- 0.00..30.00 sec 0.00 sec Trip time delay after SOTF
rent
2901 MEASURE. SUPERV Measurement ON ON Measurement Supervision

Supervision OFF
7SD52 Manual A-35

C53000–G1176–C132–2
A Appendix

2902A BALANCE U-LIMIT Measurement 10..100 V 50 V Voltage Threshold for Balance
Supervision Monitoring
2903A BAL. FACTOR U Measurement 0.58..0.95 0.75 Balance Factor for Voltage
Supervision Monitor
2904A BALANCE I LIMIT Measurement 0.10..1.00 A 0.50 A Current Balance Monitor

Supervision
2905A BAL. FACTOR I Measurement 0.10..0.95 0.50 Balance Factor for Current
Supervision Monitor
2906A ΣI THRESHOLD Measurement 0.10..2.00 A 0.25 A Summated Current Monitoring

Supervision Threshold
2907A ΣI FACTOR Measurement 0.00..0.95 0.50 Summated Current Monitoring

Supervision Factor
2908 BROKEN WIRE Measurement ON ON Fast broken current-wire

Supervision OFF supervision
2921 FAST Σ i SUPERV Measurement ON ON State of fast current summation

Supervision OFF supervis
3401 AUTO RECLOSE Auto Reclose OFF ON Auto-Reclose Function

ON
3402 CB? 1.TRIP Auto Reclose YES NO CB ready interrogation at 1st

NO trip
3403 T-RECLAIM Auto Reclose 0.50..300.00 sec 3.00 sec Reclaim time after successful
AR cycle
3404 T-BLOCK MC Auto Reclose 0.50..300.00 sec; 0 1.00 sec AR blocking duration after
manual close
3406 EV. FLT. RECOG. Auto Reclose with Pickup with Trip Evolving fault recognition
with Trip
3407 EV. FLT. MODE Auto Reclose Stops Auto Reclose starts 3pole AR-cycle Evolving fault (during the dead
starts 3pole AR-cycle time)
3408 T-Start MONITOR Auto Reclose 0.01..300.00 sec 0.50 sec AR start-signal monitoring time
3409 CB TIME OUT Auto Reclose 0.01..300.00 sec 3.00 sec Circuit Breaker (CB) Supervi-
sion Time
3410 T RemoteClose Auto Reclose 0.00..300.00 sec; ∞ 0.20 sec Send delay for remote close
command
3411A T-DEAD EXT. Auto Reclose 0.50..300.00 sec; ∞ ∞ sec Maximum dead time extension
3420 AR WITH DIFF Auto Reclose YES YES AR with differential protection ?
NO
3421 AR w/ SOTF-O/C Auto Reclose YES YES AR with switch-onto-fault over-

NO current
3423 AR WITH I.TRIP Auto Reclose YES YES AR with intertrip ?

NO
3424 AR w/ DTT Auto Reclose YES YES AR with direct transfer trip
NO
3425 AR w/ BackUpO/C Auto Reclose YES YES AR with back-up overcurrent

NO
3430 AR TRIP 3pole Auto Reclose YES YES 3pole TRIP by AR

NO
A-36 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2

3431 DLC / RDT Auto Reclose Without Without Dead Line Check
Dead Line Check
(DLC)
3433 T-ACTION ADT Auto Reclose 0.01..300.00 sec; ∞ 0.20 sec Action time
3434 T-MAX ADT Auto Reclose 0.50..3000.00 sec 5.00 sec Maximum dead time
3435 ADT 1p allowed Auto Reclose YES NO 1pole TRIP allowed

NO
3436 ADT CB? CLOSE Auto Reclose YES NO CB ready interrogation before
NO reclosing
3437 ADT SynRequest Auto Reclose YES NO Request for synchro-check

NO after 3pole AR
3438 T U-stable Auto Reclose 0.10..30.00 sec 0.10 sec Supervision time for dead/live
voltage
3440 U-live> Auto Reclose 30..90 V 48 V Voltage threshold for live line
or bus
3441 U-dead< Auto Reclose 2..70 V 30 V Voltage threshold for dead line
or bus
3450 1.AR: START Auto Reclose YES YES Start of AR allowed in this
NO cycle
3451 1.AR: T-ACTION Auto Reclose 0.01..300.00 sec; ∞ 0.20 sec Action time
3453 1.AR Tdead 1Flt Auto Reclose 0.01..1800.00 sec; ∞ 1.20 sec Dead time after 1phase faults
3456 1.AR Tdead1Trip Auto Reclose 0.01..1800.00 sec; ∞ 1.20 sec Dead time after 1pole trip
3458 1.AR: Tdead EV. Auto Reclose 0.01..1800.00 sec 1.20 sec Dead time after evolving fault
3459 1.AR: CB? CLOSE Auto Reclose YES NO CB ready interrogation before
NO reclosing
3460 1.AR SynRequest Auto Reclose YES NO Request for synchro-check

NO after 3pole AR
3461 2.AR: START Auto Reclose YES NO AR start allowed in this cycle
NO
3467 2.AR Tdead1Trip Auto Reclose 0.01..1800.00 sec; ∞ ∞ sec Dead time after 1pole trip
NO reclosing
7SD52 Manual A-37

C53000–G1176–C132–2
A Appendix

NO after 3pole AR
NO
NO reclosing

NO after 3pole AR
NO
NO reclosing

NO after 3pole AR
3901 FCT BreakerFail Breaker Failure ON ON Breaker Failure Protection is

OFF
3902 I> BF Breaker Failure 0.05..20.00 A 0.10 A Pick-up threshold I>
3903 1p-RETRIP (T1) Breaker Failure NO YES 1pole retrip with stage T1 (local
YES trip)
3904 T1-1pole Breaker Failure 0.00..30.00 sec; ∞ 0.00 sec T1, Delay after 1pole start
(local trip)
3905 T1-3pole Breaker Failure 0.00..30.00 sec; ∞ 0.00 sec T1, Delay after 3pole start
(local trip)
3906 T2 Breaker Failure 0.00..30.00 sec; ∞ 0.15 sec T2, Delay of 2nd stage (busbar
trip)
3907 T3-BkrDefective Breaker Failure 0.00..30.00 sec; ∞ 0.00 sec T3, Delay for start with defec-
tive bkr.
A-38 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2

3908 Trip BkrDefect. Breaker Failure NO NO Trip output selection with
trips with T1-trip-signal defective bkr
trips with T2-trip-signal
trips with T1 and T2-
trip-signal
3909 Chk BRK CONTACT Breaker Failure NO YES Check Breaker contacts
YES
3921 End Flt. stage Breaker Failure ON OFF End fault stage is
OFF
3922 T-EndFault Breaker Failure 0.00..30.00 sec; ∞ 2.00 sec Trip delay of end fault stage
3931 PoleDiscrepancy Breaker Failure ON OFF Pole Discrepancy supervision

OFF
3932 T-PoleDiscrep. Breaker Failure 0.00..30.00 sec; ∞ 2.00 sec Trip delay with pole discre-
pancy
4001 FCT TripSuperv. Trip Circuit Super- ON OFF TRIP Circuit Supervision is
vision OFF
4002 No. of BI Trip Circuit Super- 1..2 2 Number of Binary Inputs per
vision trip circuit
4003 Alarm Delay Trip Circuit Super- 1..30 sec 2 sec Delay Time for alarm
vision
4201 Ther. OVER LOAD Thermal Overload OFF OFF Thermal overload protection
ON
Alarm Only
4202 K-FACTOR Thermal Overload 0.10..4.00 1.10 K-Factor
4203 TIME CONSTANT Thermal Overload 1.0..999.9 min 100.0 min Time Constant
4204 Θ ALARM Thermal Overload 50..100 % 90 % Thermal Alarm Stage
4205 I ALARM Thermal Overload 0.10..4.00 A 1.00 A Current Overload Alarm Set-
point
4206 CALC. METHOD Thermal Overload Theta Max Theta Max Method of Acquiring Tempera-
Average \T ture
\T @ Imax
4401 IP-A (A.x.x.x) Commissioning 0..255 141 IP-address

Tool ×××.xxx.xxx.xxx(Position 1-3)
4402 IP-B (x.B.x.x) Commissioning 0..255 142 IP-address

Tool xxx.×××.xxx.xxx(Position 4-6)
4403 IP-C (x.x.C.x) Commissioning 0..255 255 IP-address

Tool xxx.xxx.×××.xxx(Position 7-9)
4404 IP-D (x.x.x.D) Commissioning 0..255 150 IP-address

Tool xxx.xxx.xxx.×××(Pos. 10-12)
4405 NUM LOCK Commissioning YES YES Num Lock

Tool NO
4406 LCP/NCP Commissioning NO YES Front interface supports LCP/

Tool YES NCP mode
4411 IP-A (A.x.x.x) Commissioning 0..255 141 IP-address

Tool ×××.xxx.xxx.xxx(Position 1-3)
7SD52 Manual A-39

C53000–G1176–C132–2
A Appendix

4412 IP-B (x.B.x.x) Commissioning 0..255 142 IP-address
Tool xxx.×××.xxx.xxx(Position 4-6)
4413 IP-C (x.x.C.x) Commissioning 0..255 255 IP-address

Tool xxx.xxx.×××.xxx(Position 7-9)
4414 IP-D (x.x.x.D) Commissioning 0..255 160 IP-address

Tool xxx.xxx.xxx.×××(Pos. 10-12)
4415 NUM LOCK Commissioning YES YES Num Lock

Tool NO
4416 LCP/NCP Commissioning NO YES Service interface supports

Tool YES LCP/NCP mode
A-40 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
A.7 List of Information
Note:
* under the Log-Buffers means that the associated message can be configured by the user but is not
pre-configured.
F.No. Description Function Type Log-Buffers Configurable in Matrix IEC 60870-5-103

of
Ground Fault Log On/Off
Marked in Oscill. Record

Infor-
Trip (Fault) Log On/Off

ma-
General Interrogation
tion
Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
3 >Synchronize Internal Real Time Device SP * * LED BI BO
Clock (>Time Synch)
4 >Trigger Waveform Capture Oscillographic Fault SP ON * LED BI BO

(>Trig.Wave.Cap.) Records
5 >Reset LED (>Reset LED) Device SP * * LED BI BO
7 >Setting Group Select Bit 0 (>Set Change Group SP * * LED BI BO

Group Bit0)
8 >Setting Group Select Bit 1 (>Set Change Group SP * * LED BI BO

Group Bit1)
15 >Test mode (>Test mode) Device SP ON * LED BI BO 135 53 1 GI

OFF
16 >Stop data transmission (>DataStop) Device SP * * LED BI BO 135 54 1 GI
51 Device is Operational and Protecting Device OUT ON * LED BO 135 81 1 GI

(Device OK) OFF
52 At Least 1 Protection Funct. is Active Device IntSP ON * LED BO 192 18 1 GI

(ProtActive) OFF
55 Reset Device (Reset Device) Device OUT * * LED BO 192 4 1
56 Initial Start of Device (Initial Start) Device OUT ON * LED BO 192 5 1
60 Reset LED (Reset LED) Device OUT_ ON * LED BO 192 19 1

Ev
67 Resume (Resume) Device OUT ON * LED BO 135 97 1
68 Clock Synchronization Error (Clock Device OUT ON * LED BO

SyncError) OFF
69 Daylight Saving Time (DayLightSav- Device OUT ON * LED BO

Time) OFF
70 Setting calculation is running (Settings Device OUT ON * LED BO 192 22 1 GI

Calc.) OFF
71 Settings Check (Settings Check) Device OUT * * LED BO
72 Level-2 change (Level-2 change) Device OUT ON * LED BO

OFF
73 Local setting change (Local change) Device OUT * *
110 Event lost (Event Lost) Device OUT_ ON * LED BO 135 130 1
Ev
113 Flag Lost (Flag Lost) Device OUT ON * M LED BO 135 136 1 GI
7SD52 Manual A-41

C53000–G1176–C132–2
A Appendix

of

Infor-

ma-
tion
Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
125 Chatter ON (Chatter ON) Device OUT ON * LED BO 135 145 1 GI
OFF
126 Protection ON/OFF (via system port) Device IntSP ON * LED BO

(ProtON/OFF) OFF
127 Auto Reclose ON/OFF (via system Auto Reclose IntSP ON * LED BO
port) (AR ON/OFF) OFF
140 Error with a summary alarm (Error Device OUT ON * LED BO 192 47 1 GI
Sum Alarm) OFF
144 Error 5V (Error 5V) Device OUT ON * LED BO 135 164 1 GI

OFF
160 Alarm Summary Event (Alarm Sum Device OUT * * LED BO 192 46 1 GI
Event)
161 Failure: General Current Supervision Measurement OUT * * LED BO 192 32 1 GI

(Fail I Superv.) Supervision
163 Failure: Current Balance (Fail I Measurement OUT ON * LED BO 135 183 1 GI
balance) Supervision OFF
164 Failure: General Voltage Supervision Measurement OUT * * LED BO 192 33 1 GI

(Fail U Superv.) Supervision
167 Failure: Voltage Balance (Fail U Measurement OUT ON * LED BO 135 186 1 GI
balance) Supervision OFF
177 Failure: Battery empty (Fail Battery) Device OUT ON * LED BO 135 193 1 GI
OFF
181 Error: A/D converter (Error A/D-conv.) Device OUT ON * LED BO 135 178 1 GI
OFF
182 Alarm: Real Time Clock (Alarm Clock) Device OUT ON * LED BO 135 194 1 GI
OFF
183 Error Board 1 (Error Board 1) Device OUT ON * LED BO 135 171 1 GI
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
192 Error:1A/5Ajumper different from set- Device OUT ON * LED BO 135 169 1 GI
ting (Error1A/5Awrong) OFF
193 Alarm: NO calibration data available Device OUT ON * LED BO 135 181 1 GI
(Alarm NO calibr) OFF
A-42 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2

of

Infor-

ma-
tion
Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
197 Measurement Supervision is switched Measurement OUT ON * LED BO 135 197 1 GI
OFF (MeasSup OFF) Supervision OFF
203 Waveform data deleted (Wave. dele- Oscillographic Fault OUT_ ON * LED BO 135 203 1
ted) Records Ev
289 Alarm: Current summation supervision Measurement OUT ON * LED BO 135 250 1 GI
(Failure Σi) Supervision OFF
290 Alarm: Broken current-wire detected Measurement OUT ON * LED BO 135 137 1 GI
L1 (Broken Iwire L1) Supervision
295 Broken wire supervision is switched Measurement OUT ON * LED BO

OFF (Broken wire OFF) Supervision OFF
296 Current summation superv is switched Measurement OUT ON * LED BO

OFF (Σi superv. OFF) Supervision OFF
301 Power System fault (Pow.Sys.Flt.) Power System Data OUT ON ON 135 231 2 GI
2 OFF
302 Fault Event (Fault Event) Power System Data OUT * ON 135 232 2
2
351 >Circuit breaker aux. contact: Pole L1 Power System Data SP * * LED BI BO 150 1 1 GI
(>CB Aux. L1) 2
352 >Circuit breaker aux. contact: Pole L2 Power System Data SP * * LED BI BO 150 2 1 GI
(>CB Aux. L2) 2
353 >Circuit breaker aux. contact: Phase Power System Data SP * * LED BI BO 150 3 1 GI
L3 (>CB Aux. L3) 2
356 >Manual close signal (>Manual Close) Power System Data SP * * LED BI BO 150 6 1 GI
2
357 >Block all close commands from Power System Data SP ON * LED BI BO 150 7 1 GI
external (>CloseCmd.Blo) 2 OFF
361 >Failure: Feeder VT (MCB tripped) Power System Data SP ON * LED BI BO 192 38 1 GI
(>FAIL:Feeder VT) 2 OFF
366 >CB1 Pole L1 (Pos. Contact=Breaker) Power System Data SP * * LED BI BO 150 66 1 GI
(>CB1 Pole L1) 2
(>CB1 Pole L2) 2
(>CB1 Pole L3) 2
371 >Circuit Breaker 1 READY for reclo- Power System Data SP * * LED BI BO 150 71 1 GI
sing (>CB1 Ready) 2
378 >CB faulty (>CB faulty) Power System Data SP * * LED BI BO

2
379 >CB aux. contact 3pole Closed (>CB Power System Data SP * * LED BI BO 150 78 1 GI
3p Closed) 2
7SD52 Manual A-43

C53000–G1176–C132–2
A Appendix

of

Infor-

ma-
tion
Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
380 >CB aux. contact 3pole Open (>CB 3p Power System Data SP * * LED BI BO 150 79 1 GI
Open) 2
381 >Single-phase trip permitted from Power System Data SP ON * LED BI BO

ext.AR (>1p Trip Perm) 2 OFF
382 >External AR programmed for 1phase Power System Data SP ON * LED BI BO

only (>Only 1ph AR) 2 OFF
383 >Enable all AR Zones / Stages (>Ena- Power System Data SP ON ON LED BI BO
ble ARzones) 2 OFF OFF
385 >Lockout SET (>Lockout SET) Power System Data SP ON * LED BI BO 150 35 1 GI
2 OFF
386 >Lockout RESET (>Lockout RESET) Power System Data SP ON * LED BI BO 150 36 1 GI
2 OFF
410 >CB1 aux. 3p Closed (for AR, CB- Power System Data SP * * LED BI BO 150 80 1 GI
Test) (>CB1 3p Closed) 2
411 >CB1 aux. 3p Open (for AR, CB-Test) Power System Data SP * * LED BI BO 150 81 1 GI
(>CB1 3p Open) 2
501 Relay PICKUP (Relay PICKUP) Power System Data OUT * * M LED BO 192 84 2 GI
2
503 Relay PICKUP Phase L1 (Relay PIK- Power System Data OUT * * M LED BO 192 64 2 GI
KUP L1) 2
KUP L2) 2
KUP L3) 2
506 Relay PICKUP Earth (Relay PICKUP Power System Data OUT * * M LED BO 192 67 2 GI
E) 2
507 Relay TRIP command Phase L1 Power System Data OUT * * M LED BO 192 69 2
(Relay TRIP L1) 2
(Relay TRIP L2) 2
(Relay TRIP L3) 2
510 General CLOSE of relay (Relay Power System Data OUT * * LED BO
CLOSE) 2
511 Relay GENERAL TRIP command Power System Data OUT * M LED BO 192 68 2
(Relay TRIP) 2 OFF
512 Relay TRIP command - Only Phase Power System Data OUT * * LED BO
L1 (Relay TRIP 1pL1) 2
515 Relay TRIP command Phases L123 Power System Data OUT * * LED BO
(Relay TRIP 3ph.) 2
A-44 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2

of

Infor-

ma-
tion
Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
530 LOCKOUT is active (LOCKOUT) Power System Data IntSP ON * LED BO
2 OFF
533 Primary fault current IL1 (IL1 =) Power System Data OUT * ON 150 177 4
2 OFF
2 OFF
2 OFF
536 Final Trip (Final Trip) Power System Data OUT ON ON LED BO 150 180 2 GI
2
545 Time from Pickup to drop out (PU Power System Data OUT
Time) 2
546 Time from Pickup to TRIP (TRIP Power System Data OUT
Time) 2
560 Single-phase trip was coupled 3phase Power System Data OUT * ON LED BO 150 210 2
(Trip Coupled 3p) 2
561 Manual close signal detected Power System Data OUT ON * LED BO 150 211 1
(Man.Clos.Detect) 2
563 CB alarm suppressed (CB Alarm Power System Data OUT * * LED BO
Supp) 2
1000 Number of breaker TRIP commands Statistics OUT

(# TRIPs=)

L1 (TripNo L1=)

L2 (TripNo L2=)

L3 (TripNo L3=)
1027 Accumulation of interrupted current L1 Statistics OUT

(Σ IL1 =)

(Σ IL2 =)

(Σ IL3 =)
1030 Last fault current Phase L1 (Last IL1 Statistics OUT

=)

=)

=)
1401 >BF: Switch on breaker fail protection Breaker Failure SP * * LED BI BO

(>BF on)
1402 >BF: Switch off breaker fail protection Breaker Failure SP * * LED BI BO
(>BF off)
7SD52 Manual A-45

C53000–G1176–C132–2
A Appendix

of

Infor-

ma-
tion
Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
1403 >BLOCK Breaker failure (>BLOCK Breaker Failure SP ON * LED BI BO 166 103 1 GI
BkrFail) OFF
1415 >BF: External start 3pole (>BF Start Breaker Failure SP ON * LED BI BO
3pole) OFF
1432 >BF: External release (>BF release) Breaker Failure SP ON * LED BI BO

OFF
1435 >BF: External start L1 (>BF Start L1) Breaker Failure SP ON * LED BI BO
OFF
OFF
OFF
1439 >BF: External start 3pole (w/o current) Breaker Failure SP ON * LED BI BO
(>BF Start w/o I) OFF
1440 Breaker failure prot. ON/OFF via BI Breaker Failure IntSP ON * LED BO
(BkrFailON/offBI) OFF
1451 Breaker failure is switched OFF Breaker Failure OUT ON * LED BO 166 151 1 GI
(BkrFail OFF) OFF
1452 Breaker failure is BLOCKED (BkrFail Breaker Failure OUT ON ON LED BO 166 152 1 GI
BLOCK) OFF OFF
1453 Breaker failure is ACTIVE (BkrFail Breaker Failure OUT * * LED BO 166 153 1 GI
ACTIVE)
1461 Breaker failure protection started (BF Breaker Failure OUT * ON LED BO 166 161 1 GI
Start) OFF
1472 BF Trip T1 (local trip) - only phase L1 Breaker Failure OUT * ON LED BO
(BF T1-TRIP 1pL1)
(BF T1-TRIP 1pL2)
(BF T1-TRIP 1pL3)
1476 BF Trip T1 (local trip) - 3pole (BF T1- Breaker Failure OUT * ON LED BO
TRIP L123)
1493 BF Trip in case of defective CB (BF Breaker Failure OUT * ON LED BO

TRIP CBdefec)
1494 BF Trip T2 (busbar trip) (BF T2- Breaker Failure OUT * ON LED BO 192 85 2
TRIP(bus))
1495 BF Trip End fault stage (BF EndFlt Breaker Failure OUT * ON LED BO
TRIP)
1496 BF Pole discrepancy pickup (BF Breaker Failure OUT * ON LED BO

CBdiscrSTART) OFF
1497 BF Pole discrepancy pickup L1 (BF Breaker Failure OUT * ON LED BO

CBdiscr L1) OFF

CBdiscr L2) OFF
A-46 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2

of

Infor-

ma-
tion
Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
CBdiscr L3) OFF
1500 BF Pole discrepancy Trip (BF CBdiscr Breaker Failure OUT * ON LED BO
TRIP)
1503 >BLOCK Thermal Overload Protection Thermal Overload SP * * LED BI BO 167 3 1 GI

(>BLK ThOverload)
1511 Thermal Overload Protection OFF Thermal Overload OUT ON * LED BO 167 11 1 GI
(Th.Overload OFF) OFF
1512 Thermal Overload Protection BLOK- Thermal Overload OUT ON ON LED BO 167 12 1 GI
KED (Th.Overload BLK) OFF OFF
1513 Overload Protection ACTIVE (Over- Thermal Overload OUT ON * LED BO 167 13 1 GI
load ACT) OFF
1515 Overload Current Alarm (I alarm) (O/L Thermal Overload OUT ON * LED BO 167 15 1 GI
I Alarm) OFF
1516 Overload Alarm! Near Thermal Trip Thermal Overload OUT ON * LED BO 167 16 1 GI
(O/L Θ Alarm) OFF
1517 Winding Overload (Winding O/L) Thermal Overload OUT ON * LED BO 167 17 1 GI
OFF
1521 Thermal Overload TRIP (ThOverload Thermal Overload OUT * ON LED BO 167 21 2 GI
TRIP)
2054 Emergency mode (Emer. mode) Device OUT ON ON LED BO 192 37 1 GI

OFF OFF
2701 >Auto reclose ON (>AR ON) Auto Reclose SP * * LED BI BO 40 1 1 GI
2702 >Auto reclose OFF (>AR OFF) Auto Reclose SP * * LED BI BO 40 2 1 GI
2703 >BLOCK Auto reclose (>BLOCK AR) Auto Reclose SP ON * LED BI BO 40 3 1 GI

OFF
2711 >External start of internal Auto reclose Auto Reclose SP * ON LED BI BO 40 11 2 GI

(>AR Start)
2712 >AR: Ext. Trip L1 for internal AR Auto Reclose SP * ON LED BI BO 40 12 2 GI

(>Trip L1 AR)

(>Trip L2 AR)

(>Trip L3 AR)
2715 >Ext. 1pole Trip for internal Auto Recl. Auto Reclose SP * ON LED BI BO 40 15 2 GI
(>Trip 1p for AR)
2716 >Ext. 3pole Trip for internal Auto Recl. Auto Reclose SP * ON LED BI BO 40 16 2 GI
(>Trip 3p for AR)
2727 >AR: Remote Close signal (>AR Auto Reclose SP * ON LED BI BO 40 22 2 GI

RemoteClose)
2731 >AR: Synchronism from ext. sync.- Auto Reclose SP * * LED BI BO 40 31 2 GI

check (>Sync.release)
2737 >AR: Block 1pole AR-cycle (>BLOCK Auto Reclose SP ON * LED BI BO 40 32 1 GI

1pole AR) OFF
7SD52 Manual A-47

C53000–G1176–C132–2
A Appendix

of

Infor-

ma-
tion
Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
2738 >AR: Block 3pole AR-cycle (>BLOCK Auto Reclose SP ON * LED BI BO 40 33 1 GI
3pole AR) OFF
2739 >AR: Block 1phase-fault AR-cycle Auto Reclose SP ON * LED BI BO 40 34 1 GI

(>BLK 1phase AR) OFF


2742 >AR: Block 1st AR-cycle (>BLK 1.AR- Auto Reclose SP ON * LED BI BO 40 37 1 GI
cycle) OFF
2743 >AR: Block 2nd AR-cycle (>BLK 2.AR- Auto Reclose SP ON * LED BI BO 40 38 1 GI
cycle) OFF
2744 >AR: Block 3rd AR-cycle (>BLK 3.AR- Auto Reclose SP ON * LED BI BO 40 39 1 GI
cycle) OFF
2745 >AR: Block 4th and higher AR-cycles Auto Reclose SP ON * LED BI BO 40 40 1 GI
(>BLK 4.-n. AR) OFF
2746 >AR: External Trip for AR start (>Trip Auto Reclose SP * ON LED BI BO 40 41 2 GI
for AR)
2747 >AR: External pickup L1 for AR start Auto Reclose SP * ON LED BI BO 40 42 2 GI

(>Pickup L1 AR)

(>Pickup L2 AR)

(>Pickup L3 AR)
2750 >AR: External pickup 1phase for AR Auto Reclose SP * ON LED BI BO 40 45 2 GI

start (>Pickup 1ph AR)


2781 Auto recloser is switched OFF (Auto Auto Reclose OUT ON * LED BO 40 81 1 GI
recl. OFF) OFF
2782 Auto recloser is switched ON (Auto Auto Reclose IntSP * * LED BO 192 16 1 GI
recl. ON)
2783 AR: Auto-reclose is blocked (AR is Auto Reclose OUT ON * LED BO 40 83 1 GI

blocked) OFF
2784 Auto recloser is NOT ready (AR is Auto Reclose OUT * ON LED BO 192 130 1 GI
NOT ready)
2787 AR: Circuit breaker not ready (CB not Auto Reclose OUT * * LED BO 40 87 1 GI
ready)
2788 AR: CB ready monitoring window Auto Reclose OUT * ON LED BO 40 88 2 GI

expired (AR T-CBreadyExp)
2796 AR: Auto-reclose ON/OFF via BI (AR Auto Reclose IntSP * * LED BO
on/off BI)
A-48 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2

of

Infor-

ma-
tion
Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
2801 Auto-reclose in progress (AR in pro- Auto Reclose OUT * ON LED BO 40 101 2 GI
gress)
2809 AR: Start-signal monitoring time Auto Reclose OUT * ON LED BO 40 174 1 GI
expired (AR T-Start Exp)
2810 AR: Maximum dead time expired (AR Auto Reclose OUT * ON LED BO 40 175 1 GI
TdeadMax Exp)
2818 AR: Evolving fault recognition (AR Auto Reclose OUT * ON LED BO 40 118 2 GI
evolving Flt)
2820 AR is set to operate after 1p trip only Auto Reclose OUT * * LED BO 40 143 1 GI
(AR Program1pole)
2821 AR dead time after evolving fault (AR Auto Reclose OUT * ON LED BO 40 197 2 GI
Td. evol.Flt) OFF
2839 AR dead time after 1pole trip running Auto Reclose OUT * ON LED BO 40 148 2 GI
(AR Tdead 1pTrip)
2840 AR dead time after 3pole trip running Auto Reclose OUT * ON LED BO 40 149 2 GI
(AR Tdead 3pTrip)
2841 AR dead time after 1phase fault run- Auto Reclose OUT * ON LED BO 40 150 2 GI
ning (AR Tdead 1pFlt)
2844 AR 1st cycle running (AR 1stCyc. run.) Auto Reclose OUT * ON LED BO 40 155 2 GI
2845 AR 2nd cycle running (AR 2ndCyc. Auto Reclose OUT * ON LED BO 40 157 2 GI
run.)
2846 AR 3rd cycle running (AR 3rdCyc. Auto Reclose OUT * ON LED BO 40 158 2 GI
run.)
2847 AR 4th or higher cycle running (AR Auto Reclose OUT * ON LED BO 40 159 2 GI
4thCyc. run.)
2848 AR cycle is running in ADT mode (AR Auto Reclose OUT * ON LED BO 40 130 2 GI
ADT run.)
2851 Auto-reclose Close command (AR Auto Reclose OUT * ON M LED BO 192 128 1
Close)
2852 AR: Close command after 1pole 1st Auto Reclose OUT * * LED BO 40 152 1 GI
cycle (AR Close1.Cyc1p)
2853 AR: Close command after 3pole 1st Auto Reclose OUT * * LED BO 40 153 1 GI
cycle (AR Close1.Cyc3p)
2854 AR: Close command after 2nd cycle Auto Reclose OUT * * LED BO 192 129 1
(AR Close 2.Cyc)
2861 AR: Reclaim time is running (AR T- Auto Reclose OUT * * LED BO 40 161 1 GI
Recl. run.)
2862 Auto reclose cycle successful (AR Auto Reclose OUT * * LED BO 40 162 1 GI
Successful)
2863 Auto reclose Lockout (AR Lockout) Auto Reclose OUT * * LED BO 40 163 1 GI
7SD52 Manual A-49

C53000–G1176–C132–2
A Appendix

of

Infor-

ma-
tion
Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
2864 AR: 1pole trip permitted by internal AR Auto Reclose OUT * * LED BO 40 164 1 GI
(AR 1p Trip Perm)
2865 AR: Synchro-check request (AR Auto Reclose OUT * * LED BO 40 165 2 GI
Sync.Request)
2871 AR: TRIP command 3pole (AR TRIP Auto Reclose OUT * ON LED BO 40 171 2 GI
3pole)
2889 AR 1st cycle zone extension release Auto Reclose OUT * * LED BO 40 160 1 GI
(AR 1.CycZoneRel)
2890 AR 2nd cycle zone extension release Auto Reclose OUT * * LED BO 40 169 1 GI
(AR 2.CycZoneRel)
2891 AR 3rd cycle zone extension release Auto Reclose OUT * * LED BO 40 170 1 GI
(AR 3.CycZoneRel)
2892 AR 4th cycle zone extension release Auto Reclose OUT * * LED BO 40 172 1 GI
(AR 4.CycZoneRel)
2893 AR zone extension (general) (AR Auto Reclose OUT * * LED BO 40 173 1 GI
Zone Release)
2894 AR Remote close signal send (AR Auto Reclose OUT * ON LED BO 40 129 1 GI
Remote Close)
2895 No. of 1st AR-cycle CLOSE com- Statistics OUT

mands 1pole (AR #Close1./1p=)
2896 No. of 1st AR-cycle CLOSE com- Statistics OUT

mands 3pole (AR #Close1./3p=)
2897 No. of higher AR-cycle CLOSE com- Statistics OUT

mands 1p (AR #Close2./1p=)
2898 No. of higher AR-cycle CLOSE com- Statistics OUT

mands 3p (AR #Close2./3p=)
3102 Diff: 2nd Harmonic detected in phase Differential Protec- OUT * * LED BO 92 89 1 GI
L1 (2nd Harmonic L1) tion
3120 Diff: Active (Diff active) Differential Protec- OUT ON * M LED BO 92 92 1 GI

tion OFF
3132 Diff: Fault detection (Diff. Gen. Flt.) Differential Protec- OUT * ON M LED BO
tion OFF
3133 Diff: Fault detection in phase L1 (Diff. Differential Protec- OUT * ON M LED BO 92 93 2 GI
Flt. L1) tion OFF
Flt. L2) tion OFF
Flt. L3) tion OFF
3136 Diff: Earth fault detection (Diff. Flt. E) Differential Protec- OUT * ON M LED BO 92 96 2 GI
tion OFF
A-50 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2

of

Infor-

ma-
tion
Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
3137 Diff: Fault detection of I-Diff>> (I- Differential Protec- OUT * ON M LED BO 92 97 2 GI
Diff>> Flt.) tion OFF
3139 Diff: Fault detection of I-Diff> (I-Diff> Differential Protec- OUT * ON M LED BO 92 98 2 GI
Flt.) tion OFF
3141 Diff: General TRIP (Diff. Gen. TRIP) Differential Protec- OUT * ON M LED BO 92 99 2 GI
tion OFF
3142 Diff: TRIP - Only L1 (Diff TRIP 1p L1) Differential Protec- OUT * ON M LED BO 92 100 2 GI
tion OFF
tion OFF
tion OFF
3145 Diff: TRIP L123 (Diff TRIP L123) Differential Protec- OUT * ON M LED BO 92 103 2 GI
tion OFF
3146 Diff: TRIP 1pole (Diff TRIP 1pole) Differential Protec- OUT * ON LED BO
tion OFF
3147 Diff: TRIP 3pole (Diff TRIP 3pole) Differential Protec- OUT * ON LED BO
tion OFF
3148 Diff: Differential protection is blocked Differential Protec- OUT ON * LED BO 92 104 1 GI
(Diff block) tion OFF
3149 Diff: Diff. protection is switched off Differential Protec- OUT ON * LED BO 92 105 1 GI
(Diff OFF) tion OFF
3176 Diff: Fault detection L1 (only) (Diff Flt. Differential Protec- OUT * * LED BO
1p.L1) tion
3177 Diff: Fault detection L1E (Diff Flt. L1E) Differential Protec- OUT * * LED BO
tion
1p.L2) tion
tion
3180 Diff: Fault detection L12 (Diff Flt. L12) Differential Protec- OUT * * LED BO
tion
3181 Diff: Fault detection L12E (Diff Flt. Differential Protec- OUT * * LED BO
L12E) tion
1p.L3) tion
tion
tion
L31E) tion
tion
7SD52 Manual A-51

C53000–G1176–C132–2
A Appendix

of

Infor-

ma-
tion
Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
L23E) tion
3188 Diff: Fault detection L123 (Diff Flt. Differential Protec- OUT * * LED BO
L123) tion
L123E) tion
3190 Diff: Set Teststate of Diff. protection Differential Protec- IntSP ON * LED FK BO 92 106 1 GI
(Test Diff.) tion OFF
3191 Diff: Set Commissioning state of Diff. Differential Protec- IntSP ON * LED FK BO 92 107 1 GI
(Comm. Diff) tion OFF
3192 Diff: Remote relay in Teststate (Test- Differential Protec- OUT ON * LED BO 92 108 1 GI
Diff.remote) tion OFF
3193 Diff: Commissioning state is active Differential Protec- OUT ON * LED BO 92 109 1 GI
(Comm.Diff act.) tion OFF
3194 Diff: >Test Diff. (>Test Diff.) Differential Protec- SP ON * LED BI BO

tion OFF
3195 Diff: >Comm. Diff (>Comm. Diff) Differential Protec- SP ON * LED BI BO

tion OFF
3215 Incompatible Firmware Versions Protection Inter- OUT ON * LED BO

(Wrong Firmware) face (Port D+E)
3217 Prot Int 1: Own Datas received (PI1 Protection Inter- OUT ON * LED BO
Data reflec) face (Port D+E) OFF
3218 Prot Int 2: Own Datas received (PI2 Protection Inter- OUT ON * LED BO
Data reflec) face (Port D+E) OFF
3227 >Prot Int 1: Transmitter is switched off Protection Inter- SP ON * LED BI BO

(>PI1 light off) face (Port D+E) OFF
3228 >Prot Int 2: Transmitter is switched off Protection Inter- SP ON * LED BI BO

(>PI2 light off) face (Port D+E) OFF
3229 Prot Int 1: Reception of faulty data Protection Inter- OUT ON * LED BO 93 135 1 GI
(PI1 Data fault) face (Port D+E) OFF
3230 Prot Int 1: Total receiption failure (PI1 Protection Inter- OUT ON * LED BO 93 136 1 GI
Datafailure) face (Port D+E) OFF
3231 Prot Int 2: Reception of faulty data Protection Inter- OUT ON * LED BO 93 137 1 GI
(PI2 Data fault) face (Port D+E) OFF
3232 Prot Int 2: Total receiption failure (PI2 Protection Inter- OUT ON * LED BO 93 138 1 GI
Datafailure) face (Port D+E) OFF
3233 Device table has inconsistent num- Protection Inter- OUT ON * LED BO
bers (DT inconsistent) face (Port D+E) OFF
3234 Device tables are unequal (DT Protection Inter- OUT ON * LED BO
unequal) face (Port D+E) OFF
3235 Differences between common para- Protection Inter- OUT ON * LED BO

meters (Par. different) face (Port D+E) OFF
3236 Different PI for transmit and receive Protection Inter- OUT ON * LED BO
(PI1<->PI2 error) face (Port D+E) OFF
A-52 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2

of

Infor-

ma-
tion
Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
3239 Prot Int 1: Transmission delay too high Protection Inter- OUT ON * LED BO 93 139 1 GI
(PI1 TD alarm) face (Port D+E) OFF
3240 Prot Int 2: Transmission delay too high Protection Inter- OUT ON * LED BO 93 140 1 GI
(PI2 TD alarm) face (Port D+E) OFF
3243 Prot Int 1: Connected with relay ID Protection Inter- OUT ON *

(PI1 with) face (Port D+E) OFF
3244 Prot Int 2: Connected with relay ID Protection Inter- OUT ON *

(PI2 with) face (Port D+E) OFF
3245 > GPS failure from external (>GPS Protection Inter- SP ON * LED BI BO
failure) face (Port D+E) OFF
3247 GPS: local pulse loss (GPS loss) Protection Inter- OUT ON * LED BO
face (Port D+E) OFF
3248 GPS: Prot Int 1 is GPS sychronized Protection Inter- OUT ON * LED BO
(PI 1 GPS sync.) face (Port D+E) OFF
3249 GPS: Prot Int 2 is GPS sychronized Protection Inter- OUT ON * LED BO
(PI 2 GPS sync.) face (Port D+E) OFF
3250 GPS:PI1 unsym.propagation delay too Protection Inter- OUT ON * LED BO

high (PI 1 PD unsym.) face (Port D+E) OFF
3251 GPS:PI2 unsym.propagation delay too Protection Inter- OUT ON * LED BO

high (PI 2 PD unsym.) face (Port D+E) OFF
3252 > PI1 Synchronization RESET Protection Inter- SP ON * LED BI BO

(>SYNC PI1 RESET) face (Port D+E) OFF
3253 > PI2 Synchronization RESET Protection Inter- SP ON * LED BI BO

(>SYNC PI2 RESET) face (Port D+E) OFF
3451 > Logout input signal (>Logout) Differential Topo- SP ON * LED BI BO

logy OFF
3457 System operates in a closed Ringto- Differential Topo- OUT ON * LED BO 93 141 1 GI
pology (Ringtopology) logy OFF
3458 System operates in a open Chaintopo- Differential Topo- OUT ON * LED BO 93 142 1 GI
logy (Chaintopology) logy OFF
3464 Communication topology is complete Differential Topo- OUT ON * LED BO

(Topol complete) logy OFF
3475 Relay 1 in Logout state (Rel1Logout) Differential Topo- IntSP ON * LED FK BO 93 143 1 GI
logy OFF
logy OFF
logy OFF
logy OFF
logy OFF
logy OFF
7SD52 Manual A-53

C53000–G1176–C132–2
A Appendix

of

Infor-

ma-
tion
Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
3484 Local activation of Logout state Differential Topo- IntSP ON * LED FK BO 93 149 1 GI
(Logout) logy OFF
3487 Equal IDs in constellation (Equal IDs) Differential Topo- OUT ON * LED BO
logy OFF
3501 I.Trip: >Intertrip L1 signal input (>Inter- Intertrip SP ON * LED BI BO

trip L1) OFF

trip L2) OFF

trip L3) OFF
3504 I.Trip: >Intertrip 3 pole signal input Intertrip SP ON * LED BI BO

(>Intertrip 3pol) OFF
3505 I.Trip: Received at Prot.Interface 1 L1 Intertrip OUT on * LED BO

(ITrp.rec.PI1.L1) off





3511 I.Trip: Sending at Prot.Interface 1 L1 Intertrip OUT ON * LED BO

(ITrp.sen.PI1.L1) OFF





3517 I.Trip: General TRIP (ITrp. Gen. TRIP) Intertrip OUT * ON M LED BO
OFF
3518 I.Trip: TRIP - Only L1 (ITrp.TRIP 1p Intertrip OUT * ON M LED BO 93 150 2 GI

L1) OFF

L2) OFF

L3) OFF
A-54 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2

of

Infor-

ma-
tion
Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
3521 I.Trip: TRIP L123 (ITrp.TRIP L123) Intertrip OUT * ON M LED BO 93 153 2 GI
OFF
3522 I.Trip: TRIP 1pole (Diff TRIP 1pole) Intertrip OUT * ON LED BO
OFF
3523 I.Trip: TRIP 3pole (Diff TRIP 3pole) Intertrip OUT * ON LED BO
OFF
3525 >Differential protection blocking signal Differential Protec- SP ON * LED BI BO

(> Diff block) tion OFF
3526 Differential blocking received at PI1 Differential Protec- OUT ON * LED BO

(Diffblk.rec PI1) tion OFF
3527 Differential blocking received at PI2 Differential Protec- OUT ON * LED BO

(Diffblk.rec PI2) tion OFF
3528 Differential blocking sending via PI1 Differential Protec- OUT ON * LED BO
(Diffblk.sen PI1) tion OFF
3529 Differential blocking sending via PI2 Differential Protec- OUT ON * LED BO
(Diffblk.sen PI2) tion OFF
3541 >Remote Trip 1 signal input (>Remote Remote Signals SP on * LED BI BO

Trip1) off

Trip2) off

Trip3) off

Trip4) off
3545 Remote Trip 1 received (RemoteTrip1 Remote Signals OUT on * LED BO 93 154 1 GI
rec) off
rec) off
rec) off
rec) off
3549 >Remote Signal 1 input (>Rem. Signal Remote Signals SP on * LED BI BO

1) off
3550 >Remote Signal 2 input (>Rem.Signal Remote Signals SP on * LED BI BO

2) off

3) off

4) off

5) off

6) off
7SD52 Manual A-55

C53000–G1176–C132–2
A Appendix

of

Infor-

ma-
tion
Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
7) off

8) off

9) off
3558 >Remote Signal 10 input Remote Signals SP on * LED BI BO

(>Rem.Signal10) off

(>Rem.Signal11) off

(>Rem.Signal12) off

(>Rem.Signal13) off

(>Rem.Signal14) off

(>Rem.Signal15) off

(>Rem.Signal16) off

(>Rem.Signal17) off

(>Rem.Signal18) off

(>Rem.Signal19) off

(>Rem.Signal20) off

(>Rem.Signal21) off

(>Rem.Signal22) off

(>Rem.Signal23) off

(>Rem.Signal24) off
3573 Remote signal 1 received (Rem.Sig Remote Signals OUT on * LED BO 93 158 1 GI
1recv) off
2recv) off
3recv) off
4recv) off
A-56 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2

of

Infor-

ma-
tion
Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
5recv) off
6recv) off
7recv) off
8recv) off
9recv) off
3582 Remote signal 10 received Remote Signals OUT on * LED BO 93 167 1 GI

(Rem.Sig10recv) off

(Rem.Sig11recv) off

(Rem.Sig12recv) off

(Rem.Sig13recv) off

(Rem.Sig14recv) off

(Rem.Sig15recv) off

(Rem.Sig16recv) off

(Rem.Sig17recv) off

(Rem.Sig18recv) off

(Rem.Sig19recv) off

(Rem.Sig20recv) off

(Rem.Sig21recv) off

(Rem.Sig22recv) off

(Rem.Sig23recv) off

(Rem.Sig24recv) off
4253 >BLOCK Instantaneous SOTF Over- Instantaneous SP * * LED BI BO

current (>BLOCK SOTF-O/C) HighSpeed SOTF
Overcurrent
7SD52 Manual A-57

C53000–G1176–C132–2
A Appendix

of

Infor-

ma-
tion
Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
4271 SOTF-O/C is switched OFF (SOTF-O/ Instantaneous OUT ON * LED BO 25 71 1 GI
C OFF) HighSpeed SOTF OFF
Overcurrent
4272 SOTF-O/C is BLOCKED (SOTF-O/C Instantaneous OUT ON ON LED BO 25 72 1 GI

BLOCK) HighSpeed SOTF OFF OFF
Overcurrent
4273 SOTF-O/C is ACTIVE (SOTF-O/C Instantaneous OUT * * LED BO 25 73 1 GI

ACTIVE) HighSpeed SOTF
Overcurrent
4281 SOTF-O/C PICKED UP (SOTF-O/C Instantaneous OUT * M LED BO 25 81 2 GI

PICKUP) HighSpeed SOTF OFF
Overcurrent
4282 SOTF-O/C Pickup L1 (SOF O/ Instantaneous OUT * ON LED BO 25 82 2 GI

CpickupL1) HighSpeed SOTF
Overcurrent

Overcurrent

Overcurrent
4285 High Speed-O/C Pickup I>>>> L1 Instantaneous OUT * ON LED BO 25 85 2 GI

(I>>>>O/C p.upL1) HighSpeed SOTF
Overcurrent

Overcurrent

Overcurrent
4289 High Speed/SOTF-O/C TRIP - Only Instantaneous OUT * ON LED BO 25 89 2 GI

L1 (HS/SOF TRIP1pL1) HighSpeed SOTF
Overcurrent

Overcurrent

Overcurrent
4292 High Speed/SOTF-O/C TRIP 1pole Instantaneous OUT * ON LED BO 25 94 2

(HS/SOF TRIP 1p) HighSpeed SOTF
Overcurrent
4293 High Speed/SOTF-O/C General TRIP Instantaneous OUT * ON LED BO

(HS/SOF Gen.TRIP) HighSpeed SOTF
Overcurrent
4294 High Speed/SOTF-O/C TRIP 3pole Instantaneous OUT * ON LED BO

(HS/SOF TRIP 3p) HighSpeed SOTF
Overcurrent
A-58 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2

of

Infor-

ma-
tion
Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
4295 High Speed/SOTF-O/C TRIP com- Instantaneous OUT * ON LED BO 25 95 2 GI
mand L123 (HS/SOF TRIPL123) HighSpeed SOTF
Overcurrent
4403 >BLOCK Direct Local Trip function DTT Direct Local SP * * LED BI BO
(>BLOCK DTT) Trip
4412 >Direct Local Trip INPUT Phase L1 DTT Direct Local SP ON * LED BI BO
(>DTT Trip L1) Trip OFF
4417 >Direct Local Trip INPUT 3ph L123 DTT Direct Local SP ON * LED BI BO
4421 Direct Local Trip is switched OFF DTT Direct Local OUT ON * LED BO 51 21 1 GI
(DTT OFF) Trip OFF
4422 Direct Local Trip is BLOCKED (DTT DTT Direct Local OUT ON ON LED BO 51 22 1 GI
BLOCK) Trip OFF OFF
4432 DTT TRIP command - Only L1 (DTT DTT Direct Local OUT * ON LED BO 51 32 2
TRIP 1p. L1) Trip
TRIP 1p. L2) Trip
TRIP 1p. L3) Trip
4435 DTT TRIP command L123 (DTT TRIP DTT Direct Local OUT * ON LED BO 51 35 2
L123) Trip
6854 >Trip circuit superv. 1: Trip Relay Trip Circuit Supervi- SP ON * LED BI BO
(>TripC1 TripRel) sion OFF
6855 >Trip circuit superv. 1: Breaker Relay Trip Circuit Supervi- SP ON * LED BI BO
(>TripC1 Bkr.Rel) sion OFF
6861 Trip circuit supervision OFF (TripC Trip Circuit Supervi- OUT ON * LED BO 170 53 1 GI
OFF) sion OFF
6865 Failure Trip Circuit (FAIL: Trip cir.) Trip Circuit Supervi- OUT ON * LED BO 170 55 1 GI
sion OFF
6866 TripC1 blocked: Binary input is not set Trip Circuit Supervi- OUT ON * LED BO
(TripC1 ProgFAIL) sion OFF
7SD52 Manual A-59

C53000–G1176–C132–2
A Appendix

of

Infor-

ma-
tion
Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
7104 >BLOCK Backup OverCurrent I>> Backup overcurrent SP ON * LED BI BO 64 4 1 GI

(>BLOCK O/C I>>) OFF
7105 >BLOCK Backup OverCurrent I> Backup overcurrent SP ON * LED BI BO 64 5 1 GI

(>BLOCK O/C I>) OFF
7106 >BLOCK Backup OverCurrent Ip Backup overcurrent SP ON * LED BI BO 64 6 1 GI

(>BLOCK O/C Ip) OFF
7107 >BLOCK Backup OverCurrent Ie>> Backup overcurrent SP ON * LED BI BO 64 7 1 GI

(>BLOCK O/C Ie>>) OFF
7108 >BLOCK Backup OverCurrent Ie> Backup overcurrent SP ON * LED BI BO 64 8 1 GI

(>BLOCK O/C Ie>) OFF
7109 >BLOCK Backup OverCurrent Iep Backup overcurrent SP ON * LED BI BO 64 9 1 GI

(>BLOCK O/C Iep) OFF
7110 >Backup OverCurrent Instantane- Backup overcurrent SP ON ON LED BI BO 64 10 1 GI

ousTrip (>O/C InstTRIP) OFF OFF
7130 >BLOCK I-STUB (>BLOCK I-STUB) Backup overcurrent SP ON * LED BI BO 64 30 1 GI

OFF
7131 >Enable I-STUB-Bus function (>I- Backup overcurrent SP ON ON LED BI BO 64 31 1 GI

STUB ENABLE) OFF OFF
7132 >BLOCK Backup OverCurrent Ie>>> Backup overcurrent SP ON * LED BI BO 64 32 1 GI

(>BLOCK O/CIe>>>) OFF
7151 Backup O/C is switched OFF (O/C Backup overcurrent OUT ON * LED BO 64 51 1 GI
OFF) OFF
7152 Backup O/C is BLOCKED (O/C Backup overcurrent OUT ON ON LED BO 64 52 1 GI

BLOCK) OFF OFF
7153 Backup O/C is ACTIVE (O/C ACTIVE) Backup overcurrent OUT * * LED BO 64 53 1 GI
7161 Backup O/C PICKED UP (O/C PIK- Backup overcurrent OUT * M LED BO 64 61 2 GI
KUP) OFF
7162 Backup O/C PICKUP L1 (O/C Pickup Backup overcurrent OUT * ON LED BO 64 62 2 GI
L1)
L2)
L3)
7165 Backup O/C PICKUP EARTH (O/C Backup overcurrent OUT * ON LED BO 64 65 2 GI
Pickup E)
7191 Backup O/C Pickup I>> (O/C PICKUP Backup overcurrent OUT * ON M LED BO 64 91 2 GI
I>>)
7192 Backup O/C Pickup I> (O/C PICKUP Backup overcurrent OUT * ON M LED BO 64 92 2 GI
I>)
7193 Backup O/C Pickup Ip (O/C PICKUP Backup overcurrent OUT * ON M LED BO 64 93 2 GI
Ip)
A-60 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2

of

Infor-

ma-
tion
Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
7201 O/C I-STUB Pickup (I-STUB PICKUP) Backup overcurrent OUT * ON M LED BO 64 101 2 GI
OFF
7211 Backup O/C General TRIP command Backup overcurrent OUT * * LED BO 64 111 2
(O/C TRIP)
7212 Backup O/C TRIP - Only L1 (O/C Backup overcurrent OUT * ON LED BO 64 112 2
TRIP 1p.L1)
TRIP 1p.L2)
TRIP 1p.L3)
7215 Backup O/C TRIP Phases L123 (O/C Backup overcurrent OUT * ON LED BO 64 115 2
TRIP L123)
7221 Backup O/C TRIP I>> (O/C TRIP I>>) Backup overcurrent OUT * ON LED BO 64 121 2
7222 Backup O/C TRIP I> (O/C TRIP I>) Backup overcurrent OUT * ON LED BO 64 122 2
7223 Backup O/C TRIP Ip (O/C TRIP Ip) Backup overcurrent OUT * ON LED BO 64 123 2
7235 O/C I-STUB TRIP (I-STUB TRIP) Backup overcurrent OUT * ON LED BO 64 135 2
7325 CB1-TEST TRIP command - Only L1 Testing OUT ON * LED BO 153 25 2 GI

(CB1-TESTtrip L1) OFF


7328 CB1-TEST TRIP command L123 Testing OUT ON * LED BO 153 28 2 GI

(CB1-TESTtrip123) OFF
7329 CB1-TEST CLOSE command (CB1- Testing OUT ON * LED BO 153 29 2 GI

TEST close) OFF
7345 CB-TEST is in progress (CB-TEST Testing OUT ON * LED BO 153 45 2 GI

running) OFF
7346 CB-TEST canceled due to Power Sys. Testing OUT_ ON *

Fault (CB-TSTstop FLT.) Ev
7347 CB-TEST canceled due to CB already Testing OUT_ ON *

OPEN (CB-TSTstop OPEN) Ev
7348 CB-TEST canceled due to CB was Testing OUT_ ON *

NOT READY (CB-TSTstop NOTr) Ev
7349 CB-TEST canceled due to CB stayed Testing OUT_ ON *

CLOSED (CB-TSTstop CLOS) Ev
7350 CB-TEST was succesful (CB-TST Testing OUT_ ON *

.OK.) Ev
>Back Light on (>Light on) Device SP ON * BI

OFF
CB1-TEST trip/close Phases L123 Testing - *

(CB1tst 123)
7SD52 Manual A-61

C53000–G1176–C132–2
A Appendix

of

Infor-

ma-
tion
Event Log On/Off
Data Unit (ASDU)

Chatter Blocking
Information-No
Binary Output
Function Key
Binary Input
Type
LED
CB1-TEST trip/close - Only L1 (CB1tst Testing - *
L1)

L2)

L3)
Clock Synchronization (SynchClock) Device IntSP_ * * LED BO

Ev
Control Authority (Cntrl Auth) Control Authoriza- IntDP ON * LED 101 85 1 GI

tion OFF
Controlmode LOCAL (ModeLOCAL) Control Authoriza- IntDP ON * LED 101 86 1 GI

tion OFF
Controlmode REMOTE (ModeRE- Control Authoriza- IntDP ON * LED

MOTE) tion OFF
Fault Recording Start (FltRecSta) Oscillographic Fault IntSP ON * LED BO

Records OFF
Group A (Group A) Change Group IntSP ON * LED BO 192 23 1 GI

OFF
Group B (Group B) Change Group IntSP ON * LED BO 192 24 1 GI

OFF
Group C (Group C) Change Group IntSP ON * LED BO 192 25 1 GI

OFF
Group D (Group D) Change Group IntSP ON * LED BO 192 26 1 GI

OFF
Hardware Test Mode (HWTestMod) Device IntSP ON * LED BO

OFF
Stop data transmission (DataStop) Device IntSP ON * LED BO 192 20 1 GI

OFF
Test mode (Test mode) Device IntSP ON * LED BO 192 21 1 GI

OFF
Unlock data transmission via BI Device IntSP

(UnlockDT)
A-62 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
A.8 Measured Values
A.8 Measured Values
F.No. Description Function IEC 60870-5-103 Configurable in

Matrix
Data Unit (ASDU)
Control Display
Default Display
Information-No
Function type
Compatibility
Position
CFC
601 I L1 (IL1 =) Measurement 192 148 comp 9 1 CFC
134 129 priv 9 1
134 129 priv 9 2
134 129 priv 9 3
610 3I0 (zero sequence) (3I0 =) Measurement CFC
619 I1 (positive sequence) (I1 =) Measurement CFC
620 I2 (negative sequence) (I2 =) Measurement CFC
621 U L1-E (UL1E=) Measurement 192 148 comp 9 4 CFC
134 129 priv 9 4
134 129 priv 9 5
134 129 priv 9 6
624 U L12 (UL12=) Measurement 134 129 priv 9 10 CFC
631 3U0 (zero sequence) (3U0 =) Measurement CFC
634 U1 (positive sequence) (U1 =) Measurement CFC
635 U2 (negative sequence) (U2 =) Measurement CFC
641 P (active power) (P =) Measurement 192 148 comp 9 7 CFC
134 129 priv 9 7
642 Q (reactive power) (Q =) Measurement 192 148 comp 9 8 CFC
134 129 priv 9 8
643 Power Factor (PF =) Measurement CFC
644 Frequency (Freq=) Measurement 192 148 comp 9 9 CFC
134 129 priv 9 9
645 S (apparent power) (S =) Measurement CFC
801 Temperat. rise for warning and trip (Θ /Θtrip =) Measurement CFC
802 Temperature rise for phase L1 (Θ /ΘtripL1=) Measurement CFC
7SD52 Manual A-63

C53000–G1176–C132–2
A Appendix

Matrix
Data Unit (ASDU)
Control Display
Default Display
Information-No
Function type
Compatibility
Position
CFC
7731 PHI IL1L2 (local) (Φ IL1L2=) Measurement CFC
7734 PHI UL1L2 (local) (Φ UL1L2=) Measurement CFC
7737 PHI UIL1 (local) (Φ UIL1=) Measurement CFC
7742 IDiffL1(% Operational nominal current) (IDiffL1=) Differential and 134 122 priv 9 1 CFC
Restraint Current
Restraint Current
Restraint Current
7745 IRestL1(% Operational nominal current) (IRestL1=) Differential and 134 122 priv 9 4 CFC
Restraint Current
Restraint Current
Restraint Current
7748 Diff3I0 (Differential current 3I0) (Diff3I0=) Differential and CFC

Restraint Current
7751 Prot.Interface 1:Transmission delay (PI1 TD) Statistics 134 122 priv 9 7 CFC
7752 Prot.Interface 2:Transmission delay (PI2 TD) Statistics 134 122 priv 9 9 CFC
7753 Prot.Interface 1: Availability per min. (PI1A/m) Statistics CFC
7754 Prot.Interface 1: Availability per hour (PI1A/h) Statistics 134 121 priv 9 3 CFC
134 122 priv 9 8
7755 Prot.Interface 2: Availability per min. (PI2A/m) Statistics CFC
7756 Prot.Interface 2: Availability per hour (PI2A/h) Statistics 134 121 priv 9 6 CFC
134 122 priv 9 10
7761 Relay ID of 1. relay (Relay ID) Measurements CFC

from relay 1
7762 IL1(% of Operational nominal current) (IL1_opN=) Measurements CFC

from relay 1
7763 Angle IL1_rem <-> IL1_loc (ΦI L1=) Measurements CFC

from relay 1
A-64 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
A.8 Measured Values

Matrix
Data Unit (ASDU)
Control Display
Default Display
Information-No
Function type
Compatibility
Position
CFC
from relay 1

from relay 1

from relay 1

from relay 1
7769 UL1(% of Operational nominal voltage) (UL1_opN=) Measurements CFC

from relay 1
7770 Angle UL1_rem <-> UL1_loc (ΦU L1=) Measurements CFC

from relay 1

from relay 1

from relay 1

from relay 1

from relay 1

from relay 2

from relay 2

from relay 2

from relay 2

from relay 2

from relay 2

from relay 2

from relay 2

from relay 2

from relay 2

from relay 2

from relay 2

from relay 2
7SD52 Manual A-65

C53000–G1176–C132–2
A Appendix

Matrix
Data Unit (ASDU)
Control Display
Default Display
Information-No
Function type
Compatibility
Position
CFC
from relay 3

from relay 3

from relay 3

from relay 3

from relay 3

from relay 3

from relay 3

from relay 3

from relay 3

from relay 3

from relay 3

from relay 3

from relay 3

from relay 4

from relay 4

from relay 4

from relay 4

from relay 4

from relay 4

from relay 4

from relay 4

from relay 4

from relay 4
A-66 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
A.8 Measured Values

Matrix
Data Unit (ASDU)
Control Display
Default Display
Information-No
Function type
Compatibility
Position
CFC
from relay 4

from relay 4

from relay 4

from relay 5

from relay 5

from relay 5

from relay 5

from relay 5

from relay 5

from relay 5

from relay 5

from relay 5

from relay 5

from relay 5

from relay 5

from relay 5

from relay 6

from relay 6

from relay 6

from relay 6

from relay 6

from relay 6

from relay 6
7SD52 Manual A-67

C53000–G1176–C132–2
A Appendix

Matrix
Data Unit (ASDU)
Control Display
Default Display
Information-No
Function type
Compatibility
Position
CFC
from relay 6

from relay 6

from relay 6

from relay 6

from relay 6

from relay 6
7875 Prot.Interface 1:Transmission delay rec. (PI1 TD R) Statistics 134 121 priv 9 1 CFC
7876 Prot.Interface 1:Transmission delay send (PI1 TD S) Statistics 134 121 priv 9 2 CFC
7877 Prot.Interface 2:Transmission delay rec. (PI2 TD R) Statistics 134 121 priv 9 4 CFC
7878 Prot.Interface 2:Transmission delay send (PI2 TD S) Statistics 134 121 priv 9 5 CFC
A-68 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Index
Index
A Check
Binary inputs and outputs 8-32
Accessories A-4 Communication topology 8-35
Accuracy limit factor 6-10 Current transformer connections 8-45
Acknowledgement of commands 6-173 Differential protection communication 8-26
Action times (of AR) 6-80 Hardware 8-10
Adaptive dead time (AR) 6-87 Optical fibres 8-26
Alternating voltage (power supply) 10-3 Ordering number 3-3
Ambient temperatures 10-9 Power plant connections 8-27
AR = automatic reclosure 6-79 System (SCADA) interface 8-30
Automatic reclosure 1-10, 5-4, 6-79, 10-21 Time synchronization 8-30
Auxiliary contacts of the CB 6-60, 6-83, 6-108, 6- Voltage transformer connections 8-43
110, 6-118, 6-119, 6-133, 6-144, 6-153 Circuit breaker auxiliary contacts 6-60, 6-83, 6-108,
Availability of transmission (differential protection) 6-110, 6-118, 6-119, 6-133, 6-144, 6-153
6-160, 7-11, 10-27 Circuit breaker failure protection 1-10, 6-108, 10-22
Circuit breaker position 6-143
Circuit breaker status 6-17
B Circuit breaker switch-in recognition 6-142
Circuit breaker test 6-9, 6-152, 7-40, 8-53
Back-up overcurrent protection 6-64 Climatic tests 10-9
Battery 9-5, 10-27, A-5 Close command transmission 6-88
Binary inputs 1-3, 10-3 Command acknowledgement 6-173
Binary inputs as sources 5-22 Command processing 6-168
Binary outputs 1-3, 10-4 Command sequence 6-169
Binary outputs as destination 5-24 Command types 6-168
Binary outputs for switching devices 5-24 Commissioning mode 7-37
Block data transmission 7-35, 8-30 Commissioning tools 6-155
Breaker failure protection 1-10, 6-108, 10-22 Common phase initiation (breaker failure) 6-111
Broken-wire monitoring 6-132 Communication
Buffer battery 9-5, 10-27, A-5 Differential protection 6-42
SCADA 1-6, 4-3
Communication converter A-4
C Communication interfaces 10-4
Communication topology (differential protection) 6-
CFC 4-24, 5-31, A-5 42, 8-35
CFC as destination 5-27 Configuration
CFC as source 5-24 Commands 5-7
Changeover of setting groups 7-32, 8-6 Indication buffer as destination 5-27
Charge comparison 6-30 Information 5-7
Measured values 5-7
Operator interface 5-41
Performing configuration 5-22
Scope of functions 5-2
Serial interfaces 5-40
Serial port on PC 5-40
Service interface 5-41
Configuration sheet (CFC) 5-33
Confirmation of setting values 6-3, 6-6
7SD52 Manual Index-lxix

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Index
Connecting function modules (CFC) 5-34 Display equipment position 7-45

Connection examples A-20 Double point indication 5-16
Consistency check (CFC) 5-35
Construction 10-10
Contact chatter suppression 5-19, 5-29
E
Control 7-45
Device functions 7-28 Electrical interfaces 2-16, 2-23
During Operation 7-1 Electrical tests 10-7
Messages 7-55 EMC tests 10-7, 10-8
Switchgear 7-44 Emergency overcurrent protection 6-64
Control and numeric keys 1-4 End fault protection 6-117, 6-121, 10-22
Control commands 5-8 Evaluation of measured values 6-29
Copying setting groups 6-13 Event log 7-5
Copyright ii Evolving faults (AR) 6-86
Corrective action 9-10 Exiting setting mode 6-4, 6-6
Cubicle mounting 2-2, 8-4 External auto-reclosure device 6-88
Current balance supervision 6-131 External local trip 1-9, 10-13
Current comparison 6-23
Current connections 6-8, 8-6, A-20
Current flow monitoring (breaker failure) 6-109
Current grading 6-61, 6-70
F
Current transformers Fast charge comparison 6-30
Characteristics 6-9 Fault detection
Connection examples A-20 entire device 6-146
Errors 6-9, 6-26 Fault messages 7-7
Polarity setting 6-7 Fault recording 4-4, 6-161, 7-25, 10-27
Rated value setting 6-7 Fault tracing 9-8
Requirements 10-2 Flush mounting 2-2, 8-2
Forced three-pole trip 6-97
Four-line display 4-5
D Front elements 1-4
Function control 6-142
Data failure (differential protection) 6-46 Function key as source 5-23
Data fault (differential protection) 6-46 Function modules (CFC) 5-32
Date and time 5-44, 7-28 Fuse 9-11
Dead line check (AR) 6-86
Dead time (AR) 6-79
Default display 7-14
Definite-time overcurrent protection 6-64
G
Deleting groups 5-22 General diagrams A-6
Deleting information 5-22 General interrogation 7-10
Destination (of information) 5-15 General pickup 6-146
Differential protection 1-9, 6-23, 10-11 General protection data 6-15
Differential protection topology 6-42, 10-15 GPS–synchronization 1-8, 6-27, 6-46, 6-47, 6-48
Differential protection values 6-159 Graphical analysis program SIGRA A-5
DIGSI REMOTE 4 A-5 Group alarms 6-137
DIGSI® 4 A-5
Dimensions 10-28
Direct local trip 6-54, 10-13
Direct transfer trip 6-56 H
Direct voltage (power supply) 10-2 Hardware monitoring 6-129
Disassembling the device 8-11, 9-10 High-speed SOTF protection 1-10, 6-60, 10-21
Display contrast 3-6 Humidity 10-9
Index-lxx 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Index
I Monitoring functions 1-11

Mounting brackets 8-4, A-5
IBS-tool 6-155, 7-19, 8-40 Multiple auto-reclosure 6-85
Indication buffer as destination 5-27
Information 5-14
Information properties 5-15
Initialize device 9-8 N
Input indication 5-7 No trip no flag 6-152
Inrush restraint 6-28 Numerical values 6-3, 6-5
Insulation tests 10-7
Interface cable A-5
Interface modules 9-7, A-4
Interlocking 6-170, 7-51 O
Internal single point indication 5-16 Operating interface 1-4, 10-4
Interrogation of circuit-breaker ready (AR) 6-82 Operating messages 7-5
Intertrip 6-38, 10-13 Operating software DIGSI A-5
Inverse-time overcurrent protection 6-64 Operational accuracy limit factor 6-10
Optical interfaces 2-14, 2-20
ST-connectors 2-14
J Ordering code A-2
Ordering information A-2
Jumpers on printed circuit boards 8-14 Ordering number 3-4, A-2
Oscillographic fault records 4-4, 6-161, 7-25
Output indication 5-7, 5-15
L Overcurrent protection 1-9, 6-64, 10-16
Overload protection 1-10, 6-125, 10-23
LCD 1-4 Own information 5-20
LED 1-4
LED as destination 5-26
Light-emitting diodes 7-2
Local trip 6-54, 10-13 P
Lock-out 6-149 Panel flush mounting 2-2, 8-2
Log out device 7-37 Panel surface mounting 2-17, 8-5
Passwords 4-33
Phase segregated initiation (breaker failure) 6-112
M Pickup
Differential protection 6-32
Maintenance 9-5 Entire device 6-146
Manual overwriting 7-48 Time overcurrent protection 6-69
Measured value synchronization (differential protec- Pickup characteristic (differential protection) 6-30
tion) 6-25 Plug-in connectors A-5
Measured value window as destination 5-27 Plug-in terminals 2-10
Measured values 7-14, 10-26 Polarity of current transformers 6-7
Differential protection 7-15, 7-22 Pole discrepancy supervision 6-118, 6-122, 10-22
Graphs 7-19 Power supply 1-4, 10-2
Local 7-15, 7-19 Power supply fuse 9-11
Remote 6-160, 7-16, 7-20 Power system data 1 6-7
Measured voltages 1-3 Power system data 2 6-15
Measurement during operation 6-158 Power transformer with voltage regulation 6-11
Mechanical tests 10-8 Power transformer within the protected zone 6-11,
Messages 7-2 6-16, 6-28, 6-160
Metered value window as destination 5-27 Preset configurations A-24
Monitor operation 9-8 Processing of commands 6-168
7SD52 Manual Index-lxxi

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Index
Processing of messages 6-157 SCADA interface 1-4, 10-5

Protection data interface 1-4, 6-42, 10-15 Scope of functions 5-2
Self-restraint 6-26, 6-27
Serial interfaces 1-4, 5-40
Service conditions 10-10
R
Service interface 1-4, 10-4
Rack mounting 2-2, 8-4 Set status 7-49
Rated quantities of current transformers 6-7 Setting groups
Rated value settings Changeover 7-32, 8-6
Current transformers 6-7 Copying 6-13
Frequency 6-9 Definition 6-13
Power transformers 6-16 Setting user defined set-points 7-22
Protected lines 6-15 Setting values
Voltage transformers 6-7 Confirmation 6-3
Read-out Numerical 6-3, 6-5
Measured values 7-14 Text 6-3, 6-5
Messages 7-2 Shock and vibration 10-8
Switching statistics 7-11 Short circuit links A-4
Reassembling the device 8-23, 9-12 Signal idle state 5-42
Reboot of processor system 9-3 SIGRA 4 A-5
Reclaim time (of AR) 6-82 Singe point indication 5-16
Reclosure interlocking 6-149 Single and three-pole auto-reclosure 6-85
Reducing the configuration matrix 5-12 Single-pole auto-reclosure 6-84
Remote closing 6-88 Single-pole tripping 6-147
Remote measured values 6-160, 7-16, 7-20 Single-pole tripping after two-phase fault 6-148
Remote tripping 1-9, 6-38, 6-56, 6-117, 10-13 Single-stage breaker failure protection 6-120
Repairs 9-10 Software monitoring 6-131
Replacing Source (of information) 5-14
Buffer battery 9-5 Spontaneous messages 7-7, 7-11
Interface modules 9-7 Stabilization cf. Restraint 6-26
Power supply fuse 9-11 Standard interlocking 6-171
Reset of processor system 9-3 Start of auto-reclosure 6-80
Resetting and setting switching statistics 7-13 Statistics 6-152, 6-160, 7-11, 10-27
Restoration (of metering values) 5-28 Storage 3-12
Restoring factory settings 6-14 Stub protection 6-67, 10-17
Restraint Surface mounting 2-17, 8-5
Differential protection 6-26 Switch-in recognition 6-142
Inrush 6-28 Switching authority 7-53
Retrieval Switching interlock 6-170
Device configurations 5-27 Switching mode 7-54
Device data 9-9 Switching statistics 7-11
Interface settings 5-42 Switch-on-to-fault protection 1-10, 6-60
Ordering number 3-4 System (SCADA) interface 7-4
User defined set-points 7-22 System interface 1-4, 10-5
Return (of the device) 9-14
Routine checks 9-3
Run-time properties (CFC) 5-31 T
Tagging 7-52
Terminal block covering caps A-4
S
Termination RS 485 8-25
Saving and erasing messages 7-9 Test mode 7-37
Saving fault records 7-27 Test operation 7-35, 8-30
Index-lxxii 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Index
Text values 6-3, 6-5 U

Thermal differential equation 6-125
Thermal overload protection 1-10, 6-125, 10-23 User defined
Thermal time constant 6-125 Functions (CFC) 1-10, 5-31
Three-pole auto-reclosure 6-84 Information = Own information 5-20
Three-pole coupling 6-18 Limit values 5-19
Three-pole intertrip 6-97 Measured values 5-19
Three-pole tripping 6-147 Pulse metered values 7-24
TICKS (CFC) 5-35 Set-points 7-22
Time overcurrent protection 1-9, 6-64, 10-16
Time synchronization 1-4, 5-44, 8-25, 10-6
Timing master 5-44 V
Transferring metering values 5-28
Transmission of binary information 6-56, 10-14 Vibration and shock 10-8
Transmission of measured values (differential pro- Viewing
tection) 6-24 Fault records 7-25
Triggering oscillographic recordings 8-54 Voltage balance supervision 6-132
Trip characteristic Voltage connections 6-8, 8-6, A-22
Differential protection 6-30 Voltage regulation (power transformer) 6-11
Inverse time overcurrent protection 10-18 Voltage transformer m.c.b. A-4
Trip circuit supervision 6-133, 8-7 Voltage transformers 5-5
Trip command duration 6-9, 6-149 Connection examples A-22
Trip log 7-7 Rated value setting 6-7
Tripping logic Voltages 1-3
Differential protection 6-32
Entire device 6-147
Time overcurrent protection 6-69 W
Two-stage breaker failure protection 6-119
Types of commands 6-168 Watchdog 6-131
Weak infeed 1-9
7SD52 Manual Index-lxxiii

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Index
Index-lxxiv 7SD52 Manual

C53000–G1176–C132–2
Corrections
To From
Siemens AG Name:
Dept. PTD PA D DM
D–13623 Berlin Company/Dept.:
Germany
Address:
Dear reader,
printing errors can never be entirely eliminated:
therefore, should you come across any when read- Phone no.: Fax no.:
ing this manual, kindly enter them in this form to-
gether with any comments or suggestions for im-
provement that you may have.
Corrections/Suggestions
7SD52 Manual
C53000–G1176–C132–2
Copying of this document and giving it to others and the use
or communication of the contents thereof, are forbidden with-
out express authority. Offenders are liable to the payment of
damages. All rights are reserved in the event of the grant of
Subject to technical alteration a patent or the registration of a utility model or design.
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Order-no.: C53000–G1176–C132–2

Available from: LZF Fürth-Bislohe
Printed in Germany/Imprimé en Allemagne
AG 0302 0.2 FO 554 En

7SD52 en PDF

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

7SD52 en PDF

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Preface i

Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Buch-Nr. C53000–G1176–C132–2

Earth fault device-internal logical input signal

Earth fault device-internal logical output signal

UL1–L2 internal input signal of an analogue quantity

1234 FUNCTION example of a parameter switch designated FUNCTION with the

Input signal of an analogue quantity

7SD52 Manual iii

& AND gate

Exclusive–OR gate (antivalence): output is active, if only one

Coincidence gate (equivalence): output is active, if both input are

≥1 Dynamic inputs (edge–triggered)

Formation of one analogue output signal from

T Dynamic triggered pulse timer T (monoflop)

S Q Static memory (RS–flipflop) with setting input (S),

Table of Contents ................................................................................................................................ v

1.1 Overall Operation ................................................................................................................ 1-2

1.2 Applications ......................................................................................................................... 1-5

1.3 Features .............................................................................................................................. 1-8

1.4 Scope of Functions.............................................................................................................. 1-9

2 Hardware and Connections ............................................................................................................. 2-1

2.2 Version of 7SD52 for Panel Surface Mounting.................................................................. 2-17

3 Getting Started.................................................................................................................................. 3-1

3.1 Unpacking and Re-packing ................................................................................................. 3-2

3.2 Inspections upon Receipt .................................................................................................... 3-3

3.3 User Interface ...................................................................................................................... 3-4

3.4 Storage .............................................................................................................................. 3-12

4 SIPROTEC® 4 Devices....................................................................................................................... 4-1

4.1 General ................................................................................................................................ 4-2

4.2 Operator Control Facilities ................................................................................................... 4-5

4.3 Information Retrieval............................................................................................................ 4-8

4.4 Control ............................................................................................................................... 4-14

4.5 Manual Overwrite / Tagging............................................................................................... 4-16

4.6 General about the Setting Procedures .............................................................................. 4-17

4.7 Configuration of the Scope of Device Functions................................................................ 4-20

4.8 Configuration of Inputs and Outputs (Configuration Matrix) .............................................. 4-21

4.9 Programmable Logic CFC ................................................................................................. 4-24

4.10 Power System Data ........................................................................................................... 4-26

4.11 Setting Groups................................................................................................................... 4-27

4.12 General Device Settings .................................................................................................... 4-29

4.13 Time Synchronization ........................................................................................................ 4-30

4.14 Serial Interfaces................................................................................................................. 4-31

4.15 Passwords ......................................................................................................................... 4-33

5 Configuration .................................................................................................................................... 5-1

5.1 Configuration of the Scope of Functions.............................................................................. 5-2

5.2 Configuration of Information, Measured Values, and Commands....................................... 5-7

5.3 Creating User Defined Functions with CFC....................................................................... 5-31

5.4 Serial Interfaces ................................................................................................................ 5-40

5.5 Date and Time Stamping................................................................................................... 5-44

6.1 General................................................................................................................................ 6-2

6.2 Differential Protection ........................................................................................................ 6-23

6.3 Breaker Intertrip and Remote Tripping .............................................................................. 6-38

6.4 Protection Data Interfaces and Differential Protection Topology....................................... 6-42

7SD52 Manual vii

6.5 Direct Local Trip................................................................................................................. 6-54

6.6 Direct Remote Trip and Transmission of Binary Information

6.7 Instantaneous High-Current Switch-onto-Fault Protection ................................................ 6-60

6.8 Time Overcurrent Protection.............................................................................................. 6-64

6.9 Automatic Reclosure.......................................................................................................... 6-79

6.10 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection.................................................................................... 6-108

6.11 Thermal Overload Protection........................................................................................... 6-125

viii 7SD52 Manual

6.12 Monitoring functions ........................................................................................................ 6-129